JP7350444B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, slot machines, etc., where a bonus game, an ART (assist replay time) game, and an AT (assist time) game are executed, in which, if you win an internal lottery, you can win more game media than in the normal gaming state. A reel-type gaming machine is known. Furthermore, many drum-type gaming machines have been proposed that use a display device to perform effects while a game is being played or when a game is not being played. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-142346

However, there is room for improvement in this type of performance, and there are quite a few players who are looking for a performance with even more ingenuity.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved performance.

A lottery means for determining whether it is a hit or not;
A symbol variation means that selects one of the plurality of variation times and performs the symbol variation for the selected variation time;
A performance display means capable of displaying any one of the plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
The above performance includes
a confirmed performance that can appear only if the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit;
There is at least an expectation performance that makes people expect that the result of the lottery is a win, and that can appear even if the result of the lottery is a win or a loss,
A gaming machine that displays a decorative pattern indicating the result of the lottery, and a normal background that is displayed behind the decorative pattern and also displayed when the decorative pattern is determined in a losing variation, on the effect display means,
When the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, after a situation in which the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect changes to a situation in which the normal background is displayed. a first situation that makes it possible to execute the expected performance;
When the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, after a situation in which the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect changes to a situation in which the normal background is displayed. A second situation in which the expected performance is not executed at all is made possible to occur,
Even if the second situation occurs while the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, the selected variation time will not be shortened ,
When the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, the second situation is enabled to occur after the first situation occurs;
Unlike the confirmed performance and the expected performance, it is possible to display a situational suggestion display indicating the current gaming state,
In the second situation, the situation suggestion display, which is not displayed when the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect, is displayed in a situation where the new expected effect is not executed at all. possible,
displaying the situation suggestion display after displaying the pattern combination of the decorative patterns indicating the result of the lottery in the second situation;
enabling a presentation mode of a game following the game in which the second situation has occurred to be a presentation mode different from a presentation mode of the game in which the second situation has occurred;
The second situation is designed to only occur in certain reach effects,
There is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means, the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to display the situation suggestion display that is displayed in a situation where the expected performance is not displayed and the new expected performance is not executed at all.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved performance.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of an arithmetic circuit within the main control MPU. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a serial communication circuit. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory ratio calculation and display processing. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation/display process of FIG. 24. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure showing the composition of an accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of data input to the driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. It is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a load register selection table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation/display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the structure of data stored in a base calculation area. It is a front view showing another example of a game board. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 3; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display processing. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 3; 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base display processing. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of an ejection bulb sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a main control input circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 98 is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. 97; FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 102 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process shown in FIG. 101. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing. 106 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of base calculation processing. It is a diagram showing calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recorded in a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine having a setting section seen from behind with the door open. 131 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 when viewed from behind with the door closed. 131 is a diagram showing a setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section seen from the back. 136 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG. 135, seen from behind. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. 144(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). 144(A) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). 144(A) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 151(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in FIG. 151(B). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of security signals. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of setting confirmation processing. This is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. This is an example of a final reserved color table. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 3 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern of setting 5 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. This is an example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a setting suggestion presentation table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance. (A) is an example of a performance restriction table in the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of a performance restriction table when an error occurs. This is an example of a new starting winning performance restriction table. This is an example of processing table 1. This is an example of processing table 2. This is an example of the processing table 3. This is an example of the processing table 4. This is an example of the processing table 5. This is an example of the processing table 6. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 7 is a flowchart of performance display processing of another example 1. 7 is a diagram showing a notification mode of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing notification priorities of another example 1; 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality initialization processing according to another example 1; 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of setting processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting display processing in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing according to another example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2 of another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of switch input processing 1 of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level/edge data area of another example 1. be. FIG. 199(A) is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199(B) is a diagram showing another example of the configuration of the switch input level/edge data area of other example 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing in another example 1. FIG. FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the setting state management area of the other example 1. FIG. 202(A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1. FIG. 202(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202(D) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting value command of another example 1. 7 is a diagram illustrating a command transmission order in another example 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing state transitions of a setting state management area in another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. 12 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the jackpot determination threshold value table of another example 1. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting value confirmation processing in another example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is a flowchart of processing at the time of abnormality of RAM outside the game area of another example 2. 11 is a flowchart of an outside-of-use area RWM initialization process in another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of power-on setting processing according to another example 2. FIG. FIG. 220(A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area in another example 2, and FIG. 220(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command in another example 2. 220(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of power OFF processing according to another example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of setting processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of setting display processing in another example 2. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of power-on processing according to another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in another example 3. It is a flowchart of timer interruption processing for normal games of another example 3. 12 is a flowchart of main control side main processing in another example 4. 12 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in another example 4. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and the presentation unit of the table unit of the game board as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is displayed in a light-emitting manner in the display unit. FIG. 7 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is displayed in a light-emitting manner in the display unit. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by a light guide plate is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by a light guide plate is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically is displayed by a light guide plate. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light-guide plate. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a connection between a serial/parallel conversion circuit and an LED. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of connection of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of connection of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of a main control MPU and peripheral components on a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the timing of data output and capture using a synchronous serial signal. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. It is a block diagram showing the connection of the power supply system around the performance drive board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing connections of signals around the handle unit. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the branch circuit provided in a relay board. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of storage areas provided by ROM, RAM, etc., and the ROM area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a parameter information setting area of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset start-up processing that is executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of periodic processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal N output processing. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of a dish base unit in a dish unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a top view of the production operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation button unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit seen from the front from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring seen from the bottom and front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the bottom front. (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. It is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit as seen from the lower front. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a performance operation ring and a rotational drive unit in a left side view of the performance operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the press operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a central press operation section of the press operation section. It is a front view of the dish unit when pressed. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a state with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front and above. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 379 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 379(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a front component, a game panel, a front unit, etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 386 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 385, viewed from the right front. FIG. 386 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 385, viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit, etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 385 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 385. FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the back, and (c) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the back. It is a left side view of a starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening when it is in the open state. It is an enlarged front view showing parts of a starting port unit and a side unit in the game board. (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of game balls in the first attacker unit in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit. It is a perspective view seen from behind. It is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section. FIG. 393 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part of the gaming area is enlarged. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. (a) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable structure of the rear effect unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back and rear effect unit. It is a front view showing a rear movable decorative body together with a rear decorative board. (a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 420, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 420. (a) is a perspective view of the back movable decoration seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back movable decoration seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from behind. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back movable ornament. FIG. 425 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in broken lines in the front view of FIG. 425; (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), and (c ) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in the same part as the decorative body in (a). FIG. 421(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 421(a); FIG. 428 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 428; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decoration body and the decoration sheet, the light guide radiation plate, and the rear decoration board by enlarging a part of the front side of the rear movable decoration body. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in a section of the first LED, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative board at the part of the first LED, and (b) is an explanatory diagram where the second LED is located on the optical axis of the first LED. It is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate in the part where the light guide radiation plate is located, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the effect of the light guide radiation plate in the second decorative part of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and the LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate and the first LED of the rear decorative board. It is an explanatory view showing an example of arrangement from the front. FIG. 2 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. (a) is a front view of the back decorative board, and (b) is a rear view of the back decorative board. (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part of a different form from that in (a). FIG. 3(c) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part having a different form from that in (a) and (b). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section the configuration of a rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the rear movable decorative body of FIG. FIG. 12(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the rear movable decoration body of the fourth embodiment in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable structure of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center lifting mechanism of the back lower center production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center lifting mechanism of the back lower center production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center decoration body unit of the back lower center presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center decoration unit of the back lower center presentation unit as seen from behind. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising and lowering of the back lower center decoration unit by the back lower center lifting mechanism in the back lower center production unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back bottom center rotating decoration of the back bottom center decoration unit in the back bottom center decoration unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the stop position of the back bottom center rotating decoration. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the detection sensor and each detection sensor in a table. It is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of LEDs of the back lower middle decoration unit in the back lower middle production unit from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back effect unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back raising/lowering decoration unit in the back upper production unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear ascending and descending decorative body unit in the rear unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotating decorative body in the back upper presentation unit from the front. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the back rising/falling decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the back rising/lowering decoration with the back rising/lowering decoration unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the lifting mechanism of the body unit and the rotating mechanism of the back up-and-back rotating decorative body from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a decoration board from the front in a state where a back raising/lowering decoration body unit has been moved to an appearance position in a back upper presentation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left decoration body unit of the rear rear left production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear left production unit from the front. It is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back rear left decoration body unit in the back rear left production unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear right presentation unit, as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear rear right production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear right production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the back right decoration unit in the back back right production unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left presentation unit as seen from behind. (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in an open state. (a) is a perspective view of the back front right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit as seen from behind. (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right production unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back lower middle rotation decorative body of the back lower middle production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Move the back up/back rotation decoration of the back up/back presentation unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, move the back rear left rotation decoration of the back rear left presentation unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and move the back of the back rear right presentation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing the rear clockwise rotating ornaments moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. A state in which the rear left rotating decoration of the rear rear left production unit has been moved from the retreat position to the second appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation decoration of the rear rear right production unit has been moved from the retreat position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left presentation unit and the shutter unit of the back front right presentation unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. Move the rear movable decoration of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, move the rear up and rear rotating decoration of the rear upper and rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, rear left rotation decoration of the rear rear left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the rear right rotation decoration of the back rear right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the rear lower middle rotation decoration of the rear lower middle production unit raised from the lowered position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which it has been moved to its respective position. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with a self-supporting member. (a) is a flowchart showing the procedure for main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing the procedure for interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for a preliminary determination process executed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing regarding winnings, (B) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types, and (C) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types. This is a small winning symbol determination table used in the lottery process for . It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot control process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for gate passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a normal pattern winning determination table used in the lottery process for general pattern winnings, and (B) is a general pattern opening pattern table used for determining the general pattern winning pattern. be. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal symbol variation pattern determination processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric accessory opening process performed by the main control MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure for sub-main processing executed by a peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16mS steady processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production control processing performed by peripheral control MPU. (A) is an example of a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a jackpot distribution table. It is a transition diagram showing an example of game state transition of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush chance effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rush chance effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during the small hit rush. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during the small hit rush. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during a highly accurate time saving and no jackpot. This is an example of a timetable on a demo screen. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transition of volume adjustment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rise performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing another example of upstart production. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing at which promotion performance is performed in upstart performance. (A) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot while there is no reservation and no variation is being executed. (B) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot without reservation and during variation execution. (C) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot with one reservation. (D) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot with two reservations. (E) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot with three reservations. This is an example of a pending color determination table during fluctuation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reservation notice performance based on a change in reservation color. (A) is a gacha coin reservation determination table that is used when a game ball enters the starting slot while there is no reservation and no variation is being executed. (B) is a gacha coin reservation determination table that is used when a game ball enters the starting slot without reservation and during fluctuation execution. (C) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot with one reservation. (D) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot with two reservations. (E) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when a game ball enters the starting slot with three reservations. This is an example of a gacha coin reservation color correspondence table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gacha coin reservation notice effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reach collapse pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach symbol promotion performance. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance on the Sugoroku stage. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance on the Sugoroku stage. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a super pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a super pine zone effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a hold peek effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a rocket effect. In the rocket performance, it is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the schedule of the dynamic performance of character A and fuel after the start of the still image performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of battle performance. It is an explanatory view showing another example of battle performance. It is an explanatory view showing another example of battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of reel performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of reel performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bee extermination performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bee extermination performance. It is an explanatory view showing another example of bee extermination performance. It is an explanatory view showing another example of bee extermination performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls. It is an explanatory view showing another example of reach production in which Daruma-san falls. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the notification process selection reach effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the notification process selection reach effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the notification process selection reach effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pending gathering performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a pending gathering performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of divided reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of divided reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of cut selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of cut selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of cut selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of cut selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of cut selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reach change production. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reach change production. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reach change production. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of sound presence/absence pending change effect. This is an example of a final pending color distribution table used when a sound presence/absence pending change performance is performed in a deviation variation. This is an example of a final pending color distribution table used when a sound presence/absence pending variation performance is performed in a jackpot variation. This is an example of a pending color distribution table at the start of variation. This is an example of a pending change timing table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process performed when the sound presence/absence pending change effect executable timing arrives. It is an explanatory view showing an example of hold & zone change production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of hold & zone change production. This is an example of a chance time frequency table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a light effect in front of the wind. This is an example of a light hold change table in front of the wind. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a blackout effect. This is an example of a blackout time table. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which a door-shaped front member is omitted. 594 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion of FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion in FIG. 593 showing a state in which the connector holder has been moved; FIG. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted. (a) is an enlarged view of the Z2 section of FIG. 596, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 section of FIG. 596 showing a state in which the connector holder has been moved. FIG. 597(a) is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 597(a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is a perspective view of a case member seen from behind. (a), (b) is a perspective view of the main part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the wiring relay member with the cover body omitted. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the connector holder. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of essential parts showing the guide structure of the case member. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of essential parts showing the guide structure of the case member. FIG. 7 is a partial perspective view of the symbol variation display device showing another form of the handle. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of essential parts showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer body side. It is a sectional view of the main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display device. FIG. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. It is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal discharging device omitted. 616 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 615. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the slot machine as seen from the back side of the heat dissipation port. FIG. 2 is a partial front view, partially in section, of the slot machine showing the power supply device. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the power supply device looking up from below. It is a sectional view of the main parts of the side plate of the outer body and the power supply device, showing another form. It is a schematic sectional view of a lighting device showing other forms. It is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing a transparent plate and a light emitting unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member with the transparent plate exploded. FIG. 622 is a sectional view taken along the line A-A of FIG. 622 of a door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. FIG. 3 is an exploded and assembled perspective view of the hinge fitting. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main parts of the door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the connector cut in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part of a door-shaped front member showing another example of a hinge fitting. 632 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main parts of the door-shaped front member of FIG. 631 showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening; FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the image display body and the frame member are opened in the model unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the connectors are connected. It is a development view in which the pattern rows of the reel band are developed in a plane. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the symbol display window in the slot machine viewed from the front. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, and operating members installed in a slot machine. This is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 1 is set. This is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 2 is set. This is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 3 is set. This is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 4 is set. This is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 5 is set. This is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when the setting is 6. It is a flowchart showing a basic processing procedure for one game in a slot machine. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure of startup processing. It is an example of a block diagram showing transition of RT state. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a rough processing flow of instruction function processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing related to generation of an instruction function. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in a hell state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing in advantageous state A. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of advantageous state B processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in advantageous state C. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in advantageous state D; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in advantageous state E. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing in a pullback state. This is an example of a lottery table used for the additional lottery. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games when the ART is in a low probability state. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games when the ART is in a medium-high probability state. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games in the specialized zone. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games during special zone preparation. This is an example of a table used in the ART first winning lottery when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply" or "normal maintenance reply". (a) This is an example of a table used in the additional lottery when the hand selected in the internal lottery is either "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep" or "Normal Maintenance Rep"; (b) ) This is an example of a table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games. This is an example of an ART initial winning lottery table in an advantageous state D during the game number management process. This is an example of a lottery table that transitions to a lottery state during ART. This is an example of a specialized zone lottery table. This is an example of an ART initial winning lottery table in a pullback state. This is an example of a production operation lottery table when winning an internal lottery in RT1. This is an example of a production activation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT2. This is an example of a production operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT3. This is another example of the production operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an instruction function display. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an instruction function display. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a bonus game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of bonus game end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of ART game determination processing. It is a time chart showing an example of the overall flow of the game. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining data blocks of a RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an error display using a special display LED. 3 is a flowchart for explaining processing when an error occurs. 3 is a flowchart for explaining processing when an error occurs. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure for power failure recovery processing. This is an example of an effect image related to a lottery for determining the top-up game and a lottery for determining the number of top-up games. This is an example of a small role lottery table. This is an example of an AT first winning lottery table. This is an example of an omen game number lottery table. This is an example of an AT stock lottery table. This is an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table. This is an example of an AT initial game number lottery table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop type of various bells. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of flag processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during AT precursor. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in a state where AT is stocked. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of relief state processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after all reels stop. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen performance. This is an example of a small role lottery table. This is an example of an AT first winning lottery table. This is an example of a CZ transition lottery table. This is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table that is referred to at the start of each game in CZ. This is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table that is referred to during a pseudo game in CZ. This is an example of an AT additional lottery table. This is an example of an AT additional game number lottery table. This is an example of a specialized zone transition lottery table. This is an example of a red 7 stop pattern table. This is an example of a symbol arrangement on each reel in a slot machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an image of reels in CZ. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during CZ. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during CZ. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during CZ. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during CZ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the amount of operation of the starting lever during a pseudo-game of the CZ game and the visual recognition state of the symbols on the lower row of the right reel hidden by a transparent liquid crystal. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of flag processing. , is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed when all reels are stopped (third stop). 645 is a flowchart illustrating an example of flag processing in step S107 in FIG. 645 when the CZ flag is on. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the first pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the second pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the third pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ. It is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the third stop of the main game of the game in which the pseudo game is executed. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance (eye-pressing practice performance) during CZ. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo game executed during a normal game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance in a special specialization zone. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of CZ production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of CZ production. This is an example of an AT lottery table showing the lottery value of an AT lottery that is executed when Red 7 is made to stop in the middle row at each pseudo-stop of CZ2. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance of CZ2. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the performance of CZ2. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance of CZ2. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a slot machine equipped with a seesaw accessory. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a slot machine (excluding the outer main body) equipped with a seesaw accessory. It is a front view showing an outline of a seesaw accessory. This is an example of a small role lottery table. This is an example of a seesaw game performance entry lottery table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game performance performed during a normal game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of seesaw game effect (failure) performed during a normal game. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game performance (success) performed during a normal game. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a seesaw game performance (success) performed during a normal game. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a practice presentation of an additional chance in a seesaw game presentation. It is an explanatory view showing another example of an additional chance performance (two-choice performance of fate) in a seesaw game performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of seesaw game performance performed during AT. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of seesaw game performance performed during AT. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of seesaw game performance performed during AT. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of seesaw game performance performed during AT. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of seesaw game performance performed during AT. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a sudden seesaw game performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing another example when seesaw game production fails. It is an explanatory view showing another example of an additional chance performed in a seesaw game performance. It is an explanatory view showing another example of seesaw game production performed during AT. It is an explanatory view showing another example of seesaw game production performed during AT.

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, game board 5, main body frame 4, and outer frame 2, as seen from the front, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 as seen from behind.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 which has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and is attached to the lower front side of the door frame base unit 100 to play the game. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the right front side of the door frame base unit 100, and the game balls attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200 and stored in the upper tray 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a tray unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and is used to catch game balls that fail to hit into the game area. a foul cover unit 520 that discharges game balls to the lower tray 202 of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feeding unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that feeds game balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680; It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a ball launcher 680 are attached to the right side of the body frame base when viewed from the front. , a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L that is attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and that pays out game balls to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side is provided.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 is provided that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by an effect display device. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Moreover, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the performance display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without providing a separate display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the accessory ratio is always displayed on any of the performance display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the player can be informed of the accessory ratio and the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be explained later, the prize ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls won by the number of balls won by the total number of balls won.For example, a pachinko machine with a high percentage of prize balls (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls due to jackpots. I can say that I am doing well because I have been able to do so. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has fewer jackpot games and fewer prize balls during jackpots, so it can be said that the machine is not performing well. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play by considering the value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode of notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, if the role ratio is 70% or more, the value will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in red, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the value will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in green. do. It is preferable to display the numerical value of the accessory ratio in such a manner that it cannot be mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it is not changing, or the size of the number indicating the proportion of the accessory may be made smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be changed depending on the numerical value of the accessory ratio, and the player may be notified of the accessory ratio. For example, if the proportion of the accessory is 70% or more, the decorative pattern will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will light red or blink, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the decorative pattern will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit green. Or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Moreover, it may be displayed on the effect display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or it may be displayed not only with the proportion of the accessory but also with other information. Other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive jackpots), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Moreover, not only the accessory ratio, but also the continuous accessory ratio, base value, etc., which will be described later, may be displayed in a changed manner as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a sealed transparent resin main control board box 1320 that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and is arranged on a printed circuit board. The finished parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, if the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen from the back side of Machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio display 1317 to make the gambling quality of the pachinko machine 1 appear low, and to ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is accurate. Can display gambling nature.

In addition, if the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 transparent, pachinko The accessory ratio display 1317 may be made visible from the back side of the machine 1.

Furthermore, even when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be made flat or the back cover 980 can be made thin. The ratio display 1317 may be made easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

A discharge port is provided at the bottom of the back of the pachinko machine 1 to collect game balls flowing out from the gaming area 5a via the out port 1111, winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharge them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Note that the game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharged ball sensor 3060 that detects game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio. The display switch 1318 is preferably installed near the accessory ratio display 1317, but it does not have to be installed on the main control unit 1300, but can be placed on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) as long as it is in a place where it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, a power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and allows the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 to be guided by the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full ball path unit 850, and the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 that is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801; A normal guide path that guides the released game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and a normal guide path that guides the game balls released from the full tank discharge port forward and guides them from the front end of the door frame 3 to the through ball passage 526. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path leading to the full bulb receptacle 530 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a bass speaker that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and houses a power supply board therein; An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls inside. A payout control board unit 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player; a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 that is equipped with ), and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 with game balls stored in the upper tray 201, the ball launcher 680 fires the game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in a winning hole (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. . Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of the game ball, the game ball in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of this embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. The main control unit 1300 has a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, and a performance display device 1600 is installed on the front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls flow (Fig. 16).

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a back box 3010 that is arranged at a predetermined position within the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning hole sensors 3015 that detect game balls accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a locking mechanism that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and allows the production display device 1600 to be detachably attached. 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and for discharging game balls received in the general prize opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500; A lower right ball passage unit 3035 is installed near the front end of the lower right corner of the box 3010 when viewed from the front, and is used to discharge game balls received into the second grand prize opening 2006 or the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and an upper relay board cover 3041 that is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042, a performance drive board 3043 housed in the performance drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a panel relay board 3044. and a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the board.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

A shot ball sensor 1020 is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007) to detect game balls hit into the game area 5a. For example, the firing ball sensor 1020 is configured with a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and entered the game area 5a. Note that the firing ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the ball launch sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be made common among multiple models, and inspections at the manufacturing site and after installation in the hall become easier.

Further, the firing ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the gaming area 5a near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects an out ball before the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting prize balls caused by game balls that are not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an outlet 1111 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 in a detachable manner from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided to the rear side outlet 1111 by the out guide part 1003, and are discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and two LEDs based on the normal lottery results drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display device that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbols related to the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003. Among them, there is a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met, and a display for receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting winnings). After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by (occurrence), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result. Among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of game balls into the first special symbol display device and the first starting port 2002, the number of pending variables is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met. A first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs is displayed, and eight LEDs are blinked based on the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting winnings). A second special symbol display device that variably displays the second special symbol by controlling and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result, and acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special reservation number display device consisting of two LEDs that displays a reservation number, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition for the fluctuation display has not yet been met among the fluctuation displays of the second special symbol, and a first special symbol. A round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 when the lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly has the following. Note that some of the displays (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Performance display device]
Next, the effect display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. This effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This effect display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 that protrudes outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. It is equipped with. This effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, attaches the back box to two fixing grooves 3010c that are open on the left inner peripheral surface of the back box 3010, which will be described later, in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting part when viewed from the front. Insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and move the locking mechanism 3020 downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it.

[2-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and its rear end passes through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The game machine is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning holes 2001 described above, the general winning hole 2001 located near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front is placed directly above the second starting hole 2004. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged above the first big prize opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting mouth 2002 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second big prize opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 includes a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged along one channel through which game balls flow. It is made up of. As for the second big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the gaming area 5a, and the second bottom big winning hole 2006b is located in the front view of the second big winning hole 2006a. It is located at the bottom on the left side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained. The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left and right direction, directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a flat unit base 2101 having a first prize opening 2005 attached to the front surface of a panel board 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending left and right and penetrating back and forth, and a first winning opening 2005 in the unit base 2101. Above the big prize opening 2005, a ball receiving part 2102 protrudes forward from the upper part approximately in the center in the left-right direction and forms the first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding part 2103 that guides the game balls received in the first starting port 2002 downward; a first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding part 2103 and detects the gaming balls received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with approximately the same size as the first big winning opening 2005. a box-shaped unit case 2111, and a horizontally long rectangular flat plate-shaped first grand prize opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first grand prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and drives the opening/closing of the first big winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and is accepted into the first big winning opening 2005. A first big prize opening sensor 2114 that detects game balls that have been played, a first starting opening sensor 2104 that is attached to the top surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, a first big winning opening sensor 2114, and a main control board 1310. A starting port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with the starting port unit, and a starting port unit decorative board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and that decorates the first grand prize port 2005 with light emission. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward and is large enough to receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating through the unit base 2101 opens toward the front and has a size that can accept a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6 balls) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the unit base by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be passed through the first attacker unit 2110 and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is installed. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity due to insertion of an unauthorized tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big winning port door member 2112 of the first attacking unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the opening 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. This first big winning opening door member 2112 is in an upright state that closes the first big winning opening 2005, and both left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is the front and By rotating it so as to move it downward, the first big prize opening 2005 can be brought into an open state from a closed state.

The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is de-energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. In other words, the first big winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so that it becomes higher toward the front from the lower side of the first big winning opening 2005.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big winning hole 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning hole door member 2112, the direction of flow of the game ball is changed from below due to the inclination of the first big winning hole door member 2112. It changes backward, is accepted into the first big prize opening 2005, and enters into the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various performance devices during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display device 1600 and an upper plate performance display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes an effect display control section 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and input/output devices (I/O devices). A main control I/O port 1314 as a /O device), a main control input circuit 1315 into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control It is equipped with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a second starting port 2004. 2551, general winning hole sensor 3015 that detects the game ball accepted into the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003, detects the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 A first large winning hole sensor 2114 to detect the game ball accepted into the second upper large winning hole 2006a and second lower large winning hole 2006b as the second large winning hole 2006, and a second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, Detection signals from the second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, the ejected ball sensor 3060, the fired ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, etc. are sent via the main control I/O port 1314, respectively. is input.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs control signals from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, thereby controlling the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, second special symbol display, and first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I/O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole sensor 2104, the second starting hole sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole For the sensor 2557, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas for the general winning opening sensor 3015, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and also frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened (or enlarged) and the game balls are frequently thrown. In order to enter the ball, detection of the game ball by the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015.

The main control MPU 1311 also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of game effects executed by the effect display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. The information may be transmitted to the control unit 1511. Note that, upon receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from a power board in the power board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1311 to store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

An accessory ratio display 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a display switch 1318. The display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may also be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, a unique It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

CPU13111 executes a program stored in ROM1313. RAM 1312 stores data required when executing a program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides random numbers for determining the lottery results of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the presentation contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are used in the lottery for winning special symbols, the lottery for winning symbols in the special symbol variation display game, and the lottery for winning normal symbols.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port into which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payout of game balls to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to a vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. The external bus interface 13117 can input and output I/O requests (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit addresses (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7).

The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock for the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the frequency of the input clock signal by a set number and outputs it to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written into the chip when it is manufactured.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated run prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an unspecified address in the ROM 1313, the undesignated run prohibition circuit estimates that the access is by an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer period has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 using a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function for the arithmetic results without depending on a program, and includes a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product using a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in a multiplication input register A131212 and a multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 obtains the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result to the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisor, dividend) into quotient and remainder using functions and outputs the results.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in a division input register A131216, and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in a division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored values at a predetermined timing and calculates the quotient that is the result of dividing the dividend by the divisor. The result is stored in the division result register A131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Furthermore, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start command is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not need to be erased at the read timing. Furthermore, even if values are already stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 (without clearing the stored values), the values may be overwritten.

The CPU 13111 obtains the division results from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 After the values are stored in registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and remainder can be obtained by referring to division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, division processing is necessary to calculate the base value, and the division processing performed by the CPU 13111 by executing the program is performed by multiple multiplications and subtractions, so it takes a considerable amount of time. Such is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process every time the timer interrupt process is performed, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see Figures 75 and 80). . Furthermore, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the operation result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmitting and receiving circuits, and each data transmitting and receiving circuit transmits and receives data for one channel to and from a predetermined device. Note that in FIG. 20, only the data transmitting circuit is illustrated, and a description of the data receiving circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio. Three channels are used, channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured with a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

Command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to confirm the transmission status.

Communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores baud rate settings for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

These settings will be explained in detail below. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether to use parity, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 are in FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1×××1010B, which means even parity. In channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B, which means parity is not used, are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Furthermore, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data outside the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio display 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise than communication with other boards via communication wires. Furthermore, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. Note that along the pattern for transmitting signals between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, along the left and right and/or thickness directions of signal lines provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board) A ground pattern is provided in the layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), and the shielding effect of the ground pattern can reduce noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, if the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

Note that the relevant bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if no data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the relevant bit of the status register is not set, it means that there is no empty space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. It may be determined that data is not transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

Baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 Channel 2 used for communication with is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the gaming balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment where it is easily affected by noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that data for controlling the ball hitting, which is directly related to the profit given to the player, is reliably transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has no relation to ball launch. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command request retransmission. If the retransmitted command is determined to be normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, data can be transmitted at a high rate in communication with the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player will be able to recognize the delay from the winning of the starting slot to the start of fluctuation of the symbols, which may reduce interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. In addition, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). You may adopt a rate between . If the data transmission rate is increased, switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 may cause other circuits to malfunction. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data will be retransmitted every timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display contents of the accessory ratio display 1317 This is because the transmission rate returns to normal, so there is no need to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to check the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC Flag indicating completion of transmission; 0 indicates transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), this is a flag indicating that the transmission data is empty; 0 indicates that the data has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data register 3142 is in a state where no transmission data is stored.

In the SnTFTL FIFO mode, this flag indicates the transmit FIFO trigger level; 0 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level, and 1 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data currently being sent is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, during communication in FIFO mode, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 after confirming that the bit is 1.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed at 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This is a bit for clearing the transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written externally. For example, to forcibly clear the contents of the buffer, set the relevant bit to 1. More specifically, this is used when a command has been written to the FIFO, but due to some circumstances (for example, an abnormality has occurred), transmission of the written command is canceled. Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for start-stop synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be provided separately.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating the data capture timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. The payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a shootout solenoid 682 that controls shooting, and a ball feed solenoid 551 that controls the ball feed, although detailed illustrations are omitted. A firing control section 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases the error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball ejecting switch for ejecting game balls in the dispensing device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball ejecting operation.

[3-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 951 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustrations are omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing control I/O port, etc. Detection signals from a detection sensor 842 and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the ball outage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit, and are input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. Ru.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Among the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 are output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Note that the signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED indicator is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and If the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically, the shuttlecock is Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is notified that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout blade, and the number "3" is displayed. When there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842), the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error". ” (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number “7” is displayed. When it is, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that the game balls are "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. be done. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to display the remaining balance on the display. entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 has a firing control input into which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. a circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse. A firing solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and is output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 500, there is a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launching of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which a game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a firing reference pulse and inputs a driving current for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a with a firing strength commensurate with the rotational position of the handle lever 504, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507. When this occurs, an output is sent to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received into the sending unit 540 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball is sent to the ball firing device 680 side. In this way, the drive current outputted from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current outputted from the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

Note that the power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the payout control MPU to store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. It includes an effect display control section 1512 that controls the drawing of the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The sound source IC includes a sound source IC that performs this, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the provided color LEDs, etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the performance drive board 3043, Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided in Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as the vibration device 242 provided on the frame 3 and the door lower right drive motor 272, and the collar provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side driving light emission data consisting of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side. control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the upper plate effect display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various performance units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via a performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the production operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the production button press sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and controls the production display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal. Monitoring operations.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music in accordance with various performances from speakers 921 installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects, etc. are played. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used in conjunction with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking command, game board side lighting and blinking command, movable body drive command, and display command are output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

This performance drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or outputs a received game board side lighting/blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on this is output to the LEDs of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the performance drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. or output to .

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 60. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands related to control of game production and pachinko etc. are output from the main control board 1310. It becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and are stored in the peripheral control RAM as current calendar information in the calendar information storage section. and set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal that is executed in response to input of a V blank signal that indicates that screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 220. Based on the acquired various information, whether or not the operation button 220C is operated is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is to be reflected in the game performance.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with a built-in sound source in the display data creation process to be described later. Output to the decorative board 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation processing described later to the speaker 921, and also outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation processing described later. Sound data such as sounds and notification sounds are output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data to output to the VDP with a built-in sound source, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, Update pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission mode, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data is to be used as the light emission mode of various LEDs. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound data that instructs the sound data such as music, sound effects, etc., and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the command data is to be output to the VDP with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the production control program analyzes the information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command (receiving means) analyzes the various commands received (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands that are classified into predetermined notification displays, the production control program also issues various abnormal notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Or extract it from the peripheral control RAM and set it in the peripheral control RAM. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the production control program analyzes the commands analyzed in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) as various commands categorized as status displays, e.g. In the case of an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (performance device), the door frame side A visual warning is given to the outside using a decorative board 233 (presentation device) and a lamp (presentation device), and an audible warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which was acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the calendar information stored in the time information storage unit. Update the time information. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hours, minutes, and seconds, which are the time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and the calendar information, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, is updated based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Peripheral control controls game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emitting data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the section 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is generated. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with a built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and sends it to the game board side decorative board 3053. And one screen worth of drawing data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to a first backup area and a second backup area, respectively. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 in step S1008, the steps from step S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal is input from the VDP with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 60 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 60. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the number of 1ms timer interrupt execution times STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointers are selected from among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and peripheral control RAM. According to the drive data instructed by the controller, various motors, solenoids, and other electrical drive sources are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, Update pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. The original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side presentation receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Once it has been determined, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup second area. 1 area and a backup 2nd area and back them up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with built-in sound source are mounted. Even in manufacturing lots of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Performance display control section]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the top plate effect display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a display device as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the effect display device 1600 and the top plate effect display device 244, and the effect display device 1600. , an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the effect display device 1600, sub It controls the drawing of the effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM contains various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511. A plurality of pieces of corresponding schedule data, its control data (display commands), corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the top effect display device 244. ing. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data transfers screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, sub-effect display device 3114, and top effect display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which the files are transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays the effect display device 1600, sub effect display device 3114, and top plate effect. Drawing data to be displayed on the display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the top plate effect display device 244. In addition, when the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, or the top effect display device 244 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. . Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600, sub effect display device 3114, and upper plate effect display device 244 is held in a line buffer. This method outputs one line of drawing data to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600, sub effect display device 3114, and top effect display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes impossible to ignore, and the effect display device 1600, it will affect the speed of drawing on the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, to explain the "sprite", the "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 or the top plate effect display device 244. For example, when various people (characters) are to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, or the upper plate effect display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, or the top plate effect display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3114 by setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as the "overlapping order of sprites"). and is drawn on the upper plate effect display device 244.

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 perform main scanning and sequential scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. , and sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting with the one direction. When the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the top effect display device 244 receive one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 244 performs main scanning as a main scan. When viewed from the front of the display device 3114 or the upper plate effect display device 244, the signals are sequentially output from left to right to one line of pixels, respectively. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 shift to the line directly below as sub-scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially drawn from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, sub effect display device 3114, and upper plate effect display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 10, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more clockwise the handle lever 504 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. In other words, game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the speed of the game ball flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, making the movement enjoyable. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500, it passes through the warp passage 2521 and enters the center accessory. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522 which is open within the frame of the frame 2500 and passes through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and goes back and forth from side to side, leading to the central guide section 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guide sections 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from either of the When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding part 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guiding part 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game ball released from the central guiding part 2531 The ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from the side guiding part 2532, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in an open state, etc.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 on the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general winning slot on the lower side unit 2200. 2001, first starting port 2002, etc. Then, when game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 (the ball is driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500). ) and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. In this upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and flow while changing the direction of flow in various ways. This upper right circulation space 3541 is provided with a gate portion 2003 at the top, a general prize opening 2001 at the bottom, and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549.

The game ball that has flown down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered this lower right circulation space 2543 is transferred to the second upper prize opening 2006, which closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up on the left and right. Pass through the second attacker passage 2543a in which the upper surfaces of the door member 2552 and the second lower large prize opening door member 2555 form the bottom surface, and enter the gaming area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side when viewed from the front. released. The downstream end (discharge plate part 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball heads toward the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, When a game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while an increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In addition, in very rare cases, within the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b will enter the game area 5a. The game board 5 is discharged from the second outlet 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, a normal random number is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal random number is obtained from among them, and a normal lottery is performed by comparing the obtained normal random number with a predetermined normal winning determination table. When the time-saving control described later is not executed and the result of this normal lottery is a "normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opens the second starting port. 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when time saving control is being executed, a normal lottery is conducted to determine whether the "normal win" is the "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". Then, when the time saving control is being executed and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is one of "first normal win", "second normal win", and "third normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 opens. After opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating it in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the second starting port 2004 is opened. Opening/closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 Repeat for several times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "1st normal win", the period for each of the 5 times during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and if the regular lottery result of the regular lottery is "2nd regular win" The five periods during which the second starting port 2004 is enabled to accept game balls are "0.3 seconds," "0.28 seconds," "1.1 seconds," and "0.28 seconds." , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "3rd normal win", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it can accept the game ball. The periods are ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' and ``1.1 seconds.'' The "win" is a win that is more advantageous to the player (the game ball is easier to receive into the second starting port 2004) than the "first normal win". Furthermore, when game balls are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbols performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, the normal symbols are displayed after starting the variable display of the normal symbols. A certain amount of time is set (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal variable time) until the display stops (usually until the lottery result is indicated). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates and enters the open state after the normal variable time has elapsed. Note that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is executed to shorten the normal fluctuation time compared to normal (state where time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating the second starting port door member 2549 may be changed depending on the gaming state, for example, when time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, between the time the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbols that are fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display stop being displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball passes through the gate section 2003. 2003, it is not possible to start a new fluctuating display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display, so the fluctuating display of normal symbols will not be started until the previous fluctuating display of regular symbols ends (the normal lottery result I am trying to put it on hold until the suggestion is finished. Specifically, the normal random number obtained by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 by the gate sensor 2547, and a state is reached in which the fluctuating display of normal symbols can be started. The start of fluctuating display of normal symbols will be postponed until then. The maximum number of normal random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is 4, and even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being held. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the first starting port sensor 2104 updates the first starting port sensor 2104 with a numerical value range predetermined in the main control board 1310. By obtaining a first special random number from among the special random numbers and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a "jackpot") is created. , "small win", etc.) A first special lottery result is drawn. Then, after controlling the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the first special lottery result, the first special lottery result is displayed. The first special lottery result is indicated to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result (after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the first special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the first special lottery results that are drawn when game balls are accepted into the first starting slot 2002 include "miss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "10R jackpot". By comparing the obtained first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is the case, and furthermore, after a jackpot game, it is normally (low probability state: in this example, with a probability of about 1 in 395) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/44) to improve the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Whether or not to execute it (whether it is a definite variable jackpot or not) and whether to execute time-saving control (time-saving state) that shortens the variation time more than usual when the first special lottery result is a loss (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not). ) and the period for executing the time saving control (time saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special stroke symbol and the second special symbol)) are also determined. Note that the probability of winning a "small win" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 is selected. By obtaining a second special random number of ) will be drawn for the second special drawing result. Then, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the second special lottery result, and then the second special lottery result is displayed. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result (after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the second special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the second special lottery results drawn when game balls are accepted into the second starting port 2004 include "miss", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", which one of these is determined by comparing the obtained second special random number with the jackpot determination table, and furthermore, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low probability state: In this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1 in 395. Probability improvement control that increases the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): this example There is a probability of about 1 in 44 of winning the jackpot), and whether or not the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1 in 44 (probability of winning the jackpot is 1 in 44). It also determines whether to execute (time-saving state) (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not) and the period during which time-saving control is executed (time-saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the special lottery result, and then the first grand prize opening is Either of the opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is in a state where it is possible to receive a game ball in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 while the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number of balls (for example, 11 when game balls are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or 15 when game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006) from the payout device 830. Game balls are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are able to accept game balls, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to accept game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot", the first big prize opening 2005 will hold the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice) in which the opening and closing are performed in an acceptable open state and then closed. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to receive game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. When either of the following conditions is satisfied: a number of game balls (for example, 7 pieces) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 pieces) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. , an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``4R jackpot'' is repeated for 4 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``16R jackpot'' is repeated for 16 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) In the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened and then closed after being in an open state capable of receiving a game ball), it is practically difficult to allow the game ball to enter the first grand prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot" (After the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first grand prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 in the opening/closing pattern that puts the game ball in a closed state where it cannot be accepted. In addition, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the above first jackpot will be won. After the opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept a game ball, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. Either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern that brings the game balls into a closed state that cannot be accepted may be used as the actual special lottery result, and a predetermined number of balls (for example, , 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. An opening/closing pattern in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot". It is also possible to provide a device that executes a plurality of rounds including an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept the game ball and then closed for a period of 0.6 seconds). For example, if a special lottery result is ``8R jackpot that is actually 4R'', a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or the second grand prize opening After repeating the opening/closing pattern four times in which a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are accepted in 2006, the game balls are brought into a closed state where they cannot be accepted. The opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) An opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept a game ball and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in this embodiment, the second big winning hole 2006 is composed of a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b that are arranged on the left and right, and the second big winning hole 2006 is used. In the case of "Jackpot", for example, in the first round (1R), the second big prize opening 2006a opens and can accept game balls, is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions that make it impossible to accept, and then can be accepted next time. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2nd round) in which game balls can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unable to accept, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper prize winning hole 2006a is opened again and the game balls can be accepted. Then, the second upper large winning hole 2006a and the second lower large winning hole 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are completed. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "jackpot", either the second upper jackpot 2006a or the second lower jackpot 2006b is in a state where it can accept a game ball, so this state When the ball is hit right and the game ball is distributed in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is always accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, thereby eliminating the chance of losing a game ball and entertaining the player. Can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, for some of the above-mentioned plural types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game is varied depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not executed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not executed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. In addition, in a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both probability improvement control and time saving control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are jackpot games, and then the probability improvement control is executed. If it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are in a state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state.2R probability variation in which the probability improvement control is executed after the jackpot game If it is a jackpot, time saving control is executed after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. The variable display of the second special symbol executed on the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, but only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and Until the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start slot 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is accepted into the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a new manner. Since the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be displayed, the fluctuating display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will not start until the fluctuating display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery) We are putting this on hold until the results and second special lottery results are finalized. Specifically, the first special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the first starting port 2002 by the first starting port sensor 2104 and the second starting port sensor 2551 The second special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the second starting port 2004 is stored, and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbols (symbols) can be started. The maximum number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is four each, and for more than four, the number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is stored in the first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded instead of being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are configured so that the second special random number is digested with priority. In other words, regardless of the timing of receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the effect display device 1600 (the sub effect display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery results are indicated by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs that constitute the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a predetermined period of time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting manner, and the special lottery result is indicated by the combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of this stop.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern commands, judgment result notification commands, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the effect images suggest special lottery results. will be held. Specifically, in the performance display device 1600, each decoration is displayed in a state in which a series of decorative pattern rows consisting of a plurality of different patterns are displayed in multiple rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern). The fluctuating display of the symbol rows starts, and then they are stopped and displayed in order (in this example, the left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in this order), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed. Then, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player. In other words, multiple decorative pattern rows change according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when the starting winning occurs. After being displayed, a performance image is displayed that is stopped and displayed to suggest the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). Note that the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is easy to see, players generally pay attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the time to suggest the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (the flashing time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the symbol row changes and the confirmed image (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also displays the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left center Using the decoration unit 3050, the back lower/back movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top/middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom/front movable production unit 3500, etc., as appropriate, It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to entertain the players with various effects, and to suppress the players from losing interest in the game.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, a description will be given of the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the system/user reset process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and the timer interrupt process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by a timer activated by the system/user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
FIGS. 21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure for initializing the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and then "03H" indicating activation of the watchdog timer is written. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power outage warning signal is input from In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is made to wait for a predetermined period of time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating a watchdog timer.

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time necessary for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). . If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for accessory ratio calculation (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30 ), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). The power outage flag is a flag that is set when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off through normal processing, such as when a power outage occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutoff are used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, using the check code, it is determined whether the work area for calculating accessory ratio (region 13128 for calculating accessory ratio) is normal (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be incorrect, so the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is erased (step S26).

Note that when providing one or more backup areas in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using the check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first is copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

Regarding the area for accessory ratio calculation, data in the area for accessory ratio calculation 13128 may be erased at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined amount of operation (for example, for each predetermined number of balls fired, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each type of data (game control data 13132 and role object ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall attendant. , it is possible to prevent the concealment of an abnormal state of the ratio of accessories. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low accessory ratio.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes initial settings for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) (step S28). In the initial settings of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are permitted. Furthermore, initial settings of the serial communication port and test signal output port are performed. Starts the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, settings are made for the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, and accessory ratio display 1317. Further, after the serial communication circuit 13114 starts operating, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command generation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated is added.

The power-on commands include a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command that notifies the game state when the power is restored after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process in step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated. Incidentally, the process of updating random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery and the regular lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main processes on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, will not be performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that it is not necessary to clear all output ports; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption during the time until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46). Furthermore, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal.

Next, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the accessory ratio calculation work area (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored each time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing instead of the main board power-off processing.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as a check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) during the accessory ratio calculation/display process instead of during the main board side power-off process.

In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the accessory ratio in the backup area along with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off. , it is possible to calculate the role ratio in long-term operation.

Furthermore, a value indicating that backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched and used each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered winning holes such as general winning holes, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the above is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, which will be described later, and the normal period determined by the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern, a payer ACK signal is sent to notify that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols and small winnings are updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S40 in the system/user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the area 13128 in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the ratio of prize balls. (see FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process in step S81 can be skipped if there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display command, error release notification command, etc.), and sends the above-mentioned transmission information as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. In addition, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above and the count switch detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. If the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game is then shifted to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to the state.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the display switch 1318 has been operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25), and displays the accessory ratio. The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling quality of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data.

Note that regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated or not, the accessory ratio may be displayed as long as the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. . In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Good too. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game has stopped. In this way, when the accessory ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division and subtraction for calculating the accessory ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of how to display the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory object ratio, continuous accessary object ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, the values are You may calculate only the value that Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and suspends the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the accessory ratio even when fraud is being reported.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), it also outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output signal. It outputs various information (gaming information) signals and security signals regarding the game, such as signals, time saving information output information, starting gate prize information output signals, etc., to the payout control board 951.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value to the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 You may also perform calculation processing of the physical ratio. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or from the payout control section 952 to the peripheral control section 1511. A command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may also be transmitted.

[5-3. Accessory ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The accessory ratio calculation/display process is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, if the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the performance in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold smaller than a reference value), the preview performance may be changed to provide a preview performance that is more interesting than a normal preview performance.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the same as the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal, so execute the accessory ratio calculation process and extract the accessory from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The decimal part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process advances to step S160.

In addition, in step S156, each time the accessory ratio and/or the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated, the updated value may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and divided to calculate the accessory ratio. may be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of pitches acquired is 32 bits, numerical values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operations, the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 are taken out of the number of acquired pitches stored in 32 bits. It is preferable to store it in a register (16 bits) for division. Note that if the number of acquired pitches is less than the maximum value of the number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

Further, if the total number of pitches acquired is divided by 100 (rounding down to the nearest whole number) and used as the dividend (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, calculations using decimals can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and if the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be set to 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so calculation of the accessory ratio from the data in the backup area 1 is performed. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148 ), the accessory ratio calculation process is executed to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in backup area 2. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), executes the accessory ratio calculation process, reads out the data in the main area, and calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating ratio of accessories 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is reported (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process because if the main board side is reset during power-off processing, the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated, so the check code is stored in the RAM 1312 during the initialization process. The backed up data will be initialized, but if you calculate and memorize the check code periodically during the character ratio calculation/display process, even if the pachinko machine is powered on again, the work area for calculating the character ratio can be saved. This is because the data in (accessory object ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destinations of data in the main area based on the backup area allocation counter value and writing data to only some of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being written to multiple backup areas.

Note that when three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas into which data is written may be allocated based on the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, refer to a conversion table (not shown) to obtain data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of accessory ratio is accessory ratio (cumulative total), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process, data on the number of pitches acquired is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the work area for accessory ratio calculation shown in FIG. 27). , data cannot be written to the storage area related to the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired pitches in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. , data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

As explained above, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is copied to the backup area, so if the normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc. , it is possible to protect the data used to calculate the role ratio.

Incidentally, since the processing in steps S156 and S172 is common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is preferable to configure it with one or more common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side, separate from the common program module. This is because data checking and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if data checking and backup methods are made common among models, they may be placed in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be explained. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 includes game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, and accessory ratio calculation/display. It includes an area for storing data 13136. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) that stores programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) that stores programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. and an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating accessory ratios, such as accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136. is assigned.

There is an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more between the final address of game control data 13132 and the start address of debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in dump list format. The game control area and the debugging (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135. When displayed in dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. Note that the value stored in the free area may be the same fixed value, and may be set to a value that is different from the values set in the game area and the debug area, or a value that occurs less frequently. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the code 13135 for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories and the data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the area for calculating the ratio of accessories. good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, it is possible to eliminate the processing that is not directly related to the control of game progress, such as the accessory ratio calculation area (accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135). Ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that defects (bugs, etc.) in the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 will affect game control.

Note that the debugging (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes that are not directly related to gaming, such as various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. These debugging (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debugging (inspection function) signals. Further, the accessory ratio calculation area stores a program for calculating the accessory ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Moreover, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and configured to not be able to write to the area. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code to the game control code 13131. The configuration is such that it cannot be called and executed. This increases the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, changes to the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum. .

Moreover, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. This can be done separately from the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, and the effort required to inspect the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the role ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the main control side power-off process (Fig. The settings may be made in steps S50 to S54) of No. 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if the power outage flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that if the main area is determined to be abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (steps in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control side power-off processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Furthermore, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, each time the value of the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data on the number of pitches acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23), which is timed by the main control MPU 1311, and is written in the accessory ratio calculation process (step in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process. The information is read out in step S156). In this way, the accessory ratio calculation/display process reads the data on the number of balls acquired from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the data on the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. By writing the above, it is possible to completely separate the game control program and the program that executes the processing of calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories, and the program for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories can be made common to gaming machines with different specifications. .

Note that the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process uses the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio as the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Write to ratio storage. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects are stored. The number of balls acquired for the accessory is the number of prize balls that are won by hitting the accessory that is in operation (for example, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 that are open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of prize balls that are won by hitting the winning jackpot while the winning jackpot is continuously operating (for example, the prize opening is open during a series of jackpots). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls acquired as accessories divided by the total number of balls acquired. The continuous yakuza ratio can be calculated as the number of consecutive yakuza acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of accessory balls acquired, the number of consecutive accessory balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process, Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as role objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as role objects, and the total number of balls acquired correspond to the total number of balls acquired in FIG. 27(B), which will be described later. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

FIG. 27(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are stored. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of won balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of balls acquired as accessories, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, The write pointer may also be moved.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the accessory ratio is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer completes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the value of the total cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects as explained in FIG. 27(A). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning in a prize other than the accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close, for example, the general prize opening 2001). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the number of balls acquired for the accessory, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27(C) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B) can be obtained, including the number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, the number of special electric accessory balls acquired, and the number of starter pitches acquired. , and store the number of winning balls acquired, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of balls acquired, the winning prize ratio, and the consecutive winning prize ratio. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, if data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Among the work area structures shown in Figures 27 (B) and (C), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects in the ring buffer, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, and the normal number of balls acquired as electric accessory objects. The number of balls obtained, the number of balls obtained for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained in the starting hole, and the number of balls obtained in other winning holes are each a 2-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Number of balls acquired as accessory items, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory items, total number of balls acquired, number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of balls acquired as starter openings, and other balls acquired as prize openings. Each cumulative number has a storage area of 3 bytes, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is provided. Number of balls acquired as accessories, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessories, total number of balls acquired, ratio of accessories, ratio of consecutive accessories, number of balls acquired as ordinary electric accessories, number of balls acquired as special electric accessories, starting port The total number of balls acquired and the total number of other winning holes acquired are each a 3 or 4 byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(B). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning a prize in a prize other than an accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close). The number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired is the prize ball obtained by winning the ordinary electric accessory object (the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of a lottery with normal symbols. It is a number. The number of special electric accessory balls acquired is the number of prize balls that are won by entering special electric accessory objects that are in operation (for example, the opened grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) as a result of a lottery based on special symbols. The number of balls won in the starting hole is the number of prize balls that are won by entering the starting hole (first starting hole 2002). The number of other winning holes acquired is the number of prize balls obtained by winning into a winning hole (general winning hole 2001) which is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of balls acquired for ordinary electric accessories, the number of balls acquired for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained for starting openings, the number of balls obtained for other prize openings, the number of consecutive balls obtained for accessories, and the total number of balls acquired are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process, but other The data will not be deleted when the Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the totals shown in FIGS. 25(B) and 25(C) may be deleted every predetermined period.

In addition, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, or the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value. , number of acquired pitches for accessories>total number of pitches acquired, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, when the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, a 7 segment LED 13172 consists of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package, but they may be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and signals for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating data loading timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. Segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signals transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp correspond to. The direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is a common anode type or a common cathode type, but an example of the common anode type is illustrated.

A resistor 13174 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 to determine the value of current flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the luminance of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, 8x4 data selector 3174, decoder 3175, 2x8 data selector 3176, constant current driver 3178, driver 3179, It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control section 3181, a duty ratio control section 3182, a data selector control section 3183, a standby mode control section 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16 bits of data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. Note that the 4 bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (see FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and connects D15 to D8 to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section). 3183 and standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184). Furthermore, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15-D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits D7-D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 selects the 8 bits of data register 0, that is, Digit-A. A signal is sent to select 8-bit data latch 3173 so that data latch 3173A stores data.

The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided in the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, take in data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses a character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to a 2×8 data selector 3176.

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to constant current driver 3178.

Constant current driver 3178 uses data from 2×8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 accepts the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 in order to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 determines which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed by controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are 00100001B and D7 to D0 are XXXX0011B, the setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. is written. Note that × indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness with which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, 16 levels of duty from 0/16 to 15/16 are set in the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182. Ratio settings are written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the settings of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 based on external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001××××B, the setting to use the decoder is written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000×××. By inputting the data XXB, the NO DECODER setting, which does not use a decoder, is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to not be used. The ×8 data selector 3176 is controlled to select data from the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls standby mode settings and data clear settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to standby mode by external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In standby mode, the current settings are maintained as they are, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Furthermore, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held internally by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches is cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 generates a clock used within driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of implementation example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and houses the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without destroying the box once closed.The model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface of the main control board box 1320. (sticker affixed, engraved, printed, etc.) or an opening sticker is affixed. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 31(A). In implementation example 1, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310. Note that the main control MPU 1311 is preferably mounted such that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made by arranging no parts around it.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 is preferably the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Moreover, it is preferable that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 be the same. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to implement the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the main control MPU 1311, and the main control board 1310 are at 90 degrees. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that the orientation is oriented.

In addition, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for pulling out signal lines from the main control board 1310 are located at the ends along the long sides of the main control board 1310 (in the figure, the upper length Although it is mounted at the upper end along the side, it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or at the end along the left and right sides. That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio display 1317 and does not obstruct the visibility of the accessory ratio display 1317. .

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker affixed to the main control board box 1320 are affixed at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio display 1317.

By implementing the accessory ratio display 1317 in this way, the accessory ratio display 1317 and the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 are displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the manufacturing process and game hall. Even during post-installation inspections, it is possible to check the ratio of accessories and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified without having to take an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31(C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but the circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 or the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are of low importance when inspecting for unauthorized modification, so there is little significance in arranging them on the main control board 1310 in the same direction.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), the signal of the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 be placed as close as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). L1) Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are placed around the main control MPU 1311, as shown by the dotted line, in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. For this reason, the wiring length L1 ends up being a certain length, but the wiring length L2 is made as short as possible.

Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in separate packages, and in either case, they are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32(C) is a diagram in the implementation example shown in FIG. 32(B). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32(B), ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern on at least one of the back surface and inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 ) arranged so that they do not intersect. Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. In this case as well, the signal line 13104 is arranged avoiding the prohibited area 13106 (that is, so that the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

Note that, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board with patterns on the front and back sides and no inner layer. It is also applicable to multilayer substrates having inner layers (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register that stores data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence or absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the number of digits register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting whether or not to decode or data for setting the number of display digits, and the data selector control unit 3183 decodes It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, and data to be displayed on each digit of 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latch 3173A-D.

The duty ratio, the presence or absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the register described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and only need to be set once, so they are initialized in step S28 of FIG. 21. is set as . Note that if you set the initial settings only once, the settings may be changed due to the influence of noise etc. after the initial settings. may be reset each time the button is pressed). This makes it possible to always display the correct display even if the settings change due to noise.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using a character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Furthermore, when displaying numbers, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, so the calculation results can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

Note that lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: initial state, data input state, LED lighting state (0000), LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and LED lighting state (all lighting). is being prepared.

To control these five states, there are mode setting instructions: blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby. The blank command cuts off the output of constant current driver 3178 and the output of driver 3179. The normal operation command causes the 7-segment LED 13172 to display after each setting is completed. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set to the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side, and lights up all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby command is divided into two types depending on parameters: a standby command that transitions to a standby state, and a clear command that transitions to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. Further, the clear command clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and also turns off the display.

Note that the blank command is also a type of display command, so in this specification, "display" includes any state in which the 7-segment LEDs are all on, some of the segments are on, and all the lights are off.

Display examples in each of the above-mentioned states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 has not been completed or the display data has not been set, so it is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on as shown in FIG. 36(A). becomes a non-lighting state in which all segments of the light are turned off. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized, so it is preferable to set it to standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

After completing the initial setting by setting control data in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171, when display data is input, a predetermined display is displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. This predetermined display may be performed by displaying "-" in all digits or lighting all segments, as shown in FIG. 36(B). It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Moreover, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED turns on (lights up according to the input data). Specifically, the system enters the accessory ratio display state, displays a code indicating the display content in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, if the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display a display that allows identification of this fact. For example, all digits (or numbers) may be displayed blinking, or the decimal point may be lit or blinking.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display contents of the 7-segment LED 13172 are changed. In other words, a different type of accessory ratio is displayed. In this case as well, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to provide a display that allows identification that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later using FIG. 37.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is a good idea to turn off the lights and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This accessory ratio non-display state is the same as after the initial setting is completed, but may be in a different format as long as it is distinguishable from the accessory ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the accessory ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a different form from that illustrated, as long as it can be distinguished from a normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio display is not possible.

Furthermore, in any state, when an all-lighting command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 light up. Furthermore, if a blank command or standby command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining data. Furthermore, when a data clear command is input in any state, all data held in registers and latches is cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of role ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be explained.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As mentioned above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a production display device, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the lower two digits and the type of numerical value in the upper two digits. Display.

Furthermore, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured with a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value.

The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in different display formats depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when exceeding the standard, etc.). By changing the display mode based on the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the proportion of the accessory is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured with one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different manners. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, the display lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, the display blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (accessory object ratio or continuous accessary object ratio, recent data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged, so it will be displayed in a different display format (display color, blinking, etc.) You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of pitches acquired is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when it exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between displaying the latest data, displaying medium-term data, and displaying long-term data. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The mid-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C).

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the accessory ratio display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is changed by opening the main body frame 4, it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the game state display. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the ratio of accessories is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the remaining time cannot be displayed fluctuatingly. can. Since the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400 are synchronized with the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of winnings for each type of winning hole or the number of paid out prize balls per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the ball output rate during normal times, excluding special prizes (during jackpots), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe pitches by the number of out pitches. The number of fired balls (number of out balls) is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020. As described above, the firing ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball firing device to the gaming area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out pitches may be detected by the ejected ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharged ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-port passage ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, The number of out balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the starting hole sensors 2104, 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. Furthermore, there is a shot supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680, and game balls that are launched from the ball launcher 680 but do not reach the gaming area 5a (so-called foul balls). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball firing device 680 detected by the shot supply ball sensor to calculate the number of out balls (number of fired balls). May be detected.

The number of out pitches may be counted using any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the ejected ball sensor 3060 or the ejected ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

Also, the number of safe pitches is equal to the number of prize pitches paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball payout rate for each gaming state (during normal play, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated as the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each gaming state. . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check on the spot for each game machine the deviation from the design value of ball launch performance during operation. Furthermore, since the ball hitting performance can be checked without using a hole controller, it becomes easier to inspect each gaming machine during on-site inspection of a gaming hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 displays information regarding other winnings and prize balls of the base (the number of winning balls in the general winning hole 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the winning, the number of winning balls in the starting hole 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the winning, The number of winnings in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls resulting from the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio starts, and after displaying for a predetermined time, the display disappears. Note that if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317, good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is opened, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the displayed content may be changed each time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the ratio (total) of prize balls, is displayed in the first two digits, and a prize ball for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls) is displayed. Display the ratio in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the first two digits changes to A6, which means the continuous role object ratio (cumulative), and the lower two consecutive role object ratios for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 prize balls) are displayed. It may be displayed in the digits (FIG. 37(B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the ratio of bonus balls (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the ratio of the accessory according to the latest data is displayed in the bottom two digits (recent data display). (Figure 37(C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once more, the first two digits will change to y6, which means the ratio of bonus balls (cumulative total), and the ratio of bonus balls to the predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls) will be changed to the bottom two digits. It may be displayed (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37(D)).

The display switch 1318 does not need to be provided as an independent switch, and may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as the display switch 1318 when operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, there is only one switch to be operated by the attendant at the game parlor, and it is possible to reduce the number of erroneous operations by inexperienced attendants.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to check the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation.

In addition, the data on the number of prize balls is accumulated as data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136, and if the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136 is deleted, so the incorrect ratio of accessories is displayed. can be avoided.

In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under conditions different from the deletion conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, so accurate prize ball number data can be maintained. , it is possible to calculate accurate role ratios.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased by mistake due to operation by a game hall attendant. Since the physical ratio calculation/display data is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the system is configured to prevent the data from being erased due to an erroneous operation by an attendant at the game hall. Furthermore, since the gaming hall cannot intentionally erase data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a high accessory ratio can be prevented.

[9. Base display]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, we have described an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays an accessory ratio.Next, we will describe an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine that exclusively calculates and displays a base value will be described, but an accessory ratio may also be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball enters the starting hole (first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004), a lottery is held using random numbers and a special symbol fluctuation display game is executed. . The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a relatively short fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is often selected when there are many pending numbers). There are also relatively long fluctuation patterns (such as super reach that last more than 1 minute). When calculating the base value in a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of an error, so the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variable display game switches to the next variable display game. However, if the fluctuating display time is long, instead of waiting for the end of one special symbol fluctuating display game, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of out balls (fired balls) or the number of prize balls (paid balls) It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are met during a game (for example, during a special symbol fluctuation display game), such as the number of out balls (number of fired balls) or the number of prize balls (number of paid balls) ), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that operates as described above will be explained.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by the reference numeral 1317 is a base display instead of an accessory ratio display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use a 4-digit 7-segment LED, for example, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, or may use other digits (for example, 2-digit). A 7 segment LED may also be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the role object ratio calculation area update process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, In accessory ratio calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated and displayed. In the following explanation, the "accessory object ratio calculation area update process" in step S81 of FIG. This will be explained by replacing it with "calculation/display processing". In addition, the "accessory object ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "accessory object ratio calculation/display code 13135" is read as "base calculation/display code 13135", The description will be made by replacing "accessory object ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136."

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The gaming state is in the special prize mode when the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even when the opening and ending times of the jackpot game are included, good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, for the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting port 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It turns out. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted as in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). This also includes not creating edge information for paying out prize balls based on the winning signal even if the winning signal is input.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation will be explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 2002 or 2004, but the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning into the starting hole is not held, the prize ball is paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that a palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but the number of prize balls that entered the general prize opening and the starting opening were counted even during the special prize. , the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out pitches excluding the number of pitches that entered the grand prize opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of pitches awarded is greater than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value must not be calculated. Good too. When expressing the base value as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number by which the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 is multiplied controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value will be calculated up to the 1's digit in 100ths, and fractions below the decimal point will not be calculated. Furthermore, if this predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated as a 100th fraction to two decimal places. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of the 100th fraction with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that during the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 can perform other processing even if it waits without performing any processing. You may do so. For example, the random number for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time The hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processing related to the game includes at least processing for updating random numbers for determining wins and losses. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random number that affects the result of the game is updated one or more times.

Further, if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, the base value may be notified constantly or at a predetermined timing using the base display device (7 segment LED) 1317, the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in terms of the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-mentioned display or display device. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on display devices capable of displaying images such as the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. It's okay.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 configured with 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 with "data n setting" and sets the data whose display contents are specified in D7 to D0. is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

In addition, when displaying the base value on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, it is recommended to set a predetermined standard value (for example, 50%, etc.) for the base value, and change the display mode if the standard value is exceeded. . For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for times exceeding the standard, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow. Additionally, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage when the base value is low, such as ``I'm doing great,'' ``I'm getting worse,'' ``It's not bad,'' and ``In a sense, it's amazing.'' If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. For this reason, it is desirable to display the warning in a manner such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, etc. Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command may be generated to display that the base notification is not possible on the effect display device. By sending the notification command to the sub-board that generated it, the performance device controlled by the sub-board can notify the status of the base, which allows for a wider variety of notifications than the main board, and reduces the load on the main board. It can be reduced. Furthermore, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between a failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of a base value to display. Furthermore, by displaying an abnormality in the base value on the performance display device, it is possible to know the abnormality in the base value without looking at the back side of the game board where the base display 1317 is provided.

Function display unit 1400 may also serve as base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used to provide constant notification. Further, it is preferable to notify at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game ends).

Base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. In this case, if the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out pitches), as in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later, good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. Alternatively, a signal having a length that roughly represents the calculated base value may be output (for example, if the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%, a 30 millisecond pulse). Further, a number of continuous pulses representing an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Note that the base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command does not need to be generated when the base value is not updated. Even if a base notification command is not generated, the base value continues to be displayed.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 56, it determines whether the calculated base value is abnormal, generates a base notification command to notify the abnormality of the base value, and informs players and hall employees of the abnormality of the base. You may notify.

Further, whether or not to notify the player of the base may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly informed of the base value, they may become less attentive to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. It is.

Furthermore, based on the calculated base value, the performance of the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed or will be executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select effects from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). For this reason, when the threshold value is exceeded or lowered during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The presentation may be changed in the same manner or may be changed in different manners when the base value rises and falls beyond a predetermined threshold.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area updating process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process in step S89.

For this reason, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. Note that the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but the payout command reception confirmation is sent to the main control board 1310. There's no need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the status of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, abnormalities in the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when determining that the base is abnormal if the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol fluctuation display game, and if it straddles the predetermined threshold and goes up or down, it becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined that it is, the game is not stopped and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, special symbol fluctuation display games include short-time ones such as normal fluctuations, and long-term ones such as reach fluctuations, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. If the condition is satisfied multiple times, it is recommended to calculate the base value each time and update and display the base value each time. This means that if you limit the calculation of the base value during the special symbol fluctuation display game (for example, calculate and update the base value only once at the end of the fluctuation display), the change in the base value may take a long time depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the player may not be aware of the time, and the information necessary for hall operation may not be output at an appropriate timing, which may cause trouble to the hall.

Further, if the fired game ball does not enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is in a loss, so for example, an additional effect is added to the effect being performed on the LCD (for example, an effect related to winning or losing that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect that appears in conjunction with a change in the base value). Adding a special performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot (among performances that are not related to changes in the base value, a preview performance that has a high degree of expectation such as the next preview performance, or a preview performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot) Among the specific effects that will appear, a preview effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, displaying the base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting hole or the general winning hole, and can be motivated to continue playing the game.

On the other hand, if many of the fired game balls enter the starting slot or the general winning slot (if they win more than the average number of past winnings), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the player will feel less disappointed because the player has received a payout of more game balls than usual. The presentation of the variable display game may be changed to a presentation with low expectations.

[9-2. Variations in update timing of prize pitch count and base value calculation timing]
Next, variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be explained using FIGS. 42 to 44. An overview of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value → Send the payout command ・Figure 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Calculate the base value ・Figure 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 44: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 45: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Payout completion notification → Update number of prize balls → Base value calculation The variations shown in FIGS. 41 to 44 above include not only the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. It is applicable to any base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting process (step S90). - Execute display processing (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and uses the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90), and a base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) are performed. Execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and base ratio calculation/ The base value is updated in display processing (step S89). Note that the prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been sent) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

Note that the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, so the base calculation area update process ( The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data on the number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost when a power outage occurs. For this reason, although it is necessary to confirm receipt of the command from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the notification of completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or in the embodiment described later) The base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In addition, in the procedure shown in FIG. 44, in order to prevent data on the number of unpaid prize balls from being lost when a power outage occurs, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up on the main control board 1310. For this reason, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when predetermined conditions are met. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, when the reception of the payout command is confirmed, the number of prize balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to the lag between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the update timing of the number of prize balls. The problem becomes particularly serious when it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after a prize is entered into the prize opening. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is carried over to the number of prize balls, payout command, reception confirmation, and payout completion notification resulting from the winning. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether the ball is a prize ball that is being awarded a special prize at each stage. In this way, even if it takes a long time from entering the winning slot to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known for a single game machine, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 maintains the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected is stored. Add to the number of pitched balls. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of unpaid balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after transmitting the payout command from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected. A payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, a payout command is sent, and the number of unpaid balls is held in the payout control board 951. In this case, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Furthermore, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, it may update the number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of prize balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. Furthermore, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1, every time a prize is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), , steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base value is displayed in real time on the base display 1317. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated and displayed at predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be explained using FIGS. 46 to 51. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 39 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of awarded pitches ・Figures 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches Calculation/Figures 50 and 51: When either the number of award pitches or the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). Note that in FIG. 46, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 39) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the ball is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is defined as an abnormality in the number of prize balls that occurs during a predetermined period of time other than during special prizes (e.g., a prize that corresponds to 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening or starting opening). This is the case when a ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize pitches, it is not necessary to add the acquired number of prize pitches to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813, and instead subtract the number of prize pitches added to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813. Good too.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, etc. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, if the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is made by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, production display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal will be notified. May be used for base value calculations. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started by checking the operation in the initial state. Another method for stopping the game is to temporarily stop the game (for example, stop the variable display of special symbols), and then return to the original state after stopping the error notification and restart the game. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, it outputs a power failure detection signal, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification ends, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area and the game is resumed. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in that state, so the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, there is a possibility that 100 game balls (i.e., out balls) will be fired into the game area 5a and all of the game balls will enter the general winning slot or the starting slot, so an abnormality in the number of winning balls will be notified. It is desirable that the mode is a quiet mode (for example, a lower volume or lower light intensity than a normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). Further, the display time may be the same as that for a normal error, or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and no notification may be made.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In addition, in step S824, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. It's okay. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches, but after obtaining the number of out pitches, there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches in comparison with the number of out pitches. (In other words, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of out balls in a predetermined period of time, or if the number of prize balls in the general prize opening or starting opening is counted, a high percentage of out balls (for example, 50% or more) enter the prize. For example, when

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 47, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 40) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), the judgment result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 47), the value of the prize ball number buffer is It may be determined whether or not is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). In other words, if the game situation is such that the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the number of prize balls is calculated. (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the award pitch count buffer in the award pitch count buffer), store the other part in memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total award pitch count buffer), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100 balls, the prize ball number buffer value is 99 balls, and when 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general winning slot, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 balls. However, 100 balls are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four balls are left in the number of prize balls buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used to calculate the base value the next time the prize ball number buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold Th1. Furthermore, although the description has been made using the threshold value Th1=100 pieces, other numerical values such as 1000 pieces may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the discovery of fraud may be delayed. If there is a jackpot (for example, a 4th round jackpot and an 8th round jackpot), it is preferable to set it to a value below the minimum number of prize balls for the jackpot. Also, from the perspective of early detection of fraud, it is recommended to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable to have 10 thresholds Th1 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

Note that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every time a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) are won without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Furthermore, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, in addition to the case where the total number of out pitches is 0, when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, it is not necessary to calculate the base value and update the base calculation area 13128. For example, if the total number of out balls is less than the total number of prize balls, the base value will be 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of fired balls (out balls) has been obtained, and the game is being played normally. Therefore, there is no need to store numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Furthermore, an abnormality in the base value may be determined using 1500% as a threshold value. The theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls per winning opening of 15 is 1500%, so a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and indicates that the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining whether the base value is abnormal may be any other value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is filled with the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are the cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, as will be described later in FIG. It may be initialized at timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

As explained above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment determines whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time it acquires the number of prize balls, so that fraudulent activity can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of fired balls) do not win in the general winning hole 2001 or the starting holes 2002, 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, abnormalities in winnings to the winning openings that are always open (general winning opening 2001 and starting openings 2002, 2004) are determined and notified.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, so the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (e.g. The load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 48, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, as a result of the determination in step S812, if there is a prize ball, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, if a game ball enters the starting slot and it is decided to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the pending display is different from normal (blinking display, red pending, etc.), The player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read suspension will be a jackpot, but if the special symbol variation display game is a loss, the player will be disappointed. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in this embodiment, the player's disappointment as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so a higher base value is reported due to the prize ball that has entered the starting slot. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be executed when a prize is won at the starting opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out when winning at the starting opening is added, the number will not reach the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100 balls). If the value is not reached, the base value will not be updated. In other words, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (due to the number of displayed digits, only the lower numbers change, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is a failure, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the player is doing well), and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Furthermore, if it is determined that a look-ahead effect is to be executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the next prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number. .

Note that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate it without delay. For example, the selection can be made using the operation button 220C at the start of the game. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, when it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform a effect that can notify of a delay in base value calculation. In addition, if the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if a prize is entered in the starting slot. Even in this case, since prize balls are paid out as they enter the starting slot, the number of prize balls is counted and used to calculate the base value. In addition, in the event of a specific error, even if a winning ball enters the starting slot or general winning slot, it will be treated as if there was no winning and the prize ball will not be paid out.The number of prize balls will not be counted, and depending on the winning, the base value is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 49, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out pitch count buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be configured with 8 bits). , if the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out pitches with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 49), the number of out pitches is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether the threshold value Th2 is greater than or equal to the threshold value Th2.

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out pitch count buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, a base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, but the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the same timing (for example, when a predetermined prize is given). It may be initialized for each number of pitches or for each predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value, one that reports the base value with a specific effect, or one that reports an abnormality in the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of fired balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more interesting.

In addition, each time a prize ball is received (detection of prize winning, transmission of payout command, arrival of payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because if it is checked whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding up the number of prize balls, the base value may not be calculated correctly. For example, even if the ball is not fired for a predetermined period of time (approximately 1 minute), the slinging condition that occurs when the game ball gets caught on a nail placed in the game area will be resolved, and the game ball will arrive at the prize opening after a delay. This is because you may win a prize. For this reason, it is desirable to update the number of awarded pitches regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

If both the number of out pitches and the buffer value of the number of out pitches are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the buffer value of the number of out pitches is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the buffer value of the number of out pitches may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, so it takes more time to calculate the base value than when calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculations (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , records the number of out pitches in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 50, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 51, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. Note that a base notification command may be generated each time a base value is calculated, or a base notification command may not be generated even if a base value is calculated.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are stored in the base calculation area update processing and base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, FIG. 51, etc.), and read out in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). In addition, the data of the award pitch count buffer and the out pitch count buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311. - Read out during display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (gaming control program), and the program for accessory ratio calculation/display process can be shared among gaming machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 52(A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. The prize ball count buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to players other than during special prizes, and is based on the number of prize balls when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out pitch count buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out pitches meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out pitches). It will be done. The number of winning balls buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning slot or starting slot. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls winning in a specific general winning hole or starting hole. The winning pitch count buffer is used when counting the number of out pitches based on the number of pitches passing through the out gate (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific number of winning balls buffer is used when correcting the number of out balls by the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated as the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches x 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

Of the work area structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches correspond to each area of the total cumulative total in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It can store numbers up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area should be prepared to store the data for a long period of time. Furthermore, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of bases in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

FIG. 52(B) shows another example of the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the explanation in FIG. 52(A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (or every predetermined number of out pitches, or every predetermined time) (for example, every 6000 prize balls). It is composed of a ring buffer with n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. . After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of prized pitches (number of out pitches, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base cumulative value is the cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches. It is a value calculated from the value, and when one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer goes through the cycle, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. will be recalculated. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past, and the base total value calculated from the cumulative total value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of winning pitches and the total number of out pitches in the ring buffer each have a 2-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches each have a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since the total will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area will be provided to store long-term data. Furthermore, the base cumulative total and total cumulative total each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, etc.) good. Similarly, the total cumulative total shown in FIG. 52(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Further, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, it may be reported that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated again after checking the data in the backup area using the check code and copying the normal data in the backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Display of base value]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 may be visually checked. Since this is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the base value starts to be displayed, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, the display is turned off. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the base display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , it is better to reduce the power consumption of gaming machines. This base non-display state is in the same manner as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36(B)), but may be in a different manner as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also be used as the base display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display on the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may continue. By continuing the progress of the game, the base display can be quickly switched to the game state display when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time has elapsed, a variable display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400 are synchronized with the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop at the timing when the special symbol variable display of the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-mentioned embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (accessory object ratio) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Furthermore, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the body frame 4 of one pachinko machine is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such gaming machines, by opening the main body frame 4 of one of the pachinko machines, the bases (accessories ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. In addition, when displaying the base value even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value may be displayed in a form that the player can recognize (for example, on a display device that displays the effects of a special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). It is recommended to display . This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the performance of the pachinko machine, and is valuable for players to see. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via a relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the amount of light (brightness) of the base display 1317 does not change even if it shifts to the energy saving mode. This is because if the light intensity of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value using the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside of opening hours.

Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined period of time elapses after a game ball does not enter any of the winning holes and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal fluctuations. Further, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demo state, a video is played that shows the motif of the gaming machine, and an explanation of the gaming machine is provided. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the amount of light of the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is necessary to reduce the light intensity of these display devices. Good too. Further, unless the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is reduced, a player who wants to play on an empty machine can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if a game ball does not enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, when a game ball is fired toward the playing area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is sex. Even if game balls are fired and the number of out balls increases, if the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players are eager for revenge.

By notifying such a player of the game status through the function display unit 1400 which also serves as the base display 1317, it is possible to revive the interest in the game. In other words, even if the player enters the demo mode or energy saving mode, the display format of the display that displays the base value may be maintained at the same level as before the transition to the demo mode or energy saving mode, or the light intensity may be increased. It would be good to be able to check the base value properly.

In this way, we have explained how to maintain or increase the light intensity of the display that displays the base value, but with an emphasis on reducing energy consumption, it is also possible to lower or turn off the light intensity of the display that displays the base value. good. For example, during energy saving mode, certain operations (fire stop button to forcibly stop firing, operation button to change the effect that appears, RAM clear button to clear the contents of RAM, supply of power to the gaming machine) It is preferable to reduce the amount of light on the display on which the base value is displayed when an operation of an operating means provided on the gaming machine, such as a supply adjustment button that switches the presence or absence of the base value, is detected. Furthermore, not only in energy saving mode, but when you perform the above-mentioned prescribed operations, the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value will be reduced or turned off during energy saving mode. Good too.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. and the display that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption during energy saving mode before the display that displays the base value. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like that consumes a large amount of power is first reduced, thereby achieving the effect of significantly reducing power consumption. In addition, the light intensity of the display device that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off before the lamp etc. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine can be maintained even in the energy saving mode. be effective. Also, during energy saving mode, the lamps etc. that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of reduction in power consumption can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. . Note that the terms "before and after" in these descriptions (meaning "first" and "same time") also include the order of timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player's perspective.

Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be set in multiple stages, and the display mode at each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display device for displaying the base value may be constructed of multi-color LEDs, and the luminescent color may be changed to white, blue, or yellow at each stage. In addition, the display that displays the base value is configured with a production display device, and at each stage, the base value is low, such as ``I'm doing well'', ``I'm getting worse'', ``It's not bad'', ``In a sense it's amazing'', etc. Sometimes self-deprecating comments may be displayed. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value, it is also possible to perform an effect that adds a comment as described above to the effect display device 1600 on which decorative patterns are displayed.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of pitches passing through the out mouth]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described using FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out pitches is calculated using the number of winning pitches and the number of pitches passing through the out mouth, and a base value is calculated. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 54 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 55 and 56: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

If out balls are detected by the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out exit 1111, there is a problem in that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game balls launched toward the game area 5a flow out of the game area 5a via the general winning hole 2001, the starting hole 2002, and the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out hole 1111. For this reason, the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out exit, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has almost the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. An out-outlet passing ball sensor 1021 is provided to detect the number of balls passing through the outlet. The out exit passing ball sensor 1021 is preferably installed at a position where the player can see it through the out exit 1111. By installing the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out exit 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that out balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed in a position that is not seen by the player, such as in a gathering gutter where game balls flowing down from the gaming area 5a through the out-port 1111 are lined up. If it is installed in a position where the player cannot see it, the player does not need to be conscious of counting out balls. In addition, by providing the exit exit passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the exit exit 1111, sufficient space can be secured for displaying effects and accessories (movable objects), improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 are placed on the rolling surface so that they do not bounce back. It is best to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of winning balls, the number of balls passing through the outside exit, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the outside exit every timer interrupt cycle. Note that in FIG. 54, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

Thereafter, the number of balls passing through the out mouth is obtained (step S818), and the number of winning balls is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out hole and the number of winning pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , the number of balls passing through the out hole is recorded in the out pitch number buffer, and the number of winning pitches is recorded in the winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 55, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of pitches passing through the out mouth is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of pitches passing through the out mouth is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning pitches is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning pitches is added to the winning pitch number buffer (step S821).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out mouth and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 Now, the acquired number of pitches passing through the exit and the number of winning pitches are added to separate storage areas (number of out pitches buffer, number of winning pitches buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in separate storage areas.

In addition, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are recorded in separate storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when entering the winning hole. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out hole and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after both the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning balls buffer are updated. At that time, if both the out pitch count buffer and winning pitch count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, should the number of balls passing through the out mouth be given priority in counting, or the number of winning pitches should be given priority in counting? It is better to determine this in advance, instead of deciding it by random drawing. At this time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processes, the payout process for the prize ball can be executed quickly, but this may be determined as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 56, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, the winning pitch number buffer value is added to the out pitch number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out pitches (buffer value of number of out pitches + buffer value of winning pitches) and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the out mouth, so the number of out balls can be accurately counted and the base value can be calculated accurately. can. Furthermore, by checking the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it can be confirmed whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Base abnormality notification]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
・Figure 57: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches and for each predetermined number of out pitches The pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches, the predetermined Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out pitches is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG. 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends. The method for notifying the abnormality of the base can be the same as the method for notifying the base described above.

For example, one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may be used to notify abnormalities in the base value. If a player is notified of an abnormality in the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality in the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be expressed as a percentage and displayed on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify abnormalities in the base value. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on display devices capable of displaying images such as the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. It's okay.

Furthermore, when displaying the base value on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for abnormal conditions, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, etc. The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality in the base value. Furthermore, information on abnormalities in the base may be outputted from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57 calculates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches at the timing when the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58 directly updates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches using the acquired number of awarded pitches and number of out pitches, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so the player can know the status of the gaming machine, and the pachinko machine can notify the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation of the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is possible to detect and notify abnormalities in gaming machines that cannot be detected using conventional error detection methods.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies changes in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally fluctuates up and down. Since the base value represents the performance of the gaming machine, players who are playing the game are concerned about changes in the base value as well as the base value itself. For this reason, it is desirable to notify players of changes in the base value. When a display indicating the upper or lower value of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value and the history of past base values. Note that in FIG. 59, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record the base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or multiple base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, 10 base values for a predetermined period of time. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches for a predetermined time x n are stored, A base value may be calculated if necessary.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the most recent past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the base value decrease by referring to the base decrease duration measurement timer. (Step S10302). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is being lowered is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is continuing to drop is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than the current base value (equal to or greater than), the base lowering continuation time measurement timer is reset (step S10305), and a display selection table for base increasing is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, it was determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether it is greater, equal, or smaller. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is determined by division. For this reason, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal, taking into consideration a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the effects of the special symbol variation display game based on random numbers selected in response to winning in the starting hole (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). Display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or there is no change in the base value, and display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected when the base value is decreasing. selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes items such as performance number, performance content, variation time, notes, and distribution. The performance number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the performance selected in the display selection table. The performance content is the name of the performance. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends due to the performance. The notes are information that describes the outline of the performance so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the performance will be selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

Display selection table 1 (loss) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the base value is increasing or there is no change, and display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a variable probability state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged. Display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot that derives a probability variable state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged.

Display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value continues to decrease even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started decreasing.

As shown in the figure, display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the effect is determined.

In addition, if the base value is still decreasing even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the base value started decreasing, the display selection table 3 is used to select the effect and the selected effect is applied. You may switch.

Further, whether or not to display a specific effect to notify of a change in the base value may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly notified of changes in the base value, they may become less focused on the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. This is because there is.

For example, when a special symbol fluctuation display game is being executed (a gaming situation where the result of a jackpot lottery is not shown), the performance of the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not fluctuating, the base value increases. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect that indicates the change in the base value) when the base value changes.

The particular performance may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the specific performance is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension will continue and fatigue will accumulate. When a game ball enters the starting hole while the specific performance is being displayed, the display of the specific performance is stopped and the performance of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because the jackpot lottery is held and the special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is won in the starting slot, so it is better to have the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of award balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or a situation where the number of out pitches has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Furthermore, the specific performance may be displayed depending on the result of the lottery, but it may also be configured so that it is always executed if the same conditions are met.

Further, it is preferable that the specific effect is not displayed when the base value increases, but is displayed only when the base value decreases. This is because when players are informed of an increase in the base value, their expectations increase, and if the base value does not increase to the extent that the players expect, there is a possibility that the players will be disappointed due to the gap between their expectations. be. On the other hand, this is because when players are notified of a decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing or steady), but the display is divided into three states: while the base value is decreasing, steady, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player when the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) by considering a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

Further, the particular performance may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, in a state where the game ball does not enter the starting hole and the special symbol variation display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left and right symbols are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of special reach 1, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are playing rock, paper, scissors, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the rock, paper, scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of Special Reach 2, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are competing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the competition.

Figure 69 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom right of the screen). Display a recognizable display. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decrease is placed in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Provide a recognizable indication of continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be placed at any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating a decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, the display may pop up in the center of the display screen.

Although the example in which the degree of change in the base value is displayed on the effect display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may also be changed. Furthermore, instead of the upward and downward trend of the base value, changes in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value can be the result of comparing the base value calculated in the time interval before the predetermined time with the base value calculated in the current time interval, or the change in the base value calculated before the predetermined time. It may also be a comparison result between the total value and the latest base value.

[9-8. Base calculation considering specific general winning slots]
Next, a process for accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winnings in a specific general winning hole will be described.

In pachinko machines, players aim to win a prize in a specific winning hole where the game ball is likely to win during a jackpot (for example, the opened big winning hole 2005, 2006). Adjust the strength of the shot. Even during a jackpot, you can aim for the big winning hole 2005 by firing the game ball at the same spot as when hitting normally, or you can aim for the big winning hole 2006 by hitting the ball to the right, which increases the strength of the shot to the maximum. There are variations. Among these variations, a game board may be designed such that a starting hole or a general winning hole is placed downstream of the big winning hole to pick up balls that spill from the big winning hole.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of a pachinko machine that allows players to hit right during a jackpot will be explained in detail. During the jackpot, the player hits the ball to the right in order to win the game ball into the opened jackpot. Many of the game balls fired toward the game area win in the grand prize opening 2006 which is currently open. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. When a prize is not won in the grand prize opening 2006, a prize is entered in this general prize opening 2001. That is, it can be said that the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 wins only when the game ball hit right does not enter the open big winning hole 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting hole and the general winning hole when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (in other words, the number of prize balls paid out for the number of 100 out balls). In order to show the percentage of the number of prize balls thrown out, the number of game balls fired that flowed into the gaming area but have a low possibility of entering the starting hole and general winning hole (high possibility of entering the grand prize hole) (Number of out pitches), it is assumed that when calculated as a base value, it will deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 is defined as a specific general winning hole, and the number of balls that entered the specific general winning hole during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. Calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning hole is as follows.
・Figures 70 and 40: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 71 and 72: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Obtain the number of pitches and the number of specific winning pitches. Note that in FIG. 70, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (specific winning ball number) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning pitches from the number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer and calculates the base value at the timing when the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 71, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether the winning hole corresponding to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning hole, and the number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is obtained (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning pitch number recorded in the specific winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 72, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning pitches is subtracted from the total number of out pitches and a threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. In other words, if the total number of award pitches and total number of out pitches are not updated, the same value will be calculated as the base value, the base value will maintain the same value, and if the total number of award pitches or total number of out pitches is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. Note that the base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that have entered the game area but are unlikely to enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, so there is no deviation from the actual base value. A small number of base values can be calculated accurately.

In addition, although the case has been described in which there is a general winning hole 2001 downstream of the big winning hole 2006 in a pachinko machine where you hit right during a jackpot, the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 with a normal hit during a jackpot. The present invention can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting opening or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the big winning opening 2005.

Further, in the gaming area 5a, there are provided jackpots 2005 and 2006 which do not normally accept gaming balls, but can accept gaming balls depending on the jackpot lottery result. Prize balls that are won into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball enters the starting hole 2002, 2004 and the special symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning hole 2005, 2006 opens (jackpot opening), the big winning hole The period from the close of 2005 and 2006 until the start of the next special symbol variation display game (jackpot ending) is regarded as a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of prized balls and the number of out pitches during the special prize can be counted without determining whether the special prize is being won in step S810 in FIG. 39 or the like. In addition, when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed due to one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given. Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize.

Further, a second starting port 2004 is arranged in the gaming area 5a, which normally does not accept game balls, but can accept game balls depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball that is won into the second starting hole 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal symbol is drawn, the normal symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is determined until the opening (opening), the second starting port 2004 The period from when the game closes until the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending) is considered to be a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In addition, when the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only the time saving period but also all winnings to the second starting opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing as described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than special prizes (jackpot, time saving, etc.) without determining whether a special prize is being won in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like.

In this way, the base value can be accurately calculated by accurately excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches while the player is batting right-handed.

Furthermore, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game with the left hand when there is no jackpot or time saving (so-called normal state), and to play the game with the right hand when there is a jackpot or time saving. Such a gaming machine is provided with a general winning hole 2001 and a first starting hole 2002 that win when playing left-handed, and a general winning hole 2001 and a second starting hole 2004 that win when playing right-handed. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings from the left side to the center of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the left) and the right side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the right) The rate of balls entering each winning hole differs depending on the placement and position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed are different.

The base value of a pachinko machine is set assuming that a player plays left-handed in a normal state. However, as mentioned above, if the base value is different when hitting left-handed and right-handed (for example, the base value when hitting right-handed in normal conditions is designed to be lower than when hitting left-handed). , if the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

The hall assumes that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or determines that the machine has poor ball payout performance. Even in pachinko machines where the ball payout performance is judged to be poor (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is hitting the ball left-handed, so the starting hole that acts on the base when hitting left-handed Adjustments will be made to increase the entry rate of the general winning slot. Then, adjust the nails with abnormalities to increase the base value. If you hit left-handed with a game machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even under normal conditions. In other words, you can receive many lottery tickets for a small amount of money. In other words, even if the base when hitting left-handed is not different from what the hole expected, Hall misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the probability of the ball entering the winning opening or general winning opening when hitting left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantageous due to such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when the player is hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed.

By the way, in a pachinko machine that allows you to play right-handed while saving time, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the gaming state, and the gate part 2003 that performs the normal symbol lottery to open the second starting port 2004, It is placed in the area where the game balls roll. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the normal symbol lottery is performed, the probability of winning the common symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or the normal symbol is drawn. Even if a symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting hole 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win a prize through the second starting hole 2004 under normal conditions.

Here, in order to increase the base value when the ball is hit right in the normal state, the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 must be increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 will reduce the profit of the hole. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate a corrected base value using the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out pitches, a higher calculated base value can be obtained. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. Note that the degree of correction processing may be determined as appropriate based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate section 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 (such as when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate section 2003 without entering the starting gate), (conditions may be added), it is not necessary to use the number of out pitches counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate section 2003 for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate section 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" may be output without actively notifying the player that it will not be reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Furthermore, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is being hit to the right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or a message indicating that the player is playing right-handed may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

As explained above, by excluding the number of balls that pass through the gate section 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right-handed) from the number of out balls, it is possible to increase the number of balls that hit right-handed in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent variations in the calculated base value due to the player's gaming style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value to confirm the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be retained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the erase conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. This allows accurate data on the number of prize balls to be maintained and accurate calculation of the ratio of bonus balls.

Specifically, the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation) does not erase the base calculation/display data 13136, but cuts off the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and turns off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1. By the second operation of shutting down, all data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. The second operation may be performed by installing a single switch to realize this operation, or by having an employee of the game parlor remove the connector of the backup power line that is supplied to the main control board 1310 to connect the pachinko machine to the The power supply may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, but the second operation erases the calculated base value. Erase all data, including data related to game progress.

With this configuration, the base calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased due to an erroneous operation by a game hall attendant, increasing the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio and preventing concealment of a high accessory ratio. .

[9-10. Base calculation taking into account winning abnormalities]
FIGS. 73 and 74 are flowcharts of base calculation area update processing that takes into account winning abnormalities.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, a winning abnormality may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot being derived in a special symbol fluctuation display game, or when a winning opening 2004 is detected as a result of a winning being derived in a normal symbol fluctuation display game. If a winning is detected while the game is not being opened, it is a winning abnormality. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and mainly occurs when a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a winning in a state where winning is impossible or a case where a large number of winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball due to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. For this reason, in the base calculation area update process that takes the winning abnormality into account, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, prizes are entered into the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 only during special prizes, so winning balls into these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and are not counted as winning balls. There is no need to consider abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, similar to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. The total number of awarded pitches is directly updated using the number of award pitches calculated in step S814, and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822). Note that in FIG. 73, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation has already been explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 2002 or 2004, but the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning into the starting hole is not held, the prize ball is paid out, so the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as mentioned above, when a winning is detected in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special winning (conditional device is in operation) that occurs due to a jackpot being derived in the special symbol fluctuation display game, If a win is detected in the starting opening 2004 even though the winning is not being released due to a win being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

A winning abnormality may be determined when one winning ball that has a winning abnormality is detected, or a winning abnormality may be determined when a predetermined number of winning balls that have a winning abnormality are detected. Furthermore, if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected consecutively, it may be determined that a winning abnormality has occurred, or if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that a winning abnormality has occurred. You may.

Then, the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and is obtained by reading the detection signals of these sensors in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to winning abnormality from the number of out pitches obtained may be added to the total number of out pitches, or after adding the number of acquired out pitches to the total number of out pitches, The number of winning pitches due to an abnormality may be subtracted from the total number of out pitches. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when a hand or finger is detected to be touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 74, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If the result of the determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is obtained (step S827).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the out balls are corrected by the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality. There is no need to correct out balls for winning balls that have a specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball involved in the winning abnormality, the winning ball may or may not be paid out for the winning ball. It is preferable that whether or not to pay out prize balls in response to this winning abnormality is determined for each winning hole. In this case, for winning abnormalities in which no prize balls are paid out, the winning balls should not be counted as the total out balls and should not be used in calculating the base value. On the other hand, regarding the winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, it is preferable to count the winning balls as the total number of out balls, and also count the prize balls that are paid out as the total number of prize balls, and use these to calculate the base value. Note that even in the case of a winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls are not counted as the total number of out balls, the prize balls that are paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and they do not need to be used in calculating the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance on a malfunctioning gaming machine (such as clearing a jammed ball), a hall employee may manually put a gaming ball into the starting hole and compensate for the ball being thrown out to prevent the player from losing money. In this case, the prize ball will be paid out for the winning ball in the starting hole. Although winning into this starting hole is detected as a winning abnormality, the prize ball is paid out. When a prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to determine it as a winning abnormality. In this case, the prize balls are paid out in the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are paid out in the other winning openings (big winning openings 2005, 2006). It is better to determine whether there is an abnormality in winnings without paying out the winnings. A winning hole that determines a winning abnormality is one that pays out fewer prize balls due to winning than a winning hole that does not determine a winning abnormality (3 winning balls for the starting hole and 15 winning balls for the big winning hole). For this reason, although abnormal winnings are determined in the big winning opening, even if abnormal winnings are not determined in the starting opening, it does not become a major security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent activities. In this manner, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent mismatch between the number of out balls and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to winning abnormalities that do not generate prize balls, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out balls that cause the winning balls.

As mentioned above, winning abnormalities can be determined in various winning holes, but a specific example of implementation in a pachinko machine will be described.

First, a winning abnormality may not be determined in the general winning hole 2001, but a winning abnormality may be determined in a winning hole other than the general winning hole 2001 (big winning hole 2005, 2006, starting hole 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to win a prize with multiple game balls at the same time, general winning openings are designed to improve the security resistance of gaming machines against fraudulent activities, as well as large winning openings 2005 and 2006, which are electrically operated accessories that open and close, and starting openings 2002 ( The player can be compensated for the ball hitting the ball into the general winning hole 2001 (total of 4 holes), which is larger than the general winning hole 2001 (total of 3 holes). In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 can be easily identified by a hall employee, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning openings 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged together (in separate areas) in the gaming area, and that electric accessories (grand winning openings) 2005, 2006, starting ports 2002, 2004) and decorative members (appearance) are different. Furthermore, when the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the general winning hole is small, there is an effect of improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. Note that winning abnormality may not be determined only with a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), but winning abnormality may be determined with other general winning openings.

In addition, winning abnormalities are not determined in the large winning holes 2005 and 2006, which have a large number of prize balls, and winnings are won in winning holes other than the large winning holes 2005 and 2006 (general winning hole 2001, starting hole 2002, 2004, which has a small number of prize balls). An abnormality may be determined. Since the large prize opening has a large number of prize balls per winning ball, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of winning balls. Therefore, it is convenient because changes in the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting a pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only in a specific big winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 2005 in which it is easy to insert a game ball by hand), but in other big winning holes (for example, 2006). .

Moreover, the winning abnormality may not be determined in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the winning abnormality may be determined in the winning openings other than the starting openings 2002 and 2004 (general winning opening 2001, large winning opening 2005 and 2006). Since the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the starting hole is smaller than that in the big winning hole, it is possible to compensate the player for hitting the ball while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against goths. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only based on a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to locate), but the winning abnormality may be determined using other starting openings 2004.

Furthermore, in the case of a big winning opening or a starting opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member of the opening/closing opening can be easily operated by a hall employee, and a winning abnormality is determined. Instead, a winning abnormality may be determined for a winning opening where the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member is difficult for a hall employee to operate. For example, a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening/closing member, which is vertically located in the closed state, is tilted to an oblique position so that the opening/closing member picks up game balls (so-called electric tulip) can be easily operated by a hall employee. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning hole is blocked by a flat plate-like member, and when the flat plate-like member is retracted, the entrance to the winning hole opens. is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning hole used to compensate players for hitting the ball, so it is easy for hall employees to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method for notifying an abnormality in prize winning may be the same as the method for notifying an abnormality in the number of winning balls (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, or displaying a warning on a game board or frame). It is preferable that the notification of prize winning abnormalities be made more relaxed than the notification of other abnormalities (such as lighting or flashing of decorative lamps, output of audio, sound effects, warning sounds, etc.). Specifically, the abnormality notification time is short, the abnormality notification characters are small, the lamp does not light up when an abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is lowered (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound during other abnormalities. ).

In addition, in the notification of a winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if a winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time will not be extended and the notification will be continued for the first time. It is preferable to end the notification after a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, if the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine rather than a fraudulent act by the player. Therefore, by notifying the winning abnormality for a predetermined period of time and not continuing the notification after that, it is possible to improve the work efficiency without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Furthermore, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined period of time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not disturbed and the work continues to be performed correctly. Specifically, although the display device and lamp continue to provide notification, it is preferable to stop the audio notification (or reduce the volume).

In summary, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means classifies a plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting hole, big winning hole). However, for the first type of winning hole, the number of out balls is corrected based on winning balls detected while the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning hole, The number of out pitches is not corrected based on winning balls detected while conditions are not met (during special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviations in the number of out pitches when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out pitches. Furthermore, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as maintenance. This allows accurate base values to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of a winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a winning abnormality (when it is not detected). Since there is a high possibility that the ball will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is preferable that winning balls determined to have a winning abnormality not be reflected in the number of out balls and not used for calculating the base value.

Further, winning abnormalities detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). This winning abnormality notification may be performed when one winning ball affected by a winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls affected by a winning abnormality are detected. In addition, a winning abnormality may be notified when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected in a row, or when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time. You may also make a notification.

Further, the notification of winning abnormality may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened next (conditional device is activated).

Note that it is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation process that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes, rather than when the CPU 13111 executes the division using a program. The base calculation processing described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in connection with the calculation of the base value, in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), the detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020 are read in the switch input processing (step S74), and the number of out balls is calculated. is counted, and in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated. After that, in base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in base calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, but the predetermined processing must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in slow division processing by a program, time-consuming processing must be included in the timer interrupt processing. That is, it is difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 until reading the operation result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom in the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), so a description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is determined by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects winning balls, the detection signal from the switch that detects cheating, the detection signal from the ejected ball sensor 3060, and the ejected ball sensor 1020. Count.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 1 (step S97). In base calculation process 1, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later using FIGS. 76 and 78.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later using FIGS. 77 and 79.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed. Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify players and hall employees of the base (base value or abnormality in the base value). The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (effect display device 1600, 3114, 244) or speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the effect display control unit 1512. and sound output commands. In addition, when making a notification using the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. This is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by a driver, the base notification command is a drive signal that includes a character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver). Further, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Further, if the total number of awarded pitches is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed every time the timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that base calculation processing 1 and base calculation processing 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt processing, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, one minute, which is a longer cycle than the timer interrupt processing). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described using FIGS. 78 to 79. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball count is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means, for example, a large number of prize balls in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (for example, a prize that corresponds to 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and starting opening). This is the case when a ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). Note that in step S9815, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. It's okay. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt processing described above (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95), so the same processing will be explained. is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In base calculation processing 3, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later using FIGS. 81 and 84.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later using FIGS. 82 and 85.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process that reads out the command from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generates a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of base display processing (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) during the timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described using FIGS. 84 and 85. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). Base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball count is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, when a large number of prize balls are received in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (e.g., 10 or more prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and starting opening). For example, when Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out pitches is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of base calculation process 4 has timed out (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S8904). Note that in step S8903, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. Good too. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the arithmetic circuit The input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the arithmetic circuit 13121. Specifically, the timing of writing the input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or before the special symbol or normal symbol. Preferably before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, it may be switched whether the number of prize balls or the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value. For example, the prize ball of the winning hole that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one winning ball) to be awarded when a game medium determined for each winning hole provided in the gaming area wins is 1, 3, If there are three types, 5 and 5, the maximum number of five prize balls and the corresponding number of out pitches need not be used in calculating the base value. This is because if a winning ball with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value will be large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded by processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). ), the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult for the hole to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine is achieving the set ball payout rate).

Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of one award pitch and the corresponding number of out pitches for calculating the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the single prize ball is not used for calculating the base value, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing method are rounded. This is because the displayed base value may not change if it is displayed (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), so processing that does not contribute to changes in display may be omitted.

Moreover, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the minimum is explained, the number of prize balls with an intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum number does not have to be used for calculating the base value. In this case, the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, so by averaging the maximum and minimum numbers, the number of prize balls and number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine is shown, and the appropriate Base value can be indicated.

Although the explanation has been given using three types of prize ball number patterns, the present invention is not limited to three types, and other types of prize ball number patterns such as five types or seven types may be used.

Furthermore, if a particular type of winning ball (such as the minimum value of 1 ball, intermediate value of 3 balls, maximum value of 5 balls, etc.) is not used to calculate the base value, the winning ball will be All winnings in the gaming state at the time of detection do not need to be used for calculating the base value. For example, if a win to a winning slot that awards 5 prize balls is not used for calculating the base value, in a gaming state where a winning to the winning slot is detected, the winning slot will not be used until the end of the gaming state. Winnings in the winning slot or other winning openings are not used to calculate the base value. Further, even after the start of the gaming state, winnings in the winning hole and other winning holes are not retroactively used in calculating the base value.

In addition, if the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning does not need to be used for calculating the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected will transition to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winnings up to this point in calculating the base value. By not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state where the calculated base value has a large change in the calculation of the base value, it is possible to check whether the pachinko machine is normal (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball output rate). This is to eliminate the possibility that the decision will be delayed.

Note that when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the prize ball that is the maximum (or minimum, or intermediate) for one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning hole sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether the winning is to be used for calculating the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of awarded pitches and total number of out pitches for calculating the base value are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and the number of winning balls is excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation is performed. In process 2 (step S98), it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. Further, if all the detected winnings are not used for calculating the base value, it is not necessary to execute base calculation process 1 (step S97) and base calculation process 2 (step S98) in FIG. 75.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from base value calculation is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and base calculation process 4 (step S94) In this case, it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. In addition, if all detected winnings are not used to calculate the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), base calculation process 4 (step S94), and base display process (step S95) in FIG. 80 are not executed. It's okay.

A method similar to the method for correcting out balls due to abnormal winnings described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted as a method for excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used for calculating the base value from the number of out balls.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning pitches whether the detected winnings are to be used for calculating the base value, base calculation processing 1 (step S97), base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether there is a special prize.

In this way, by excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches required for a given prize winning from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, making it easy to check whether the process is being executed accurately, especially at the development stage. can be confirmed. In addition, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the processing of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (such as lottery processing and processing for determining fluctuation patterns) can be executed accurately. can.

In other words, even if there are multiple awards with different degrees of advantage, even if the largest award is awarded to the player, it will not be used for calculating the base value, and the base value will be displayed without changing due to the awarding of the award. Ru. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize was awarded ends.

[9-12. Another configuration of the gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 4. Note that either one of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects the game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and then to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The total number of out pitches is the number of out pitches.

As described above, the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting results of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are compared, and the two counting results are obtained. An error may be notified if a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. Furthermore, an error may be notified if two counting results within a predetermined period of time differ by a predetermined amount or more.

Note that in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and the display contents of the base display 1317 (temporary section display and confirmed section display) are switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. (see FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than those described above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17.

FIGS. 88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are arranged in one line in a ball channel 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B. . The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the ejected game balls to flow down to the right side when viewed from the front and to be arranged in one line. The frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one line.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball channel 960 provided on the back side of the game board are caused to flow down in two lines and counted by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the starting ports 2002, 2004, and the big winning ports 2005, 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that allows the ejected game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be arranged in two strips. Each of the two frame-side ejected ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in each strip.

Although the frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be formed into a unit together with the bulb flow path 960 and configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the connection between the discharge bulb sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected to a connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via a relay board, and the output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected to a connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected is provided on the main control board 1310. It is recommended that it be installed below the .

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately, but as shown by the broken line, the board-side discharge ball sensor The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

Note that the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharged bulb sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or relay board, connect it to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a, and is located near the sensor that detects winnings in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (positions marked with stars in the figure). established in The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and the detection range is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player brings a magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the ejected ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted higher than the actual number, and the base value decreases. For this reason, the game parlor may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has undergone maintenance work based on a base value that is different from the actual value, the number of balls in the normal state will increase, allowing the player to play the game in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain more balls in the game. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such fraudulent payout of balls. Note that the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided in locations other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting an out ball with a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, magnetism is detected in a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 may include other winning ports (for example, the large winning port 2005 provided above the out port 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes an ejection ball sensor 3060 and winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor sensor 2554, second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), and the output signals of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

Main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 converts the level of signals input from various sensors, shapes them (for example, removes chattering), and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at a timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal that has been level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, and is sent to the buffer. It is input to any one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. Thereby, the detection results from each sensor are taken into the main control MPU 1311.

Interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the A1 to A8 terminals, and detects whether the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4 V) or at a predetermined threshold (for example, the power supply voltage - 0.1V), it detects a break in the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit in the switch, and if the input to any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, an abnormality signal E is generated. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and detects an abnormality in the power supply. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. In other words, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit in response to the input becomes OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine the signal output from the sensor as valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process input signals depending on whether or not the power of the switch has decreased, reducing the processing load and reducing the output signals of Y1 to Y8. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, it is possible to output a signal at a level that turns off each sensor.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives input signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prized balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation will not be executed and the display contents of the base display 1317 will be maintained and unchanged.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signals from the sensors used for calculating the base value and the signals from the sensors not used for calculating the base value, and if either signal becomes abnormal, Outputs an abnormal signal to stop base calculation.

93, FIG. 94, and FIG. 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. 93(A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93(B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to one An example of connection to a driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B), the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Display data is then output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line for outputting display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so as not to intersect with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided above the main control board 1310. The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A but also to the output line from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the magnetic detection sensor 1030. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side ejected bulb sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided on the lower side of the main control board 1310. Signals from the ejected bulb sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components placed between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side, where the solid line is the pattern on the back side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component side of the printed circuit board. shows. Note that illustration of the ground pattern and power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and are connected to the cathode-side segment of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

In addition, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333), and are passed through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the common terminal on the anode side of the

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is output at the timing when the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Furthermore, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311 . The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data in response to the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and The level of the data line between the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current necessary to drive the LED elements flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a source of noise. If the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, noise will be added to the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. This intersection of signal lines can also occur when the wiring patterns on the front and back sides of the printed circuit board intersect, or when the wiring patterns on the inner layer and the surface layer (front and back sides) intersect.

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that should not normally occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, causing the game to stop or the gaming state to be erased. . In addition, if the gaming state is erased at a timing that should not occur in the first place, the normal power-off processing will not be executed and will be reset, so the data stored in the RAM 1312 will be cleared, and the jackpot will end or the fluctuating display will change. The game may end midway, or the suspension of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game may be canceled.

The main control board box 1320 has parts that are low in height and other parts that are high depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other parts when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, so the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area to the left of , the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively tall electrolytic capacitors are mounted thereon. On the other hand, in the area to the right of where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low, and short components such as ICs are mounted (tall components cannot be placed). Note that the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and areas where tall components can be mounted are indicated by hatching. In addition, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height that is equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted and removed (preferably the same height as the board surface), and other It is best to ensure that there is no problem in inserting and removing the cable (connector) that connects to the board.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 in accordance with the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress fraudulent attempts to attach unauthorized components (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is placed at the upper right of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance reasons, the base display 1317 is placed in a position where it is difficult for the player to see the displayed content. It is preferable to arrange a display 1317. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business hours (to check whether there are game balls in the supply tank), if the player can see the display content on the base display 1317, the player Since players often do not correctly understand how to read the display on the base display 1317, players may request an explanation of the display content on the base display 1317. In addition, it is preferable to place the base display 1317 in a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, inquiries from players can be suppressed. In other words, the base display 1317 displays the base value for a maximum of 52,000 out pitches, but this is different from the base value for a short game played by the player, so complaints about the ball exit rate may arise. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, complaints from players can be suppressed. The above is the same for the accessory ratio display 1317 described above, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content.

As illustrated, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in a low height area of the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, as shown in FIG. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of light emitting diodes (LEDs), but they may be composed of lamps (bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in input data at the timing of a clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signals, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12V) that is input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs it to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. Outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED forming the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light up the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) receives the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Furthermore, the driving timing of the 7 segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of base display 1317 becomes HIGH. Driven.

In addition, in order to light up the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) transfers the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 to the segment data (low when lit). ). Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LEDs of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 are of the common anode type, current flows from driver 1 to driver 2 through the 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the outputs of drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V) when the segment is lit, and the outputs of drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

Note that latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus as is to the Q1 to Q8 terminals, but latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and are connected to the data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from the terminal.

Next, the output timing of signals when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 as shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Furthermore, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt process. That is, since the common data and segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are generated in different processes within the timer interrupt process, and output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Similarly, the segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same program is executed. In order to prevent common signals from being transmitted at different timings, control data that is common to the two codes may be used to control the common signal transmission timings so that they do not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 is provided, and for example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when the value is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting data sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data sent to the base display 1317, respectively. It is preferable to call the subroutine at a timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317. In this case, the output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, the subroutines are called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram of an example in which The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be explained below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 as segment data (LOW when lit). Output. Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, by using a common driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily downsized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board with three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board that has patterns only on the front and back sides. For this reason, even if it is possible to physically arrange components on the main control board 1310, which is composed of a two-layer board, it is not possible to secure an area for routing wiring patterns, and the board is forced to be larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break in timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) takes in common data (during driving) corresponding to the digit specified by D1 to D4. outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. Latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. The 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit on the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. Latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. output, and the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 lights up.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described process, and outputs the digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common side driver circuit, output the segment data in a time-sharing manner, and use the common common data to connect the base display 1317 and the function The LED elements of the display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in FIG. 93(B) and FIG. 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (e.g. Components can be easily mounted on the main control board 1310, where it is impossible to use a multilayer board or place components close to each other.

In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 using common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are 1317, the segment data is output at different timings. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common common data line, the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of chip select (CS2, CS1), and is erased at the rising timing of chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display 1317. becomes longer. This is by increasing the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the brightness, thereby reducing visibility from being directly illuminated by hall lighting. This is to prevent it. Furthermore, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, which is darker than the front side, even if the LED emits light at low brightness, the visibility of the base display 1317 is less affected. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a first LED and a second LED that are controlled by the main control MPU 1311, and the luminance of the first LED is set higher than the luminance of the second LED.

Note that, contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is outputted first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is outputted later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is changed to the display time of the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to base value calculation.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a provisional section display and a confirmed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section under measurement is displayed. Specifically, the first two digits display "bA." to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the bottom two digits display the base value A being measured as a two-digit percentage. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two digits, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value A is 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the provisional interval display, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are displayed blinking (for example, with a cycle of 0.6 seconds). (The light repeats turning on for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is a predetermined number (for example, 6,000) or more, the first two digits are lit to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, "bb." is lit in the first two digits to indicate that base value B is displayed, and the bottom two digits are the base value of the previous interval (the lower part of the previous period). The base value B), which is a two-digit final value, is displayed as a two-digit percentage by lighting. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value B is 0% or 100%.

Note that in the first section, since the previous section is a test section, no base value is measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, "bb." is blinking in the first two digits, and "--" is blinking in the bottom two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) of fewer than 500 out balls from the initial power-on is treated as a test period and the base value is not calculated. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is fired a predetermined number of times after it is powered on for the first time, the ball launch may vary within the range of the probability distribution, and the base value will not be stable, making it impossible to measure a meaningful base value. . Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is made undefined. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." is displayed in the first two digits and "--" is displayed in the last one digit, and in the confirmed section display, "bb." is displayed in the first two digits. , "--" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits on the base display 1317 are displayed blinking to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. Note that the base value may also be calculated in the test section, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be left undefined.

Here, the first time the power is turned on means the first time the power is turned on after completion of Pachinko machine 1, or the time immediately after the base calculation work area is initialized (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108). state. In addition, the power-on time generally used in this specification refers to a power-on time other than the initial power-on time.

Furthermore, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may blink at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). .

Note that when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (during jackpot, normal play, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52,000, the next section will start. , and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out pitches in one section is not 52,000, but may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 operates for 10 hours a day, 60,000, which is the daily operation (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. A round number such as 50,000 or 100,000 may be used.

Note that the configuration may be such that the number of out pitches in one section can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is preferable that a setting switch (such as a DIP switch or a rotary switch) is provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out pitches in one section is set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, if you change the settings of the switch, you can initialize the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) in the RAM 1312 and restart base value calculation from the test section, or restart from the beginning of the current section. good. Immediately after a pachinko machine is introduced as a new machine, it is often operated, so the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the operating period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means that can set the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit of calculation of the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, the operation is set based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

In addition, as a confirmed interval display, an example will be explained in which the interval immediately before the provisional interval currently being measured is displayed, but the base value of multiple confirmed intervals (for example, the interval 1 to 3 intervals before) can be switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched in the order of provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → confirmed section 3 at predetermined intervals, the display can be changed by operating a separately provided display changeover switch: provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the confirmed interval display are not "bb." It would be good to display it differently.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of one or more immediately preceding sections are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. Furthermore, a display that allows distinguishing the display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and a measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a 7-segment LED with multiple digits (for example, 4 digits), and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. The numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and the letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and the - sign can also be displayed. Additionally, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. A case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and a case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is compared with the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the check code calculation for the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized are when the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18) and when the power outage flag is abnormal (step S20) where the power outage flag is not set. , a RAM abnormality in which the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (gaming work area and gaming stack area) The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions for each type of data (gaming control area 13126 and base calculation area 13128). do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, preventing erasure of the base calculation area 13128 by the operation of a game hall attendant, and hiding an abnormal base value. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high base value or a low base value.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111), and peripheral control board 1510 is executed (step S32), and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), random number updating processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), output ports are cleared, and operations of devices controlled by outputs from each port are stopped (step S44). Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46), and checks the RAM 1312 using the checksum calculation result. It is stored in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) during the base calculation process, instead of during the main board side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be stored even when the power is cut off. can be maintained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

Note that the check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. In addition, in a modification described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating that the backup has been successfully performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56), and writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S56). S58), waits until recovery from power outage (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26(A) is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is constituted by a part of the RAM 1312, and as described above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches.

The base value A storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the temporary section currently being measured. The base value B storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the interval immediately before the provisional interval. The storage area of the section counter consists of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section in which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. Note that the section counter is preferably controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, to not exceed 2. Specifically, in the test section, the section counter = 0, in the first section, the section counter = 1, and after the second section, the section counter = 2. Further, the section counter may be controlled to have a value from 0 to 255 so that it does not become larger than 255, and after the second section, the section counter becomes equal to or greater than 2.

The storage area for the total number of out pitches is composed of 2 bytes, and stores the total number of out pitches regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of pitches out is used to determine interval switching, which is the base unit of measurement. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with approximately one day of operation as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out pitches. As mentioned above, the total number of out pitches is a storage area for counting all the number of out pitches for each section regardless of the game state, and the total number of out pitches in the above-mentioned example (the number of out pitches in the special prize) This is different from the total value since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low probability/non-time-saving number of out pitches consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes) and stores the number of out pitches (the number of out pitches in game states other than the special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls in game states other than special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. Note that the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches and the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving winning pitches should be 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, they should be the same number of bytes. It is preferable to do so.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out pitches in one section.

Furthermore, when providing a main area and a backup area of the base calculation area 13128, storage areas with the same configuration are provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later using FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts illustrating an example of base calculation processing.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as mentioned above, the winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or ejected ball sensor (board side ejected ball sensor 3060A, frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be performed. In addition, if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being carried out (for example, a magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, a vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or a radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value will be accurately calculated. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that this error has occurred, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that causes a game stop (e.g., magnetic, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not involve a game stop (e.g., prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) For failures that are not directly related to calculation (out of supply, full tank error, etc.), it may be determined that they are not errors (NO). In other words, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal conditions, but not to execute the base calculation process if there are other abnormalities.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of out pitches (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. When out balls are detected by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, the total value of the number detected by each sensor is obtained as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of prize balls (step S8015). As the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is obtained. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation is as explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball has been detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If an out ball has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing processing related to an out ball. On the other hand, if an out pitch is detected, the detected number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is an initial value of 0. It has become. Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that it is a test section. If it is a test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test period, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8019). Determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded can be made in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. When the game status is in the special prize mode, it means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot and the player can win many prize balls, but it does not include the opening and ending times of the jackpot game. It's okay. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the starting port 2004 is opened and closed (for example, until a ball that enters the starting port is detected as an out ball). (a few seconds) may be included in the grand prize. In addition, the so-called "hidden gaming state" which is a high probability gaming state but does not become a time saving mode (during electric support) is not included in the special prize, and is not included in the special prize. The base value may be calculated using the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed in a manner that allows identification of which base is being displayed.

A latent gaming state is a gaming state in which the player is not aware that it is a high probability state even if the probability is high, but if the latent gaming state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, if the slot is released during business hours. In some cases, a player may look at the base indicator 1317 and recognize that he is in a latent gaming state (ie, high probability). That is, when a hall employee takes care of a ball in the winning hole or sends a ball to the out hole with the slot open, the player can know the gaming status by seeing whether the base display changes. Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state.

On the other hand, in the business of a hall, there are cases where it is necessary to manage the base value in low probability/non-time saving states, and if the base value is calculated including the latent gaming state, it may not be possible to manage it according to the business form of the hall. . Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding latent gaming states. A similar problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state. In other words, since the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state are different gaming states to begin with, depending on the operating format of the hall, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each gaming state. .

In addition, when calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each gaming state, the base value is calculated using a common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, for the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting port 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It turns out.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving out ball count since the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of out pitches received is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than the special prize is detected each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027 reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a prize ball has been detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded may be the same as step S8019.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving prize ball count, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of awarded balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, an out ball or prize ball other than a special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the number of low probability/non-time-saving award balls is changed to a low-probability/non-time-saving out ball. A base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, if the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128) is a predetermined value of less than 500, and the section counter indicates that it is a test section; If the total number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if the test section is in progress and the timing is to end the test section, the process advances to step S8032 in order to transition from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033). With this process, the test section is ended and the process moves to the first section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out pitches is less than 52,000, the process advances to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more, the section ends, and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128, and writes it into the base value B storage area (step S8031). Thereafter, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As mentioned above, the interval counter is controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to be larger than 2, so if the interval counter value is 2, adding 1 to the interval counter does not The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process moves to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later using FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the final section display explained with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time period for switching between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display is the period of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time-short out pitches in each section is less than 6000. It is better to make the time sufficiently longer. This is because if the blinking and display switching are at the same frequency, it will be difficult to tell whether the blinking display (i.e., whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6,000), so it is difficult to tell whether the display is blinking or not. This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the check code calculation process in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). Also, if you want to use a fixed value without calculating the check code, it is recommended to use a multiple-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, such as A55AH (1010010101011010B)) ). Further, instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure it with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

As described above, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so the base value can be calculated without delay ( (in real time), and it is possible to judge without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Note that the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is the storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, so a check code is written at the end of each base calculation process. Even if calculated, there is little effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311.

In addition, when the base value of prize balls is calculated and displayed using the scheduled number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing at which the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing at which the prize balls are paid out may differ. are different. In other words, there is a problem with the payout device and the prize balls are not paid out (out of supply, the upper tray is full, a failure of the payout number counting sensor installed in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) The base value is calculated and displayed even if the system is stopped (such as when the system is stopped).

Note that in the base calculation process described above, the base value was calculated using the number of out pitches detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process was called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing for switching the interval described above (the number of out pitches is 52,000) arrives during one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which interval should be calculated as the base value. , can display accurate base values in real time.

Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt processing described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499, so when the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, the processes of steps S8042 to S8045 are executed, and when the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed. executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past confirmed section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the most recent confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the low-probability/non-time-saving out pitch count is smaller than 6000 (step S8050 ). If the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6000, the number of active pitches (number of out pitches) after starting base value measurement in the relevant section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display on the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 is lit without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process advances to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition has been completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined intervals, by switching the display contents on the base display 1317 using the display switching counter that is updated regularly, the current The base value A currently being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the confirmed interval can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the base value is displayed blinking in the range where it is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed whether the base value is in the stable range or in the unstable range by the display on the base display 1317.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except that the base calculation work check process (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. Note that in FIG. 108, the steps up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process will be explained, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

The subsequent processes (from step S8014) are the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, so their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal or not every timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), so an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly, Display of base values can be suppressed.

Next, a method for determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be explained. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “accessory ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is the “base calculation area 13128”). It is determined whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations regarding which processing (timing) to perform this normality/abnormality determination step and check code calculation step.
- Figures 101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
・Figures 21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization processing).
- Figures 106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case in which the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and determined when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described using FIGS. 101 and 106.

If the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106), the base calculation area 13128 A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to base value calculation is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and base value calculation starts from the test period.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining a check code calculated at power-off at power-on (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off process in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (eg, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Furthermore, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated and judged by timer interrupt processing)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) using the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be explained using FIGS. 106 and 108.

When the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128.

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

Note that when a fixed value is used for the check code instead of a checksum, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Furthermore, the determination may be made using both a checksum and a fixed value as the check code.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, and then a predetermined number of variable display games are completed, the time saving state is completed, and the normal state is returned. After that, in the normal state, it is further assumed that a game ball enters the opening opening 2004.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display in accordance with the winning of the starting hole 2004. That is, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to any winnings in the starting opening 2004 shown in the figure.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, so the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the low probability/non-time-saving out ball count. The second winning ball is added to the number of low-probability/non-time-shortened out pitches.

In the above, the explanation was given regarding the end of the time saving state, but the same applies to the end of the probability change due to ST.

In addition to when the above-mentioned time saving state ends, a similar phenomenon occurs when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol variation display game. It is assumed that in a normal state, one game ball wins while a starting hole 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a jackpot state starts after that, and further a game ball wins a prize in the starting hole 2004 while it is open.

In this case as well, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is low probability.・It is not added to the number of non-time-shortened out pitches.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. Assume that under normal conditions, one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and then a game ball enters the winning starting port 2004 while it is open. . As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error that prevents accurate calculation of the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the Do not use the sphere for base calculations.

In this case as well, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since out balls in which a specific error has occurred are not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is are not added to the number of low-probability/non-time-short out pitches.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, under specific conditions (such as when the time shortening ends, when a jackpot occurs in a special symbol variation display game, when a specific error occurs, etc.), a plurality of game balls that have won a prize while the electric accessory is activated There are cases in which it is used for calculating the base value and cases in which it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the special drawing can start to fluctuate in any winning.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the pre-read performance of the special symbol variation display game that is on hold, the first prize entered into the starting opening 2004 in the time-saving state is not subject to the pre-read performance, and is not performed in the normal state. The second prize that has been won may be the subject of a look-ahead presentation. On the contrary, the first prize won in the starting slot 2004 in a time-saving state may be subject to the pre-read effect, and the second prize won in the normal state may not be subject to the pre-read effect.

Note that although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the variable probability state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be explained.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is generally configured as shown in FIG. 18, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration regarding the storage area in detail.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage section 13142 as storage areas for storing data. The intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 exclusively temporarily stores data when the CPU 13111 executes the program (for example, a flag representing the state of the calculation result, the execution state of the program, data input/output to the CPU 13111, etc.). The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 temporarily stores, for example, random numbers updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and intermediate values in the random number update calculation. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the jump destination address are temporarily stored in the CPU internal auxiliary storage unit 13142, so that the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, values input to ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the process of creating edge information of a signal input from a switch, or detection results of edge information) can be temporarily stored. Store in.

In addition, when acquiring a random number at the time of winning a starting prize and storing it in the reserved storage area, the random number is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage section 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1312. to be memorized. In addition, when acquiring the random number at the time of winning the starting slot and performing a look-ahead judgment (judgment of winning or losing at the time of winning the starting slot) based on the value of the random number, the random number temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is used. The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the prefetch determination may be performed by reading (again) the random numerical value stored in the reserved storage area into any storage area of the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142.

The CPU-internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 is configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313, and is provided separately from the memory space specified by the address, and is specified by the name of each storage area included in the CPU-internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 (for example, Area0). . The intra-CPU auxiliary storage section 13142 includes a switching section 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of multiple storage areas (Area 0 to 6) of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is created for each predetermined number of storage areas (7 in the figure). are configured, and access from the processor core 13141 is possible for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can only access the auxiliary storage area 13145A, and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and 13145C.

The selection of this auxiliary storage area 13145 can be performed by switching a plurality of storage areas for each group at once with a single CHANGE command, as will be described later. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0, and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but any number of groups may be used as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage areas (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are storage areas provided separately from the RAM 1312 to temporarily store data during program execution, and even one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. It is also possible to use a plurality of bits as a set (for example, a set of Area 0 and Area 1, 2 bytes = 16 bits). Therefore, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without creating surplus capacity in the storage area. Furthermore, the storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area that is used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of other storage areas, and cannot be used by dividing it into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured with storage areas of multiple capacities, and storage areas that can be used in arbitrary combinations are provided, so the storage area can be used selectively depending on the purpose of calculation processing (for example, data length). be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, an address can be specified in one (or a combined set) of storage areas. Therefore, the number of command arguments can be reduced, and the command can be executed with a reduced number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches the storage area group that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area that stores data for determining an accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 includes, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching between 4 areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally. (If the abnormality flag is set, the switching command will be executed again) and the unauthorized access flag that is set when an abnormality occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 changes is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity/overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, etc.) representing the state of the calculation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but before proceeding to the base calculation process, interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction. Base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.

Thereafter, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction causes the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be used in the base calculation process of the call destination from group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller. Switch to group 1. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with one CHANGE command, and multiple storage areas can be switched all at once with one command (ie, fewer steps).

Furthermore, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312, and saves the stack pointer value. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer using the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. 108. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1, which is used in the call destination's base calculation process, to group 0, which is used in the call source's timer interrupt process, and then the RET instruction is used to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the call source's timer interrupt process. return. Generally, an instruction to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 and an instruction to restore data saved to the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from base calculation processing to timer interrupt processing, By returning the data saved to the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

In this way, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. Note that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (eg, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) may be used instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

Thereafter, after allowing interrupts with the EI command, the timer interrupt processing is continued, and the timer interrupt processing is ended with RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that interrupts may be prohibited using the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and may be enabled using the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, interrupts may be disabled when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Furthermore, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the purpose of disabling interrupts using the DI command is to set a state in which interrupts are enabled due to some circumstances to disabling interrupts. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should continue until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction is preferably executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above example, the switching register 13144 was saved in the caller's timer interrupt process, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 and stack area were switched in the callee's base calculation process. These processes may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves outside the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the caller's timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a part that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but before proceeding to the base calculation process, interrupts are prohibited by the DI instruction. By using an interrupt between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, base calculation processing can be performed without interrupting the processing during that time.

Thereafter, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the calling source to group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the called destination. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with one CHANGE command, and multiple storage areas can be switched all at once with one command (ie, fewer steps).

Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzz) in the RAM 1312 using the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is evacuate. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer using the LD instruction to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. 108. After the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1 used in the base calculation process of the call destination to group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the call source, and the POP instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 used in the call source timer interrupt process. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. Note that for saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144, other instructions (eg, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) may be used instead of using the stack manipulation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before the base calculation process was called by the return of the switching register 13144, so there is no need to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 using the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched using the CHANGE instruction.

Thereafter, after allowing interrupts with the EI command, the timer interrupt processing is continued, and the timer interrupt processing is ended with RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

Note that, as described above, interrupts may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and interrupts may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, by directly manipulating the interrupt enable flag, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, interrupts may be disabled when timer interrupt processing starts, and interrupts may be enabled at the timing of execution of the RETI instruction.

Furthermore, since the timer interrupt process is originally executed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process. In the illustrated program example, the purpose of disabling interrupts using the DI command is to set a state in which interrupts are enabled due to some circumstances to disabling interrupts. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should continue until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction is preferably executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example has been described in which the timer interrupt processing, the base calculation processing, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 are switched, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may also be switched in the inspection processing executed by the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, it is preferable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing using a CHANGE instruction at the beginning of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. In addition, initialization processing (step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21) , timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.), and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each process.

Furthermore, if only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed within the gaming control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and processing executed outside the gaming control area (for example, debugging) The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched between processes executed in the inspection function area, base calculation area, etc. (for example, debugging processing, base calculation processing, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 can be used inside and outside the game control area. Good too.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 will be used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing, but since the main control side main processing that is being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt processing is started, the timer interrupt At the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the gaming control stack area 13137, and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). It is preferable to return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, if data is saved to the stack area one unit (byte or word) at a time, the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for restoring data from the stack area increases. In addition, in this case, if the order of processing for saving data to the stack area and restoring data from the stack area is incorrect, different data will be read from the stack area, and subsequent processing may not be performed correctly. . Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and restore all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area at once, The above problem can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved to the stack area, there is a possibility that the stack area will overflow and data outside the area scheduled as the stack area (such as a stack area for other purposes) may be rewritten. be. Therefore, in addition to an instruction to collectively store all storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, there is also an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area. , an instruction may be provided and executed to collectively restore a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area.

In this way, when moving to a process outside the gaming control area, it is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to a process within the gaming control area, it is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so the data is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. Processing can proceed without saving the data to the RAM 1312 (eg, stack area).

In addition, the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area) when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to processing within the gaming control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be restored without being recovered from the RAM 1312.

In addition, when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, it switches to another stack area, and when moving to processing within the gaming control area, it switches to the original stack area, so the stack area used for processing within the gaming control area is , Processing inside and outside the gaming control area can be completely separated without being updated in processing outside the gaming control area.

Also, when moving to processing outside the gaming control area, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, stack area), and when moving to processing within the gaming control area, the saved value is used for switching. Since it is restored to the register 13144, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the process outside the game control area, and the processes inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. The memory arrangement shown in FIG. 113 shows a stack area in the RAM 1312 that is omitted from the memory arrangement described above in FIG. 26, but the RAM 1312 shown in FIG. 26 also includes a stack area.

The ROM 1313 stores game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, base calculation/display code 13135, and base calculation/display data 13136. Contains storage space. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) that stores programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) that stores programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. A base calculation area (third storage area) is allocated to store programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136.

There is an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more between the final address of game control data 13132 and the start address of debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in dump list format. The game control area and the debugging (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation/display code 13135. It is preferable that the predetermined length be 16 bytes or more because the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. Note that the value stored in the free area is preferably the same fixed value, and is set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area, or a value with a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that causes the CPU to do nothing. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debugging (inspection function) area, and base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Furthermore, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the gaming control area and other areas, we can reduce the amount of data in the debugging area (debugging (inspection function) code, debugging (inspection function) data) that is not directly related to controlling the progress of the game. ) and the base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area to prevent problems (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 from affecting the game control. Avoiding risks that could have an impact.

Note that the debugging (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes that are not directly related to gaming, such as various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 in addition to game control of the pachinko machine 1. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. These debugging (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debugging (inspection function) signals. Furthermore, the base calculation area stores a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Moreover, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debugging (inspection function) code 13133. is configured so that it can be executed, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. This increases the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, changes in the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum. .

Moreover, the base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the base calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 can be inspected. This can be done separately, and the effort required to inspect the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Furthermore, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models, regardless of the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area where data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and it is possible to read and write data from the game control area 13126. In addition, although data cannot be written to the game control area 13126 from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, read access is possible. - The display code 13135 can refer to data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debugging area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation/display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area where data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area where data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is used exclusively for temporarily saving data stored in the intra-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. Note that the stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113(B) is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may include a main area where the base calculation results are stored, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 where copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the main control side power-off process (see Figure 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if the power outage flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that if the main area is determined to be abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (steps in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control side power-off processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Furthermore, in the base calculation/display process, the values in the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation/display process. It is sufficient if the entire main area or only the updated value area is copied to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

[11. Recording of gaming history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines a performance that matches the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from among a plurality of prepared performances, and transfers the determined performance to the performance display device. 1600. At this time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines to display a specific effect among the plurality of prepared effects (for example, two types of specific effects among the three types of super reach), the peripheral control unit 1511 starts from the switching of the gaming state. The effect display device 1600 displays the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, the number of times the effect has appeared) along with the progress of the game. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appeared at the 34th spin at 10:25, the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and at the 127th spin at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and Super Reach 2 appeared at the 428th spin at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a sure-fire jackpot. The following message is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, a jackpot on the 15th spin and a jackpot on the 50th spin) can be confirmed on the data display installed in the hall, but the specific performance that appeared before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is doing well or not based on the extent to which a particular effect appears (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the jackpot, they think that they will win the jackpot in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the performance is displayed in a visible manner. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player is checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display shows the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared, the player can It takes time to confirm the extent of the appearance of the problem, and the operation of the game machine may decrease. For this reason, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (a reach effect with high expectations for a jackpot) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each performance may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the effect that has appeared. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the number of fluctuations and the information on the effect that has appeared based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required for a limited specific effect to appear is added and displayed, instead of all the effects that have appeared. All you have to do is process it.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 that is in operation, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees of the hall. The form of this notification is to display the error screen shown in FIG. 115(A) on the effect display device 1600, or display the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115(B) on the effect display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error. or outputs an alarm sound, or outputs an error signal shown in FIG. 116 from the external terminal board 784. Further, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. An error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is reported outside the pachinko machine 1 so that an employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, if there is a poor connection of the cable between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the middle right of the door is Lights up in blue.

However, errors occur due to various causes, such as minor malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnected connectors), severe malfunctions that require parts replacement, and fraudulent acts.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must find the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. Searching for the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error leads to a decline in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know detailed information about the error that has occurred, it can quickly resolve the error and shorten the time during which the Pachinko machine 1 stops operating.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to investigate the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable to use the following information: Game history information such as "number" is required. If there is a malfunction in Pachinko machine 1, it is not a big problem as it can be resolved by repair or replacing parts, but if game balls are acquired through fraudulent acts, chances for normal players to earn profits will be reduced, and the This may interfere with the operations of the hall, and ultimately, the hall may find itself in financial difficulties.

If such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of connector terminals used in the external terminal board 784 will increase, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 will increase. Furthermore, since events such as "winning in the general prize opening", "winning in the grand prize opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbols change" occur frequently, when all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the information, which increases the burden on halls.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes the stored data referable later. This makes it possible to check the details of the circumstances leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the occurrence times of events that occurred in the process leading up to the occurrence of these errors (number of wins in the general winning opening, number of winnings in the big winning opening, number of gates passed, number of normal symbol changes, etc.) are recorded, so you can find out how much time has passed. You can see how many events have occurred. For example, abnormalities such as the number of winnings in the general winning slot being 50 per minute can be detected.

Note that recording the date and time of occurrence for each event increases the amount of data used to find the cause of error occurrence, and it takes time to find the cause of error occurrence. Therefore, if a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute), it may be output as error information and notified.

For example, it is possible to enter the general winning slot in any gaming state, so if there are more than a predetermined number of wins in a predetermined time, it would be a good idea to output error information and notify you, but it is possible to enter the big winning slot only during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined time period from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of jackpots are won in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, a peripheral control unit 1511 records a game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 120 includes a game history recording process (step S1023) added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310, if the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as the date and time of occurrence of an event, for example, in a format as shown in FIG. 122. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in order to retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off, it is preferable to record the game history in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and has low power consumption.

The game history recording process (step S1023) is preferably executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing game history recording processing at an early stage of peripheral control unit steady processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if processing related to game control is stopped midway and some performances are not executed. In other words, even if some performances are not executed (even if all performances are not executed), the results of the lottery that have already been performed on the main control board 1310 will not change, and the benefits given to the player will also change. Since there is no such thing, the gaming history is recorded with priority over the performance. Furthermore, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to game control, the game history recording process can be shared among multiple types of pachinko machines.

Next, a process will be described when the memory capacity of recorded game history reaches the upper limit. If the amount of data of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not need to be updated. In other words, the information stored in memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and each time the peripheral control unit 1511 processing can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit, a game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, there is no need to check the free space of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing by the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes. Control, sound control) can be reliably executed, and the free processing time can be used to start new processing (for example, processing that is executed across multiple peripheral control unit steady processes due to lack of processing time). Alternatively, a process that does not need to be executed every time and is executed once every several peripheral control unit steady processes (for example, a process for switching the selection table) may be executed.

Note that the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the types of commands to be recorded as the game history among the commands that the peripheral control unit 1511 receives from the main control board 1310, that is, the events to be recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the generation conditions of the commands and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the winning of a game ball to the starting port 2002 and starting port 2004 is detected, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering each starting port. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbols start changing, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the special symbols 1 and 2. Can count the number of changes.

Further, a power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain a ram clear operation and the like. The state command at the start of variation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the time the special symbol starts to fluctuate. There are four states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/time saving, and high probability/non-time saving.Changes in state can be obtained and the state starts in each state. The number of fluctuations that occurred can be counted. Here, low probability is a state in which the probability of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is the normal probability, and high probability is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is a state where the probability of a jackpot is derived is the normal probability. This is a state in which the probability that is derived is higher than normal. Time saving means that the probability that the second starting port door member 2549 will be in the open (or enlarged) state is higher than that of non-time saving, or the time from when the normal symbol starts changing to when it is fixed. This is a state in which the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state more frequently than in a non-time saving state, such as when the time is shortened. Accordingly, the probability that a performance with a short time for one special symbol variation display game will be selected increases.

The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the great winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 and the grand prize opening 2006, respectively. The command is sent, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each big winning hole.

Big winning opening 1 winning command (below the stipulated prize) and Big winning opening 2 winning command (below the stipulating winning) command is for the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively, where only the specified number of game balls can be won by the end of the round. If not, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The big winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulating winning) are used when a game ball exceeding the specified number wins in the big winning opening 2005 and big winning opening 2006, respectively. When the opening is completed, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winnings in one round for each big winning opening. Note that this command is sent after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each grand prize opening 2005, 2006, when a specified number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) determined in one round are detected and the grand prize opening is When the game ball is closed, there is a possibility that an undetected game ball is present in the grand prize opening, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even in such a case of over-winning.

The jackpot OP command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous activation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of jackpots. The transfer destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, so that the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the situation after the jackpot.

The small win OP command is used when the big prize opening is opened for a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time of multiple openings is less than 1.8 seconds). When there is a hit in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (a so-called small win), a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small wins.

The normal symbol stop command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the stopped symbol of the normal symbol and count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The common figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even if a player enters the starting gate or passes through the gate (for example, due to overflow or no memory), the main control board 1310 instructs the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the starting gate 1 prize. Send the time command, starting gate 2 winning command, and common gate passage command. Therefore, the peripheral control section 1511 can count the number of winning balls that enter the starting port and the number of balls that pass through the gate section.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain the timing of error occurrence and count the number of errors.

The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command are commands that are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters each general winning hole 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole 2001. In addition, it is preferable that the general winning hole winning commands are determined by the number of general winning holes 2001 provided in the gaming area 5a, and the case where three general winning holes 2001 are provided is illustrated above. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning holes 2001, so four types of general winning holes can be entered, from the general winning hole 1 winning command to the general winning hole 4 winning command. Commands are defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of event occurrence time. The event occurrence date and time may be recorded as the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310, or the time at which the main control board 1310 detects the occurrence of the event may be recorded to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time are recorded down to the minute, but may be recorded down to the second.

By analyzing the gaming history in the format shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know details of events that occur in connection with commands sent from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in gaming status, results of variable display games, etc.) . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and the contents of the command indicate that the RAM was cleared and the game started in a low-probability, non-time-saving state. I understand. In other words, the hall opened for business at 3:30 p.m., the Pachinko machine 1 was turned on, the player started playing after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), and won a prize in General Winning Port 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 4 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol), the special symbol fluctuation start event You can see the results of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game was started based on the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result. Although the results of the special symbol fluctuation display games are not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol fluctuation display game is determined based on the numerical value indicating the result of the fluctuation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. The results of the variable display game (loss, normal 4th round, high probability 4th round, high probability 16th round, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method for the hole to refer to the information (gaming history) recorded in the memory will be explained.

First, a history output interface 1590 is provided to output information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, upon receiving the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1, and upon receiving a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured with a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control section 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control section 1511. The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (eg, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history may be a history reference command exclusively for outputting the game history, or a command that is not sent when the pachinko machine 1 is playing a normal game after being powered on (Fig. 121 The history reference command may be a command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (not defined in ). The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, even if a command is sent during a normal game, a history reference command may be sent under conditions of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, if 50 prizes are won in the starting slot or the general winning slot in one minute. Furthermore, the game history may be output when commands used for game control are received in a special order that is normally impossible.

Note that an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (effect display device) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (in a place that cannot be seen by the player) to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs production control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also communicates control commands and various information (various data) with the production display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Effect display control that performs drawing control of the peripheral control unit 1511 that interacts with the effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. 1512, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control section 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that control the performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the performance display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing data, etc.), and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and management of special performance flags) a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores peripheral control MPU 1511a (such as information to ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (in the case of a long-term power outage), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power through an electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. It becomes impossible to do so and loses its content.

In addition, power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 that is different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is supplied with power by the backup power source 1513, and is configured so that the stored contents can be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is configured with a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of retaining data in at least a portion of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for a period of several weeks to about one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a separate package from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured together with the peripheral control MPU in the package of the peripheral control CPU.

FIG. 124(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which has an area for storing game history in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the gaming history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. It will be done.

When operating the RAM clear switch to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (area for performance control) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. data in the area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which constitutes an area for storing game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 and a game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124(B), when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control Data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. For this reason, the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably configured to be physically separated.

Note that the area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured with a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which no power is supplied without providing a backup power source 1513.

In either form of FIGS. 124(A) and 124(B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be initialized using any method that is different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored gaming state information and the gaming history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if you turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch, and if you continue to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, both the stored gaming state information and gaming history will be initialized. may be converted into

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from a normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, the main control board 1310 continues to send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. or when power-on commands are received continuously, the gaming history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing a means for initializing the data in the gaming history storage area in this manner, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is performed.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door-side motor drive data is sent from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and is used to drive frame decoration to output drive signals to the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3. Sends data from the serial I/O port for the amplifier board motor to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board from the serial I/O port for the LED through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send it to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405 provided in the production operation unit 220 is also transmitted. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

As explained above, in the game machine of this embodiment, events that occur during a game are recorded as a game history according to commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Events can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall has closed) to understand the performance and malfunctions of gaming machines. Furthermore, since the gaming history is stored in a non-volatile memory (SRAM to which backup power is input), the gaming history can be checked even after restarting the gaming machine.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc. For example, if you win the starting slot 1, you will need to know (1) the fact that you won the starting slot 1, (2) the time you won the starting slot 1, and (3) the events that occurred before you won the starting slot 1. As such, more information is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. This means that when a prize is won in the starting slot, the minimum necessary information ((1) information indicating the fact that the winning opening was won in the starting slot) is output from the external terminal board 784, and in special cases (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when the player investigates the information stored in the pachinko machine 1. This is because if all the information stored internally is output from the external terminal board 784 when a prize is won in the starting slot, the amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will increase, which may put a burden on the hall. It is. In other words, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is transmitted to the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 784. The information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked in special cases by outputting it to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

[11-2. Compact proposal 1]
Next, a modification of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described. Note that some of the modified examples described below partially change the embodiment described above, and form a part of the embodiment.

In the embodiment described above, the event (command type) that occurred and the date and time of event occurrence were recorded for a predetermined command among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the huge amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. For this reason, in modification 1 (compact plan 1), changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table of Modification 1.

In the game history recording condition setting table of modification 1, commands to be recorded as the game history are defined separately into commands for counting and commands that trigger state changes, and commands for which attributes of both are set are defined. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable state change column are provided for the convenience of explanation; if the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. .

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis, and creates a record for counting the number of events. Add.

For example, the power-on command, the status command at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot OP command, the destination command at the end of the jackpot operation, and the error display command are commands that are issued depending on the state change. It can be grasped as a change in state such as the start of a jackpot state, the end of a jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state.

Also, using a counting command, the number of events that triggered the issuing of the counting command is counted. Specifically, with the starting opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command, the number of winning balls to each starting opening can be counted. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of changes in each special symbol. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the grand winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls into each grand prize opening. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified number of prizes) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified number of winnings) can count the number of rounds that ended with the specified number of winnings or less. The big prize opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) can count the number of rounds that have ended in excess of the stipulated number of winnings (that is, over-winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small wins. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The general game gate passage command can obtain the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section. The error display command can count the number of errors that have occurred. The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 1.

The game history of modification 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. This includes the cumulative number of count events detected until the end of the event (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time point at which the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The counting events are recorded separately in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/no time saving state, high probability/non time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. The status may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, the counting events include the number of winnings in starting opening 1, the number of winnings in starting opening 2, the number of changes in special symbol 1, the number of changes in special symbol 2, the number of wins in general winning opening 1, the number of winnings in general winning opening 2, The number of wins in the general winning hole 3, the number of wins in the big winning hole 1, the number of wins in the big winning hole 2, the number of gate passes, and the number of normal symbol variations are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, data that is not derived very frequently and whose cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of winnings from general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1 byte data and 2 byte data.

Further, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. The counting event after the state change is then recorded in a new record.

Note that the counting results of the counting events in the current state are preferably recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state changes. Note that a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created in response to a state change, but a new record may be created at the start of a period in which counting events are counted. In this case, even if no data is stored in the created new record while the counting event is being counted, 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting results of counting events for the relevant period are stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is stored. The numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, if the number of counting events detected during the relevant state (from the previous state change event to the relevant state change event) is recorded as the game history, the counted value of the counting event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in history storage area.

That is, each time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up in the event of a power outage. , will be initialized by a normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low probability/non-time-saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings in starting port 1 is 50 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of modification 1. In No. 1, after the gaming state changes, it is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, unless the gaming state changes, no gaming history is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the RAM is cleared while the probability is low and the time is not saved, the number of winnings of 50 will be initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the counted value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Furthermore, even if the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is preferable to execute the game history recording process. In this case, it is not necessary to continue recording the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and store the cumulative number of counted events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately previous state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced each time. can. Furthermore, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As explained above, in the first modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification is characterized in that more information is recorded internally than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is Information (gaming history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is committed in a state where no new record is created in the gaming history storage area (while the same gaming state continues), it may be difficult to discover the fraud. As mentioned above, in order to analyze the information (gaming history) written in the memory, the hall can check the information written in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, but in the pachinko machine 1 of modification example 1, Since information is not written to the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d unless the gaming state changes, the current state information (gaming history) cannot be confirmed even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Even in such cases, a check function may be provided to detect fraud at an early stage.

Specifically, a first record (latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the gaming history of the most recent state is recorded and a second record (record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the gaming history of the current state is recorded. If the comparison result satisfies a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in a pachinko machine 1 that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the game ball is fired in a rolling manner on the right side of the gaming area 5a in a high probability/time saving state or a jackpot gaming state, there is a transition from a high probability/time saving state to a jackpot gaming state. However, if the state changes to the high probability/time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state changes, the player is usually hitting the right hand, so the possibility of winning in the general prize opening on the left side of the game area 5a is low. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability/time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. It is preferable that the allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls entered into the general winning hole between states is one, and if a difference of two or more occurs, an error is reported. This is because if the player takes his hand off the shooting handle, the shooting force may become uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from an external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 116. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects errors by predicting the game based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it is likely to hit right because it is in a high probability/time saving state), so inexperienced players can There is a possibility that an error will be detected if you hit the ball in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact proposal 2]
In the above-mentioned modification 1, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded in the state change event, and the number of counting events in each state during the switching is recorded. was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state that repeatedly occurs. Therefore, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 2.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of Modification 2 is composed of a state event history and the cumulative number of each counted event for each state. The state event history includes a state change event that triggered a state change of the pachinko machine 1, a state after the state change event, and a time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the second modification, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. Ru. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 2 include the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command).

Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in nonvolatile memory, and the counting event described above is performed in accordance with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (number of winnings, number of changes, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

[11-4. Compact proposal 3]
In the above-mentioned modification 2, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded as a state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in modification 3 (compact plan 3), the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counted events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of Modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The reason why the cumulative time is included is to enable the hole to estimate the number of occurrences of an event (for example, the number of jackpots, etc.) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they can be further subdivided. Counting events may also be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 3 are the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the counting events described above is recorded in accordance with the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (number of winnings, number of changes, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

As explained above, in Modifications 1 to 3, when an event occurs by the game history recording process, it is recorded once in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and when the conditions for writing it in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met. Then, the data in the work area is written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in a normal RAM clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Let me briefly touch on hall operations here. In many cases, halls have set business hours, for example, opening time is 10:00 and closing time is 23:00. Therefore, during times when there are many players, such as when the store has just opened or in the evening, it may be difficult for store staff to monitor whether the players are playing illegally. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine in a high probability/time saving state just before closing time, the pachinko machine with a high probability/time saving state is initialized in preparation for the next day's operation, and the pachinko machine with a low probability/time saving state is It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines that are in a high-probability/time-saving state, so it can be seen whether the most recent games have been fraudulent. In other words, considering the fact that there are some pachinko machines that do not require the most recent gaming history, it is possible to provide a more efficient gaming machine by allowing the clerk to select whether or not to leave the most recent information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by performing a ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for events that occurred after the most recent event is erased, and the game history is stored for events that occurred before the most recent event. The game history stored in the area remains. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The gaming history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, the clerk only has to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to erase the record of events recorded in the work area, The clerk only needs to perform the ram clear operation. The reason why we decided to use the RAM clear operation to delete only the gaming history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event, rather than erasing all the gaming history, is because the RAM clear operation does not erase all gaming history. This is because the store staff has not seen the events that have occurred up to that point (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, not only the information that a prize has been won in the starting hole is recorded, but also the winning in the general winning hole that is unrelated to the lottery is also recorded in the work area, so the special symbol ( Even if the symbol (which starts to fluctuate when it enters the starting hole and shows the lottery result of winning or losing by the way this symbol stops) does not fluctuate, the game continues as long as the game ball is launched into the gaming area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed in response to a winning or losing lottery, but is a process that may be executed at all times while power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in a low probability/non-time saving state, the game ball is fired so that the game ball enters the starting hole 2002 like a so-called left-handed hit or a short hit. In such a case, a moderate amount of prizes should be won in the starting hole 2002 and the general winning hole 2001. However, there are cases where there are no (or very few) winnings in the general winning hole 2001 but many game balls are winning in the starting hole 2002, or conversely, there are no (or very few) winnings in the starting hole 2002. ), but if many game balls are won in the general winning hole 2001, there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. Therefore, the first winning hole and the second winning hole where game balls win at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning hole is a predetermined multiplier of the number of winnings in the second winning hole. An error may be reported when the limit exceeds the limit.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error will be detected if an inexperienced player plays in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated over a plurality of games is collected as a game history. There is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, so if you record every single game (one change), you won't be able to record many games (for a long time). There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function for changing the operating ratio of the condition device, for example, as a game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting section as seen from the back side with the door open. 130 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 viewed from the back side with the door closed, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting section of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operating state of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132(A), the setting board 970 includes a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting key 971 for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The settings board 970 functions as a settings change operation unit that accepts settings change operations.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control section 952. The finalized settings are transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. Note that, as described later, the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is used to change to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position to maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contacts. This is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. Note that instead of providing the setting key 971, another switch may be used. In this case, by operating (long-pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 is activated during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. You may exit the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode by pressing and holding the button for a long time.

Further, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the settings, making it easier to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation at the falling edge of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the set value=6, the set value becomes 1. Note that the setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. Note that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be set to a smaller number (for example, 2 levels) or a larger number (eg, 8 levels).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages; in the neutral position (normal position), the key can be inserted and removed; turning it to the left is the operation to start the setting change mode; turning it to the right is the operation to set the setting This is an operation for selecting a value (when turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation that can hold the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation that does not hold the right position (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the winning probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low winning probability, and the set value = 6 has a high winning probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the proportion of variable jackpots, the proportion of time saving (ST) after jackpot, the number of time saving times, the number of rounds and counts of jackpots, the probability of winning a regular pattern, the general prize opening, starting opening, and big winning opening. The number of prize balls that the player can acquire may be changed by changing various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. It is preferable that the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 be configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as to avoid operating both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured as a momentary type toggle switch.

Note that the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Alternatively, the selected setting value may be determined based on the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the operation button 220C, the operation of the ball lending button, etc. The selected settings may be confirmed by operating the return button, detecting winning of game balls into the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing games) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is provided with three switches (including a setting key) in order to set the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 is provided with one or two switches. It is enough to set it up.

Further, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only with the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, a RAM clear switch can be used. 954 for a predetermined time or longer (long press), the set value can be determined. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is finalized.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). . Note that the setting display 974 may be configured with a settable number of LEDs instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type display by a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error, but this error type display and the setting display 974 are also used, The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the error type display and the setting value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be lit when displaying the setting value. Further, the error type may be displayed by a lighting display (not blinking), and the setting value may be displayed by a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 alongside the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and power switch 932, which are operated when changing settings, are placed close together, making it easier to change settings. can be improved.

Further, as described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

In still another form, the setting board 970 may be configured not as an independent board but as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on either the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1 (that is, on the frame side, not on the game board 5), and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, obstructs insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to change settings by making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation section). It functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By making it difficult to operate the board 970, it is possible to prevent players from cheating by changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The setting change difficulty device configured by a member provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971, which is the trigger for starting the setting change mode, with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case includes a first cover that prevents careless operation of the setting key 971 and each switch 972, 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-like lid body that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, a second cover body is provided on the outer frame 2 to cover various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310. Note that the second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started due to careless operations, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent actions by unauthorized players who change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

It is preferable to arrange the setting board 970 near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 operated when changing settings and the power switch 932 are arranged close to each other. In this way, the operability when starting the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

FIG. 132(B) is a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, causing the setting key 971 to Key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It has become difficult to check the current settings of a pachinko machine.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970.

In this modification, as in the above-described example, a setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed on the back side of the main body frame 4, not on the side side, so that the keyhole faces the side surface. As shown in FIG. 133(B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, and the side surface (i.e., the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is located in the right frame member 40. Since the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as other boards, and even if the difficulty of board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 can be operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modification of a pachinko machine having a setting section will be described. In this modification, a setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modification, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section seen from behind, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132(A) or the one shown in FIG. 133(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operating state of each switch. controls the display on the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as in the embodiments described above, and common explanations will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. For this reason, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used, and the selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. The base display 1317 normally displays the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the confirmed section (straight section) while switching at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, four digits are used to display the base value, but only one predetermined digit (eg, the rightmost digit) may be used to display the set value, and "-" may be displayed. Digits that are not used in displaying set values may be displayed with other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used in displaying base values. Furthermore, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the setting values are displayed in six alphabetical stages: A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value be displayed blinking while the setting value is being selected, and that the set value that has been determined may be displayed lit. In addition, it is preferable to display the current set value by lighting it up. Furthermore, in the base display, the first two digits represent the type of display data, and no numbers are displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. Note that if the base display 1317 and setting display 974 are used together, the setting value will be displayed with priority during setting change mode and setting confirmation, so even though the base value is being calculated, the base value will not be displayed. Not done. Thereafter, when the setting change mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value.

In addition, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the process of outputting the display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display contents are output to the base display 1317. The output processing is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, the process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided within the game control area. By sharing processing, the program capacity can be reduced and memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for base calculation and display outside the game control area. When executed with code 13135, processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, improving security.

Further, settings change and setting confirmation processing may be executed outside the game control area.

In other words, even if the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is used also as the base display 1317, both cases fall within the scope of the invention described in this specification. In this way, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 in a way that is not confusing during the setting change mode or while checking the set values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of the set values when changing the settings.

Further, even if the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off or turned on completely while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the setting change mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value. By not displaying multiple displays on the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode or while checking the set values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of the set values when changing the settings.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed as a part of the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the main control board 1310 may include a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes and cutouts for operating the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening/closing direction, differs depending on the orientation of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted perpendicularly into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated perpendicularly to the setting board 970 between the front and back sides of the setting board 970, or the main control board box 1320 is separated into a front side box ( Alternatively, the cover) and the backside box may be structured so that they can be opened and closed using a hinge on one side. On the other hand, when inserting the key 975 from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 is inserted in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends by using the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure in which the key 975 is slid and separated in the direction in which the key 975 is inserted.

In this modification, operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and The switch is difficult to operate. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). Fraudulent acts such as changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the board 970 can be suppressed.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIG. 132(B) and FIG. 133(B). . In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 with a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, processing related to setting changes will be explained.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that setting change processing is performed in S28). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the setting value data and the gaming state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, prize balls) (information related to) is left, other data is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the setting of the power outage flag. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that has not been executed (step S20), a RAM abnormality in which the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, data on probability change state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside game control area) is not cleared. . If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power failure flag error or RAM error, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area is cleared. Area 13128 (including the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, a setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(A) cooperate will be described.

When the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those mentioned above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). There is no need to start the setting change mode if there is a balance on the card (there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance on the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. These conditions may be determined by the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 after receiving the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the settings change mode. .

(2) When the settings change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a settings change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), where the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage) , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing the initial motion of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the effect display device 1600, if the initial movement of the accessory is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the effect display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the setting change process will be delayed. This is because it interferes with

Furthermore, in conjunction with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the settings change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 notifies the setting change mode by stopping the output of the firing permission signal, stopping the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functioning as a firing disabling means. Good too. When stopping the firing of game balls during the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and when the setting value is 0, no setting is made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) is not set. Firing, variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means that determines whether the conditions for setting change are met before the setting change is finalized.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. is displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, so the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. This setting change end command notifies the main control MPU 1311 of the finalized setting value.

(13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting change mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951) , the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In addition, in the process described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may also determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 may be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage However, a signal at an intermediate potential other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key 971 and activating the setting change mode, the main control unit 952 sends signals related to the operation of the setting key 971 using signals that cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the board 1310.

Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312, and transmits a setting value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

Note that in the above, the setting values stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) are displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the setting values, and the setting values are stored in the payout control unit 952. The set values may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, a setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. The detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch. Moreover, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. Conditions for starting the setting change mode other than those mentioned above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). There is no need to start the setting change mode if there is a balance on the card (there is a balance on the card) or there is a balance on the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is attempting to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the settings change mode. .

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, and executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), where the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage) , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode includes performing the initial motion of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the effect display device 1600, if the initial movement of the accessory is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the effect display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the setting change process will be delayed. This is because it interferes with

Furthermore, in conjunction with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, turning off or lighting up all the LEDs for displaying special symbols). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the settings change mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 notifies the setting change mode by stopping the output of the firing permission signal, stopping the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and functioning as a firing disabling means. Good too. When stopping the firing of game balls during the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and when the setting value is 0, no setting is made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be terminated, and the game (game ball) is not set. Firing, variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 performs a setting change that determines whether the conditions for the setting change are met (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is finalized. It functions as a permissible state generating means.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. Displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is ended, so the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting change mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310) Since the main control board 1310 acquires the main body frame release switch detection signal from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate. The settings change process is being executed.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

In the setting change process described in FIGS. 138(A) and 139(A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, it is preferable to invalidate the setting change mode and temporarily stop the setting change mode. Then, by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting change mode is restarted. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value in a state where no setting value is selected = 0).

It is preferable to record a history of changes to set values a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the settings were finalized and the finalized setting values are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When storing the history of setting values in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. Furthermore, the recorded history of setting value changes can be output. For example, it is preferable to display the recorded history of setting value changes on the effect display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of pitches out in the section in which the base value is currently being measured is less than 52,000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine changes depending on the setting value, by changing the interval by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different gaming performance, and it is possible to understand the change in the base value due to the change of the setting value. .

Furthermore, when the set value is changed, the interval in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the conditioner, it is also possible to design the base value so that it does not change significantly by changing the set value. This is because in such a case, there is no need to change the interval for calculating the base value by changing the set value.

Furthermore, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. Compared to turning on the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971, considering the operation method and arrangement of the operating means, operating the setting key 971 is less likely to be accidentally operated, so starting the setting change mode This is because it is considered to be the intention of the operator. In addition, in the setting change mode, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the gaming state and base value are cleared, so even if you wish to clear the RAM, it is considered that starting the setting change mode is sufficient. .

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without starting the setting change mode. This is because if both are being operated, it is considered that the operator wishes to at least clear the RAM. Further, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting change mode or clear the RAM. This is because from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In clearing the RAM in steps (3) and (15) described above, the gaming state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of special symbols may be erased. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbols and perform a new lottery.

On the other hand, the special symbol lottery (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball enters the starting slot, but since the lottery result is determined at the start of the variable display game, the conditions after changing the setting value are What is necessary is to judge the random value that has been held and stored. For this reason, a reserved memory of special symbols may be maintained.

Furthermore, in the RAM clearing of steps (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area that is erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clearing process during the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased (playing state data is also erased), but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. Normally, settings changes are made between the time the hall closes and the next day's opening, so data on gaming conditions (variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) will be erased. There is no need to maintain it without doing so.

[12-2. Effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
The details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be explained. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will also be collectively referred to as starting ports. In addition, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the big winning hole. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the acceptance of a game ball into the starting hole, that is, the starting prize is triggered (starting condition is met), and a jackpot is achieved for each starting memory information (starting information) where this starting condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is obtained, and it is determined whether this random number for determining a jackpot matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery results, and if the random number for jackpot matches the jackpot judgment value (predetermined winning conditions are met), the normal To shift from a game state to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be explained along the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won in the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball B wins in the grand prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a grand prize opening prize designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole is determined by checking the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Main control MPU1311, when the game ball wins in the starting hole (result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the starting hole winning process, you can set the starting hole winning command that is sent when a new game ball enters the starting hole, extract random numbers for jackpot determination, etc. and store them in a predetermined area, and create special symbols. It executes processing for executing a look-ahead effect.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable that specifies the type of branch process to be executed according to the progress of the game (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process moves to a branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the branch process that has been moved is finished, special symbols and special electric accessories are controlled. Finish the process. Note that the values of game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, so they are backed up in the main control side power-off processing.

In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, branch processes include special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol variation process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), Special symbol missing stop process (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), interval process before opening the big winning hole (step S140), big winning hole opening process (step S142), big winning hole closing process (step S144) or the big winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball B enters the starting hole, processing for starting variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device, etc. is performed.

In the special symbol variation process (step S132), processing for controlling the variable display of the special symbol, etc. is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting hole, it is determined whether the special symbol that has been fixed and stopped will generate a jackpot game state.

In the special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), when a jackpot game state is not to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the effect is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, processing is performed to stop the variable display of the special symbol and notify that fact.

In the interval process before opening the jackpot opening (step S140), processing for generating a jackpot game state and notifying that the jackpot operation is started is performed. In the big winning hole opening process (step S142), processing related to the jackpot operation that makes it easy for game balls to enter each big winning hole by opening the big winning hole is performed.

In the big winning hole closing process (step S144), processing related to a jackpot operation that makes it difficult for game balls to enter each big winning hole by changing the big winning hole from an open state to a closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation has ended, a process is performed to notify that fact.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be explained. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, and if the variable display is on hold, preparations are made to start the variable display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is pending (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol activated pending balls is not 0 or not. In addition, the number of special symbol activation reserved balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the variation of the special symbol is not pending (the result of step S420 is "no"), the process ends because the display of the variation of the special symbol is not started.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets a command for designating the number of reserved balls as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol/flag setting processing (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on random numbers for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol variation pattern setting processing (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as a command value (step S452). Furthermore, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the fluctuation type type value is acquired from the fluctuation type type area (step S460), and the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation type is added to the command value set in the process of step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variable pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created through the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved pitch number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be explained. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the number of special symbol activation reserved balls (step S530). The number of special symbol activated pending balls is stored in the special symbol activated pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol activation pending balls and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The fluctuation type type value acquired by the fluctuation type determination process is set (step S550).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time depending on the number of pseudo-runs. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference variation time value searched in the process of step S546, and obtains the final variation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is ended.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes hit (hit fluctuation selection information state table), loss (loss fluctuation selection information state table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information state table), and reach probability (special symbol reach probability) depending on the gaming state etc. This is a data table in which table information for referring to a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). By determining whether the hit determination value matches the jackpot value, it is determined whether the jackpot has been won (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, a variation information number for determining a winning variation pattern selection value data table is obtained from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 obtains the random number 1 for variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won the jackpot or the small jackpot (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (step S350). S372).

When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the loss fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved pitches (step S372). S376).

On the other hand, when generating a reach in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for variation pattern acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, a variation pattern selection value data table is obtained through the variation information number search process, and a variation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, a variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and the process ends.

In this embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages using two types of random numbers: random number 1 for variation pattern (steps S360, S372, S378) and random number 2 for variation pattern (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ series reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation patterns. Furthermore, a variation pattern to be finally displayed in a variable manner (a value set in a variation pattern command) is selected from a group of variation patterns selected by random number 1 for variation patterns based on random number 2 for variation patterns. Note that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, but may be a method in which drawings are drawn in three or more stages, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one random number for variation patterns.

[12-3. [Explanation of effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
Hereinafter, the performance in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be explained. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls paid out for the number of special drawings. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability variable state (for example, setting 1:1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4:1/270 , setting 5:1/250, setting 6:1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the highest setting possible, the player's desire to play increases by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern using one random number for variation patterns in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 executes the following process in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state (whether it is a time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state) and the result of the special lottery (if you have won the jackpot) (or not) and select a variation pattern table depending on the result. If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for a fluctuation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for a fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, It is assumed that a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a failure, it is further determined whether a reach has occurred, obtaining a random number for a variation pattern, and distributing the obtained random number for a variation pattern and each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table. A variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table based on .

FIG. 144(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 144(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding performance content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information specifying the type for identifying variation patterns in the table. The variation time column stores information specifying the variation time in the corresponding variation pattern type. The corresponding performance content column stores information specifying the performance content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining fluctuation patterns stores the distribution by which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the distribution random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is a loss (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) is and when no reach occurs, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144(A) will be explained. First, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be explained while also using FIG. 144.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In the variation of the losing variation pattern 20, after SP Reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a winning result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is a winning result. A confirmation display indicating that there is something is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuations of losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a losing result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting is performed. A suggestive performance is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on a performance display device 1600.

In this way, in fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a failure, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that even if the temporary display is executed. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion performance to occur and maintain a sense of anticipation. In addition, when a setting suggestion performance occurs in a losing variation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment due to the special lottery result and further increase his sense of elation.

In addition, in the variation of the losing variation pattern 24, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a winning result is displayed on the production display device 1600, and then a setting suggestion production is executed. Although a fake performance suggesting that the setting is not performed is executed, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the performance display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion performance itself.

Note that SP reach is a reach effect that has a high probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and a low probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high when SP reach is executed.

Hereinafter, effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically explained. In addition to the contents described below, in each production, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, movement of various movable bodies, and/or display on the production display device 1600, etc. are simultaneously executed. Good too.

In the out-of-reach variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the pre-reach performance is first performed. In the pre-reach performance, all decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 change. Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the normal reach performance develops. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern is in the reach state on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a fluctuating state.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half performance of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP Reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and they play rock, paper, scissors. In the first half performance of SP Reach 1 in the losing variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. In addition, during SP reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a smaller position and closer to the periphery of the effect display device 1600, for example, compared to the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the second half performance of SP reach 1 develops. In the second half performance of SP Reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival performance is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half performance, the voice of the main character such as "Not yet!" is output from various speakers, and the performance is completed. On the display device 1600, an effect is executed again in which a game of rock, paper, scissors is played between the main character and the enemy character. In the second half performance of SP reach 1 in the losing variation patterns 24 to 29, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the main character loses again to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the performance display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in the off state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same as the symbol that stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the same as the symbol that stopped in the reach state, The same pattern and different patterns) are displayed in a manner that appears to be oscillating in a small width.

Subsequently, in the losing variation pattern 20, after the temporary display, a final display indicating that the special lottery result was a losing result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without any other effects being performed. In the losing variation pattern 24, a setting suggestion false effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the final display, for example, in the performance display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols as the combination displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped state. In addition, in the tentative display and the final display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the center of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion fake performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 24, for example, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and chases the enemy characters but is unable to catch them. It is desirable that the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion false effect is performed is equal or approximately equal for all settings, such as the distribution of the out-of-range variation patterns 24 in FIG. 144(A). This is because if the distribution is not equal, the false setting suggestion effect will suggest the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the proportion of the distribution of the outlying variation pattern 24 to the total distribution of variations in which SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, false setting suggestion performances will occur frequently when the SP reaches 1, and there is a risk that the player's expectations for the occurrence of setting suggestion performances may be diminished.

In the setting suggestion performance in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, on the performance display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and captures the enemy characters, and then the three characters play a rock-paper-scissors game. The performance is executed.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 25, a performance is performed in which all three players play rock-paper-scissors in a rock-paper-scissors game and end up falling in love. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is determined to be distributed only at low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the deviation variation pattern 25 is a performance that confirms a low setting.

In the example of FIG. 144(A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 etc. in the high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is If this occurs, there is a possibility that the player will stop playing the game early, so the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmed effects in other settings, or the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 25 itself may not exist.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 26, in a rock-paper-scissors game between three people, a performance is performed in which all three players take out the scissors and fall in love with each other. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the off-set variation pattern 26 is a performance that confirms the high setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 27, a performance is executed in which all three players make par in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and the game ends in a match. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 27 is a performance that confirms the even number setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 28, a performance is performed in which all three players make different moves in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people and the game ends in love. Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 28 is a performance that confirms the odd number setting.

Note that, for example, when odd number settings and even number settings have different characteristics, by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the performance. .

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is highest in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, The ratio of probability-variable jackpots among the jackpot wins is high in the order of 2 (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are in the order of settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. It is assumed that the probability of winning the jackpot and the variable probability ratio for each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the winning number of game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state, but the probability variation ratio is lower, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game from the first hit also tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to even number settings, odd number settings have a lower probability of winning the jackpot under normal conditions, but have a higher probability of winning. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game is likely to be large. In such a case, a situation may occur where one player prefers the ball output tendency with an even number setting and another player prefers the ball output tendency with an odd number setting, so the odd number setting confirmation performance or the even number setting confirmation Players' interest in the performance increases. Furthermore, compared to odd number settings, even number settings may have a feature such as a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the normal state, but a jackpot with a smaller number of rounds is more likely to be selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the presentation until the setting suggestion presentation is started is the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion presentation are different (the results in the rock-paper-scissors game between three people are different). Note that it is preferable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors game presentation be used only in the losing variation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, when the three-player rock-paper-scissors competition performance starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion performance has started, and his sense of excitement is further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect that confirms a high setting is executed, but it may also be a variation pattern in which an effect indicating that a high setting is likely to be established is executed. Specifically, for example, if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 is present even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the performance in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern 25 is is not an effect that confirms a high setting, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which a performance that confirms a high setting is performed, a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting as described above is likely to be performed may be determined. What has been described above also applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the highest setting confirmation effect, and the like.

Furthermore, according to the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 144(B) (the fluctuation pattern table during normal times and when winning a jackpot), if the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the winning fluctuation pattern other than the winning fluctuation pattern 34 in which the highest setting is determined is determined. The setting suggestion effect is not executed. Further, the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is a failure. As a result, the setting suggestion performance is mainly performed when the special lottery result is a loss, and even when the special lottery result is a loss, the player can feel a sense of anticipation.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening variation]
The deviation variation pattern 30 will be explained below with reference to FIG. 146 as well. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. A shortened variation is, for example, a variation whose variation time is short compared to other variation patterns, and after the variation of decorative symbols starts on the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols are changed without developing into a reach state. is a fluctuation that stops. In a normal variation, the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600 stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may stop at once.

Subsequently, in the losing fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is likely to be a loser, a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a loser. Descriptions of the tentative display and final display are the same as those described above, and will therefore be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which shortening variations such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 are executed. In the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Further, in FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In addition, the distribution of the outlier variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which a shortening variation is executed and that suggests setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns in which a shortening variation is executed (for example, (10% or less of the minimum distribution) is desirable. Further, in each variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the final display is the same, and only the time of the shortening variation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the losing variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which other shortening variations are executed is such that the player can recognize it (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

As a result, when the shortening variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time like the variation patterns 1 and 2, which have many distributions, but when the variation variation pattern 30 is executed, the player assumes a variation time that is different from the expected variation time. You can recognize the difference and enjoy the performance where the highest setting is determined. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144(A), the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when the player is out of reach, so when the shortening variation is executed, the player loses his or her expectations and loses interest in the shortening variation. I can't hold it anymore. However, by executing the setting suggestion performance using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation that is only selected when the player is out of reach, and this suppresses a decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the same, only the time of the shortening variation is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the maximum setting confirmed performance.

Note that the deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed, but for each setting other than the maximum setting, there is also a variation in which the setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each of the variation patterns is different from the variation time of other outlier variation patterns in which shortening variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before provisional display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 will be explained with reference to FIG. 147 as well. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the effect executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. Special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, that is, it is an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

The losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are different from the losing variation patterns 25 to 30, etc. in that the setting suggestion effect is started before the temporary display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the start of the variation). Thereby, the player can feel a sense of excitement as he waits for notification of the jackpot lottery result with the highest setting determined. In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the settings of the Pachinko machine 1 are at their highest settings, and in turn, the players The player can feel a sense of superiority over the other players, and it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to the other players that they are using the highest settings.

[12-7. Setting suggestion performance that confirms jackpot winning or high setting]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 will be explained with reference to FIG. 148 as well. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144(A). In FIG. 144(A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34.

In the losing variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win, and then a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win.

Therefore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, either the high setting or the jackpot in the variation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is a failure after Special Movie 2 occurs, the high setting will be confirmed, so the player can suppress the disappointment of the special lottery result being a failure, and in turn, the high setting will be confirmed. You can feel a sense of elation as the result has been confirmed.

In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player may feel superior to other players, and furthermore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, If the special lottery result is a loss, it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion performance in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected when the gaming state is in the time saving state will be explained. FIG. 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 149(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 in the case of a non-reaching deviation. Further, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is shorter than the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the more likely it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and the There is a risk that the number of game balls paid out will increase, leading to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example in FIG. 149(A), the higher the setting, the more fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are distributed, making it difficult to equalize the number of game balls paid out by jackpot per unit time in each setting. can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of outlier fluctuation pattern 3, which has a longer fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns including shortening fluctuations, so that outlier fluctuation pattern 3 also functions as a fluctuation pattern that suggests a high setting. I can do it.

Similarly, when there is a reach and a miss, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the miss variation pattern 11 with a long variation time becomes, and the smaller the distribution of the miss variation pattern 12 with a short variation time. Similarly, when winning a jackpot, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the winning variation pattern 2 with a longer variation time is, and the smaller the distribution of the winning variation pattern 3 with a shorter variation time.

As mentioned above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting is, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the greater the number of game balls fired until the jackpot is won. For example, if the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of fluctuation patterns with longer fluctuation times, and the lower the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, if a player stops firing a game ball during fluctuation, each It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the settings.

Note that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing at which a setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emitting effect may be exclusive ones that are executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. In addition, particularly in a setting suggestion performance in which a high setting or a maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect or a predetermined light emitting performance be performed only in the setting suggestion performance.

Note that it is desirable that the distribution of a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting or a maximum setting is determined or is likely to be performed is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, even if the player has only been playing for a short time, if the high setting suggestion performance or the highest setting suggestion performance is not executed, the player will lose expectations and may end up stopping the game early. This is because there is a risk of cancellation.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which a performance indicating that a low setting or minimum setting is fixed or highly likely is executed is extremely low compared to distribution of other variation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion performance and the minimum setting suggestion performance will be executed frequently, and there is a risk that the player will lose his sense of expectation and eventually stop playing the game at an early stage.

Moreover, although the setting suggestion performance that suggests groups of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting groups in the setting suggestion performance are not limited to these. A setting suggestion performance may be performed for an arbitrary group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only setting 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above explanation, the setting board 970 was connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquired the operation status of each switch and controlled the display on the setting display 974. The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation status of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

FIG. 150(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150(A). In the example shown in FIG. 150(B), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to a main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) that trigger RAM clearing are provided in the main control board box 1320. Note that, as will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 where data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

Setting board 970 is provided close to main control board 1310, and setting board 970 and main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying settings or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position where it can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out the authentication code set on the setting board 970 and checks it. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 will not be able to start playing. That is, although it is possible to shoot game balls toward the game area 5a, the prize balls are not paid out even if they enter the winning slot, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each model of pachinko machine, or a serial number may be set for each pachinko machine. The authentication code can be set using, for example, a DIP switch provided on the setting board 970, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, or a pattern short-circuit, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example, A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board based on the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent incorrect mounting of the setting board 970 into the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, by setting an authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

FIG. 150(C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 150(A).

As mentioned above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a gaming performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding prize balls won by a player, such as jackpot probability in a special symbol variable display game, and the performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, there are some halls where a conventional pachinko machine without a setting function is sufficient and the setting function is not necessary. For this reason, pachinko machine manufacturers need to design and produce both pachinko machines without setting functions and pachinko machines with setting functions. There is a need for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have a setting function, a dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same way as when the setting board 970 is mounted. Make it. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 can be shared between a pachinko machine that does not have a setting function and a pachinko machine that does have a setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices mounted on the setting board 970, such as the setting keys 971 and the setting display 974, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, although a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, no device is mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed circuit board, but may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Furthermore, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is not open or grounded on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. The setting function is provided by providing a small door on the main control board box 1320 that can be moved to close the hole 971A so that it can be operated from inside the main control board box 1320 but cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared between a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function.

Note that an authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may also be set in a dummy board 979, which will be described later. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and does not require setting an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 972 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 972, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 972 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), press the pachinko machine. Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

(4) No setting change switch 972, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

The implementation example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differs from the implementation example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 151(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by the small door 1321. A key unit 1322 is provided in the small door 1321, and by inserting a key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed, allowing settings to be made. The mode switch 976 can now be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152(A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the lock 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the lock 1323 is inserted into the catch 1324, and the lock 1323 and the catch 1324 are are engaged, and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the bolt 1323 retreats from the maximum protrusion position and the engagement between the bolt 1323 and the catch seat 1324 is released. , the small door 1321 can be opened about the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is released from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

That is, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 closes and fixes the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. Setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 includes a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, in addition to a main control MPU and a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. [Details of setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 differs from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (step S17, step S30). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

Note that it is preferable that the RAM clear switch 954 is detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result is stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value is determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, this is a normal RAM clear operation, and the process advances to step S30, where a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on with both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 being operated, the setting change mode is entered. That is, since the operation of two switches and the operation of the power switch are required to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake.

In the setting change mode, first, setting values are displayed (step S60). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 into setting change mode during a game, and it is possible for fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified if the setting change mode is entered during business hours because of the nature of the change.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the settings change mode, or output from the start to the end of the settings change mode, or from the start of the settings change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the settings change mode. You can also output it. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation has been performed based on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it into the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured as a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned once to the right, the setting value is changed by one step. The main control MPU 1311 then generates data for displaying the changed setting value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

Thereafter, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is ended and the process proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting change mode may be ended by returning the setting key 971 to its normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the process described above, the process proceeds to step S30 after the setting change mode ends or if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), and the power outage flag is not set and the power outage flag is checked. If the sums do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. Note that if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process advances to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, setting value data, base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and gaming state (for example, probability variable state, The data regarding the time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, and information regarding prize balls) are left, other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. Note that the gaming state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 and a setting change operation is further detected.

Further, if no operation of the setting key 971 is detected in step S17, in step S30, the setting value data and base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128 ) is left and the other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Further, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). .

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and performs a check calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cut. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 backs up the data in the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases in which at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the case that the power outage flag is initialized. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that is not set (step S20), an abnormality in the RAM where the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, data on probability change state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside game control area) is not cleared. . If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (Figures 155 and 156). May be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and confirmation of setting values due to careless operations while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation can be prevented.

In this case, apart from the setting key 971, an operation section (for example, a push button switch) for confirming the settings is provided (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of an operation section for confirming the settings), and when the power is turned on, When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data to be displayed on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. It's good to do that. In this case as well, it is preferable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (the setting change mode ends). During the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 performs control so as to remember that the RAM clearing process is to be executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above, and next, clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be explained.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may also be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Furthermore, whether or not to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by operation. For example, if you turn on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 will be cleared, and with the setting key 971 turned on, If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, but the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operating method, it is possible to clear a part of the main control RAM 1312 and execute processing that does not clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952.

In addition, when clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing when the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the timing when the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. This may occur. That is, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operations), although the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, a state may occur where the main control RAM 1312 is not cleared.

In addition, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310 but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 or the power supply board 931, it is possible to change the setting value while operating the RAM clear switch 954. It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared when the power is turned on. That is, instead of the payout control unit 952 clearing the RAM in response to a RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, the payout control unit 952 detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 clears the RAM. It is determined whether the operation is being performed, and it is determined whether the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is to be cleared. Providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of being compatible with various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. [Details of settings confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a setting value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. Note that the same steps as in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 and FIG. 104 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates a base value (step S801; see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

Thereafter, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying setting values indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, a hall employee performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using FIG. 156.

Subsequently, output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and the current settings can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to its normal position, data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is opened. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is assumed that some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent activity) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting It is better not to display it. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the settings.

The setting values may be displayed at any time while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Further, a setting display condition may be provided that allows display at a specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time since the power is turned on (or the CPU initialization in step S28), and to enable display of the set value until the timer times out.

Furthermore, a setting display condition may be provided that allows the setting value to be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the set display conditions cannot be displayed during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided that allows the setting value to be displayed during periods other than during special symbol fluctuations and during jackpots. Note that the set value may not be displayed in game states other than those described above. In this case, if the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or jackpot game, the setting value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display conditions are met, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during play, and this can be a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because if a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, from the start to the end of the set value display, or from the start of the set value display to a predetermined period after the end of the set value display. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the set value display ends, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display conditions are met, but even if the setting display conditions are not met, a security signal may be sent if a setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. good.

Thereafter, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974.

Note that if the setting display conditions are not met, the conditions will be checked until the setting display conditions are met, but there is a possibility that you will not be able to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be ended. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, if the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition will be satisfied with the end of the special symbol variation display. The setting value will be displayed. Further, if the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be immediately ended without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is displayed with priority during setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. In a gaming situation where many prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desirable to check changes in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal when changing settings or checking settings]
FIG. 157 is a timing chart of security signals output in conjunction with setting changes and setting confirmations.

As described above, a security signal is output during setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Furthermore, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode instead of for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157(B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in conjunction with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157(C). The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, but for a period from the start to end of setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) after the detection of the error, as shown in FIG. 157(D). If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during setting confirmation, a security signal is output for a predetermined period of time after the error is detected, as shown in FIG. 157(E). That is, a security signal caused by setting confirmation and a security signal caused by error detection are output continuously for more than a predetermined time (T seconds) (predetermined time from error detection). Note that even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not need to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during output of the security signal, the security signal due to the error detection is not output, but is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Note that during the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 1 does not detect errors, so the security signal caused by setting confirmation and the security signal caused by error detection do not overlap. That is, during the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal is extended.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation process]
Another example of the setting confirmation process will be described below. In the above explanation, we have mainly explained an example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the peripheral control unit steady process, but below, the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1. An example will be explained below.

Specifically, for example, if the setting key is on when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process moves to the setting confirmation process. The details of this process will be explained below. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of initialization processing. The differences from FIG. 154 will be explained. If the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 moves to a setting confirmation process in step S807, and then moves to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the process proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be explained. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the set display conditions are satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062: Yes), it outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the set display conditions are not satisfied (step S8062: No), it executes the process of step S8062 again.

Following the processing in step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is off (step S8071). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination in step S8071 again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example. If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), it hides the setting value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, the number of pending memories managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining variation time for the special symbol, etc. are stored as they are. After that, if the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 in the on state), after the setting confirmation process is completed (the settings are set without turning the power off) After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol variation is restarted. At this time, for example, the effects that were being executed along with the special symbol change (effects using display devices, effects using lamps, sound effects using speakers, effects using movable objects, etc.) Nothing will be done after the fluctuation resumes.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the special symbol variation will be changed. The performance that was being executed at the same time may be restarted. For example, the interrupted performance using the display device, lamps, and speakers may be resumed. In addition, for performances using movable bodies, for example, it is stipulated that the movable body is operated in the performance pattern of the performance after the special symbol variation is restarted or after the movable body is returned to the initial position when the power is turned on. If so, the movable body is operated according to the performance pattern.

In other words, if the movable object moves to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it will be returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or the setting confirmation process is completed, and then If the determined performance includes a performance that causes the movable body to move (move), the movable body may be operated (moved). Note that if the movable body moves to the setting confirmation state while it is in motion (movement), the movement pattern for the motion (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to its initial position. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated from the front.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation and the settings confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation is restarted after the setting confirmation process is finished, the special symbol variation will be changed. Among the performances that were being executed at the same time, the performances using display devices, performances using lamps, and sound performances using speakers are restarted, and the movable body is returned to the initial position after the special symbol variation is restarted or when the power is turned on. There is no need to return it or perform a performance using a movable body.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during special symbol fluctuations and the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, the performance display device 1600 It may be possible to restart the fluctuation of the decorative pattern that was displayed (resuming the performance that was originally scheduled to be performed), or to restart the fluctuation of the decorative pattern until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). A high-speed fluctuation may be performed with the decorative pattern made transparent, or the decorative pattern may be hidden until the pattern is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the pattern is confirmed). Further, when the symbols are determined, for example, the combination of decorative symbols that was planned before the power is turned off is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, at the end of the special symbol variation after restarting, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed during normal special symbol variations may be selected. A combination (for example, "XXXX", etc.) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during special symbol fluctuation, the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, and when the setting confirmation process is completed and the normal state is restored, the setting key 971 is turned off. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is turned on normally) may be performed (for example, operations such as checking a predetermined operation of a movable body, a predetermined light emission of an LED, etc.). (The above-mentioned effects, etc. may be restarted after performing this initial operation).

In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while a look-ahead effect is being performed during special symbol fluctuations, and the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, for example, the special symbol after the setting confirmation process is When symbol fluctuation is resumed, the pre-read effect and the pre-read effect for the special symbol change that was suspended immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, a special stage that shows the player that there is a high expectation of a jackpot across multiple fluctuations, from the rival horse performance described later to the horse racing performance) Developing zones (horse racing performances are special zones that have high expectations for themselves (for example, expectations are relatively higher than the dialogue performances described later))) are displayed on standby, and the special (Erase the display effect in the zone, or return the pending display to normal white if it is blue instead of normal white.) However, a pre-read effect may be executed for special symbol changes corresponding to winnings after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while a look-ahead effect is being performed during special symbol fluctuations, and the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on, for example, the special symbol after the setting confirmation process is When symbol fluctuation is restarted, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol fluctuation is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone that was displayed during the special symbol fluctuation that was being performed before the power was turned off) The display on standby or the display effect in the special zone can be erased, or if the pending display is, for example, blue instead of the usual white, it can be returned to the normal white), but the following The pre-reading effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (returning the erased display to its original state, or if the effect pattern was to promote the pre-reading effect at the start of the variation, it may be restored in the display mode after promotion). good). In this case, the pre-read performance to be executed from the next special symbol variation is resumed, for example, assuming that the pre-read production during the special symbol variation has not been stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the pre-read performance that was scheduled to be performed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new pattern of pre-reading effect may be set, and the effect of the new pre-reading pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion production]
An example of a process in which execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described below. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 under normal conditions are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively, and It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities for Settings 1 to 6 are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. Further, it is assumed that the probability change ratio at the time of winning the jackpot is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310, for example. In the explanation of FIG. 142, etc., an example was explained in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning/losing type of special lottery results, but in the example of FIG. is defined. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common variation pattern table is used in all settings.

The variation pattern table in FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning/losing type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the performance of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation patterns of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning/losing type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example of FIG. 144, the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column is a reach effect that has a high rate of selection when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and a very low rate of selection when the result of the special lottery is a loss. It is. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high for the variation in which Movie Reach is executed. Furthermore, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the "+1 symbol" described in the summary column when the winning type is "miss" means that after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, the decorative symbol that fluctuates until the end is in the reach state. Indicates that the machine will stop after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the decorative symbol "7" enters the ready-to-win state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". A "+1 symbol" when the win/loss type is "Jackpot" means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end passes one decorative symbol that is in the reach state and once stops. After that, the decorative pattern stops as the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state. Specifically, for example, after entering the reach state with the decorative pattern "7", the decorative pattern that had been fluctuating until the end appears to have stopped once at "8", and then the decorative pattern stops at "7". and announce the jackpot.

In addition, in the summary column in the example of Figure 161, "+1 symbol" is selected only when the winning type is "jackpot (non-probable variable)" among jackpots, but in the case of "jackpot (probable variable)" It may be selected only in the case of "Jackpot (non-probable variable)" and "Jackpot (probable variable)". Further, the "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the win/loss type is "lost".

Further, "+Pseudo 1" and "+Pseudo 2" written in the summary column indicate that two pseudo continuous performances and three pseudo continuous performances are executed, respectively. Pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is performed multiple times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . "Ending the variation of the decorative pattern" includes, for example, a mode in which part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation in the decorative pattern has ended, and a mode in which the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, a pseudo-continuation pattern (a pattern in which a pseudo-continuation is determined if this pattern stops) stops in part. In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance in which the action is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called a pseudo-continuous performance of N consecutive performances. (the following natural numbers) is called the M-th pseudo-continuous performance. In addition, while the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changing once, the player is given a hint that there is a possibility of performing the action again, but the action is actually executed again. A production that does not do this is called a ``pseudo-false production''. Furthermore, hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous performance will also be simply referred to as a "pseudo-continuous performance."

A pseudo continuous performance occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. If it is determined to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous pattern on at least one of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops characters such as "Continued!" as a pseudo-continuous pattern in a medium decorative pattern. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative patterns (for example, all of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are odd or even numbers and no reach occurs) may be used as a pseudo continuous pattern. Note that the pseudo false effect may be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal fluctuation" or the like. Furthermore, for example, even in a variation pattern in which "+pseudo 1" is executed, a pseudo false effect suggesting the occurrence of a third pseudo series in "+pseudo 2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final pending color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in, for example, a peripheral main control ROM. The final pending color table includes, for example, the display color of the pending display at the end of the variation (hereinafter referred to as the final pending color) for each variation pattern (the type of win or loss of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the summary of the performance of the variation pattern). ) is maintained.

Note that the effect display device 1600 includes a pending display area that indicates the number of the first special random number and second special random number that are on hold. In the starting opening winning process of step S116 in FIG. 142, a reservation number designation command that designates the reservation number of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays, in the reservation display area, the number of reservations indicated by the reservation number designation command.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (the starting condition is met), the number of pendings (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number designation command increases. , one pending display is added and displayed in the pending display area. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the pending display (starting conditions are met), the number of pending items (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number specification command decreases. , erases the pending display in the pending display area.

Note that the hold display may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the plurality of display modes include a display mode of pending display using a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, and rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the expectation of a jackpot for the special lottery result corresponding to the pending display increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow-colored pending display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Additionally, the peripheral control MPU responds to the pending display by, for example, changing the display mode of the pending display during the display period from when the pending display is displayed in the pending display area until the pending display is erased. It is possible to execute a pending notice performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols).

Further, in this embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed. Note that the hold change effect and the hold preview effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as the hold look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a suspension notice table (not shown) that defines the change timing of the display mode of the suspension display. Specifically, for example, the reservation notice table defines the change timing of the display mode of the reservation display and the display format (display color) of the reservation display at the time of winning and at each change timing for each final reservation color. The start time, during the variation, and end of the special symbol variation after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing.

Note that the display mode of the pending display at each change timing is preferably a pending color that has a jackpot expectation level that is lower than the jackpot expectation level of the final pending color. Further, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation level indicated by the pending display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue pending display does not change to the white pending display). It should be noted that a different reservation notice table may exist for each number of reservations stored at the time of winning.

Note that, for example, the start of a special symbol variation that was held before the relevant pending display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the pending display described above. , a timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

In addition, the pre-read effects including the pending pre-read effects are executed based on the pre-determination command sent from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the starting opening winning process of step S116 in FIG. Ru.

Hereinafter, the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the first special symbol will be explained. Note that the same applies to the preliminary determination process in the starting opening winning process for the second special symbol, so only the first special symbol will be described here. In the preliminary determination process, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there will be a jackpot by comparing the preliminary determination table (not shown) with the special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuating random number. The type of jackpot, whether a ready-to-win performance is executed as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 when the jackpot is not achieved, or the mode type of the game performance to be executed are specified.

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the performance pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number. .

Then, by sending a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting opening where the starting winning occurred, a special symbol based on the starting winning that occurred is added. Whether or not the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp advance determination information such as the mode type of the game production before starting the variable display according to the starting prize.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final pending color for each variation pattern in setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in FIG. 160 and the final pending color is determined by the final pending color table in FIG. 161. This is an example of a table showing. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in a similar case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in a similar case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the pending display of the higher jackpot expectation level. Also, the higher the setting, the higher the expectation level of jackpot for each color. These appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probability for each setting mentioned above, and the final reserved color table in Figure 161 is used for all settings. It is assumed that there is.

Note that the peripheral control ROM may hold a different final reserved color table for each setting. In this case, for example, in the display mode of the same pending display, the selection rate of the final pending color table of the final pending color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. Thereby, for example, when the player wins a jackpot in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red pending display, the player can feel a sense of exhilaration because the expectation level for a higher setting increases.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most often selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. A selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation level when the pending display mode is red is 50% in setting 1, which is a low setting, and 30% in setting 6, which is a high setting). %). As a result, even if, for example, the player does not win the jackpot in the special symbol variation that corresponds to the red pending display, the level of expectation for the high setting will be high, suppressing the player's disappointment and encouraging him or her to continue playing. can be promoted.

In addition, for example, in the display mode of the pending display other than white, which is most often selected, for the display mode of the same pending display, the final pending color in the final pending color table is The selection rate may be set. This makes it difficult, for example, to estimate the setting from the combination of the final pending color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the anticipation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the pending display. Further, for example, if a jackpot is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possibility of a low setting increases.

[12-14-3. Preview production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a preview presentation table. The preview presentation table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The preview performance table holds, for example, the selection rate of the preview performance for each variation pattern (specified by the win/loss type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the summary of the performance of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the preview performances include a dialogue performance, a weather change performance, and a rival horse performance. The line production is, for example, a production in which a predetermined character is displayed on the production display device 1600 and says a line in the variation. The weather change performance is, for example, a performance in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 changes in the change. The rival horse performance is a performance in which a rival horse of the horse raised by the main character appears on the performance display device 1600 in the variation.

Note that it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance using a preview performance, and the selection rate of each preview performance depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed is stored in the preview performance table. In the example of FIG. 165, "no set" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and "set present" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the preview effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selection rate of the preview effect table.

In addition, in each preview performance in each variation pattern of the preview performance table, it is desirable that the selection rate without setting suggestion performance is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with setting suggestion performance. When the selection rate of settings-suggesting effects is high, setting-suggesting effects occur frequently. This is because if in this state the frequency of occurrence of setting suggestion effects suggesting high settings is low, there is a high possibility that the player will stop playing the game in a short period of time. In other words, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, which is set to a low setting, will drop significantly, and there is a risk that an excessive burden will be placed on the hall. On the other hand, for example, if setting suggestion effects that suggest high settings occur frequently, the number of players who guess that the settings of other pachinko machines 1 in the hall are low will increase, and the operation of the other pachinko machines 1 will increase. There is a risk that the rate will decrease and an excessive burden will be placed on the hole.

In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the expectation of jackpot increases as the number of pseudo series increases, but, for example, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is generally not changed depending on the number of pseudo series. , the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table is determined. In other words, for example, for variation patterns whose summaries are "SP Reach", "SP Reach + Pseudo 1", and "SP Reach + Pseudo 2", pseudo setting suggestion effects are created so that the appearance rates of setting suggestion effects are approximately the same. The selection rate for whether or not to execute has been determined. As a result, although the expectation of a jackpot is low for variable patterns with a small number of pseudo consecutive runs, the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effects is not low compared to variable patterns with a large number of pseudo consecutive runs, so players can You can also be interested in fluctuations with small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined such that the higher the number of pseudo repeats is, the higher the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. In addition, if the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is increased as the number of pseudo sequences decreases, the above-mentioned problem may occur. It is preferable to set them to almost the same numerical values (for example, 15/256 with the dialogue production set when variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of failure, and 15/256 with the dialogue production set when variation pattern 6 is selected). 16/256, etc.).

In addition, a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (or a production with a relatively high expectation of the performance that appears, although it is not a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a production in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher than a predetermined value) ), the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects increases in the order of "normal variation", variation including "normal reach", variation including "SP reach", and variation including "movie reach", The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance in the preview performance table may be determined.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 165, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will occur in all of the preview effects (line production, weather change effect, and rival horse effect), but for example, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will occur. May exist.

In addition, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects will be higher when the special lottery result is a jackpot without probability variation than when the special lottery result is a jackpot with probability variation. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance in the preview performance table may be determined. As a result, when winning a jackpot with no probability variation, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects is increased, and it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the probability variation is not awarded. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, three types of preview performances, namely, a dialogue performance, a weather change performance, and a rival horse performance, have been described, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to three types.

[12-14-4. Line production]
The details of the dialogue production among the preview production will be explained below. When the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue performance without setting suggestion performance as a preview performance, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation, character A appears on the performance display device 1600, ``What day is it today?'' is displayed as character A's line. Then, for example, the peripheral control MPU causes character B to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's line is displayed, and ``Come on...'' as character B's line. indicate. Note that, for example, the lines of character A and character B may suggest the jackpot expectation of the change.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue performance with a setting suggestion performance as a preview performance, it selects the character B's dialogue (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from a dialogue performance table to be described later. For example, the peripheral control MPU displays the character on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later, that is, the same timing as the timing at which character A appears without the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect). Make character A appear and display Character A's line, ``What day is it today?'' For example, the peripheral control MPU causes character B to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after character A's dialogue is displayed, and displays the selected character B's dialogue. Note that character A's lines may be, for example, lines that directly express setting values, such as "Do you know the settings of this machine today?"

FIG. 166 is an example of a line production table. The dialogue production table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The dialogue production table holds the production type of dialogue production and the selection rate of character B's dialogue content for each setting. Note that the production types include "patterns that are the same until the middle" and "patterns that suddenly diverge," and for each of these two patterns, there are "Kamone-type" lines and "Determined-type" lines. .

Each line belonging to the "pattern that is the same until the middle" includes the same line until the middle, and then branches into different lines. In the example of FIG. 166, the lines belonging to the "pattern that is the same until the middle" all start with "Now..." and then branch into different lines. On the other hand, lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch into different lines from the beginning. Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of lines that belong to "patterns that are the same until halfway" is higher than the selection rate of lines that belong to "patterns that suddenly diverge." This is to create a sense of expectation.

Lines belonging to the "Kamone series" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce the setting. For example, ``But I feel like it was an even-numbered day...'' is a ``maybe-type'' line that suggests an even-numbered setting. "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day..." is a "maybe" type of line, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even on an odd-numbered setting. However, it is assumed that the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting is sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, for other "Kamone-type" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line is sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in other settings.

On the other hand, lines belonging to the "definite type" are lines that definitively announce settings. For example, ``Ah! I remember! It's an even number day!'' is a ``definite'' line that definitively announces the even number setting. Therefore, the selection rate of the line in odd number settings is 0, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in even number settings.

Note that it is desirable that the selection rate of lines belonging to the "Kamone type" is higher than the selection rate of lines belonging to the "Determined type". If the selection rate of lines belonging to the "determined" category is high, there is a good chance that the high setting will be definitely notified to the player within a short time after the start of the game, and in this case, other people in the hall This is because there is a certain number of players who assume that the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are not good, which may reduce the operation of other gaming machines.

In addition, in dialogue performances when performing specific reach performances such as SP reach and movie reach, and dialogue performances when performing pseudo-reactions, lines that suggest settings for character B are written in red (in the productions that suggest jackpot expectations, etc.) The lines of the normal production may be displayed in white text). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the lines of the expectation-suggesting performance and the lines of the setting-suggesting performance, allowing the two types of performances (setting-suggesting performance and expectation-suggesting performance) to coexist without making the player feel unnatural. can be done. Note that the expectation-suggesting performance is a performance that indicates that the jackpot expectation level in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value, and specifically, it includes a preview performance that suggests expectations for a jackpot within one fluctuation, and multiple It includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a jackpot across fluctuations in

Note that the peripheral control MPU may also determine setting suggestion effects for the weather change effects and rival horse effects using a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although not shown. For example, in a setting suggestion effect for a weather change effect, thunderclouds are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" is displayed due to lightning (a "kamone-type" effect that suggests an even number setting), or a rival In the setting suggestion performance for the horse performance, a combination horse performance involving a horse that the main character is raising and a rival horse is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and for example, a number such as "135?" is displayed on the bib of the rival horse ( A ``Kamone-kei'' effect that suggests an odd number setting).

In the example above, character A's line in the dialogue production is ``What day is it today?'', but in addition to this line, character A can also say ``What score did you get on last week's test?'' Character B says, ``It's 66 points! (``Confirmation type'' that confirms setting 6)'' or ``I feel like it was 55 points... (``Maybe type'' that suggests setting 5)''. A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In this case, it is preferable that performance B (for example, a performance that asks about test scores) increases the credibility of the setting suggestion more than performance A (for example, a performance that asks about the date). Specifically, for example, when someone says, ``I feel like it was a day with a 6 on it... (maybe type)'' in production A, the expectation level for a setting of 6 remains at 30%, but in production B, the expectation level is only 30%. When someone says, ``I feel like I got a 66 point... (maybe)'', the expectation level, which is setting 6, should be set to 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of a preview presentation table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the preview presentation table. In the example of FIG. 167, the preview effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the preview effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example in FIG. 165, the preview effect table in FIG. 167 does not hold information regarding whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of preview effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the preview effect table in FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected preview effect. FIG. 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the variation pattern is "normal variation" and "dialogue effect" is selected as the preview effect. be. FIG. 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect when the outline of the fluctuation pattern is “Normal reach + 1 symbol” and “Line effect” is selected as the preview effect. It is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of variation patterns and preview effects, as shown in FIG. 168, is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM.

Note that in the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the preview effect, but it does not decide whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and then determines the content of the preview effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than the table shown in FIG. 165, it is possible to set the appearance rate and reliability of the effects in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this separate example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect. The production that progresses in the order of (A), (B), and (C) in Figure 169 is a setting suggestion when "It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!" is selected as character B's line in the dialogue production. This is an overview of the performance.

In FIG. 169(A), special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169(B), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's the day to get 4, 5, or 6!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 169(C), the line is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

The production that progresses in the order of (A), (D), and (E) in Figure 169 is an overview of the setting suggestion production when "It's a day with a 6!" is selected as character B's line in the dialogue production. be. In the production that progresses in the order of Fig. 169 (A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion production starts from the start of the special symbol variation, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion production occurs while the special symbol variation ends. has been changed. Specifically, in FIG. 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's the day when 4, 5, or 6 will be added!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's the day when there's a 6!" is displayed. In other words, the setting suggested by Character B's lines is elevated.

Specifically, for example, for each line in the line production table (line that is finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined separately. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

Note that in this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the line production table may not hold a scenario in which the line ``It's an even number day!'' is displayed after the line ``It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6!'' desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion performance is performed in the special symbol variation, but other performances (for example, a performance suggesting the jackpot expectation level, etc.) may be performed in parallel. Although an example has been shown in which character B's speech is promoted at the end of the special symbol variation, the character B's speech is not limited to this, and may be promoted before the special symbol variation ends. It should be noted that character A appears before character B's lines, and a scene in which character A talks to character B is performed, but this is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170(A), a game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 during the special symbol variation without any pending special symbol variation. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(B), immediately after the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the character B's line "It's the day to get a 4, 5, or 6!" is displayed on the production display device 1600. Ru. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is uncertain, character B may be displayed immediately without displaying character A, or character B may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since winning the prize. Alternatively, character A may be displayed first and then character B may be displayed. Further, in FIG. 170(B), the number of reservations indicated in the reservation display area has increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(C), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation ends. In addition, character B's line ``It's a day with 4, 5, or 6!'' continues to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170(D), a special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. Moreover, at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation, the character B's line displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to "It's the day when there will be a 5 or 6!". In other words, the settings indicated by character B's lines are elevated.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170(E), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize winning ends. At the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning, the character B's line displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to "It's the day when there's a 6!". In other words, the settings indicated by character B's lines are elevated.

Note that, for example, the peripheral control ROM holds a line pre-read effect table (not shown) that defines character B's lines and the timing at which the lines change. Specifically, for example, the line pre-read effect table defines the change timing of character B's line, and the character B's line at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start time, during the variation, and end of the special symbol variation after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning are examples of the change timing. Note that it is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not demoted at each change timing. Note that there may be a different line pre-read effect table for each number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the pre-read effect based on the advance determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the pre-read effect by referring to the pre-read effect table at a predetermined rate, for example. In addition, in the case of promotion, in Figure 170, the promotion is done one step at a time ("It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6!", "It's a day with a 5 or 6!", "It's a day with a 6!") !'') may be promoted to multiple levels at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the line (E) may be displayed without displaying the line (D).

Note that the setting suggestion performance may be executed under specific situations other than those described above. For example, a setting suggestion effect may be executed when a condition for a pending connection is satisfied. The pending series means that the next jackpot will be realized using special random numbers that have been held until the end of the jackpot game. In this case, for example, after the suspension is performed and before the end of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is executed. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern continues a predetermined number of times, a setting suggestion performance may be executed in the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Hereinafter, restrictions on setting suggestion effects under specific conditions will be explained.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after special conditions]
First, restrictions on setting suggestion effects after the special state will be explained. In the following, settings confirmation mode and error occurrence are both examples of special states. Note that the setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying setting values that starts when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display conditions are satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171(A) is an example of a production restriction table in setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171(B) is an example of a presentation restriction table when an error occurs. The performance restriction table in setting confirmation mode and the performance restriction table in error occurrence are stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect restriction table in setting confirmation mode will be explained. The setting confirmation mode production restriction table shows the variation when the setting confirmation mode starts while a variation determined to execute a setting suggestion production (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion variation in this chapter) is being executed or pending. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict setting suggestion effects.

The effect restriction table in setting confirmation mode is set in the setting confirmation mode before the setting suggestion effect starts (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect will be performed). A record 1701 that stores a restriction flag when the setting suggestion is started, and a record 1701 that stores the restriction flag when the setting suggestion change starts (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion presentation is to be performed and the presentation related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)). and a record 1702 that stores a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the settings confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped when the settings confirmation mode starts, and when the settings confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game continues even during the settings confirmation mode. . Therefore, the performance restriction table in setting confirmation mode includes a column 1703 that stores a restriction flag when the game is stopped when the setting confirmation mode starts, and a column 1703 that stores a restriction flag when the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode. Column 1704.

Furthermore, if the game continues during the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended due to a game ball entering the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting opening during setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the production restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in the hall, etc. It can be set using any operating medium (an operating medium that can be operated may also be used). In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole during the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to acquire lottery information and award a prize ball for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, the special symbol variation that is already on hold will be executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

If the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts, the value of one of fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of fields 1712 and 1713 are 0. One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of fields 1714-1717 are 0.

In addition, if the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, the value of one of fields 1708 and 1709 is 1, and the value of the other is 0, and the value of field 1710 is 0. and one value of field 1711 is 1 and the other value is 0, the value of field 1712 and field 1713 is 0, and one value of field 1714 and field 1715 is 1 and the other value is 0, The value of one of field 1716 or field 1717 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion performance according to the restriction flags in each state defined in the performance restriction table at the start of the setting confirmation mode and the performance restriction table at the time of error occurrence. These restriction patterns will be explained below.

(1) Regarding the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) Execute setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (value of field 1706 is 1 and value of field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which setting change processing is executed, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can give.

(1-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed after restarting the game (value of field 1706 is 0 and value of field 1707 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when audio and images indicating that the settings are being confirmed are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, by not performing the setting suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high value even though the setting has been changed.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion presentation of the setting suggestion variation in the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion presentation starts and the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1708 is 1 and value of field 1709 is 0). Since the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode, there is no drop in operation. Note that when audio and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these voices and images are output in priority to the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(2-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1708 is 0 and value of field 1709 is 1). For example, when a player checks the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as ``Maybe it is a high setting?'') If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may become distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2') New setting suggestion fluctuations corresponding to winnings in the starting opening during setting confirmation mode when setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion performance starts and the game continues during setting confirmation mode. About the setting suggestion direction.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1710 is 1 and value of field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion performance, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and can be given a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(2'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1710 is 0 and value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because it has doubts about the set value, there is a possibility that the set value will be changed later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, in the setting suggestion effect, the even number setting is confirmed, but the setting is changed to a different setting. There is a possibility that a display confirming the odd number setting will be displayed in the subsequent setting suggestion performance, which may cause trouble between the hall and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

Note that it is preferable that the images, sounds, lights, etc. that indicate the above-mentioned setting confirmation state appear regardless of the values of the above-mentioned fields. Further, it is assumed that a new winning prize will be valid even if the game is stopped after moving to the setting confirmation state, so in that case, the same process as the process for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect has started (while the setting suggestion effect is being displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect has been displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect has ended). , and the game stops when setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After restarting the game, restart the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1712 is 1 and the value of field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may become distrustful that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the situation from occurring.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion performance after restarting the game (the value of field 1712 is 0 and the value of field 1713 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when audio and images indicating that the settings are being confirmed are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, by not performing the setting suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high value even though the setting has been changed.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion effect has started (while the setting suggestion effect is being displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect has been displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect has ended). , and regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion change in the case where the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) Continue the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1714 is 1 and the value of field 1715 is 0). Since the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode, there is no drop in operation. Note that when audio and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these voices and images are output in priority to the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order to avoid causing discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed ( (Display so that the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the text indicating the setting confirmation mode, such as "Setting confirmation mode in progress", do not overlap) . Note that regarding this display, etc., the same processing can be performed even when an error occurs, which will be described later. Note that "do not overlap" here refers not to the image data actually set in the RAM, but to the fact that the appearance from the player's perspective does not overlap.

In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1714 is 0 and the value of field 1715 is 1). For example, when a player checks the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as ``Maybe it is a high setting?'') If a suggestive effect occurs), the player may become distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4') A new feature that corresponds to winning in the starting slot during the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts after the setting suggestion effect starts while the setting suggestion is changing, and the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode. Regarding the setting suggestion effect of setting suggestion variation.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1716 is 1 and value of field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion performance, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and can be given a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected.

(4'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1716 is 0 and value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because it has doubts about the set value, there is a possibility that the set value will be changed later. In such a case, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, in the setting suggestion effect, the even number setting is confirmed, but the setting is changed to a different setting. In a later setting suggestion performance, a display confirming the odd number setting is displayed), which may cause trouble between the hall and the player. The occurrence of such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode spans multiple variations, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311, after starting the setting confirmation mode. When the first symbol is confirmed or when the next variation starts, it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, it performs a setting suggestion effect together with a change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can be informed that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which setting change processing is executed, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can give.

Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion performance differs from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting is suggested such as "Maybe it is a high setting?") If the effect occurs), the player may feel distrustful of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, the effect is achieved both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when an error occurs]
Next, the performance restriction table when an error occurs will be explained using FIG. 171(B). The performance restriction table when an error occurs is a setting suggestion performance for a variation that is determined to be executed (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion variation in this chapter) when an error occurs while the variation is being executed or pending. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict.

The performance restriction table when an error occurs includes a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of a setting suggestion performance, and a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion performance starts, and a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs while the setting suggestion variation is changing and after the setting suggestion performance starts in the setting suggestion variation. A record 1802 that stores a restriction flag in the case of

Note that there are two types of errors: strong errors that are notified after stopping the game, and weak errors that are notified while the game is in progress. An error in which illegal magnetism is detected in the firing ball sensor 1020 and the gaming area 5a is an example of a strong error. A full tank error (an error indicating that the tank is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, there is a performance restriction table when an error occurs, a column 1803 that stores a restriction flag corresponding to an error that is notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 that stores a restriction flag that corresponds to an error that is notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Furthermore, if the game continues even during the occurrence of an error, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion variation may be suspended due to a game ball entering the starting hole during the occurrence of the error. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to winning in the starting opening during the occurrence of an error.

Note that the restriction flag in the performance restriction table when an error occurs is set, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or at the hall, etc. It can be set using an operating medium (or an operating medium).

In addition, in the performance restriction table when an error occurs, one value of field 1806 and field 1807 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1808 and field 1809 is 1 and the other value is 0, One value of field 1810 and field 1811 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1812 and field 1813 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1814 and field 1815 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1816 and field 1817 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion performance according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the performance restriction table when an error occurs. These restriction patterns will be explained below.

(1) Regarding the case where an error starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) Execute setting suggestion effect after restarting the game (value of field 1806 is 1 and value of field 1807 is 0). By executing the settings suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have not been changed even when the error is cleared by the hall clerk, giving the player a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. can.

(1-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed after restarting the game (value of field 1806 is 0 and value of field 1807 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion variation in the case where an error occurs before the setting suggestion performance starts and the game continues even after the error occurs (weak error).

(2-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1808 is 1 and value of field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest. Note that when sounds and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. . At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``A setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed,'' all of the setting suggestion effects were An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a hidden manner.

(2-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1808 is 0 and value of field 1809 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2') If an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion performance and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to winning at the starting opening while the error occurs Regarding the setting suggestion of variation.

(2'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1810 is 1 and value of field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(2'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1810 is 0 and value of field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion performance is not executed for winnings during an error, so the player stops launching the game ball and quickly clears the error.

(3) Regarding the case where an error occurs while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion performance has started, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After restarting the game, restart the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1812 is 1 and the value of field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has already started is stopped, the player may become distrustful that the setting has been changed. It is possible to avoid the situation from occurring.

(3-2) Do not restart the setting suggestion performance after restarting the game (the value of field 1812 is 0 and the value of field 1813 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion presentation may be canceled, which may be disadvantageous for the player, so the player is encouraged to proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. The process can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion performance of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs during the setting suggestion variation and after the setting suggestion production has started, and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error).

(4-1) Continue the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1814 is 1 and the value of field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest. Note that when sounds and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output with priority over the sounds and images in the setting suggestion effect. . At this time, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation, such as ``When was the setting suggestion effect displayed?'' and ``Was the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting displayed?'', all setting suggestion effects were hidden. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion effect (the value of field 1814 is 0 and the value of field 1815 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may be canceled, which is disadvantageous for the player, so the player will proceed with the game in a way that prevents the error from occurring. This allows for smooth progress and reduces the burden on the hall.

(4') A new feature that corresponds to winning in the starting slot while an error occurs when an error occurs while the setting suggestion is changing and after the setting suggestion performance has started, and the game continues even while the error occurs (weak error) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of setting suggestion variation.

(4'-1) Execute setting suggestion effect (value of field 1816 is 1 and value of field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game continues even when an error occurs, so the operation of the gaming machine does not slow down. Further, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(4'-2) Setting suggestion effect is not executed (value of field 1816 is 0 and value of field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion performance is not executed for winnings during an error, so the player stops launching the game ball and quickly clears the error.

In this way, the effect is achieved both when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of each business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on performance for new start-up prizes]
Hereinafter, a description will be given of the restrictions on the production in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize winning in a state where the special symbol variation is in progress and the new variation can be suspended. FIG. 172 is an example of a new starting winning presentation restriction table. The new start winning presentation restriction table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

The new starting winning presentation restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by assumptions regarding the performance of the previous change and performance restrictions for the performance in the new starting prize winning under the assumption. In addition, the previous fluctuation in this chapter is the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. As a condition for the performance of the previous fluctuation, there are cases in which only a performance suggesting the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a jackpot is performed, and cases in which a performance suggesting the expectation and a setting suggestion performance are performed.

In addition, as a performance restriction for the look-ahead performance in a new starting prize, only the setting suggestion performance in the look-ahead performance is restricted (in other words, the setting suggestion performance is not executed), and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance in the look-ahead performance are restricted (in other words, the setting suggestion performance is limited). (in other words, neither the setting suggestion presentation nor the expectation suggestion presentation in the look-ahead presentation is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion presentation and the look-ahead presentation are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table that is included in the corresponding condition and is referred to when executing the prefetch performance restriction for a new starting prize. The flag column stores flags indicating which condition is to be executed and which processing table is to be used to determine the processing for the look-ahead performance in a new starting prize.

Note that 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag columns corresponding to the other two processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning performance restriction table is set, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or at the hall, etc. It can be set by

When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new starting prize while the special symbol is changing and a new variation can be suspended, and that only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the new starting winning effect restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column corresponding to the flag column whose value in the "previous variation effect" column is "expected suggestion only" and which stores 1 as the value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag field and determines the content of the look-ahead performance in the variation corresponding to the new starting prize.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU determines that if there is a new starting prize during special symbol fluctuations and in a state where new fluctuations can be suspended, and when the expectation suggestion performance and setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous fluctuation, the new starting prize winning occurs. The value in the "previous variation production" column of the production restriction table is a flag column corresponding to "expected suggestion + setting suggestion", and the flag column stores 1 as the value, and the new The content of the look-ahead performance in the variation corresponding to the starting prize is determined.

Each condition indicated in the condition column will be explained below. The first condition (condition under which processing table 1 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. It is to be done. Under the first condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In such a state, when a setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the player's awareness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the performance of the previous change is There is a risk that the feeling of elation may decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that the player may confuse the setting suggestion performance with the expectation suggestion performance, causing the player to be overjoyed. Therefore, by implementing the first condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of these situations.

In addition, under the first condition, an expectation suggestion performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, but in this state, if a setting suggestion performance is further performed as a look-ahead performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, the player , even if it is assumed that the player loses due to the previous fluctuation, he or she can still expect a fluctuation corresponding to the new start-up win, so it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting a performance based on the preview performance table shown in FIG. 165, the peripheral control MPU determines the performance based on the table, and then determines whether the flag in the condition column indicating that setting suggestion performance is to be limited is 1 or not. (to restrict or not), and if it is 1 (to restrict), even if set is selected, it will be rewritten and displayed as without set, thereby restricting the setting suggestion effect. do. In other words, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion performance using the preview performance table shown in FIG. 165 by executing the determination process after determining the performance. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold a presentation table for each restriction type of presentation, the amount of data can be reduced. Note that, similarly to the expectation suggestion effect described later, even if the prefetch pending display selects a color other than white using the final pending color table in FIG. 161, when the expectation suggestion effect is limited, Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (condition under which processing table 2 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are used as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. The goal is to limit both aspects of production. In the second condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In such a state, when a setting suggestion performance and a period attitude suggestion performance are executed as a prediction performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the player's consciousness is directed to these performances as well. There is a risk that the exhilaration of the performance of the pre-fluctuation may be reduced. Therefore, by implementing the second condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of these situations.

The third condition (condition under which processing table 3 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion effect and the expected suggestion effect are used as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. The goal is not to limit any of the performances. In the third condition, since an expectation-suggesting performance is performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a heightened sense of exhilaration due to expectations of a jackpot. In this state, the setting suggestion presentation is executed as a look-ahead presentation of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, so that in addition to the elation of winning the jackpot, the elation of the setting suggestion presentation (in particular, the high setting confirmation suggestion presentation) (or when a high setting confirmation effect, etc. is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (condition under which processing table 4 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. only. In the fourth condition, since the expectation-suggesting performance and the setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, the player feels a sense of exhilaration that he might win the jackpot in the previous fluctuation, and (especially a high setting-suggesting performance or a high-setting confirmation performance) ) If performed, you will feel a sense of elation due to the setting suggestion. In such a situation, if a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, there is a risk that the excitement of expecting a jackpot while the previous fluctuation is pending may decrease. .

Specifically, for example, if setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, and setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, then The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (it also suggests the possibility of setting 4, even though the setting is originally 5 or higher). In such a case, the player infers that not only the setting suggestion performance in the previous change but also the expectation suggestion performance contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, if the display format is red There is also a possibility that the expectation level of jackpot is not high even for the hold that is held, and there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement about the performance suggesting the expectation may be lowered. By implementing the fourth condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The fifth condition (condition under which processing table 5 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. and expectations-suggestion effects. In the fifth condition, since the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, if the setting suggestion performance is performed in the look-ahead performance corresponding to the new starting prize, the setting suggestion performance will occur multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will guess the setting value with high accuracy (for example, if an odd setting suggestion performance and a high setting suggestion performance are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting is 5). In such a situation, if the player determines that the setting is low, there is a risk that the player will stop playing on the pachinko machine 1 in question, and if the player determines that the setting is high, the player may cancel the game at other pachinko machines in the hall. There is a risk that the operation of machine 1 will decrease. By implementing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if an expectation-suggesting performance and a setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous fluctuation, and even in the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize, the expectation-suggesting performance and setting-suggesting performance are performed as a look-ahead performance, many performances occur in a short period of time. However, there is a risk that players may be confused. By implementing the fifth condition, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (the condition under which processing table 6 is selected) is that when the expectation suggestion presentation and the setting suggestion presentation are executed in the previous variation, the setting suggestion presentation is set as a pre-reading presentation restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. There should be no restriction on any of the above and the performance that suggests expectations. In the sixth condition, since the expectation-suggesting performance and the setting-suggesting performance are performed in the previous variation, the player assumes the degree of expectation of the expectation-suggesting performance in the setting suggested by the setting-suggesting performance. In this state, in the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize winning, the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are performed, so that there is a possibility that the level of expectation due to these two expectation suggestion performances will increase.

Specifically, for example, if a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting of 4 or more is executed in the previous variation, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new starting prize, the player Regarding the expectation-suggesting production in the previous fluctuation, we assume a level of expectation at setting 4 or higher. However, after that, a setting of 5 or more is suggested by a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance in a new starting prize winning, so the expectation level for the expectation suggestion performance comes to assume a setting of 5 or more, and the player The feeling of elation increases.

In this way, each of the pre-read performance restriction contents that correspond to a new starting prize win will be effective, so by allowing halls to set such pre-read performance restriction contents, it will be possible to meet the needs of the business style of the hall etc. We can provide gaming machines tailored to your needs.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the prefetch effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Note that each processing table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, the common contents of each processing table will be explained. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous variation, the processing content related to the new starting prize corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

Note that the processing contents held in each processing table are defined as processing contents for prefetch effects that are not subject to restrictions. Specifically, for example, the processing contents of processing table 1, which is a table that is referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect, as a pre-reading effect restriction of fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, includes information regarding expected suggestion effects. Processing details are defined. Similarly, the processing contents of the processing table 3, which is a table that is referred to when restricting both the expectation suggestion production and the setting suggestion production, as a look-ahead production restriction of fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, include the expectation suggestion production and the setting suggestion production. Processing details regarding setting suggestion effects are defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the pre-read effects to be restricted in the new start-up winning effect and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start-up winning effect restriction table, and based on the processing table, determines the prefetch effect to be restricted in the new start-up winning effect and the processing table to be referred to. Determine the processing for the look-ahead effect.

Note that the processing table 3 and processing table 6, which will be described later, store flags for selecting the processing content related to the new starting prize from a plurality of processing content. Note that the flags in the processing table are, for example, the operating media installed in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or at the hall, etc. ) can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new starting prize defined by the processing table 1 will be explained. Processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion performance is executed in the previous fluctuation and only the setting suggestion performance is limited as a pre-read performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. Below, an example will be described in which pending prefetching is performed as a prefetching effect that suggests expectations.

The process with process number 1 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. In the process of process number 1, if the mode of pending display of a new starting prize is a specific mode with high expectation of jackpot (for example, pending display mode of blue, green, red, etc.), for example, , at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous variation, the pending display mode of the new starting prize is returned to the default (white display mode in the final pending color table in FIG. 161). However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays. Further, the peripheral control MPU does not return the pending display mode of the new starting prize to the specific display mode (that is, leaves it as the default display) at the time of time reduction transition after the end of the jackpot. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of displaying the pending display of the new start-up winnings to the specific display mode even if the pending display of the new starting winnings has not been completed at the end of the time saving (i.e. (Leave as default display).

Process number 2 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 2, if the mode of pending display of the new starting prize is a specific mode with high expectation of jackpot, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation, The mode of pending display of new starting prizes is returned to the default. However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays. Further, even when the system shifts to a normal state which is controlled after the jackpot game ends, the display mode of the pending display of the new starting prize is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display remains).

Process number 3 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the pending display mode of the new starting prize (that is, continues the pending display, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, the blue (continue to display the pending display mode). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the mode of pending display of a new starting prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small winning won in the previous variation. However, when the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small winning opening screen, the hold display in the specific form is erased in the same manner as other hold displays.

Process number 4 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the pending display mode of the new starting prize (that is, continues the pending display, for example, if the pending display mode is blue, the blue (continue to display the pending display mode).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. Processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expectation suggestion performance is executed in the previous fluctuation and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are restricted as a pre-reading performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. be. Processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion presentation and the expectation suggestion presentation as a look-ahead presentation restriction on the variation corresponding to a new starting prize, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. Processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expectation suggestion performance is executed in the previous variation, and neither the setting suggestion production nor the expectation suggestion production is restricted as a pre-read production restriction for the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. be.

The processes with process numbers 5 and 6 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with a time reduction. One of the processes with process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 5 to 6, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol. The process number 5 prevents the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect will be performed when the player is aware that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change. can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. In addition, since a jackpot with a time reduction was won in the previous fluctuation, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation corresponding to the new winning will start after the end of the time reduction. If you win frequently and there is a hold on the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, the second special symbol variation will be executed in priority to the first special symbol variation). Therefore, by the process of process number 6, the setting suggestion performance is executed after the time saving ends, so that it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the end of the time saving.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 7 to 8, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting prize is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to process number 7, he can feel disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process of process number 8, the setting suggestion performance starts immediately after the jackpot ends, so it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the time saving is not given.

The processes of process numbers 9 to 10 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. One of the processes with process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 9 to 10, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting prize is the same as the processing of processing number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. In the case of a small win, only a small benefit is given to the player, so there is a possibility that the player may be disappointed. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the series of time required for a small hit is shorter than the series of time required for a jackpot, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion performance has started before the start of the previous change, the setting suggestion performance If this is not done, players may feel a sense of distrust. By the process number 10, it is possible to prevent such a sense of distrust from being given to the player.

Processes with process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. One of the processes with process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 11 to 13, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU controls the new start only when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous change is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting winning. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is controlled differently (for example, a line by character B that suggests the setting appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). Through the processing of processing number 12, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for players who feel disappointed that they missed despite the appearance of a pending display with high expectations for a jackpot in the previous fluctuation. can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old reservation is the reservation corresponding to the previous change, and the new reservation is the reservation corresponding to the new starting prize.

In the process of process number 13, if the mode of the pending display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of jackpot, the peripheral control MPU suggests a setting as a look-ahead presentation for the new starting prize. Do not perform the performance. Due to the process of process number 13, even though a pending display mode with high expectations for a jackpot appeared in the previous variation, it was missed, and furthermore, even in the variation corresponding to the new starting winning, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect did not appear. , it is possible to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. Processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous fluctuation, and only the setting suggestion performance is limited as a pre-read performance restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize. .

Process number 14 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. In the process of process number 14, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

Process number 15 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot without time saving. In the process of process number 15, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process with process number 16 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. In the process of process number 16, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process with process number 17 is a process related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. In the process of process number 16, the process regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

In addition, processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance restriction for fluctuations corresponding to new starting winnings, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, new starting winnings It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to winning a prize.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. Processing table 5 is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous variation, and both the setting suggestion performance and the expectation suggestion performance are restricted as a pre-read performance restriction of the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. This is the table that will be used. Processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion presentation and the expectation suggestion presentation as a look-ahead presentation restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to a new starting prize, so regardless of the jackpot type of the previous fluctuation, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to a new starting prize.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. Processing table 6 is referred to when the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance are executed in the previous variation, and neither the setting suggestion performance nor the expectation suggestion performance is restricted as a pre-read performance restriction of the variation corresponding to a new starting prize. This is a table that

The processes of process numbers 18 to 21 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a jackpot with time reduction. One of the processes with process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected using a flag. In the processes of process numbers 18 to 21, the processes regarding the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to a new starting winning are the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol. The process of process number 18 prevents the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect will be performed when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change. can.

In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. (Specifically, for example, when it is announced that setting 4 or higher is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting is set as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize) Only when it is announced in the suggestion performance that the setting 5 or more is confirmed, the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during a jackpot game won in the previous fluctuation, or during a time saving incidental to the jackpot won in the previous fluctuation. This is the extinguishment of the suspension of the second special symbol.

By the process of process number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion performance at the latest during the time saving jackpot, so that he can obtain a double sense of exhilaration due to the time saving jackpot and the high setting suggestion. Also, for example, it is announced that setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, and setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. If this is announced, the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is a wasteful performance that does not provide new information to the player before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, and processing is not required. By processing number 19, such wasteful effects can be omitted. Conversely, for example, if it is announced that the setting 4 or higher is confirmed in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation, the setting 5 will be set in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the player is likely to continue playing even if the above is not confirmed, there is a high possibility that the setting suggestion effect will be a wasteful effect, and the process number 19 will eliminate such wasteful effects. Performance can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process number 20, the setting suggestion effect is often started immediately after the time saving state ends, so that the player's disappointment at the end of the time saving state can be alleviated.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 21, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance described in the process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment at the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous fluctuation is a jackpot without time saving. One of the processes with process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 22 to 25, the processing for the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to the process of process number 22, he can feel disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, a jackpot game in which a prize was won in the previous fluctuation, or the like. By the process of process number 23, if the setting suggestion performance is started at the latest during the jackpot game, the player can enjoy the jackpot game with the disappointment reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 24, the setting suggestion performance starts immediately after the end of the jackpot, so it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment that the time has not been shortened.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process number 21, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance described in the process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment at not entering into the time saving period. In addition, if the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize are not better than the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, If a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, players who are disappointed that the time will not be shortened will be shown an even more wasteful setting suggestion performance, and the game There is a risk that the person will be adversely affected.

Processes with process numbers 26 to 29 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small win. One of the processes with process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 26 to 29, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. In the case of a small win, only a small benefit is given to the player, so there is a possibility that the player may be disappointed. can be reduced.

In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU selects the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, a setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Specifically, the period before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting prize is, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the small winning won in the previous variation, or during the small winning. By the process of process number 27, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance as explained in the process of process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment due to only small merits being given in small wins.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. Since the series of time required for a small hit is shorter than the series of time required for a jackpot, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion performance has started before the start of the previous change, the setting suggestion performance If this is not done, players may feel a sense of distrust. Through the process number 28, it is possible to prevent such a sense of distrust from being given to the player.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU selects the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, based on the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous variation. Only when this is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. By the process of process number 29, it is possible to omit the wasteful setting suggestion performance as explained in the process of process number 19, and to reduce the player's disappointment that only a small merit is given in a small win. In addition, if the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize are not better than the settings suggested in the setting suggestion performance of the previous fluctuation, If a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize, it will further waste the setting suggestion performance for players who are disappointed that only a small merit is given in the small win. This may lead to the player being exposed.

Processes with process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new starting prize when the winning type of the previous change is a loss. One of the processes with process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected using a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 30 to 34, the processing regarding the expectation suggestion performance as a pre-reading performance corresponding to a new starting winning is the same as the processing of processing number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion performance during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize. With the process number 30, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the failure of the previous fluctuation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU controls the new start only when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead presentation of the previous fluctuation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting winning. Note that the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion performance is controlled differently (for example, a line by character B that suggests the setting appears). The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). Through the process No. 31, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for players who feel disappointed that they missed despite the appearance of a pending display with high expectations for a jackpot in the previous fluctuation. can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU controls the setting of the previous variation when the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead effect of the previous variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of jackpot. Only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion performance, the new starting winning During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. By the process of process number 32, the player's disappointment that the previous variation, which was a pending display mode with high expectations for a jackpot, was a failure can be alleviated by the setting suggestion performance.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU displays the new starting prize only if the mode of the pending display in the pending look-ahead presentation of the previous variation is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) that has a high expectation of a jackpot. During the fluctuation corresponding to , a setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. By the process No. 33, a player who has continued to be disappointed because he was not able to obtain the level of expectation for a jackpot with the pending look-ahead performance of the previous change can be relieved of such disappointment by the setting suggestion performance.

In the process of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU selects the setting suggested in the setting suggestion presentation of the previous change when the pending display mode is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high jackpot expectation. Therefore, only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion performance as a look-ahead performance before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize is better, only during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting winning, A setting suggestion performance is executed as a look-ahead performance for the new starting prize. Due to the process No. 34, the player's frustration is amplified in that the pending display mode of the previous variation is low in expectations and the setting suggestion performance in the variation corresponding to the new starting prize suggests a low setting. The occurrence of can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned process, even in a situation where the setting suggestion effect is not limited as a pre-reading effect restriction on fluctuations corresponding to a new starting prize, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU will not perform the setting suggestion effect. There is no need to perform the performance. For example, if the new starting prize is made during a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion performance. This is because immediately after a jackpot game, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game even if no incentive is provided through the setting suggestion performance.

As in the examples of processing table 3 and processing table 6, since the effect is exhibited in each process related to a new starting prize determined by each processing number, it is possible for the hole etc. to set the process related to a new starting winning. This makes it possible to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the business style of halls, etc.

In addition, for example, the new starting prize is just before the end of the ST state (a variable probability state that continues until the jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, the special symbol change until the ST state ends). This is performed in a state where the remaining variation number of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or a state where the remaining variation number of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, etc. In this case, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's biggest concern is whether or not he will win the jackpot in the ST. In such a situation, when a setting suggestion performance starts as a look-ahead performance related to a new starting prize, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion performance as a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, and a situation arises that makes the player overjoyed. There is a risk of The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Also, for example, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations after the ST state ends and the transition to the normal state (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of special symbols reserved, or from the ST state to Immediately after transitioning to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and taking this into account, the new If a starting prize is won, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion performance. Immediately after the ST state ends, the player's biggest concern is whether or not he will immediately win the jackpot. In particular, immediately after the ST state ends, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol that is likely to win a type of jackpot that is of great benefit to the player will be executed. In such a situation, when a setting suggestion performance starts as a look-ahead performance related to a new starting prize, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion performance as a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, and a situation arises that makes the player overjoyed. There is a risk of The above-described processing can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, if it is determined that a setting suggestion effect that can be completed independently is executed in multiple holds, one setting suggestion effect that spans the fluctuations corresponding to the multiple holds will be executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 1]
Another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described below. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22.

First, the main control MPU 1311 takes in the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the data of the taken level in the register (step S201). Note that the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 has been reliably started. Therefore, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM may be cleared unintentionally. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the power-on processing starts, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts a key operation early after turning on the power, the To reliably detect the operation of a RAM clear switch 954 or a setting key 971 during a power-on operation.

Note that the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be made different. For example, the polarity of the logic may be changed between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when it is at a high level, and the setting key 971 is turned on when it is at a low level. Further, the voltage for determining ON may be changed using the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves, thereby making it difficult for fraudulent acts to activate the setting change mode. Furthermore, as will be described later, it is no longer necessary to monitor the signal level of the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, and the pachinko machine 1 waits for initialization by a reset signal (step S203). Abnormal settings are not corrected because the settings are not in the range in which the checksum is calculated and are not erased by a RAM clear operation. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing related to normal games such as special drawings and general drawings is not executed.

The set value is determined not only when the power is turned on, but also when entering the starting slot, when starting a variable display game, and when the gaming state changes (from normal state to jackpot state, from low probability state to high probability state). , from a non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, etc.) is also determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This prevents a lottery from being conducted based on an incorrect set value even if the set value is erroneously set to an abnormal value.

If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the game will stop and the state of abnormal set value (RAM abnormality) will be maintained until the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. . If the set value is determined to be abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, it is preferable to update the setting value storage area using a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the RAM abnormality can only be resolved through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning the power back on. This is because RAM abnormalities may be caused by fraud as well as malfunctions, and if RAM abnormalities caused by fraud can be resolved by turning the power back on, RAM abnormalities can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved unless the power switch 932, setting key 971, and RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since this includes the operation of the setting key 971, which can only be operated by an employee of the hall who has the key, security performance against unauthorized acts can be improved.

In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized attempts to change the setting value to an undefined value, if the setting value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to setting 1, which indicates the lowest setting, will improve the security of the gaming machine. It is effective because it can improve your performance.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation modes of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, such as the normal gaming state (game startable state), setting confirmation mode, and setting change mode. , an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, startup of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power-off is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the previous power-off and stored in step S48. Note that instead of the checksum, a fixed value check code may be used. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM has been successfully backed up when a power failure occurs (step S205).

As a result of the determination, if either the checksum or the value in the backup flag area is abnormal, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (setting (including the area where values are stored) (step S207), and the process advances to step S216. Note that erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as "initialization," but "RAM clear" is also used with the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values in the checksum and backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. Determine whether the If the operation is not a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and/or setting key 971 are OFF), the settings are set in the setting state management area in order to determine whether the state was in the process of changing settings before the power was turned on. It is determined whether a value (02H) indicating that the change is in progress is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that a setting change operation has been performed, then the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated to enter setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that the condition is the same. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the settings are being changed is recorded in the settings state management area, it can be determined that the power was turned on after a power outage during the settings change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 that should be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

Note that when transitioning to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area in step S208, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. In this case, there is no need to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, so when it is determined that the transition to setting change mode is to be made based on the value stored in the setting state management area, setting changes will be made in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the status.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether the status of is RAM abnormal, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on is a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process advances to step S216. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register because the state before the power is turned on is not a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal). It is determined whether it is (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, it means that the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on, so the RAM in the game control area excluding the setting value and setting state management area In order to initialize the area (the clear area when the RAM is normal), the process advances to step S210.

On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, since the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated when the power was turned on, a power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 was operated when the power was turned on and the setting confirmation operation should start, so the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the setting status management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

Thereafter, the devices built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command that notifies the operation of each part when the power is turned on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state at power-on (step S218).

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a state in which a game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process advances to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is ended and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, initial settings at the start of the game or initial settings at the time of recovery from power outage are performed. Thereafter, a power-on state command that notifies the state of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, a power-on return destination command that notifies the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in a buffer in order to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. Note that the various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in timer interrupt processing.

Further, a setting value command notifying the setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), an interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to the normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 differs from the timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155 in that the setting change process is executed within the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable to provide as many LED common counters as there are indicators.

Thereafter, switch input processing is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG. 23.

Next, it is determined whether an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, there is no need to execute setting change/confirmation processing (after step S234) in timer interrupt processing, so normal timer interrupt processing is performed. (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, performance display processing (FIG. 183), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating a game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, a setting change/confirmation process is executed without executing the normal game process in the timer interrupt process.

In the setting change/confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing/confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation to change/confirm the setting value has been performed (steps S236, S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

If the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. Note that if the result of adding the set value exceeds the upper limit value, the value is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (a value indicating setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area), or if the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 has been detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, setting change/confirmation mode termination processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not ended and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode termination process, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a state in which gaming can be started) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and the initial setting at the start of the game or at the time of recovery from a power outage is recorded. (step S241), and transmits a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part (low probability/high probability, game state such as time saving/non-time saving, etc.) when the power is turned on. is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of recovery after a power outage is stored in a buffer in order to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing status regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory (state of each process related to the special symbol/special electric accessory (standby, fluctuating, judgment, jackpot, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. . Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the gaming state regarding the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, a setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in a buffer to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process advances to step S245.

Note that the command for notifying the setting value may be sent not only during the setting change/confirmation mode termination processing when the power is turned on, but also at the time of starting fluctuation or switching the gaming state. At this time, the setting value command transmitted at power-on and the command transmitted during normal gaming, such as at the start of fluctuation, may be the same command or different commands (for example, the upper byte values may be different).

If the set value command is different between power-on and normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands including the set value (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) at the start of the special symbol variation display game. When received, it is determined whether any commands are missing. By changing the content of the command depending on the timing at which the command is sent (when the power is turned on, during normal gaming, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 can check whether the set value was correctly received when the power was turned on or whether the set value is different from the set value when the fluctuation starts. It can be determined whether a fluctuation pattern command or a symbol command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, settings are made to display an error on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) (step S246). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting status management area, settings are made to display the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or setting display 974 if it is separate) (step S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the settings in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the timer interrupt processing starts, a setting value changing operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt, and the setting value is displayed (setting value display ). The setting value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, instead of performing settings change/confirmation processing when the power is turned on, it is performed within the same timer interrupt processing that is used when normal gaming starts, so that settings change/confirmation processing can be performed while the settings change/confirmation processing is being executed. Even if the power is restored after a power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is returned to its original state, the settings at the time of the power outage will be changed even if the setting key 971 and setting change switch 972 are not moved to the same position as they were at the time of the power outage. It is possible to return to the state of change/confirmation processing. Furthermore, in the setting change/confirmation process, processes that are also executed in normal game processes, such as command transmission process and dynamic LED lighting control, can be made common.

Then, a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc. are actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing branches depending on whether to execute the normal game or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) (step S232 in FIG. 181), but multiple timer interrupt processing may be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated in the normal gaming state, the setting change mode, and/or the setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or may be composed of different routines. In other words, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, timer interrupt processing 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called, and in the normal gaming state, timer interrupt 2 (for normal gaming) is called, and these two timer interrupt processing It has a process (module) that is executed and a dedicated process (module) that is executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process that captures the output of various detection switches such as a prize opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process that sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared between the processing executed in the normal game and the processing executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used in main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since the two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, they can share one register bank. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched depending on the bank, and the main control side main processing that is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed. 1 (during normal gaming) and timer interrupt processing 2 (setting change mode) which is executed periodically, and is common to the main control side main processing and at least two of timer interrupt processing 1 and timer interrupt processing 2. Use the registers in the bank.

The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode are preferably executed at the same cycle, but may be executed at different cycles. The sampling of switches in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, so while the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is 4ms, it is executed in the setting change mode. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be fast (for example, 2 ms) or slow (for example, 8 ms). In addition, if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED that displays the set value will be delayed, and the display mode of the set value will be different from the base display during normal gaming. become. When there are 8 common LEDs, if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8ms, the display cycle will be 64ms (display ON: 8ms, OFF: 56ms), and if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 4ms, the display cycle will be 64ms (display ON: 8ms, OFF: 56ms). The cycle is 32ms (display ON: 4ms, OFF: 20ms), and the OFF time becomes longer in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the LED lighting flickers become larger, so the display mode differs from the base display during normal gaming. It becomes possible to recognize them differently.

Further, when starting the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is enabled, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is turned on to start in the normal gaming state (not to shift to setting change/confirmation mode), timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is enabled. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change/confirmation is prohibited, and timer interrupt processing 2 for normal gaming is enabled.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of performance display processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (eg, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed at the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state mentioned above. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 or in the base display device output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 191.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address within the gaming control area, sets the stack address outside the gaming control area (step S260), and saves the registers used within the gaming control area to the register saving buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used within the game control area in step S261 is preferably a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. In addition, the save destination of the register used within the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The first power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and when the area outside the gaming control area is initialized, 5AH is set. be done. That is, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized) at the time of the first power-on.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used to display the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialize.

If the power outage flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within a predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power outage flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within the predetermined range, the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and ejection ball sensor 3060 are detected and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time for the base value calculation section (step S266), and if the switching time has arrived, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, display is controlled for each section. For example, display control for each section includes displaying a test section in which the number of out pitches is less than 500, and a blinking display when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000). Step S269).

Thereafter, the register value is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned on, or during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine is notified to the hall employees. Let us know the status in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that the notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern together with display settings on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, this is executed in the setting display process in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190. Note that a dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the process.

First, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). Note that an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 is notified with priority over other abnormalities or conditions.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off or all LEDs flashing at high speed at the same cycle Effect display device 1600 Displays the words "RAM error" Sound (sound effect) Outputs RAM abnormality notification sound (RAM abnormality notification sound is set in setting change mode (It may be the same as the notification sound other than mode or setting confirmation mode)
Sound (audio) Output volume of the sound "RAM error" Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp installed on the door frame 3) Panel decoration LED (excluding out-of-bulb and stock notification LEDs) flashes in red All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification release conditions By changing the settings on the main control board 1310 The RAM has been cleared or the power has been turned on to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up or all LEDs blink at medium speed at the same cycle Effect display device 1600 Displays the words "Settings changing" Sound (sound effect) Outputs the notification sound of settings change mode (sound) "Settings" ” is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp (top) installed on the door frame 3 Display panel decoration LED (including lamps, excluding out-of-bulb and stock notification LEDs) flashing in white All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification release conditions Peripheral control board 1510 is powered on “A001H” was received as the input operation command.

Next, setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights up or all LEDs flash at low speed at the same cycle Effect display device 1600 Displays the words "Settings confirmation in progress" Sound (sound effect) Outputs notification sound of setting confirmation mode (Notification sound of setting confirmation mode) may be the same as the notification sound in settings change mode)
Sound (audio) Outputs the voice "Settings are being checked" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED installed on the door frame 3 Specified frame lamps (including the top lamp, excluding out-of-bulb and stock notification LEDs) blink in white Display panel decoration LED All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-notification Release conditions A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 received "A001H" as the power-on operation command.

Regarding the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, followed by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priorities may be determined in the order shown in FIG. 185. Note that priority 1 is a high notification priority, and priority 9 is a low notification priority. That is, if multiple notifications are to be made, the notification with a higher priority (lower number) is performed. In addition, if multiple notification conditions with the same priority are met and the notifications conflict, even if you switch between the conflicting notifications and notify them, the notification that was established first will be performed, and after the notification is canceled. If the competing notifications satisfy the conditions, the competing notifications may be made. Specifically, at priority level 3, RAM clear notification and setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so the notifications do not conflict. At priority level 4, the excessive prize balls abnormality notification and the normal electric accessory winning abnormality notification may occur simultaneously, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification in setting change mode Priority 3: RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clearing due to setting changes)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification in setting confirmation mode Priority 4: Excessive prize ball abnormality notification when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out Priority 4: More than a predetermined number of consecutive prize balls are paid out when the normal electric accessory is not activated Ordinary electric accessory winning abnormality notification priority 5 when a winning is detected or when a winning of more than a predetermined value is detected in one ordinary electric burning object activation Priority 5: Difference between the number of winnings and the number of discharges from the big winning opening Discharge abnormality notification priority 6 when the number exceeds a predetermined number: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority 7 when vibration is detected: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: If a predetermined number of wins or more are detected consecutively when the jackpot is not activated, or if more than a predetermined number of wins are detected in one jackpot Big winning opening prize abnormality notification when detected

Next, details of the aforementioned power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be explained. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function caused by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By first setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2006). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and a reset signal for the pachinko machine 1 is sent. Wait for initialization. The set value is not within the range in which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, so even if the set value is an abnormal value, it will not be corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set values, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In a hall where pachinko machines are installed, you want to initialize the gaming state while maintaining the settings (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time saving) and return to the normal state with low probability time saving) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the setting values are initialized by the RAM clear operation during business hours, in order to reset the setting values and continue business operations, the power is cut off, the setting change mode is started, and the original setting values are reset. There is a need. In order to avoid such trouble, the set values are maintained without being cleared by a RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, a sub startup wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 151 Waits for startup (step S2008). The peripheral control board 1510 does not have to wait for startup after determining the set value, but may be at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2009). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2009.

Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect when the power outage occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to a normal state. In addition, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, since the values in the setting state management area are different when jumping from steps S2016 and S2019 to step S2031, the program can be shared by both, and the program Size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operations of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971, and the values recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and since 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, a RAM abnormality can be resolved only by changing the setting value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power outage (step S2020).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022), and the value shown in FIG. The process advances to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power outage is in the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2018 to S2022 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, the determination can be made in step S2032 based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming control area (step S2033), and the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is saved by RAM abnormality initialization processing. The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2035).

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and hardware random numbers (for example, winning/losing random numbers) built into the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Finally, timer interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main processing is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power outage notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 195. In the random number update process 2, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, will not be performed, inhibiting writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, RAM protection is enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled is written to the RAM protect register, writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the system waits until recovery from the power outage. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), and saves all registers. The value is stored in a register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the value of the initial power-on flag when the power is turned on (step S2053). The first time the power is turned on means the first time the power is turned on as a pachinko machine, and the time the power is turned on after the backup power supply is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 has been erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power source (installed in the main body frame 4, for example) is disconnected, the supply of backup power to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data in the main control RAM 1312 can no longer be held.

If the initialization is performed when the power is turned on for the first time, the process advances to step S2056. On the other hand, if the initialization is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined whether the ejected bulb targeted for base calculation is outside a predetermined range (step S2054). If the ejected ball targeted for base calculation is outside the predetermined range, the process advances to step S2056. On the other hand, if the ejected ball to be calculated as a base is within a predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within a normal range (step S2055). If the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the calling source process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is outside the normal range, 00H is written to all work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 for initialization (step S2056), and 00H is written to all the stack areas outside the used area. is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set to the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that the switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080, which will be described later, is a process related to input from a fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2604 is NO, so winning is detected, but fraud is not detected. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2080 in FIG. 191. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, it is preferable to turn on only the gaming state error signal and turn off the others.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

Next, FIG. 191 will be explained. If it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing 2 to detect the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. (Step S2080). Specifically, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read, and if a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information is stored in the input information storage area. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether fraud has been detected in the fraud detection process in step S2084. In addition, in the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, winning abnormalities such as excessive winnings of large winning openings and ordinary electric accessories are also determined.

After that, timer update processing is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process, etc. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set as the determination condition, time management is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written in the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display commands, error release notification commands, etc.), and converts them into the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. to be memorized. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to a command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is modified as follows and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, not the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a switch passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of passing of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting port switch, and to set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and base display output processing is executed (step S2087). The base display output process is a process that is executed using a second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as flag registers is saved to the stack area in the game control area before and after the base display output processing is executed, and the base display Prevents it from being updated during output processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random value for jackpot matches the hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the random value for the jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not to migrate. Then, when the random number value for jackpot matches the winning determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006. When opening and closing the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are in an open (or enlarged) state, resulting in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. The player then shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game then shifts to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, it shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not the second starting port door member 2549 is to be opened/closed in accordance with the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), output information to the hall computer includes a probability fluctuation information output signal and special symbol display information. Various information (gaming information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Thereafter, the process advances to step S2070 in FIG. 190.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling source process without executing the setting process.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to special symbols and normal symbols will not be executed, resulting in a state in which no games can be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be detected by turning off the power, executing power outage processing, and then turning the power back on by operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 to start the setting change mode. As a result, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by operating the setting key 971 to return to its original state, the setting change mode is ended and the normal game can be started.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode is performed using the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954, the value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting status management area is maintained. The RAM abnormality continues and normal games cannot be started. In other words, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the calling source.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time from the end of the setting change mode until the security signal turns OFF is set. establish. Therefore, even if the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal will be output for the time set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. security signals, and the hall computer can reliably detect security signals.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, if the power is restored and a hot start is performed in normal gaming mode, a security signal for the remaining time will be output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM error, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops outputting the security signal.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation.

When transitioning to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because no setting change operation has been performed even after the power is restored. In the case of hot start, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is started after a predetermined period of time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal will resume. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs during output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
- When power is restored by hot start after a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to fraud detection, etc. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. Cases: - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings change mode, the power is restored and settings change mode continues. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings confirmation mode, the power is restored. If the settings confirmation mode continues

In this way, even if the security signal is to be output continuously after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output, by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored, the security signal can be output on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been released.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output, and the delay time is reached after the setting confirmation mode ends. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapsed time. Further, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be configured to serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1. Note that if the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the setting value is not updated. The process returns to the calling process without executing the call.

Note that when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON. In this way, if it is determined that the setting key 971 is operated when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change switch 972 will be activated even if the setting change mode is in the setting change mode when the power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent settings from being changed by operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of setting display processing. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2113), and output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , returns to the calling process.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, as shown in FIG. 202(A).

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is an initial value. Note that the other bits are preferably set to 0 (step S2121). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrectly set. This is to prevent it from being made by someone else.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the setting state management area does not record a value indicating the state in which the game can be started, it is either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error, so end the setting processing when the power is turned on, and Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a state in which the game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2123).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). The power-on state command, as shown in FIG. 202(B), is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). The return destination command when the power is turned on is a command that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 202(C).

Furthermore, a setting value command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

In addition, along with the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol pending number command indicating the pending number of the special symbol fluctuation display game is sent to the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The pending number display may be restored to the state before the power outage occurred. In addition, the order in which the special design reservation number command is sent is after sending the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, or before sending these commands, or during the sending of these commands. It's okay.

After that, the process returns to the calling source.

The power-on setting process is executed when the power is restored and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not set, or when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. , power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command) are sent when recovering from a power failure in neither setting change mode nor setting confirmation mode, when setting change mode ends, or when setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of random number update processing 2. Random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in special lottery and regular lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 in step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, interrupts are prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Interrupts are enabled after initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number is a random number for jackpot determination to draw a jackpot for a special symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot for a regular symbol, and a symbol type (low probability/high probability/time-saving/non-time-saving, etc.) when a special symbol is a jackpot. ) is a random number used to change the initial value for each period, such as a random number that determines a random number.

Thereafter, random numbers other than the winning/losing random numbers (excluding the initial value random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 is preferably initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It does not function to switch the confirmation mode, but only functions as an operation for changing setting values.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141). Details of switch input processing 3 will be described later in FIG. 197. do. Note that in step S2141, switch input processing 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of switch input processing 3 described with reference to FIG. 197.

Then, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2063), and setting change/confirmation processing is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Subsequently, switch input processing 2 is executed (step S2080), timer update processing is executed (step S2081), and prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2083), fraud detection processing is executed (step S2084), and switch passing command output processing is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), base display output processing is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved to the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2086). S2088). Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Furthermore, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the one before the interrupt. do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of switch input processing 3. Switch input processing 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt processing, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the input information to the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and obtains the number of repetitions of the process from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Furthermore, input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using the logical correction value specified by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If the mode is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to obtain the bits of the input ports that are used during normal gaming.

On the other hand, if it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the setting change/confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits of the input port used in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode can be acquired.

Thereafter, input level data is generated from the bits obtained through the masking process, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, edge data of a change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

Thereafter, it is set in the next block as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether processing for all switch input ports has been completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162 and the next input port is processed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing for all switch input ports has been completed, switch input processing 3 is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of the process), and each block includes an input port address, a logic correction value, and a normal game mask. Contains the value, the mask value during setting change/confirmation, and the address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area includes n pairs of input level data area addresses and input edge data area addresses.

As shown in the figure, the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area, so it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set in the same table together with the input level data area. The addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area are 16-bit (2 byte) values, but they are set as the addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be the value of the lower 8 bits (1 byte). In other words, the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change depending on the values in the input level data area or input edge data area, so the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set, so the data capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another example of the structure of the switch winning information data table, FIG. 199(A) shows an example of the structure of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199(B) shows an example of the configuration of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is composed of n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of the process), and each block includes an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode include ports with different logical correction values and mask values. In other words, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198(A), the mask value is different between the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 In this system, different switch winning information data tables are used in the setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, so that different switch winning information data can be obtained.

In order to accommodate such a configuration, switch input processing 3 (FIG. 197) is modified as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data is set according to the result of the judgment. Then, in step S2166, without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of setting change/confirmation processing. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those in the timer interrupt process described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change/confirmation process is ended and the process returns to the process before the interruption. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports into which the outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, at bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. For bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. For bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned on, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door open sensor detects that the door frame 3 is open, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, the level becomes 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area.

As shown in FIG. 201(B), the setting status management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded.For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined Not yet. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 08H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H.

FIG. 202A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal gaming, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is created at least once during power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once during hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and created twice in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, once when the power is turned on and when settings change/confirmation ends.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it performs notification in the manner described above depending on the setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, and RAM abnormality state (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a gaming command during normal gaming without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the gaming state may be inconsistent, so the received gaming command cannot be processed. It is determined that the game command is invalid, and game operations (effects, etc.) corresponding to the game command are not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a gaming command during normal gaming is transmitted a predetermined number of times in succession), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received gaming command and perform a performance corresponding to the gaming command.

In addition, when the gaming commands are disabled, effects that satisfy the predetermined conditions are performed among the received gaming commands (for example, effects corresponding to the received commands regarding movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc.) ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Further, the fact that a mismatch in the gaming state has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because if no performance is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not be able to start the special symbol fluctuation display game even if he or she enters the starting slot. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning. Note that even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables the gaming command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal gaming processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally. be done.

FIG. 202(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game is ready to start. The series code for each model of pachinko machine may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, using bits 6 to 4, eight types of series can be identified. Note that the power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220(C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220(C), the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the information recorded in the power-on buffer (the gaming state before the power outage).

FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a return destination command at power-on. The return destination command at power-on is a command that notifies the gaming state regarding the special symbol. For example, the return destination command at power-on consists of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte indicates the gaming state regarding the special symbol. show. The return destination command at power-on notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory at the time of a power outage. The power-on return destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202(D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command. The setting value command is a command that notifies a setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The set value command is transmitted when the mode returns from a power failure in neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. It is also transmitted at the start of special symbol fluctuations and at the time of changes in the game state (at the start and end of jackpots, probability changes, time savings, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the setting value command sent when the power is turned on, it will be changed to the correct setting value in subsequent games (for example, when the special symbol starts changing), so that incorrect settings can be corrected. The effect is no longer based on the value. A production based on set values is a production that suggests a set value using display devices, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc., and it is a production that suggests a setting value with a predetermined probability that is difficult to occur (or does not occur) under normal circumstances. This indicates the setting value by generating it. This setting value suggestion performance may include other forms of performance as exemplified below, and may also include false information. As a setting value suggestion effect, the effect display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the setting value, or changes the pattern variation mode from normal (for example, when the left and right middle symbols start to change). or the timing of confirmation is different from normal (normally each symbol starts to fluctuate at the same time, in the case of high settings, it starts to fluctuate in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), the sound is When used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a predetermined probability when a prize is won at the starting gate, or a sound that is different from the normal sound during the performance (normal time is a male voice, and when the setting is high, a female voice is generated). voice, etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following explanation, n is a counter value indicating the processing state regarding the special symbol/special electric accessory, and m is a value according to the set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start when the normal gaming state starts, the operation command at power-on (A001H) → state command at power-on (3001H) → return destination command at power-on (310nH) → set value command (A10mH). Sent in order.

Furthermore, when initializing the main control RAM 1312 by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command ( A10mH).

In the setting change mode, first, the power-on operation command (A003H) is sent, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, the power-on operation is performed. The command is transmitted in the following order: command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

In the setting confirmation mode, first, the power-on operation command (A002H) is sent, and then the setting value is confirmed and the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H) is sent. → Status command at power-on (3001H) → Return destination command at power-on (310nH) → Set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

In addition, when a RAM abnormality occurs, a power-on operation command (A009H) is first sent, and a setting change mode is started by a setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is turned off. A power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH) Sent.

When a RAM abnormality occurs, a power-on operation command (A009H) is first sent, and if no settings are changed when the power is restored after power-off, the RAM abnormality continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) is sent. ) is sent. After that, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH) Sent.

As explained above, when the main control board 1310 starts up in a normal gaming state, a group of commands (combination of multiple commands in a predetermined order) indicating power restoration are sent to the peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, when it is determined that the normal gaming state can be started after the reception of all the series of commands from A001H to A10mH is completed, and some commands in the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal gaming state cannot be started, and a notification that the normal gaming state cannot be started is notified.

In other words, similar to the above-mentioned performance when the gaming commands are disabled, the performance that satisfies the predetermined conditions among the received gaming commands is performed (for example, the movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc. The player may perform an effect corresponding to the command given), and use the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it compensates for the set value command that was missed when the power was turned on using the set value command sent at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and starts the normal game. You may.

Further, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it sets a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the power is turned on to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command, it sets the set value as the set value. It may be updated to a setting value corresponding to the command.

Note that the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) both notify the state in which the normal game can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is important to control either one of them as the main control. It is enough to send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the state transition of values set after power is restored from the state before power cutoff in the setting state management area.

The operation of a pachinko machine with a setting function when the power is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns considering convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of operation will be described in which the game is in the normal gaming state (VALID_PLAY=00H) when the power is cut off immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 204(A). First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used for game control including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as a region. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the storage contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays current setting values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control area including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power outage. Note that even if all the storage contents in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least the area where information for returning to the gaming state before the power outage is stored (memory where information related to gaming is stored) It is only necessary that the areas (areas related to special symbols, normal symbols, areas related to prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (fluctuating pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.)) are maintained, and it is necessary to return to the gaming state before the power outage. After the power is restored, the area in which the information that is not specified may be stored may be in a different state than before the power outage. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Note that the same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204(B), in operation example 1 when the main control RAM 1312 is in the setting change mode at the time of the previous power cut and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area including the stack area other than the setting value and base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in pattern 2-1 is performed by initializing the area used as the game control area including the stack area along with the storage area initialized in the initialization process that was already executed when a power outage occurred. good. For example, if the power is cut off during initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage areas for which initialization processing has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of a power outage, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power outage occurs during initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clearing processing flag) is provided to store whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized, and while the RAM clearing processing flag is set, It is preferable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area that is the target of initialization processing.

Further, the process of monitoring power outages in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), the power outage warning signal may be monitored by, for example, a timer interrupt.

The power outage monitoring process and the power outage process can be executed as a common process in the setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and normal gaming state, or as separate processes. A common process may be executed in the mode, and a separate process may be executed in the normal gaming state. That is, out of three or more operating states (operating modes) of the pachinko machine, the power outage monitoring process and the power outage process may be performed in common in at least two states.

As explained above, in pattern 2-1 when the power is cut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the setting is always set regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power outage occurs during setting change work in a hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 for starting the setting change mode may not be operated when the power is restored. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, the system may start up in setting confirmation mode instead of setting change mode, or only RAM clear switch 954 may be operated. If the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is started, and if no switch is operated, the normal gaming state is started. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1, the device is always started in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If it was in the setting change mode when the power was cut off immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, it may operate in another pattern shown in Figure 204(C), unlike pattern 2-1. good. If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a gaming control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are operated in a manner other than the above when the power is turned on, if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 The memory contents of will not change. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a gaming stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H, which indicates an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes). The game stop state may be a game stop by causing the main control MPU 1311 to execute an infinite loop, or a game stop by not executing normal game processing.

In other words, in Pattern 2-1, the setting key and RAM clear switch are unconditionally switched to the setting change mode after the power is restored, but in Pattern 2-2, the settings are changed when the power is restored. When the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to start the setting change mode, the setting change mode is started, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). shall be. That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 is operated when the power is restored, the normal game does not start as the RAM is in an abnormal state, and the normal game resumes after going through the setting change mode. Start playing. Therefore, when no operation is performed to start the setting change mode, the normal game is not executed in a state other than the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode such as when there is a RAM error, and the game is stopped by notifying the hall. The employee may be prompted to activate the settings change mode.

If a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the gaming control area and the stack area within the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized until the next setting change operation is performed. Wait in game stop state. The game stop state may be a game stop by causing the main control MPU 1311 to execute an infinite loop, or a game stop by not executing normal game processing. After that, by turning off the power, operating the setting key and RAM clear switch to setting change mode, and turning on the power, the value of the setting state management area will be updated to 02H, and the value of the main control RAM 1312 game control area will be updated. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204(D) in the case where the setting confirmation mode was in effect at the time of the power cut immediately before, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power outage will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a gaming control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the space used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays setting values associated with setting changes.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated ON when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays current setting values for setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area to be used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds) that the machine has been switched to the performance display as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1311 may be started in the setting confirmation mode as shown in pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. (The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the setting), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204(F), an example of the operation when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is restored will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used for game control including the entire stack area other than the setting value and base value. Initialize the area used as a region. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays information for changing settings.

When the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are operated in a manner other than the above when the power is turned on, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main The storage contents of control RAM 1312 do not change. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a gaming stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. Note that the same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 also displays errors (eg, error codes).

In addition, if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, if the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized before the power cut, the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized again when the power is restored, and (1) Initial settings are made for devices built into the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. It is preferable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of (3) setting interrupt permission.

Furthermore, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is turned off immediately before, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are Determine whether or not there is an operation. If a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, but even if no setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (setting confirmation mode is activated). (Regardless of whether the startup operation is being performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, or neither is being operated), the RAM abnormal state is maintained. In other words, normally, when starting the settings change mode and when starting the settings confirmation mode, the settings change mode processing and settings confirmation mode processing are executed within the timer interrupt processing, but when the power is turned on again due to a RAM error state. , different processes are executed in settings change mode and settings confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again and the power is turned on again from a RAM abnormal state, when starting up in setting change mode, the setting change mode processing is executed within the timer interrupt handling as usual, but the setting change mode is started in setting confirmation mode. When this happens, different processing than normal is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, there is no need to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be explained using a time chart. The outline of the time chart explained below is as follows.
・Time chart for normal setting changes (Figure 205)
・Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Figure 206)
・Time chart when in setting change mode during a power outage and transitioning to setting change mode with setting key 971 OFF and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 207)
・Time chart when transitioning to setting change mode in setting change mode during power outage with setting key 971 ON and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 208)
・Time chart when transitioning to setting confirmation mode in setting confirmation mode during power outage with setting key 971 OFF and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored (Figure 209)

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. Note that the display mode of the function display unit is as described above in FIG. 184.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above in accordance with the received power-on command.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value from N+1 to N+2, and the base display 1317 is updated. The next set value N+2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is updated to 1. Ru.

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal gaming state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 ends all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts displaying in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly seen, and operational errors at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on becomes 01H. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that both the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) are used to notify the state in which normal gaming can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is necessary to select either one from the main control board. It is enough to send it to .

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some presentation devices perform a presentation to notify that the settings are being changed. For example, the presentation display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. Continue the announcement performance. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time for the security signal is This is to ensure that

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, when the power was turned off immediately before, the user was in the normal gaming state or the setting confirmation mode, and when the power was turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated and the setting key 971 was turned ON. , the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a setting confirmation mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 01H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Shift to confirmation mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the set values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). In the setting confirmation mode, as a general rule, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, so the state before the power outage is transmitted as the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some presentation devices perform a presentation to notify that the settings are being changed. For example, the presentation display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. Continue the announcement performance. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, since the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode when the power was shut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode. Note that, as shown in FIG. 204(B), if the mode was set when the power was turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is set to the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 when the power is turned on. Indicates when to start.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage and executes a power outage process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is set at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed. to move to. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area within the game control area are initialized again, similarly to the transition to the normal setting change mode. Furthermore, since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power outage process. In this case, since the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the gaming control area may not be initialized by executing RAM clear processing when the power is restored. After reinitializing, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as the base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some presentation devices perform a presentation to notify that the settings are being changed. For example, the presentation display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. Continue the announcement performance. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, even if the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in a different operation mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting a security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the set value from N to N+1, and displays the base display. 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage and executes a power outage process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

At timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operating mode is changed depending on the level of the 954 signal. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF and the setting key 971 is turned ON so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power outage recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates a setting change (02H), at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 restarts in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area remains at 02H. be done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When transitioning to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area within the game control area are initialized again, similarly to the transition to the normal setting change mode. Furthermore, since the power outage is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and the power outage process is executed thereafter, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power outage process. In this case, since the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the gaming control area may not be initialized by executing RAM clear processing when the power is restored. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power outage is in the process of changing settings, YES is determined in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before power-off is continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization process step S2034. After reinitializing, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be started even if the setting key 971 is not turned on. In other words, the setting change mode starts when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on. Setting change mode can be started even if it is not turned on.

Note that, as indicated by a broken line at timing T12, if the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the setting state management area is 00H may be recorded and the game may be restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be played (for example, due to a RAM error) without returning to the setting change mode. In other words, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even if the device is in the setting change mode at the time of a power outage, if no setting change operation is performed when the power is restored, the device is restarted in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally ended at some point.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

Peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the operating state of the peripheral control board 1510 is reset and returns to the initial state when the power is turned off, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command sent by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as the base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

When the hall employee finishes changing the set value, he or she operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on becomes 01H. m in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 202(D). Note that the operation command at power-on (A0001H) and the state command at power-on (3001H) both notify the state in which the normal game can be started, and since they are normally sent consecutively, it is important to control either one of them as the main control. It is enough to send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learned from the power-on state command that the normal game can be started, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some presentation devices perform a presentation to notify that the settings are being changed. For example, the presentation display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. Continue the announcement performance. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if it was in the setting confirmation mode when the power was shut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Thereafter, at timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts the customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup wait time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register, records 02H in the setting state management area, and sets it. Enter change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting a security signal.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage, executes a power-off process, and stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 is stopped, the display of the set value on the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). Note that in the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 using a power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during the power-off process, power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced and a reset caused by a drop in the power supply (5V) before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off process. In addition, it is good to also turn off the output port of the signal to the solenoid which controls the opening and closing of the big prize openings 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004, etc., and stop the drive signal of the solenoid.

Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code in response to the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF and the setting key 971 is turned ON so that the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on again, but the state before the power outage recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates setting confirmation (01H), at timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the device is restarted in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned OFF when the power is turned on, and if the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power is turned on. It is also possible to start the settings confirmation mode.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

During the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the setting value is not updated and the setting value is displayed as the base display. 1317 and continues to be displayed.

After confirming the set values, the hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the process during the normal game in the timer interrupt process. Further, the base display 1317 displays the base value in the normal gaming state after blinking all the LEDs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 learns from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes a performance in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting performance). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 starts the performance in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting performance) after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since it learned that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command. It's okay. In addition, after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 learns that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change and starts the effect in the normal game state. For example, the presentation may be switched to start a customer waiting presentation. During the predetermined delay time, it is recommended that some presentation devices perform a presentation to notify that the settings are being changed. For example, the presentation display device 1600 and sound may return to the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamps may indicate that the settings are being changed. Continue the announcement performance. In addition, some decorative lamps (for example, on the frame side) continue the notification effect, and other decorative lamps (for example, on the panel side) return to the normal gaming state. good.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time delay (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer will not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode. This is to ensure output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing configuration examples of the jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot judgment threshold table stores the hit judgment thresholds of random numbers for jackpot judgment for drawing jackpots of special symbols.

The jackpot threshold determination table shown in FIG. 210 is comprised of an address table for setting value table selection and a determination threshold table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example in which a jackpot is determined when the random number value for jackpot determination is larger than the threshold defined in the table.

The setting value table selection address table defines a pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value, and each data is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table stores a threshold value when the probability is low (normal state) and a threshold value when the probability is high (variable probability state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, a threshold value for jackpot determination is obtained from the selected threshold value determination table. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of an address table for setting value table selection and a determination threshold table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a jackpot is determined when the random number value for jackpot determination is within the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

The setting value table selection address table defines a pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value, and each data is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each setting value is the lower limit threshold for low probability (normal state), the upper limit threshold for low probability (normal state), the lower limit threshold for high probability (variable state), and the lower limit threshold for high probability (variable state). Stores the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for setting value table selection is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current setting value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the variable probability state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, determine whether the selected threshold value judgment table is a low probability block or a high probability block, and set the lower limit threshold and upper limit for jackpot judgment. Get the threshold. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold value and less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is outside the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes an address table for selecting a setting value table for low probability, a determination threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for selecting a setting value table for high probability, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a judgment threshold table for values. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table, but the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

The address table for selecting the setting value table for low probability defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each setting value of low probability (normal state), and the address table for selecting the setting value table for high probability defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected for each setting value of low probability (normal state). defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each setting value of high probability (variable probability state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table is preferably configured as a 2-byte value. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value determination threshold table for low probability stores a lower limit threshold when the probability is low (normal state) and an upper threshold when the probability is low (normal state). Each setting value determination threshold table for high probability stores a lower limit threshold at high probability (normal state) and an upper limit threshold at high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, it is determined whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the address table for selecting the high probability setting value table based on the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability). A setting value is acquired as an offset from an address table for selecting a setting value table, and a determination threshold table corresponding to the current setting value is selected using the acquired offset. Then, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or more than the acquired lower limit threshold value and less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is outside the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a loss.

[12-17. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 2]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function caused by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By first setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to calculations in processing calculations) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the registers in bank 0 are used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312, and the information is erased without being retained in the event of a power outage, and is different from the RAM area where information is backed up in the event of a power outage. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2206). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits in step S2206 until the power supply voltage stabilizes.

Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S2207). The peripheral control board 1510 may wait for startup at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2208). If a power outage warning signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2208.

Thereafter, a setting value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range, and whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2210). This is to ensure the independence of the processing outside the gaming control area and the processing within the gaming control area, so that the information used in one process does not affect the other process. Thereafter, a RAM outside gaming area confirmation process at power-on is executed to determine an abnormality outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the process for confirming the RAM outside the game area when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormal value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B register and C register used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. Note that the general-purpose registers in bank 0 are used in the process when the power is turned on.

The values set in the setting state management area in another example 2 are different from those shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting status management area is stored in the B register. (step S2218), and the process advances to step 2219.

Thereafter, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). The register in which the value of the PF port is stored is a general-purpose register that is different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect at the time of the power outage (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to a normal state. Furthermore, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235. In this way, since the values in the setting state management area are different between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, it is not possible to distinguish the calling source even if the program for both RAM clear processing is common. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2226). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the process advances to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, so that a RAM abnormality can be resolved only when a setting value change is triggered.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power outage (step S2227).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. . That is, even if the state at the time of the power outage is in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal gaming state is entered. Note that if the state at the time of the power outage is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the game may shift to the same power outage confirmation mode as before the power outage instead of the normal gaming state.

Steps S2225 to S2229 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, an abnormality outside the gaming control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, RAM clear processing outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2232), and the processing when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal is executed (step S2233). Details of the process when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the setting values in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, the RAM clearing process outside the gaming control area will not be executed unless the settings are changed. When there is an abnormality in the RAM outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting status management area and the game stops, just like when there is an abnormality in the RAM inside the game control area.The RAM abnormality cannot be recovered unless the settings are changed. It is now impossible to do so. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the gaming control area is only a setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the gaming control area is changing the setting and operating the RAM clear switch 954 (even if no RAM abnormality has occurred). There are two cases (when the RAM is forcibly cleared by an employee's operation).

In the RAM clearing process in the gaming area in step S2235, the setting value and setting state management area are excluded because damage will occur to the hall if the setting value is set to a high value due to an unauthorized RAM clearing operation by the player. In particular, if a malfunction (RAM abnormality) occurs during a game with a high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clearing operation will change the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This means that if the power is turned off with commands stored in the command buffer and then the power is turned back on without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off during transmission of a variation command, the symbol command may have been transmitted but the subsequent variation pattern command may not have been transmitted. If only a variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if unsent commands in settings change processing are stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 may be If you set the gaming state using In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Note that although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when starting the setting change process and when starting the setting confirmation process. In addition, in the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared as the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately, but in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is a good idea to clear the command buffer when transitioning to configuration confirmation mode.

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and hardware random numbers (for example, winning/losing random numbers) built into the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated even in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, but the hardware random number is not activated at the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. It's okay. Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation process. The setting value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and determines whether the setting value in the setting state management area is within the normal range, and determines whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range. do. Note that the setting value confirmation process may be executed not only when the power is turned on but also when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. Furthermore, it may be executed at the start of special symbol fluctuations or at the time of changes in the gaming state (at the start and end of jackpot, probability change, time saving, etc.).

In the setting value confirmation process, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220(A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area, so if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal and the process advances to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where settings can be selected from 1 to 6, the workpiece values in which setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (setting 1 = 0, setting 6 = In case 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is outside the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on process. . On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

Regarding the values and setting values recorded in the setting state management area, it is also determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal during the progress of the game (at each start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, there are two conditions for determining a RAM abnormality regarding the setting state management area and setting values during gaming, and a RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area within the gaming area excluding the setting state management area and setting values, and the work area outside the gaming area). The two conditions for determining that the work RAM is abnormal are different. Note that a part of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two judgment conditions are partially the same.

In this way, the conditions for determining a RAM abnormality are different because if a RAM abnormality regarding setting values is determined only when the power is turned on, if the setting values are changed due to malfunction due to fraud or noise, This is because it is desirable to detect the abnormality early and shorten the period during which the disadvantage occurs, since it may cause a disadvantage to the person.

In addition, by creating a subroutine for RAM abnormality determination processing regarding the setting state management area and setting values during a game, the same program can be executed multiple times by calling the subroutine and determining RAM abnormality as necessary during the progress of the game. The size of the program can be reduced without having to provide it at a specific location.

Furthermore, although the setting state management area is not subject to RAM abnormality determination when the power is turned on, it may be treated as a RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as a target for RAM abnormality determination when power is turned on, if the setting change mode is present before a power outage and it is determined that RAM is abnormal when power is restored, priority is given to RAM abnormality. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the value of the setting state management area (that is, a RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area in the main control RAM 1312 in which the setting values are stored may be subject to RAM abnormality determination at power-on, or may be excluded from RAM abnormality determination.

It should be noted that in the order of priority in the determination when the power is turned on, RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and entering the normal gaming state has the lowest priority. Furthermore, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode or executing RAM clear processing by a RAM clear operation. In this way, by executing the determination process in the order of the derived states' priorities, it is possible to accurately derive the state with the highest priority even if a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the process of confirming the RAM outside the game area when the power is turned on. The power-on outside gaming area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area value to the stack pointer (step S2261). , all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2262). In addition, the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by the first power-on or the like (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on, etc.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time, the process advances to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time, a checksum of the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and whether the calculated checksum is normal or not. is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process advances to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, a RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. Furthermore, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the gaming area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the gaming control area is determined in S2231.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 seconds). milliseconds) (step S2268), and set the mode switching time (5 seconds) in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the LED blinking cycle timer times out. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and when the mode switching time timer times up, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

Thereafter, the performance display monitor display management area is initialized by setting 0 (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

Thereafter, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process that were saved in the register saving buffer outside the gaming area are restored (step S2272), and are saved in the SP saving buffer outside the gaming area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart of processing when a RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal. The out-of-gaming area RAM abnormality process is executed in step S2233 of the power-on process (FIG. 214), and initializes the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area to the stack pointer (step S2281), All register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2282). In addition, the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the outside-of-use area RWM initialization process is executed to initialize the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the out-of-use area RWM initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

Thereafter, a RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the outside gaming area RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the gaming area outside RAM abnormality determination area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether or not the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on next time.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2285), the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. A switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the gaming area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , restores the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2289), and returns to the power-on process of the calling source.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the out-of-use area RWM initialization process. The out-of-use area RWM initialization process is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-gaming area RAM abnormality process, and initializes the area outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2290). Then, 00H is written in the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2291). Thereafter, the process returns to the process when the RAM outside the gaming area is abnormal.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to perform the initial setting when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As described later in FIG. 220(B), the power-on operation command is a 2-byte command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area, where the upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. The value is the area value plus 1.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is an initial value. Note that the other bits are preferably set to 0 (step S2301). The reason why the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt, and the ON edge is incorrectly set. This is to prevent it from being made by someone else.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

Thereafter, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the setting state management area does not record a value indicating the state in which the game can be started, it is either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error, so end the setting processing when the power is turned on, and Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a state in which the game can be started is recorded in the setting state management area, it means that the normal game can be started. The area is initialized (step S2304).

Thereafter, a power-on state command is created and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220(C), the power-on state command is a 2-byte command, with the upper byte being 30H and the lower byte indicating the state before the power outage.

Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in Figure 202(C), the power-on return destination command is a 2-byte command that notifies the gaming status regarding the special symbol, with the upper byte being 31H and the lower byte being the special symbol when a power outage occurs. Shows the state of the symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory. The power-on return destination command is sent once when the power is turned on.

Further, a setting value command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202(D), the setting value command is a 2-byte command that notifies the setting value, with the upper byte being A1H and the lower byte indicating the setting value.

In addition, along with the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol pending number command indicating the pending number of the special symbol fluctuation display game is transmitted, and the pending number display on the production display device 1600 is changed from a power outage. The situation may be restored to the state before the occurrence. In addition, the order in which the special symbol reservation number command is sent is that it can be sent during the transmission of these commands, even after the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and setting value command are sent. It's okay.

After that, the process returns to the calling source.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of whether the setting change mode is set. Further, the power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the OFF of the setting key 971 is detected and the setting change/confirmation process is ended. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

Note that when executing the setting change/confirmation process, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, if the setting change/confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only in the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted in order for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 makes notifications corresponding to states such as setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormality.

In addition, in the setting/confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjusting the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment function by the hall employee (peripheral control board box) is stopped. 1520) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating the normal gaming state is received.

Further, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 may be used to display whether the mode is the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is in an abnormal state. In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be output. Furthermore, notification may be made using some or all of the lamps (which may include lamps provided on the door frame 3).

FIG. 220(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. Unlike what is shown in FIG. 202(A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal gaming, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0. is set to 1.

Note that the power-on operation command is created at least once during power-on processing. Specifically, the A001H or A004H command is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and the A002H or A003H command is created during power-on processing in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. After that, it is created twice as an A001H command, once at the end of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it performs the above-mentioned operations according to the normal game start ready state (A001H), setting confirmation mode (A002H), setting change mode (A003H), and RAM abnormality state (A004H). The notification is made in this manner (see FIG. 184). Although not shown in FIG. 184, the notification of the state in which the normal game can be started is performed by displaying a demonstration screen or performing a standby state to explain the game contents.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a gaming command during normal gaming without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the gaming state may be inconsistent, so the received gaming command cannot be processed. It is determined that the game command is invalid, and game operations (effects, etc.) corresponding to the game command are not started. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, a gaming command during normal gaming is transmitted a predetermined number of times in succession), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received gaming command and perform a performance corresponding to the gaming command.

In addition, when the gaming commands are disabled, effects that satisfy the predetermined conditions are performed among the received gaming commands (for example, effects corresponding to the received commands regarding movement of symbols, lamps, movable objects, voices, etc.) ), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Further, the fact that a mismatch in the gaming state has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This is because if no performance is performed until a predetermined condition is met, a player who cannot understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not be able to start the special symbol fluctuation display game even if he or she enters the starting slot. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning. Note that even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables the gaming command, the main control board 1310 is executing normal gaming processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally. be done.

FIG. 220(C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. Different from that shown in FIG. 202(B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of another example 2 defines four states: 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and also notifies the state before the power outage. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify RAM clear. Further, if the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a low probability/non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, if the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a high probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, if the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power outage is a low probability/time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

In addition, as mentioned above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area that stores information about the gaming state at the time of a power outage in order to restore the state before the power outage, but the power-on state command , the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving mode, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 1 is added to this value, and 2 is stored in the power-on state command. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, since the power-on state buffer is 0, 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it is possible to notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process and the power outage process may be executed when the occurrence of a power outage is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred.

If the power outage notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2312). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2314), and a power-off process is executed to execute necessary processes before the power is turned off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2316).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2318). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, write RAM protection enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled to the RAM protection register, prohibit writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2319), and wait until recovery from the power outage. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. Therefore, by setting the prohibited area of the RAM protect register to be invalid, the reset function caused by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), thereby allowing access to all areas. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the power-off processing. The power OFF process is executed in step S2315 of the main control side main process (FIG. 221), and necessary processes are executed before the power is turned off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the gaming area to the stack pointer (step S2321), All register values are stored in a register save buffer outside the gaming area (step S2322).

Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the checksum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). Thereafter, 5AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the gaming area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power outage process is being executed normally. In this sense, the power down check area and the RAM backup flag in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power outage processing has been executed normally, the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been determined to be normal, and if 5AH is set in the power down check area as a result, the main control Initialization of the area outside the gaming control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power outage process has been executed normally are provided within the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. . This is because double determination is made between inside the gaming control area and outside the gaming control area, and since the inside of the gaming control area and the outside of the gaming control area do not share a single storage area, they cannot be determined independently. This is because it is desirable to process it. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power outage processing was executed normally, if 5AH is set to that flag by mistake and the power is restored without performing the power outage processing, it will be mistakenly assumed that the power outage processing was executed normally. will be determined. By performing double determination in this way, the possibility of erroneous determination is reduced.

Furthermore, the two flags should be provided in separate areas (for example, an area where the lower bytes (**00H to **FFH) or upper bytes (00**H or 01**H) of the address do not overlap). This allows the data to be restored correctly even if the data is rewritten due to a problem such as noise.

Then, all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process that were saved in the register save buffer outside the gaming area are restored (step S2325), and are saved in the SP save buffer outside the gaming area. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326) and the process returns to the calling source.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that the switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to input from a fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2335 is NO, so winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected by the fraud detection sensor. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed. For example, since settings changes and settings confirmation operations are performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member, are likely to sway. There is a possibility of erroneously detecting vibration. Therefore, such false alarms can be prevented by stopping the fraud detection sensor from detecting fraud in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. In addition, employees at the hall are equipped with magnets for collecting balls that have fallen on the floor, which can prevent false alarms caused by the magnets held by employees when changing or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has means for disabling (or restricting, regulating, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after transitioning to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). (after completion of the above), fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during a setting process), fraud detection is disabled (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the means.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when a setting process for changing a setting value is executed. This is because the hardware random numbers that determine wins and losses are updated regardless of whether settings are changed or settings are confirmed, so the random numbers generated by the software are also updated at the same time as the hardware random numbers are activated. By updating settings even during the processing of setting changes and setting confirmation, inconsistencies between hardware random numbers and software random numbers are less likely to occur, and the expected value of the performance in the game and the design value of the expected value that will lead to a jackpot during a specific performance. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the setting value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process, but even if the setting value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, it can be used at the start of fluctuation, at the time of switching the gaming state (for example, when changing the jackpot probability). It is preferable to perform this in response to the establishment of a specific condition, such as at the time of switching, at the start or end of a jackpot game, at the start or end of a time-saving state), or at the time of fraud detection (for example, when a door is opened, or when a magnetic field is detected). The resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed by making the determination when a specific condition is satisfied, instead of making the determination periodically at short intervals like when executing the timer interrupt process.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By checking the value in the setting status management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value in the setting status management area immediately after can be checked (S2335). It is controlled so that normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2080 in FIG. 191. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2338). Then, a test signal output process is executed to output a test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2340). Before and after the start of execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and register are saved as in other out-of-gaming area processes, and returned after the process is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as a process outside the game control area. In addition, if the test signal processing is executed as a process within the game control area and does not affect the game, it may be executed as a process within the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as a process within the game control area, saving and restoring of the flag register (steps S2337, S2340), which are executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339), becomes unnecessary.

Then, setting processing is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

Thereafter, setting display processing is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. This transmission information storage area stores a command generated each time a command is generated, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the FIFO format transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

The processing after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the processing described above with reference to FIG. 191. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and mainly executes the process of changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

As a result, in the case of a RAM abnormality, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating a RAM abnormality is transmitted every timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating a RAM error is sent only once, the RAM error will not be re-notified if the command is missing, and the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to know the status of the gaming machine. It is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the status of the gaming machine, abnormality notification will not be performed, so that the status of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, no commands other than the power-on operation command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 because no games are played, so the power-on operation command is repeatedly sent as long as the RAM abnormality continues. are doing.

That is, the pachinko machine of this embodiment executes a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) triggered by the execution of a periodic process (timer interrupt process) that is executed at a predetermined cycle in the same system of commands (for example, a power-on operation command). , 1, 2, 3, etc.), and the second case is that the pachinko machine is repeatedly transmitted at a predetermined period without limiting the number of times while the pachinko machine is operating. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly sent regardless of whether the peripheral control board 1510 receives it correctly, and other game-related commands are not sent when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command that is sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command regarding the RAM abnormality, it issues a notification regarding the RAM abnormality. Note that even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, it is preferable to invalidate the received command regarding the RAM abnormality and continue the current notification. By invalidating subsequent commands, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

Commands related to RAM abnormalities may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing at which they are sent. The consistency of the command may be determined by changing the command related to the RAM abnormality depending on the timing at which it is sent. For example, by setting the power-on operation command (A004H) that is sent when the RAM is abnormal at power-on, and the power-on operation command (A005H) that is sent when the RAM is abnormal at the time of a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the setting values and setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during normal gaming) can be determined to have become abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be made different for each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality continues when the power is turned on, it can be reported that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it can be notified that the set value is abnormal.

Note that during the RAM abnormality notification, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjusting the volume and brightness by operating a button provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating the normal gaming state is received.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process will be repeatedly executed, so the process related to special symbols and normal symbols will not be executed, resulting in a state in which no games can be played at all. This RAM abnormality can be detected by turning off the power, executing power outage processing, and then turning the power back on by operating the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 to start the setting change mode. As a result, the RAM abnormality is resolved. Then, by operating the setting key 971 to return to its original state, the setting change mode is ended and the normal game can be started.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode is performed using the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954, the value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting status management area is maintained. The RAM abnormality continues and normal games cannot be started. In other words, in order to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined to be the end of setting change or setting confirmation), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2354), executes the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 (step S2355), and returns to the calling process.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer, the delay time from the end of the setting change mode until the security signal turns OFF is set. establish. Therefore, even if the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal will be output for the time set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. security signals, and the hall computer can reliably detect security signals.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay time until the security signal turns OFF, if the power is restored and a hot start is performed in normal gaming mode, a security signal for the remaining time will be output, and when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when clearing the RAM due to a setting change, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and starts outputting the security signal in conjunction with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs while the security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation.

When transitioning to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM abnormality continues, a security signal is output due to the continued RAM abnormality because no setting change operation has been performed even after the power is restored. If the power goes out before the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the delay time elapses, and if a hot start is performed after the power is restored, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is started after a predetermined period of time (for example, during the startup wait time of the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal will resume. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs during output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
- When power is restored by hot start after a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to fraud detection, etc. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues. Cases: - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings change mode, the power is restored and settings change mode continues. - After a power outage occurs while outputting a security signal in settings confirmation mode, the power is restored. If the settings confirmation mode continues

In this way, even if the security signal is to be output continuously after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output, by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored, the security signal can be output on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been released.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for which the security signal is output, and the delay time is reached after the setting confirmation mode ends. Stop outputting the security signal after the elapsed time. Further, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting is changed. If it is determined that the mode is selected, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be configured to serve as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, if it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). Note that if the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359, S2360). After that, the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode is set), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the setting value is not updated. The process returns to the calling process without executing the call.

Note that when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to ON. In this way, if it is determined that the setting key 971 is operated when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change switch 972 will be activated even if the setting change mode is in the setting change mode when the power outage occurs and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent settings from being changed by operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, and executes the process of displaying the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment ports (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2374), and output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , returns to the calling process.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. The main difference between the third example described below and the second example described above is that the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game. Processes other than those described below are the same as in the second example described above.

In addition, in another example 3, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, as in the other example 2, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of the power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on and the reset signal is released, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code. The protection invalidation and prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In this third example, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid, thereby making it possible to access all areas of the main control RAM 1312. Note that even if an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is specified as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and an access to the specified prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 954 being operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match or the backup flag is not set correctly, the game machine will stop functioning as a RAM error and will not be able to play, but the settings will not be changed. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized and the game is controlled so as not to be executed.

Therefore, if the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is enabled, a reset may occur due to incorrect access to the prohibited area of RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes power-on processing, Since the power outage process has not been executed, the checksum has not been calculated, and the backup flag has not been set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, not only will the game be initialized by RAM clear processing, but the RAM protection register will be prohibited because the game cannot be restarted unless the RAM abnormality is cleared (setting change operation) by a hall employee. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

Note that the prohibited area may be set to be valid. By enabling the prohibited area, if there is unauthorized access to the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by the hall clerk. This can improve resistance to fraud.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined period of time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). Thereafter, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power outage clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power outage clear signal ON and then setting it OFF, the power outage warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (a state that is not a power outage).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 have been operated after the peripheral control board 1510 has reliably started, the hall If the employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined in a state that the hall employee did not intend. For this reason, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, at an early stage after the start of power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 is terminated. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 that are later stored in a register, etc., which is a temporary storage means, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, , the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2406). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the game waits in step S2406 until the power supply voltage becomes stable. In the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer is not cleared, so the watchdog timer generates a reset unless the power outage is canceled. In this watchdog timer reset, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing a security check unlike a system reset, and power-on processing is executed. Therefore, unless the power outage warning signal is canceled in the loop of step S2406, the process does not exit from the loop.

In this way, the power outage determination process for detecting a power outage warning signal is performed firstly in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and secondly in step S2450 of the main control side main processing during normal gaming. It is executed in some places. In the latter (step S2450), power outage processing is executed after step S2462 by detecting a power outage, but in the former (steps S2406, 2408), power outage processing is not executed even if a power outage is detected. Note that during the loop period, the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained, so that the state at the time of the power outage can be correctly restored without executing power outage processing.

Note that the reset in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by accessing a watchdog timer or an area other than the designated area of the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, a program is started after a security check is executed for several hundred milliseconds, but in a user reset, the program is started immediately without executing a security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer during normal gaming processing, the power outage processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Ru. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the gaming state is initialized by RAM clear processing, and the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by the hall clerk. On the other hand, even if a reset is generated by the watchdog timer in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, the RAM error release operation (setting change operation) by the hall staff is not performed and the state at the time of the power outage is not correct. I can return.

In this way, regarding resets caused by the watchdog timer, the reason why there are cases where a setting change operation is required to cancel the RAM error in order to restart the pachinko machine 1 and cases where it is not necessary is that it is normal. The occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during game play is when a software malfunction occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the game state different from the game state at the time of the power outage is stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during power-on processing occurs when a hardware malfunction occurs, and the possibility of data stored in the main control RAM 1312 being destroyed is low, so the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. This is because there is little need to change the

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, similar processing is performed for other types of user resets than the reset generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described process can be executed by a reset that occurs due to one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S2407). The peripheral control board 1510 does not have to wait for startup after determining the set value, but may be at any time from when the power is turned on until the first command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power outage warning signal indicates that a power outage is occurring (step S2408). If the power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 waits in step S2408. Note that the determination as to whether the power outage warning signal indicates a power outage does not need to be performed in both steps S2406 and S2408, and may be determined in either one.

Thereafter, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2410), and the RAM outside the game area confirmation process at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2412).

Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormal value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in another example 3 is different from that shown in FIG. 201(B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and for example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clearing process by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode ends, it is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, the value is updated from 03H to 02H, and when the setting change mode ends, it is updated from 02H to 00H.

Furthermore, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415, S2416). Specifically, the checksum is calculated and stored from the data used as the gaming control area (excluding data saved to the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cut, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. In addition, if the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been successfully performed (power-off processing has been executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 will not be successfully backed up when a power failure occurs. (power-off processing is not executed normally), and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

If there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting status management area is stored in the B register. (step S2418), and the process advances to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register, so in the subsequent processing, a RAM abnormality is determined as a determination of "RAM abnormality" and "gaming state before power cut." There is no need to re-execute processing (processing to determine whether checksums and backup flags match), and the size of the program can be reduced.

In addition, the value of the setting state management area at the time of a power outage or the judgment result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power restoration is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is tentatively set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting this, you can delete unnecessary processing and reduce the size of the program. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, and YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436 It is necessary to execute a JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, the JUMP You can reduce the number of commands.

Source code example when RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421 (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z,$111;
$000:
LD W,03H ;S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436 ;Jump instruction to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Source code example when temporarily setting RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H ;S2421
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ,S2436;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,S2436;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

Thereafter, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the PF port values are recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the values stored in the register (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process advances to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was in effect at the time of the power outage (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the setting change mode, the process advances to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, abnormality in the gaming control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the gaming control area or the outside of the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power outage has occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If it is determined that a power outage has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value indicating the RAM abnormality (03H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. Furthermore, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the values in the setting state management area differ when jumping from step S2426 and S2431 to step S2435. Therefore, since the values in the setting state management area are different between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, even if the program for both RAM clear processing is common, the calling source cannot be distinguished. , there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example below, at the timing of step S2425, it has not been determined whether 01H or 00H will be recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, but in this case, 00H will be set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on. Recording processing is required. For this reason, the processing contents differ between the processing at power-on and the RAM clearing processing at the time of setting change, and therefore, dedicated processing is required for each section other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to make the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 common both when the settings are changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not provisionally set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A,10H ;S2426 (PF port information is stored in A register)
JR NZ,$000 ;(bit5: Setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR NZ,$111;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W ;Equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2435 ;Increase

$111:
XOR W,W ;Increment
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;Increase
JR S2436 ;Increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
・・・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Source code example when temporarily setting 00H in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W;

CP A,10H ;S2426
JR NZ,S2435;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A;

CP A,20H ;S2428
JR Z,S2436;

LD W,01H;
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W;
・・・・・・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 was turned on when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on, the process advances to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be canceled by turning off the power, performing a setting change operation, and then turning on the power. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to the value indicating a setting change. (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM abnormality always goes through a setting change. In other words, before determining whether the state at the time of a power outage is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, so that a RAM abnormality can be resolved only when a setting value change is triggered.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is possible to automatically return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored, when the work area in the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area is determined to be normal, The work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be restored by turning the power switch ON/OFF.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game will be stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area will be determined to be normal, and the RAM will be cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be returned to by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

In addition, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game will be stopped, the power will be cut off, and when the power is restored, the work area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area will be determined to be normal, and the settings When the key 971 is being operated, the work area and stack area of the area within the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be returned to by operating the setting key 971 after the power is turned off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, information on the gaming state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the gaming state before the power outage (step S2427). In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 side can display effects (backgrounds, decorative patterns) corresponding to each gaming state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state). In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command is used when creating.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was turned ON when the power was turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process advances to S2436. . That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power failure is in the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2425 to S2429 are processes that are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated. The operation determination (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428) after determining the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, abnormalities outside the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process advances to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2432), and the process shown in FIG. 217 when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal is executed (S2433). Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the setting value and setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). Note that an unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may also be initialized.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because if the power is turned off with commands stored in the command buffer and then the power is restored without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffer will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off during transmission of a variation command, the symbol command may have been transmitted but the subsequent variation pattern command may not have been transmitted. If only a variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, if unsent commands in settings change processing are stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 may be If you set the gaming state using In order to prevent such an abnormality from occurring, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Note that although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when starting the setting change process or when starting the setting confirmation process. Note that in the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared as the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so there is no need to clear the command buffer separately; however, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is a good idea to clear the command buffer when proceeding to confirm the settings.

Thereafter, the functions of devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, a timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to enable interrupts. Note that the time of the CTC1 that controls the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is not set, and the interruption of the CTC1 for the normal gaming remains set to be prohibited.

Then, a hardware random number (for example, a winning/losing random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hardware random number, and a power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, timer interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to main control side main processing (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting change processing. In the first main loop process, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process, and the power outage process may be executed when the occurrence of a power outage is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored using either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing can be used to monitor power outages. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting status management area. Determination is made (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process advances to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, interrupts are set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, where the first main loop process for setting change processing is repeatedly executed. .

If it is determined in step S2452 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) Execute. Before executing the second main loop process, first set the timer interrupt cycle time in CTC1 for normal gaming (step S2454), stop the CTC0 interrupt (timer interrupt for setting process), and stop the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing is started (step S2455), and interrupts are set to be enabled (step S2456).

Thereafter, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main control side main processing shown in FIG.
In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to execute necessary processing before the power is cut off for the work area outside the gaming area (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, set values for enabling RAM protection (writing prohibited) and disabling prohibited areas are written to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power outage ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the area. In this embodiment, the reset function caused by access to the prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 will It may also be reset.

In the process described above, the processes are executed in the following order: clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the order in which these four processes are executed is not limited to that shown in the figure, and may be in another order.

In addition, in the third example, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored in the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power outage may be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and the power outage processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power outage signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided, one for the setting change processing and the other for the normal game timer interrupt. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes the processing to calculate the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. You can toggle whether or not to execute the process that calculates the base value. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored using either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing can be used to monitor power outages. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and the banks cannot be switched. It is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for setting processing or normal gaming. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state by executing the RET instruction. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction to return to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Note that since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the determination in step S2473 is NO, so winning detection is performed. , no fraud is detected. Note that even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, variable display, etc. are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by an employee of the hall, and it is considered desirable that fraud is not detected in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode because no fraud is committed.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like. For example, while a parlor employee is changing or confirming settings, the door is open and the sensor attached to the door is in a position close to the neighboring pachinko machine. For this reason, while a setting change operation or setting confirmation is being performed, it is possible to detect any misbehavior by radio waves or the like in the neighboring pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In addition, in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing, normally the value in the gaming state management area is other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value indicating the start of gaming (00H) is set in the setting state management area. Although it is not necessary to determine whether or not the game is recorded, this determination is intentionally made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized transition to setting change mode during normal gaming.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to changing the setting value and displaying the setting (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474).For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , a solenoid signal for the big prize opening, electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when receiving a command to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). Thereafter, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is limited, unsent commands may remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit may be in a full state or full state. If it is close to , it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit depending on the free status of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space in the sending information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the sending information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and if the free space is larger, the command is It may also be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. In addition, a predetermined upper limit is set on the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit each time a command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed. Without determining free space, if the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, it is preferable to store the remaining commands in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmit them to the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that the upper limit number is preferably set to be the same as or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, if the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, serial communication of about 80 bits is possible with one timer interrupt cycle. If one command is composed of 20 bits, 80÷20=4, so it is preferable to set the upper limit to 4 commands. Note that, in practice, the upper limit may be set to five commands, which is one more. This is because although the maximum length of a command is assumed to be 20 bits, there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Note that regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area is It is preferable that the capacity of the storage area in which the previous command is stored be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2481), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing shown in FIG. 229, unlike other timer interrupt processing, random number update processing (R_ATART_K) is not executed. Similarly to random numbers, random number update processing may be executed in timer interrupt processing for setting change processing.

In addition, in another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed in the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it cannot be called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Good too.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations; one can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group, and the banks cannot be switched. It is configured so that either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. This is because the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state by executing the RET instruction. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction to return to bank 0 at the end of timer interrupt processing.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, each of Update the random number for determining the initial value.

Thereafter, switch input special processing is executed (step S2494).

Thereafter, timer update processing is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol fluctuation determined by the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process, etc. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal input determination time is set as the determination condition, time management is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, prize ball control processing is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written in the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a two-channel serial communication circuit for output, and transmits commands to the peripheral control board 1510 through one channel, and to the payout control board 951 through the other channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side may be set lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 have gaming value, so they are not easily affected by noise etc., and are transferred at low speed to avoid abnormal prize ball commands due to garbled or missing commands. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, commands for effects without any gaming value are sent, so the effects only need to be restored with the next command.Furthermore, a large number of commands are sent, and the effects are performed with good response and the game is completed. It is desirable to send the command to the peripheral control board 1510 quickly so as not to make the user feel uncomfortable. In addition, the response of the performance is poor (for example, even if a game ball enters the starting prize opening and the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbol does not start changing on the performance display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy about the possibility of a malfunction.

Subsequently, frame command reception processing is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display commands, error release notification commands, etc.), and converts them into the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. to be memorized. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to make a notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is adapted to a command system for transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is modified as follows and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, not the serial communication circuit. Note that the main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, fraud detection processing is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are checked. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a switch passing command output process is executed to create a command corresponding to the detection of passing of various switches related to the winning switch and the starting port switch and set it in the transmission information storage area (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and base display output processing is executed (step S2501). The base display output process is a process that is executed using a second area outside the game control area, unlike other processes, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as flag registers are saved to the stack area in the game control area before and after the base display output processing is executed, and the base display Prevents it from being updated during output processing. Thereafter, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random value for jackpot matches the hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuation state is established based on the random value for the jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not to migrate. Then, when the random number value for jackpot matches the winning determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006. When opening and closing the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 are in an open (or enlarged) state, resulting in a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. The player then shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game then shifts to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, it shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not the second starting port door member 2549 is to be opened/closed in accordance with the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. transition to state.

Subsequently, output data setting processing is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), output information to the hall computer includes a probability fluctuation information output signal and special symbol display information. Various information (gaming information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2508), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 4]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 4, which will be described below, processing related to setting changes is executed in the main control side main processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. Processes other than those described below are the same as in the third example described above.

In addition, in another example 4, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, as in the other example 2, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). The main control side main process of the fourth alternative example executes steps S2481 to S2484 in place of step S2452 of the main control side main process of the third example (FIG. 228). The setting change and setting confirmation process is executed in the main control side main process, not only when the timer interrupt process for setting process and the timer interrupt process for normal game process are provided separately as in Example 4. It is also applicable to other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main processing shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458), Also in the main loop process, one timer interrupt process (FIG. 196 of Alternative Example 1, FIG. 223 of Alternative Example 2) is executed, and the setting process (Step 2068 of FIG. 190, Step S2341 of FIG. 223) is executed in the timer interrupt process. ) and normal game processing are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, CTC switching in steps S2454 and S2455, which will be described later, is unnecessary.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, the same processes as the main control side main processing of Example 3 (FIG. 228) are given the same reference numerals.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453). In the first main loop process, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 4, a power outage is monitored in the main process, but a power outage may be monitored in a timer interrupt process, and the power outage process may be executed when a power outage occurrence is detected. For example, if the power outage warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power outage has occurred. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to be prohibited (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). Thereafter, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

Thereafter, depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed (step S2484). Specifically, it is detected whether the edge of the setting key 971 changes from ON to OFF or whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting key 971 changed from ON to OFF. If the operation to end the setting change/setting confirmation process has been performed, the process advances to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation processing has not been completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, changing the set value multiple times with a single operation is prevented. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process that detects the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 is executed once. This is to prevent setting changes using the same edge information as the previous time in the first main loop process to be executed later. Note that only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. Thereafter, interrupts are set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450 to repeatedly execute the first main loop process for setting change processing. The reason why interrupts are disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

In addition, in the first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453), edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is continued to be cleared, and when the game shifts to the normal game (execution of the second main loop processing (inside), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is not referenced.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change/setting confirmation process is completed, the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, set the timer interrupt cycle time to CTC1 for normal gaming (step S2454), stop the interrupt of CTC0, start the interrupt of CTC1 (step S2455), CTC1 is set to enable interrupts (step S2456).

Thereafter, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than the random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed. In addition, if it is detected that the setting key 971 is turned ON during normal gaming (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to notify that and controls the peripheral control. The board 1510 may perform notification effects on the display device. Since this notification effect is normally performed during the game, it is desirable that it not interfere with the progress of the normal game. or a specific symbol, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is turned on may be displayed as the game progresses.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state to the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, interrupts are prohibited (step S2462). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is no longer performed. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power-off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board-side power-off processing can be completed reliably.

Thereafter, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the gaming area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to execute necessary processing before the power is cut off for the work area outside the gaming area (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the gaming area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the gaming control area of the main control RAM 1312 in order to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal. The target area for calculating the checksum is the setting state management (setting value It is recommended to exclude the values of the backup flag and checksum area), the values of the configuration status management area, and the values of the backup flag and checksum area.

Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off processing has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power-off flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, set values for enabling RAM protection (writing prohibited) and disabling prohibited areas are written to the RAM protection register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and waiting until recovery from the power outage ( infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of specifying a usage area of the main control RAM 1312, and if there is an access to a prohibited area other than the specified area, it determines that there is an abnormality and resets the access area. In this embodiment, the reset function caused by accessing this prohibited area is canceled to allow access to all areas. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 will It may be configured to be reset.

In the process described above, the processes are executed in the following order: clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the order in which these four processes are executed is not limited to that shown in the figure, and may be in another order.

In addition, in the fourth example, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored in the main processing on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power outage may be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and the power outage processing may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, check the power outage signal at least at the start and end, measure the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided separately, power outages can be monitored by either timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring processing, power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processing, the same program (code code) for power outage monitoring processing and power outage processing can be executed. ) into each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

In the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt for normal gaming, and there is always one main loop for setting change processing. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) executes the processing to calculate the base value, and the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing calculates unnecessary base values. You can switch between executing the process of calculating the base value and not executing the process.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 4, the setting change/setting confirmation processing (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 3 (FIG. 229) is deleted. It is something that

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculations, one of which can be used as a bank 0 register group, and the other can be used as a bank 1 register group. is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used. Register bank 0 is used in main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing. Therefore, at the start of timer interrupt processing, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed, but at the end of timer interrupt processing, there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and C flag are set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area when an interrupt starts, and the RET Returns from the stack area by executing an instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to its original state. Note that if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Note that the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not to enable interrupts, so it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after enabling interrupts. Note that the flag that controls whether or not to allow interrupts is set to an interrupt-disabled state after stacking the flag registers at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled (such as an EI instruction) or a RETI instruction is executed during timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state will not occur.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. Note that if the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and it is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

In addition, since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, even if a winning is detected, the payout of prize balls, special symbols, normal Processing related to the progress of the game, such as displaying fluctuating symbols, is not executed. In addition, although winning detection is performed regarding the progress of the game, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) is not performed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by hall employees, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shock (vibration) is not performed, and fraud due to magnetism and vibration is not performed. This is because it is considered desirable not to detect it.

Note that even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected in the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person attempting to commit fraud (a fraudster) forcibly activates the setting change mode by emitting radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In addition, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to determine the value of the gaming state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent activity that involves unauthorized transition to setting change processing. Further, it is determined whether a value indicating the start of the game (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area before switch input processing 1 (step S2472), and a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476). Note that if a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command may be generated to notify that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed. If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and this is because some abnormality has occurred. This abnormality notification may be performed by using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or sound, such as magnets, radio waves, vibrations, or the like, or by outputting a security signal from the external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted and notification may be made singly or in combination.

On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474).For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is the power failure clear signal. , a solenoid signal for the big prize opening, electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when receiving a command to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of timer interrupt processing, the time required for the LED common signal to turn on, that is, the time for the LEDs to turn off, is secured, thereby eliminating the ghost phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display is mixed. This prevents LED flickering.

Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). Note that the process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similar to the process of setting change/setting confirmation.

Furthermore, peripheral board command transmission processing is executed to output the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the completion of the main process S2480 or S2481 instead of the timer interrupt process.

Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Note that since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. Thereafter, a return instruction (for example, RETI) switches the register bank (step S2481), and returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt process for setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike other timer interrupt processes, random number update process (R_ATART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random numbers generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but random number updating processing may be performed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine including a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines are equipped with a light guide plate that emits light when illuminated on the front side of the performance display device 1600, and together with the performance display device 1600, performs a special symbol variation display game. In this type of pachinko machine, complex effects can be produced by using an effect display device and a light guide plate, for example, by superimposing images. Further, since the light guide plate is provided in front of the effect display device, a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the effect display device. Additionally, there is a light guide plate that allows stereoscopic viewing using the parallax between the left and right eyes, providing an even greater three-dimensional effect.

However, the production using light guide plates has become boring, and there is a need to improve the interest through a new light emission production. Furthermore, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns on a single sheet, and there is a demand for displaying even more diverse patterns to create highly interesting performances.

[13-1. structure]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the presentation unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 of the game board 5 as seen from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first picture is displayed by light emission in the presentation unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second picture is displayed by light emission in the presentation unit.

The presentation unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The presentation unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The display unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, a first picture board 2611 and a second picture board attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 that can irradiate light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first picture board 2611, and a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 that can irradiate light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the second picture board 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of emitting light are mounted.

The first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are arranged perpendicularly to the light guide plate 2610 so that light can be irradiated onto the side surface of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the sides of the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are visible, and the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are visible from the player side. This makes the game area 5a look better.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by numerous uneven first reflecting portions that reflect light from above toward the front side, and a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) that reflects light from above toward the front side. It has a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by a countless number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light. In other words, when the display unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 to emit light, the first picture 2621 can be displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second picture board 2612 emits light. When the light is emitted, a second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and are light emitting sources with strong directionality (lens-equipped LEDs) that irradiate light in a narrow range. is desirable. By using full-color LEDs, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be projected onto the light guide plate 2610 using any single color or multiple colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

The light guide plate 2610 has finely formed unevenness that constitutes a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and unevenness forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622. , when the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second picture board 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and the back side arranged on the rear side The various decorations of the unit 3000, the performance images displayed on the performance display device 1600, etc. can be clearly viewed. The light guide plate 2610 has a transparent area where the effect display device 1600 provided on the back surface can be seen even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in the light emitting state, and a transparent area that does not reflect the light irradiated onto the light guide plate 2610 and has a polished area. A matte area with glass-like processing, a lame area where a reflective pattern is formed that reflects transmitted light regardless of the direction of light propagation within the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting area of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area is provided in which a reflective pattern is formed so that the light emission changes depending on the direction in which light travels within the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first symbol 2621 becomes part of the effect of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as described later. The first picture 2621 includes moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a matte area 2621e. The outside of the first picture 2621 is a transparent area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, by lighting a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first picture board 2611 and switching the lighting locations, the moving area 2621a emits light and the moving area 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be made to appear to change.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the lame area are repeated twice, but the repeating may be repeated any number of times. By configuring the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area multiple times, the first pattern 2621 can represent a complex movement. In addition, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, moving areas and lame areas are alternately repeated, but the characteristics (i.e., because the moving area emits light) without sandwiching the lame area between the moving areas. Moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emission color changes depending on the light guide plate LED 2613, each moving area 2621a can be illuminated in a different color. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light rays extend diagonally downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that obliquely extending light lines correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one LED 2614 for a light guide plate emits light, a streak of light is emitted that extends diagonally downward from the light guide plate 2610, starting from the portion of the LED 2614 for a light guide plate that has emitted light on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610.

This second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward of the light guide plate 2610, so the brightness of the light streak becomes darker as it goes downward of the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the further down the light guide plate 2610 is, the more the light streaks appear to extend backward, and the light is emitted three-dimensionally. It is possible to create the illusion that the light guide plate 2610 is illuminated, and to enjoy the light emitting effect produced by the light guide plate 2610.

Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflective portion so that stereoscopic vision is possible due to the parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, if we focus on one light streak that makes up the second picture 2622, the second reflecting section that emits the light that images the light streak on the player's retina can be placed on different light guide plates 2610 for the left and right eyes. By arranging it at a certain position, it is possible to create parallax between the player's left and right eyes, and it is possible to show the second picture with depth.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment has a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a first pattern 2621 that is projected by light irradiation from one direction. The moving areas 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a are formed with reflective patterns that reflect light in a specific direction of travel. , the first picture can be composed of a moving picture area (dynamic picture) that appears to move and a static picture area (static picture) that appears stationary.

Moreover, a first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and a second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 can be displayed with one light guide plate 2610 depending on the direction of illumination. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, red with a single wavelength or white with a mixture of light of multiple wavelengths) is irradiated from the side, and light of multiple colors is irradiated from above (for example, adjacent LED groups 2614 emit light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, when irradiated with light from the lateral direction, a static pattern appears in the matte area 2621e and glitter areas 2621b, 2621d of the first pattern 2621, and a moving pattern appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c, 2622a. is reflected. That is, the first pattern 2621 that is irradiated with light from the lateral direction creates a light guide plate effect using both a static pattern and a moving pattern. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture based on the first picture 2621 will be displayed at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be composed of a matte area and a glitter area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, a light guide plate effect is performed using a first picture 2621 as a static picture that is irradiated with light from the side, and a second picture 2622 that is irradiated with light from above. In this case, the static picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be displayed at different timings. That is, a moving pattern may be displayed after a static pattern is displayed, or a static pattern may be displayed after a moving pattern is displayed. In this way, by displaying the static picture and the moving picture at different timings, it is possible to perform a variety of effects. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character as a static pattern, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character appears to descend. On the other hand, by displaying the background as a static image and then displaying the character as a moving image, it is possible to create an effect in which the character moves at a specific location.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged to overlap. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and from above, in the area on the light guide plate 2610 where the two patterns overlap, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. . However, if the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. If the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and a transparent area 2621f is provided where the back side (effect display device 1600) can be seen through, and a pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is displayed in the game. This allows people to easily see stereoscopic images.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in separate areas without overlapping each other. If the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. By separating the area where the reflection pattern of the picture 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622 is provided and projecting the picture based on the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622, it is possible to easily show the second picture 3D to the player. can be made to see.

[13-2. Configuration of light guide plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting section will be explained. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (in particular, the arrangement of the reflective portion).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transparent area 2621f through which the back side (effect display device 1600) can be seen, and a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, regardless of the direction in which the light travels. Lamé regions 2621b and 2621d are provided with reflective patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a are provided with reflective patterns that reflect light in a specific direction of travel.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflecting section.

The reflecting portion is formed by a recess provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610, and reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflecting the light at the boundary surface (reflecting surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light, allowing the player to visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, the light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain degree of spread (for example, ±30 degrees). The light streaks constituting the second picture 2622 are visible when light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by a reflecting section 2650, which will be described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a shown in FIG. 237(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along a light streak. Note that the size of the reflecting portion 2650 is desirably from several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, and is extremely smaller than the light streak appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown large in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflective surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and so that the perpendicular to the reflective surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, the light that travels inside the light guide plate 2610 and hits the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650 is reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610, as shown in FIG. 237(B).

Further, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the light streak appearing in the moving area 2622a, that is, light traveling parallel to the reflective surface 2651 along the reflective surface 2651 does not hit the reflective surface 2651, but is reflected by the reflective portion 2650 and is reflected onto the light guide plate 2610. No radiation is emitted from the surface. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction that is at an angle (particularly an acute angle) with the light streak appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and only a small amount of light is reflected by the reflecting section 2650, leading to Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. Therefore, the light of the wavelength that reaches the player more often is visible to the player's eyes, and a pattern can be shown by the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by slightly tilting the reflecting surface 2651, the direction in which the reflected light is emitted may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source that illuminates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits highly directional light, the reflected light from the reflecting section 2650 also reaches the player as a directional light beam. Therefore, it is possible to create parallax between the player's left and right eyes, and it is possible to show the second picture with depth. That is, since the reflecting section 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflecting section 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are located at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye are different. There are no virtual intersections on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern will appear recessed, and the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye. If the virtual intersection with the light is located in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern will appear to be in the foreground.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 similarly to the reflective surface 2651, or may be arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, may be formed at an angle that does not reflect light toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

The reflective portions 2660 of the lame areas 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. The light arriving at the reflecting section 2660 (through multiple paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. The reflective portion 2660 of the lame area reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, so when each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at different timings, the lame area 2621b will sparkle. Furthermore, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 emit light in different colors, the lame region 2621b emits a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in different colors, the lame area 2621b will sparkle with a mixture of a plurality of colors.

Note that the matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflective portion, but is processed into frosted glass-like amorphous irregularities, and does not reflect the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 toward the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first picture and the second picture has been described, but next, an example of the light guide plate representing different pictures will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs and the reflecting portions in the light guide plate forming the patterns shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on its back surface, and reflects the light incident from any of the plurality of specific light incident sections 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and outputs it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels within the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. Four of the plurality of specific light incident sections 2630 are illustrated: a first specific light incident section 2630a, a second specific light incident section 2630b, a third specific light incident section 2630c, and a fourth specific light incident section 2630d. A specific light incident section 2630a to a seventh specific light incident section are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light incident sections 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and it is preferable to determine the number of specific light incident sections depending on the type of emitted light color. The first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section (not shown) are repeated in order from left to right in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 (seventh specific light incident section 2630a).

The reflecting section 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light incident section 2630 travels inside the light guide plate 2610), and also serves as a guide. It has a boundary surface that is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflective portion 2670 is recessed into a pent roof-like triangle. The reflecting section 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 and outputs the reflected light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting section 2670 reflects the light incident from the specific light incident section 2630 to which it does not correspond, and outputs the light in a direction inclined with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident section 2630 is reflected by the reflecting section 2670 toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflective section 2670 appears to emit light. On the other hand, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the uncorresponding specific light incident section 2630 is reflected by the reflection section 2670 in a direction other than the front of the light guide plate 2610, and the light enters the pachinko machine 1. To the player seated in front of the player, it appears that the reflecting section 2670 does not emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflecting section 2670 is shown as having a triangular recess and extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630. It is not limited to this, and any structure may be used as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident section 2630.

The plurality of reflection sections 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entrance sections 2630, and the plurality of first reflection sections 2670a and second specific light entrance sections 2630b correspond to the first specific light entrance section 2630a. A plurality of second reflection sections 2670b corresponding to the third specific light incident section 2630c, a plurality of third reflection sections 2670c corresponding to the third specific light incident section 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflection sections corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d. 2670d and the like.

In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 that can be displayed by emitting light in different manners by causing a specific reflecting section 2670 among the plurality of reflecting sections 2670 to reflect light forward. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a consisting of a plurality of first reflection sections 2670a, a pattern 2623b consisting of a plurality of second reflection sections 2670b, a pattern 2623c consisting of a plurality of third reflection sections 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflection sections. It includes a pattern 2623d consisting of a portion 2670d, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the pictures are arranged sequentially and circularly from the center to the outside.

The second picture board 2612 has a strip shape extending left and right, and has LEDs 2614 mounted at positions corresponding to each specific light incident section 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light incident section 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light incident section 2630b, and a third specific light incident section 2630c. a third LED group 2614c corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, a fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light incident section (not shown). (not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light incident part (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light incident part (not shown) (not shown). Note that in FIG. 239, the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d are illustrated, and the illustration of the fifth to seventh LED groups is omitted. Each LED group consists of a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the second picture board 2612, divided in the left-right direction of the second picture board 2612, and arranged in order from left to right. (in the order in which the seventh LED group is followed by the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

Next, the light emitting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be explained in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light incident part 2630a, and is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflective parts 2670b, third reflective part 2670c, fourth reflective part 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the first reflective part 2670a appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be made to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance part 2630b, and is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, third reflecting section 2670c, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the second reflecting section 2670b appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of second reflection parts 2670b can be made to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light incident part 2630c, and is reflected by the third reflection part 2670c toward the front of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, second reflecting section 2670b, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the third reflecting section 2670c appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be made to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second picture board 2612 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflection part 2670d toward the front of the light guide plate 2610, Since the other first reflecting section 2670a, second reflecting section 2670b, third reflecting section 2670c, etc. reflect in a direction other than the front, only the fourth reflecting section 2670d appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern made up of the plurality of fourth reflection parts 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614 is made to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light incident part 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the corresponding reflection part 2670. The light is reflected toward the front, and the other reflecting sections 2670 reflect the light toward other than the front, so that only the corresponding reflecting section 2670 appears to be shining from the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make the pattern on the screen glow.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by switching the LED group to emit light, each of the plurality of pictures 2623 can be made to emit light, and by making the plurality of pictures emit light in sequence, it is possible to create a moving animation. You can create a light-emitting effect like this. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in a light guide plate 2610 in which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect is created in which the patterns emit light like an animation that expands from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. I can do it.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in a moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes by switching the position of the group of LEDs that emit light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that in FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f and the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 The sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g reflect the incident light, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Thereafter, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light enters from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e and the sixth specific light incident section 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is transferred to the fifth reflecting section. 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f reflect, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting section 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d and the fifth specific light incident section 2630e, the light guide plate The fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e reflect the light incident on the fourth reflecting section 2610, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Thereafter, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light enters from the third specific light incident section 2630c and the fourth specific light incident section 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflecting section. 2670c and the fourth reflective part 2670d reflect, and the pattern in which the third reflective part 2670cd and the fourth reflective part 2670d are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light incident section 2630b and the third specific light incident section 2630c, the light guide plate The second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c reflect the light incident on the second reflecting section 2610, and the pattern in which the second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position of the LED groups (LED elements) that emit light without changing the number, the size of the picture can be changed, and a moving effect can be created in which the picture emits light moving outward from the center. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in different colors (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes by changing the number of LED groups that emit light over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. Note that in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light incident section 2630b to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is transferred to the second reflecting section 2670b. - The seventh reflecting section 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the second reflecting section 2670b - the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the third reflective part 2670c to the seventh reflective part 2670g. The pattern in which the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident section 2630d to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is reflected in the fourth direction. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflective portion 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the fourth reflective portion 2670d to the seventh reflective portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light incident part 2630e to the seventh specific light incident part 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflective part 2670e to the seventh reflective part 2670g. However, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting section 2670e to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 241(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g is reflected in the sixth direction. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflective portion 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the sixth reflective portion 2670f to the seventh reflective portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, the size of the picture (light emitting range) can be changed, and a moving effect can be created in which the picture emits light in a shrinking manner. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in different colors (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes by changing the emitted light color of the LED group over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g are provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that in FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in FIG. 242(A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident part 2630a is reflected by the first reflection part 2670a, and the first reflection part 2670a is arranged. The displayed pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident part 2630b is reflected by the second reflection part 2670b, so that the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c is reflected by the third reflection part 2670c, so that the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection part 2670d, so that the pattern emits green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection section 2670e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the sixth specific light incident section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection section 2670f, so that the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, so that the pattern emits purple light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. As time further elapses, as shown in FIG. 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the pattern changes. The color changes.

In this way, the emitted light color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye focuses on patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light as if they move inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of pictures on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

In this embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to a reflecting section 2670 constituting one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one picture. Specifically, control is performed so that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light incident section 2630) is repeated using seven LED groups as a repeating unit. Further, the LED is configured to emit light with directionality and illuminate a predetermined angular range from the front of the LED.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (which are light emitting sources constituting one picture) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second picture board 2612 In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

For this reason, a pattern is provided at a position a predetermined distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610 where light enters. For example, if the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ = ±30 degrees), the area where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (in the same pattern The pattern is spaced apart from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length that is 0.87 times α (distance between LEDs that emit light).

Generalizing, when the length of the repeating unit of the LED group is α, the illumination angle of the LED is θ, and the distance separating the pattern from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is obtained.
L=tanθ×α/2

In this way, when a moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be placed a predetermined distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610. That is, a moving pattern area that displays a moving pattern is smaller than a static pattern area that displays a stationary pattern. When the light guide plate 2610 is made to have the same size as the display area of the effect display device 1600, a moving effect using the light guide plate 2610 is possible in an area narrower than the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the presentation of the variable display game, it is possible to make the player aware of the progress of the variable display game without obstructing the visibility of the special symbols normally displayed near the end of the display area of the effect display device 1600. . Furthermore, by performing the moving effect at the center of the effect display device 1600 that the player is watching, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to the excitement caused by the moving effect.

In the above embodiment, an example was explained in which the light guide plate 2610 of the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached. An area where moving performance is not possible is created within a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 in the visible opening window part), and the area where moving performance is not possible is visible to the player. Furthermore, the area in which moving effects can be performed becomes narrower, and the effects of the effects are reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where moving effects are not possible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where moving effects are not possible is hidden in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is placed outside, and a moving effect is possible in all (or most) of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end of the light guide plate 2610 is located away from the periphery of the performance display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 is equipped with various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable presentation units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. A light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and a light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decoration. Thereby, the board serving as the light source can be placed in a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Furthermore, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs that cause the decorative body to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 can be made into an area where moving effects can be performed, and the player is not made aware of the unnaturalness caused by the limitation of the moving effect area. You can do it like this.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect using a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes by changing the emitted light color of the LED group over time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident section 2630a to the seventh specific light incident section 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED are arranged in correspondence with each specific light incident section. A group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. Note that in FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the alphabet.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflecting section 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light incident section 2630a, and the pattern where the first reflecting section 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the second reflecting part 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific light incident part 2630b, so that the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the third reflecting part 2670c reflects the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident part 2630c, so that the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the fourth reflecting part 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident part 2630d, so that the pattern emits green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the fifth reflecting section 2670e reflects the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident section 2630e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in blue, and the sixth reflecting part 2670f reflects the blue light incident from the sixth specific light incident part 2630f, so that the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light incident part 2630g, so that the pattern emits purple light.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. As time further passes, each of the first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g lights up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emitted light color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye focuses on patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light in seven-colored streaks.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even with the light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 235, which has a pattern in which two lines of light intersect, by changing the emitted light color of each LED group 2614 in the same way as explained in FIG. 244, The color of the pattern (streaks of light) changes, creating a moving effect in which the pattern lights up in seven colors of flowing light. Further, by using left-right eye parallax so that the light beams appear farther back or toward the front as they move away from the light source, a picture with a three-dimensional effect can be displayed.

Next, a stereoscopic pattern and a planar pattern using the light guide plate 2610 will be explained.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern is displayed when viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245(B), the reflective section 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 has a curved reflective surface, so the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in multiple directions. , reaches the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Further, the reflecting section 2660 reflects light that travels within the light guide plate 2610 and arrives at the reflecting section 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, via a plurality of paths), and outputs it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245(A), there is no parallax between the left and right eyes in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting section 2660, so the player can view the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610. It will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 246(B), the reflecting section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L, and the reflecting section 2650R The light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflective part 2650L and the reflective part 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less apart), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 constituted by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R, as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eyes is small, and it can be said that the left-eye pattern formed by the reflection section 2650L and the right-eye pattern formed by the reflection section 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflective surface 2651 of the reflective portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective portions 2650L and 2650R, and the player A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the back side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will see the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern located at the rear of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflective surface 2651 of the reflective portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R, and the player can see the left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will see the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective parts 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

In this way, according to the presentation unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by a single light guide plate 2610, so it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display animation, etc. Therefore, the thickness of the display unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, making it easy to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable presentation unit 3100, the upper rear movable presentation unit 3200, the upper front movable presentation unit 3300, etc. can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the inside of the gaming area 5a and make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. By performing movable performances using the upper front movable performance unit 3300 and the like, it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players, entertain the players, and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the presentation unit, the decoration, and the presentation display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns appear due to the light emission of the plurality of reflection parts 2670, and a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation is displayed. This makes it possible to have a strong impact on players who are accustomed to light-emitting effects using conventional light guide plates, to surprise and entertain players, and to create something good for players. It is possible to make the player think that something may happen, increase the player's expectations for the game, and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since only the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 can clearly see the light-emitting display of the picture by the light guide plate 2610, the light-emitting display of the picture 2623 can be seen from other players who are far away from the front. This makes it difficult for other players to notice that an effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed. To enable a player to play a game without hesitation, to enjoy the game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is attached to the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. However, the illuminated symbols do not interfere with the game within the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be seen in good condition from the player's side, making it difficult to see the game. To prevent players from feeling distrustful and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern board 2611 and the second picture board 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player's side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610, so when the picture is displayed by emitting light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact and surprise the players who thought that there is no such thing, and it is possible to enjoy the light-emitting display of a plurality of pictures by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting display of a plurality of mutually different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be combined. Since the effects can be shown to the players, various effects can be created by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making the players entertained by the effects provided by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to prevent players from losing interest in playing games.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are displayed by emitting light on the light guide plate 2610, and to give a sense of depth and three-dimensionality to the patterns 2623 that are displayed by emitting light. A performance (display performance) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be monochrome LEDs or full-color LEDs. Furthermore, the number of specific light incident parts, reflective parts, and LED groups can be selected as appropriate depending on the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Example of production]
Next, an example of an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be explained. FIGS. 249 to 254 are diagrams showing examples of effects using light guide plates.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 emits light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a moving effect of moving the image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or preview effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249(A), nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the entire screen darkens to black (blackout). This blackout causes the player to focus on the effect display device 1600.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first picture board 2611 is turned on, and the first picture 2621 is projected onto the light guide plate 2610. This causes the player to focus on the first symbol 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249(C), a movement effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249(D), the movement effect may be such that the image 1611 is moved toward the first pattern 2621 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the effect display device 1600. The image 1611 moved and displayed on the effect display device 1600 may have the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved and displayed on the effect display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621, as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape, as shown in FIG. 250. In addition, the moving image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 may be images of the same character (the pose and face may be the same or different), or the same characters (for example, the character's name) with different fonts and colors. It can be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the performance display device 1600, so the back of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249(D). It is also preferable that the image be displayed by the effect display device 1600.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(E), in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the proportion of the moving images 1611 in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are determined over time. It may be changed accordingly.

During the moving performance, the aspect of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first picture 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or gradually (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first picture 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving performance. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use the other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. Moreover, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. The first picture 2621 of a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from an oblique direction.

After performing the moving effect for a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. 249(F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is extinguished from the light guide plate 2610. Furthermore, the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen darkens to black (blackout). This blackout allows the player to focus on the performance display device 1600 and creates a gap for increasing expectations for the next performance.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249(G), an image 1612 (for example, a character with a high probability of winning) that is different from the first pattern 2621 or the moved and displayed image is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, increasing the size of the character image 1612 increases the player's expectation of winning, but decreasing the size of the character image 1612 lowers the player's expectation of winning. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first pattern 2621. Furthermore, in addition to displaying the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

Note that this character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. A character image may be projected by irradiating light from a certain direction. Alternatively, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided and the character image may be projected on other light guide plates. By projecting character images with different sizes and facial expressions using a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, it is possible to display effects with a sense of depth, unlike the flat effect display device 1600.

In the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 described above, the image on the effect display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is displayed, but the image on the effect display device 1600 moves. After starting, the first picture 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after blackout (FIG. 253(A)), as shown in FIG. 253(B), before the first pattern 2621 is displayed, the first pattern 2621 is A moving effect is started in which an image moving toward a projected position is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253(C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected onto the light guide plate 2610. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253(D), the movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time during which the first pattern 2621 is displayed (the time for the light guide plate effect) and the effect time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the effect display device 1600) are the same as the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect in which the image 1611 is displayed may start before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Moreover, the time for the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time for the image 1611 to move.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game may be produced by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern at which the images are gathered appears to move and a static pattern in which the pattern appears to be stationary.

In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, expectations for a jackpot are high when a moving symbol appears, and expectations for a jackpot are low when only a static symbol appears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254(A), a static pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(B), the displayed static pattern 2621 A moving effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, the static pattern 2621 is switched to a moving pattern, as shown in FIG. 254(C). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 254(D), a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved toward the first pattern 2621 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(E), a static pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 254(F), a static pattern 2621 is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the effect display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613, as shown in FIG. 254(G). good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 254(H), the variable display game ends without switching the static pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the production shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display production (for example, a specific reach production, pseudo-continuation production, or specific look-ahead production) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the above-mentioned specific display production is displayed. The specific image 1611 performs the moving effect together with the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern does not need to perform the moving effect.

In this way, in the performance of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, since the light guide plate 2610 is used to selectively display a static pattern and a moving pattern, the player has expectations for the development of the variable display game. , it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Next, an example of a performance in which a performance using a moving body is added to a performance display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be explained.

255 and 256 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing in the front of the effect display device 1600 constitute one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255(A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears and disappears from the top of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in short cycles as the variable display game progresses. Repeatedly increases the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. Then, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 255(C), a movement effect is created in which a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission from the light guide plate 2610, and an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the effect display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621, as shown in FIG. 255(D). .

The movable body 3601 may be caused to emit light at the timing when this moving effect starts or during the moving effect. The light emission mode (emission color and light emission timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the pachinko machine more interesting.

In the example described above, the movable body 3601 was made to appear instead of the pattern where the images are gathered, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, if the movable body 3601 represents a torso and the light guide plate 2610 represents a face, the expression of the face can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effects produced by the effect display device 1600, various effects can be realized by the light guide plate 2610.

In the production shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate 2610 is used as a production that suggests the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256(A), a pattern 2621 is displayed by light emission from the light guide plate 2610 as the variable display game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 256(B), a pattern 2621 is displayed by the light guide plate 2610. A moving effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect is performed in which the image 1611 is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621, as shown in FIG. 256(C). It's okay. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(D), the movable body 3601 appears from the top of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256(E), a pattern 1613 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256(F), a pattern 1613 is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the effect display device 1600 toward the picture 1613, as shown in FIG. 256(G). good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256(H), the movable object does not appear and the variable display game ends in a loss.

In this way, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, a light guide plate can be used to suggest that a movable object will appear.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to a conventional 8-bit parallel bus communication function.

In conventional pachinko machines, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port where one signal is transmitted through one signal line or an 8-bit bus. There have been cases where fraudulent acts have been carried out by reading data output from the main control MPU 1311 or inputting fraudulent signals to the main control MPU 1311. For this reason, a configuration is required that makes it difficult to detect the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside. It becomes difficult to read or input data in accordance with the timing of the lines.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring signals when an inspection agency inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, in order to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory, the signal input to the solenoid driver (transistor) (for example, 5V on/off signal) was branched off and used as a signal for inspection. If the serial signal transmitted within the main control board 1310 described above is output as a test signal, the testing agency will need a device to analyze the serial signal, making it difficult to use the serial signal as a test signal. It is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits signals through serial communication within the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise ways to output test signals. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, a test signal whose level changes at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal is generated. was assumed to be generated. If the output transistor of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured with an open collector (or open drain), the voltage level can be changed by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of program steps for detecting input through serial communication to reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel/serial conversion circuit, and a part is input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise ways to accept input signals. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power is turned on may be input directly to a general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 without inputting it to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 can be detected even before interrupt processing is executed, so the signal level can be detected even when the timer interrupt processing is not performed, such as immediately after power is turned on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use expansion I/O using chip select, and the number of signals input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 is not necessary. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram of the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial/parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 261 is a block diagram of the main control MPU 1311 and its surroundings. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310. Note that in FIGS. 257, 258, and 261, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines, and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment has an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, dispensing control board 951, etc.) and a main control board 1310. A synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, outputting control signals for other devices (solenoids, etc.), and outputting from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors. It has a general-purpose port into which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission/reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission/reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission/reception port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). Further, the transmission port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission/reception port. The number of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission/reception ports is not limited to what is illustrated.

Note that even more serial-to-parallel converter circuits may be connected by making connections like the parallel-to-serial converter circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmitting/receiving port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, converts it to a predetermined clock. Output data from the serial port at the timing of . The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from game ball detection switches (starting winning opening, big winning opening counting switch, normal winning opening, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch), photo sensor, etc. The game balls flowing down the game area 5a are mainly detected. The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 has a 16-bit input port, but may have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having 8-bit input ports in parallel.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is at 0 level, The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after a serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch using the SERTX signal as a trigger, so it can take in the data of the ball detection sensor at any timing.

Further, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission/reception port both output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). , the data transmission destination is selected by a chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. do. The output level from the parallel port is latched within the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 are connected to the segment side of the LED, and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing to dynamically light up the LED. The serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having a 16-bit output port, but may also have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having an 8-bit output port in parallel.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). Output a segment signal at the appropriate timing to light up the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED whose anode side is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is turned on, a driving current is passed from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. flows. However, since integrated circuits with the same configuration are used for the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342, 1343 (the direction of the current output from the driver circuit's output transistor) polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of sucking the drive current for lighting the LED.

In other words, the common side of the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317) is connected to a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 and a driver circuit 1344, which function as signal direction regulating means for regulating the direction of a signal. That is, a two-stage signal direction regulating means is provided on the common side of the LED. On the other hand, a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 is provided on the segment side of the LED, and a one-stage signal direction regulating means is provided.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 may each use an integrated circuit having only a parallel/serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial/parallel conversion function, Further, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting serial signals and parallel signals may be used by switching between a parallel-to-serial conversion function and a serial-to-parallel conversion function.

Further, two serial/parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. Serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, like the aforementioned serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, take in serial data input when chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and when CS is at 1 Output from the parallel port at the timing when the voltage rises. A driver transistor is provided at the output of the parallel port, and the voltage applied to the driver transistor is switched to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal, a ball payout signal, etc.) is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. In addition, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal, etc.) is output. Moreover, nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can only control one channel (16 bits), and the same branched signal including chip select is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output on the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. In other words, the solenoid drive signal output from the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the test signal output from the channel B output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. Signals change at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the test terminal 1348. Note that +12V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid with 12V, and +5V is applied to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V test signal. In this way, by using two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals with different voltage levels can be generated.

Of the outputs from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is made thicker, and the pattern on the output side of the test signal where only a relatively small current flows is made thicker. The pattern can be thin. Note that it is not necessary to make the pattern thicker; it is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern. Patterns can be formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the actual cross-sectional area, or inner layer patterns can be formed to increase the actual cross-sectional area. May be increased.

In addition, since the two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit becomes large, the waveform of the output signal from the other conversion circuit will not be disturbed and the output signal will not be affected. does not occur. In other words, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output a test signal with the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal, regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate testing. .

A reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 from a reset circuit 1335. The reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via two inverter buffers of a buffer circuit 1336. When the main control MPU 1311 receives a reset signal, its operation is reset and the program is executed from the first address.

The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and 1343 via two inverter buffers of a buffer circuit 1336. When each serial/parallel conversion circuit 1342, 1343 receives a reset signal, its operation is reset, and the display contents of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are returned to the initial state (for example, the display is erased).

The buffer circuit 1336 has at least four inverter buffers, two inverter buffers are arranged between the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311, and the reset circuit 1335 and serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343. Two inverter buffers are placed between the two. The reason why inverter buffers with the same characteristics are placed in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 and in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is that the output is output from the reset circuit 1335 through two paths. This is to make the waveform and timing of the reset signal to be the same as possible.

The inverter buffer of this buffer circuit 1336 functions as a signal direction regulating means that allows signals to pass in only one direction. By regulating the signal direction along the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, it is possible to suppress noise entering from the outside from reaching the main control MPU 1311. However, when the reset circuit 1335 and the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 are directly connected, the reset signal is input to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 at a timing different from the reset signal input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311. It will be entered. That is, because of the two-stage inverter buffer provided on the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311, the reset signal is transmitted to the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 more quickly and is controlled by the main control MPU 1311. The reset command reaches the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 first.

Therefore, in this embodiment, two stages of inverter buffers are mainly provided in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the control MPU 1311 and the path to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and the main control MPU 1311 and the serial A reset signal is transmitted to the parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at the same timing, so that each circuit is reset at the same timing. In this way, the inverter buffer placed in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 is made to match the transmission timing of the reset signal input to the path to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 as much as possible. At first glance, the circuits provided in the two paths appear to be the same, but they perform different functions.

Generally speaking, it is not necessary to arrange a special circuit on the path that transmits the reset signal output from the reset circuit, but as in this case, from the perspective of aligning the timing of the reset signal, a buffer (timing adjustment means) is required. ) is required.

Further, in order to match the timing of the signals (delay the signals), the circuit is not limited to the above-mentioned inverter buffer, but may be any other type of circuit that matches the timing. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 259 and 260, an IC that accommodates six inverter buffers is used, but the packaged IC has six inverter buffers integrated into one. It is formed on a semiconductor chip. In a semiconductor chip, a plurality of circuits are formed on a silicon wafer cut from a single crystal silicon (ingot) through several processes. This is diced to separate the circuits, and the chip-shaped circuits are packaged to become an IC. Therefore, variations in the characteristics of each of the plurality of circuits formed on the same silicon wafer are small. In this case, taking this into consideration, the inverter buffer housed in one IC is arranged on two paths, and the signal transmission characteristics on the paths are made the same.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is arranged on the hinge side for opening and closing the frame, and the prize ball payout mechanism is also arranged on the hinge side. Game balls supplied from the island equipment where the pachinko machine is installed move within the prize ball payout mechanism in a charged state. The game ball is further charged by friction with the resin member that constitutes the prize ball payout mechanism. Then, when the charged game ball discharges static electricity, electromagnetic noise is generated, which enters the electronic circuit either directly or through a signal path (wires that make up the harness).

As described above, the main control board of this embodiment executes game control by interrupt processing at a constant cycle (the above-mentioned initialization processing to timer interrupt processing: FIGS. 21 to 23). Therefore, even if the information is reset in the peripheral control board 1510, if the main control MPU 1311 is operating normally, new information (display data) will be available as main information at the next interrupt cycle (4 ms later in this case). It is instructed by the control MPU 1311 to return to normal operation.

However, when the main control MPU 1311 is reset, it waits for the time required for the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effect display device 1600, so commands to the function display unit 1400 are interrupted, and the function The display on the display unit 1400 disappears, and the player becomes anxious about whether or not he or she can continue playing the game. For this reason, it is desirable not to reset the main control MPU 1311.

Next, the arrangement of the inverter buffer within the IC package and the terminal connections will be explained. FIGS. 259 and 260 are diagrams illustrating connection examples of terminals of an IC that accommodates an inverter buffer.

The ICs shown in FIGS. 259 and 260 have a shape in which terminals are arranged on both sides of the IC package (that is, in two rows) (for example, an insertion-mount type Dual In-line Package or a surface-mount type Small Outline Package). ), it has six inverter buffers, and the input and output terminal numbers of each inverter buffer are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 9-8, 11-10, and 13-12. It has become.

It is preferable that each inverter buffer is not a simple inverter buffer, but a Schmitt trigger type inverter buffer having hysteresis characteristics. By providing the inverter buffer with hysteresis characteristics, the waveform of the reset signal can be reliably shaped and resistance to noise can be improved. Furthermore, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, it is possible to cope with a waveform in which the input signal rises slowly. In other words, in CMOS, when the input signal level remains near the threshold for a long time, a large current flows in the gate, causing latch-up. However, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, the rising edge of the input signal can be Latch-up can be suppressed even with slow waveforms.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to terminals 3 and 11, and the reset signal input to terminal 3 is output from terminal 4 via an inverter buffer. , is inputted to terminal 5, further outputted from terminal 6 via an inverter buffer, and inputted to serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 11 is outputted from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer, inputted to the terminal 9, further outputted from the terminal 8 via the inverter buffer, and inputted to the main control MPU 1311. be done.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is passed through one terminal of an IC package in which terminals are arranged on both sides (that is, in two rows), and the other Since the reset signal sent to the main control MPU 1311 is passed through the terminal on the other side, the reset signals of the two systems do not intersect, and noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1311. Input can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to terminals 1 and 3, and the reset signal input to terminal 1 is input from terminal 2 via an inverter buffer. The signal is outputted, inputted to the terminal 13, further outputted from the terminal 12 via the inverter buffer, and inputted to the main control MPU 1311. On the other hand, the reset signal input to terminal 3 is outputted from terminal 4 via an inverter buffer, inputted to terminal 11, further passed through an inverter buffer, and outputted from terminal 10, and then sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuit. It is input to 1342 and 1343.

In this way, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signals sent to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are collected and passed through one part of the IC, and the reset signals sent to the main control MPU 1311 are collected and passed through another part. Since the reset signals of the two systems do not intersect, noise induced in the signal lines to the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 can be suppressed from being input to the main control MPU 1311.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 261, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. Further, a testing circuit placement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and a testing terminal 1348 are provided in the testing circuit placement area. The circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) are installed only in pachinko machines 1 that are inspected by an inspection agency, and are not included in pachinko machines that are generally available on the market. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for mounting components is provided). That is, although a generally commercially available pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, it is not possible to transmit the test signal output from the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346. The relay test terminal 1348 is not mounted. For this reason, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the test signal is not detected by a cheater and used for cheating.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, no components are mounted in the test circuit arrangement area, but a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunction, so the wiring (printed pattern) in the test circuit placement area should be pulled up to the power supply (+5V) via a resistor (or connected to GND). ) to reduce the effects of noise.

Furthermore, from the perspective of preventing unauthorized modification, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not use surface-mounted components, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit placement area are not mounted on commercially available pachinko machines 1. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the components of the test circuit can be made smaller, the test circuit arrangement area can be made smaller, and the main control board 1310 can be made smaller. Similarly, from the perspective of preventing unauthorized modification, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not have any components mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310; 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

Note that among the components of the test circuit, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the test terminal 1348 may be provided on a separate board disposed near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection agency, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally available on the market. In this case as well, the inspection signal is not outputted from the generally commercially available pachinko machine 1.

In this way, by concentrating and arranging the circuit components used for inspecting the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit placement area, it is easier to find missing parts in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the addition of additional parts for fraudulent purposes. Easy to find installation. Furthermore, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the test terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 can be configured with high noise resistance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 261, the circuit components placed in the test circuit placement area may be placed in a different orientation (for example, by 180 degrees as shown) than the circuit components of the same type placed elsewhere on the main control board 1310. (rotated direction). In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the testing circuit placement area and other locations on the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish between the components used for normal gaming and the components for testing. In the manufacturing process of a commercially available pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which parts are erroneously placed in the testing circuit placement area.

Furthermore, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed, for example, by silk printing. It is preferable that the numbers be attached together with the symbols and numbers that follow the symbols and numbers of the circuit components used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are designated as IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits placed in the testing circuit placement area are designated with symbols after IC12. In this way, it is possible to attach consistent symbols and numbers to the game control circuit components mounted on the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to easily check the circuit components after they are mounted on the main control board 1310. can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the gaming control parts, it will be easier to distinguish between the connectors connected to the gaming control parts and the inspection terminals. It is possible to distinguish between cables and prevent incorrect wiring. In particular, if the symbol or number of the testing terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the other party's testing device to which it is connected, it is convenient to connect the cable during testing, and connection errors can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused and empty ports, and it is preferable to arrange the empty ports so that they are concentrated at adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are consecutive, it is preferable to arrange the terminals of the unused ports at a location where they are concentrated. By arranging empty terminals in a concentrated manner, areas on the main control board 1310 where no printed pattern is provided are consolidated, making it easier to discover missing parts and detect fraudulent attachment of additional parts. It's getting easier.

In addition, the terminal of the vacant port is arranged in a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, to which a solenoid is connected) in terms of the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (up and down in the figure) of the side where the vacant port terminal is located. Therefore, when adding additional functions to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without having to route a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, data bus wiring can be reduced, and unauthorized attachment of additional parts can be easily detected. In other words, the large number of data buses connected to multiple parallel interface circuits has been eliminated and now only a few signal lines, including control lines, have been created, resulting in wiring with complex circuit patterns for the large number of data buses. This results in a clean circuit pattern. Further, by shortening the data line routing distance, the main control board 1310 can be configured to be resistant to noise.

Furthermore, since the number of data lines is reduced, circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of data lines, so I/O ICs (parallel interface circuits, serial interface circuits) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the number of circuit patterns, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 can be configured to be more resistant to noise.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (anode terminal of the LED). The output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). Output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Furthermore, the parallel output port at address D3 (chip select SERS1) is the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (the cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED).

On the common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED), the output port to be turned on is switched at a constant cycle (for example, an interrupt every 4 ms). If you pay attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned ON in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4ms), and only PA7 is turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4ms). is repeatedly turned ON at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when switching 8 ports repeatedly, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, if you focus on the output ports of channel A by grouping the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A, turn ON only PA0 and PA4 in the timer interrupt processing, and then turn on only PA0 and PA4 in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned ON, and only PA3 and PA7 may be turned ON in the next timer interrupt processing (4 ms later) at a constant cycle (4 ms x number of ports). By performing this constant cycle operation using serial communication, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the parallel input port at address D5 is a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as a serial signal and read as a signal at address D5.

Furthermore, the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311 are input with operation information of the setting key 971, operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, a power outage notice signal, a main payment ACK signal, and a detection signal of the frame open detection switch. ing. Because these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the point requested by the program) or outside of timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power is turned on), main control is performed without going through the parallel/serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

Furthermore, general-purpose input/output ports (input/output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 receive a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are output when an abnormality (cheating, malfunction, etc.) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and since they need to be monitored in real time (at the time the program requests them), a parallel/serial conversion circuit is required. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without any intervention. Further, based on the detection signals of these sensors and switches, an abnormality is notified by the performance display device 1600 or audio. This abnormality notification causes an employee of the pachinko parlor to come to check the status of the pachinko machine, effectively stopping the game. If this abnormality notification is a false notification, it will make the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress false detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to a general-purpose input/output port and detect them multiple times in a short period of time (so-called double reading) to suppress false detections due to the influence of noise.

This double-reading process is performed by continuously executing read commands in one timer interrupt process to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, You can execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or execute multiple reads with a wait of several clocks in between. This is done by executing instructions and determining the signal level input to a general-purpose input/output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. For this reason, when continuously determining the level of a port via a parallel-to-serial converter circuit, the level can only be detected at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when determining the level of a general-purpose port continuously, the level can only be detected within 1 microsecond. Levels can be detected at the following intervals, and signal levels can be detected in short cycles.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, signals from various switches and sensors that require real-time performance can be directly input to the general-purpose input port and general-purpose output port without using expansion I/O using chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input/output port (input/output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-purpose) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, some of the signals input via the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 are transferred to the general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-purpose) IOP4 to IOP7. You may also enter

Furthermore, although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull it up to 5V through a resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential and reduce the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce it. Furthermore, if the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be left open, but it is better to pull it up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent level changes at the output port from becoming noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the test signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via the serial-parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are input in a single port, making it easier to handle in the game control program.

Also, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected multiple times in a short period of time (so-called twice reading) are input to the general-purpose port, and signals that do not need to be read twice are serially detected. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, it is possible to detect the signal level multiple times in a short period of time and make a decision by eliminating the influence of noise. If the general-purpose input port is free, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

The general-purpose input port can be assigned the signal input to the main control MPU 1311, but the general-purpose input/output port (input/output) can be assigned the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and the signal output from the main control MPU 1311. Since both can be assigned, general-purpose input/output ports have high versatility against changes in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that the ports reserved as spares for the addition of new functions be general-purpose input/output ports (input/output dual-use), and it is preferable to allocate the general-purpose input ports with priority.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the timing of data output and capture using a synchronous serial signal will be explained.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected among PA7 to PA4. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected among PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial/parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is normally output at the data acquisition timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data acquisition timing of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is taken in from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken in from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. Note that during this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) to prevent new data from being taken in.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as the trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, so the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described using FIGS. 264 and 265.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be used in common by multiple models without redesigning it. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input/output interface of the main control board 1310, which differs depending on the model, is mounted on a separate board (input/output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311, which is common to each model, is mounted on the main control board 1310. The configuration is as follows. By making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, component arrangement, etc. the same, performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and designed. The main control board 1310, whose quality is stable, can be commonly used in multiple models without redesigning.

Furthermore, when mounting the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 on another input/output board 1351, a problem arises as to where to separate the circuits. One is to separate the signals using a serial signal line, and the second is to separate the signals using a parallel signal obtained by converting the serial signal. The former case is more desirable than the latter because it allows the number of interconnections between the boards to be reduced. Furthermore, even if the serial signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which data is transmitted, and it is unclear which data is being transmitted at which timing. Furthermore, it is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and this synchronization clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is obtained, it is difficult to know the contents of the data being transmitted. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 using a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 264, an input/output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are installed inside the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The input/output board 1351 is provided with a parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311, parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341, and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or general-purpose port. Boards can be connected with fewer wires. The serial signal line may be connected with an electric wire or with an inter-board connector.

Further, if serial communication is used between the boards, even if the signal is obtained, it is difficult to analyze the data, so it is possible to reduce the possibility that the content of the data being transmitted will be known to an unauthorized person. In addition, the input/output board 1351 that inputs and outputs signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and input/output signals that vary depending on the model are set on the input/output board 1351, so the main control board 1310 can be modified. The number of models that can be applied to the main control board 1310 increases without having to do so, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Furthermore, by accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Furthermore, when using the main control board 1310 in other models, all you need to do is change the design of the input/output board 1351, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model, so the pachinko machine The main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable can be used. Furthermore, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without changing the size of the input/output board 1351 or the position of the mounting hole, without redesigning the main control board box 1320. Further, noise countermeasures that vary depending on the model may be performed on the input/output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310.

Serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 that output drive signals for the base display 1317 are preferably placed on the main control board 1310. Note that when the base display 1317 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the serial/parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are placed on the input/output board 1351, and the signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are transferred to the input/output board. It is best to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the test signal is preferably placed on the main control board 1310. That is, the test circuit arrangement area and the test terminals 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the test terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, so if the test terminal 1348 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the input/output signal will be connected to the main control board 1310. This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 265, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input/output board 1351 may be attached outside the main control board box 1320.

In the form shown in FIG. 265, the input/output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, so even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common. Furthermore, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Furthermore, if the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed and the input/output board box 1350 in which the input/output board 1351 is housed are provided separately, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes more flexible. . Furthermore, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it must be visible on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input/output board 1351 is Since it does not have to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the board installation position can be freely determined. In this manner, the form shown in FIG. 265 can improve the degree of freedom in design.

Note that in the form shown in FIG. 265, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to serial signals. In a pachinko machine, it is desirable that the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 not be output outside the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent a fraudster from detecting the operation of the pachinko machine. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudster will be able to detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and has a constant data rate, so it is easy to guess the data rate from the outside, and as a result, the signals transmitted on the data bus cannot be obtained. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and the speed of this synchronization clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is obtained, it is difficult to know the contents of the data being transmitted.

Above, we have described an example in which the input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input/output function of signals that are model-dependent is mounted on the input/output board 1351. If there is a part where the resistance to fraud and noise does not deteriorate even if it is placed, it may be mounted on the input/output board 1351. For example, outputting signals that require driving current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, outputting driving signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) The input of the signal is a function that may be installed on the input/output board 1351. In addition, communication with the payout control board 951, output of signals from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display Output to 1317 is a function that is preferably installed in 1310 on the main control board.

In addition, the parallel/serial conversion circuit 1341 and serial/parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351 can be configured by inputting a dummy signal (0V or 5V) to an empty input terminal or connecting a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be introduced and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if a fraudster attempts to obtain some signals using a parallel bus or general-purpose port while transmitting other signals as serial signals, it will be difficult to analyze the serial signals. A fraudster needs to obtain signals from multiple locations including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, which increases deterrence against fraud.

[15. Example regarding power supply route inside a pachinko machine]
Next, an embodiment regarding overcurrent protection in a power supply path inside a pachinko machine will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 is supplied with AC 24V power. The power supply board 931 has a power supply generation circuit 933 that generates various DC power supplies (for example, 5V, 12V, 24V, 35V) used inside the pachinko machine 1 from the AC 24V power supply supplied to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Power output from the power supply board 931 is supplied to performance members, control devices, and the like to drive accessories and lamps (LEDs) for performance and decoration of the pachinko machine 1. Although the electric wires that supply drive power to such performance components are generally fixed, in the movable parts of the drive parts of the accessories, the wires must be long enough to prevent them from being pulled by the accessories. It is wired with. Therefore, due to the movement of the accessory, the electric wire may rub against the members constituting the accessory or become caught in the movable part of the driving part of the accessory, and the sheathing of the electric wire may be damaged. Under such circumstances, if the power line and the ground line are close to each other, a short circuit will occur and a large current will flow.

However, if a short circuit occurs near the power supply board 931, a large current flows, and an overcurrent protection function (fuse) mounted on the power supply board 931 operates to cut off the power supply.

However, as described above, if a short circuit occurs at a location far from the power supply board 931, a current large enough to operate the overcurrent protection function (fuse) will not flow, and the problem will not become apparent. This is because the installed electric wires become a load. For example, if a short circuit occurs in a place where the impedance of the wire is about 1Ω, and the drive power supplied to the performance component is 12V, a current of 12A will flow, but the overcurrent protection function (for example, 15A fuse) of the power supply board 931 will operate. do not. Although it is possible to install overcurrent protection devices (fuses) of appropriate capacity in consideration of the current flowing under normal conditions to all power supply lines, this increases component costs and assembly costs.

Therefore, especially when the power line and ground line are placed close to each other due to electric wires passing near moving parts, the circuit board to which the electric wires are connected operates at two to three times the current that actually flows through the power source. Place an overcurrent protection device (fuse) to prevent large currents from flowing in the event of a short circuit.

Here, as an example of a drive device, the upper movable unit 3400 in FIG. 16 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. body) 3410 are arranged. The point stick accessory 3410 waits at the upper position in the non-performance state, and can be moved to the lower central position of the game board in the performance state, and rotates around the central decorative lamp 3412a at the central position of the game board. It is something.

Although not shown, a unit base body is provided on the back right side of the game board that overlaps with the game area when viewed from the front, and the point rod accessory 3410 is rotatable on the unit base body and pivotally supported on a driven shaft. The accessory base body extending from the point rod accessory 3411 to the unit base body and the rotating movement of the accessory base body are regulated and assisted (the vertical movement of the point rod accessory 3410 is restricted and assisted), and the point The accessory base of the rod accessory 3410 has a slit for inserting and sliding a bush provided therein, and is supported by an arm body that is movable to the unit base body and pivotally supported by a driven shaft.

In addition, a stepping motor MA for moving the point rod accessory 3410 to the center position of the game board below, a movement detection sensor, etc. are attached to the unit base body. In addition, a stepping motor MB for rotation, a rotation detection sensor, and an LED board (4250A) on which the LED of the center decorative lamp 3412a is mounted, as well as the LEDs of the left and right decorative lamps 3411, are mounted on the accessory base body. A LED board (such as 4250B) is provided.

Then, the stepping motor MB for rotation, the rotation detection sensor, and the drive signal line and detection signal line for driving the LED are routed from the accessory base together with the power supply line and the ground line, and the relay board (3044A , 3044B, 3044C, etc.) or directly to the performance drive board 3043. In addition, the various electric wires are determined between the standby position and the production position of the point rod accessory 3410 of the upper movable unit 3400, and the wire length is set with a certain amount of play, and bundled loose electric wires are used. Wiring may be done using a flat cable. Further, although the relay board and the effect driving board are provided in the upper movable unit 3400, they may be provided externally.

FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing the electrical connections of various substrates, drive sources, etc. for the upper movable unit 3400, which is the drive device described above.

A 24 V AC power supply supplied from outside the pachinko machine 1 is input to the power supply board 931 . The power supply board 931 has a power generation circuit 933, and 24 V AC power is input to the power generation circuit 933 via a fuse 934 serving as an overcurrent protection device (overcurrent protection means).

The power generation circuit 933 is capable of generating various types of power from 24V AC to various DC used inside the pachinko machine 1 (mainly 12V, 24V, 35V used for stepping motors, solenoids, LEDs, various sensors, etc., and mainly electronics such as CPUs). Create a power supply such as 5V (which may be created by separately lowering the voltage from another DC power supply on the control board) to be used as a control power supply for the circuit.

In this example, a stepping motor that operates at 12V and an LED (board) that lights up and flashes using a 12V power supply will be explained as an example, so in FIG. The system is omitted. In addition, various control lines and drive lines, which will be described later, are indicated by thin lines. It is assumed that each board is connected with a connector and a harness (electric wire).

The 12V power output from the power supply board 931 passes through the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the production drive board 3043 to various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards. (4250A, 4250B).

As illustrated, a relay board 3044B and a relay board 3044C are provided between the effect drive board 3043 and the moving stepping motor MA and the rotating stepping motor MB, respectively. Similarly, a relay board 3044A is also provided between the effect drive board 3043 and the central decorative lamp LED board 4250A. Note that the left and right decorative lamp boards 4250B are directly connected to the effect drive board 3043.

Next, drive signals for driving the various stepping motors and control signals for lighting and blinking the various LEDs are input to the various stepping motors (MA, MB) and the various LED boards (4250A, 4250B).

When the entry of a ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 2014 and second starting port sensor 2551 of the first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004, which are connected to the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 uses a control line connecting it to the payout control board 951 to send a command to operate the payout device 830 to pay out balls, and uses a control line connecting it to the peripheral control board 1510 to send an input command. When the ball is detected, a command is transmitted to cause the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to display an effect based on the lottery result.

As the performance display is executed, driving devices including various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards (4250A, 4250B) are driven. Using drive lines connecting the stepping motors (MA, MB), a control signal (drive signal) output from the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the stepping motor driver provided on the performance drive board 3043, and is further output as a drive signal. It is driven by receiving the drive signal output from the performance drive board.

Furthermore, for the LEDs mounted on various LED boards, the control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 are received by the LED driver using control lines connecting the various LED boards, and then sent as drive signals on the board. Lights up and blinks in response to the output drive signal.

Here, in the case of a stepping motor, the drive signal refers to a so-called excitation signal given to each coil (each phase), and in the case of an LED, it refers to a current that flows through the LED in order for the LED to light up or blink. Indicates a signal for blocking.

The stepping motor driver mounted on the performance drive board 3043 has a serial/parallel conversion function, and uses the control signal of each stepping motor connected in a daisy chain and serially output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a stepping signal. It outputs to the motor, and is a device that operates by creating an internal circuit power supply inside the device when 12V power is supplied.

The fuse 934 has a rated current determined from the total power consumed by the pachinko machine 1 in the normal gaming state, and the breaking current has a value larger than the rated current.
In this embodiment, a power supply with a rating of 15 A and a breaking current of 37.5 A (2.5 times the rating) is used so that the pachinko machine 1 does not perform a breaking operation even with the total current consumption of the power supply during normal use.

In addition, chip fuses 3071, 3072, 3074, and 3075 for cutting off current are mounted on the effect drive board 3043 and various relay boards (3044A, 3044C), respectively. The roles of these fuses will be explained next.

[15-1. Protection of drive devices equipped with ornaments and LED decorations]
The performance drive board 3043 is connected to the LED boards 4250A and 4250B, and outputs a power source for lighting and blinking the LEDs and a control signal for the LED driver.

Further, fuses 3074 and 3075 as overcurrent protection devices are provided on the power lines output to the LED boards 4250A and 4250B. This is because, due to the movement of the accessory, the wire may rub against the members that make up the drive device or get caught in moving parts such as the drive part of the accessory, causing damage to the wire sheathing. When a power line and a ground line are close to each other and a short circuit occurs, a large current flows through the power line. Therefore, the fuses 3074 and 3075 are operated to prevent the power line from being burnt out, thereby preventing damage to the accessories constituting the drive device, such as melting or burning of the accessories due to burnout of the power line.

The rated current of each fuse 3074, 3075 can be determined by the potential difference that occurs between the wires that are bundled together and the routing length (impedance) of the wires. The maximum potential difference will occur between the ground (0V) and the power supply voltage (for example, 12V), but if the wire breaks and the internal conductor is exposed and shorts to the ground wire, the exposed point and the power supply The current determined using Ohm's law from the impedance of the wire with the power supply board 931, which is the supply source, and this maximum potential difference is used as the cutoff current.

If the 12V power supply is a load that consumes 2A even in normal times out of the estimated total current consumption of 15A, if the impedance of the wire to the 4250A LED board is 2Ω, a current of 6A will flow in the event of a short circuit. Therefore, for example, a fuse 3075 with a rating of 2 A and a breaking current of 5 A (2.5 times the rating) may be used.

Also, regarding the fuse 3074, if the LEDs to be turned on and blinked are equivalent to those used on the LED board 4250A, and the same number of LEDs are mounted, the impedance of the electric wire to the LED board 4250B is temporarily 1. If it is 5Ω, a current of 8A will flow in the event of a short circuit, so a fuse 3074 with a rating of 2A and a breaking current of 5A may be adopted.

Normally, if a short circuit were to occur in the wire no matter where it was, a large breaking current would immediately flow and cut off the fuse 934 provided on the power supply board 931, but in reality the current is not supplied to the load. In this example, in places far from the power supply board where there is a potential for short circuits, a separate fuse is installed in consideration of the impedance of the wires being routed. (3071, etc.) is provided to shut off the circuit in case of a short circuit.

In addition, when placing the drive device not only on the game board side but also on the door side, make sure that the electric wire for driving the drive device is long enough so that it will not be pulled when the door is opened and closed by hall staff. However, when the door is opened and closed, the wires may rub against components close to the wiring route, or the wires may become caught in moving parts such as door opening/closing parts (hinges, etc.), causing the wire sheathing to become damaged. There is a risk of damage. Under such circumstances, if the power line and the ground line are close to each other, a short circuit will occur and a large current will flow.

Alternatively, if the wires must be routed to the hinge side or the opening/closing side when a hall clerk is installing or removing the game board, the wires may rub or get caught between the body frame and the wire sheathing may be damaged. may be damaged. Even if the power line and ground line are close to each other under such circumstances. A short circuit will occur and a large current will flow.

As described above, the present invention can be applied even in cases where damage is caused by human movement of the sliding portion or damage caused by human damage to property. It is best to place a fuse with an appropriate capacity in an appropriate location, but especially when placing a drive device on the door side, it is recommended to place a relay board with a fuse mounted on it near the downstream of the opening/closing part of the door that may be the cause of the problem. It is good to place it.

Up to this point, fuses 3074 and 3075 have been specifically explained as an example of the second overcurrent protection device, but instead of this, a self-recovery type that shuts off when a large current flows but resumes continuity after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Devices such as thermistors may also be used.

In this embodiment, a surface-mounted chip fuse is used for the fuse 3071, which is the second overcurrent protection device, in consideration of the size of the drive device, but the chip fuse has the advantage of being smaller than a tube fuse. However, it is not possible to tell from the appearance whether there is electrical continuity or not. In such a case, it is necessary to replace the electric wires and the load (drive source) to which the electric wires are connected, the effect drive board 3043 for driving the movable body, and the relay board 3044A on which the fuse is mounted.

A thermistor has the function of changing its own temperature due to heat generated by a large current, increasing its internal resistance, and interrupting the current. When its temperature returns to a low temperature, it lowers its internal resistance and becomes reusable. In other words, if a surface-mounted thermistor is used instead of a fuse, there is an advantage that at least the board on which the thermistor is mounted (for example, a relay board) does not need to be replaced and can be used continuously.

Note that for the fuse 934 as the first overcurrent protection device, a tube fuse is used in this embodiment, but in the case of a tube fuse, the fuse element melts when a large current flows, so it is difficult to use a chip fuse. Although it is not impossible to tell from the appearance whether or not there is electrical continuity, the fuse element itself of a tube fuse is thin and has a metallic color close to gray, so it is difficult to tell whether it is blown on a typical green resist substrate. Therefore, in order to make it easier to see that the fuse has blown, a light colored solid such as white or yellow is placed on the resist in the area where the fuse is mounted to make the metallic colored fuse element stand out and increase visibility. It is best to print it on silk.

In addition, for overcurrent protection devices that have different ratings or that require special attention even if they have the same rated capacity, for identification purposes, special markings (such as a star) may be printed on silkscreen near the device, or the The devices may be distinguished by different colors or by arranging the devices vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. with respect to the substrate.
[15-2. Protection of stepping motor driver]

The performance drive board 3043 is provided with a stepping motor driver and fuses 3071 and 3072 as overcurrent protection devices. Although two stepping motor drivers are shown in FIG. 266, a plurality of stepping motor drivers may be installed depending on the number of stepping motors used in the pachinko machine 1.

The stepping motor driver generates a drive signal by switching the power supplied from the power supply board 931 according to a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510. This drive signal drives a stepping motor built into the accessory, and the accessory moves. In the illustrated example, 12V is supplied to the stepping motor driver and stepping motor, but the necessary power source may be selected depending on the specifications of the stepping motor driver and stepping motor to be driven.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, a fuse is provided in each of the 12V power supply lines of the two stepping motors, but if a daisy chain connection is to be made, fuses may also be provided in the power supply lines of other stepping motor drivers.

Each fuse 3071 and 3072 connected to the power line of each stepping motor connected in a daisy chain prevents the other stepping motor drivers from being damaged by a large current flowing through one of the power lines. are doing. That is, if the stepping motor continues to be driven at a high temperature that exceeds the specified temperature, the resistance value of the coil may decrease and a large current may flow into the stepping motor driver. In that case, a large current would also flow into other stepping motor drivers connected in a daisy chain, but this is prevented.

Furthermore, when the resistance value of the coil decreases, the stepping motor itself generates heat, and if the coating of the electric wire (coil) that ensures insulation is damaged, a short circuit will occur within the stepping motor. In preparation for such a situation, in addition to damage to the stepping motor driver, a separate fuse is installed to prevent damage to the accessories that make up the drive device, such as melting or burning of accessories caused by a short circuit inside the stepping motor. It is a good idea to provide

In addition, regarding the cut-off current of the fuse employed in this embodiment, whether to mount it on the relay board or the effect drive board may be similarly determined by considering the impedance of the wiring.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is arranged in the path that supplies AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933), and is configured to prevent the power generation device from overcurrent depending on the current supplied by the power generation device. A first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) that protects from the state and a path that supplies DC power to a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) and a second overcurrent protection means (fuse 3075, etc.) that protects the power supply generation device from an overcurrent state according to the power supply generation means. (Production drive board 3043), it is arranged at a position closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means, and protects the power supply generation device from overcurrent conditions more than the first overcurrent protection means. Since the current required for this purpose is small, it is possible to effectively prevent damage to performance parts such as accessories and electric wires.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance in the game, and the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board, the performance members (point stick accessory (movable body) 3410 A drive control board (effect drive board 3043) that outputs a drive signal to a drive device (upper movable unit 3400) that includes a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) that drives a decorative lamp 3412a, etc.); A power generation device (power generation circuit 933) that generates DC power to be supplied to the power source; a power generation device protection means (fuse 934) that protects the drive device; and a drive device protection means (fuse 934) that is placed in the path for supplying DC power to the drive source and protects the drive device according to the current supplied by the power generation device. 3075, etc.), it is possible to effectively prevent damage to production parts such as accessories and electric wires.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, for example, two or more electric wires including the electric wire connected to the upstream side or downstream side of the relay board 3044A and transmitting the drive signal have a potential difference with each other, and the second The protection means (fuse 3075) performs a cutoff operation using a current flowing when electric wires having the potential difference are short-circuited. The current for this interrupting operation is determined from the potential difference and impedance of the wire using Ohm's law. Therefore, even if the first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) arranged in the path for supplying AC power to the power generation device (power generation circuit 933) does not operate, the second protection means protects components and wires. Damage can be effectively prevented.

To summarize the invention according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine having the following means.
Means 1: A peripheral control board that controls the performance in the game,
a drive control board that outputs a drive signal to drive a drive source that drives the presentation member based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board;
a power generation device that generates a DC power supply to be supplied to the drive source;
a first overcurrent protection means that is disposed in a path for supplying AC power to the power generation device and protects the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power generation device;
a second overcurrent protection means that is arranged in a path for supplying the DC power to the drive source and protects the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power generation device;
The second overcurrent protection means is located at a stage after the DC power generated by the power generation means is distributed to the drive control board and closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means. A gaming machine characterized in that the current for protecting the power supply generating device from an overcurrent state is smaller than that of the first overcurrent protection means.

Means 2: a peripheral control board that controls the performance in the game;
a drive control board that outputs a drive signal to a drive device including a drive source that drives the presentation member based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board;
a power generation device that generates a DC power supply to be supplied to the drive source;
a power generation device protection means that is arranged in a path for supplying AC power to the power generation device and protects the power generation device according to the current supplied by the power generation device;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a drive device protection means that is disposed on a path for supplying the DC power to the drive source and protects the drive device according to the current supplied by the power generation device.

[16. Example regarding contact detection sensor of firing handle]
FIG. 267 is a block diagram showing signal connections around the handle unit 500.

As described above, the handle unit 500 includes a handle lever 504 whose surface is coated with a metal film (for example, plated), and is electrically connected to the plating of the plated handle lever 504, so that a player can connect the handle lever 504 to the handle lever 504. It has a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a hand or finger is touching the device.

The contact detection sensor 509 measures the capacitance (stray capacitance) of the handle lever 504, and measures the change in capacitance of the handle lever 504 due to human body contact, and the measured capacitance reaches a predetermined threshold value. Detect human contact when the number increases. Since the contact detection sensor 509 detects contact with a human body based on such a principle, it is preferable that the difference in capacitance between the state in which the human body is in contact and the state in which the human body is not in contact is large. That is, the smaller the capacitance in a non-contact state, the greater the change in capacitance due to human contact, and it is desirable that the area of the contact portion 511 be smaller. In other words, a change in capacitance due to human body contact is not a rate of change from a non-contact state, but a change in capacitance, so it is easier to detect if the capacitance is originally small (in a non-contact state).

On the other hand, plating is often used on the surface of the casing to enhance the decorativeness of pachinko machines. Plating may also be used for parts other than the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In this case, in order to reduce the influence on the capacitance of the handle lever 504, it is preferable to form a metal film on parts other than the handle lever 504 using discontinuous deposition. Although discontinuous vapor deposition can form a surface with metallic luster, the processed area does not have conductivity, so it is possible to suppress an increase in electrostatic capacitance of the plating of the handle lever 504 in a non-contact state.

In addition, an LED board (printed board) on which an LED 512 and an LED driver IC 513 for driving the LED 512 are mounted is provided in the handle unit. is flashing red. Note that the LED driver IC 513 in this embodiment converts the serialized turning on/off data into parallel data, and drives the plurality of LEDs 512 mounted on the printed circuit board at a timing according to the parallel converted data. . Therefore, when the LED driver IC 513 is not required, for example when driving one LED 512, the LED driver 513 may be omitted.

As described above, from a similar point of view, capacitance also occurs between the conductor forming the circuit pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 and the plating of the handle lever 504. For this reason, it is preferable to make the area of the circuit pattern formed on the printed circuit board within the handle unit 500 as small as possible. For example, a wide ground pattern may be provided on a printed circuit board in order to suppress noise and stabilize the ground potential. However, since the plating of the handle lever 504 also generates capacitance with the ground pattern, if the ground pattern is wide, the capacitance of the handle lever 504 in a non-contact state increases. For this reason, it is preferable to reduce the area of the ground pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 as much as possible to reduce the capacitance with the handle lever 504 in a non-contact state. That is, it can be said that a printed circuit board in which only a connector for electrically connecting the printed circuit boards is mounted other than the LED 512, and a pattern is wired only for electrically connecting the LED 512 and the connector is ideal.

Contact detection sensor 509 outputs a contact detection signal when the measured capacitance of handle lever 504 exceeds a preset threshold. As shown in FIG. 268, the contact detection signal is output based on the potential difference between the touch sensor + signal and the touch sensor - signal, and when contact of the human body to the plating part of the handle lever 504 is detected, Touch sensor - lowers the signal potential to low level.

The contact detection signal is input from the branch circuit 991 to the firing control section 953a provided on the power supply board 931 and the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 267. The firing control unit 953a uses the contact detection signal as a firing permission condition, and controls the game ball to be fired from the firing device 680 only when the player is touching the handle lever 504 of the firing handle unit 500. .

The main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine using the contact detection signal. For example, after the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds after the state indicating non-contact) has passed after the contact detection signal is interrupted, 30 seconds Monitoring will begin after a period of preparation. After the preparation period has passed, count the number of balls that have entered the winning hole or the grand prize opening, and if the number exceeds the specified number, there is a high possibility that game balls have entered the winning hole or the grand prize opening, etc. due to fraudulent activity. It is determined that the state is abnormal. The preparation period is assumed to be a period sufficient for all the game balls launched into the game area 5a to reach the out port 1111 immediately after the end of the game. Some gaming machines that are no longer popular end up closing without attracting any players from the time they open until they close, so the values counted after there are clearly no players become more reliable, making them less likely to be false. An abnormality is correctly determined as a natural event. In addition, although various measures are taken to prevent static electricity that is applied from outside or generated internally to gaming machines, static electricity still has a negative effect on various control devices and various sensors, and can cause abnormalities. Monitoring after understanding whether or not players are actually playing is useful in terms of avoiding unnecessary alarms, correctly determining abnormalities, and avoiding unnecessary trouble with players. There is sex.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with the base display (accessory ratio display, performance display monitor) 1317 as described above, so that the progress of the gaming machine can be visually managed. The display of a base display 1317 that counts the number of prize balls and displays the base value is updated only when game balls are being shot, that is, only when the player is playing a game. That is, the base value is calculated by counting only the number of prize balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 detects the contact of the player with the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. calculate. In this way, it is possible to prevent an abnormality in detecting a prize ball when a game ball has not been shot or from being reflected in the base value of the prize ball obtained due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to accurately calculate the base value. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Even in the progress management of such gaming machines, progress management based on understanding whether or not the player is actually playing the game is useful in accurately determining the performance of the gaming machine.

Next, the details of the process executed by the main control MPU 1311 will be described with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 267 and the flowchart in FIG. 23, particularly regarding the process related to the contact detection signal. The contact detection signal is passed from the main control input circuit 1315 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 267 to one of the main control I/O ports 1314, and is processed in the switch input process (step S74) of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is taken into the main control MPU 1311 and various processes are executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the main control MPU 1311 switches detection of an abnormal state according to the state of the captured contact detection signal. That is, the abnormal state detection method is switched between detecting/not detecting the abnormal state.

For example, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the contact detection signal was interrupted (indicating non-contact), even if the game is in a jackpot game state, the count switch will activate the game jack to the jackpot slots 2005 and 2006. If it is detected that a ball has entered the ball, a winning abnormality display command is created. The created command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92).

Note that the main control MPU 1311 may execute the fraud detection process when the contact detection signal is interrupted (indicating non-contact). Further, only a specific fraudulent act detection process (for example, fraudulent winning detection process for the big winning openings 2005 and 2006) may be executed in accordance with non-detection of the contact detection signal. When the contact detection signal changes to a detection state (becomes a state indicating contact), it is preferable to stop execution of the fraudulent act detection process that was executed in response to the change in the contact detection signal.

Furthermore, even if the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (indicating contact), the fraud detection process that was executed in response to the change in the contact detection signal may continue to be executed. . In this case, the notification of the abnormality is stopped and the normal gaming state is restored by an operation by an employee of the hall, such as turning the power back on.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 executes accessory ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) to calculate the accessory ratio (base value). At this time, if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is in a non-contact state as determined using the contact detection signal, the game ball is not launched without executing the accessory ratio calculation/display process. Prevent the obtained prize balls from being reflected in the base value.

Further, a command based on the detection result of the contact detection signal is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Peripheral control unit 1511 reports the detected abnormality according to the command received from main control board 1310. Furthermore, if the contact detection signal changes from a non-detection state to a detection state (indicating a contact), the detected abnormality is detected as a winning abnormality in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) described above. A non-display command may be transmitted to urge the peripheral control unit 1511 to stop the notification. Further, even if the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (even if it becomes a state indicating contact), the abnormality notification may be continued. In this case, the notification of the abnormality is stopped and the normal gaming state is restored by an operation by an employee of the hall, such as turning the power back on.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a branch circuit 991 provided on a relay board 990.

The branch circuit 991 is composed of three switching transistors Tr2, Tr3, and Tr5, and generates and outputs two signals, a touch sensor-1 signal and a touch sensor-2 signal, from the touch sensor signal. Specifically, in the branch circuit 991, when the touch sensor signal is at H level, transistor Tr2 is turned on, transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned off, and touch sensor-1 signal is at H level (touch sensor + signal). voltage). At this time, since Tr3 is an open collector output, the output of the touch sensor-2 signal becomes undefined. On the other hand, when the touch sensor signal is at the L level, the transistor Tr2 is turned off, the transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned on, and the touch sensor 1 signal and the touch sensor 2 signal go to the L level (ground voltage).

In this way, the branch circuit 991 divides the contact detection signal into two signals with different signal levels and outputs the two signals.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the player's handle operation is used as the abnormality determination condition, it is possible to correctly determine the abnormality of the gaming machine and accurately detect fraudulent activity.

Additionally, depending on whether or not the player operates the handle, it changes whether the base value is updated, that is, whether the number of out balls or winning balls is counted, so the progress of the gaming machine can be managed correctly and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately measured. It can be evaluated as follows. In other words, out balls and prize balls are counted while the firing handle is being operated (+predetermined time after the hand is released).

The details of the process executed by the main control MPU 1311 (flowchart in FIG. 23) will be described below, in particular regarding the process related to the contact detection signal in the configuration shown in the block diagram in FIG. 17, instead of the configuration shown in the block diagram in FIG. 267. This is an explanation. The difference between FIG. 267 and FIG. 17 is that the contact detection signal input to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 is input directly via the branch circuit 991 in the configuration of FIG. The configuration differs in that the command is input to the payout control board 951 and inputted to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control MPU of the payout control board 951.

The contact detection signal is passed from the payout control input circuit in the payout control unit 952 to any of the payout control I/O ports, and is taken into the payout control MPU in the switch input process of the timer interrupt process, where various processes are executed. . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control MPU takes in the contact detection signal and sends the state of the contact detection signal, which is periodically taken in by timer interrupt processing, as a command to the main control MPU 1311. Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes the above-described interrupt processing frame command reception process (step S82), receives the command, analyzes the received command, and executes the fraud detection process (step S84). Other processes executed by the main control MPU 1311 are the same as those described above.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the touch sensor contact detection signal is used to determine the abnormality of the gaming machine, but when the contact detection signal changes to a state indicating non-contact, the effect is controlled. You may also do this. Below, an example will be given of the effect control that is performed when the contact detection signal changes to a state indicating non-contact.

For example, if the player releases his/her hand from the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and the contact detection signal is interrupted (indicating a non-contact state), the performance content is changed from the current performance to a highly anticipated performance. May be changed. By performing a highly anticipated performance with the player taking his hand off the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the player who is thinking of stopping the game can be given an opportunity to continue the game. Further, at the timing when the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, an effect may be performed that directly asks the player whether to continue the game (for example, an effect where the character asks "Are you going to stop now?").

Therefore, depending on whether or not the player operates the handle, an effect that the player does not intend can be displayed, and the player can be motivated to continue playing the game. Note that the contact detection signal is not limited to the contact detection signal, and is similarly provided in the handle unit 500 so that it can be operated by the player, and can be turned on and off by turning the handle lever 504, and the on operation temporarily turns off the game ball. An on/off signal from a firing stop button (not shown) to be stopped may be similarly input to the main control board 1310, and the performance control as described above may be performed based on whether or not the firing stop button is operated. In this case as well, similar effects can be obtained.

To summarize the invention according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine having the following means.
Means 1: A game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A firing operation means having a contact detection means for detecting a contact by a player, and a firing operation means for the player to perform a firing operation of a game ball;
Launch control means for controlling the launch of game balls according to the operation of the launch operation means;
and a firing means for firing a game ball into a game area according to the control of the firing control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a contact detection signal indicating a detection result by the contact detection means is input to the game control means.

Means 2: The gaming machine according to Means 1,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means detects an abnormality in the gaming machine depending on a state of the contact detection signal.

Means 3: The gaming machine according to Means 2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming control means detects an abnormality in the gaming machine when the contact detection signal indicates non-contact.

Means 4: The gaming machine according to Means 3,
A game machine characterized in that the game control means uses the fact that the contact detection signal indicates non-contact as an abnormality detection condition.

Means 5: A gaming machine according to means 1 to 4,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means controls whether or not to update a value for evaluating the performance of the gaming machine, depending on the state of the contact detection signal.

Means 6: The gaming machine according to Means 5,
The game control means evaluates the performance of the gaming machine using the winning balls detected during the period from when the contact detection signal indicates non-contact until the contact detection signal indicates contact after a predetermined time has elapsed. A game machine characterized in that it is not used to update values.

[17. slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM of a pachinko machine has been described.Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of a slot machine (player-type gaming machine) will be explained. Note that although the pachinko machine has been briefly described with reference to FIG. 26, programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM, similar to the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[17-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 269 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 270 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the slot machine 4000 of this embodiment includes various devices installed inside a box-shaped housing 4100 with an open front. 4200 is provided in a single-opening manner so that it can be opened and closed. At the top of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 that displays effects and information according to the progress of the game, a speaker that produces sounds, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to presentations related to games. Various effects displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by an effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means that can display an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means that can control the display of the effect display means. Eggplant.

In the center of the front member 4200, there is a front panel that prevents the rear from being seen and has a decorative pattern drawn on it, and a front panel that makes the rear visible (for example, a transparent ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. Note that the front panel may be configured with a display device, and when no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, the reels 4301 are made visible, and images that produce the game are mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing a game in the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbols that are variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 disposed within the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined arrangement by winding strip-shaped sheets on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 271), which is a stepping motor, and independently drives and stops rotation of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It is now possible to do so. That is, reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c serve as a driving source for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method to increase their driving torque and static torque, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above. This makes it possible to use a small-sized motor as the drive source, thereby reducing costs.

Note that in the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are defined as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Furthermore, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are designated as a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, the plurality of types of symbols visible from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate from the top to the bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, 3), that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game are visible.

A predetermined enablement line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In this embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the symbols in the middle of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line (middle line) that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the lower part of the left reel 4301a to the middle part of the middle reel 4301b to the upper part of the right reel 4301c ( The line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the upper left reel 4301a to the middle reel 4301b to the lower right reel 4301c (lower right line) is the activation line. Then, the activation line is activated by the player inserting medals or inputting credits (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the pattern combination (roll) formed on this activation line, It is determined whether a prize (win) is achieved or not.

When a winning is achieved, in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the active line, there are also cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on another line visually. Such a line includes a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. In addition, a line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a front part (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above. The patterns may be visually aligned with the virtual line where they are located. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle row, upward-right, downward-right lines), lines where symbols can be visually aligned when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to form a symbol stop line (symbol alignment). line).

The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activation line is activated according to the number of bets, and winnings are made based on the pattern combinations formed on these activated lines. Determine whether or not the winning combination is successful or unsuccessful. For example, for bet number 1, the middle line is the active line, for bet number 2, in addition to the middle line, the upper and lower lines are active lines, and for bet number 3, in addition to the upper, middle, and lower lines, the upward-right and downward-right lines are active lines. shall be. Further, all lines may be made valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be made exclusive to 3-coin bets.

A payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out in the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display that displays the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion protruding toward the front is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step serves as an operation portion 4202 that slopes downward on the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single coin insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game becomes executable when the player inserts medals into the medal slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b that detects the passage of medals is provided on the route through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information from the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-card insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet input button 4205 allows one credit card to be input by pressing the button once. By pressing the max bet button 4206 once, you can input up to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) from credits, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It looks like this.

Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The payout button 4209 is used to pay out medals inserted from the medal slot 4203, medals input as the number of bets (bet medals) using the 1-card insert button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or when a winning is established, and is stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medals (accumulated medals) stored in the medal tray 4201 to the medal receptacle 4201. In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay win (replay win), or when medals exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits are used as medals via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the tray 4201.

The starting lever 4210 is an operating lever for starting one game. The key device 4215 is used to insert a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (eg, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and stuck inside the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, middle reel 4301b, and right reel 4301c, respectively. This is for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c in response to a stop operation.

Furthermore, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting a lower area of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Furthermore, below the decorative plate and at the lowest part of the front member 4200, there are provided a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting audio, and the like.

A main board (gaming control device) 4600 (see FIG. 271) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is disposed at the top inside the housing. An accessory ratio display 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display provided on the front of the slot machine 4000 (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display 4500), and the payout number display LED 4562 Alternatively, the ratio of the accessory may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, sticker, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio. Note that the display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but it does not need to be installed on the main control unit 1300, but can be placed on another board (for example, the performance control board 4700) as long as it is located in a place where it is easy to operate. , power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided approximately at the center inside the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. Further, inside the casing of the slot machine 4000, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided for outputting signals from the main board 4600 to an external device.

Furthermore, a medal dispensing device (hopper) 4110 is disposed at the bottom inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 accepts and stores medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination pattern is formed on the active line and a winning is achieved, the winning is achieved. The number of medals corresponding to (payout medals) or the amount of medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to additions due to winnings are paid out to the medal receptacle 4201. By operating the payout button 4209, the medals equivalent to the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. Further, on the right side of the medal dispensing device 4110, medals that overflow from the medal dispensing device 4110 and flow in are stored, and medals that flow in are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[17-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the accessory ratio display 1317 that displays the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 that switches the display of the accessory ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a momentary pushbutton switch, but other types of switches may also be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The aforementioned one-piece input button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are operated by sensors (not shown). is used to perform operations by the player, and the detected operation signals are output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 that starts the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starts rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c), and the reel stop button 4211a is activated. , 4211b, 4211c, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 to stop the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively.

Further, the slot machine 4000 houses a main board 4600 and other devices, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 consists of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be rotated and stopped independently, and when rotating, multiple types of symbols are displayed from above in the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation of the reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. They are provided correspondingly within the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the above-mentioned solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b are installed. Input sensor 4207b detects medals inserted from medal input port 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the inserted sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage that reaches the input sensor 4207b within the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals is no longer accepted. The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal receiving tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also disabled, so neither bets nor accumulation of medals are made by inserting medals.

The medal dispensing device 4110 has a dispensing sensor 4110e in the dispensing port that detects the dispensed medals one by one, and a dispensing medal signal for each medal is input from the dispensing sensor 4110e to the main board 4600. . Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is sent to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display is performed on the image display 4500, error lamp 4554, etc. to inform of an abnormality in medal storage, and the players, hall employees, etc. are notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, the main board 4600 outputs a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the aforementioned reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. Further, a drive signal is inputted to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormality signal of the medals being paid out to the main board 4600, and in response, the main board 4600 sends a message indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. is displayed on the error lamp 4554, image display 4500, etc. to notify players, hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes a production control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and this production control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input/output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC 4706, etc. are installed. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, etc., and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to a hall computer 4800 of the gaming hall via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays the role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, gaming status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 generates multiple types of DC power from the 24 volt AC (24 VAC) power supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: +5V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and +24V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+24V"). Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies, +5V and +12V, are supplied to the reels 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. The symbol fluctuation display device 4300 is supplied with the symbol fluctuation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can only be operated by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). Further, the reset switch 4112u is used to cancel an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When obtaining drive torque for rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 to rotate the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Control is performed by outputting +12V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining static torque to maintain the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 in a stopped state, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting +5V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage, control is performed.

The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In a game played by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 after determining the number of medals to bet, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotates, and then the player presses the reel stop button 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When you operate the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line and Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be awarded.

As mentioned above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel strip with a symbol drawn on it. Then, when all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is selected from the display contents displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line). It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned active line in the symbol display window 4401. Note that it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. As a result, if it is determined that symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in an amount equal to the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations.

[17-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, storage areas provided by the ROM 4602, RAM 4603, etc. provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Note that the storage area of the pachinko machine is outlined in FIG. 24, but is configured in the same way as the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 272 to 275. FIG. 272 is a diagram showing details of the access area for game control of the slot machine 4000 and the ROM area 5100, which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602, in this embodiment.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by media such as ROM 4602 and RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area assigned addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Furthermore, the access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I/O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It is. Note that each area does not necessarily have to correspond to a medium that provides an access area; one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

By configuring the access area of this embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be explained below.

[17-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be explained. ROM area 5100 corresponds to a storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains its stored contents even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and although it is possible to read the stored data, it cannot be updated or deleted. It is now impossible to do so. Note that the ROM 4602 may be any nonvolatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

The ROM area 5100 is assigned addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "1FFFH" from "0000H".

The ROM area 5100 has a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs and the like for controlling games. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for controlling the game is stored. That is, the game is controlled by executing the program stored in the first control area and referring to the data stored in the first data area. Note that the area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (function testing) the control program, and the like. Further, the second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional testing). Note that the second data area is not necessarily required, and debug data may be stored in the second control area. In addition, the area (second control area, second data area) in which programs and data for debugging (function testing) the gaming control program without being used for gaming control is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function) ( (second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio. The third control area also stores data for calculating the accessory ratio. A third data area may be provided to store data for calculating accessory ratios. Note that an area (third control area) in which programs and data for calculating accessory ratios are stored without being used for game control is referred to as an area for accessory ratio calculation (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. This can be done separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the effort required to inspect the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas to which access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, if the isolated area is accessed, the CPU 4601 is configured to forcibly execute reset processing. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and succeeding areas. For example, the starting address of the first isolated area is the next one of the ending address of the first control area. The end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the third isolation area is the debug (function test) area. It may be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolated area is arranged between the debug (function test) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (function test) area in FIG. It may also be treated as an area for calculating physical ratios.

[17-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of RAM area 5200 will be explained. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores data derived by executing programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be capable of reading and writing data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. Furthermore, in the event of a power outage, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be retained for a predetermined period of time by the backup power source.

The RAM area 5200 is assigned addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), a save area, and an isolation area. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing program debug control (second control). The accessory ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio and calculated accessory ratios (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section accessory ratio, etc.). It should be noted that it is not necessary to secure a dedicated work area for the debugging (inspection function) work area and the accessory ratio calculation work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating accessory ratios may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area will be reduced. However, if the program is structured so that it does not use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area, it is not necessarily necessary to use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area. Good too.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, before executing the predetermined process, the values of various registers of the CPU (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area, After processing is completed, the copied values are returned to the various registers of the CPU. Note that the evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation; however, similar to the work area, it can be used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation. It may be calculated separately. Thereby, it is possible to maintain more independence in game control, debug (inspection function) control, and accessory ratio calculation.

The isolation area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories, and the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the ratio of accessories. This area is continuous with each area (previous and subsequent areas). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the next address ("3076H") after the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is This is the previous address ("307FH") of the debugging (inspection function) work area. Furthermore, the isolated area is an area to which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed during processing by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 273 shows details of the accessory ratio calculation work area on the right side. The accessory ratio calculation work area may include a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is powered on, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). ) may be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when data is deleted, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). good. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set to the power outage flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276), it is preferably determined whether the data in the backup area is normal or not, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal is copied to the main area. Further, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each piece of data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation.

FIG. 274(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(A), the number of paid out bonus items, the number of consecutive paid items, the total number of paid items, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of advantageous area games, the number of non-advantageous area games, and the advantageous area. Store the percentage. The number of accessory payouts is the number of medals that are paid out during the operation of the accessory (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive bonus balls acquired is the number of medals that are paid out during continuous bonus items operation (for example, during a big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of accessory items paid out by the total number of paid items. The continuous accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive prizes paid out by the total number of prizes paid out. The number of games played in an advantageous period is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the number of medals in hand is difficult to reduce, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)), and the number of games played in a non-advantageous period is the number of games played in a non-advantageous period. , is the number of games executed in gaming states other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(A), the number of paid out accessories, the number of consecutive paid out characters, the total number of paid outs, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total number of paid out objects in FIG. 274(B), which will be described later. Each storage area corresponds to a cumulative total of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Moreover, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

The number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous area games, and the number of non-advantageous area games are updated in the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 276), and the accessory ratio , the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 277) and stored.

FIG. 274(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonus ratio, the consecutive bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous area games, and the number of bonus payouts. The number of games played in advantageous sections and the advantageous section ratio are stored. In addition, the storage area for each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the storage area for each data is a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of games have been stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that lags behind the write pointer by one. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of accessory payouts, the number of consecutive accessory payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each 2-byte storage areas, Can store numbers up to 65535 in decimal. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the cumulative number of games are each a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games×n (6000 games if n=15), a large storage area is provided. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the total number of games are each a 3 or 4-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games each have a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal notation. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Note that by increasing the number of games (for example, 600 games) corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer, the number of consecutive storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, data for the same 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as a ring buffer can be reduced.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274(B), the number of paid out bonus objects, the number of consecutive paid out bonus items, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are as follows: This is the same as the explanation in FIG. 274(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of winnings and payouts is the number of all medals paid out in the game. The number of games is the number of times the game has been played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are determined by the bonus rate calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 276). ), and the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 277).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 274(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). However, the data will not be deleted due to other triggers. For this reason, data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total shown in FIG. 274(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Also, if the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories or the calculated ratio of accessories is abnormal (for example, the ratio of accessories is over 100%, or the calculation result of the ratio of accessories has changed significantly from the previous calculation value) , number of accessory payouts>total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[17-3-3. I/O area configuration]
Next, the I/O area 5300 will be explained. Input/output ports correspond to the I/O area 5300, and by accessing the I/O area 5300, the CPU 4601 can access each input/output port. The input/output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input such as a switch, a port related to output such as a big prize opening solenoid, and an LED drive signal. The input/output port settings (settings related to use/unuse of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 5400.

[17-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be explained. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of this embodiment. Parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, the various settings include start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. 275. In addition, in FIG. 275, the definitions of the start address and end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories, and the save area for calculating the ratio of accessories are not illustrated, but the third control area start setting and the third control area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for accessory ratio calculation and the work area end setting for accessory ratio calculation are the same as the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area start setting and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other retreat areas. Areas other than the area set here are considered as unused (unset) areas. Thereby, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Note that although FIG. 275 shows the parameters set as continuous areas, the set areas do not need to be continuous, and for example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100, the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, by intentionally accessing the isolated area and causing a reset, it becomes possible to initialize the program. Since slot machines execute processes sequentially, by accessing the isolated area after the last game process is completed, the program can be executed from the startup process and initial settings can be executed again. Thereby, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during a game, the initial setting can be executed again to reset the normal value. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clearing is determined based on the power outage flag, but it is possible to forcibly cause RAM clearing by accessing the isolated area without setting the power outage flag. Become. On the other hand, in the pachinko machines mentioned above, games are played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue playing, but in the case of slot machines, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, the processing for initializing the information in the RAM can be made unnecessary by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not set sequentially through user program processing such as initialization of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information to be managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[17-4. Game control]
[17-4-1. System reset startup processing]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 276 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset startup processing that is executed when slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset startup process is a process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or a power outage occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset startup process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process to set various parameters necessary for playing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area allocated to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a setting value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated as a used area in the RAM area 5200, and an area that is not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 273) is treated as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses), respectively. Further, in the ROM area 5100, similarly to the RAM area 5200, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas that are not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). The security check process is a process for determining whether the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an incorrect ROM, so starting up of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has elapsed (step S1014).

Note that the process from the power-on of the slot machine until the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but is a process configured by hardware within the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It becomes.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, processes such as startup setting of a periodic process (timer interrupt process in FIG. 277) that periodically executes a predetermined process are executed. In this embodiment, functions such as random number function settings that prevent game lottery settings from being rewritten by the user program after a security check are executed in the parameter setting process, and functions other than these are executed in the device initialization setting process. is running. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or a hot start to return to the game with the backed up contents of the RAM 4603.

When performing a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, when the power outage flag is not set, etc.

On the other hand, when performing a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes processing to return to the game based on the backed up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process that was interrupted when the power was cut off. Specifically, in any one of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset start-up process (described later) or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 277), the process that was interrupted at the time of power outage is returned to.

Note that in the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power outage occurs and when a recovery process is executed. At this time, only the work area for game control excluding the work area for debugging (inspection function) out of all areas that use the checksum calculation target as work (work area for game control and work area for debugging (inspection function)) You can also use it as The reason why the checksum is calculated only in the gaming control work area is that the debugging (inspection function) processing is designed to maintain independence from the gaming control processing, and to ensure that it does not affect the gaming results. Since this is a non-standard process, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. Using the checksum as a target for calculation may impair the reliability of normal recovery from a power outage. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in a product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big problem in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled, and in this case, there is a high possibility that it will cause significant damage to the manufacturer and the hall in terms of costs, etc., so please take thorough precautions. This is because the work area for game control has higher reliability than the work area for debugging (inspection function) because verification is performed on a regular basis.

When the initialization process ends or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process is executed in which information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls is returned to the initial setting state.

When the game initialization process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes information signal 1 output process for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debugging (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. Note that the information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and necessary modules are called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (reel rotation start, start lever ON, information regarding winning combinations) accompanying the game start in the game start process, debug (inspection function) regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop process Inspection function) When outputting signals (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.), debugging (inspection function) signals related to confirmed roles in the winning determination process (defined roles stopped and displayed on each reel, payouts associated with confirmed roles) At the time of outputting information on the number of coins, output signal information regarding the number of medals to be paid out at the time of payout (number of medals to be paid out, etc.), the "information signal N output processing" module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process to perform a process before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the starting lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether a replay execution instruction has been given, whether medals have been inserted, whether medals have been settled, etc., and further, Confirmation of game setting values, etc. is performed.

When the starting lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing to start the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is obtained, winning combinations, etc. are determined, and the reels 4301 start rotating. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process to wait until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotational speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach a normal rotational speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept input from the reel stop button 4211, and executes symbol stop processing to perform processing until all reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 stop, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process to determine a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is a winning combination, settings are made corresponding to the winning combination, and settings are made to execute a payout process corresponding to the winning combination.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the work area for calculating the accessory ratio in the RAM area 5200 (see FIG. 273, see FIG. 274) (step S1038). The process in step S1038 can be skipped if there are no award medals to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Note that even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, data for calculating the accessory ratio can be collected even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes game ending processing to perform processing at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game end process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no win or a win without a payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[17-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a periodic process, which is an interrupt process activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial startup process is being executed, will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the regular process is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 273. As mentioned above, periodic processing is an interrupt processing that is activated while main loop processing is being executed, so by saving the CPU registers used in main loop processing, processing can be continued after return. It is necessary to

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built into the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing to sample input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of the driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reels 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, etc. are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing to update various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic process x the set number of times.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated. If the display switch 1318 has been operated, the CPU 4601 calls the accessory ratio calculation/display process and displays the medals stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation/display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation/display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific method of calculating the accessory ratio and the specific method of displaying the accessory ratio are the same as the method described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt processing and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling quality of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory object ratio, continuous accessary object ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but each time the display switch 1318 is operated, the display You may calculate only the value that is Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing to control the LEDs (step S1120). The LEDs to be controlled are those controlled by the main board 4600, and are, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED.

The CPU 4601 executes information output processing to output a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to hall computer 4800 via external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the production control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing to update the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, random numbers to be generated by software processing are updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, updating processing is performed for soft random numbers built into the CPU. With software random numbers built into the CPU, the counting itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number updating.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Furthermore, execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). While periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is being executed, even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending and waits until the previously executed timer interrupt processing has successfully completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is set to be executed. For this reason, the configuration is such that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[17-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, information signal output processing executed in system reset startup processing and the like will be explained. Information signal output processing is provided for each output signal function (1 to N), and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are "conditional device output signals (signal output related to conditional device operation)" and "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)." Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so a description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal output processing according to this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing information signal output processing (to ensure that they are restored even if destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved to the stack area. It is designed to allow Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to a debug (inspection function) save area, and is allocated to a separate area from the game control save area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires from the RAM 4603 information to be referred to in order to select (ON/OFF) the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) to be output (step S1212). In each information signal output process, the information stored in the RAM 4603 is only referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 during the process, and if writing is necessary, the information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured so that it is not used (including referenced) in processes other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes information signal output processing is placed in a different location from other gaming control programs, it does not use a common area and can ensure independence from other gaming control programs. .

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and by setting a sufficient time, the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. Thereafter, the values of all registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, an information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the number of debugging (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each output signal function (1 to N). Note that this embodiment is configured such that multiple types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table that defines the output signal corresponding to the function is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function). Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing signals in two data areas, selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by a caller.

As described above, in this embodiment, a program that executes information signal output processing (signal output program) is stored in an area that is clearly separated from the area that stores the gaming control program (gaming control area). By providing the area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the pachinko machine 1 can be placed independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the pachinko machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for purposes other than this (for example, to make up for the lack of capacity in the gaming control area by arranging gaming control programs or general-purpose programs), programs will not be placed in the debugging (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is statically called from the game control program and executed, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. Additionally, as mentioned above, when program processing in the game control area is being executed, access to the debugging (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and program processing in the debugging (inspection function) area is executed. If it is, the game control work area is configured so that only reference to it is permitted and writing is prohibited. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debugging (inspection function) area. Programs placed in the debugging (inspection function) area, including signal output programs, are always called in a subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, a return instruction returns immediately after the call. Note that the modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (program placed in the debugging (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating accessory ratio) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 in FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data of the gaming state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects explained in the pachinko machine example described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the role parts of the slot machine in operation, and to improve the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation. You can check it.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are representative examples of aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main control device includes:
transmitting data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit via serial communication;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, after power is turned on, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use parity, and whether to use a stop bit are set for serial communication with the driver circuit. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and peripheral control devices.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of the proportion of the accessory due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the ratio of accessories even when the power is turned off.
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the settings for the serial communication are executed after the work RAM is cleared.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of accessory ratios using data in the RAM with incorrect contents.

(3) The main control device is
It has the function of transmitting the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer through serial communication,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that, after power is turned on, a data storage amount is set to determine the timing of sending out data from the FIFO buffer.

This allows data to be transmitted with any number of bits from the FIFO buffer.

(4) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main control device and the driver circuit, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing any parts around the main control device. Furthermore, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and display device can be easily discovered. By making the line shorter than the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the proportion of the accessory can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are housed in one case.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts around the main control device, and the influence of noise can be reduced.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and furthermore, the influence of noise can be reduced.

(7) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display orientation of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display orientation of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

Thereby, it is possible to easily check whether the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced;
In the game described in each of the preceding items, the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state where it cannot be seen in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, wasteful power consumption of the gaming machine can be prevented when displaying the accessory ratio is not necessary.

(11) A gaming machine that awards prize balls as gaming value to a player by winning a game ball launched toward a gaming area into a predetermined prize opening,
a main control device that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
There are two types of entry winning holes: general winning holes whose entrance shape does not change depending on the gaming state, and electric winning holes whose entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by at least the number of first prize balls paid out upon winning in the general winning hole and the number of first prize balls paid out in response to winning in the electric winning hole. Count the number of second prize balls paid out separately,
The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
the memory stores a check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory if the check code is not normal.

Thereby, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an incorrect accessory ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, if at least one of the game control data and the prize ball number data for accessory ratio calculation is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the gaming machine is powered on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machines described in Section 1.

If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall attendant. , it is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the proportion of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to a state where the ratio of accessory objects is high, and it is possible to prevent the state where the ratio of accessory objects is high from being concealed.

(15A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is calculated as the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the gaming area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine). The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the base by the number of balls, the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port, and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means may use, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal that detects a winning in the winning opening, a reception confirmation signal of a prize ball payout command, or a timing of receiving a prize ball payout completion signal, or a timing of receiving a winning ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing of transmitting a prize ball payout command that instructs payout.

(15D) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, upon receiving a signal that detects winning of a game ball into a winning hole provided in the gaming area, calculates the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole,
updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a prize of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving a confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that received the reception confirmation;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving from the payout control means the completion of payout of the prize balls according to the instruction;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction received for completion of the payout;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 15A to 15H, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with the gaming situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated and stored in a buffer;
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is calculated as the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls hit into the game area). , the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls) to calculate the base.

(16D) The predetermined timing is the timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby removing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; and an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game nature while maintaining the game nature within the constraints of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in relation to the fact that the counted number of balls consumed satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means determines the number of consumed balls based on the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine counts .

(17D) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of out pitches used to calculate the base,
Calculating the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state and storing it in a buffer;
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out pitches at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out pitches. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that:

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of pitches consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out pitches, thereby calculating the total number of out pitches from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the gaming machine moves a predetermined number to a number.

(17F) The control means:
Executing a special symbol fluctuation display game that derives the special gaming state, triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is at an upper limit value, the number of prize balls is counted without storing the winning in the starting winning hole.

(17G) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game quality while maintaining the game quality.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a main body frame to which a game board having a game area where the game is played is removably attached;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays information regarding the gaming value even when the main body frame is in a closed state.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to island equipment of a game center,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in a case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in hall sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
information updating means for updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game;
and game execution means for performing a special symbol fluctuation display game triggered by a winning in the starting winning opening,
Each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means. The game machine described.

(19B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means sets the predetermined condition at any one of the following timings: detecting a winning in the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball paying out command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that takes sufficient measures against fraud even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means for controlling the performance of a special symbol variable display game that is triggered by winning a prize in the starting slot;
and a gaming value information display means for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value,
The performance control means is
controlling the transition to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is lower than the normal mode;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that during the low power mode, the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means.

(20B) displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game, comprising an effect display means constituted by a liquid crystal display means having a backlight;
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is comprised of a light emitting diode, and does not reduce brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) comprising a performance display means for displaying a performance of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has been exhausted;
The gaming value information display means is characterized in that it does not change the display mode to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a full range of energy saving modes.

(21A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
comprising a normal gaming state and a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
As described in each of the preceding items, the information regarding the gaming value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(21B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means:
When the special symbol variation display game results in a jackpot, the advantageous gaming state is derived and control is performed to open a winning opening through which the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value;
The period from the confirmation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is set as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the gaming value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means:
In the advantageous gaming state, control is performed to open winning openings through which the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of gaming balls entered into the winning slot is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that awards game balls when predetermined conditions are met,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and a display means for displaying information regarding the given game ball,
In the game area where the fired game balls roll, there is a starting port that is a trigger for deriving a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger for deriving the open state from the closed state of the starting port. At least a passage opening is provided,
The control means includes:
It is also possible to control a special game state in which it is easy to derive the open state of the starting port,
The number of prize balls awarded to the player is calculated by excluding the number of prize balls awarded and the number of consumed balls consumed by the player when the game is controlled in either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming balls is calculated and updated by dividing the information by the number of balls consumed by the player.

(22B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means sets the period from confirmation of winning in the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game as the expansion state, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine is excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that entered the starting hole from the number of game balls launched into the game area. Gaming machines listed in each section.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A firing device that can be operated by a player and fires a game ball toward a gaming area;
a prize ball giving unit that gives a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected in a prize opening provided in the gaming area;
a main control means that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning hole among the entered prize holes;
A gaming machine comprising: a peripheral control means that determines an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information updating means that can update information regarding the given game ball either to increase or decrease,
a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated either to increase or decrease by the information updating means; and a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated to increase or decrease by the information updating means; There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information regarding the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed compared to the first state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has shifted to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The main control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
Calculating the base by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect by setting the timing when the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means:
Writes information regarding game balls into a storage area at a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls;
Comparing the information regarding the gaming balls written in the storage area with the information regarding the gaming balls stored in the storage area before the writing to determine an increase or decrease in the information regarding the gaming balls;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase/decrease.

According to the inventions 23A to 23C, even if the variable display game remains interrupted for a long time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(24A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by a player at a predetermined timing;
and a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player,
The control means includes:
If the predetermined timing and the detection of consumed balls by the consumed pitch number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are determined within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
counting the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state and the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state within the same repetition;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Machine.

According to the inventions 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
an out port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out port provided at the bottom of the gaming area;
Winning ball detection means for detecting winning balls entering a predetermined winning opening;
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls that have passed through the out port from the output of the out port detection means;
counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means;
Counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player by the sum of the counted number of game balls that passed through the output port and the number of prize balls entered,
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25B) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, and counting the number of game balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25C) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls ejected from the game machine,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means to count the number of consumed balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 25A to 25C, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(26A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
A prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning hole that is considered to be a winning hole;
a consumption ball counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information regarding the gaming value using the counted number of prize balls and number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
counting the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state, excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning slot in which winning is possible;
counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
As described in each of the preceding items, the control means calculates the information regarding the gaming value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(26C) The control means controls the control means for a predetermined period after detecting passage of a game ball through a gate provided on the right side of the game area or detection of winning into a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from counting.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period based on either the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time when a predetermined number of game balls are consumed, or the time when a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(26E) The control means excludes the number of balls passing through the gate provided on the right side of the gaming area and the number of winning balls entering the winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area, and controls the number of winning balls and The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed is counted.

According to the inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
first data setting means for setting first data according to the result of the game;
a second data setting means for setting second data that does not depend on the result of the game;
third data setting means for setting third data according to the result of the game;
a first conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from first data set by the first data setting means and second data set by the second data setting means;
a second converting means for obtaining second converted data from the first converted data obtained by the first converting means and third data set by the third data setting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that it multiplies the first data and the second data to obtain first conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain second conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27E) The first data is the gaming value given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls),
The third data is the gaming value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out pitches),
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information regarding the awarded gaming value as second conversion data,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display device displays information (for example, base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions 27A to 27E, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, base values necessary for evaluating gaming machines can be accurately displayed in real time. Furthermore, by using the second conversion means (division means), information regarding the gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means for executing periodic processing for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a conversion means for calculating information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
Passing an argument to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and obtaining a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument from the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of obtaining the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means:
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations,
It has a divisor register into which the divisor is input, a dividend register into which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation,
The control means includes:
writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register;
After a predetermined time has elapsed since writing the argument, read the quotient from the result register,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the process of writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) Prize game media number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined gaming state;
a consumed gaming media number counting means for counting gaming media consumed by the player in the predetermined gaming state;
The control means includes:
writing a value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game media number counting means by 100 into the dividend number register;
writing the number of consumed gaming media counted by the consumed gaming media number counting means into the divisor register;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that a base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions 28A to 28C, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed in one repetitive process (timer interrupt process), complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A prize opening where game balls can be won;
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a consumption ball counting means for counting consumption balls consumed by a player;
comprising a prize ball counting means for counting prize balls given to the player;
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which winning a game ball is easy and a closed state in which winning is difficult;
The control means includes:
updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means based on the counted number of consumed balls and number of prize balls;
If a winning to the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality, and when this determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. A game machine characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding the number of balls consumed from the number of balls consumed.

(29B) At least one of the entered winning holes is a starting winning hole that becomes an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls;
When a winning in the starting winning opening is detected while the starting winning opening is in a closed state, the control means determines that there is a winning abnormality, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the entry prize holes is a big prize hole that is opened in a special gaming state,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning into the big winning opening is detected while the big winning opening is in a closed state, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) having a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player;
Each of the foregoing features is characterized in that the consumed balls counting means counts the consumed balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed balls number detecting means. The gaming machines described in Section 1.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed, which is used to calculate information regarding the gaming value;
The consumed pitch counting means adds the number of consumed pitches detected by the consumed pitch number detecting means to the total number of consumed pitches, and subtracts the number of winning pitches related to the prize entry abnormality from the total number of consumed pitches to determine the number of pitches consumed. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed, which is used to calculate information regarding the gaming value;
The consumed pitch counting means counts the consumed pitches by adding a value obtained by subtracting the consumed pitch count related to the award entry abnormality from the consumed pitch count detected by the consumed pitch number detection means to the total consumed pitch number. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, which is characterized by:

(29G) The entry prize opening is switchable between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning in the input prize opening is detected in the closed state and no prize balls are paid out in connection with the winning, and controls the number of winning balls related to the winning. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) If a winning abnormality in the entered prize opening is detected multiple times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of Nos. 29A to 29H, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, by excluding the number of winning balls associated with winning abnormalities from the number of out balls, information regarding gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that awards gaming media as a prize to a player,
A gaming area with multiple winning openings,
an award awarding means for awarding a predetermined specific award from among a plurality of awards when a gaming medium is detected in each of the winning openings;
arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of gaming media flowing into the gaming area and the number of gaming media awarded as prizes awarded by the awarding means;
processing means for processing the results of the arithmetic processing performed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the results of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a specific award among the plurality of awards occurs in the game, the award awarding means awards the specific award, and the displaying means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so that it does not change. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 30, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, awards (for example, prize balls paid out when a prize is placed in a winning slot where a high-value prize is awarded (such as a general winning slot with a large number of prize balls or a grand prize opening)) The result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change even if the ball is awarded, making it easy to judge whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball rate). can.

(31A) A game comprising a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning or losing when specific conditions are met, and a peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. It is a machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
and a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to grasp the status history of the gaming machine.

(31B) Equipped with a general prize opening where game balls launched into the gaming area can win prizes even if there is no special gaming state;
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating a winning in the general winning opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winnings to the general winning opening to the outside when predetermined conditions are met.

(31C) external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, further comprising: information presentation means for presenting information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) comprising a first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes:
storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
The game described in each of the preceding items is characterized by having a limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when the first initialization means initializes the information. Machine.

(31E) first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
a second initializing means for initializing the storage contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means is capable of retaining stored contents even when the gaming machine is powered off,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first initializing means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time at which the signal was received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event that is counted according to the progress of the game, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. including;
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The peripheral control means includes:
counting the counting events based on a signal received from the main control means and storing the counting results in the temporary storage means;
Upon receiving a signal related to the state change event from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for managing the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event and the time at which the signal was received are stored in the information storage means, and the counted event stored in the temporary storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for the management of the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals regarding the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 31A to 31I, it is possible to know the history of changes in the number of balls. In particular, according to the inventions 31D and 31E, information regarding games can be stored appropriately.

(32) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
The control means outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, but during a period in which the selection signal is output, at least one of the first light emitting element group a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals in order to light up one light emitting element; and a signal outputted to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; A gaming machine characterized in that the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group is controlled within one periodic process by outputting at different timings.

According to the invention of No. 32, the circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value (for example, base value and accessory ratio) can be configured simply, and the information regarding the gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
a selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group; and at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group in response to the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to a selection signal outputted to one terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal; and a selection signal outputted to the third terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal. A gaming machine characterized in that the process of outputting the signals to be outputted to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is outputting signals at different timings within the periodic process by different processes within the same periodic process. .

According to the invention of No. 33, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value. Therefore, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that grants prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
and calculation result display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value calculated by the calculation means,
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
an output drive means that is controlled by the control device and outputs at least a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means;
In a board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction when viewed from the control device, and the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized by being placed apart from a timing means.

(34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device;
On a printed circuit board on which the control means is implemented, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction from the processor as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

According to the inventions 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress interference between signals related to game control and signals for displaying information related to games. Therefore, the influence on game control can be suppressed, and information regarding game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a display means that is controlled by the control means and displays information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
a memory that is accessed by the control device when executing the process and stores at least information regarding the gaming value;
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means includes:
first initializing means that determines whether the data stored in the memory is normal or not at a predetermined timing, and initializes a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined that the data is abnormal; ,
a second initializing means that determines whether or not the input means is operated when the power is turned on, and initializes a predetermined second area of the memory when it is determined that the input means is operated; have,
The first area initialized by the first initializing means and the second area initialized by the second initializing means are also initialized by the first initializing means. Including duplicate areas that are commonly initialized by the
At least the first area includes an area that does not overlap with the second area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) Each of the preceding items characterized in that the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time a periodic process is executed repeatedly at a predetermined time interval. The gaming machine described in .

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. .

(35F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the gaming machine is powered on.

According to the inventions 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores information regarding the game value to be awarded (base value and accessory ratio). Therefore, information regarding the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that grants prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
Display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value;
an electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under certain conditions, if multiple game media win a prize while the electric accessory is activated due to a single win, information regarding the gaming value of some of the winning game media may be displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that, although other gaming media are not used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value, any of the gaming media can serve as a trigger for a variable display game.

(36B) The control means:
Execute a variable display game when a predetermined starting condition is met,
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player (time saving, high probability state, jackpot, etc.) and a second gaming state that is less advantageous than the first gaming state (normal state) and control either
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate information regarding the game value, and the game media won in the first game state are The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, although game media won in a winning state are not used to calculate the information regarding the gaming value, any of the game media can serve as an opportunity for a variable display game.

(36C) The control means:
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
If a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media that win while a predetermined type of error is detected are not used to calculate the information regarding the game value. First, although a game medium that wins without a predetermined type of error being detected is used to calculate the information regarding the game value, any game medium can be used as a trigger for a variable display game. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 36A to 36C, since it is switched whether or not game media are used to calculate information regarding gaming value depending on the state of the gaming machine, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation section for changing the setting state related to the game. hand,
Difficulty in changing settings that makes it more difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame than when the main body frame is in an open state with respect to the outer frame. 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for converting.

(37B) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided, and when performing a setting change operation to change the setting state related to the game, the setting state after the change is changed. A gaming machine comprising a setting status display section for displaying,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a visibility-improving means that makes it difficult to view the display contents of the setting state display section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation section in which a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to a game is performed. A gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a determination difficulty making means for making it difficult to operate the setting determination operation section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame and has a game board provided thereon, and a setting change operation section for changing setting states related to games. hand,
The settings change operation section has a settings key insertion section into which a settings key is inserted,
When the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, a specific portion of the outer frame is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion. A gaming machine.

According to the inventions No. 37A to No. 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when a symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when the setting information is determined to be specific information based on an operation on the specific operation section.

(37F) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when a symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a probability determining unit that determines the probability that the winning result will be derived as one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on a specific operating unit,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when the probability determined based on the operation on the specific operation section is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
The variation time determining means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine different variation times depending on the setting information,
A gaming machine characterized in that a probability that different variable times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
A production control unit that performs a predetermined production,
The variable time determining means is capable of determining different variable times according to the setting information,
When a specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in response to specific setting information of the setting information, the production control section controls the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion performance that suggests a result and a setting suggestion performance that suggests the content of setting information determined by the setting information determining section are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of No. 37E to No. 37H, it is possible to make the player aware of the setting state in a new manner and improve his/her interest in the game.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls games; a separate control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit; and the game control board. A gaming machine comprising: a setting-related operation section for changing a setting state regarding a game played by the department;
The game control section has a setting change permission state generating means that allows an operation related to changing the setting state on the setting related operation section,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change permission state generating means allows an operation related to changing the setting state when information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information. .

According to the invention of No. 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to change the setting state illegally, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting change operation section that changes the setting state related to the control performed by the game control section, and the game area is controlled by the player's operation of a predetermined firing operation section. A gaming machine that grants gaming profits when a gaming ball launched toward a player enters a predetermined winning slot,
It is characterized by comprising a firing disabling means that disables firing of game balls by operating the firing operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 37J, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally changing the setting state.

(38A) A game machine comprising a game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting operation section for changing settings related to the control performed by the game control section,
A game machine characterized in that a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(38B) The case is characterized in that, in place of the setting operation section, a dummy unit that cannot perform operations for changing settings can be accommodated together with the game control section. Game machine.

(38C) The setting operation section is
a first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed;
a second operation unit for confirming the settings and terminating the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by having a setting display that displays the contents of settings.

(38D) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation section, the second operation section, and the setting display.

According to the inventions No. 38A to No. 38D, specifications can be shared between a gaming machine having a setting function and a gaming machine without a setting function, and efficient design and production can be achieved.

(39A) a game control unit including a processor that executes a program for controlling games, and a memory accessed by the processor;
a clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation section for changing settings related to control performed by the gaming control section,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed,
The game control section includes:
When the gaming machine is powered on, detecting the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation section;
The gaming machine starts the setting state when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is operated.

(39B) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is not operated, the game control section controls the game control section in a second region that is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to the inventions 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous settings change operations.

(40A) A game machine comprising a game control section that performs control regarding the game, and a setting operation section for changing settings regarding the control performed by the game control section,
The game control unit includes a game value display means for displaying information regarding the awarded game value,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the settings,
The game machine, wherein the game control section displays the game value display means and the setting display means in a manner that does not confuse the game value display means in the setting state.

(40B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control section and the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are comprised of one display.

(40D) the gaming value display means displays information regarding the awarded gaming value on the display without delay as the game progresses;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting on the display in place of information regarding the assigned gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are constituted by separate displays.

(40F) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, displaying any of letters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, the light is turned off or turned on completely,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion among a plurality of displays arranged on a substrate.

(41A) a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the starting port;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery;
performance execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
and a setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determining means on a predetermined display section when an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed,
The plurality of performances include a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that even if the different operation is performed when the performance determining means has determined to perform the setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance can be executed.

(41B) A lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings based on the game medium passing through the starting port;
setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit;
performance determining means for determining one of a plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery;
performance execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means;
an error detection means for detecting an error;
Error notification means for notifying an error detected by the error detection means,
The plurality of performances include a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means,
The gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion performance during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error that satisfies a predetermined condition.

(41C) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
If the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the expectation-suggesting performance will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new condition is established. A gaming machine characterized by restricting execution of the setting suggestion performance in special symbol variations corresponding to starting conditions.

(41D) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a starting condition;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing a special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
If the starting condition is newly established during the period of variation of the special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the expectation-suggesting performance will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new condition is established. A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance can be executed in special symbol variations corresponding to starting conditions.

(41E) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a starting condition;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the setting suggestion performance in special symbol variations corresponding to the newly established starting condition is restricted.

(41F) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. . A gaming machine, wherein execution of the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance is restricted in special symbol variations corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41G) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of starting conditions;
Judgment means for determining whether it is a win based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means;
special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number if the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Setting information determining means for determining one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit;
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The performance includes an expectation suggestion performance regarding the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
When the starting condition is newly established during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which it is decided that the expected suggestion production and the setting suggestion production will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. . A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

According to the inventions of Nos. 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve gaming enjoyment.

(42A) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means,
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
using the first storage means when executing the first program;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) A gaming machine characterized in that accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means is switched by one command input to the calculation means.

(42C) The instruction to make the first storage means accessible and the instruction to make the second storage means accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Game machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (within a game control area) that performs a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second program is a program (outside the gaming control area) that calculates information regarding gaming value given in a game, and is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means,
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
when executing the first program, using the first storage means;
At the start of the second program, in the second program, the first storage means is switched to be inaccessible and the second storage means to be accessible;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42F) A gaming machine characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the calculation means switches the second program so that the second storage means cannot be accessed and the first storage means can be accessed.

(42G) A gaming machine comprising a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
a program storage means for storing a first program and a second program;
a calculation means for performing necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program;
a first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage means,
Accessibility of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either one can be accessed,
The calculation means is
when executing the first program, using the first storage means;
When starting the second program, switching the first program to make the first storage means inaccessible and to make the second storage means accessible;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) After the second program ends, the arithmetic means switches to make the second storage means inaccessible and to make the first storage means accessible in the first program returned from the second program. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the inventions No. 42A to No. 42H, data can be saved at high speed with a simple command when processing is transferred between programs, and precautions when creating a program can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine; and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
displaying a dynamic picture on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section;
A game machine characterized in that a static picture is displayed on the display panel by the second reflecting section reflecting light from the light emitting device.

(43B) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means changes the light emission color of the plurality of light emitting elements over time so that light of different colors travels through different routes within the display panel, and controls the plurality of first reflections. The game machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts is changed over time by emitting light of different colors from the parts.

(43C) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls a path of light within the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflection parts. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts is changed over time by changing the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting parts.

(43D) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to the sides of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light within the display panel, and controls the number of light emitting elements of the plurality of first reflecting parts. The game machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflection parts is changed over time by emitting light from at least a part of the part.

According to the inventions 43A to 43D, it is possible to display moving pictures and stationary pictures on a single light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

(44A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine; and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflecting section includes a plurality of first right eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel in a direction that reaches the player's right eye; a plurality of first left eye reflecting parts that reflect in a direction reaching
The plurality of first right-eye reflection parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
the plurality of first left-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a different position from the right-eye pattern;
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right eye reflection section and the first left eye reflection section, the right eye pattern and the left eye pattern can be changed. is displayed on the display panel to make the player recognize a three-dimensional pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes,
A gaming machine characterized in that a planar pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device on the second reflecting section.

(44B) The second reflecting section directs light traveling through a plurality of paths within the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine in a direction in which it reaches the player's right eye and in a direction in which it reaches the left eye of the player. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the flat pattern.

(44C) The second reflecting section includes a plurality of second right eye reflecting sections that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye; including a plurality of second left eye reflection parts that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye;
the plurality of second right-eye reflective sections are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern;
The plurality of second left-eye reflecting parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(45A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The peripheral control means includes:
A dynamic picture and a static picture can be displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized in that by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture, an effect suggesting the result of the winning/losing lottery is performed.

(45B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling along a specific path within the display panel and emits it to the front side of the gaming machine; a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit it to the front side of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling through the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, thereby displaying a changing pattern on the display panel. displayed on the
Displaying a stationary picture on the display panel by the second reflecting section reflecting light from the light emitting device;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern, an effect suggesting the result of the winning/losing lottery is performed.

According to the inventions No. 45A to No. 45B, it is possible to display moving pictures and stationary pictures on a single light guide plate, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

(46A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect image under the control of the peripheral control means;
A display panel that displays a performance pattern;
comprising a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel inside the display panel;
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting parts that reflect light traveling within the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
displaying a target pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light;
A gaming machine characterized in that an image moving toward the target symbol is displayed on the display device.

(46B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the picture displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or text.

(46C) The game described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

(46D) The game described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays the target pattern on the display panel after displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. Machine.

According to the inventions 46A to 46D, a single light guide plate can display a plurality of patterns or patterns in different formats, and it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

(47A) A game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
In the settings change state or the settings confirmation state, after the settings corresponding to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state are executed, the process corresponding to the settings change state or the settings confirmation state can be executed in the periodic process. A gaming machine characterized by:

(47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the processes related to changing the set value, the process related to confirming the set value, the process related to normal gaming, and the plurality of processes. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a process executed in the above-mentioned items.

(47C) The periodic process includes at least a first iterative process that executes a process related to the normal game, and a second iterative process that executes a process related to changing the settings,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means selectively executes the first repetitive process and the second repetitive process depending on the operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is turned off;
The game control means is
In the setting change mode, setting the fact that the setting change mode is in the setting state management area as the predetermined condition;
In the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine is characterized in that, as the predetermined condition, the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting state management area.

(48) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means,
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The periodic processing enables execution of normal game processing related to normal games and setting processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation,
A gaming machine characterized in that the normal game process is composed of a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common in the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means capable of storing information related to the game,
In a power-on process executed when the gaming machine is powered on, an output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means of the storage means;
In the power-on process, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is operated, the determination is made based on information stored and held in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. death,
The second setting operation means stores the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on process. A means for initializing the
In the power-on process, when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, when initializing the storage means, the specific A gaming machine characterized in that a storage means is not initialized.

(49B) Comprising a peripheral control means for controlling the presentation on the display device,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode in which the gaming machine is started based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is started.

(50A) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means is
comprising a storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to the game, and a second storage area different from the first storage area,
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The game control means is
initializing the first storage area and the second storage area if it is determined that the set value is not a normal value;
If it is determined that the first setting operation means among the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is being operated, the first storage area is not initialized. , a gaming machine characterized in that the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
In each of the preceding items, the game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than the area for storing various parameters used in normal games,
If the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power outage occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and controls the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the storage area of the gaming machine is initialized.

(51A) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means that can retain game-related information even when the power is turned off.
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and a periodic process that is executed at every predetermined cycle;
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, the setting value can be changed in accordance with the operation state of the setting operation means in the power-on process. execute a setting corresponding to a setting confirmation state in which the state or the setting value cannot be changed;
The storage means includes a setting state management area in which, at least in the power-on process, a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored in accordance with the operating state of the setting operation means. A game machine comprising:

(51B) comprising a setting operation means operated to start in a setting change mode for changing setting values related to control performed by the game control means;
The game control means is
When the gaming machine is operated to start up in the setting change mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area, and the setting change mode is stored in the memory. When a predetermined area is initialized and the setting operation means performs an operation to end the setting change mode, a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is played in a normal gaming state in which game balls can be fired. Start the machine,
If an operation is performed to start the gaming machine in the setting confirmation mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, and the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if the setting operation means performs an operation to end the setting confirmation mode.

(52) a game control means that draws a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values regarding control performed by the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means is
Executing a power-on process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, a first periodic process that is executed every predetermined first period, and a second periodic process that is executed every predetermined second period. possible,
In the power-on process, determining whether an operation accompanying a setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means,
If it is determined that an operation accompanying a setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means, a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed, depending on the operation state. Perform the settings corresponding to
If it is determined that an operation associated with a setting operation is not performed in the setting operation means, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. This makes it possible to execute normal game start processing without
The first periodic process is executed after the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is executed in the power-on process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second periodic process is executed after normal game start processing is made executable in the power-on process.

(53A) a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine capable of being equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of the gaming machine,
The test signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
and a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A game machine characterized in that the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches input power and generates an output signal,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages as input and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, but a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface-mounted component. .

(53E) a game control means that executes regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
a first detection means for detecting an event taken in by the game control means in the periodic processing among events related to the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting an event captured by the game control means in a process other than the periodic process among events related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
Conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port into which serial signals are input;
and a general-purpose input port into which the signal of the first detection means or the second detection means is input individually,
The signal of the first detection means is inputted either to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the signal from the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means that detects a game ball launched toward a game area,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) an accessory that is driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input/output port,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) A game control means that executes regular processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting an event related to the progress of the game,
The game control means is
Conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal;
a serial input port into which serial signals are input;
and a general-purpose input port into which signals from the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once within one periodic process,
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal multiple times within one periodic process,
The signal of the first detection means is inputted either to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control means detects the signal of the second detection means a plurality of times within one periodic process to determine the signal level.

(53I) The first detection means is a ball detection means that detects a game ball launched toward a game area,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means;
A gaming machine comprising a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game control means is mounted on a first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Ori,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal obtained by converting the signal that repeats at the predetermined period from the first printed circuit board side. Game machine.

(53K) Can be equipped with a test signal generation circuit for outputting test signals used for testing gaming machines,
The test signal generation circuit includes:
a second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
and a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board. Game machine.

(53L) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in one board box.

(53M) the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different board boxes;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches input power and generates an output signal,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages as input and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"A flat plate-shaped decorative member with a translucent property provided with decorations,
a transparent flat radiation plate provided at the rear of the decorative member and capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface forward within the thickness of the plate;
A production member comprising a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate is mounted on the front surface, and a decorative board provided at the rear of the radiation plate. ”.

Here, the "decorative member" may be composed of a single member or a member composed of multiple members (for example, a relief part formed by a three-dimensional relief). and a decorative sheet having a pattern).

In addition, examples of the "decoration" of decorative members include "those with three-dimensional reliefs", "those with two-dimensional patterns", and "those with three-dimensional reliefs and two-dimensional patterns", etc. . In addition, "decoration" includes "decorations with logos and letters that match the concept of the game machine," "decorations with characters that match the concept of the game machine," and "items that match the concept of the game machine." Examples include "decoration with a scene that matches the concept of the game machine", and "decoration with a scene that matches the concept of the gaming machine".

Furthermore, the term "radiation plate" includes "a plate that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front and has a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative board are accommodated from the rear", and "a plate within the thickness of the plate". "Those that have multiple reflective parts on almost the entire surface that reflect light in the direction along the board surface forward," and "those that have multiple reflective parts that reflect forward light in the direction along the board surface within the thickness of the board." Some examples include "something that some people have."

Examples of the "LED" mounted on the decorative board include "side-view type LED" and "top-view type LED mounted sideways." Further, examples of the "LED" include "full color LED", "single color LED", "two color LED", and the like.

In addition, configurations that irradiate light in the direction along the board surface within the thickness of the radiation plate include ``a configuration that irradiates light from the inner surface of a hole penetrating the radiation plate into the thickness of the radiation plate''; A structure in which light is irradiated into the plate thickness from the inner surface of a slit that penetrates through the radiator plate and is open to the side surface of the radiator plate. Examples include a configuration in which light is irradiated into the thickness of the plate, and a configuration in which light is irradiated into the thickness of the plate from the side surface of the radiation plate.

Furthermore, the "presentation member" may be movable or may be fixed without being movable.

According to the configuration of means 1, a gaming machine includes a flat plate-shaped decorative member having a light-transmitting property provided with decorations, and a flat decorative member provided at the rear of the decorative member, and a direction along the board surface within the board thickness. A transparent flat radiation plate that can emit light forward, and multiple LEDs that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front. The display member includes a decorative board provided at the rear.

As a result, when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative member and the decorative board behind the radiating plate emit light, the light from the LEDs is irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate. The light is emitted forward by the radiation plate, and the light-transmitting decorative member provided with the decoration is decorated with light. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiating plate is reflected forward within the thickness of the radiating plate so that the decorative member emits light. Compared to the conventional method in which light is emitted toward the front of the radiation plate, the distance that the LED light is emitted forward from the front of the radiation plate can be increased, and the light from the LED can be widely diffused and the radiation plate It can be emitted from the front. Therefore, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and the appearance of emitting light in dots can be suppressed, so that the decorative member can be evenly decorated with light. It can be presented neatly, entertain the players, and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, since the decorative board is provided behind the flat decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front and back direction can be made thinner, making it easier to secure a space for arranging the decorative member. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure space for arranging other performance members, and by providing a variety of performance members, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can further entertain players.

In addition, the decorative member is provided at the rear of the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body having an embossed part that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief, and It is preferable that the decorative sheet be composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration. As a result, the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the embossed part and the decorative sheet having the pattern, so that the embossed part can give the decoration a three-dimensional effect. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided at the rear due to the lens effect caused by the relief of the relief portion. Therefore, the embossed part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth. It is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest without reducing the effect, and the production member can be made thinner through the decorative member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. can.

In addition, when the decorative member is composed of a decorative body and a decorative sheet as described above, since the decorative sheet with a pattern is provided behind the decorative body with an embossed part, the transparent decorative body Even if the decorative sheet is not colored, the decorative body can be made to look colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet, and the cost of the decorative body can be reduced. In addition, in this case, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet, so the gaming machine can be easily adapted to model changes, design changes, etc. I can do it.

Further, the decorative member may include a hologram portion that forms part of the decoration and displays a pattern using interference fringes of light. As a result, light from the LED on the decorative board, light from other light emitting means provided in this gaming machine, light in the gaming hall where this gaming machine is installed, etc., hits the hologram part, causing light to be emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown using interference fringes, the hologram can improve the appearance of the decoration and strongly attract the attention of players. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and even if the performance member is made thin, the player does not feel that it is thin.

Furthermore, when the decorative member has a hologram part and the decorative member is composed of a decorative body and a decorative sheet, the hologram part can constitute at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet. Also good. As a result, a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet is made up of the hologram part, so the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body with the embossed part, so the lens effect of the embossed part allows the hologram etc. A sense of depth can be given to the picture pattern, and decorations that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player. Furthermore, in this case, since the decorative sheet has a hologram section, printing technology can be used to form the hologram section, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, when the decorative member is composed of a decorative body and a decorative sheet, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body. is desirable. As a result, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the external shape of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the external shape of the decorative body, even the outer periphery of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no frame-like thing on the outer periphery of the decoration, a feeling of openness can be given to the decoration of the presentation member, and the decoration can be made to look large. Therefore, the decoration of the performance member (such as the pattern on the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the performance member can be fully exhibited, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decoration of the performance member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the rear surface of the transparent decorative object is made flat, the decorative sheet comes into contact with the rear surface of the decorative object, so light is diffusely reflected between the decorative object and the decorative sheet. The pattern on the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern on the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the rear surface of the decorative body is made flat, it is possible to reduce the front and rear dimensions of the decorative member, which is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the thickness of the member can be reduced and the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

Furthermore, as described above, when the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the presentation member (decorative body) using the pattern of the decorative sheet. By making the decoration of the member adjacent to the production member continuous with the decoration of the production member, it is possible to present a large decoration with a sense of unity to the player, and create a visual impact on the player. It is possible to attract the attention of the players by giving them a large decoration, and it is also possible to entertain the players with the large decorations, thereby preventing the players from losing interest in the game.

Further, it is desirable that the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions that are formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear. As a result, by housing the LEDs from the rear in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the radiation plate as close as possible to the front surface of the decorative board, and the thickness of the production member in the front and rear direction can be reduced. A gaming machine that can be made thin and has the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, if the radiation plate has an LED accommodating part that is recessed toward the front and can accommodate the LED, it becomes possible to irradiate light from the LED into the thickness of the plate from the inner surface of the LED accommodating part. Compared to the case where light is irradiated from the outer circumferential surface of the radiation plate, it is possible to provide an LED housing part in the part of the radiation plate where it is difficult for the light from the outer circumferential surface to reach (for example, the center part). By irradiating light from the inner surface, the area can be illuminated brightly, and the decorative member can be evenly decorated with light.

Further, it is desirable that the LED of the decorative board be of a side-view type that can emit light in a direction along the surface of the radiation plate. With this, by mounting the LED on the decorative board and making it emit light, it is possible to irradiate light from the LED in the direction along the board surface of the decorative board (radiation plate), so the light from the LED can be directly emitted. It is possible to easily irradiate the area within the thickness of the plate, and the above-mentioned effects can be easily achieved.

Furthermore, it is desirable that substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the plate toward the front. As a result, when light is irradiated from the LED of the decorative board in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting parts provided on almost the entire rear surface. Since light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, if a plurality of reflective parts are provided on almost the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member, so even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, the light will not be reflected. There is no need to change the parts, and it is possible to easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, etc.

Furthermore, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors provided on the decorative board on the rear surface of the decorative board. As a result, compared to the case where electronic components such as ICs and resistors other than LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative board, the radiation plate is The rear surface of the display member can be brought closer to the front surface of the decorative board, and the thickness of the presentation member can be made thinner.

In addition, as mentioned above, when electronic components such as ICs and resistors are mounted on the back side of the decorative board, when a side-view type LED is used, the light is emitted in the direction along the front side of the decorative board. The light from the LED can be prevented from being blocked by electronic components, and the light from the LED can be sufficiently distributed. Therefore, since there is no shadow caused by electronic components, the entire decorative member can be uniformly decorated with light emitting light, and players can be entertained with a good-looking light emitting effect. Even with a small number of LEDs, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light emitting light, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
“The decorative member is
a transparent, flat plate-shaped decorative body comprising at least a part of the decoration and having an embossed part formed by three-dimensional relief;
and a sheet-shaped decorative sheet provided at the rear of the decorative body and having a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration.

Here, the "decoration body" may be something that the embossed part has on both the front and back faces, or something that the embossed part has only on the front face, or something that the embossed part has only on the front face, The portion may be provided only on the rear surface.

Additionally, "decorative sheets" include "those that have a hologram part where a pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light" and "those that have a prism part where countless minute prisms are formed." , ``one that has a lens part in which countless minute lenses are formed'', ``one that has an opaque part that makes the rear part invisible'', etc.

Further, regarding the relationship between the embossed portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the embossed portion and the pattern may be related to each other, or the embossed portion and the pattern may be completely unrelated.

According to the configuration of means 2, the decorative member is a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body having a relief part that constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by a three-dimensional relief, and a decorative member at the rear of the decorative body. and a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern forming the rest of the decoration.

As a result, the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the embossed part and the decorative sheet having the pattern, so that the embossed part can give the decoration a three-dimensional effect. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided at the rear due to the lens effect caused by the relief of the relief portion. Therefore, the embossed part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth. It is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest without reducing the effect, and the production member can be made thinner through the decorative member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. can.

In addition, since a decorative sheet with a pattern is provided behind the decorative body with a relief, the decorative body can be colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet, even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decoration. Further, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed, so that the gaming machine can be easily adapted to model changes, design changes, etc.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
“The decorative member is
It is characterized in that it has a hologram part which constitutes a part of the decoration and in which a pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light.

Here, examples of the "hologram section" include a "transmission hologram", a "rainbow hologram", a "Lippmann hologram", and the like. Further, the hologram portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member, or may be provided on the rear surface of the decorative member.

According to the configuration of means 3, the decorative member has a hologram part that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light.

As a result, light from the LED on the decorative board, light from other light emitting means provided in this gaming machine, light in the gaming hall where this gaming machine is installed, etc., hits the hologram part, causing light to be emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown using interference fringes, the hologram can improve the appearance of the decoration and strongly attract the attention of players. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and even if the performance member is made thin, the player does not feel that it is thin.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 3,
"The hologram section is
The decorative sheet is characterized in that it constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet.

According to the configuration of means 4, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet.

As a result, a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet is made up of the hologram part, so the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body with the embossed part, so the lens effect of the embossed part allows the hologram etc. A sense of depth can be given to the picture pattern, and decorations that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, since the decorative sheet has the hologram section, printing technology can be used to form the hologram section, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of means 2 to 4,
“The decorative body has a flat rear surface, and
The decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

By the way, in the conventional technology such as Patent Document 1, the decorative body provided at the frontmost side of the presentation member has a flange-shaped portion that protrudes rearward over substantially the entire outer periphery. Therefore, if a sheet-shaped decorative sheet is provided behind the decorative body, the outer circumference of the decorative sheet must be smaller than the inner circumference of the flange-like part of the decorative body, and the decorative sheet The presence of a flange on the outer periphery of the decorative sheet pattern that can be seen through it makes it appear as if it is fitted into a small frame, making the decoration of the presentation member appear small and preventing the full decorative effect from being achieved. There is a risk that it will disappear.

According to the configuration of means 5, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body.

As a result, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the external shape of the decorative sheet is made the same size as the external shape of the decorative body, even the outer periphery of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no frame-like thing on the outer periphery of the decoration, a feeling of openness can be given to the decoration of the presentation member, and the decoration can be made to look large. Therefore, the decoration of the performance member (such as the pattern on the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the performance member can be fully exhibited, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decoration of the performance member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body, so light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. Therefore, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited.

In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the front and rear dimensions of the decorative member, which is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be made thinner and that can realize the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the presentation member (decoration body) using the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration of the member adjacent to the presentation member may be a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the presentation member. By doing so, it is possible to show a large decoration with a sense of unity to the player, giving a visual impact to the player and attracting their attention, and also making it possible to enjoy the large decoration, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 1 to 5,
“The radiation plate is
It is characterized by having a plurality of LED accommodating portions which are formed to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear.

Here, the "LED accommodating section" includes "a hole-shaped thing that penetrates the radiation plate in the front-rear direction," "a bottomed concave thing that is depressed from the rear surface of the radiation plate toward the front," and "a hole-like thing that penetrates the radiation plate in the front-rear direction." A slit-like object that penetrates the plate in the front-rear direction and is open to the side.

According to the structure of the means 6, the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions which are formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and the LEDs of the decorative board are accommodated from the rear.

As a result, the radiating plate has an LED accommodating part that can accommodate the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decorative board. It is possible to bring the front surface of the decorative board as close as possible, the thickness of the performance member in the front and back direction can be reduced, and a game machine that exhibits the above-mentioned functions and effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the radiation plate has an LED accommodating portion recessed toward the front that can accommodate the LED, it is possible to irradiate light from the LED into the thickness of the plate from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion. . As a result, compared to the case where light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in a part of the radiation plate where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, the center part), the LED housing section can be provided in that part. By irradiating light from the inner surface of the decorative member, the area can be illuminated brightly, and the decorative member can be evenly decorated with light.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
“The said LED is
It is characterized by being of a side-view type that can irradiate light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

According to the configuration of means 7, the LED of the decorative board is of a side view type that can emit light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

With this, by mounting the LED on the decorative board and making it emit light, it is possible to irradiate light from the LED in the direction along the board surface of the decorative board (radiation plate), so the light from the LED can be directly emitted. It is possible to easily irradiate the area within the thickness of the plate, and the above-mentioned effects can be easily achieved.

Note that in the decorative board, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors on the rear surface of the decorative board. This prevents the light from the side-view type LED, which radiates light in the direction along the front surface of the decorative board, from being blocked by the electronic components, and allows the light from the LED to be sufficiently distributed. You can do it. Therefore, since there is no shadow caused by electronic components, the entire decorative member can be uniformly decorated with light emitting light, and players can be entertained with a good-looking light emitting effect. Even with a small number of LEDs, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light emitting light, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 7,
“The radiation plate is
It is characterized by having a plurality of reflecting portions on substantially the entire rear surface that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward.

Here, the "reflecting part" includes "quadrangular pyramid-shaped", "triangular pyramid-shaped", "conical", "pent roof (gable)-shaped", "hemispherical", etc. Moreover, the "reflection part" may be provided in a fixed pattern regardless of the position of the LED on the decorative board, or may be provided on a concentric arc centered on the corresponding LED.

According to the configuration of means 8, substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate is provided with a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the plate toward the front.

As a result, when light is irradiated from the LED of the decorative board in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting parts provided on almost the entire rear surface. Since light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, a plurality of reflective parts are provided on almost the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, and light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member, so even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed. There is no need to change the reflective part, and it is possible to easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, etc.

Means 9: In a gaming machine,
``A transparent plate-shaped decorative body that forms part of the decoration and has a relief part formed by three-dimensional relief and whose rear surface is flat, and a sheet-like decorative sheet having a pattern forming the remainder of the decoration and a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light, and formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decoration; A flat plate-shaped decorative member having translucency, which is composed of;
A plurality of LED accommodating portions are provided at the rear of the decorative member and are formed to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and substantially the entire rear surface reflects light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front. a transparent flat radiation plate having a plurality of reflecting parts and capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface forward within the thickness of the plate by the plurality of reflecting parts;
A plurality of side-view type LEDs are housed in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate from the rear and are capable of emitting light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, and are mounted on the front surface of the radiation plate. The present invention is characterized in that it is equipped with a presentation member provided with a decorative board provided at the rear of the board.

According to the configuration of means 9, a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body having a flat rear surface and having an embossed part forming a part of the decoration and formed by three-dimensional relief is provided on the gaming machine. , and a hologram part that is provided at the rear of the decorative body and forms the rest of the decoration, and a hologram part in which a part of the pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light, and is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body. A flat decorative member having translucency and made of a sheet-like decorative sheet; a plurality of LED accommodating portions provided at the rear of the decorative member and formed to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front; and a plurality of reflecting parts that reflect light in the direction along the board surface within the board thickness forward on almost the entire rear surface, and the plurality of reflecting parts reflect light in the direction along the board surface within the board thickness. A transparent flat radiation plate that can emit light forward, and multiple side views that are housed from the rear in the LED housing part of the radiation plate and can emit light in the direction along the board surface within the thickness of the radiation plate. This type of LED is mounted on the front surface, and includes a decorative board provided at the rear of the radiation plate.

As a result, in the production member, a transparent radiation plate and a decoration substrate are provided behind the decoration member composed of the decoration body and the decoration sheet, and a plurality of LEDs formed on the rear surface of the radiation plate are provided. A side-view type LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board is inserted into each of the housing parts so as to be housed therein. When the plurality of LEDs mounted on this decorative board are made to emit light, the light from the LEDs is irradiated from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiating plate, and The light is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions formed on substantially the entire surface, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the radiation plate. Then, the light emitted forward from the radiation plate is irradiated forward through the decorative sheet and the decorative body that constitute the decorative member, so that the decorative member with the translucent property provided with the decoration is illuminated. It will be decorated with light. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiating plate is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting parts within the thickness of the radiating plate, so that the decorative member is decorated with light. , compared to the case where the LED is directed forward to emit light, the distance that the LED light is emitted from the front of the radiation plate to the front can be lengthened, and the light from the LED can be spread over a wider area. It can be diffused and radiated forward from the radiation plate. Therefore, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and the appearance of emitting light in dots can be suppressed, so that the decorative member can be evenly decorated with light. It can be presented neatly, entertain the players, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the decorative board is provided behind the flat decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front and back direction can be made thinner, making it easier to secure a space for arranging the decorative member. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure space for arranging other performance members, and by providing a variety of performance members, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can further entertain players.

Furthermore, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of a decorative body having an embossed part and a decorative sheet having a pattern, the embossed part can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration, and A sense of depth can be given to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided at the rear due to the lens effect caused by the relief of the relief portion. Therefore, the embossed part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth. It is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest without reducing the effect, and the production member can be made thinner through the decorative member, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. can.

In addition, since a decorative sheet with a pattern is provided behind the decorative body with a relief, the decorative body can be colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet, even if the transparent decorative body is not colored. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decoration. Further, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed, so that the gaming machine can be easily adapted to model changes, design changes, etc.

In addition, the decorative sheet of the decorative member has a hologram part in which a part of the decorative pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light, and the light from the LED on the decorative board, which is provided in the gaming machine, When light from other light emitting means, light from inside the game hall where this gaming machine is installed, etc. hits the hologram part, a predetermined hologram can be seen due to the interference fringes of light, so the hologram makes the decoration look better. In addition, the hologram can give a three-dimensional effect to a part of the decoration of the decorative member, and even if the presentation member is thin, it will not be difficult to attract the attention of the player. It can be made so that it does not feel thin.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet is made up of a hologram section, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the embossed section, so the hologram and other patterns can be seen through the lens effect of the embossed section. A sense of depth can be given to the game, and decorations that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player. Furthermore, since the decorative sheet has the hologram section, printing technology can be used to form the hologram section, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in the decorative member, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the external shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the external shape of the decorative body, it is possible to decorate the outer periphery of the transparent decorative body with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no frame-like thing on the outer periphery of the decoration, a sense of openness can be given to the decoration of the presentation member, and the decoration can be made to look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the performance member (such as the pattern on the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the performance member can be fully exhibited, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decoration of the performance member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body, so light is not diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. Therefore, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the front and rear dimensions of the decorative member, which is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be made thinner and that can realize the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body, and the pattern on the decorative sheet allows the decoration to extend to the outer periphery of the effect member (decorative body). By making the decoration mode of the component that is continuous with the decoration of the production component concerned, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, giving the player a visual impact and attracting attention. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy large decorations, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, since the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating parts in which the LEDs of the decorative board are housed from the rear, by accommodating the LEDs from the rear in the LED accommodating parts of the radiating plate, the LEDs can be accommodated from the rear side of the radiation plate. It is possible to bring the front surface of the decorative board as close as possible, the thickness of the performance member in the front and back direction can be reduced, and a game machine that exhibits the above-mentioned functions and effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, the LEDs on the decorative board are housed in the LED housing part of the radiation plate, and the light from the LEDs is irradiated from the inner surface of the LED housing part into the board thickness, so the light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate. Even in a part of the radiation plate where it is difficult for light from the outer peripheral surface to reach (for example, the center part), an LED housing part is provided in that part so that light is irradiated from the inner surface. Therefore, the area can be made to emit bright light, and the decorative member can be evenly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the LEDs on the decorative board are side-view type, simply by housing the LEDs in the LED accommodating part of the radiating plate and emitting light, the LEDs can be emitted from the inner surface of the LED accommodating part along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiating plate. Therefore, it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that can irradiate light in a direction that has the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the rear surface of the radiation plate has a plurality of reflective parts on almost the entire surface, and since it is possible to radiate light to almost the entire decorative member, even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, the light will not be reflected. There is no need to change the parts, and it is possible to easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, etc.

Means 10: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
a game area where game media is driven in by a player's operation;
a plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
The pachinko machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, the "acceptance opening" includes "a general winning opening that is always open in the gaming area" and "an advantageous gaming state that is always open in the gaming area and gives the player an advantage by accepting gaming media." ``Starting prize opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate ``Variable prize openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory prize openings, etc.)'', ``Normal lottery drawn when gaming media passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the gaming area. Depending on the result, the game media can be placed in a specific area (e.g. gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Depending on the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the variable start, game media can be accepted, and a special lottery is held to determine whether accepting the game media will generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Winning slot (variable starting slot)", "V winning slot that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game media received in the accessory winning slot is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of advantageous gaming states that give the player an advantage include a grand prize opening or a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media.

In addition, a "pachinko machine" includes "a lottery means for conducting a special lottery to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting gaming media into the starting slot, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. a special lottery result display means for variably displaying the special symbols according to the change and then displaying the special symbols, and displaying a special lottery result drawn according to the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols; and an advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes the big winning opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called DigiPachi machine), A distributing means for distributing game media accepted into the slot, and when the game media distributed by the distributing means is received in the V prize opening, the accessory prize opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give the player an advantage. An advantageous gaming state generating means that generates an advantageous gaming state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "Has a grand prize opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by drawing by accepting gaming media into the starting opening. The grand prize opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery results, and when the game media accepted in the prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the prize winning opening or the prize winning opening is set in a predetermined manner. A device equipped with an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes in a pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (a so-called multifunction machine).

According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine has a gaming area into which gaming media are driven in by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving slots that are arranged in the gaming area and can receive gaming media, and a gaming machine into the receiving slot. The pachinko machine is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the acceptance of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

Note that it is preferable that the effect of decorating the decorative member with light emission using the light emitted from the LED mounted on the decorative board (light emission effect) is performed when the game medium driven into the game area is received in the receiving opening. As a result, when game media are accepted into the receiving slot, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and an effect in which the decorative members of the effect member are decorated with light is executed, which entertains the player. It is possible to make it easier to continue hitting the game media aiming at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, a special lottery is held to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting gaming media into the starting slot, and the special lottery result is presented to the player when suggesting the result to the player. As one of the effects, the decorative members of the effect members may be decorated with light. As a result, the decorative members are decorated with light emitting lights, which can give a strong impact and entertain the players due to the effects described above, so that the special lottery results drawn for the players are It is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur (for example, a "jackpot"), and it is possible to increase expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, as described above, by making the decorative members emit light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect with a higher effect. The present invention can be suitably used for a reach effect (reach effect), and can entertain players and suppress a decline in interest.

Means 11: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of rotation bodies each having a plurality of designs;
a starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies when operated by a player after inputting the game medium;
a plurality of stop operation units for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotation bodies whose rotation is stopped by a player operating a plurality of stop operation parts, respectively. characterized by something.

Here, the term "slot machine" refers to "a machine in which the number of active lines for determining the combination of stopped symbols changes depending on the number of gaming media (medals) used in one game" and "a machine with multiple spinning bodies. A system in which an internal lottery is performed at the start of the rotation, and benefits are given that are advantageous to the player depending on the combination of stopped symbols and the internal lottery results drawn."The effective line for determining the combination of stopped symbols is fixed. Examples include "It has been done." In addition, "Benefits" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", "Assist Time ( AT)", etc.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine includes a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a starting operation section that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies when operated by a player after inputting game media. , a plurality of stop operation parts for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a plurality of stop operation parts for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation parts, respectively. The slot machine is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

In addition, in the production (light emission production) in which the decorative members are decorated with light emission by the light emission of the LEDs mounted on the decoration board, the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the active line is the combination of the winning combination symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player when the game is satisfied (so-called reach time), the decorative member of the effect member may be decorated with light. As a result, the decorative member is decorated with light emitting light, which can strongly attract the attention of the player and make it possible to enjoy operating the stop operation unit so as to win a winning combination. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative member may be decorated with light emitting light, and by this, the decorative member is decorated with light emitting light, which can give a strong impact to the player. , it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "BB") will occur if the player stops at a specific combination of symbols, thereby increasing expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. In addition, as described above, by making the decorative members emit light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect with a higher effect. This can be used to entertain players and prevent them from losing interest.

Means 12: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "fusion machine" that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine is a symbol array consisting of a plurality of symbols that is activated by the operation of a starting operation part (for example, an operation lever) after inserting a plurality of game media. is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, a stop button), and game media are paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, or benefits advantageous to the player (for example, , advantageous gaming conditions). In addition, if the stop operation section is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. As a result, in a fusion machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

In addition, in the production (light emission production) in which the decorative members are decorated with light emission by the light emission of the LEDs mounted on the decoration board, the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the active line is the combination of the winning combination symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player when the game is filled (so-called reach time), the decorative members of the effect member may be decorated with light, or the lottery results of the internal lottery may be displayed as a winning combination. At this time, the decorative member may be decorated with light emitting light, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 290. FIG. 279 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 280 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 281 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 282 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 283 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 284 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 285 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 286 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 287 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 288 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 289 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling it into the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. Figure 290 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 368) is driven.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. Covers a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral device located on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 290), an effect display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined benefit for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B. (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) General winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, gate part 2003, second starting hole 2004, first big winning hole 2005, and second big winning hole 2006 It is equipped with. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a first big winning hole 2005, and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general prize opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate part 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. , the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, or displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, Left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production The unit 3800 and the like can be used to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., thereby entertaining the players.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 291 to 296. FIG. 291 is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, FIG. 292 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 293 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 294 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 295 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis, and are attached to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b. The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends briefly to the contact portion 13d. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 296. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punched metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders, and communicates the interior space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain plate with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 299(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 299(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 296. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 300 to 308. FIG. 300 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 301 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 302 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 303 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 304 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 305 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 306 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 307 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 308 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100; the door frame left side unit 400, which is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a door window 101a penetrating the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear, and the speaker duct 103 attached near the right end of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 105 when viewed from the rear. A door frame relay board cover 107 covers the handle rear relay board 106, which covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a handle rear relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is launched into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing a game where you type.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. FIG. 309(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 309(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 310 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and viewed from the front, and Fig. 311 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, and closes the front side of the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The gaming area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a rectangular flat shape and whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 which is attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base 101 and to which a handle unit 180 is attached. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front left outside of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and rear directions and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and slanted so that the left end side projects slightly further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. There is an insertion recess 101c that is recessed from the rear to the front near the right end in front view, into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and an insertion recess 101c that passes through the cylinder lock 130 in the front and back directions. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated back and forth on the left side when viewed from the front, and the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attachment member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a from the rear end of the tube portion 102a, and a tube portion 102b. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a, extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a, and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 102b in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The cylindrical portion 102a has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided at the top of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided at the bottom of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c on the handle base 181. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 102, the base 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle attachment member 102 can be attached to the slanted handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is in an inclined state extending to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 310 and 311. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. 361 and FIG. 362) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the upper part of the rectangle extending up and down, when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying connections between the window interior decoration part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (the portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed into a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located, and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and imparting rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the back side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are engaged with the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 300, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 in a hinge-rotatable manner relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. I can do it.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 to be described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening, closing and locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 300, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313. FIG. 312(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 312(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 313(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and FIG. 313(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 312(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is moved downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 313(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 484) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 in which the operation transmitting part 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 contacts is formed is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extraction member 143, etc. 143a can prevent it from rebounding.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 313(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142 and recessed forward. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the attached string to cause an unauthorized game ball B to enter or exit the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the unauthorized game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315. FIG. 314(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 314(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 315 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A port 150b is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 369). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed against the body frame 4, and also allows the game area 5a to be visible from the player side (front). This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 375). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 375).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, and is spaced apart from side to side. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 316 and the like. FIG. 316(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 316(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is something.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 that is attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle that covers the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover pedestal 183 is attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 is attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and a handle decoration board 184 is mounted to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. and a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are placed in each of the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle attachment member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d that are spaced apart from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction and protrude outward, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extend in an arc shape as a center and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 182e and is locked. A locking protrusion 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To be more specific, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, which is the part that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward. The side surface in the direction of is concave (gouged) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 182b has a part that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182 and is separated from the most protruding part of the first protrusion 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in the clockwise direction. protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in a clockwise direction at the most protruding portion that bulges outward, and an opposite side surface in a counterclockwise direction curves inward. The first protrusion 182a is recessed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c has a portion that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182, which is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of approximately 70 degrees in the clockwise direction. It stands out at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is sloped more gently than the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees in the clockwise direction, and is further away from the first protrusion 182a. It stands out somewhat high. This fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape and includes three attachment bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward and is transparent. The handle cover 185 is provided with a three-dimensional lens member made of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located further back than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when a player touches the handle 182, etc., it detects the static electricity that acts on the player, and prevents the player from touching the handle 182, etc. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. In other words, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 182 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 Firing solenoid 542 is deactivated. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning to the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. When the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the greatest force (so-called "right-handed hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the same as the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is approximately the same as that of the first protrusion 182a, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's sense of fatigue and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. FIG. 317 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 318 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 319 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 320 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a dish unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right side of the attachment base 213, and a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213. It includes an upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit body 252 spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions; It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 which are attached below the plate left upper decoration unit 270 and the plate right upper decoration unit 275, respectively.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302; and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 to which the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 that emits light to decorate the production operation ring 330, a decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration board 352, and a display operation ring decoration board 353 that is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. a vibration speaker 354, a production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. It is equipped with.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than in the left and right center when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right side in front view, and has a guide passage portion 201a (FIG. 324 ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage portion 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 moves the game ball from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed into a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by a lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 321 to 324. FIG. 321 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front, and FIG. 322 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 323 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 324 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front side.

The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper plate body 212 at the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the mounting base 213 at the front surface of the plate unit base 211. A tray unit relay board 214 is provided.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper tray ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the pan unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 323 and 324. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e that penetrates through the upper plate body 212, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the tray unit base 211 has a mounting protrusion 211f that protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and on which the mounting base is placed, and a mounting projection 211f that projects forward on the right side of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, and A slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower part of the plate body in the front and back, and through which the operation transmission section 242b of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and a slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower right corner of the plate body in the front and back. A handle insertion hole 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion hole through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. The opening 211i is provided.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the tray ball, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 323 and 324. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 323 and 324. The mounting base 213 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 while being placed on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end, and a through hole 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is inserted through the insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate lower left decorative board 283, and a plate lower right decorative board 288. , and for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 317 to 324 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and the ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown) After inserting cash or a prepaid card into the machine (omitted), a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. It is used to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine after deducting the amount of game balls B lent out.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper plate ball removal button 222 on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 with translucent properties is arranged to the right of the pull button 222, a ball lending button 224 is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation base 223 is arranged to the right of the pull button 222. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball rental button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section when the ball rental machine is out of order.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before upper plate ball removal and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 323, 324, and the like. The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball post-removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball pre-extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball rental operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 that is behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 that is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and extends vertically, and a front plate that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A slider 232 is provided. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion opening 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and its lower end is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 that is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a rear base 241 that is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction. an upper plate ball extracting slider 242 that is attached to be slidable toward the upper plate ball extracting slider 242; a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward; and a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It is equipped with

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then to the rear, and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the accepted game ball B to the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view is provided.

The ball socket 241a extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuation receiving part 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and protruding backward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the actuation receiving part 242a. An operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving part 242a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving part 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface. Further, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and biases the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can be moved downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal post unit 240 are such that the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end. The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned at the upper end of the movement via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving part 242a. In addition, since the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball socket 241a. The game balls B can be sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball ejecting button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 is activated. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b can now move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143 to open the partition portion 143a. is retreated from between the entrance port 141a and the ball exit port 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b are discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. It will be done. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is removed via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiver 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entry port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray before ball extraction unit 230 and the upper tray after ball extraction unit 240 feed the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. Moreover, FIG. 327 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 328 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit which are attached below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. In addition, when the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

The left and right upper side bulges 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and have a plate upper left decorative unit 270, a plate lower left decorative unit 280, a plate upper right decorative unit 275, and a plate lower right decorative unit on the front of each. 285 is installed. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 also has a front notch 252e that is cut upward from the front lower end of a portion that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. A bottom cutout portion 252f is provided at a portion below the bottom face cutout portion 252f. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Furthermore, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decoration part 252b and into which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. A production operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front and back and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction. 300 is attached. The production operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The pan unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the pan base unit 210 when assembled to the pan unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower pan opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate bulb removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower tray 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball extractor unit 260 includes a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a vertically penetrating through hole in the front right corner in plan view, and a lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view. A slider 262 that is attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable back and forth, a lower plate ball release button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-back direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically positioned to match the lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed therethrough. The through hole of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending back and forth, and is attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

The left end of the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending up and down, and the right end side is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the hole, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. A slit extending left and right is formed in the lower plate ball removal cover 265, into which a projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower plate ball removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removing base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate part 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the normal state of the lower plate ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the forward moving end due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball eject button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower plate ball eject button 263. becomes. As this slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower plate ball removal cover 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center and the right end side. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is in an open state. The game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

Note that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressure on the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball extraction lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 are continuously rotated. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the slider 262. Ru. Then, when the pressure on the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 includes an upper left plate decoration body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and an upper left plate reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the upper left plate decoration body 271. It includes a plate upper left decorative board 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper left decoration body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the upper left decorative board 273 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left plate decoration board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

When the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper left plate decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper left plate decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper right plate decoration unit 275 includes an upper right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and an upper right plate reflector 277 that is attached to the rear side of the upper right plate decoration body 276. An upper right decorative board 278 is attached to the rear side of the upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decoration body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper right decoration body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper right decoration body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the upper right decorative board 278 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper right plate decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper right plate decoration body 276 can be decorated with light.

When the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and its left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper right plate decoration 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper right plate decoration board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the upper left side of the plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right side of the plate decoration unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his or her finger using the level difference between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and the game balls B in the upper tray 201 can be evenly distributed. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate bottom left decoration unit and plate bottom right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. It will be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and both left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and a lower left plate reflector 282 that is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281. A plate lower left decorative board 283 is attached to the rear side of the plate lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decoration body 281 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in plan view. is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge part 252a. The plate lower left decoration body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower left decorative body 281 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decorative body 281 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the lower left plate decorative board 283 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative board 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light.

When the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left edge of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Continuous with the left edge. The left end of the lower left plate decorative unit 280 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left plate decoration body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower left plate decoration board 283 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right plate decoration unit 285 includes a lower right plate decoration body 286 that is semi-cylindrical and extends from side to side and has translucency, and a lower right plate decoration unit 285 that is attached to the rear side of the lower right plate decoration body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a lower right plate decorative board 288 that is attached to the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate lower right decoration body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper right rear at the right end, and at the left end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear. The central axis extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower right decoration body 286 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and has a through hole formed in a portion of the lower right decorative board 288 that corresponds to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decorative board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated with light.

When the plate lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is located below the right edge of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and its left end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right edge of . The right end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the right end of the lower right plate decoration body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right plate decoration body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right plate decoration board 288 are made to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the device can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it look like a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 329 to 332 and the like. FIG. 329 is a plan view of the production operation unit in the dish unit viewed from the direction of advance and retreat of the production operation button. FIG. 330(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 330(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 331 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 332 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the performance when a player participation type performance is performed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a rotary operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. In the production operation section 301, a rotation operation section 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and a pressure operation section 303 is arranged within the ring. . The press operation section 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and includes a central press operation section 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation section 302, and a center press operation section 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation section 302; It is composed of an annular outer periphery pressing operation part 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 that has a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 that rotates the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330; and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the operation section 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation section base 320.

The production operation unit 300 also includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 which is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the production operation ring 330 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a production operation ring decoration board 352. The decorative board cover 353 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit is placed so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330. It includes a performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation section relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 331 and 332. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the performance operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is formed into a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The production operation section cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from the rear inside the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light toward the front are mounted. The center upper decorative board 314 of the dish, the lower center reflector 315 attached from the rear inside the lower center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the lower reflector 315 attached to the center lower reflector 315, which directs light toward the front. A decorative board 316 under the center of the dish is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape with the front side bulging downward from the rear center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side thereof is the production operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is installed in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drainage holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular shape in plan view that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. installed. The unit front cover 312 has a plate center upper decoration body 312a whose semicircular arc bulges forward extends in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a plate center upper decoration body 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration body 312a. The plate center lower decoration body 312b is provided with a bulging semicircular arc extending in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are made by cutting a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the cut surface facing the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature compared to the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the plate center upper decoration body 312a. It is formed into a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decorative body 312a projects further forward than the front end of the lower plate center decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled into the plate unit 200, both left and right ends of the plate center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate right upper decorative unit 275, and the plate center lower decorative body Both left and right ends of the plate 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Furthermore, when the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the same as the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into and attached to the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the plate center upper decorative board 314 from leaking to the rear (inward). The plate center upper decoration board 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the plate center lower decorative board 316 from leaking to the rear (inward). The plate center lower decorative board 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center lower decorative board 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular arc shape. When the LEDs on the upper center decorative board 314 and the LEDs on the lower center decorative board 316 are made to emit light, the entire area can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate right upper decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is connected to the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 331 and 332. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the section 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 includes a main body part 321 which has a substantially cubic box-like outer shape and is open at the top, and a main body part 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body part 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a flange portion 322 that is attached to the main body portion 321; a plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 that protrude downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward, and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 formed in a size that can accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. A vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 from below, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed as a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified and the vibrations can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the production operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 has a through hole formed at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall to discharge liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 . In the main body 321, a rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and an operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer periphery of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. A production operation ring decorative board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 of the production operation section cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operating ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing part 325, the upper part of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the flange part. 322 and is exposed to the outside.

When the operating unit base 320 is assembled to the performance operating unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Furthermore, when assembled into the production operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Performance operation ring]
The performance operation ring 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 333 and 334. FIG. 333(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring of the performance operation unit viewed from the top and front, and FIG. 333(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from the bottom and front. FIG. 334(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the top front, and FIG. 334(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is approximately twice as large as the longitudinal dimension of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter that is approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in a circular ring. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably placed on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 are in contact with the outer circumferential surface of the ring mounting base 332 and are rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. A ring removal prevention member 334 is provided.

In addition, the production operation ring 330 is attached to a ring outer upper cover 335 that is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitutes a part of the rotation operation section 302, and to the lower side of the outer ring upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 is attached to the upper surface of the rotary base 332 on the inner circumferential side of the ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 is a part of the rotary operation section 302. A ring inner cover 337 is provided. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape with translucency.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 and an inner diameter that is approximately the same size as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and a mounting portion 331a on the upper surface that is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside of the mounting portion 331a. A boss portion 331b protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and is used to rotatably attach the bush 333, and a boss portion 331b is provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outside of the mounting portion 331a on the top surface. It is provided with through holes 331c that penetrate vertically in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the performance operation ring decoration board 352.

The rotating base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotating base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed into a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and when assembled to the performance operation ring 330, faces downward from the inner circumference of the ring attachment base 331. This ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface part 335a and an outer upper surface part 335a in which an arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. a decorative portion 335b, and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner circumferential end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center and arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface part 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer and lower surface parts projecting upward and toward the center from the inside of the outer lower surface part 336a in the circumferential direction. An outer lower cover mounting portion 336b is provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a shaped cylinder surface portion 337b, and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the performance operation ring 330, the outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a region that is 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole has a donut shape. The performance operation ring 330 can be decorated with light by means of a performance operation ring decoration board 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotational drive unit 340 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337 and the like. FIG. 335(a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 335(b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 336 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right side, and FIG. 337 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover which rotatably attaches the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346.

The rotational drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotational position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotation drive base 341 is formed into a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-back direction, and is open to the left. The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a first gear 344a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear, and a second gear 344b in the form of a spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and a gear portion 345a that protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a and extends in the circumferential direction. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344, and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The circumferential length of the plurality of detection pieces 345b is the same as the interval at which they are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval that is different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It looks like this. Thereby, the rotational direction and rotational speed of the rotational operation section 302 in the production operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is connected to the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located within the performance operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The rotational drive unit 340 is driven by the operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily control the rotational operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. It can be rotated in the direction of Furthermore, the rotary drive unit 340 allows the rotary operation section 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 343 in the forward and reverse directions within a predetermined rotation angle range using the operation ring drive motor 342. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302.

In addition, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation was performed. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player's rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to provide the rotary operation section 302 with an operational feeling or a click feeling that corresponds to the content of the player participation type performance.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 331 and 332. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330, and transmits rotation between the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a on the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotational drive unit 340. It includes a drive side gear part 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear part 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear section 350a and the drive side gear section 350b have pitch circles formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then attaching the gear attachment member 351 to the operation unit base 320. It will be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the production operation unit 300, the ring side gear part 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the production operation ring 330, and the drive side gear part 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the production operation ring 330. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Performance operation ring decoration board]
The performance operation ring decoration board 352 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 331, 332, and the like. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the performance operation ring 330, and can decorate the performance operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) with light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The performance operation ring decorative board 352 is formed in the form of a circular ring divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative board 352a on the front side and a rear decorative board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative board 352a and the rear decorative board 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the performance operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the performance operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300. The upper side of the performance operation ring decorative board 352 is covered with a transparent decorative board cover 353. The decorative board cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and is a front board cover that covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a, and a rear board cover 353b that covers the rear decorative board 352b from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decoration board 352 allows the ring outside the rotation operation part 302 to be inserted through the through hole 331c of the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface. The cover 335, the outer and lower ring cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration in which an LED is provided in the rotary operation section 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 331 and 332. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voices and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operating unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present a more variety of performances to the player.

[3-5e-8. Performance operation button unit]
The performance operation button unit 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340 and the like. FIG. 338 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 339 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit disassembled and seen from the bottom front. FIG. 340(a) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and FIG. 340(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. The performance operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the performance operation ring 330, and has a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The press operation section 303 of the production operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central press operation section 303a and a cylindrical outer circumferential press operation section 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation section 303a. ing.

The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the center axis of the button unit base 361 as a border. A pair of guide shafts 362 extend upward in a cylindrical shape, and a disc-shaped disc-shaped member that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and has a circular outer circumference smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is attached to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, and has a circular outer circumference approximately the same size as the button unit base 361. A pair of lift springs 365 each having a pair of guide shafts 362 inserted therethrough and biasing the lift base 364 upward are provided.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the bottom surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lift drive motor 367 that is attached to protrude upwards, the spur gear-like lift drive gear 368 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the lift drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member is rotated by the driven gear 369 and has a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough, and is rotatably attached. 370, an elevator cam member 371 whose lower end is connected to the elevator cam drive gear member 370, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and which raises and lowers the elevator base 364 by rotating; and an elevator drive gear. 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed into a cylinder shape with a bottom that extends vertically and has an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 above the elevating base 364. A pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the lift base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward are substantially the same as the center button body 373. A center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with the upper end closed at the diameter and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363. The central button decoration board 376 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward. The production operation button unit 360 includes a center button main body 373 and a center button cover 375, which constitute a center press operation section 303a.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes an annular outer button decoration board 377 that is attached to the upper surface of the lift base 364 outside the center button body 373 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and An outer peripheral board cover 378 is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the center button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the center button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having three-dimensional decoration and having translucent properties is placed above the outer button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side, and is raised and lowered to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. A transparent peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. The performance operation button unit 360 includes an outer substrate cover 378, an outer decorative lens 379, and an outer button cover 380, and constitutes an outer pressing operation section 303b.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303, and a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303. It includes an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 to the lower surface. is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately 1/2 the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The lifting spring 365 has a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter that is approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a center hole 364b that is vertically penetrated through the center hole with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. It includes a standing wall portion 364c projecting upward in a cylindrical shape from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The vertical movement of the lift base 364 is restricted by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and a space is created between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373. is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through its center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 340). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed like this. By rotating, the elevating cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 using the cam portion 371a, thereby elevating the elevating base 364.

The center button body 373 has a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted thereinto, a central opening 373d penetrating through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364; It includes a press detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted through the button spring 374.

The center button body 373 is formed into a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The center opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends briefly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the lift base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the center button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws with washers inserted therein are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting upward movement of the center button main body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 detects when the bottom 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the vertical base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 and protrudes downward. This central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker urging force than the lifting spring 365.

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In this central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373.

The plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can decorate the center button cover 375 with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration board 377 can decorate the outer circumference decorative lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 includes an annular board part 378a that covers the upper side of the outer button decorative board 377 and is attached to the lift base 364, and extends upward in a cylindrical shape from the inner periphery of the board part 378a, and covers the center button body 373. It includes a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral board cover 378 is formed transparent.

The outer periphery decorative lens 379 has twisted portions arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction and extend so as to move upward in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer button cover 380 includes a cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular portion 380b extending toward the center from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. In the outer button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the production operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 340(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is biased upwardly by the pair of elevating springs 365. The locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position, having moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button body 373 is located at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 protrudes upward more than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It becomes.

Therefore, when assembled to the production operation unit 300, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 protrudes slightly upwards from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 is higher than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It also protrudes upward (see FIG. 341, etc.).

In this state (the state shown in FIG. 340(a)), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation section 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body 373 The press detection piece 373e is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press operation of the central press operation section 303a is detected. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed, the top surface of the center button cover 375 is at a height that substantially matches the top surface of the outer button cover 380 (see FIG. 343(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer button cover 380 (outer press operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is also not detected by the detection sensor 381. In other words, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected.

When the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view in this lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible in the front in FIG. As the cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 340(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) and the outer circumference button cover 380 (outer circumference press operation section 303b) at the lower position is maintained, and the center button cover 375 The entire pressing operation section 303 including the outer button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is protruding upward than the upper surface of the outer button cover 380.

When assembled to the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 will be in a state that protrudes more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 343(b) etc.) reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374. The center button main body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the lift base 364, but the lift base 364 is in contact with the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lift spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lift base 364, the outer periphery button cover 380 (outer periphery pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the lift base 364 is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer periphery button cover 380 (the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the raised position, the lifting base 364 is moved through the outer button cover 380 by the lifting spring. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 as it moves downward against the urging force of the elevating base 365 . In this state, the outer button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the lift base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body Since the pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 (press operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. 340(b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and is operated. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, it returns to its original lowered position.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 331 and 332. The operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 in the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 installed inside the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, by relaying the connection between the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 341 to 343 and the like. FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in a left side view of the production operation unit. FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. 343(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation part is pressed at the center. FIG. 7 is a front view of the dish unit when the operating section is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a large annular rotary operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. The press operation section 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation section 303a located at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and an annular outer circumferential press operation section disposed between the center press operation section 303a and the rotation operation section 302. 303b.

The rotation operation section 302 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, an outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337 of the performance operation ring 330. The central pressing operation section 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the performance operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing operation section 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation section 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In the normal state, the production operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation section 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. Specifically, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 projects slightly upwards from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 projects upwards from the top surface of the outer button cover 380. (See Figure 341, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotational drive unit 340, the performance operation ring 330 is rotated through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in a left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view. .

The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operating section 302 can be rotated back and forth and vibrated. This vibration differs from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation section 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in a left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation using two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

Rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. To be more specific, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is larger than the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , an interval that is not an integral multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected depending on the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302. Further, when a rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 is detected, the rotational operation section 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotational operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby making the rotational operation lighter and assisting. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotary operation section 302 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavier or a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation ring 330 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation section 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotary operation section 302 is installed with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a portion of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation section 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation section 302 in a way that is easy for the player to do. sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated even when the push operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Note that since the rotary operation section 302 is attached to the operation section base 320 on the lower surface side, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 342, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the production operation ring 330. Thereby, by causing the LED of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the performance operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation section 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in the row are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation section 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotary operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. Thereby, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decorative board) is provided inside the rotating rotary operation section 302.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in the lowered position, protruding slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central press operation section 303a of the press operation section 303 can be pressed. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed downward, the top surface of the center press operation section 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the top surface of the outer circumferential press operation section 303b (outer circumference button cover 380), and the press is detected. The sensor 381 detects the pressure.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b of the pressing operation part 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and the press is detected. Pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation part 303 is vigorously protruded upward together with the lifting base 364 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 343(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation section 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330.

When the center push operation section 303a is pressed downward with the push operation section 303 in the raised position, the center push operation section 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center push operation section 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing operation section 303a moves downward together with the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation section 303a and the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b are moved downwardly from the rotating operation section 302. The height is approximately the same as the top surface (see FIG. 343(c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Furthermore, when the outer circumference press operation section 303b is pressed downward with the press operation section 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central press operation section 303a remains in a state protruding upwardly than the upper surface of the outer circumference press operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b becomes approximately at the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302 (see FIG. 343(a)). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

In this way, regardless of whether the pressing operation section 303 of the present embodiment is in the lowered position or the raised position, unless the central pressing operation section 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, it will not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press and operate the central press operation section 303a, so that attention can be drawn to the operation of the performance operation section 301 in a player participation type performance. , it is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable.

Note that even when the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the push operation section 303 is in the raised position, some players may use the push operation section 303 as a cue to make the rotation operation easier, or the push operation section 303 may get in the way and make it difficult to perform the rotation operation. As a result, the operability of the rotary operation section 302 can be changed, and more diverse operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 344 to 346. FIG. 344(a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 344(b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 345 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 346 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage; a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402; The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed into a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is formed to be continuous with the left edge of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 347 to 349. 347(a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 347(b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 348 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 349 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to approximately the same position as the upper plate 201 and lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. and a plurality of side window internal decoration parts 410b that can emit light and are arranged in a plurality of side windows 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 is designed to make it difficult for players who are playing with the pachinko machine on the right side to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine located on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the gaming area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, thereby creating a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the player.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically; A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface, extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted in a part corresponding to the window interior decoration part 410b, and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 Internal reflectors 414 are inserted into the interiors of the side window interior decoration parts 410b, respectively.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged forward of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a right side base 411 of the door frame. A door that extends flatly in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is formed with a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. A flat plate is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and extends vertically and longitudinally so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in the left-right direction and forming a side window 410a.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 covers the door frame right side decorative board 418 which is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front side of the right side reflector 415. A door frame right side decoration body 419 attached to a right side reflector 415 is provided.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (in this case, three) of side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration part 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated conical cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed into a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the right side outer panel 416 of the door frame. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper part with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the side window interior decoration member 412 that is behind the connection base 412a on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration part decorative board 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape in the upper, lower, left and right directions around the axis of the side window interior decoration part 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b. has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration part 410b into which it is inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the inside of the side window interior decoration part 410b into four parts: top, bottom, left and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wave-like shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. has been done. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that pass through the right side reflector 415 in the front and back, and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, with a rear side extending vertically in a straight line and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The right side outer panel 416 of the door frame has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and also connects the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, with a rear side extending vertically in a straight line and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and is composed of an upper right side decorative board 418a and a lower right side decorative board 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration board 418 can decorate the door frame right side decoration body 419 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed into a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is connected to the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (column-shaped) side window inner decoration part 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a, and allows the LED of the side window inner decoration part decoration board 413 to emit light. In this way, the side window interior decoration portion 410b can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emitting decoration, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of this embodiment, in a normal state, since the LED of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 that emits light and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b is off, the side window The inside of the gaming area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island equipment) through between the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing games can easily play this pachinko machine 1 without having to move along the island equipment to the front of this pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase expectations for the game with the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of players located nearby. By making it difficult for players to see the entire gaming area 5a and making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without hesitation. .

Further, when the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are made to emit light using the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a can be changed. let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are columnar, the light is emitted in a band-like and radial manner. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult for other players, such as those next to them, to look into the gaming area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the gaming area 5a, it is possible to avoid other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. This can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable because they are unable to concentrate on the game, or from feeling like a loss due to being induced to make mistakes. This can prevent a decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 350 to 352 and the like. Figure 350 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the closed state. FIG. 351 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front top, and FIG. 352 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame is attached.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the door A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. We are prepared.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a top center reflector 458 that is disposed between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 and is attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. The top left reflector 459 is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. and a top right reflector 460 that is disposed at and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a pair of top center speakers 462 attached to the center speaker box 461 downward. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near both left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top It includes a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body part 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left and right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a main body part 451a extending from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body part 451a. A front protrusion 451b protrudes forward. The main body part 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side thereof is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that their front ends move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 has substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top cover 452 protrudes most forwardly at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved manner so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top cover 452 has an opening 452a on its upper surface that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front edge of the top upper cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decoration 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left and right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends from left to right. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is bent so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 has a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker ports 454b, which the top center speaker 462 faces, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c, which vertically penetrate through the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, and which the top side speakers 464 face. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The top center reflector 458, top left reflector 459, and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are attached to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed into a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. This central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speakers 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. There is. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 353 and the like. FIG. 353 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The upper left side decoration 271, the upper right side decoration 276, the upper middle side decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, and the top decoration 419 of the door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. 453 is formed in a half-tube shape, so that the player can see the decoration as if the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decoration body 453 are a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decorative substrates can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light. A light emission effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 has an annular, donut-shaped rotary operation section 302 on the top surface that is larger in diameter than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and a rotary operation section 302 arranged coaxially within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. A press operation section 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation section 303b and a cylindrical central press operation section 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation section 302 is attached below the rotation operation section 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and plate center lower decoration bodies 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and The door frame left side decoration body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration body of the door frame right side unit 410 have the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration body 312a and the lower center plate decoration body 312b. 419 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302, the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the two plate center lower decoration bodies 312b, and the rotation operation part 302, the outer periphery Since the pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be made to stand out.

In addition, the plate lower left decorative body 281, the plate lower right decorative body 286, and the lower plate center decorative body 312b, which are arranged below the plate left upper decorative body 271, the plate right upper decorative body 276, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the plate center lower decoration body 312b. As a result, since the performance operation unit 300 becomes larger from the bottom end toward the top, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotary operation unit 302 that is placed on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The press operation section 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in the production operation unit 300 on the top surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotary operating section 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends upwardly toward the front. Since the upper surfaces of the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face toward the head (face) of the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1. The entire operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire structure of the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be easily seen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is donut-shaped. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation section 302 is used for rotation operation, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is rotated. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and by operating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front and back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. Therefore, in the tray unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation part 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b are in a state that protrudes more forward than the upper plate 201, and the upper plate center Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out. At the same time, the appearance of the area around the rotation operation portion 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to make the game more appealing to the players. This makes it easier for players to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine they want to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 354 to 360. FIG. 354 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 355 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 356 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 357 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 358 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 359 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 360 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball firing device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a ball launcher 540 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending from side to side and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 in a single direction based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 354 to 362 and the like. FIG. 361(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 361(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (a) to (c) of FIG. 362 are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base unit 501 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 362, etc., the connection cable guide member 502 has an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached so as to be hinge-rotatable in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has the side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502, the guide body 502a is brought into contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See Figure 362(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 362(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 359 and 360. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment part 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 359 and 360. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 359 and 360. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 363 and the like. FIG. 363(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 363(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and is used to send game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 364 and the like. FIG. 364(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 364(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 370). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 365 and 366. FIG. 365(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 365(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the back. FIG. 366(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 366(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been loaded toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 365 and 366. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 370).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and back right direction and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance path 570a, since the ball cut detection sensor 574 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 to 368 and the like. FIG. 367 is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 368(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the movable ball extraction piece is in the open state, and FIG. 368(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 368(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape open to the rear and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a; It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 which is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B, and a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 that detect game balls B. A movable ball extracting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball extracting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball extracting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction in the right direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 367, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end opening upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the delivery blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position of about 1/3 height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward to the left in rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device body 581 at a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passageway is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passageway 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 368).

When the ball extractor lever 593 is raised to make the ball extractor movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which were tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extractor movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extractor movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so that the game balls B are closer to the side of the payout passage 580a. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582. Since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent strong force from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 365 and 366. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper bulb removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 370).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. It is released downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 365 and 366. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b is opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball ejection passage 600e flows through the lower ball ejection passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in the normal state (the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 370. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball break detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicates with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B will stay and be stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full (hereinafter, this guidance is also referred to as a ball removal instruction. The ball removal instruction is displayed on the effect display device 1600, for example), and the payout motor of the payout device 580 is 584 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detecting state. For example, if the ball removal instruction is displayed during a jackpot and the ball is kept full without operating the ball removal lever, the performance will continue even in the time saving state or normal state. A ball removal instruction can be displayed on the display device 1600.

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 371 to 375 and the like. FIG. 371(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 371(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 372 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 373 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 374 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 375 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b projects downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the volume is smaller, a sufficiently wide space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and The space is in communication with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

To be more specific, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection part 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made larger, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 375). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a designated number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 360. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 376. FIG. 376(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 376(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and can be attached to the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a locking spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end prevents rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to be tapered. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 377 to 384. FIG. 377(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 377(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 377(a). FIG. 378 is an enlarged view of the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 379(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails etc. assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 379(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 379(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 380 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 379(a). FIG. 381 is an explanatory diagram showing the area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 382 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 383 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 384 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and which is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and from the front and rear sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow part 552f has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the opposite end (the right wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to pass through.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This results in changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. and a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Moreover, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the open upper part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface part. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a lower position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m; The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a dam extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir section 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes towards the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this region. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately ⅓ of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. In addition, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o) is formed higher than the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 382). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 383, game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is made higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is directed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, so that the bulging portion 553b is made to extend from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed. Since the game balls B are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with an overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 382) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and ride on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 382, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

Furthermore, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received in the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 385 to 393. FIG. 385 is a front view of a game board in which the front component, game panel, front unit, etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 386 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 seen from the front right, FIG. 387 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 seen from the front left, and FIG. 388 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 389 is a front view of the game board with the front structural members, game panel, front unit, etc. made transparent. FIG. 390 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 391 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 392 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 385. FIG. 393 is a front view of the game board shown by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

In addition, in the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is square when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board, the LED emits light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side view LED). Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when a player operates a handle 182 of a handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate section that provides a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B. 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a first big winning hole 2005, and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole in the gaming area 5a. 2006 etc., it is for playing a game that entertains the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 393, etc.) that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 392, FIG. 484, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery formed to be slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 394, etc.) is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is equipped with a panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A display drive board 1720 that drives a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc., and a drive board box 1730 that accommodates a panel relay board 1710 and a display drive board 1720 are provided. The left side of the drive board box 1730 when viewed from the rear is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and the right side when viewed from the rear is detachably attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, and a second starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first grand prize opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls B according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls B, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. A second grand prize opening 2006 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the game ball 2004.

Further, the table unit 2000 has an output port 2010 provided at the lower end of the gaming area 5a to eject the gaming balls B from inside the gaming area 5a, and an outlet 2010 provided in the middle of the up and down direction within the gaming area 5a to eject the gaming balls B. It is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the contents from inside the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view in the gaming area 5a, and has a second starting port 2004, a first big winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. a first attacker unit 2400, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front; A second attacker unit 2600 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006; Comprising: a side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012; and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate part 2003. There is.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near both left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided at the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010. A back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, a back rear direction unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and a back guidance unit 3050 provided spaced apart from side to side behind the back guidance unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back top effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back and rear effect unit 3100 at the upper part of the back box 3010, and a back top effect unit 3400 provided at the rear of the back front left decoration body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back-rear-left production unit 3500, the back-rear-right production unit 3600 provided behind the back-front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-rear left decoration in the back box 3010. A back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a back front right production unit provided between the back front right decoration body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 394(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 2010 penetrates with a width sufficient to allow the two game balls B to be lined up in the left and right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, back unit 3000, etc. arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a. , it is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 394 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 393, etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nail N even if it is planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position within the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Furthermore, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

Although not shown in the drawings, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes passing through the front and back, and the upper and lower edges thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction. A plurality of engagement step portions formed with a thin plate thickness are provided. The positioning hole is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 394, in the panel board 1110, a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is such that the left side and bottom side of the center are The width is wide enough to allow the balls B to line up, and the upper side is narrow enough to prevent a plurality of game balls B from being lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch to form the lower full ball. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A cylindrical portion 3081 of an out ball detection member 3080 in a back guiding unit 3050 of a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into this out recess 1123.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins arranged outside the holding step. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging steps on the upper and lower left inclined parts of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding step. A pair of engaging pieces that engage with two engaging step portions on the lower side, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. The panel board 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step by elastically engaging the engagement step with the engagement claw. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, A sense of openness can be given to the player, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 and the front component 1000 are transparent, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge part 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the back side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. This board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B ejected downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and allows them to be ejected from the ejection part 1201 formed on the bottom to the ejection ball receiving part 628 below. Can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 to 392 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 484) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. It is equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting hole sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting hole sensor 2401, a general winning hole sensor 3051, a first big winning hole sensor 2402, a second big winning hole. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-outlet sensor 2403, the second sub-outlet sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 385 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The functional display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, and a second unit that displays the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display device consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display device consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of game balls B at the gate section 2003 are provided.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the pending number of game balls B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that displays.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 388, 391, 392, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 484) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color effect display device with a white LED as a backlight, and has approximately the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 that protrude upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1602 that protrudes downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, attaches the back box to two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner circumferential surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rearward of 3010, move the lower fixing piece 1602 side forward and inserting the lower fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 395. FIG. 395(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 395(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and a portion of its rear end extends through the opening 1110 of the panel board 1110. It penetrates through and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 which are capable of receiving game balls B hit into the gaming area 5a and which are always open, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are used for games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. The first grand prize opening 2005 is different from the first grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B of The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second grand prize opening 2006.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the horizontal center in the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part of the gaming area 5a. It is placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 located at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a slightly higher height than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second big prize opening 2006 is located above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is located on the right side of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a, and has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011. a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. ing.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006; A side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate part 2003. A gate member 2800 is provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398 and the like. FIG. 396(a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit seen from the front, FIG. 396(b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit seen from the back, and FIG. ) is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 397 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening when it is in the open state. FIG. 398 is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting port unit and side unit on the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, directly above the out port 2010, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101. It includes a flat flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 has a shape in a front view that is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long from side to side and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101 excluding the upper side, and is formed in the shape of a gutter with an open upper side. The bottom surface of this peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and the game ball B can be guided rearward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel board 1110 with the flange part 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall part 2102 in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the panel board 1110, has a first starting port 2002 that can receive the game ball B by means of a front wall portion 2101 and a peripheral wall portion 2102 that protrude forward from the panel board 1110. is forming.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 located directly below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

When the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the slope of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000 It can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 at. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although not shown, a decorative sticker is pasted on the front surface of the front wall portion 2101, making it more conspicuous than the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general winning hole 2001, and it is possible to encourage the player to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002. At the same time, by allowing the first starting port 2002 to accept the game ball B, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) is drawn in which an advantageous gaming state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for the special lottery result that will be drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle close to horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B backward is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001, so it will be visible to the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted.

In addition, when the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. The light emitting decoration is performed by light from LEDs on the lower back inner first decorative board 3322, the lower back inner second decorative board 3329, etc. of the lower back inner decoration unit 3320.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that spans the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002. This rib is formed in a triangular shape (a portion may be rounded) when viewed from the side, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning ports 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. The distance from the top of the first front wall 2203 to the top of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 is longer than the distance from the top of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 to the sloped part. (the ribs are positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is brought into contact with the rib and guided backward is adjusted so that the timing when the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is brought into contact with the first front wall portion 2203. The timing can be delayed compared to the timing at which the robot contacts the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are open to accept game balls B at all times. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate, and two side units extending from the base plate in the shape of a gutter in the front and back directions, the front end of which is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes downward, and is spaced apart from side to side. a first guide gutter, a first front wall portion that closes the front end side of each of the two first guide gutter, and a gutter-like extending back and forth from the base plate to the left of the two first guide gutter. and a second front wall portion that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed toward the upper left. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 has an upper side extending vertically with a border at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom, and a lower side near the base plate 2201 so as to move backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position about 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

This side unit 2200 is attached to the panel board 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The game ball B can be received at the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrude forward from the panel board 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel board 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrude rearward from the base plate 2201 pass through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. These first guide gutter 2202 and second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general prize openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game balls B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 are detected by the general winning a prize port sensor 3051, and then It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

Unlike the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker affixed to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general prize winning port 2001. It is less conspicuous than the first starting port 2002. In addition, since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of these general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, even if no decorative sticker is pasted on the front. , it doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the back lower left presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, as shown in FIG. Light from the LED of the board 3203 can be used for light-emitting decoration, and the lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in good condition. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has an inclined portion in the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower left side of the back in the back unit 3000 is The light radiated forward from the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make it look better.

In this side unit 2200, the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, so that the side unit 2200 moves relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. Note that the bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily drawn to the general winning hole 2001 for a long time while ensuring that the player is aware of the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's attention to the next game ball B and other winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. It is possible to enjoy the game within the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

In other words, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001, so it will be visible to the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portions 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined, the first front wall portions 2203 can be viewed from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. It becomes possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203, since the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front, some players may not accept the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. If the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel a sense of distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall, and may lose interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of this embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 and directed backward. Since the guided game ball B can be made visible to the player for a short time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001. Therefore, even if the user has the illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

In addition, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall part 2203, the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When the game ball B passes through, if most of the game ball B (at least half of the game ball B or more) overlaps with the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front, some players may place the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. It is possible to create an illusion as if the player has been accepted, and it is possible to entertain the player. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, there is no strong recognition that the game ball B was accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and there is no possibility that it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefits (payout of game balls B and drawing of the first special lottery results) are not given afterwards, it is possible to avoid distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. This allows the player to continue enjoying the game and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning hole 2001 out of the three general winning holes 2001 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by means of a second front wall portion 2205. The first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 has a similar shape. Thereby, when the game ball B is accepted into the leftmost general prize opening 2001, some players can be given the illusion that it has been accepted into the starting opening. Even if the game ball B is accepted into the general winning slot 2001, which is under the illusion that it is a starting slot, the special lottery result is not drawn, so the player feels distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall. There is a risk of it being stored away. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 that is far to the left from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction (a position where it cannot be accepted when playing right-handed), and the second Since there is no decorative sticker affixed to the front of the front wall portion 2205 to indicate a starting port, it can be reconfirmed that it is not a starting port, and the player may feel distrustful and lose interest in the game. This can be avoided.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is greater than when the front ends are made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, since a decorative sticker is not pasted on the front surface of the general winning hole 2001, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Although not shown, the angle of inclination from the horizontal in the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is such that variable winning openings such as the big winning opening and the accessory winning opening can be opened and closed. is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the winning opening door rotates around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward and is in the open state so as to guide the game ball B toward the winning opening side. It is an angle. To be more specific, some players may find that if the number of game balls B paid out by receiving game balls B into the variable winning hole is larger than that of the general winning hole 2001, many of the game balls B may be delivered to the variable winning hole. I started hoping for a prize. Alternatively, even if it is a variable winning opening (big winning opening) in which a prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number of prizes. Therefore, by making the slope of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening more gentle than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall part 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As mentioned above, when the game ball B is accepted into the variable winning hole, the accepted game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001. It is possible to make the user reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning hole, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning hole to the general winning hole 2001. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was received. In addition, since the angle of the winning slot door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time for the winning slot door to close from the open state, so the game ball B wins more than the specified number for the player. It can make you think that you do.

In addition, in the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, the portion extending diagonally downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. The distance between them is longer. As a result, since the winning hole is the general winning hole 2001, game balls B are paid out, but no drawings such as normal drawings or special drawings are held, so game balls B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 can be made invisible from the player's view at an early stage.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 is inclined, but this is not limited to this, and all general winning openings 2001 are inclined. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball B fired at the firing position in the normal gaming state (so-called "left-handed hit") can enter the general prize opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined. Although the one provided in the position shown is not limited to this, the general winning hole 2001 whose front surface is not inclined can be used in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probable change", or "jackpot"). It may be provided at a position where the game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called "right-handed hitting") can enter the ball, or it may be provided at both locations.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 397, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 with a slope on the front surface is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from closed. The angle is narrow. If the number of game balls B paid out when a prize is won in the grand prize opening is larger than that in the general winning opening 2001, even if the number of game balls B paid out when a prize is won in the grand prize opening is set, the player cannot win more than the specified number I hope. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that won into the grand prize opening rolls toward the back side is said to be slower than the speed at which the game ball B that entered the general winning hole 2001, which has an inclined front surface, rolls toward the back side. There is. In other words, if a prize is won in the general winning hole 2001 which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning in the big winning hole, the speed of the game ball B that won in the big winning hole is said to be faster than the speed at which it rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more payouts are made to the winning hole, the longer it takes for the winning hole to disappear from the player's sight. As a result, the winning slot with more payouts can provide a longer period of joy when winning a prize.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 395 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right. This side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. 1st attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 399 to 403 and the like. FIG. 399(a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 399(b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the back. FIG. 400 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 401 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the back. FIG. 402 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 403 is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the first attacker unit in cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is placed on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. installed. This first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 408, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning port 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and further than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out opening 2011 is provided at a lower position than the first big winning opening 2005 below the second starting opening 2004.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a first attacker unit that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning port 2005. It is equipped with a big prize opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects illegal magnetism. Two first large prize opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel board 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 forming a flow path for the game ball B, and a front cover 2412 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. The second starting port door 2414 is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2414 is moved to open and close the second starting port 2004. a solenoid cover 2416 that covers the starting port solenoid 2415; a first large winning port door 2417 that is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the first large winning port 2005; A first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 to open and close the first big winning opening 2005, and a transmission for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 by transmitting the forward and backward movements of the first attacking solenoid 2418. A member 2419 is provided.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the first major winning opening decoration board 2420 for decorating the first major winning opening 2005 with light emission, and to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413, Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub-out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with 1710 is provided.

Unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth near the upper end on the right side from the center in the lateral direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a, and a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a. A second opening 2411c that extends horizontally and extends back and forth in the upper part on the left side of the center, two second guide holes 2411d that are arranged horizontally below the second opening 2411c and penetrate back and forth; It has a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates forward and backward below the first guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed so that the left and right width is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b has a cylindrical shape and protrudes rearward, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The second opening 2411c has a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and extends left and right, and the door 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. The second guide holes 2411d each protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape, and are inclined so that the rear end side is lower.

Further, the unit base 2411 has two contact portions 2411e that are arranged left and right along the upper side of the second opening 2411c and protrude forward in a triangular shape. These abutting parts 2411e connect the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 to the contacting part of the front cover 2412 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state. They work together to distribute the fluid in a large zigzag pattern in the front and rear directions.

The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first big prize opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Furthermore, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411, at a portion to the left of the first guide hole 2411b and to a portion to the right of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and is formed into a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 403, the front cover 2412 includes a first shelf portion 2412a extending downwardly to the left from near the upper right corner, and a game ball extending leftward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a when viewed from the front. It extends shorter than the first shelf part 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf part 2412a, with an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the first shelf part 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf 2412b from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left of the left end of the second shelf 2412b so as to be lower to the left. A third shelf part 2412c that extends shorter than the third shelf part 2412b is spaced from the left end of the third shelf part 2412c to the left by a length of four to six times the diameter of the game ball B. It has a fourth shelf part 2412d that extends lower to the left from a lower position than the fourth shelf part 2412d and forms a first big prize opening 2005 with the third shelf part 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left by a length slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

The front cover 2412 also includes a first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall 2412f extends to the same height, a third standing wall 2412g extends vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall 2412e, and a third shelf 2412c. a fourth standing wall 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end to the lower side of the front cover 2412; a fifth standing wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c; and a right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. It has a sixth standing wall part 2412j extending downward from the fourth shelf part 2412d, and a seventh standing wall part 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf part 2412d.

The fifth standing wall part 2412i extends downward from the left end of the third shelf part 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf part 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. , and extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower to the right. It extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The interval in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, it slopes lower to the left with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow between it and the first horizontal wall part 2412l, and then goes halfway to the fourth vertical wall part 2412h on the left. It has a second horizontal wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to become higher toward the second side wall portion 2412m. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second horizontal wall portion 2412m is formed such that a portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j in the direction approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j, respectively. It has an extending third horizontal wall portion 2412n and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends in a stepped manner along the upper side of the front cover to become lower to the left, and has an interval that allows the game balls B to flow between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c. It is set apart. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 has triangular shapes in front of the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and at alternate positions in the left and right direction with respect to the two abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions projecting rearward in shape. When the first big prize opening 2005 is in a closed state, these contact parts hold the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 with the contact part 2411e of the unit base 2411. They work together to distribute the fluid in a large zigzag pattern in the front and rear directions.

The rear cover 2413 is formed into a box shape that is open to the front. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting opening door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big winning opening door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to sandwich and hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403.

The second starting port door 2414 includes a flat door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and a left-right direction extending from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d is provided at a portion remote from the rotating shaft 2414c at the lower part of the arm portion 2414b and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a, and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided on the side of the arm portion 2414b closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c.

This second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 with the door portion 2414a. The second starting port door 2414 rotates (rotates) about the rotating shaft 2414c as the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 moves forward and backward, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front and back direction, and the second starting port door 2414 The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is installed with the plunger protruding toward the front. When the starting port solenoid 2415 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The first big prize opening door 2417 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and each of the pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d projecting rightward from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a, and then bend forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided at the lower part of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. This link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

This first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 with the door part 2417a. The first big prize opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotating shaft 2417c due to the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front and back direction. The first grand prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is installed with the plunger protruding toward the front. When this first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The transmission member 2419 includes a base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a, and a transmission member 2419 that penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b. and a slit 2419c extending vertically. Into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

A plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first large prize opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first large winning opening decoration board 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first big winning hole decoration board 2420 can decorate the first big winning hole 2005 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a makes it impossible to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It has become. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 403).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is connected to the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door section 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is located above the first grand prize opening 2005, and the door section 2417a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first grand prize opening 2005. It is in a state of In other words, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door part 2417a) (see FIGS. 402 and 403).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf part 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf part 2412a, and the door part 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released from the second shelf part 2412b to the left falls onto the third shelf part 2412c or the door part 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 depending on its momentum, and due to the inclination of these, the game ball B falls to the left. roll towards. Note that when the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c may enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005 is against the contact part 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact part of the front cover 2412. They will come into contact with each other alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzagging in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is released from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right from the first shelf section 2412a, it passes on the right side of the first vertical wall section 2412e, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m, and falls on the second horizontal wall section 2412m. Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c, it passes between the third standing wall section 2412g and the fourth standing wall section 2412h and reaches the second horizontal wall section 2412m. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then passes through the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a. The substrate is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that have passed on the right side of the first shelf section 2412a and the game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c are both It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate part 2003, the plunger resists the biasing force of the spring. moves backward, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (on the door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting port door 2414 rotates about the rotating shaft 2414c in a direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 becomes open, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. becomes. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g and reaches the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls onto the first horizontal wall portion 2412l. A portion of the first horizontal wall portion 2412l between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g is inclined to be lower to the rear, and due to the inclination, the game ball B rolls backward, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower board holder 1200. be discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger moves back together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the biasing force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 retreats, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding within the slit 2419c. That will happen.

As a result, the first big prize opening door 2417 rotates around the rotation axis 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Will have to move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 to the rear of the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. The game ball B becomes ready to be accepted (see FIG. 402). In other words, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the first big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball B is accepted into the first big winning hole 2005, it passes between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j, and then enters the fifth standing wall. After passing between the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth vertical wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o and being detected by one of the two first big prize opening sensors 2402, It falls onto the third horizontal wall portion 2412n. This third horizontal wall portion 2412n is sloped so that it becomes lower toward the rear from the top surface, and the game ball B that falls onto the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the slope, and the unit base 2411 It is emitted backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, in the first big winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first big winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door part 2417a that closes the first big winning opening 2005. By rotating the door part 2417a around the rotation axis 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front and back direction, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed. The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same for the second starting port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by a different first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since the game ball B is ejected backward, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from staying between the first big prize opening 2005 and the first big prize opening sensor 2402, and also to release many game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 404 and 405. FIG. 404(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 404(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the back. FIG. 405 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape, and allows the production display device 1600 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, so that the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel board 1110 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the inside of the frame when assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support section 2503 (flange section 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall section 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the end side of the support portion 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2503 is made inconspicuous. This support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). I try to make it less noticeable.

More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support section 2503 provided above a warp entrance 2511, which will be described later, and at a portion where the peripheral wall section 2501 protrudes most to the left, the shape of the peripheral wall section 2501 at that section is in the middle of the vertically extending section. It has a shape that looks like it is bulging out to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, and at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, It has a different shape from the peripheral wall part 2501, and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower parts (see FIG. 413). When the support part 2503 of this part is assembled to the game board 5, the part extending linearly up and down on the tip side of the support part 2503 is the back front left decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is approximately along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the tip edge of the support part 2503 is aligned with the edge of the back front left decorative body 3030, it becomes difficult to distinguish the support part 2503, and the back front left decoration provided at the rear is relatively difficult to distinguish. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends to the right in a quadrangular shape, whereas the peripheral wall part 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decoration unit 3710C in the back front left presentation unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 when assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 385, etc.) ). The end sides of the support portion 2503 extending left and right extend parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, so that the end sides of the support portion 2503 extend in parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. The support part 2503 is difficult to distinguish (see FIG. 389).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance that is opened on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 when viewed from the front and is located in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. 2511, a warp exit 2512 which is capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 405, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B that bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is positioned directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel board of the game panel 1100. 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction (center emitting portion 2513a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central release part 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520, which is provided at the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When this center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the upper right corner end of the center accessory 2500) is located at the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the front component 1000). 1006), and is formed so that a game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the gaming area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove open to the front, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outside of the peripheral wall part 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 that is away from the peripheral wall part 2501 and a first guide passage 2521 that extends along the peripheral wall part 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522 extending from the top. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other in the left and right directions. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally downward to the right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly under the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have come into contact with the stopper 1006 are in the first guide It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left and right direction, and an exit opening diagonally downward to the left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, since the support portion 2503 is provided that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the center accessory 2500 in the region where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it forms the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall part 2501 (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the performance image of the rear performance display device 1600 and the back unit can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. 3000 decorations etc. can be made more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude briefly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. Obstruction of the visibility of the decoration of the unit 3000, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc. can be reduced. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left production unit 3700 are placed as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. , it is possible to prevent the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left presentation unit 3700 from becoming blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, the visibility of the decorations etc. provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effects thereof can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 and the like are made transparent, and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of luminescent decoration or the production display device 1600, the luminous decoration can be performed using the light from them, and the appearance is improved. can do. To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 413 etc., the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, the effect display device 1600, etc. are provided behind the support part 2503 (the cross-hatched part in FIG. 413). , Transmits, reflects, refracts, or diffuses the light emitted forward from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714 in the back front left direction unit 3700, the direction display device 1600, etc., to create a dazzling luminescent decoration. It can be shown to players. Note that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the step can diffuse light from the rear, making it look more dazzling.

In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that the support portion 2503 on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) In the close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thereby, it is possible to widen the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N as much as possible within the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the support portion 2503 Since the support portion 2503 is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the area within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be more easily seen. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulation area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall part 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support part 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. You can also do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends by an amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

Note that the edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left presentation unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, since the support part 2503 is different from the rear decoration, it is possible to prevent the support part 2503 from becoming conspicuous and reducing the decorativeness of the rear decoration. can be increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left direction unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the lens effect allows those decorations to be Although the example shown above is designed to prevent blurry appearance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 may be provided near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that is far from the back unit 3000 at the rear. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left presentation unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear may be intentionally made to appear blurred.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating through it, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the peripheral wall 2501 may not have a rear part inserted into the opening 1112, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. . Furthermore, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100, and in this case, the flange portion 2502 is not provided on the center accessory 2500. You can do it like this.

[5-8f. 2nd attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 406 and 407. FIG. 406(a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 406(b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the gate member seen from behind. FIG. 407 is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a, and It is attached to the front surface of a panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second large winning opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left (see FIG. 407).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second big winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time that acts near the second big winning hole 2006. 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second big winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening door 2611 to open the second big winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the movement of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second big prize opening door 2611, and a second attacker solenoid 2612 for moving the second big prize opening door 2611. It has a guide path 2613 that guides the accepted game ball B and releases it rearward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second large winning opening 2006 that opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and a second large winning opening 2006 that opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A prize opening door 2611 is provided.

The second big prize opening door 2611 has a semicircular bottom side that bulges out downward, a right side that touches the right end of the bottom side and extends straight upward, and a right side that bulges out to the left from the top end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called feather shape, consisting of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second big prize opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a that extends in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as the axis, and a link that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from a position farther from the rotating shaft. It has a pin (not shown). The second big prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached to the lower rotating shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is installed with the plunger projecting downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction, so that the link pin of the second large prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit into which it is inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

When the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled to the game board 5, its right side is located so as to be in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the second attacker unit 2600 is located on the peripheral wall of the second big prize opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500. A space is formed between the right side of 2501 and the game ball B through which it can flow. In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second grand prize opening door 2611 is upright, and the second grand prize opening 2006 is closed by the second grand prize opening door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006.

In this normal state, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is selected. When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second large prize opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second big prize opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second big winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to the left, and the right end side of the second big winning opening door 2611 becomes lower. It will be in a tilted state. In other words, the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state. In this state, when the game ball B that has flown down comes into contact with the second grand prize opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, and then guided by the guiding path 2613 and released backward. The game balls B discharged rearward from the guiding path 2613 are delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and are discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side middle right unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 and 407. The side middle right unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is located directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. This side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning hole 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and the general winning hole 2001 is adjacent to the right side of the general winning hole 2001, and the left-right direction is the game ball B. A second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width corresponding to two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward, and a second guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward. It has two guiding passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general winning opening 2001, bent rightward, and further bent rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2701, and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

When this side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of each of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Furthermore, when the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, its right end is in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and its lower end is in approximate contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, A space is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second large winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 connects the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over almost the entire area between the two (see FIG. 408, etc.).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the first guidance passage 2701, and then guides the game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 through the second guide passage 2702, and then guides the game ball B received into the second sub-out port 2012 to the back side of the panel board 1110. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate components]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 395 and 406. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is being The gate member 2800 includes a gate part 2003 in which a normal lottery result is drawn, which opens and closes a second starting port 2004 when a game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, and a gate sensor for detecting that a game cow B has passed through the gate part 2003. 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes obliquely toward the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general prize opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700 when assembled on the game board 5.

When assembled to the game board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. A gap is formed through which the ball B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 393 and 408. FIG. 408 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the right part of the gaming area in FIG. 393. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outside parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly cause the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 to enter the part to the right of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. Thereby, by hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the game balls B that have passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B that have passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a, as shown in FIG. N, you are guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W. be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. After being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 is transferred to the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not accepted into the general winning hole 2001 are discharged from the out hole 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the side and received into the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may pass between a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release parts 2513b on the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is sent to the first starting port sensor. 3052 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052, a first special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a passes through the gate part 2003 or is accepted into the second starting opening 2004, the first grand prize opening 2005, and the second grand prize opening 2006. There is no possibility that you will be exposed.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are not in an open state, it is possible to encourage the driving operation of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hit").

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B is pushed with such strength that the game ball B enters the upper part of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate section 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the left side of the gate member 2800 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800, the probability decreases in this order, and the liquid flows down toward the side middle unit 2700.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B hits the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. is emitted downwards. The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the probability is approximately the same on the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800, and the probability is lower on the right side of the gate member 2800. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received into the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then sent to the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the gaming area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. Upon detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery with a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of reaching the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. , and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and is guided to the second grand prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flowing down to the left.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, and after being guided to the back of the gaming panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a, the game ball B is placed in the back unit 3000. The substrate is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game balls B by this second big prize opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B that was not accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 and flowed down the left side of the second grand prize opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guiding passage 2530. from there to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flown down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to the inclination, and hits the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, depending on the momentum, the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left falls onto the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417, and the slope thereof , and after rolling from the door 2417a to the fourth shelf 2412d, it is released from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, it does not flow down to the first shelf part 2412a but to the upper shelf part 2412p. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to the inclination, is released from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. The contact changes direction downward, and after flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door part 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417, the door part 2417a and the fourth shelf part 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf part 2412p, the first prize will depend on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf part 2412p and the timing at which the first prize opening 2005 becomes open. It may be accepted into the winning slot 2005.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may rebound to the right due to the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, etc. By flowing upward, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll to the right against the inclination thereof, and may be ejected from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right (downward). The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf section 2412a passes between the first standing wall section 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m. However, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received into the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned to the gaming area 5a until it reaches the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate part 2003, the second start Since the opening door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is received into the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When a game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a second special lottery result is drawn and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out is provided.

In addition, when the game ball B is released from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. When a "jackpot" is drawn as a result, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by this first big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Note that depending on the momentum of the game ball B released leftward from the second shelf 2412b, it comes into contact with the level difference on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, and flows diagonally downward to the right and connects the second shelf 2412b and the third The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf portion 2412c and the shelf portion 2412c. The game ball B that entered the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c passes between the third standing wall section 2412g and the fourth standing wall section 2412h and reaches near the left end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and is received into the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big prize opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 must receive the game ball B, and the "small hit" is achieved. It is necessary to draw the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "Jackpot" or "Jackpot". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 requires the game ball B to pass through the gate section 2003 to draw (draw) a "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player should drive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002. The game ball B can be operated and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to allow the user to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1. This can increase expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 and a "small hit" or "jackpot" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed hitting" so that the game ball B can be received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006. 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 can increase expectations for acceptance of the game ball B.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage allows for easy passage through the gate part 2003. , the driving force of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired guide path, and the game ball You can enjoy the typing operation of B.

In addition, by performing a "right-handed hit" and passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003, there is a possibility that a "normal win" will be drawn in which the second starting port 2004 will be in an open state. By allowing the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B, there is a possibility that a "small win" or "big win" will be drawn, so that expectations for the game can be increased and a decline in interest can be suppressed. Can be done.

In addition, in the time saving state, in order to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, an instruction to recommend so-called right-handed hitting (hereinafter also referred to as right-handed hitting instruction) is displayed. Further, even during a jackpot, a right-hitting instruction is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in order to cause the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole 2006. The instruction to hit to the right is an instruction to continue twisting the handle 182 fully to the right.

Also, during a jackpot game or during special symbol changes in each state, it is possible to perform performances using the central press operation section 303a, the outer circumferential press operation section 303b, the performance operation ring 330, etc. In this case, for example, performance operation instructions instructing to operate these operation units are displayed on the performance display device 1600. If you operate the operation unit according to the instructions, for example, it will suggest the expected jackpot in the special symbol change that is being executed, notify you of the result of the special lottery that corresponds to the special symbol change that is being executed, or notify you of the jackpot that is currently being executed. It suggests or informs whether it is a normal jackpot or a certain variable jackpot, and changes the production mode and BGM in a time-saving state during and after the jackpot.

Note that the above-mentioned ball removal instruction is displayed in priority to other effect images (that is, on the near side), making other effects difficult to see. When the ball removal lever is operated in accordance with the ball removal instruction, the full state of the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 is eventually released, and the ball removal instruction is erased, making other effects easier to see. In addition, the above-mentioned right-handed instruction can be displayed at a predetermined time such as the start of a time saving state or the start of a jackpot game, and the production operation instruction can also be displayed at a predetermined time within a predetermined production scenario. Can be displayed. On the other hand, the bulb removal instruction is displayed when the full tank detection sensor 154 performs detection, but it is not displayed at a predetermined time. Note that the right-handed instruction is not only given at the start of the time-saving state or the start of a jackpot game, but also, for example, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls B is entered into the first starting port 2002 at the time of the time-saving state and the jackpot. It is also displayed when

Please note that there may be situations where the ball removal instruction, production operation instruction, and right-handed instruction are displayed at the same time. It may be determined as appropriate.

In addition, although it is possible to display all of the right-handed batting instructions, production operation instructions, and ball removal instructions at the same time in the time-saving state, if you do not follow the right-handed batting instructions and hit the ball left-handed in the time-saving state, the first start A game ball B enters the mouth 2002. The average time of the first special symbol variation executed when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 is the average time of the second special symbol variation executed when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. longer than average time. In other words, in such a situation, if the right-handed instruction is not followed, the time required for one game will increase, and the number of special lottery draws per unit time will decrease.

In addition, when the time saving state ends and the normal state returns, an instruction to recommend so-called left-handed hitting is given (hereinafter also referred to as a left-handed hitting instruction) in order to cause the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002. is displayed. In addition, not only when returning to the normal state, but also when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls B enter the second starting port 2004 or a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game balls B enter the gate part 2003 in the normal state. A left-handed batting instruction also appears when game ball B passes (that is, when a second special lottery or a normal lottery is held (these lots include preliminary determination)).

Therefore, even in normal conditions, there may be situations in which the ball removal instruction, production operation instruction, and left-handed instruction are displayed at the same time, but even in such cases, the importance of each instruction is taken into account and the sound is , lamps, and display relationships may be determined as appropriate.

Note that even when no special symbol variation is performed, there may be a state in which the right-handed instruction and the ball-out instruction are displayed. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a special symbol variation when a new performance operation instruction is displayed while a right-handed instruction and a ball removal instruction are being displayed.

Further, for example, a state may change from a state in which a right-handed batting instruction, a ball removal instruction, and a production operation instruction are displayed to a state in which only one type of instruction is displayed. For example, if an operation indicated by the performance operation instruction is performed in a state where the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the production operation instruction are displayed during the time saving state, only the production operation instruction can be deleted. When only one instruction has been displayed, if a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball B entering any of the starting slots, a demonstration screen will be displayed, or a standby state that explains the game contents will be displayed. I get hurt.

Immediately after the demo screen is displayed, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a certain operation section (which may be the same as the operation section corresponding to the production operation instructions) is used to move to a menu screen for adjusting the volume and light intensity. ) will be displayed.

Further, regarding the performance operation instruction, it may be possible to instruct an operation method selected from a plurality of types of operations. For example, an instruction to simply press the operating section corresponding to the production operation instruction once, an instruction to repeatedly press the operating section, or the like may be given. During the execution of the special symbol change, from the state where the right hit instruction, ball removal instruction, and production operation instruction (single press instruction) are displayed, the right hit instruction, ball removal instruction, and production operation instruction (successive press) are displayed. instructions) can be displayed.

Also, for example, during the special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state, a right-handed instruction, a ball removal instruction, and a production operation instruction can be displayed simultaneously, and when the time-saving condition ends and the normal state returns, the right-handed instruction is displayed. After the display ends, the left-handed batting instruction is displayed, so the state can be changed to a state in which the left-handed batting instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the performance operation instruction are displayed at the same time.

Further, for example, in a state where two types of instructions among the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the production operation instruction are displayed, the remaining one type of instruction can be displayed. For example, in a time saving state or a jackpot state, if the full tank detection sensor 154 performs a detection while the right-hand hit instruction and production operation instruction are displayed, a ball removal instruction is further displayed.

Further, in the special symbol variation of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time, the production operation instruction may not appear. That is, in the special symbol variation, it may be arranged such that the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the production operation instruction are not all displayed at the same time.

For example, a judge performance is performed in which a special lottery result is announced when the operation unit is operated according to the performance operation instructions, so in order to create a sense of tension in the judge performance, the performance operation instructions are not displayed in a manner that directly indicates the special lottery result. This is desirable. That is, in such a case, it is possible to prevent the special lottery result from being directly shown when the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the performance operation instruction are displayed at the same time.

Further, during a jackpot game, a right-hand hit instruction is displayed, and if the full tank detection sensor 154 detects, a ball removal instruction is further displayed. Also, for example, if you win a time-saving jackpot, but a performance similar to a time-saving jackpot game is performed, a performance operation instruction will appear in a predetermined round of the jackpot game, and if you perform the operation according to the instruction, the performance will be executed. It may be possible to carry out a promotion performance that informs that the jackpot game is a jackpot game with a probability change. Further, for example, in a predetermined round of a time-saving jackpot game, a performance operation instruction may appear, and a character appearing in the performance during the time-saving state may be selected by operating according to the instruction. In other words, in a predetermined round during a jackpot game, a right-hand hit instruction, a ball removal instruction, and an effect operation instruction can be displayed simultaneously.

In this way, at least two of the ball extraction instruction, performance operation instruction, and right-hand hitting instruction are displayed simultaneously when the special symbol variation is being executed or not being executed in the normal state and the time saving state, and during the jackpot game. In such a case, the relationship between sounds, lamps, and display may be determined as appropriate, taking into account the importance of each instruction. Furthermore, the display order (the order in which the display starts and the order in which it ends) and the length of the display time of at least two of these items may depend on the player's operations, or may not be affected by the player's operations. It may be determined as appropriate.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 409 to 412 and the like. FIG. 409 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 410 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 411 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 412 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near both left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided at the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010. A back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, a back rear direction unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and a back guidance unit 3050 provided spaced apart from side to side behind the back guidance unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back top effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back and rear effect unit 3100 at the upper part of the back box 3010, and a back top effect unit 3400 provided at the rear of the back front left decoration body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. A back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a back front right production unit provided between the back front right decoration body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 412 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside this back box 3010, a back front left decorative body 3030, a back front right decorative body 3040, and various production units are attached, and a production display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side. This back box 3010 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010, to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable left and right.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting decorations, presentation units, and the like.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a band-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and both left and right sides of the opening 3010a. This reinforcing plate 3011 reinforces the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 409 to 413 and the like. FIG. 413 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3032 affixed to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and its left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3032 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). This back front left decorative body 3030 is formed to be opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3042 affixed to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and its right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed to be opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge thereof is located outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front when assembled on the game board 5. (See Fig. 389, Fig. 413, etc.). Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are shaped like a flat plate so that when assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the outer peripheral edge thereof is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. It has extended to

To be more specific, for example, as shown in FIG. 413, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is moved half way from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left presentation unit 3500. It extends to the position of In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, when assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded part in FIG. 413), and from the player's side the back rear left The lifting drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (the hatched part in FIG. 413). Since it extends to the rear front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible to the player, improving the appearance of the game board 5 (Pachinko machine 1). can do.

In addition, the back front left decoration body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and when assembled on the game board 5, the back left lifting drive motor 3554 is extended. Although a part (the upper half) is visible from the front, by assembling it into the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000, the function display unit Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 (functional component) etc. provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the back rear right presentation unit 3600 when viewed from the front, and the transparent front Even through the component 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (Pachinko machine 1) is improved by making functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear of the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible to the player. Therefore, the same effect as the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of this embodiment, at least a portion of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear are covered. Therefore, the functional parts can be made difficult to see from the player's side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided at the rear can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible to the player. In other words, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, giving players a sense of openness, and making it easier to see the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 that are decorated with predetermined decorations are located on the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 Since they can be seen from the front through the play area, the outside of the play area 5a can also be decorated with them, and the play area 5a can be made to look larger than it actually is, making it possible to strongly attract the attention of players. It can be the board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Moreover, as described above, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit can be made transparent. 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. The overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Note that the parts of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 that extend outward from the gaming area 5a allow functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear to be accessed from the player's side. Since they can be made invisible, all functional parts may be provided outside the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure space for installing all functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a must be relatively reduced. Therefore, as in this embodiment, some of the functional parts are moved outside the gaming area 5a in such a way that the gaming area 5a can be large relative to the size of the gaming board 5. It is desirable to provide one.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As a result, the design inside the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 that extend from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the attention of players.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 414 and the like. FIG. 414(a) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 414(b) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010, and has a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the first starting opening 2002. An out port sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. A magnetic sensor 3055 is provided at the rear of the device to detect unauthorized magnetism.

In addition, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 is delivered, and a general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which game balls B are delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which game balls B received into the general winning slot 2001 on the inside side of the side unit 2200 are delivered, and a general delivery port on the left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 receives the game balls B received into the prize winning port 2001, and the fourth delivery port 3064 receives the game balls B received into the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the first big prize hole 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the second big prize hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 receive it. the seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game balls B received are delivered; the eighth delivery port 3068 to which the game balls B received into the general winning slot 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 are delivered; A ninth delivery port 3069 is provided to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Furthermore, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first discharge path that guides the game balls B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharges them downward, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The game balls B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game balls B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are connected to a second discharge path that merges them and discharges them downward, and the balls are delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game balls B downward and discharges them diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game balls B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 are lower than the sixth delivery port 3066. A fourth discharge path is provided, which guides the liquid downward to a position that is further left than the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharges the liquid diagonally to the lower left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with this fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path and then discharged downward. be done. A game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and a game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063. After merging with the ball B in the second discharge path, it is detected by the general prize winning opening 2001 and then discharged downward. The game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

The game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received into the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that was delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B that was received into the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is placed on the upstream side of the portion of the fourth discharge path that communicates with the ninth delivery port 3069. It is detected by the general winning a prize opening sensor 3051 and is discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, merges with the fourth discharge path, and passes through the fourth delivery path. It is discharged through four discharge channels.

This back guidance unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out ball detection member 3080 is driven into the gaming area 5a, and is received in the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. To detect the game ball B that was received into the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the gaming area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (game balls B that were not given a benefit, also referred to as "out balls"). belongs to.

The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and is connected to a cylindrical portion 3081 that extends cylindrically in the front and rear direction so that the game ball B can flow therethrough, and A partition part 3082 that divides the interior into left and right parts, a flange part 3083 that projects in a flat plate shape from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 in the left and right direction, and a flange part 3083 that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 and allows the game ball B to be moved downward. and a rear cover 3084 that can be guided and ejected (see FIG. 392). In the out ball detection member 3080, an out outlet sensor 3053 is provided between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The cylindrical portion 3081 has approximately the same size as the out port 2010, has a width in the left and right direction that is enough for two game balls B to be lined up (width that does not line up three game balls B), and has a lower inner surface. It slopes downward toward the rear. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The front end side of the partition portion 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward.

In the out ball detection member 3080, two out outlet sensors 3053 are provided side by side on the left and right. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical part 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical part 3081. This is to detect game balls B that have been distributed. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, since the direction of flow of the game ball B flowing inside the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the location of the outlet sensor 3053, the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the outlet sensor 3053, and the game ball B can be quickly discharged to prevent it from stagnation in front of the outlet sensor 3053.

When this out ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 392).

When the out ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 392). That is, the rear end of the out-guiding section 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical section 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the ejection portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

This out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the gaming area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 and received into the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 ejects the game ball B to the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without bringing it into contact with the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, since the partition part 3082 partitions between the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right sides, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be detected. It is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the side of the outlet sensor 3053 on the right side. Therefore, depending on the number of game balls B detected per time by each of the left and right exit sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left-handed" or "hit right-handed." Based on this determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the most suitable input operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, in the out ball detection member 3080, the forward protrusion of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game balls B can easily get over the partition. The game balls B can be released to the left or right side of the section 3082 where the flow rate of the game balls B is relatively small, and the game balls B can be discharged without being delayed at the outlet 2010.

In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is made to protrude below the discharge part 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big prize opening 2006, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows backward by the out ball detection member 3080 and is detected by the out exit sensor 3053. This can prevent the ball from being detected, and only the "out ball" received at the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection member 3080 is shown as being provided on the back unit 3000, but the invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so it can be compatible with the existing game panel 1100 that has an out recess 1123. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Moreover, according to this embodiment, it is driven into the gaming area 5a, and the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. Since the game ball B ("out ball") that was not accepted by any of the players can be detected by the out exit sensor 3053, the first sub out exit sensor 2403, and the second sub out exit sensor 3054, If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of game ball B into the opening is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act is being carried out with respect to a specific winning opening. It is possible to notify that fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting them, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole The number of "winning balls" counted by the detection of game balls B accepted in 2006, the number of "out balls", general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, first large The "ball output rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006. Although not shown in the drawings, a display section is provided on the rear side of the game board 5 to display a "ball payout rate".

In addition, on the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all balls") hit into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B ("all balls") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), since only the "out ball" is detected by the out hole sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, the "out ball" and "winning ball" are detected. By comparing the numbers of "," and "all balls," it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball jamming in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back and rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 415 to 419 and the like. FIG. 415(a) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 415(b) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 416 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 417 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 418 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back and rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 419 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back and rear effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost position in the back box 3010 (the front of the rear wall). The back rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have approximately the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back side effect unit 3100 includes a back side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back side movable mechanism 3120 that moves the back side movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a transparent decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a decorative body 3111 that is provided at the rear of the decorative body 3111 and has a plurality of decorative bodies on the front surface. It includes a rear decorative board 3114 on which a first LED 3114a and a second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative body base 3115 attached to a decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are each full-color LEDs. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear decorative board 3114 can decorate the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) with light emission.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 also includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b triangularly protruding leftward from near the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. have.

The rear movable mechanism 3120 has a U-shape that opens downward when viewed from the front, and includes a unit base 3121 that is installed inside the rear box 3010, and a columnar shape that extends vertically on the left side of the unit base 3121. A slide shaft 3122 supports the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a spiral shaft extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122. A spiral shaft 3123 in which a shaped groove is formed.

In addition, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a transmission gear 3124 in the form of a spur gear attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a motor gear 3125 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 connected to the rotating shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 is attached, the motor base 3127 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

The back movable mechanism 3120 also includes a slide guide 3130 that is screwed onto the spiral shaft 3123 and can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back movable decorative body 3110 from below, and a slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be raised and lowered so that its lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that biases the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131. a link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction as the link member 3133 moves up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction as the link member 3133 rotates and can come into contact with the lock protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110; It is equipped with

Further, the rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, a lower rear detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130. A front left cover 3137 is attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a front left cover 3137 is attached to the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connections between the front right cover 3138 attached, the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 attached to the front lower part of the front left cover 3137 and the production drive board 1720. The rear left relay board 3139 is installed between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138 and connects the rear decorative board 3114 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the effect drive board 1720. A rear right relay board 3140 is provided.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that absorbs shock by coming into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 that has moved downward. The upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 3122 are held between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 protrudes to the right from near the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a that is detected by a back and lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and cannot rotate around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can come into contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130. Furthermore, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can come into contact with the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached to be movable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 is made vertically movable only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 includes a lower protrusion 3131a protruding to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from near the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. and a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower projection 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the protruding pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 has a triangular shape when viewed from the front, with each vertex being rounded. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the upper apex from the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the protruding pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the locking member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The locking member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a flat upper end surface with a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and extends in the left-right direction. A contact surface 3134b that extends and can be contacted by the lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, It has a guide surface 3134c on which the locking protrusion 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the behind-the-scenes effect unit 3100 will be explained. In the normal state of the rear effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 418 (FIG. 419(a)), the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in a retracted position in which it has moved upward, and the slide guide 3130 is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 has moved to the right and is located in the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear movable decorative body is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the locking member 3134. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of 3110 is in contact with it.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 3132. Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in a clockwise direction about the rotation axis, and also biases the locking member 3134 in a direction to slide rightward. Therefore, the locking member 3134 is maintained at the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the relevant position for some reason (malfunction), the remaining members cannot prevent the rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving downward (falling). can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the lower rear detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

In the normal state of the retracted position, the back and rear production unit 3100 is located behind the back and upper production unit 3400, and is not visible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise in plan view) by the rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed into the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if this slide guide 3130 moves downward, the rear movable decorative body 3110 will not move downward from the retracted position because the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the locking member 3134. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back/rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 moves to the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It comes into contact with the upper end surface (see FIG. 419(b)). When the slide guide 3130 moves further downward with the back/rear lower detection sensor 3136 detecting the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 moves counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. Then, as the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 419(c)).

When the locking member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the locking member 3134 is released, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is not detected by the rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, and thereby stops falling and returns to the appearance position (see FIG. 419(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 does not come into contact with it.

In the back and rear effect unit 3100, in the state where the back and rear movable decorations 3110 are in the appearance position where they have fallen, the back and rear movable decorations 3110 are visible from the front (player side). In this state, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear decorative board 3114, the rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be decorated with light. Players can be entertained by the light-emitting decoration.

When returning the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the normal retracted position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the spiral shaft 3123 in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view). direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, as the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise, and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the locked position, contrary to the above. Become.

Furthermore, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing , the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 419(d)).

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to near the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking protrusion 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking protrusion 3116b contacts the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking protrusion 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the locking member 3134 to the left. As a result, the locking member 3134 slides to the right against the biasing force of the spring 3132 which attempts to move it to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking protrusion 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 due to the upward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure by the locking protrusion 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The locking member 3134 slides to the right by the biasing force of the spring 3132 and enters the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the locking member 3134 is positioned below the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the locking member 3134 prevents the rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the upper rear detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the normal state of the retracted position.

According to the back and rear effect unit 3100 of this embodiment, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 extending left and right can be dropped from the retracted position where it is invisible from the player side to the appearance position where it is visible. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players and strongly attract the interest of the players.

In addition, since the locking member 3134 that locks (regulates) the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is released by moving to the left, it can be rotated around the axis in the front and rear direction. Compared to the case where the lock is released by moving the back movable decorative body 3110 when the lock is released, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward.

[5-9d-1. Movable decorative body on the back]
Next, the back movable decorative body 3110 in the back and rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 420 to 434. FIG. 420 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative board. 421(a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 420, and FIG. 421(b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 420. FIG. 422(a) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body seen from the front, and FIG. 422(b) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body seen from the back. FIG. 423 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from the front, and FIG. 424 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from the rear. FIG. 425 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 426 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in broken lines in the front view of FIG. 425. FIG. 427(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 427(b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet at the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c) is a front view showing a portion of the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board at the same portion as the decorative body in (a).

Moreover, FIG. 428 is an enlarged sectional view showing an enlarged upper part of FIG. 421(a). FIG. 429 is an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 428. FIG. 430 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decoration by the decoration body and the decoration sheet, the light guide radiation plate, and the rear decoration board by enlarging a part of the front side of the rear movable decoration body. FIG. 431(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in the area of the first LED in cross section, and FIG. FIG. 6(c) is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide and radiation plate in the area where the light guide and radiation plate acts, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example of arrangement of one LED from the front. FIG. 432 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 433(a) is a front view of the back decorative board, and FIG. 433(b) is a rear view of the back decorative board. FIG. 434(a) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 434(b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part of a different form from that in FIG. 434(a). It is an enlarged sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of decoration body which had a metal decoration part of a form further different from (a) and (b).

The rear movable decoration body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. To be more specific, when viewed from the front, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is arranged between two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both left and right ends, and a horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151. It has a plurality of second decorative parts 3152 arranged in a row. The first decorative parts 3151 each imitate one cherry blossom flower. Although not shown, the second decorative parts 3152 each imitate a predetermined character, and by being arranged in rows on the left and right, they form a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In this way, the rear movable decoration body 3110 is decorated with a logo placed between two cherry blossom flowers.

As shown in FIGS. 420 to 424, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is a decoration that extends in the left-right direction and constitutes a part of the decorative portion 3150 with relief-like unevenness. a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having a transparent flat plate shape, and a transparent sheet-shaped decorative sheet provided with a decoration (picture) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative part 3150. 3112, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs provided in the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. A flat decorative base 3115 is attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative base 3114, and a flat decorative body base 3115 extends vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111. It includes a left slider 3116 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body with movable decorative body on the back]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b that is shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b that protrudes forward. It has a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion forming the outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusions 3111a in the first decorative part 3151 are formed on the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower, and in the central part imitating the stamens and pistils. . The first decorative projections 3111a in the second decorative portions 3152 are formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152 in double (two strips). The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that its front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided on the outside of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape that resembles a cherry blossom or flower petal, which is smaller than the first decorative part 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that its front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative part 3151 is curved. Moreover, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative part 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 in the decorative part 3150, respectively.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d ( In FIGS. 425 to 427, there are darkly shaded areas). The entire decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 428 and 434(a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment is provided at the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is not provided on the side of the As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made longer than when the metal decoration part 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. This makes it possible to improve insulation against electrostatic discharge and short circuits.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can impart a sense of luxury. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized due to the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The metal decoration part 3111d is provided in the second decoration part 3152 at a part of the back decoration board 3114 in front of the first LED 3114a, as shown in FIG. The first LED housing portion 3113c is made difficult to see from the front.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a, etc. of the rear back decorative board 3114 is transmitted through the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. By reflecting the light backward, the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear can be illuminated, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by hot stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). To explain in detail, first, the base material of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The base material of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted at a predetermined position in the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a etc. protrudes facing upward. At this time, above the base material of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate having an elastic lower surface and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a position a predetermined distance downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a on the base material of the decorative body 3111 (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b). The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, a metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 434(a)). .

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used to form the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment has elasticity in the portion that comes into contact with the decorative body 3111 to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred. Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along that surface, and the metal foil can be kept in good condition even on curved surfaces and other three-dimensional parts. It can be transferred (foil stamped). As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, compared to the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition.

In addition, although in the said embodiment, the metal decoration part 3111d was provided only in the front-end|tip part of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111, but it is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decorative part 3111d using a hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c. A decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, with the base material of the decorative body 3111 mounted on the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is applied to the second decorative stamp using a transfer sheet having metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). The first metal foil is lowered to a position lower than the portion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil stamping area FS2), and the first metal foil is applied to the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transcribe. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a different color from the first metal foil, the hot plate is moved so that it is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1) and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 434(b)). As a result, a decorative body 3111 is formed in which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b are provided with metal decorative parts 3111d of different colors without performing a masking process on the base material of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the base material of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film is peeled off (laser peeling) at a portion other than the first decorative protrusion 3111a using a laser beam. A decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 434(c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided on the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a in addition to the tip portion.

The decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e that is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recess 3111e is provided to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The rear recess 3111e equalizes the thickness of the decorative body 3111, thereby suppressing deformation due to resin sink during injection molding.

The rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at a portion of the flat rear surface corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recessed portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of a first contour portion 3112a, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern etc. of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen through the transparent decorative body 3111.

In addition, since the rear recessed portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of a first light diffusing portion 3112c and a second light diffusing portion 3112d, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. located at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the gap allows light irradiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. , diffuse reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the rear recess 3111e. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not emitting light, light from the front illuminates the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, i.e. , the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 forming the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The attachment boss 3111f is for attaching the decoration base 3115 to the rear side of the decoration 3111. The attachment boss 3111f is provided at a location directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Thereby, the attachment boss 3111f is difficult to see from the front (player side) due to the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided at a portion in front of the attachment boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the attachment boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet with movable decorative body on the back]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet with a pattern applied to the rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152, except for the rear part of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111, and in the central part of the first decorative part 3151. A second contour portion 3112b is provided at a portion between the first contour portion 3112a, which corresponds to the second decorative portion 3152, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is formed doubly on the decorative body 3111; A first light diffusing portion 3112c is provided at a portion of the decorative body 3111 that corresponds to the first decorative portion 3151 and is located inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second light provided on the inner side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that corresponds to the second decorative part 3152 and is provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 (the rear part of the third decorative protrusion 3111c). It has a diffusion section 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided at the rear of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. have.

The first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, as shown in FIG. It is said to be the area where the interference fringes of light are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed to be opaque. In this embodiment, the hologram portion in the first contour portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. Furthermore, the portion of the first outline portion 3112a that resembles a cherry blossom flower is colored using white or pink. Note that the ink (paint) used for the pattern etc. may contain glitter particles that sparkle.

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, the first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metallic decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, continuity can be provided to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the sense of perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made less noticeable.

Further, the first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the images and holograms on the front side. In addition, the light emitted from the light guide and radiation plate 3113 can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide and radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, the amount of light emitted forward from the transparent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back movable decoration body 3110 can be decorated with brighter light. At the same time, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be more uniformly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the first contour part 3112a is provided on the outside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, the first contour part 3112a is provided on the outside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, so that It is located at the rear of the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no diffuse reflection, and the pattern and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

The second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed into a black line shape with a predetermined width, as shown in the figure. This second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided twice on the decorative body 3111. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b brings out the double metal decoration portions 3111d. Therefore, the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To explain in detail, the first light diffusing section 3112c is formed into a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 427(b) etc., in the first light diffusing part 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower imitated by the first decorative part 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed so that the shading becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as one goes toward the surface. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing part 3112c is made to emit light, the pear-like pattern of the first light diffusing part 3112c causes a slight As a result, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the light-emitting decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 is transparent and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities that can disrupt light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided entirely inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light and dark hatching in FIGS. 425 to 427. It is being The second light diffusing portion 3112d is transparent and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities that can disrupt light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of this embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white color. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing part 3112d is made to emit light, the halftone pattern of the second light diffusing part 3112d causes a predetermined The second decorative portion 3152 consisting of the characters can be decorated with light with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing part 3112c and the second light diffusing part 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the part of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and are located on the rear surface of the part of the decorative body 3111. A rear recessed portion 3111e that is recessed forward is provided. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface at the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. The state will be as follows. Due to the gap, light irradiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front causes the first light to The diffusion section 3112c and the second light diffusion section 3112d become brighter. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not emitting light, light from the front illuminates the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, i.e. , the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 forming the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 This constitutes the remainder of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decoration body 3111. In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear side of a transparent sheet serving as a base material. ing. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Moreover, the first light diffusing part 3112c and the second light diffusing part 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by pasting a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusion section 3112c and the second light diffusion section 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since this transparent part 3112e is provided at the rear of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metallic decorative part 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 is transmitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and irradiated onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative part 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side side remains transparent. The light irradiated onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. For this reason, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration as if a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). In addition, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transparent portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment is formed to have approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 with the first outline portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. The decoration of the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be made to look larger. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 on the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to give a visual impact to the players and attract their attention, and also to entertain the players with the large decorations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the players.

Note that in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may also be provided at a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d. As a result, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side is visible through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. , it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 from becoming unsightly. Furthermore, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to the rear part of the metal decorative portion 3111d, the first decorative protrusion in the first contour portion 3112a can be passed through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a is visible, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated with the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be decorated with the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Even if the decorative portion 3150 is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of rear movable decorative body]
As shown in FIGS. 423 and 424, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted; A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f on the opposite side from the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. .

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a in front view.

The main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface that is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by approximately 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the rear end of this flange portion 3113b protrudes further rearward than the rear decorative board 3114 when assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110.

The first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumferential shape. As shown in FIG. 426, the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c are provided behind a portion of the decorative part 3150 with low transparency when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. To be more specific, in the first decorative part 3151, the plurality of first LED housing parts 3113c are provided behind the part of the first light diffusing part 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 where the pink shading by the dots is thick. ing. To be more specific, the first LED accommodating part 3113c provided in the first decorative part 3151 is located closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. The inner circumference is rectangular, and the center of the long side is located on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c provided in the second decorative part 3152 are located behind the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second outline part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It is being For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided at the second decorative portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152. In addition, when the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED accommodating parts 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 427(c) and 431(c). It is formed in a state that By connecting the first LED accommodating parts 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a part in the main body part 3113a that is thinner than the thickness of the main part 3113a, thereby preventing damage to the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating part 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the main body part 3113a. As a result, when the light that is guided inside the main body part 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front or rear surface) of the main body part 3113a reaches the first LED housing part 3113c, the light is A portion is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a by the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the remainder passes through the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and enters the first LED accommodating portion. 3113c. When the light emitted inside from one of the four surfaces of the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating section 3113c reaches another surface of the inner circumferential surface, a part of the light on that surface reaches the first LED accommodating section 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In other words, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body part 3113a inside the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED accommodating part 3113c, it radiates to the inside of the first LED accommodating part 3113c. Part of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface and the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c that is incident on the main body 3113a side, so that the light that has passed through the first LED accommodating part 3113c The amount of light will be greatly reduced compared to before passing through.

For this reason, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. Note that since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is accommodated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the first LED 3114a cannot block the light that is about to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. In the region where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light is prevented from passing to the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, by providing the first LED accommodating part 3113c at an optimal position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative part 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating part 3113c can be It is possible to prevent light from being guided to another second decorative part 3152 and decorated with light, and it is possible to ensure that only a desired second decorative part 3152 among the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 is decorated with light. .

To explain in more detail the operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. In order to decorate with light, a first LED housing part 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decorative part 3152, and light is irradiated into each first LED housing part 3113c toward the inside of the second decorative part 3152. The first LED 3114a is provided so as to In this embodiment, the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, so that they are connected to each other. It is a single hole. Thereby, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" placed below the "i" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is made to emit light, there is a risk that the "i" provided above the "☆" will be decorated with emitting light. An extending portion 3113j extending to cover the upper part of the “☆” is provided in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that accommodates the first LED 3114a for decorating a part of the “i” with light emission. ing. This extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" from being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is decorated with luminescence, "i" will not be decorated with luminescence. Further, the extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for illuminating the “i” from being guided toward the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portions 3152 such as "i" and "☆" can be reliably decorated with light, and the desired presentation effect can be fully exhibited.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference, as shown in FIG. 430 and the like. The plurality of second LED accommodating parts 3113d are provided behind five circular parts imitating stamens provided around the center of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom flower. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing part 3113c and one second LED housing part 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED housing part 3113d, the light is A part of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the second LED accommodating part 3113d so as to be diffused in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body part 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower, the second LED accommodating part 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown, the light irradiated into the main body part 3113a from the first LED 3114a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing part 3113d. The light can make the petals brighter and decorative.

One of the plurality of reflection parts 3113e is formed in the shape of a square pyramid, and is arranged in rows so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, portions around the first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect the light emitted in the direction along the plate surface forward within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and emit the light forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is formed so that the rear part is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection parts 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body part 3113a, the light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative part 3150 made up of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed, there is no need to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the design change can be easily accommodated, reducing costs. can suppress the increase in

The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface facing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c flush with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving part 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body part 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be irradiated into the main body part 3113a. I can do it. In addition, when the leg portions 3113f are assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surfaces thereof are in contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114, and there is a gap between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114. can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection section 3113g is provided in a C-chamfer shape along the side opposite to the first LED accommodating section 3113c at the rear end of the leg section 3113f. This auxiliary reflection section 3113g is for reflecting forward the light irradiated from the first LED 3114a to the leg section 3113f.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for constructing a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The surface can be made difficult to see, and the appearance can be prevented from becoming unsightly. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward than the rear decorative board 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is connected to the rear decorative board. 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic components 3114e) can be made longer, static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, and the rear decorative board 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment, the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are holes penetrating the main body part 3113a. Heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b accommodated in the second LED accommodating portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the influence of heat on the rear decorative board 3114 can be reduced.

Moreover, since the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are not blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, etc. Even if the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are formed in a concave shape (groove shape) with a bottom that does not penetrate through the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to alleviate the rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b, and it is possible to suppress the thermal influence on the rear decorative board 3114 and the like. In addition, in the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are closely connected to each other and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that has the extension portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a and to further alleviate a sudden temperature rise.

Furthermore, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating part 3113c and a second LED accommodating part 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the rear surface of the main body part 3113a can be brought as close as possible to the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has leg portions 3113f that protrude rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portions 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. , a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body part 3113a and the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. As a result, heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the rear decorative board 3114 can be suppressed to suppress the effects of heat. can be reduced.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides the light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the rear decorative board 3114, and directs the light from the reflecting portion 3113e to the substantially entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted forward even in a portion of the main body portion 3113a where the rear decorative board 3114 is not provided at the rear. In other words, even if the rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the rear decorative board 3114 can be made smaller than the main body part 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body part 3113a and the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made longer, and the decorative body 3111 can be made smaller. The creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to make it easier to exhibit the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9d-5. Rear decorative board of rear movable decorative body]
The rear decorative board 3114 has a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. The rear decorative board 3114 includes a flat board main body 3114c, copper foils 3114d (see FIG. 432, etc.) provided on the front and rear surfaces of the board main body 3114c, respectively, and forming a predetermined circuit pattern. It has electronic components 3114e (see FIG. 433(b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

Further, the rear decorative board 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, etc. Furthermore, although not shown, the rear decorative board 3114 has a marking section near the mounted components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e that indicates the mounted components. have. The marking portion is provided by silk printing in a predetermined inconspicuous color (for example, yellow) from above the coating film.

The rear decorative board 3114 has an outer circumferential shape that roughly follows the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between it and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a substantially constant size. In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has an outer circumferential shape that approximately follows the inner circumference of a flange portion 3115b in a decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and there is approximately a slight gap between the inner circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to a constant size. That is, the rear decorative board 3114 is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

In the first decorative portion 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. (Metal decoration part 3111d) is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the inner tip. Thereby, the first LED 3114a of the first decorative portion 3151 can decorate each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms with light.

In addition, in the second decorative portion 3152 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged on the left and right, the first decorative protrusion provided twice on the decorative body 3111 It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 near the rear of the second decorative portion 3111a. Thereby, the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right can be illuminated one by one by the first LED 3114a of the second decoration part 3152.

As shown in FIG. 430, etc., the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are located in a circular part imitating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central part imitating a cherry blossom flower in the first decorative part 3151. It is located at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, which corresponds to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. Thereby, the five parts imitating the stamens in the central part of the first decoration part 3151 can be decorated with light emission, respectively, by the second LED 3114b.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can emit light forward, when the second LED 3114b is made to emit light, the central part of the first decorative part 3151, which resembles a stamen, is made to look more like a stamen than other parts. It is also possible to emit point light with high brightness, which can strongly attract the attention of players. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decoration part 3150, it is possible to provide a part that emits light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a and a part that emits light in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b. It is possible to perform a variety of light emitting effects, and it is possible to make it difficult for players to get bored.

The substrate body 3114c is a rigid substrate that is slightly thinner than the body portion 3113a of the light guide and radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the board body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (the shaded portion in FIG. 432). As shown in FIG. 432, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (in this embodiment, SL=1 mm) inward from the outer peripheral edge of the board main body 3114c. ing. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance from the external conductive member (for example, the metal decoration part 3111d of the decoration body 3111) of the back decorative board 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are secured, and the discharge of static electricity etc. Insulation against short circuits can be improved, and damage to the rear decorative board 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, the outer periphery of the copper foil 3114d is provided to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the board body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the heat can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, and the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b , and the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has a predetermined width on the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side to facilitate forward reflection of the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the board main body 3114c side. (the area surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 432). The light reflection auxiliary area 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d, as shown in FIGS. 429 and 431(a). As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted, so the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f approaches the vertical line of the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, making it easier to reflect the light emitted toward the substrate main body 3114c forward. Can be done.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 431(a) etc., the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the rear end of the leg 3113f protruding toward the rear of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since the leg portions 3113f are brought into contact with each other, the leg portions 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving part 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased. and decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with brighter light.

Further, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 431(a), etc.). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface is worn out or rolled up due to contact with the leg portions 3113f, only the front surface of the board body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. Never. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulation properties, making it possible to suppress damage due to short circuits caused by static electricity or the like.

As shown in FIG. 428, etc., the rear decorative board 3114 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, so that a flange portion 3115b (described later) of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be assembled. 3113b, the outer periphery is double surrounded, making it difficult to see the outer periphery from the outside and preventing deterioration in appearance. In addition, when the rear decorative board 3114 is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the light guide and radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration part 3111d on the front side of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 is caused by the presence of the flange part 3115b of the decoration body base 3115. Since it meanders around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, causing damage to the rear decorative board 3114. This can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to be 10 mm or more, or a distance that can accommodate a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

In addition, since the back rear decorative board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back rear decorative board 3114 allows the members (in this embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decoration sheet 3112 and decoration body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 etc. provided at the rear, so that the decoration part 3150 can be unintentionally decorated with light. It is possible to avoid this, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 can reliably perform the desired light emitting effect. In addition, since the back rear decorative board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the rear side from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the back rear decorative board 3114, and the rear movable decoration Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 is configured such that only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, are provided on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d, the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body part 3113a. Therefore, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, the rear decorative board 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, resistor, etc. as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114, the black electronic component 3114e is hidden from view from the front. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 that cannot be seen from the front, there is no need to apply white or other colored paint to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see. The cost of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base with movable decorative body on the back]
The decoration base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decoration base 3115 passes through a flat cover plate part 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114, a flange part 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate part 3115a, and the cover plate part 3115a. The right slider rear portion 3115d extends downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a in front view.

The outer circumferential shape of the covering plate part 3115a is a shape that roughly follows the inner circumference of the flange part 3113b of the light guide and radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed at a substantially constant distance between the cover plate part 3115a and the inner circumference of the flange part 3113b. It is formed to a size that fits. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (ornament base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the cover plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the rear decorative board 3114 from the rear and protect the rear decorative board 3114. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 428 etc., the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, and extends its front end forward of the rear decorative board 3114. protrudes so that it is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the rear decorative board 3114 from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. In addition, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, it is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative board 3114. Due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, the shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front side of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made to meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back decorative board 3114 and damaging the back decorative board 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have slit-shaped portions that are long in the left and right directions, and portions that are larger than the slit-shaped portions. These plurality of openings 3115c allow heat from the electronic components 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 to be released to the outside of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby affecting the thermal effect on the rear decorative board 3114. can be reduced.

The right slider rear part 3115d cooperates with the right slider front part 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to form a right slider 3117.

Furthermore, the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to come into contact with a portion of the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. By bringing the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 into contact with the front surface of the plurality of protrusions 3115e, a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate part 3115a. . Thereby, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily dissipated through the gap between the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate section 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of the movable decorative body on the back]
Next, the main effects of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in this embodiment will be explained. The rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guiding radiation plate 3113, and the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the light guiding radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body. The attachment boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 is attached to the decorative body base 3115 with the rear decorative board 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and assembled (see FIG. 421, etc.). Thereby, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front and back direction is made relatively thin.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111, and a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that protrude forward. Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has a first contour portion 3112a equipped with a hologram on which a pattern and light interference fringes are displayed, the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 is Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a lens effect. and holograms can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel that it is thin, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be fully realized. By making full use of this ability, players can be entertained.

Further, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour part 3112a, etc. can give a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. , the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so the degree of freedom in arranging the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it can be placed in a more effective position inside the game board 5. By providing the rear movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to easily realize a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players. In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, it is relatively easier to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that can provide a good-looking pachinko machine 1, can provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy a variety of performances, and has a high appeal to players and can be differentiated. can do.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative part 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. Therefore, the metallic luster of the metal decorative part 3111d can make the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 stand out, and can strongly attract the player's interest. Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the metal decoration part 3111d, and it is also possible to give a sense of luxury. As a result, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position where it cannot be seen by the player to the appearance position where it can be seen, the luxurious decorative part 3150 can be seen, giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that something good is going to happen, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and the decorative sheet 3112 has approximately the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, so that the first outline portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is , it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3110 has the decorative sheet 3112 approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear, thereby creating a sense of unity in the game. It is possible to show this to the players, give a visual impact to the players and attract their attention, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the large decorations, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the players' interest.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a provided at the rear of the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d and the second The two-contoured portion 3112b makes it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, suppresses deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150, and fully exhibits the decorative effect.

Furthermore, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, in each of the first decorative part 3151 and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a are provided so as to surround the respective outer peripheries, so that the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually decorated with light emission. As a result, the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right can be decorated with light emission in order, or only a specific first decoration part 3151 or second decoration part 3152 can be decorated with light emission. By appropriately embellishing the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 with light emitting decoration, it is possible to show a variety of light emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest. can.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 using the side view type first LED 3114a, and then The light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 because the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e to decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The distance can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, so even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front and rear direction, the decorative body 3111 The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly decorated with light, and players can be entertained by the good-looking light-emitting decoration. Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a can uniformly decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 with light, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced. It is possible to reliably realize a pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a of a side view type used for planar light emission, and the second LED 3114b of a top view type. ) In the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect), it is possible to add a region that emits light in a dotted manner with high brightness by the second LED 3114b to a region decorated with light emitting light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a. As a result, it is possible to add sharpness to the light emitting effect by emitting light from the second LED 3114b, making it easier to present the optimal light emitting effect according to the gaming state, making it possible to further entertain the player, and making the game more enjoyable. It is possible to increase expectations for the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest.

In addition, the rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided with a first LED accommodating part 3113c in which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light receiving part 3113c is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in a position close to the desired area to be decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a, the desired area can be decorated with light emission more brightly, resulting in a more dramatic effect. This allows players to enjoy the highly luminous decorations.

Furthermore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first LED accommodating part 3113c and a second LED in which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear. Since it has the housing part 3113d, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the rear surface of the main body part 3113a is connected to the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 comes into contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114, and the rear movable decoration body 3110 is arranged between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative board 3114. Since a gap is formed in the rear decorative board 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be released through the clearance, and the heat from the rear decorative board 3114 can be dissipated. It is possible to suppress temperature rise and reduce the effects of heat.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and has a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. 3115c, by raising and lowering the rear movable decorative body 3110, the surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap or opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, Heat from the electronic components 3114e and the like can be released, thereby suppressing a rise in temperature of the rear decorative board 3114.

In addition, a temperature sensor is provided on the back movable decorative body 3110, and when the temperature of the back movable decorative body 3110 (back rear decorative board 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down. The frequency (probability) of execution may be increased. As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, thereby making it possible to ventilate the surface of the rear decorative board 3114, cooling the rear decorative board 3114, and suppressing the occurrence of problems caused by heat.

Furthermore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative board 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of metal foil provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 is made possible by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, allowing light to be emitted. Since it snakes around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be achieved, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, and the back decorative board 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided at a position a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c on the back rear decorative board 3114. This predetermined distance SL also makes it possible to lengthen the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, thereby increasing the insulation against discharges such as static electricity and short circuits, thereby suppressing damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharges and the like.

In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not yet. Thereby, the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative board 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, since the metal decorative part 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative part 3111d is reduced compared to the case where the metal decorative part 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to reduce the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if discharge occurs to the rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is driven by the rear rear drive motor 3126 to move up and down (move) between the retracted position where it is moved upward and the appearance position where it is moved downward. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, right slider 3117, etc. every time it goes up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to accumulate on the surface of the rear movable decorative body 3110. This rear movable decorative body 3110 has a decorative body 3111 and a decorative body base 3115 that make up the front surface, which are made of synthetic resin with low conductivity. Static electricity accumulated throughout is difficult to discharge all at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, static electricity is likely to accumulate in the metal decorative part 3111d on the front side of the decorative body 3111, but as described above, static electricity is easily accumulated from the metal decorative part 3111d. Since the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative board 3114 is sufficiently long, the rear decorative board 3114 will not be damaged due to static electricity discharge, and the movable effect in which the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, and the movable rear movable decorative body It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy both the light-emitting effect in which the 3110 is decorated with light-emitting light.

Note that when the area of the metal decorative part 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative part 3111d to GND (ground). Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the rear decorative board 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of rear movable decorative body]
Next, referring mainly to FIG. 435, a rear movable decorative body 3160, a rear movable decorative body 3170, a rear movable decorative body 3180, etc., which are different from the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above, will be explained. Explain in detail. FIG. 435(a) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section the configuration of a rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the rear movable decorative body of FIG. 420, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the composition of a decoration object in cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the composition of a rear movable decoration object of the fourth embodiment in cross section.

As schematically shown in FIG. 435(a), the rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment includes a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a decorative body 3161 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A decorative sheet 3162 in the form of a sheet with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and configured to radiate light in a direction along the front surface forward inside the decorative sheet 3162, and a light guide radiation plate 3163. A rear decorative board 3164 is provided on the front surface of which is mounted a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate light into the interior of the interior of the display device 3163 in a direction along the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the rear movable decorative body 3160 includes a main body 3161a in the form of a transparent flat plate, a flange 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3161a, and a metal part provided on the front surface of the main body 3161a. It has a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be decorated with relief-like unevenness. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

The decorative sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet with a predetermined decoration (picture) printed on it. In this decorative sheet 3162, a portion of the decoration with low transparency is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed to have a smaller size than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed into a flat plate shape with the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and includes an LED accommodating portion 3163a into which the LEDs 3164a of the rear decorative board 3164 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LED accommodating portions provided on the rear surface. It has a reflecting part 3163b. The LED accommodating portion 3163a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. The plurality of reflection parts 3163b each have a triangular cross-section and are recessed forward, and are provided only at predetermined locations. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are each provided to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a. . In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that even if the plurality of reflection parts 3163b are configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, like the reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 described above, Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative board 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The rear decorative board 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED accommodating portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from the rear. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces thereof at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164. In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the rear decorative substrate 3164.

In the rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the front surface of the rear decorative board 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3160 in the front and rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3164. As a result, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the rear decorative board 3164 are covered by the flange portion 3161b, making their outer peripheral surfaces difficult to see from the outside. It looks good.

This rear movable decorative body 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164, so that the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the rear decorative board 3164 (copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative part 3161c flows to the rear decorative board 3164, causing the rear decorative board 3164 to have a sufficient creepage distance EL. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

In this manner, the rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that the rear movable decorative body 3160 may be provided with a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the rear rear decorative board 3164.

Subsequently, the rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an external decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the external decorative body 3171 (frame-shaped), as schematically shown in FIG. 435(b). a light-transmitting flat interior decoration body 3172 that closes the inner decoration body 3172; and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided at the rear of the interior decoration body 3172 and radiates light forward in a direction along the entire surface inside the interior decoration body 3172. , a rear decorative board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface to irradiate light into the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 in a direction along the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the rear movable decorative body 3170 includes a main body portion 3171a that has a frame shape and extends back and forth, a support portion 3171b that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body portion 3171a. It has a metal decoration part 3171c provided on the front surface. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

Although not shown, the interior decoration body 3172 has a relief-like decoration with unevenness. The interior decoration body 3172 is attached to close the front opening of the frame-shaped exterior decoration body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have approximately the same size as the interior decoration body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the exterior decoration body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED accommodating portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the rear decorative board 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflective portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and has a rectangular inner periphery along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portions 3173b extend in an arc shape centered on a predetermined LED housing portion 3173a, and are provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflection parts 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from each determined LED housing part 3173a forward. In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that even if the plurality of reflection parts 3173b are configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, like the reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 described above, Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative board 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The rear decorative board 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED accommodating portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from the rear. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces at a predetermined distance SL inside from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174. Further, the rear decorative board 3174 has a coating film made of white solder resist formed on the front surface (both sides).

In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, an internal decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of an external decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the external decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the internal decorative body 3172 are substantially coincident with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the interior decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In addition, in the back rear movable decoration body 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is attached to the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the front surface of the rear decorative board 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3170 in the front and rear direction is thin. In addition, in the rear movable decoration body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the interior decoration body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decoration board 3174. In this rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the rear rear decorative board 3174 are covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer circumferential surfaces of these are covered from the outside. It makes it harder to see and makes it look better.

This rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174 with the main body part 3171a extending to the rear of the external decorative body 3171, so that from the metal decorative part 3171c on the front side of the main body part 3171a. The creepage distance EL to (the copper foil of) the rear decorative board 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the rear decorative board 3174, and the back decorative board 3174 can be prevented from being damaged.

In this manner, the rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the interior decoration body 3172. Further, the rear movable decorative body 3170 may be provided with a decorative base that covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3174.

Subsequently, the rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an external decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the external decorative body 3181 (frame-shaped), as schematically shown in FIG. 435(c). an interior decoration body 3182 with translucent properties that closes the inner decoration body 3182; and a rear decoration board 3183 on the front surface of which is mounted a plurality of LEDs 3183a that are provided at the rear of the interior decoration body 3182 and can emit light forward. It is equipped with.

The outer decoration body 3181 of the rear movable decoration body 3180 includes a main body portion 3181a in the shape of a flat plate frame, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. It has a covering metal decorative part 3181c. The metal decoration part 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. This metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or by vapor deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decoration body 3182 includes a flat body part 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body part 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange part 3181b, and and a flange portion 3182b extending to the flange portion 3182b. Although not shown in the drawings, the main body portion 3182a has a relief-like decoration with unevenness formed on substantially the entire surface thereof.

The rear decorative board 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the interior decorative body 3182. In other words, the rear decorative board 3183 is formed in a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3183. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces thereof at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3183. In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the rear decorative substrate 3183.

In the assembled state of the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative board 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. In the rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the internal decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the external decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the internal decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the external decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered by the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 prevents the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3182 and the rear decoration board 3183 from being seen from the outside.

This rear movable decorative body 3180 has a flange portion 3182b of an internal decorative body 3182 provided inside a flange portion 3181b of an external decorative body 3181 provided with a metal decorative portion 3181c, and a flange portion 3182b of an internal decorative body 3182. Since the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body part 3182a is apart from the inner periphery of the flange part 3182b of the interior decoration body 3182, the copper of the rear decorative board 3183 (of the rear decorative board 3183) The creepage distance EL to the metal decorative portion 3181c can be set to a sufficient distance to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3181c from flowing to the back decorative board 3183 and damaging the back decorative board 3183. can do.

In this way, the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the interior decoration body 3182. Further, the rear movable decorative body 3180 may be provided with a decorative base that covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3183.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 436 to 439 and the like. Figure 436 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit from the rear. FIG. Fig. 437 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 438 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit disassembled and seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 439 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front.

The back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250 are located on both the left and right sides of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 of the back lower middle production unit 3300 when assembled on the game board 5, and are visible from the front. It is made visible through the transparent game panel 1100, front unit 2000, etc.

First, the back lower left effect unit 3200 will be explained. The back lower left direction unit 3200 is provided at the rear of the back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 having a translucent back lower left rotation decoration body 3201 having an axis 3201a that protrudes rearward, and has a rear lower left rotation decoration body 3201. a back lower left decorative body 3202 having a back lower left decorative body 3202; a back lower left decorative board 3203 provided at the rear of the back lower left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached, a back lower left decorative body 3202 is attached, and a unit base 3204 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. , is equipped with.

In addition, the back lower left production unit 3200 includes a back lower left drive motor 3205 that is attached to the front of the unit base 3204 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and a back lower left drive motor 3205 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the back lower left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206 is engaged with the drive gear 3206, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and is engaged with the drive gear 3206. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the second transmission gear 3208 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208, and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower left rotation decorative body 3201. A third transmission gear 3209 in the form of a spur gear is provided, and a front cover 3210 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202.

The lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. An axial shaft 3201a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length that passes through the back lower left decorative body 3202, the back lower left decorative board 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back lower left decorative body 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 one behind the other, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is shaped like a.

In the back lower left decorative board 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back lower left decorative board 3203 is provided with a back lower left detection sensor 3203a that detects the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back lower left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative board 3203. In a state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 439). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back lower left drive motor 3205, the back lower left production unit 3200 of this embodiment is operated by The lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be rotated around an axis in the front and back direction. Further, the back lower left presentation unit 3200 can decorate the back lower left rotating decoration body 3201 and the back lower left decoration body 3202 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the back lower left decorative board 3203.

Next, the back lower right effect unit 3250 will be explained. The back lower right direction production unit 3250 is provided at the rear of the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 having a translucent back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 having an axis 3251a that protrudes rearward, and has a rear lower right rotation decoration body 3251. a back lower right decorative body 3252 having a back lower right decorative body 3252; a back lower right decorative board 3253 provided at the rear of the back lower right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached, a back lower right decorative body 3252 is attached, and a unit base 3254 is attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. , is equipped with.

In addition, the back bottom right production unit 3250 includes a back bottom right drive motor 3255 that is attached to the front of the unit base 3254 so that its rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and a back bottom right drive motor 3255 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the back bottom right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 meshes with the drive gear 3256 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 meshes with the first transmission gear 3257. A second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the second transmission gear 3258 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3258 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3251a of the lower right rotation decorative body 3251. A front cover 3260 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the back lower right decorative body 3252.

The back-bottom clockwise rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. An axial shaft 3251a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length that passes through the back lower right decorative body 3252, the back lower right decorative board 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back bottom right decorative body 3252 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 one behind the other, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is shaped like a.

In the back lower right decorative board 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back lower right decorative board 3253 is provided with a back lower right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back lower right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that projects forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative board 3253. In a state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 439). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back bottom right drive motor 3255, the back bottom right production unit 3250 of the present embodiment transfers the back The lower right rotation decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front and back direction. Further, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 can decorate the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 and the back bottom right decorative body 3252 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the back bottom right decorative board 3253.

[5-9f. Back and middle production unit]
Next, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 440 to 447 and the like. FIG. 440(a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 440(b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Fig. 441 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 442 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. Fig. 443 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 444 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 445 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising and lowering of the back and middle decoration unit by the back and middle lifting mechanism in the back and middle production unit. FIG. 446(a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back bottom center rotating decoration of the back bottom center decoration unit in the back bottom center presentation unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 447 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back inner decoration unit in the lower back inner production unit from the front.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower middle production unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250. The back lower middle decoration unit 3300 includes a back lower middle decoration unit 3320 having a back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back lower middle lifting mechanism that raises and lowers the back lower middle decoration unit 3320. 3350.

The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle direction production unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. This back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeric decorations formed in a relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface in circles at every 60 degree angle in a clockwise direction around the center. arranged around the circumference. This lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has translucency. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a recess 3311 on the rear surface that can accommodate a diffusion lens 3321, a lower back middle first decorative board 3322, and the front end side of a board fixing member 3323 in a lower back inner decorative body unit 3320, which will be described later. have.

As shown in FIGS. 443 and 444, the back lower center decoration unit 3320 includes a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the back lower center rotating decoration 3310, and a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the diffusion lens 3321. A rear lower middle first decorative board 3322 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side and a diffusion lens 3321 are attached to sandwich the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 from the rear side, and protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape. The substrate fixing member 3323 has a shaft portion 3323a, and a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is inserted for relative rotation. A base 3324.

The lower back inner decoration unit 3320 also includes an area detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxially with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference that is coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. It includes a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 at the top, and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324.

Further, the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 is provided at the rear of the rotation base 3324, and has a penetrating opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and has transparency. a second decorative board 3329, which is provided behind the lower back decorative body 3328 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 are attached to the front surface of the back side and can detect the area detection piece 3325, and a position specifying sensor 3330 is attached to the front side of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back and can detect the position detection piece 3326. A sensor 3331 is provided.

In addition, the back lower center decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back center decorative board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached, and the back lower center decoration 3328 is attached. a movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that its rotating shaft protrudes forward; A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. and an elevating slider 3336 that is slidably guided in the vertical direction by a slide rail 3360.

The front end sides of the diffuser lens 3321, the first decorative board 3322, and the board fixing member 3323 are located between the rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state. It is housed in the recess 3311 of the rotating decorative body 3310 and is not in contact with either the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 or the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side, the part of the number decoration (relief) on the lower back side rotating decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light emission. The LEDs on the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side are full-color LEDs. Furthermore, the LEDs on the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back are full-color LEDs.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 446(a), the area detection piece 3325 detects the numbers “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” on the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310. It is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis, passing through the numeral decoration and ending between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

A plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 each protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 on a circumference having a larger diameter than the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the number decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. . In this embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis, and There is an interval of 2×β degrees (θ degrees − α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 446(a)). .

A plurality of (three in this case) area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged at angular intervals of θ degrees (60 degrees) with the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 as the center. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in clockwise order: a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the numbers "3", "4", and "5" with the "1" decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 positioned directly above the center of rotation. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numerical decoration (see FIG. 446(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has a lifting pin 3332a that projects rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. This elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the back lower middle elevating mechanism 3350. The back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor whose rotational position can be detected.

This lower back middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotating gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. Can be done. In addition, the back lower center decoration body unit 3320 is configured such that the lower back center rotating decoration body 331 And the back lower middle decoration body 3328 can be decorated with light emission.

As shown in FIGS. 441 and 442, the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 extends left and right, and has a unit base 3351 attached to both ends of the back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. A lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so that its rotating shaft protrudes rearward. A drive gear 3353 in the form of a gear, a first transmission gear 3354 in the form of a spur gear that is in mesh with the drive gear 3353 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a first transmission gear 3354 in mesh with the first transmission gear 3354. A second transmission gear 3355 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a gear portion 3356a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity, and an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached to the upper center of the front surface of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction.

In addition, the rear lower intermediate lifting mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at its proximal end extending in the left-right direction, and in the longitudinal direction in which the drive pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted. A second slit 3357b extends in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side of the first slit 3357a and into which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , and a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip of the unit base 3351. A lower back middle relay board 3358 is attached to the front surface.

Furthermore, the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 has a vertically extending elevating slit 3359a into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and is attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359, and is attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359, and the movable base 3332 of the decorative body unit 3320 has a vertically extending vertically extending vertically extending slit 3359a. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from behind, and a tip side of the lifting arm 3357 move upward in the moving direction (front view). A spring 3362 biases the lifting arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

The lower back middle elevation drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part of the unit base 3351 to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356 . The tip of the lifting arm 3357 extends to the left of the lifting cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes a lower back middle first decorative board 3322, a lower back middle second decorative board 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lifting drive motor. 3352, relays the connection between the back lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358a and the effect drive board 1720.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in a lower back inner decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the front cover 3359 with respect to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lifting and lowering slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back/lower middle elevation drive motor 3352, the back/lower intermediate lifting mechanism 3350 is connected to the lifting cam gear via the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. The drive pin 3356b that revolves due to the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 can be raised and lowered together with the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 which is slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the back bottom center rotating decorative body 3310 and the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 in the back bottom center presentation unit 3300 will be described in detail. In a normal state, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position where the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the distal end side of the elevating arm 3357 in the back lower middle elevating mechanism 3350 is located lower than the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip moves the back lower middle relay board 3358 up and down. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 445(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution thereof and near the proximal end within the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . Specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a biasing force is applied by the spring 3362 to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in a clockwise direction, the line of force of the biasing force is transmitted to the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. , and passes through the center of rotation of the lifting cam gear 3356, so the lifting cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the back lower center decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position due to the biasing force of the spring 3362. The biasing force of 3362 does not act on the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end of the lifting arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a, , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the back-bottom center production unit 3300 has the number decoration located at the top among the plurality of number decorations in the back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 located inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be clearly seen from the front (player side) (see FIG. 389, etc.). In addition, in a normal state, the number decoration located at the lowest side is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the number decoration is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. By making the LED of the second decorative board 3329 emit light, in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the lower back center rotary decoration body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be decorated with light-emitting light (see FIG. 398, etc.) ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back/lower middle elevation drive motor 3352, a As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the driving pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the driving pin 3356b slides inside the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end side moves upward.

As the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the lifting arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. , and the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides toward the base end within the first slit 3357a. At this time, on the lifting arm 3357, a biasing force is applied in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, so that the biasing force assists the upward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, and The load on the lift drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When this drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the proximal end of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back center decoration unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back center decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position in which it has moved to the highest position.

When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back center decoration unit 3320, the line of force of that force will hit the first slit 3357a. Since the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the rear lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In addition, in the state where the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may further revolve to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320, the lifting cam gear 3356 is rotated clockwise by the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end of the lifting arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a, , the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented.

When the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, the game ball rolling in the game area 5a B is located above the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and All numeric decorations are clearly visible from the side (see Figure 479).

In order to return the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 from the raised position to the lowered position, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the drive gear 3353 in the opposite direction to the above, and the lifting arm 3357 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. When the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle lift detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352. , the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position which is the normal state (furthermore, the center which prevents the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall part 2501) The rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1.

In the back bottom center production unit 3300 of this embodiment, the back bottom center rotational decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back bottom center rotation drive motor 3333 in the back bottom center decoration body unit 3320 by rotating the drive gear 3334 through the rotation gear 3327. can be rotated around the longitudinal axis. By rotating this lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front side rotate like a roulette wheel. The back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 even when the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position.

In the normal state of the back-bottom center production unit 3300 of this embodiment, one of the plurality (six in this case) number decorations in the back-bottom rotation decoration body 3310 is located directly above the center of rotation (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 446(a), in a state where the numeral decoration "1" on the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located at the top, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is moved to identify the first area. The three area specifying sensors 3330, the sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect the area. is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stopping positions of the lower back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. When the number decoration "1" is at the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324. is being detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 446(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are in detection, the number decoration "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect the area, the numeral decoration "2" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect the area, the number decoration "3" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the number decoration "4" indicates the range of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detecting, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration "5" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "6" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

In this way, depending on the combination of detection and non-detection of the three area specification sensors 3330, the first area specification sensor 3330a, the second area specification sensor 3330b, and the third area specification sensor 3330c, which number decoration indicates the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether the vehicle is located within the stopping area that includes the vehicle.

Since the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area identification sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and rotates 30 degrees, the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration on the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to identify the area of the stop position using the three area specifying sensors 3330 and recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the position specifying sensor 3331 can recognize the origin. This suppresses the complexity of the control related to stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and reduces the load.

To be more specific, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a desired stopping position of the number decoration, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 move the decorative body to the desired stop position. When the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotation direction by an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated by a rotation angle of 30 degrees from the stop position.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 further rotates by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position specifying sensor 3331. Therefore, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detectable. The angle at which this position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is defined as the origin. Then, when it rotates by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), by stopping the rotation of the back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333, the desired number is set. The decoration can be accurately stopped at the stop position.

In addition, although the rotation stop of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 was explained by the angle above, it may be made to stop rotation by the rotation step of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 which consists of a stepping motor. For example, if one rotation is 396 steps, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by 13 steps with the three area specifying sensors 3330 in a combination that satisfies the desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 The position identifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detectable when the position goes away from the position identifying sensor 3331. When the position specifying sensor 3331 rotates 20 steps with the angle at which it is not detected as the origin, the desired number decoration is stopped by stopping the rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. It can be stopped precisely in position.

Next, the light-emitting decoration in the back-lower-middle effect unit 3300 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 447, the back-bottom center production unit 3300 is a back-bottom center first display unit in which a back-bottom decoration unit 3320 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the back-bottom rotating decoration 3310. It includes a decorative board 3322 and a second decorative board 3329 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are located behind the six number decorations on the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, and each of the number decorations can be decorated with light emission independently.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the second decorative board 3329 on the lower back side are located behind the part on the outside of the plurality of number decorations on the lower back side middle rotating decoration body 3310. The periphery can be decorated with luminescence.

As described above, this back-bottom center production unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensors 3330, By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side, it is rotated with only a specific number decoration being decorated with light emission, or with each number decoration being decorated with light emission in a different color. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a performance that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be decorated with light by emitting light from the LED in the corresponding part of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back. Thereby, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the LED on the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side will emit light (or it will emit light by determining one light emitting mode from among a plurality of light emitting modes). ).

As described above, according to the back-lower-middle effect unit 3300 of this embodiment, the rotating back-lower-middle rotating decoration body 3310 having six stop positions can detect an area with a length extending over the three stop positions. piece 3325 and six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting piece 3325, and one position specifying sensor for detecting the position detecting piece 3326. Since a sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and even until the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detecting, and the area detecting piece 3325 is detected. By combining the area specifying sensor 3330, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

Since the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 is equipped with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the back bottom middle rotation is performed by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, the stop position can be accurately detected, and the deviation of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stopping position of the back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 which has a plurality of stopping positions as small as possible.

In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at any stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to enjoy the performance (movable performance) by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift in the stop position can be suppressed, and the By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made faster than when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is made to reciprocate. It can be done quickly. Therefore, the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attracting the player's interest, and the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 can be made to have a strong impact on the player. It is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is designed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front side, the roulette wheel rotates in circles and then stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position. Since it is possible to show the player such an effect, it is possible to make the player excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position. , the number of stop positions is the same as the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The back and middle rotating decorations 3310 can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotating base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. Therefore, the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be further increased.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with (together with) the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, but this The present invention is not limited to this, and the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member, such as the drive gear 3334, that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

[5-9g. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back top effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 448 to 455 and the like. FIG. 448(a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 448(b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 449 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 450 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. Fig. 451 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rising/lowering decoration unit in the back upper direction unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 452 is an exploded perspective view of the back rising/lowering decoration unit in the back unit disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a diagram.

FIG. 453 is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation mechanism of the back top and front rotating decorative bodies in the back top presentation unit from the front. FIG. 454(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the back raising/lowering decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a lifting mechanism of the lifting decoration unit and a rotation mechanism of the back up-and-down rotating decoration from the front. FIG. 455 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative board from the front with the back raising/lowering decoration unit moved to the appearance position in the back upper presentation unit.

The back upper effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 449 and 450, the back top effect unit 3400 includes a back top front rotating decoration body 3410 having a shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back top front rotating decoration body 3410. A back upper front decorative body 3421 extending left and right through which the shaft 3410a penetrates in the center in the left and right direction, and a back upper front decorative body 3421 that is provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The front decorative board 3422 and the rear upper front decorative board 3422 are provided behind the back upper front decorative board 3422, and the back upper front decorative body 3421 is attached to the front surface and rotatably supports the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410. A unit base 3423 is provided.

In addition, the rear upper production unit 3400 has a rear cover 3424 attached to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 between the front unit base 3423. A back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 is installed so as to protrude into the space of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 is attached to the rotating shaft of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and the drive gear 3426 meshes with the drive gear 3426. a rotating gear 3427 which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward; and a back upper front decorative board 3422. A rear rotation detection sensor 3428 is attached to the rear surface and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427.

In addition, the back upper production unit 3400 includes a back lift/lower drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that its rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423, and a back lift/lower drive motor 3429. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a that meshes with the motor gear 3430, and a portion that protrudes outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a pass through the rear cover 3424. an elevating cam gear 3431 that is rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424 and has a drive pin 3431b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a detection piece 3431c that protrudes forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a; , a back up/down detection sensor 3432 that is attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 and can detect the detection piece 3431c of the up/down cam gear 3431, and an up/down cam gear 3431 on the tip side where the back up/back rotation decorative body 3440 is provided. A rear ascending and descending decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 around an axis in the front and back direction so as to be raised and lowered by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the rear cover 3424; A spring 3433 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and a spring 3433 biasing the 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward, restricts the upward movement of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450. A rod-shaped regulating member 3434 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 451 and 452, the back up/down decoration unit 3450 is a back top and back decoration in which a shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back top and back rotation decoration 3440 passes through the center. body 3451 , a back top and rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back top and rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top and rear decorative board 3451 from behind the back top and rear decorative board 3452 . is attached to the front surface, and an elevating unit base 3453 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3423 and rotatably supports the shaft 3440a of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440.

In addition, the back up/down decoration unit 3450 includes a back up/down rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up/down rotation drive motor 3454. a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 that meshes with the drive gear 3455 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453; A second transmission gear 3457 in the shape of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453 and is in mesh with the second transmission gear 3457. A rotating gear 3458 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rear end.

Further, the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 includes a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear up-and-down rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top presentation unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower, and has translucency. An axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 passes through the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper front decorative board 3422, and the unit base 3423, and connects the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover 3424. The back top front decoration body 3421 has two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 stacked one on top of the other in the center in the left and right direction, and the rear petal is placed between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been rotated so that it is located at the top. The entire back upper front decoration body 3421 has translucency.

The back top front decorative board 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decorative body 3421 in the left and right direction. By causing the LEDs on the back top and front decorative substrates 3422 to emit light, the back top and front rotating decorations 3410 and the back top and front decorations 3421 can be decorated with light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper and lower back decorative substrates 3422 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back up/down detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a that is coaxial with the shaft 3410a of the back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface, and a circular arc shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is inserted. It has an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back lifting decoration unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 is detected by the back rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. In the elevating cam gear 3431, a gear portion 3431a is formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b that protrudes rearward is provided at a portion that bulges outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating and lowering decoration unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by a rear elevation detection sensor 3432 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back top-back rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower, and has translucency. The shaft 3440a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3440 passes through the back upper and rear decoration body 3451, the back upper and rear decoration board 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453. It extends to the rear of the The back top and back decoration body 3451 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 front and back, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration shaped like a tree. The entire back upper and rear decorative body 3451 has translucency.

The back upper and rear decoration board 3452 can decorate the back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back upper and rear decoration body 3451 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LEDs on the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452 are full-color LEDs.

The elevating unit base 3453 includes a shaft hole 3453a that penetrates back and forth on the base end side (right end side in front view) and into which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and a shaft hole 3453a provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a. The shaft hole 3453a has an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. A drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration resembling a cherry blossom flower formed on its front surface.

Next, the movements of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back rising/lowering decorative body unit 3450 in the back upper presentation unit 3400 will be explained. In the normal state of the back top production unit 3400, the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 attached to the shaft 3410a of the back top and front rotation decoration body 3410 is detected by the back top rotation detection sensor 3428, and the back The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 453). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back top and front rotation drive motor 3425, the back top and front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front and back direction via the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, in a normal state, the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450, which is provided with the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440 on the tip side, extends in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the tip side is It is in a retracted position located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and invisible from the front (see FIG. 454(a)). In addition, the part of the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450 that protrudes to the left from the back upper front decoration 3421 is located behind the back front left production unit 3700 when assembled to the game board 5. It is not visible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back elevation detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below its center of revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

Specifically, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in a counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, that force is suppressed. Since the line of force passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the lifting cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decoration unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. There isn't. Therefore, the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b that is far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is rotated counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b contacts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, thereby preventing the back lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the back lift/lower drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. As the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides inside the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. Due to the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3453a so that its tip side moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above the straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the driving pin 3431b moves upward. It begins to slide within the slit 3453b in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up/down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b The revolution of the planet stops.

As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back up/down decoration unit 3450 via the up/down unit base 3453 is stopped, and the tip side of the back up/down decoration unit 3450 including the back up/down rotation decoration 3440 is , the appearance position is moved downward from the back upper front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 454(b)). In this appearance position, the tip side of the rear ascending and descending decoration unit 3450 is located below the center of the rear upper and lower decoration unit 3450 than the rear upper front decoration 3421, so the back upper and rear rotating decoration 3440 etc. are visible from the front. becomes possible.

When the back elevation decoration unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the line of force of that force hits the slit 3453b. Since the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 moves counterclockwise from the appearance position so that the tip side moves downward. In addition, the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 via the lifting cam gear 3431.

In addition, in the state where the back raising/lowering decoration unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the raising/lowering cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3431b into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 attempts to further rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b contacts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, thereby preventing the back lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

When the back up/down decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back up/back rotation decoration 3440 provided on the tip side becomes visible from the front. In the back up/down decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back up/down rotation drive motor 3454, the back up/down rotation decoration is moved through the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 454(b)). Therefore, when the back vertically rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front, if the driving gear 3455 is rotated by the back vertically rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back vertically rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized. .

When returning the back lift/lower decoration unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the back lift/lower drive motor 3429 rotates the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above, so that the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 moves up/down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the tip side of the back elevating and lowering decoration unit 3450 moves upward. When the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting/lowering detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 is stopped, thereby moving the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. It can be reinstated.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 toward the retracted position, and The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 455, the back top effect unit 3400 of this embodiment has a back top front decorative board 3422 provided behind the back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative board 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a back top and rear decorative board 3452 is provided behind the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and rear decorative body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top and rear decorative board 3452 can be used to emit light as appropriate. By doing so, the back upper and rear rotating decorative bodies 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3451 can be decorated with light.

At this time, with the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450 rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back top and rear decoration board 3452 is made to emit light, and the back top and rear rotating decoration that is being decorated with light is emitted. The body 3440 and the back top and rear decorative bodies 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back rear left production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main figures 456 to 462 and the like. FIG. 456(a) is a perspective view of the back rear left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 456(b) is a perspective view of the back rear left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Figure 457 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 458 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 459 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 460 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 461 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 462 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back rear left decoration unit in the back rear left presentation unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 near the left end inside the back box 3010. The back left rotation unit 3500 includes a back left rotation decorative body 3510 that has translucency and is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back side that rotatably supports the back left rotation decoration 3510 on the lower end side. It includes a rear left decorative body unit 3520 and a rear rear left drive unit 3550 that rotates the upper end side of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction and is installed in the back box 3010. .

The rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the rear rear left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower and has translucency. The back left rotation decorative body 3510 has a shaft 3510a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 460).

As shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the back left decoration unit 3520 includes a back left decoration 3521 through which the shaft 3510a of the back left rotating decoration 3510 passes through the center, and a back left decoration A rear left decorative board 3522 is provided at the rear of the rear left decorative board 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear left decorative board 3522 is attached to the rear of the rear left decorative body 3521 from the rear of the rear left decorative board 3522. , a front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotation decorative body 3510, and a front cover 3523 that is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3523, and whose upper end side is rotatably connected to the rear rear left drive unit 3550. A movable base 3524 to be attached.

The back left decoration unit 3520 also includes a back left rotation drive motor 3525 which is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a back left rotation drive motor 3525. A drive gear 3526 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525; A gear-shaped rotating gear 3527 is provided.

The back left decorative body 3521 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has translucency, and is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back left rotation decorative body 3510 one above the other. The side petals are rotated so that they are located between the front petals. The plurality of LEDs on the back left decorative board 3522 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3523 has a shape in a front view that is a combination of a portion having the same outer shape as the rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3524 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and its upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuation pin 3524b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. Furthermore, the actuating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the back left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the drive gear 3526, the back left rotation decoration unit 3520 rotates the back left rotation decoration 3510 front and back through the rotation gear 3527 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 457 and 458, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a flat reinforcing plate 3551 that extends vertically and has a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back left decoration unit 3520. , a vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front of the reinforcing plate 3551 and attached inside the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 attached to the front of the unit base 3552; A back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is installed so that its shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear is attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. 3555.

The rear left drive unit 3550 also includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. , an elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from near the front outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a; A first slit 3558a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3557b of No. 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of a movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 extending left and right below the first slit 3558a. It has a second slit 3558b into which it is slidably inserted, and a link member 3558 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. 3553, a rear rear left relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the rear left relay board 3561, and a rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that is attached to the rear surface of the rear left relay board 3561 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557. It is equipped with

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has approximately the same length as the unit base 3552, extends vertically, and is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

In the elevating cam gear 3557, a drive pin 3557b passes through a slit 3560a of a partition plate 3560 and is slidably inserted into a first slit 3558a of a link member 3558. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3561 relays connections between the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, and the production drive board 1720. It is for the purpose of

Next, the operation of the back-rear-left effect unit 3500 will be explained. In a normal state, the back rear left effect unit 3500 is a back rear left decorative body in which a back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is provided on the lower end side (tip side), as shown in FIGS. 461 and 462(a). The unit 3520 is in a hanging, retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decoration 3510) is located behind the back front left presentation unit 3700 and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-rear left presentation unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decoration body 3030 and the back-front left presentation unit 3700, and the back-rear left lifting drive motor Only a part of 3554 is facing forward (see FIG. 409, etc.). Note that the front part of the rear left lift drive motor 3554 is covered in front by the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see Figure 413).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557, and near the left end of the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 is It is located near the left end of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged in the upward movement direction by the spring 3559; Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3557b through the first slit 3558a due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back left decoration unit 3520 (back left rotating decoration 3510) is moved from the retracted position to the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, etc.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving leftward, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b cannot revolve, and upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, thereby preventing rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When this drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides to the right inside the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. That will happen.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decoration unit 3520, which protrudes below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a, is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. While the operating pin 3524b slides to the right inside the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates. It will rotate counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 462(a) and 462(b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3559, thereby reducing the load on the rear left lifting drive motor 3554.

As the back left decoration unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a in this way, the back left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. As a result, the back-back left rotating decoration 3510 moves to the right of the back-front left presentation unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear left production unit 3500 of this embodiment, the rotation of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position state) The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 462(b)). In this first appearance position, the rear left decoration unit 3520 has rotated approximately 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b begins to slide to the left within the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left lift drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in a state of the second appearance position (Fig. 462(c) ). In this second appearance position, the rear left decoration unit 3520 has rotated approximately 74 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back left decorative body unit 3520, a force acts on the back left decorative body unit 3520 to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and this force causes the movable base The link member 3558 attempts to move downward through the operating pin 3524b of 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the driving pin 3557b inserted into the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 also does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear left decoration unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, etc.

In addition, when the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise to bring the drive pin 3557b into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the rear left decoration unit 3520 attempts to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight, and the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b, the The lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but because the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b cannot revolve. First, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked unrotatably in the second appearance position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is rotated forward (on the player side). It becomes visible from

In this back left decoration unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated through the rotation gear 3527 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see Figure 461). Therefore, when the back left rotation decoration 3510 is visible from the front (player side), if the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the drive gear 3526, the rotating back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear left decoration unit 3520 from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 moves the motor gear 3555 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction, the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the rear left decoration unit 3520 is moved downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left lift drive motor 3554 is stopped, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 is evacuated. It can be returned to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 461, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of this embodiment has a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be decorated with light. At this time, with the back left decoration unit 3520 being rotated from the retracted position toward the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED on the back left decoration board 3522 is made to emit light, so that the light emitting decoration is displayed. The player can see the back left rotation decoration 3510 and the back left rotation decoration 3521.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main figures 463 to 469 and the like. FIG. 463(a) is a perspective view of the back rear right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 463(b) is a perspective view of the back rear right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Fig. 464 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear-right production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 465 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear-right production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. Figure 466 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the back rear right production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 467 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear rear right production unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 468 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 469 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-rear right decoration unit in the back-rear right production unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end inside the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back right rotation decoration unit 3600 includes a back right rotation decorative body 3610 that has translucency and is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back side that rotatably supports the back right rotation decoration 3610 on the lower end side. It includes a rear right decorative body unit 3620 and a rear right drive unit 3650 that rotates the upper end side of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction and is installed in the back box 3010. .

The rear right rotation decorative body 3610 of the rear rear right presentation unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower, and has translucency. The rear right rotation decorative body 3610 has a shaft 3610a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 466).

As shown in FIGS. 466 and 467, the back right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decorative body 3610 passes through the center, and a back right decorative body A rear right decorative board 3622 is provided at the rear of the rear right decorative board 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear right decorative board 3622 is attached to the rear of the rear right decorative body 3621 from the rear of the rear right decorative board 3622. , a front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft 3610a of the rear right rotation decorative body 3610, and a front cover 3623 that is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3623, and whose upper end side is rotatable to the rear rear right drive unit 3650. A movable base 3624 to be attached.

The back right decorative body unit 3620 also includes a back right rotation drive motor 3625 which is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a back right rotation drive motor 3625. A drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decoration body 3610, which meshes with the drive gear 3626. A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627 is provided.

The back right decorative body 3621 of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has translucency, and is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back right rotating decorative body 3610 front and back. The side petals are rotated so that they are located between the front petals. The plurality of LEDs on the rear right decorative board 3622 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3623 has a shape in front view that is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3623 is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and its upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuation pin 3624b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the back right rotation drive motor 3625 rotates the drive gear 3626, the back right rotation decoration unit 3620 rotates the back right rotation decoration 3610 back and forth through the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 464 and 465, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a reinforcing plate 3651 in the form of a flat plate extending vertically and having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear right decoration unit 3620. , a vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and installed inside the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and a unit cover. 3653, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper front surface of the unit so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is attached to the rotation shaft of the rear right lift drive motor 3654. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655 is provided.

The rear right drive unit 3650 also includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a that meshes with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b that protrudes rearward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from near the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. 3658a, and has a second slit 3658b extending left and right below the rear right decorative body unit 3620 into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and includes a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. and a link member 3658 that is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction between.

Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the rear right relay board 3653, a rear right lift detection sensor 3662 that is attached to the rear face of the rear right relay board 3661 and can detect the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657; A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652, and the lower part of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically by approximately the same length as the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed into a shallow container shape open to the rear.

In the elevating cam gear 3657, a drive pin 3657b passes through a slit 3660a of a partition plate 3660 and is slidably inserted into a first slit 3658a of a link member 3658. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back right relay board 3661 relays connections between the back back right decorative board 3622, the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right lift drive motor 3654, the back right lift detection sensor 3662, and the production drive board 1720. It is for the purpose of

Next, the operation of the back-rear right effect unit 3600 will be explained. In the normal state, the back right direction production unit 3600 is a back right decorative body in which a back right rotating decorative body 3610 is provided on the lower end side (tip side), as shown in FIGS. 468 and 469(a). The unit 3620 is in a suspended, retracted position. In this normal state, the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 (back-rear right rotation decoration 3610) is located behind the back-front right presentation unit 3800, and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back-rear right presentation unit 3600 is located behind the back-front right decoration body 3040 and the back-front right presentation unit 3800, and the entire back-rear right presentation unit 3600 is located at the front (on the player's side). It has become invisible since then.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right elevation detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is also located near the right end of the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 is It is located near the right end within the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged in the upward movement direction by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 that is in contact with the first slit 3658a is Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3657b through the first slit 3658a due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction, and link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back right decorative body unit 3620 (back right rotating decorative body 3610) is rotated around the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear right lift drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lift cam gear 3657, etc.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of movement to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, thereby preventing rotation of the rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear right lift drive motor 3654, the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated clockwise via the gear portion 3657a. The drive pin 3657b will revolve in the clockwise direction. When this drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides to the left inside the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620, which protrudes below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a, is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. While the operating pin 3624b slides to the left inside the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 retreats. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 469(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, thereby reducing the load on the rear right lift drive motor 3654.

As the back right decoration unit 3620 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 3651a in this way, the back right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As a result, the back-back right rotation decoration body 3610 moves to the left of the back-front right presentation unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back and right direction production unit 3600 of this embodiment, the rotational position of the back and right decoration unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position state) is the first appearance position (see FIG. 469(b)). In this first appearance position, the rear right decoration unit 3620 has rotated approximately 44 degrees clockwise from the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide rightward within the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right lift drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the clockwise rotation of the rear right decoration unit 3620 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearance position (FIG. 469(c)) ). In this second appearance position, the rear right decoration unit 3620 has rotated approximately 74 degrees clockwise from the retracted position.

When the rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620, a force acts on the back right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and this force causes the rear right decorative body unit 3620 to move. The link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the driving pin 3657b inserted into the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 also does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, etc.

Note that even if the rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated clockwise to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decoration unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a due to its own weight, and the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b, The lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but because the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve. First, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 can be locked unrotatably in the second appearance position.

When the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side is rotated forward (on the player side). It becomes visible from

In this back right decoration unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated through the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see Figure 468). Therefore, when the back right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear right decoration unit 3620 from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 moves the motor gear 3655 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction, the link member 3658 can be moved downward due to the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 is moved downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 is evacuated. It can be returned to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 468, the back-rear-right production unit 3600 of this embodiment has a back-rear-right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back-rear right rotation decoration 3610 and the back-rear right decoration 3621. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decorative board 3622, the back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 can be decorated with light. At this time, with the back right decorative body unit 3620 rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED on the back right decorative board 3622 is made to emit light, so that the light emitting decoration is displayed. It is possible to show the player the back right rotation decoration 3610 and the back right rotation decoration 3621.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 470 to 473 and the like. FIG. 470(a) is a perspective view of the back front left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 470(b) is a perspective view of the back front left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 471 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left presentation unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 472 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left presentation unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 473(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in a closed state, and FIG. 473(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in an open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030. The back front left presentation unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, from the top: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left presentation unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 473, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 471 and 472, the back and front left decoration unit 3710 of the back and front left production unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating from front to back and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. Shaped shutter support members 3712 are arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support members 3712, and each is supported rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction, so that the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730 is provided.

The back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and includes a back front left decorative body 3713 which is a flat plate having translucency and a back front left decorative body 3713. A back front left decorative board 3714 which is provided at the rear and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back rear left direction unit which is attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the rear. and a rear cover 3715 attached to the front of the 3500.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front left decoration unit 3710. A transmission member 3718 is attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and is attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. It includes a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open and close the shutter unit 3730.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 has an outer shape that resembles a "convex" character turned to the right and rounded corners (a shape that is a stylized "pine"). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing parts 3712a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably support the shaft part 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the front surface. This boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left and right direction, and a left shaft portion 3733 that protrudes from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3734 extending in a cylindrical shape toward the direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape within the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located further back than the shaft portion 3733.

The shaft portion 3733 of the shutter member 3731 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, so that the shutter member 3731 can rotate about the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 is decorated with designs such as characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are full color LEDs.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with its surface oriented in the left-right direction, and has a front end bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent to the right on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. Further, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the lower end to the right. This support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in such a direction that the plunger moves downward. The rear front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate around the left-right axis about the support pin 3716a. This link member 3719 has a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted in between, and a second connecting portion 3719a connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 made up of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and is a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a, and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be explained. In the normal state of the back front left direction unit 3700, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is not visible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the back front left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (a plurality of shutters 3732). has been done.

In a normal state, the rear front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is located at the upper end of movement, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the rear front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. As the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates around the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connection part 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection part 3719b to move downward.

By moving the opening/closing slider 3720 downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted into the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 will rotate around the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 473(b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the rear front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the biasing force of the spring, and by performing the opposite movement to the above, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the normal closed state.

In this manner, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of this embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730. The decorations (pictures) can be changed to different decorations (pictures), allowing the player to enjoy changing the decorations.

Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, the plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 can be made to emit light when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state. By making the plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 emit light when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, the light emitting decorated shutter unit 3730 can be shown to the player. The decoration body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left presentation unit 3700, three back front left decoration units are provided: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. 3710, the shutter units 3730 can be opened and closed independently, and the lights can be decorated with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back and front left decorative units 3710, players can enjoy a variety of effects. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 474 to 477 and the like. FIG. 474(a) is a perspective view of the back front right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 474(b) is a perspective view of the back front right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 475 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right presentation unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 476 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right presentation unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 477(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right presentation unit in a closed state, and FIG. 477(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right presentation unit in the open state.

The back front right presentation unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right presentation unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040. . The back front right production unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, from the top: a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right production unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 477, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 475 and 476, the back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right production unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 that penetrates from front to back and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. Shaped shutter support members 3812 are arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support members 3812, and each is supported rotatably around an axis in the left and right direction, so that the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830 is provided.

The back front right decoration unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and includes a flat plate-shaped back front right decoration 3813 having translucency and a back front right decoration 3813. A back front right decorative board 3814 which is provided at the rear and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back rear right production unit which is attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the rear. and a rear cover 3815 attached to the front of the 3600.

Furthermore, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right decoration unit 3810. A transmission member 3818 is attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and is attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. It includes a link member 3819 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape shaped like a "convex" character turned to the left and rounded corners (a shape that is a stylized "pine"). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing parts 3812a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably support the shaft part 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from near the right end of the front surface. This boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3832 in the left and right direction, and a shaft portion 3833 that projects from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then extends to the right. It has a crankshaft 3834 extending in a cylindrical shape in the direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape within the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located at the rear of the shaft portion 3833.

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate about the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820.

Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 is decorated with designs such as characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front right decorative board 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are full color LEDs.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with its surface oriented in the left-right direction, and has a front end bent leftward. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that projects leftward from near the lower end in a cylindrical shape. This support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in such a direction that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the left-right axis about the support pin 3816a. This link member 3819 has a first connection part 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side, with the support pin 3816a inserted therebetween, and a second connection part 3819a connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 made up of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and is a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a, and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back-front-right production unit 3800 will be explained. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832, and is in a closed state. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is not visible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (a plurality of shutters 3832). has been done.

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3820 is located at the upper end of movement, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. As the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates around the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connection part 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connection part 3819b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted into the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 will rotate around the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is opened. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 477(b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the biasing force of the spring, and by performing the opposite movement to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the normal closed state.

In this manner, according to the back front right production unit 3800 of this embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 can be changed to the back front right decoration body 3813. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of the game, and it is possible to entertain the player by changing the decoration.

Further, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, the plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 can be made to emit light when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state. The shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are made to emit light. The decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right presentation unit 3800, three back front right decorative body units are provided: a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. 3810, the shutter units 3830 can be opened and closed independently, and the lights can be decorated with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back and front right decorative units 3810, players can enjoy a variety of effects. I can show you.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 478 to 483 and the like. FIG. 478 is a front view of the game board showing the rear movable decoration of the rear effect unit moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 479 is a front view of the game board showing the back lower middle rotating decoration of the back lower middle production unit moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Figure 480 shows how the back up/back rotation decorative body of the back up/back presentation unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear left rotation decoration of the back back left presentation unit is moved from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the back back right FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing the back and right rotation decorations of the performance unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. FIG. 481 shows the rear left rotating decoration of the back rear left presentation unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rear right rotation decoration of the back rear right presentation unit from the retraction position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 482 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left presentation unit and the shutter unit of the back front right presentation unit each changed from the closed state to the open state.

Figure 483 shows the back movable decorative body of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back up and rear rotating decoration of the back upper and rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear of the back left effect unit. Move the left-rotating decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-rear right-rotating decoration of the back-rear-right presentation unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower-middle-rotating decoration of the back-lower middle presentation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which it has been moved from a lowered position to a raised position.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side middle right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, , as shown in FIG. 389, through them, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back bottom left production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 of back top production unit 3400 and back top The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 of the back front left production unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and shutter unit 3830 of the back front right production unit 3800, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory 2500 The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly viewed through the frame.

Furthermore, to explain in detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the blocking part 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side to near the right middle unit 2700. Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear production unit 3100 is located behind the upper rear production unit 3400 and is not visible from the player side.

In addition, the lower back left rotation decoration 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the center and left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and front unit 2000.

In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position and is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since this back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is viewed diagonally from above from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the number decoration above the center of rotation can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be clearly seen.

Furthermore, the back top front decoration body 3421 of the back top performance unit 3400 extends left and right at the top of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the top left of the center in the left and right direction is connected to the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory. 2500, and the rest can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 has one petal facing upward at the center in the left and right direction in front of the back top and front decoration body 3421, and can be easily viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can be visually recognized. In a normal state, the back raising/lowering decoration unit 3450 having the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440 of the back upper production unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back upper front decoration 3421, and the player It is not visible from the side.

In addition, the rear rear left decoration body unit 3520 having the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 of the back rear left production unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back front left production unit 3700 in a normal state. , are not visible to the player. In addition, the rear right decoration unit 3620 having the rear right rotating decoration 3610 of the rear right presentation unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the front right presentation unit 3800 in a normal state. , are not visible to the player.

In addition, the three back front left decoration units 3710 of the back front left presentation unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located within the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and are transparent game panels. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The middle second back front left decoration unit 3710B is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. Most of the lower third back front left decoration unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, and the right part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left production unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is in a closed state in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, and the back front left decoration 3713 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Furthermore, the three back front right decoration units 3810 of the back front right presentation unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located within the game area 5a in front view, and are transparent game It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front right decoration unit 3810A of the three back front right decoration units 3810 has its right side located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the lower side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the normal state of the back front right production unit 3800, the shutter unit 3830 is in a closed state in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 performs the back side effects of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , and the back and front right effect unit 3800 perform predetermined effects (movable effect and light emitting effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the rear rear effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The lock is released, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the player can see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decoration body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left and right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, a "jackpot" game). It is possible to make the player think that the player is going to play the game, and it is possible to make the player feel that the player has a high expectation for the game.

Although not shown in the figure, in this rear rear effect unit 3100, after dropping the rear movable decoration 3110 to the appearance position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward, and the rear movable decoration When returning the rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position, by appropriately changing forward/reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be made to reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is The movable decorative body 3110 can draw attention, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 479, as a production using the back lower middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, by rotating the lifting arm 3357 by the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated around the longitudinal axis by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333. As a result, the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image on the effect display device 1600, and is therefore viewed from the player's side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates around and around, it can give a strong impact to the players and entertain the players.

This lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six number decorations, so by rotating the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, it gives the player the impression that a roulette wheel is spinning. can be given. Therefore, when rotating the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as "Sugoroku", and the numeral decoration of the back lower middle rotating decorative object 3310 that has stopped rotating. The "pieces" may advance depending on the situation. As a result, in order for the "pieces" to advance to the desired "squares", the rotating decoration body 3310 at the bottom of the back rotates, depending on whether or not it stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration. It can make the players' hearts flutter and entertain them. Further, as the "pieces" advance, the player can be made to feel as if his or her expectations are increasing, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased.

For example, the production using the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back upper production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is shown in FIG. As shown, in the back bottom left production unit 3200, the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, and in the back bottom right production unit 3250, the back bottom right rotation decoration body is rotated by the back bottom right drive motor 3255. Rotate 3251. In addition, in the back upper presentation unit 3400, the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back upper front rotating decoration 3410, and the back up/down drive motor 3429 moves the back up/down decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position to the lower side. At the same time as it is rotated to the appearance position, the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 is rotated by the back top and back rotation drive motor 3454. Furthermore, in the back rear left presentation unit 3500, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 moves the back rear left decoration unit 3520 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right. Rotate the left rotation decorative body 3510. In addition, in the back rear right production unit 3600, the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left. Rotate the clockwise rotating decorative body 3610.

As a result, the back up and back rotating decoration 3440, the back back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 move forward of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, the back top and front rotation decoration 3410, the back top and back rotation decoration 3440, the back back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate, By rotating the six decorations, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, making him think that something good is going to happen, and increasing his expectations for the game.

At this time, the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429, the back rear left lifting/lowering drive motor 3554, and the back rear right lifting/lowering drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated in the normal and reverse directions as appropriate, so that the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450, the back rear left decoration The body unit 3520 and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively swung. As a result, the back up and back rotating decoration 3440, the back back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate while shaking, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can entertain players.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven decorations rotate around and around, making the player feel strongly that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur in which the player has an advantage. It is possible to increase expectations for the game.

For example, as shown in FIG. 481, as a production using the back rear left production unit 3500 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, in the back rear left production unit 3500, the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525. In addition, in the back rear right presentation unit 3600, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorations rotate around at approximately the same height as the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, which may surprise the player and bring about something good. This can make the player think that this is the case, and can increase expectations for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back left rotation decoration 3510 and the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 at the second appearance position are set to the eyes of the face of the predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. An effect image that corresponds to the position may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to present to the player an effect in which the character's eyes are spinning, thereby making it possible to entertain the player.

As a production using the back front left production unit 3700 and the back front right production unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right production unit 3800. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the changes in the decoration.

Note that the effects using the back front left presentation unit 3700 and the back front right presentation unit 3800 are based on the fact that they each have three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810. , the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, or a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed may be made. This makes it possible to present a variety of performances to the players, thereby making it difficult for the players to get bored.

In the back unit 3000, the back rear production unit 3100, the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower middle production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, the back rear right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 483, all decorations etc. may be made to move. This results in
By making all the decorations movable, the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be increased. In this case, in the back rear left presentation unit 3500 and the back rear right presentation unit 3600, the back left decoration unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retreat position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

Although the movement of each decorative object has been explained above, when each decorative object is moved, the LEDs on the decorative board provided at the rear can be made to emit light as appropriate, giving the player a light-emitting effect of the decorative object. This can further attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the movable effects and the light emitting effects as described above can be combined as appropriate, and they can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored. The player can be entertained and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5-11. Main functions and effects of the game board]
Next, the main effects of the game board 5 of this embodiment having the above-described configuration will be explained. In the game board 5 of this embodiment, a game panel 1100 in which a game area 5a is provided on the front side has a penetrating opening 1112, and the game area 5a is a distribution area where game balls B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into a non-circulating area and shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112, has its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes a circulation area and the inner side becomes a non-circulation area. Then, a flat support part 2503 that is thinner than the thickness of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from the same position in the front and back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501 to the non-circulation area side (inside). At the same time, since a flange portion 2502 that contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since nothing extends to the circulation area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Therefore, the substantial circulation area can be made up to the position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial circulation area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. In other words, even if the non-circulation area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) divided by the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged, the actual distribution area will not become smaller unlike in conventional pachinko machines. . Therefore, by increasing the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution area in which the game balls B circulate within the gaming area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, the non-circulation area The effect images of the effect display device 1600 as a effect device provided at the rear of the area, the movable bodies and decorations of the effect unit, etc. can be made more visible, and the game with the game ball B in the distribution area and the non-circulation area can be made more visible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the performance and the performance.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation area side (inside) by the support part 2503, and the peripheral wall part 2502 can be reinforced by the flange part 2502 provided in the part where the support part 2503 is not provided. In addition to being able to reinforce the portion 2501 from the distribution area side (outside), the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (abuts) the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support part 2503 and the like, Deformation and damage to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support part 2503, the flange part 2502, and the attachment to the game panel 1100, when the game ball B comes into contact with the peripheral wall part 2501, the peripheral wall part 2501 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being elastically deformed and repelled like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a from making strange movements different from those in the past due to contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which would cause discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent this and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center Because the performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided at the rear and the movable body and decorative body of the performance unit provided on the back unit 3000 can be seen through the accessory 2500), the non-distribution area It is possible to enlarge the visible range of the production images, movable objects, decorations, etc. provided at the rear of the display device, making it easier to exert the production effect of the production device, and also making it possible to make it easier to demonstrate the production effect of the production device. By having a large visible range of the performance images, movable bodies, decorations, etc. of the performance display device 1600, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, the transparent part allows the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light provided in the pachinko machine 1 to be protected. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit light from a light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make the game look bright, improve its appearance, and increase its appeal to players. At this time, steps, notches, etc. may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, a movable body provided behind the support part 2503 (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 or the back rear left effect unit 3500) can be The light emitted by the light emitting means (LED) provides the above effects, and the transparent support portion 2503 allows the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front and back direction as the front side of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is connected to the game panel 1100. 1100, the lens effect due to the support part 2503 can be reduced, and the support part 2503 can be used to protect the back front left decorative body 3030 and the production device (production display device 1600). etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the production image of the production device, the part behind the support part 2503 (design ) can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, effect image, etc. can be made more visible.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, in a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 that has a shape different from the peripheral wall portion 2501, Because the edge of the edge allows you to see a line that is different from the peripheral wall 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design compared to the case where the shape follows the peripheral wall 2501, and it is possible to create a design that looks like it is made with attention to detail. A pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

Furthermore, since at least part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion of the support portion 2503 is not constant, but may vary. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the effect of reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front and back directions as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to create an illusion as if the support part 2503 exists, and to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support part 2503.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front and rear directions as the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (midway) of the front and back direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, Compared to the case where the support part 2503 extends from the end side, it is possible to reduce the reduction in the reinforcing effect of the support part 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall part 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even if game media come into contact with it.

Furthermore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped to fit the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so that the rear side thereof is inserted into the opening 1112. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made difficult to see by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is It looks like it protrudes forward from the periphery of the opening 1112, and can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, creating a good-looking pachinko machine in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is divided by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect images, movable bodies and decorations of the effect unit, etc. of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear of the non-distribution area can be clearly seen from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can fully exhibit the performance effects of etc.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is made to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed diagonally, the peripheral wall part 2501 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall part 2501, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the circulation area and non-circulation area partitioned by the surrounding wall part 2501.

Furthermore, a flange portion 2502 extending toward the circulation area (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and a flange portion 2502 extending toward the circulation area side (outside) is provided in the portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Since the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside) is not provided, the support part 2503 may obstruct the visibility of the presentation device (the presentation display device 1600 or the presentation unit of the back unit 3000). This makes it possible to enlarge the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable bodies of the effect unit can be seen, making it easier to exhibit the effect of the effect by the effect, and also making it easier for players to see the effect of the effect by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making the presentation enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, the support part 2503 and the flange part 2502 can maintain the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 at the same level as conventional products, so the peripheral wall part 2501 and the support part 2503 are integrally molded with resin and made of metal. It is possible to prevent the molded product from deforming when it is removed from the mold.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded from synthetic resin, only the support portion 2503 is separated from other portions. It is possible to avoid an increase in the difference in the amount of shrinkage, and it is possible to prevent deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and a flat game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side. , are respectively transparent, and a rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component of the rear rear left production unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and a rear rear right lift drive of the rear rear right production unit 3600. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is placed between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. The back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extend from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to cover and hide at least a portion of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, Through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the inside of the game area 5a, it is possible to make the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 difficult to see from the player side, improving the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being able to suppress the deterioration of the front back left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 on the front side instead of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, The overall appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the Pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, it becomes difficult to see the boundaries of the game area 5a divided by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not divided. This gives a sense of openness, and even if the gaming area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, the gaming area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, the playing area 5a appears larger than that of a conventional pachinko machine, which can give a strong impact to the players, heighten their expectations for playing with this pachinko machine 1, and improve their playing experience. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged to cover at least the portion in the game area 5a in front of functional components such as the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen within the gaming area 5a, so that the appearance of the gaming area 5a can be improved. In addition to achieving the same effects as described above, it is also possible to make the functional parts difficult to see even when viewed diagonally from the center of the gaming area 5a.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have continuous decorations over the entire surface, and when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have continuous decorations over the entire surface. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make it difficult to distinguish the outer boundary of the gaming area 5a, giving a feeling of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than its actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. By making it stand out, it is possible to further increase its appeal to players.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left production unit 3500 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear-right presentation unit 3600 etc. from being seen, and the back-rear-left presentation unit 3500, the back-rear-right presentation unit 3600, etc. can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, thereby improving the appearance. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the gaming area 5a in front view (the back left lifting drive motor 3554 Since the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 are placed completely (entirely) outside the gaming area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a are The back left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them. By maintaining the balance, it is possible to prevent the space of the gaming area 5a from becoming smaller. In other words, since a part of the rear right lifting drive motor 3654 is arranged within the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a can be reduced. This makes it possible to relatively increase the space of the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can further exhibit the above-mentioned effects. Furthermore, by providing some of the drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for accessories that move within the gaming area 5a outside the gaming area 5a, the space within the gaming area 5a can be enlarged. The range of performances performed within the game area 5a is expanded. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for the accessories that move within the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, making it appear as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1. can improve the appearance of Although opaque decorative seals 3032 and 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are Since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042) is made of a transparent material, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back side. It is possible to give the impression that the front right decorative body 3040 is reached and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can reach.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be seen that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent even if it does not cover the entire part. It can be spicy and can be made to look like part of the decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not large enough to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. The game area 5a can be made to look larger while reducing the cost of the game area 3030. Note that at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 are covered and hidden by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, but the part is not included in the pachinko machine. 1 (a portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the gaming area 5a and the outside of the gaming area 5a). In addition, it also extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a for predetermined locations where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (such as the lower left location in FIG. 409, that is, the lower left corner location on the game board 5, etc.). By providing decorations, the game area 5a can be made to look larger.

In addition, the frame of the front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent gaming panel 1100, and the gaming area 5a is located in front of the gaming panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the gaming area 5a. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Similar effects can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not get in the way of the game ball B within the gaming area 5a, facilitating smooth gaming within the gaming area 5a. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining people.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in front view, the back front left decorative body The rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the extent that the inside part of the door window 101a in the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 is used to lift the back rear left. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so it is possible to avoid the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily long. The cost of the back front left decoration body 3030 (Pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning holes 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. In contrast, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucent decoration. (A sticker is pasted), so the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), making the first starting opening 2002 more noticeable than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's consciousness toward the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general prize winning hole 2001, the number of game balls B accepted into the first starting hole 2002 decreases (or the first starting hole The player's attention is concentrated on the general prize opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002. It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to make the player reliably recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim for, and to make the player aim at the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy playing games.

Depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted into the first starting port 2002, it is possible to make the player nervous. Depending on whether or not a winning game (for example, a "jackpot") that generates an advantageous gaming state is drawn by drawing the first special drawing result, players can be excited and excited, and their expectations for the game can be heightened. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest. After that, when a winner is drawn in the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second grand prize opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern, providing great enjoyment to the players. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in games. At this time, if the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 is accepted into the general winning hole 2001, the first special lottery result will not be drawn, but the game ball B will be paid out as a benefit. , the player can continue to enjoy the game without being discouraged, and can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting hole 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is significantly different, so a sticker is pasted on the front of the first starting opening 2002, and a sticker is pasted on the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it will not make the players feel uncomfortable, and it can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unsightly, allowing the players to enjoy playing with the pachinko machine 1 and reducing their interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2002 can be visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning slot 2001 or the first starting slot 2002, and to fully experience the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decline in interest. In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of a transparent material, the light from the lighting in the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the means (LED on the decorative board), the general prize opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous, and the appearance is good. This can increase the appeal to players.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is transferred to the general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in 2001 is guided backwards more slowly, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 where the first special lottery result lottery is held is transferred to the general prize winning opening 2001. Since the game ball B that has been accepted can be guided backward at a later timing, the game ball B that has been accepted into the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting slot 2002 where the lottery for the first special lottery result is held, the joy (feeling of superiority) of having the gaming ball B accepted into the first starting slot 2002 is transferred to the general prize winner. The game ball B can be enjoyed by the player for a longer time than when it is received into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning hole 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since the game ball B can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and ejected faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the same for a long time, to direct the player's attention to the next game ball B, to make the game progress smoothly, and to suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall part 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203. Since this is made possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning hole 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front. Depending on the player, this can create an illusion as if the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and the player can enjoy it. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, there is no strong recognition that the game ball B was accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and there is no possibility that it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefit (the first special lottery result lottery) is not awarded afterwards, it is possible to avoid distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall, and it is possible to avoid the feeling of distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall, and to This allows the player to continue enjoying the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening Decorations such as stickers on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning hole 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable for players by using the cost for the performance device and the like.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom center production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back bottom center rotation having a plurality of even numbered (six in this case) stopping positions is provided. The decoration body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length equal to half of the stop position, and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 (six in this case) corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325 A plurality of (here, four) area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions, and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326. Therefore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detection pieces 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease repeatedly. Therefore, by combining the area specifying sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325, the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

To be more specific, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 which has six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the number of area detection pieces 3325 is half of the three stop positions that are lined up. The minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the first stop position. (position of the decorative numeral "3"), only the first region specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the region detection piece 3325. From this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position marked with the decorative numeral "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detecting, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects the area. 3325 is detected. Then, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position marked with the decorative numeral "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are connected to the area detecting piece 3325. is not detected. After that, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. Detection and non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above are repeated as the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates.

In this way, since the area detection piece 3325 is provided with a length that extends to half the number of stop positions, the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be combined to perform the back-bottom rotation decoration. Not only can the rotation of the body 3310 be detected, but also all area specifying sensors 3330 will not become non-detectable even until the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the medium rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is equipped with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 are detected by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp the stopping position of the back-lower-middle-rotating decoration body 3310, which has a plurality of stopping positions, by minimizing the deviation of the stopping position.

In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at any stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), and it is possible to enjoy the production (movable production) by the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (back and middle rotating decorative body 3310) without causing discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift in the stop position can be suppressed, and the By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made faster than when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is made to reciprocate. It can be done quickly. Therefore, the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attracting the player's interest, and the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 can be made to have a strong impact on the player. It is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by making the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 faces the player in front, and after rotating round and round, it is possible to Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player is excited and excited depending on whether or not the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. This allows the user to enjoy the movable effect of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensors 3330) required to detect movement to any stop position. The number of and the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping the stop position) of the plurality of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. This allows players to enjoy themselves and to suppress a decline in interest by using the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 having more stopping positions.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as the back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 in the back lower middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the one having six stop positions was shown, but it is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stopping positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, a rotating movable body (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) having a plurality of stop positions is shown, but the movable body having a plurality of stop positions is not limited to this. For example, it may be "something that goes around", "something that moves in a straight line", "something that moves in an arc shape", "something that moves in a curved shape", etc.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 484. FIG. 484 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003, and a second A second starting hole sensor 2401 detects the game ball B accepted in the starting hole 2004, a general winning hole sensor 3051 detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, and a general winning hole sensor 3051 detects the game ball B accepted in the first big winning hole 2005. The first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects the game ball B, the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects the game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2006, and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects the game ball B accepted into the out hole 2010. a first sub-out port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, Detection signals from magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. that detect illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a are inputted via the main control I/O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, thereby controlling the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid. 2612, etc., or from the main control I/O port to the function display unit 1400's status display, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, and first special reservation number display. A drive signal is output to the machine, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are non-operating. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general prize opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 are contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and Detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters the ball frequently. , Detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first big prize winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the outlet 2010, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used as the outlet sensor 3053. On the other hand, since game balls B do not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches that have a shorter lifespan than proximity switches. is used.

The main control MPU also transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. The control unit 633b, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball tank 552 and tank rail during maintenance. 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and a ball ejecting switch for ejecting the game balls B in the dispensing device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting a ball ejecting operation. .

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the out of ball detection sensor 574, the dispensing control I/O port, etc. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and a circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, there is a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 182, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Note that the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the payout control MPU to store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 484, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The sound source IC includes a sound source IC that performs this, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the provided color LEDs, etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors for operating various production units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motors of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 and operation button lift drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port. In addition to sending control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to the effect display control unit 1512 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Further, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, first rotation detection sensor 347, and second rotation detection sensor 348 of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and controls the production display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal. Monitoring operations.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and extracts sound information from the sound ROM, and extracts sound information from the vibration speaker 354 provided in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc., the top center speaker 462, and the top side. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top central speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, etc.). signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used in conjunction with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable object drive commands, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from display commands. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Performance display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the effect display device 1600 performs sub-scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, each pixel for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 393, 408, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more clockwise the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The speed of the ball B flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "probability change (probability change) win", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "win" is held.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 Through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520, a plurality of After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, there is a certain probability that the object passes through the gate section 2003.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. A second guide passage 2522 is provided. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-hand hit), it enters the first guide path 2521 and is struck with such force that it does not hit the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the ball B, it will enter the second guide path 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide path 2522 than through the first guide path 2521. Further, the configuration is such that when flowing through the second guide passage 2522 rather than through the first guide passage 2521, the air passes through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit The second starting port 2004, which is closed at 2400, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at four, and for more than four, even if game balls B pass through the gate section 2003, they are not held and are discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate part 2003 has a high probability of reaching the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. , and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game balls B are accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received into the second sub-out port 2012, it is ejected to the outside of the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be received into the second large winning hole 2006, the second starting hole 2004, or the first large winning hole 2005. .

In addition, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate part 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and is received by the general winning hole 2001, the second big winning hole 2006, and the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no opportunity for it to be accepted into the starting hole 2004 or the first big winning hole 2005, and it is discharged outside the gaming area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received at the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is ejected outside the gaming area 5a, so the second sub-out port is not provided to the player. It is possible to encourage a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, it is possible to encourage a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment of the rotating operation of the handle 182, rather than a "right-handed hit" in which the game ball B comes into contact with the stop portion 1006, and a driving operation of the game ball B. It is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1, which is mainly based on.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and enters the second big prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left of the central accessory 2500, it is released to the first attacker unit 2400 side via the lower right guide passage 2530.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability. When the second big prize opening 2006 is in the open state, when game balls B are accepted into the second big prize opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls, or , 13) game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big prize opening 2006 is placed between the first shelf 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, with the upper left side After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first prize opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, and enters the gaming area 5a. released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate part 2003 is a "normal win", and the second starting port door is opened. When the game ball 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "probability change (probability change) win", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "win" is held.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first big prize opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot"), after the special variable time has elapsed, the first big prize opening 2005 will open and close in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Then, the game ball B becomes ready to be accepted. When the first big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, when game balls B are received in the first big prize opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls, or , 13) game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big prize opening 2005 to accept the game balls B when the first big prize opening 2005 is ready to accept the game balls B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, thereby encouraging the player. Can be entertained.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result will be drawn that will generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation (probability change) win," and "time reduction (time saving) win."Then, the special lottery results that have been drawn will be It is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). Note that the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 to win the lottery. The special lottery results include “Lose”, “Small hit”, “2R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “15R jackpot”, “Probability change (probability change) win”, “Time saving (time reduction) win”, “ There are "variable time saving winnings", "probable variable time saving winnings", "second jackpot", etc.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the second big prize opening 2006 is kept open to accept the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern of closing after the opening is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", after the first jackpot 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first jackpot When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the prize opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is (referred to as a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot", after the first big prize opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・Generate time). This ST is to maintain a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also performs a performance operation on the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the player operates the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotary operation section 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 342 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 includes each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. using the right effect unit 3800, etc. as appropriate, and it is possible to entertain the players with various effects, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is requested, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting auxiliary member]
Next, the self-supporting member 7 in the present pachinko machine 1 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 485. FIG. 485 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. The self-supporting member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is installed between the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the table board 8 of the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the island equipment. When installing (attaching) the pachinko machine 1 to the machine, it helps the pachinko machine 1 to stand on its own and prevents it from falling over. This self-supporting member 7 is formed into a block shape. Moreover, the self-supporting member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting member 7 is provided on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting member 7 is provided with a mounting section that is mounted on the mounting section of the dish unit 200. In this embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending back and forth as an attachment part, and the self-supporting member 7 is provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as an attachment part. ing. As a result, by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200 and inserting the attached part of the self-supporting member 7 into the mounting part of the dish unit 200, the self-supporting member 7 can be attached to the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (installed). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment with the self-supporting member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. . Further, when removing the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment, the self-supporting member 7 can be easily attached by sliding it in the opposite direction to the direction in which it was removed.

Note that the attachment (attachment) between the attachment part of the dish unit 200 and the attachment part of the self-supporting member 7 is not limited to the above-mentioned method, but includes "insertion of a protrusion into a hole", "attachment of a claw", etc. "By locking", "By magnetic attachment with a magnet", "By hook-and-loop fastener", "By suction cup", "By using removable adhesive material", etc. Further, the location where the attachment part of the dish unit 200 is provided is not limited to the bottom surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be "inside", "at least one left and right side", "front", etc. .

After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is removed from the attachment part of the tray unit 200 and stored on the game hall side. It is used by being attached to the unit 200. The self-supporting member 7 may be attached to the tray unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer to the game hall, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 includes the tray unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which protrude significantly forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the mounting portion on the lower side of the tray unit 200, it is possible to assist the self-supporting member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment of the game hall, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the mounting part of the dish unit 200, it is possible to connect the dish unit 200 and the table plate 8 of the island equipment. The self-supporting support member 7 located at the top can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from falling forward, so when installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be held down to prevent it from falling. The pachinko machine 1 does not need to be installed, and the effort required for installation work is easy.

In addition, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the attachment part of the tray unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from falling over, so it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to the fall, and The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the players.

Furthermore, since the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for attaching the self-supporting member 7, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the mounting portion of the tray unit 200, the independence of the pachinko machine 1 is assisted. Since it is possible to prevent the door frame 3 from falling forward, it is possible to make the presentation device, decorative members, etc. provided on the door frame 3 larger or to make them protrude further forward, making it possible to It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine whose appearance is significantly different from that of the other pachinko machines, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 etc. are made to protrude largely forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, in the above embodiment, by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction, the self-supporting member 7 can be attached and detached from the attachment part of the dish unit 200, but the present invention is not limited to this. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached to and detached from the plate unit 200 by sliding it in the left and right direction.

In addition, the self-supporting member 7 is made removable from the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) that is removably provided to the door frame 3 is also provided. , the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, etc.). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine 1 to be able to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, a part of the pachinko machine 1 can be fixed by attaching the self-supporting member 7, which has been removed from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, to the door frame 3 as a functional member. It can be made to function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that also serves as the self-supporting member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the pan unit 200, it can function as a self-supporting member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the pan unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it can function as a functional component. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and there is no need to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it is not lost. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made removably attachable to the door frame 3 (pan unit 200), and then a functional member removably provided to the main body frame 4 (for example, a "board cover that covers a board", "wiring board cover"), etc. ``Wiring holding member that holds the game media'', ``protective cover that protects the rear of the performance display device, movable decoration, etc.'', ``storage tank where game media are stored'', ``guidance member through which game media circulates'', etc.) It may also be used for both purposes. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the self-supporting member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (pan unit 200), and the pachinko machine 1 is stabilized. to be able to stand on their own in a state of On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, the self-supporting member 7 removed from the door frame 3 can be attached to a predetermined part of the main body frame 4 to function as a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and there is no need to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it is not lost. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced. In addition, when the self-supporting member 7 is configured to double as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the detachable functional member cannot be touched by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not cause discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, when the self-supporting member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 The number of parts involved can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the self-supporting member 7 may be provided so as to be housed within the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. As a result, when there is no need for the pachinko machine 1 to be attached to an island equipment and made to stand on its own, the self-supporting member 7 can be housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and the presence of the self-supporting member 7 improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the situation from worsening or the self-supporting member 7 becoming a hindrance to the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the self-supporting member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. Therefore, installation work and removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. In addition, in this case, compared to the case where the self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, there is no need to store the self-supporting member 7, and it is a hassle to manage the self-supporting member 7 so that it does not get lost. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, although the above-mentioned embodiment showed the self-supporting member 7 having the attached part attached to the attachment part of the dish unit 200, it is not limited to this, and it may be assumed that it does not have the attached part. Also good.

Further, although the self-supporting member 7 is shown as being removable from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting member 7 may be built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). When installed on an island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made to protrude downward and come into contact with the serving plate 8. Thereby, after installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment, there is no need to remove the self-supporting member 7 and store it separately, and the effort required for management on the game hall side can be reduced.

[10. Main control board control processing]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 486(a) is a flowchart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 486(a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various operations as the process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes data stored in registers and RAM built into the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as main control built-in RAM). The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation performed before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the power was turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that this is the case, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown in the drawings, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags, etc.) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1), A recovery process is executed to restore the state according to the information. Furthermore, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the initialization process is executed to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state without executing the recovery process. Furthermore, when the initialization process is executed, the gaming state is controlled to a non-time saving state.

Next, as processing in step S2, a random number, which is a number that is updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used in the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol The variable random number used in the lottery process for a predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control, and whether or not to set it as a reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. A reach random number that is used in the lottery process to determine whether or not to execute the performance, and a symbol random number that is used in the lottery process to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined that it is a jackpot based on the above special random number. (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), random number (normal random number) used for the lottery process related to winnings and losses that trigger the opening of the second starting port 2004), etc. We are prepared.

In addition, in this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even if a starting prize is won in the first starting opening 2002, a starting winning is achieved in the second starting opening 2004. Even if the reach random number is updated, the reach random number is configured to be obtained from the same counter, but the execution rate of the reach effect can be improved by obtaining the reach random number from a different counter with a different random number range. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol may be different from the first reach determination table as the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number. By providing a second reach determination table in which determination values are set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be varied.

In the process of step S2, the random number counter is operated in such a way that only random numbers (fluctuating random numbers) that are not related to winning or losing among these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 mS.

FIG. 486(b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 486(b), in this interrupt control, register saving processing is first performed as processing in step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2801, the first starting hole sensor 3052, the second starting hole sensor 2401, a first count sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005, Detection signals from various sensors are inputted, such as a second count sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006, the general winning hole sensor 3001, and various magnetic sensors. Then, as a process in step S13, a random number update process is performed to update the value of the random number counter that generates the random number. In addition, in the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols is stopped are updated in the counter of the random number counter. An operation is performed.

After the random numbers have been updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, as the process of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, the special symbol process flags (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag, The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to the winning or losing event that triggers the opening of the second starting port 2004, as the process of step S15. In this normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is basically selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process processing (step S14) and the normal symbol process processing (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the special symbol process processing as the processing of step S16. A process is performed in which a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the like. Next, as a process in step S17, a process is performed in which the command similarly set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process of outputting data such as winning information to be supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19, in which the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, the When the detection signals of the general winning hole sensor 3051 etc. are in the ON state, a prize ball process is executed to output a payout control command to the payout control board 633 so that the prize balls corresponding to these signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 to pay out prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball B hits the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 3052 turns on, "3 balls", and when the game ball B hits the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port sensor 3052 turns on, the game ball B hits the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port sensor 3052 turns on. When the second starting hole sensor 2401 is turned on, "1 ball" is received, and when the game ball B enters the first big winning hole 2005 and the first count sensor is turned on, "15 balls" is received, and the second big winning hole is "15 balls". When the game ball B wins in 2006 and the second count sensor turns on, "15 balls", and when the game ball B wins in the general winning hole 2001 and the general winning hole sensor 3051 turns on. Eight prize balls are paid out to each player.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process to check the increase/decrease in the number of pending memories as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process is executed, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be checked from outside the gaming machine. Thereafter, the drive control of the actuator that is constantly operating is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In addition, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but the interrupt process may only set a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred, for example. However, in this case, the game control process will be executed in the main process.

FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process processing (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will first start the process using the first starting port sensor 3052, as shown in FIG. 487. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the main control. First starting opening passage processing such as storing in the first special symbol holding storage area of RAM is executed (step S32). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, it controls the jackpot game. A jackpot control process (step S40) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating (the result of the hit determination and the contents of the jackpot type) indicates a "15R jackpot". When , the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first grand prize opening 2005 after the first grand prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) A process is executed to control the game into a 15R jackpot game in which an opening/closing pattern is repeated 15 times to close the game when the game is closed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the first jackpot 2005 as described above, a time saving flag setting process is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control (control executed in a time-saving state) is being executed, and is set when ending a jackpot game based on a jackpot that performs time-saving control after the end of a jackpot game. It is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in 498 or the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of times of time saving is set so that the time saving control ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. That is, when the time saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game and either the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner five times or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner once, either condition is met. Time saving control is now terminated.

Further, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small winning game is controlled (step S36), and determines whether or not the small winning execution flag is set (step S36). If the execution flag is set, a small win control process (step S41) for controlling the small win game is executed. In addition, in the small win control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is in a mode that suggests a "small win", the second large prize opening 2006, which will be described later, is activated. Closes after opening the second grand prize opening 2006 based on opening pattern A or opening pattern B, or when it is detected by the second count sensor that 10 game balls B have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. Execute the processing to do so. In addition, when the game ball B that wins in the second big prize opening 2006 and is distributed by the distribution member enters a specific area, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time by controlling the game to be a jackpot game (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won in the first big prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated 15 times to control the transition to the 15R jackpot game. do. On the other hand, if the game ball B that won in the first big prize opening 2005 and was distributed by the distribution member enters the discharge area without entering the specific area, it will not be controlled by the jackpot game and will be small. After the winning game ends, the game is controlled again to the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) before the small winning game.

In addition, if neither the jackpot execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set, the main control MPU controls a second special reservation number counter that indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On the condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. A second special symbol process including a lottery process related to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, the process shown in FIG. As the process of step S41, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S42). In the process of step S42, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as a process in step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S45), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first hold memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold. It is updated to correspond to the number of memories, and in the above storage process (step S20), a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reservation number of memories is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to be done. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or not. The mode type of game presentation is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting gate passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the first 1 (value of the special reservation number counter), and a first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to the value is set (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a preliminary determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored in correspondence with the first starting port 2002 where the starting prize has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the generated starting winnings is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, it is executed by the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect to be played or prior judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting prize. will be able to understand.

Note that when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reservation storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first pending storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of pending memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order starting from the area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the first variable pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is received, the preset data stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area is stored in accordance with the received first variation pattern command. Discard the judgment information and move the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). (shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output, or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in accordance with the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, the process shown in 490 in FIG. As the process of step S51, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuating random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, if it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as a process in step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in a second special symbol retention storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special retention number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory number. It is updated to correspond to the number of memories, and in the above storage process (step S20), a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reservation number of memories is set and sent to the peripheral control board 4140. It is supposed to be done. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the second pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for determination are the same. Since only the table and table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is performed according to the first special symbol process flag, on the condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85). This will be done selectively. Note that if the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. A first special symbol in which a first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fluctuating random number, and the variation of the effect display executed in response to the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process regarding the aspect is performed.
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S83) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to

Note that the first special symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486) to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed.

FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 492, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control for the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process in step S102, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The random numbers stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) are stored in the same main control built-in RAM. Read from. Next, as processing in steps S103 and S104, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, fluctuation random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d). Random numbers extracted according to occurrences are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Thereafter, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the jackpot or small hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), this process ends.

FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal process is being executed, the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process is compared with the second special random number (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 494(A), a hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, two types of first special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types of first special random numbers that are different from the jackpot determination value Each of the first special random numbers is set so that the first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the first special random number of 265 types matches the loss judgment value indicating that the 265 kinds of first special random numbers are a loss. (Jackpot probability: 1/135, small win probability: 3/270). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, two types of second special random numbers are used in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number. 113 kinds of second special random numbers that match the jackpot judgment value that shows that you won the jackpot and are different from the jackpot judgment value match the small hit judgment value that shows that you won the small hit, and 155 kinds of second special random numbers that match the jackpot judgment value that shows that you won the jackpot. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the random number is a loss (probability of jackpot: 1/135, probability of small win: 113/270). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of determining a small hit is higher than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. The situation is now considered to be more advantageous to the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of the comparison with the random number), if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S115), a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a jackpot is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is ended.

In addition, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing), If it is determined that the fluctuation is a small win (step S117), a small win flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a small win is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the jackpot nor the small hit has been won, that is, when it is determined that it is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S102 (step S119).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reaching, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating not reaching. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table during the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table during the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost (step S120) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating that the game is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 495, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 494(B) and uses the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, a jackpot symbol is determined as a mode of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 494(B), the jackpot symbol determination table has symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) associated with each judgment result (14R time-saving jackpot, 5R time-saving jackpot). remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired random symbol number.

in particular,
1. Close the first grand prize opening 2005 after it is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R jackpot game in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big winning hole 2005, and after the jackpot game ends, the symbol variation of the special symbol is 100. 14R time-saving jackpot A that controls to the time-saving state A that ends if the next jackpot game does not occur until it is executed twice
2. The first grand prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. (1 round), after which the second grand prize opening 2006 is left open for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have entered the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected four times (4 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to be a 5R jackpot game in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006. , after the end of the jackpot game, if the next jackpot game does not occur before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, the state 5R time-saving jackpot A that controls the time-saving state B to be terminated
3. Close the second grand prize opening 2006 after it is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R jackpot game in which it is possible (easily) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game ends, the symbol variation of the special symbol is 100. 14R time-saving jackpot B that controls to the time-saving state A which ends if the next jackpot game does not occur until it is executed twice
4. The first grand prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. (1 round), after which the second grand prize opening 2006 is left open for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have entered the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected four times (four rounds), the game ball B is controlled to be a 5R jackpot game in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006. , after the end of the jackpot game, if the next jackpot game does not occur before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, the state 5R time-saving jackpot B that controls the time-saving state B to be ended

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are distributed when it becomes 14R time-saving jackpot A, and 94 judgment values are distributed when it becomes 5R time-saving jackpot A. There is. That is, when a jackpot lottery result is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, the 14R time-saving jackpot A has a 6% probability, and the 5R time-saving jackpot A has a 94% probability. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed in the case of 14R time-saving jackpot B, and 42 judgment values are distributed in the case of 5R time-saving jackpot B. ing. That is, when a jackpot lottery result is obtained by the lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 58% probability that it will be a 14R time-saving jackpot B, and a 42% probability that it will be a 5R time-saving jackpot B. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a 14R time-saving jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. This creates an advantageous situation for the player.

In addition, when a lottery result that is a jackpot is obtained, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is determined according to the type of jackpot. Then, in the jackpot control process (step S40), after controlling the jackpot game, a process of setting a time saving flag based on the determination result and a process of setting a time saving number of times according to the type of jackpot in a time saving number counter are performed. executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpots of "14R time-saving jackpot A" and "14R time-saving jackpot B" have been obtained, after 14 rounds of jackpot games are executed, the special symbol (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled in a time-saving state until it is executed 100 times, and when it is determined that the jackpots of "5R time-saving jackpot A" and "5R time-saving jackpot B" have been obtained. After the jackpot game for five rounds is executed, the time saving state is controlled until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In this way, when a lottery result that is a jackpot is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, the time saving state is always controlled after the end of the jackpot game, and similarly, a lottery result that is a jackpot is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number. Even if the winning game is obtained, the time saving state is always controlled after the jackpot game ends. However, if the jackpots of "14R time-saving jackpot A" and "14R time-saving jackpot B" are obtained, the jackpot game will be more effective than if the jackpots of "5R time-saving jackpot A" and "5R time-saving jackpot B" are obtained. After execution, the time saving state is maintained for a long period of time.

In addition, if it is determined to be 14R time-saving jackpot A, the 14R time-saving jackpot A symbol is determined as the 14R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is determined to be 5R time-saving jackpot A, the 5R is determined as the 5R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. The time-saving jackpot A symbol is decided. Also, if it is determined to be 14R time-saving jackpot B in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 14R time-saving jackpot B symbol is determined as the 14R jackpot symbol of the second special symbol, and if it is determined to be 5R time-saving jackpot B, the second special symbol is determined to be 14R time-saving jackpot B. The 5R time-saving jackpot B symbol is determined as the 5R jackpot symbol of the second special symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a losing symbol if the jackpot flag is not set (step S136).

After the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the lottery result (type of jackpot, small hit, reach loss, loss) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may be an instruction for the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU performs display control on the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are variably displayed. Specifically, when a jackpot is identified from the received judgment result notification command, the peripheral control MPU displays a jackpot pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are A combination of the same symbols from [0] to [8]) is determined, and if a reach loss is specified, a loss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols from [0] to [8]) is determined. If the combination of symbols with different medium decorative symbols is determined, and a loss is determined, a loss symbol without reach (at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) is determined. A combination in which the decorative symbols are different is determined, and the determined stop symbols are displayed and controlled at the elapse of the variable time specified from the variable pattern command (at the end of the game performance).

FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag as shown in 496 of the same figure. If so (step S141), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, it is a normal loss (reach effect If the result is a loss (not executing), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S147).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S148), and the surroundings for starting the determined variation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S149). Moreover, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer when the variation pattern is determined (step S150). As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the variable time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 synchronizes with the variable display of the special symbol. Performance control will now be performed.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random numbers and symbol random numbers, and the variation random numbers read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. The variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the fluctuation random number with the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute. . For example, out of 241 types of fluctuating random numbers, 164 types of fluctuating random numbers are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects will be executed, and 59 types of fluctuating random numbers are set as super reach with low expectation of jackpot. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the performances will be executed, and a judgment value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the 18 types of fluctuating random numbers will execute one of the super reach performances with high expectation of jackpot. ). In addition, the super reach effect has a higher level of expectation for a jackpot than the normal reach effect, and for players who desire a jackpot game, when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game will increase. It has become.

In addition, in the variation pattern table of this example, the variation time corresponding to the first special random number is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, 4 to 60 seconds in the time saving state, and similarly to the second special random number. The corresponding variable time is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, and 2 to 60 seconds in the time saving state.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, then in step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of continuations of the time saving state is set is "0". If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is to be ended is set (step S154).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S151, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, at that point Then, the process moves to step S155. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S155) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83), this process is ended.

FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 497, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171 As the process, the variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S82) is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 498, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181 As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of one special pattern (step S182).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, the time saving control is ended when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 1 time, or 5 times). Control of non-time-saving states will begin.

In addition, in the time saving state, in order to cause the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004, an instruction to recommend so-called right-handed hitting (hereinafter also referred to as a right-handed hitting instruction) is sent to the effect display device 1600, the speaker, etc. It is executed using As described above, when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations end after the time saving state starts, the time saving state ends and the state returns to the normal state (non-time saving state). When the normal state returns, in order to cause the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002, the right-handed batting instruction is completed, and an instruction to recommend left-handed batting (hereinafter also referred to as a left-handed batting instruction) is displayed. This is executed using the device 1600, a speaker, and the like.

In addition, for example, when the number of times of time saving is 100 times (that is, the time saving state ends by completing 100 special symbol variations after the start of the time saving state), for example, the 100th variation from the start of the time saving state ( In other words, by entering the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the time saving final variation, the second special symbol variation can be executed up to four times in the normal state after the end of the time saving state. .

In other words, after the time saving state ends, although the second special symbol variation (which can be executed mainly during the time saving state) is executed, the state is still the normal state, so the left hand is hit differently than during the time saving state. A situation occurs in which a typing instruction is executed.

Hereinafter, it is assumed that the jackpot fluctuation is included in the second special symbol fluctuation up to four times. In this case, when the jackpot variation ends, a jackpot game starts, and in the jackpot game, a right-handed instruction is executed in the same way as in the time saving state in order to cause the game ball B to enter the jackpot hole.

In addition, in the normal state after the time saving ends, if you hit right-handed, it is difficult to get the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, so there are fewer opportunities to receive a special symbol lottery compared to the case where you hit left-handed. , that is, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. On the other hand, if the player plays right-handed without following the left-handed batting instructions, the game ball B may pass through the gate section 2003 and receive a lottery advantageous to the player, which is different from a special lottery such as a normal lottery. can. In addition, when the player hits right-handed, the probability of receiving a payout of the game ball B due to the game ball B entering the general winning hole 2001 is increased. However, in such a situation where you should be hitting left-handed, if you are hitting right-handed (for example, when a predetermined number of game balls B pass through the gate section 2003 within a predetermined time), the left-handed ball will be left-handed. A left-handed hit warning effect is executed to warn the player to hit the ball. The left-handed hitting warning performance is a performance that does not appear in situations where right-handed hitting is required, such as in a time-saving state or during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, by hitting left after the time saving ends, a situation may occur in which the first special symbol variation of the jackpot is suspended until the second special symbol variation, which is the jackpot variation, ends. In this case, it is also possible to reserve a plurality of first special symbol changes (up to four) for the jackpot. For example, if two of the four first special symbol fluctuations are pending jackpots, two consecutive jackpots, and one or two missed jackpots between the two jackpots. There are cases and cases.

Therefore, unless the game ball B enters the second winning hole 2004, the game will not be executed between the end of the jackpot game due to the first jackpot hold and the end of the jackpot game due to the second jackpot hold. The maximum number of fluctuations is three times. In addition, if you win the maximum number (4) of jackpot reservations of the first special symbol fluctuation, unless you enter the game ball B into the second prize opening 2004, you will receive a jackpot due to the jackpot reservation for each special symbol fluctuation. The game is executed.

In addition, if the first special symbol variation that is out of place is pending between the jackpots of the two first special symbol variations, the game ball B will be placed in the second prize opening 2004 after the jackpot game due to the first jackpot pending. By letting the ball enter, the second special symbol variation is executed with priority, so that activation of the jackpot game due to the second jackpot suspension can be delayed.

In addition, the probability of holding back the first special symbol movement of one jackpot is higher than the probability of holding the first special pattern movement of multiple jackpots (up to 4 first special pattern movements can be held). However, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special lottery is low, for example, 1/100 or 1/319).

Return to the explanation of the flowchart. Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S187), and starts the jackpot game. A waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (a time for displaying a message indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process is also executed in which the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. Then, the jackpot game is controlled to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S91) and the jackpot opening processing (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0", and the jackpot opening process (step S92) is repeatedly executed. When the round is ended in the opening process (step S92), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1, and based on the fact that it becomes "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process (step S93) and the jackpot game ends. Executes control to

Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set (step S189). Note that the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R time-saving jackpot A start command, 5R time-saving jackpot A start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (14R time-saving jackpot A, 5R time-saving jackpot A) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, jackpot start commands (14R time-saving jackpot B start command, 5R time-saving jackpot B start) according to the type of jackpot (14R time-saving jackpot B, 5R time-saving jackpot B) command).

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set when the jackpot game is finished, specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot opening process (step S93) of the jackpot control process (step S40). Opening/closing control of the first grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 10 game balls B enter the first grand prize opening 2005 It is reset when the opening/closing control (opening/closing control which repeats the opening/closing pattern which is closed when detected by the first count sensor 14 times or 5 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S186) and the small win flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start a small win game. A small winning start command is set (step S191), and a waiting time until the small winning game starts (a time for displaying a message indicating that the small winning game is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S192). Then, a small winning execution flag indicating that a small winning game is being executed is set (step S193). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S191, the small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A)) A start command) is set. Thereby, the performance of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (5R small hit B1 Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) are set.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set to the small winning process (step S401) of the small winning control process (step S41), which will be described later. ) to control the opening/closing of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the type of small win (for example, after opening the first big winning opening 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds) or when 10 game balls B are placed in the first big winning opening 2005. It is reset when the opening/closing control (opening/closing control that causes the opening/closing to close when the first count sensor detects that a prize has been won) is completed. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the device and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if you lose, set the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stops displaying) until the next special symbol variable display starts in the interval timer. (Step S194), the process moves to step S195.

When the processes of steps S186 to S194 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process. (Step S195), this process ends.

FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will proceed to the jackpot game based on the fact that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped become a jackpot symbol. A pre-processing process for opening the big prize opening (step S91) that waits until the next round is completed or the next round starts.
2. The first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are controlled to be open based on the fact that the state when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a jackpot symbol, or based on the fact that the next round is started. After controlling the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to open state, and opening the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or Big winning hole opening processing to close when the first count sensor or second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won in the big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 (step S92)
3. A post-opening process for the jackpot opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game ends when all rounds are finished (step S93)

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S91) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 486). In addition, in the above-mentioned big winning hole opening processing (step S92), at the start of a round that controls the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round in which the first jackpot 2005 and the second jackpot 2006 are controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. In addition, the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is performed using a device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker, and the like.

FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S41). In the small winning process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small winning process flag.

1. Small win start processing (step S400) that executes a setting process for starting a small win game
2. Small win processing to monitor the entrance and opening time of game ball B during a small win game (step S401)

In addition, the said small hit process flag is operated in the process of said step S1 (refer FIG. 486) to indicate that the said small hit start process (step S400) should be performed. In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into a specific area is detected during the small hit processing, the jackpot execution flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game according to the type of small hit (5R small If it is a hit, round 4, if it is a small hit of 14R, round 13) is set in the jackpot number counter, and the process ends. As a result, the jackpot game is started following the small win game.

FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process processing (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, the above-mentioned As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs gate section passing processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read normal random number, a lottery process regarding the display mode of the normal symbol when the variation control is stopped is performed.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The above-mentioned normal symbol is set so that the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is in a mode that suggests a "normal symbol hit", a process for controlling the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is performed. Normal electric accessories release process to be executed (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486) to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed.

FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S802).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in 502 in the same figure, As the process of step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal reservation number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. . Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved stored normal symbols is the maximum value "4".

In the process of step S811, if it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly put the fluctuating display control of the normal symbols in a pending state. will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S813, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

However, in the process of step S811, if it is determined that the number of stored normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814 (not acquiring the normal random number and the normal symbol fluctuation random number from the random number counter), the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

Note that the gate passage processing (step S802) may be performed as another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value of the normal holding number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normal symbols held in memory is the maximum value "4". conduct. If it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1) in order to put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols into a new pending state. ), and then the previously obtained normal random number and normal pattern fluctuation random number (the normal random number and the general pattern fluctuation random number stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter. On the other hand, if as a result of acquiring the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, it is determined that this counter value is the maximum value "4" (the hold memory number of the above normal symbols is If it is the maximum value), the above-mentioned normal random number and the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation random number obtained earlier are discarded without being stored in the normal symbol retention storage area, and the fluctuation display control of the above-obtained normal symbol is newly performed. It may also be possible to prevent it from being put on hold.

FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in 503 in the figure, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the following as the process of step S821. Based on the counter value of the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control for the normal symbols in the pending state, then as a process of step S822, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU are The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of symbols (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) is read out from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in response to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 are stored from the first (earliest) area. Memorize in order. When a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the random number extracted is stored in the n+1st (n=1 to 3) storage area. is stored, and when the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) is stored. The various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal pattern hit determination table shown in FIG. 504(A) with the normal random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 504(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the ordinary figure winning determination table that is referred to for comparison with ordinary random numbers, the above ordinary random numbers are set so that they match the ordinary figure winning judgment value indicating that all 10 types of ordinary random numbers have been won as ordinary figures. associated. That is, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the player is sure to win the normal symbol.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparing the ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, determines that it is a ordinary symbol hit (step S829), A flag per ordinary symbol indicating that the fluctuation has been won per ordinary symbol is set (step S830), and the pattern is determined to be a symbol per ordinary symbol as the mode when fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the ordinary symbol). (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not a hit, the normal symbol is determined to be a losing symbol as the state when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the stopping symbol of the normal symbol) (step S833).

After the lottery process for the normal symbols has been performed in this way, as a process in step S834, the lottery results (instructing either a hit or a loss for the common symbols) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set a general figure judgment result notification command according to each result. After that, as the process of step S835, this process ends at the time when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (step S804).

FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the time saving flag as shown in 505 in the same figure. If so (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving is selected. (Step S843).

Then, by comparing the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table and the normal symbol fluctuation random number read out in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern) to be executed is determined (step S844). ), a normal pattern variation command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of normal pattern variation in the determined normal pattern variation pattern, and the normal pattern variation display is displayed on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400. (step S845).

Moreover, when the main control MPU determines the general pattern fluctuation pattern, it sets the general pattern fluctuation time in accordance with the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern in the general pattern fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the performance control is performed on the normal symbol display (variable display of the normal symbols) of the function display unit 1400 for the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the determined ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during non-time saving of this example, 20 seconds is set as the regular symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving in this example, the regular symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.8 seconds so that the regular symbol fluctuation time is shorter than the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving. is set. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, when the normal symbol fluctuation display control is started, as the next step S847, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805), this Finish the process.

FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. The ordinary figure fluctuation timer in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time was set in step S846 is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process moves to step S853. That is, in the process of this step S853, this process ends at the time when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol stop processing (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. Performs display control to display the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and notifies the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol. A general figure stop display command to be displayed is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

Next, when the normal pattern hit flag is set (step S863), the second start opening corresponding to the current gaming state is selected using the normal pattern hit opening pattern table shown in FIG. 504(B). 2004 release pattern is set (step S864).

Specifically, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state when opening is started, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-saving state when it starts opening, if a lottery result based on normal random numbers is obtained as a normal drawing, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed. Opening pattern A is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the opening operation of the second starting port 2004 is short, and when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball It is difficult to let the ball enter the ball. That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed, almost no game ball enters.

On the other hand, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the time saving state when opening is started, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-saving state when it starts opening, if a lottery result based on normal random numbers is obtained as a normal drawing, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed. Opening pattern B is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the second starting port 2004 to open is long, and when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball It is now possible to enter the ball.

When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, as a process in step S885, a normal pattern start command indicating to start a normal pattern winning game is set, and a normal pattern process flag is set to a normal electric accessory. At the point in time when the process is updated so as to be transferred to the release process (step S866), this process ends. In addition, the common pattern winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600, This can be implemented using lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the normal symbol normal process when the normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal electric accessory release process (step S807).

Now, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. If a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since controlling the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), the control MPU controls the second starting port 2004 to open. When the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the starting port 2004 is turned off and the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process ends.

Further, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 508, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 If it is the timing to open the second starting port 2004 (step S874), the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in the open state (step S875). Finish the process.

In addition, in the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), a normal pattern per end command is set (step S877). Then, at the time when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process is ended. In addition, the normal pattern winning end command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the normal pattern winning ending command, the production display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc., perform the production of the common pattern winning game that is being executed. can be terminated.

[11. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 509, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs initial setting processing (step S501). This initial setting processing includes processing for clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. Note that during this initial setting process, interrupts are prohibited, and after the initial setting process, interrupts are enabled. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes the steady processing for 2 mS. In the 2mS steady processing, the process of counting up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (increasing the 16mS progress monitoring counter by 1) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16mS has elapsed, 16mS has elapsed. While setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. In this way, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapse flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapse flag is reset (step S503), and then 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 mS steady processing, processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. is executed based on commands received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 510 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady processing, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, a command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the production control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second fluctuation pattern setting process) is received. Based on this, control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

Furthermore, in the sound control process in step S603, control processes related to the speakers provided in the pachinko machine 1 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamps/LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, processes such as transmitting lamp/LED lighting signals to various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. are executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the production control process (step S602) is executed.

Note that the processing from step S601 to step S606 in the 16 mS steady processing is completed within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process can be restarted from the beginning immediately after 16 mS has passed since the start of the 16 mS steady process (with the command in step S601). (from analysis processing) is not executed. That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady processing, only the 16 mS elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapsed flag is set after the 16 mS steady processing ends, the 16 mS steady processing is started. Start.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16 mS steady processing in the sub-main processing.

FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. I will do it.

1. A variation pattern command that instructs the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed in the above command analysis process (first variation pattern command that instructs the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second After performing processing to control the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. based on the second variation pattern command that instructs the variation pattern of the special symbol, the above-mentioned production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during the variation production. Variation effect start processing to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time after starting the control of the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker 921, etc. is measured, and processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol (No. 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol) in response to the elapse of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern (step S712), the above-mentioned production process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation end process (step S712)
3. Based on receiving a stop display command instructing to stop the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a process is performed to derive and display a predetermined display result, and if the result is a loss, the above-mentioned effect is performed. Variable performance end process that changes the process flag to a value according to the variable performance start process, if it is a jackpot, it is changed to a value according to the jackpot performance process, and if it is a small hit, it is changed to a value according to the small win performance process. (Step S713)
4. Based on receiving the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the production display device 1600 performs processing to execute display control during the jackpot game, and when ending the jackpot game, changes the production process flag. Jackpot performance processing to change the value according to the performance start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small winning start command instructing the start of the small winning game, processing is performed on the effect display device 1600 to execute display control during the small winning game, and the second large winning opening is opened during the small winning game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to a specific area, when the small winning game ends, the above performance process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the jackpot performance start process, and the game ball B is distributed to the specific area. If not, the small hit effect process is changed to a value according to the variable effect start process (step S715)

Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device of function display unit 1400, second special symbol display device of function display unit 1400) through the above processing The effect display device 1600 starts to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of time saving control]
As described above, in the time-saving state, the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is controlled in a different opening pattern from that in the non-time-saving state. That is, when the normal symbol variation executed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, if the time is short, the second starting port 2004 is opened in the opening pattern A of the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). When the normal symbol fluctuation executed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is in a non-time saving state, the second opening pattern B in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is opened and closed. The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

In this way, since the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is changed based on the time when the normal symbol variation executed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 has stopped, the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is changed immediately before the end of the time saving state (for example, the number of time saving times). In the case of 100 times of time-saving state A, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed immediately before the 100th variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the time-saving state stops, etc. When the normal symbol fluctuation executed in 2004 is stopped and the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed, the second starting port 2004 is opened/closed in the opening pattern B of the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as a time saving state. will be done. Further, if the time saving state ends after the second starting port 2004 is opened, the opening pattern in the time saving state is executed even though the time saving state has ended, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player. In addition, a starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 may occur at an unexpected time, such as after the symbol change starts in the non-time saving state after the end of the time saving state, and this may result in an unintended winning by the game designer. Behavior (In the non-time saving state, the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is hardly displayed; When the starting winning occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the game progresses, and this behavior gives the player a sense of discomfort, which may lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the special symbols that are variably displayed on the special symbol displays (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 are stopped at a losing symbol (for example, the 1) In step S194 of the special symbol stop process, normally, "0.5 seconds" is set in the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol is displayed) until the next variable display of the special symbol starts. set. As mentioned above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process (step S28) and the second special symbol process (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol display (the The variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device is controlled so as not to start.

Also, when ending the time-saving state, that is, when the symbol fluctuation of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game reaches the number of time-saving times, and when the symbol fluctuation stops (time-saving (When the last symbol fluctuation in the state has stopped), set "2 seconds" to the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stopped symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol fluctuation display starts. set. As described above, in the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the open state, and then the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting "2 seconds" to the interval timer when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops and ending the time saving state, the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state can be started before the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol starts. The second starting hole 2004 can be changed to a closed state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a starting winning to the second starting hole 2004 after the symbol variation of the special symbol in a non-time saving state is started.

In addition, the period set in the interval timer when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends is at least equal to the opening time of the second big prize opening 2006 in the time saving state (in this example, "1. 5 seconds") or more. Also, if the second big prize opening 2006 has not changed to the open state when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends, the waiting time until the next special symbol fluctuation display starts. It is also possible to set the same time as usual (in this example, "0.5 seconds").

In this way, when the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state has stopped), regardless of the presence or absence of the first pending number and the second pending number, the Time-saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the time-saving state is derived (after the last symbol fluctuation in the time-saving state has stopped) by suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (win/loss determination). is completed within the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the second pending number from increasing after the end of the time saving control. This prevents the game from proceeding with a behavior that is not intended by the game designer, such as a start win to the second start opening 2004 and a variable display of the second special symbol even though it is in a non-time saving state. It is possible to prevent this, and it is possible to suitably realize the game proceeding with the behavior intended by the game designer (the game quality intended by the game designer), so it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest by not giving players a sense of discomfort. .

In the above example, the determination as to whether or not the time saving state is in effect (determination as to whether or not to end the time saving state) is made based on the time when the normal symbol fluctuation executed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 has stopped. What is done as a standard is shown, but when starting the normal symbol variation executed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to determine whether or not it is in the time saving state (for example, the above-mentioned normal symbol normal processing (step S803) or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed) may be performed as a reference. In this case, at least the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time saving state (normal symbol variation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) and the The opening time of the second grand prize opening 2006 ("1.5 seconds" in this example) may be equal to or longer than the total period ("2.3 seconds" in this example).

In addition, the above-mentioned left-handed hitting instruction (instruction recommending left-handed hitting that appears in order to enter the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 when returning from the time saving state to the normal state) is not applicable after the time saving ends. It may be executed even before the first normal fluctuation starts. In other words, the left-handed instruction may be executed over the start timing of the first normal variation. Further, for example, the end timing of the left-handed batting instruction may be before the end of the first normal variation after the end of the time reduction, or may be after the end of the first normal variation.

For example, the symbol stops in the final variation of the time saving state, and the left-handed instruction starts after the symbol stops and before the start of the first variation after the time saving ends. Note that the left-handed instruction using the effect display device 1600 may be started after the left-handed instruction using the speaker is started, or this order may be reversed. Furthermore, for example, the left-handed instruction using the speaker may end before the left-handed instruction by the effect display device 1600 ends, or this order may be reversed. Note that it is desirable that the left-handed batting instruction at the end of the time saving is continued for a predetermined period of time even if left-handed batting is actually started.

In addition, the production mode of the left-handed instruction that appears at the end of the time saving and the left-handed instruction in the left-handed hitting warning effect that warns you to make a left-handed shot because you have made a right-handed shot in normal times (for example, displayed on the effect display device 1600) display mode) may be different. If a player hits the right player while the left player instruction at the end of time saving is being executed, the left player instruction may continue to be executed, or the left player instruction may be terminated and the left player warning performance is performed. A left-handed batting instruction may also be executed.

It should be noted that when the second special symbol variation is being executed in a state where the left-handed instruction that appears at the end of the time saving has ended, if a right-handed shot is made, the left-handed instruction in the left-handed warning performance described above will be executed. The left-handed batting instruction ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. There is a variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter than the predetermined time. Therefore, in one variation, after the left-handed batting instruction starts and ends, the left-handed batting instruction can be further started. Note that the predetermined time may be shorter than the shortest variation time. It should be noted that if the jackpot game starts before the predetermined time has elapsed, the left-handed instruction will end by the time the jackpot game starts.

Also, if you perform a right-handed hit while the left-handed instruction in the left-handed hitting warning performance is being executed, you may reset the performance time of the left-handed instruction and restart the left-handed instruction from the beginning. , the production time for the left-handed batting instruction may be reset, but the left-handed batting instruction may be continued without being redone, or the left-handed batting instruction may be ignored and only the left-handed batting instruction performance may be performed, ignoring that the right-handed batting instruction has been performed. You can run it as is.

As mentioned above, by entering the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the time saving final variation, up to four second special symbol variations can be suspended. If you win the normal symbol lottery just before the end of the final variation, the second prize opening 2004 will be opened during the first variation in the normal state after the end of the time reduction, and the second special prize will be opened during the execution of the first variation. It is also possible to suspend one more symbol change.

The second special symbol variation is held while the time saving final variation is being executed, and one second special symbol variation is held during the execution of the first variation after the time saving ends, and only that one second special symbol variation is a jackpot. If it is a variation, after the execution of the losing variation which was suspended during the execution of the time saving final variation, the second special symbol variation of the jackpot is executed and the jackpot game is started. In addition, the right-handed instruction is executed during the time-saving state, and as long as the right-handed instruction is followed, there is a possibility that the maximum number of 4 second special symbol variations are pending while the time-saving final variation is being executed. Since it is the highest, it is most likely that the losing variation will be executed four times before the second special symbol variation of the jackpot is executed.

On the other hand, for example, if there is no pending special symbol variation at the end of the time saving, the variation will not be executed, but as mentioned above, if you win the normal lottery just before the end of the time saving final variation. By executing a right hit, there is a possibility that the second special symbol variation can be executed from a state where no variation has been executed. Particularly when the second special symbol variation is a jackpot variation, the time saving ends and the variation is not executed, and after that, the jackpot game starts after one variation is executed.

[12. Performance in an advantageous situation]
[12-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, an example of the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be explained. FIG. 512(A) is an example of a hit probability table, and FIG. 512(B) is an example of a jackpot distribution table. The winning probability table and the jackpot distribution table are stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, for example.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol will also be referred to as special symbol 1, and the second special symbol will also be referred to as special symbol 2. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as simply a special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to as special symbol variation or simply variation. The special lottery results for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 include jackpots and small wins.

The winning probability table includes the jackpot probability in a low probability state (i.e. non-probability variable state) and high probability state (i.e. probability variable state), the small probability of winning (no distinction between low probability state and high probability state), Define. The jackpot probability is the same for Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2. In addition, the winning probability table defines the small winning probability in the special figure 2. In other words, according to the winning probability table in FIG. 512, there is a high probability of winning a small hit when the special drawing 2 is won. Moreover, from the winning of special drawing 1, the probability of not winning a small hit or winning is extremely low compared to that of special drawing 2 (for example, 1/300 or less).

In addition, in this chapter, when a small hit is won, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state that can accept the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern of closing after reaching is repeated multiple times (for example, twice).

The jackpot distribution table defines the distribution of jackpot types when a jackpot is won for each of the special drawings 1 and 2. "2R", "8R", and "16R" in the jackpot type indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and "low probability with time reduction", "high probability without time reduction", and "high probability with time reduction" indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot. Indicates the gaming state to which the game will transition after the game ends.

In addition, "Special figure 1_8R low accuracy time saving symbol 1", "Special figure 1_8R low accuracy time saving symbol 2", "Special figure 1_8R low accurate time saving symbol 3", "Special figure 2_2R low accuracy time saving symbol 1", The number of time savings for "Special Figure 2_2R Low Accuracy Time Saving Symbol 2", "Special Figure 2_2R Low Accurate Time Saving Symbol 3", and "Special Figure 2_2R High Accuracy Time Saving Symbol 3" is 10 times, and "Special Figure 2_2R High The number of times of time saving of "Definite time saving symbol 1" is 7 times, and the number of time saving of "Special figure 2_2R low probability time saving symbol 2" is 9 times.

The number of times of time saving is the number of fluctuations that triggers the end of the time saving state that starts after the end of the jackpot game. That is, after entering the time saving state, when the number of changes determined by the number of time saving times ends, the time saving state ends. In addition, the number of times of time saving may be determined by the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2, or may be determined by the number of fluctuations of one special figure. In this chapter, it is assumed that the number of time reductions is determined by the number of fluctuations of special map 2. In other words, for example, the time-saving state that changes after the jackpot of "Special Figure 2_2R High Accuracy Time Saving Symbol 1" will change even if the total number of fluctuations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 reaches 7 times. If the game has not been completed seven times, it will not end.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 described in this chapter, the variation display of Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 starts individually according to the extraction of special random numbers, and the fluctuation of Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 starts. Display can be performed simultaneously (simultaneous variation of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (on hold), the held special random numbers are individually digested according to the degree of progress of the fluctuation display of each special random number.

That is, when the first special symbol being fluctuating stops, the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol memory display starts to fluctuate, and when the second special symbol being fluctuating stops, the second special symbol The second special symbol stored in the storage display starts to change. In addition, since the special symbols 1 and 2 can be changed simultaneously, the effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbols so as to change simultaneously in response to the changes in each special symbol.

In addition, if either special figure 1 or special figure 2 stops in a display mode indicating a jackpot, one of the following processes will be performed as a process for the other special figure that is changing at the same time. . As a first example of processing, a jackpot game based on one special symbol is controlled, and fluctuations in the other special symbol are deleted (forced to stop when the game misses). In this case, even after the jackpot game ends, the variation of the other deleted special figure is not restarted, but starts from the variation of the next special figure in the other.

As a second processing example, while controlling a jackpot game using one special figure, the elapse of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is temporarily stopped while the jackpot game is being executed. During the execution of the jackpot game, the special symbols whose fluctuations are stopped are displayed, for example, by flashing on the special symbol display (displayed in a manner different from when they are not paused (the player can recognize that they are paused)). be done. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the variable display of the other special symbol, which has been temporarily stopped, is restarted from the remaining variable time. As a third processing example, while controlling the jackpot game using one of the special symbols, the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is reset, and after the end of the jackpot game, the variation of the other special symbol is started again.

In this chapter, the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state is a state in which it is easy to obtain small winning balls (so-called small winning rush). Hereinafter, an example of a specification for realizing a small win rush only in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state will be described.

First, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the normal lottery probability, etc. will be explained. The variation time of the normal symbols is, for example, about 1 second in both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, which is a short time compared to the variation time of the special symbol variation. In addition, in both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the probability of a normal winning in the normal lottery result performed when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 is very high (for example, 1/1). Further, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when a normal symbol is won is long in the time saving state (for example, about 6 seconds) and short in the non-time saving state (for example, about 0.7 seconds).

Next, the gaming method in each state will be explained. As mentioned above, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is extremely high compared to the first special symbol lottery (54552/65536 in the example of FIG. 512(A)). Therefore, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, by letting the game ball B pass through the gate part 2003, the second starting port 2004 opens, and the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, resulting in a small hit with a high probability. can be elected.

However, in the low probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of special chart 2 is very long compared to the fluctuation time of special chart 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest variation time of special figure 2 (for example, about 10 minutes) is longer than the longest variation time of special figure 1 (for example, about 5 minutes). Therefore, the time interval between winning the small win and opening the first big winning hole 2005 is very long, and furthermore, the opening and closing time of the first big winning hole 2005 in the small winning game is short and the number of openings and closings is small. Even if the variation of special figure 2 is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the first big prize opening 2005 at a good timing during the small winning game.

Specifically, the total opening time of the first big prize opening 2005 in the small winning game is shorter than the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state. For example, a small winning game in which the first pattern in which the first big winning hole 2005 opens for about 0.5 seconds and then closes for about 1.35 seconds is executed only once, or the first big winning hole 2005 opens for about 0.5 seconds. There is a small winning game in which the second pattern of opening for about seconds and then closing for about 0.7 seconds is repeated twice, and then the first pattern is executed once.

Even if you were able to enter the game ball B into the first big prize opening 2005 at the right time during a small winning game, the fluctuation time of the special drawing 2 is very long, so the number of balls that can be put out per unit time will vary. Moreover, the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the low-probability, non-time-saving state, the player basically plays the game by hitting left-handed and causing the game ball B to enter the first starting hole 2002.

On the other hand, in the time saving state (low accuracy time saving state and high accuracy time saving state), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (e.g., about 1 second) of the shortening variation (fluctuation in which the reach effect is not executed) of special figure 2 is set shorter than the shortest variation time (for example, about 4 seconds) of special figure 1. In the time-saving state, when the deviation variation starts in a state where the special drawing 2 is on hold, the shortened deviation variation is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the time saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed hit and allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004, thereby smoothly playing the game without reducing the number of balls that come out. You can advance the game.

Here, since the second starting port 2004 is located downstream of the gate part 2003 in the flow path of the game balls B on the game board 5, most of the game balls B heading toward the second starting port 2004 are located at the second starting port 2004. It passes through a gate section 2003 before reaching . Further, the first big prize opening 2005 that opens during the small winning game is located downstream of the second starting opening 2004 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5. When the second starting hole 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B heading towards the first big winning hole 2005 enters the second starting hole 2004 and does not reach the first big winning hole 2005. That is, in order to let the game ball B enter the first big prize opening 2005, the game ball B needs to pass over the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening 2004 is in the closed state.

However, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 is long (for example, about 6 seconds) in the case of winning a normal win, so the game ball B hit right toward the first winning opening 2005. Most of the balls B enter the second starting opening 2004 in the open state and do not reach the first big winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the time-saving state, although the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and frequently win small wins, he is unable to obtain balls from the small win game. . In addition, the number of prize balls when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 is, for example, one, so in the time saving state, the special figure 2 variation can be executed without almost reducing the number of balls put out. It is difficult to increase the number of balls.

In addition, the first big prize opening 2005 is arranged in a position where almost no game balls B reach the first big prize opening 2005 when so-called left-handed batting is performed, so if the game ball B is hit left-handed during the time saving state. We also take care of the so-called strategy action of trying to increase the number of game balls B by alternately hitting the ball to the right.

Subsequently, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short (for example, about 1 second) similarly to the time-saving state. Therefore, in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed hit and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. Furthermore, in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the case of winning a normal win is sufficient time for the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004, and is short ( For example, about 0.7 seconds), a considerable number (for example, more than half) of the game balls B hit to the right pass over the second starting opening 2004 in the closed state and pass through the first prize opening. Reach 2005.

That is, in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, frequently win small wins, and obtain balls from the small win game. With the above-mentioned specifications, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which it is easy to obtain small winning balls only in a highly accurate non-time saving state.

FIG. 513 is a transition diagram showing an example of the game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter. As mentioned above, the variation of special figure 1 is executed in a low probability non-time saving state, and the variation of special figure 2 is executed in a state other than a low probability non-time saving state, thereby allowing the player to smoothly progress the game. I can do it. On the other hand, the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the special chart 2 jackpot and the transition from a state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state to the special chart 1 jackpot are irregular, so they are indicated by dotted lines in Fig. 513. ing.

In any state, when a jackpot is won, the state shifts to a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, or a high probability non time saving state, depending on the type of jackpot. In the low-accuracy time-saving state, when the fluctuation of the number of time-saving special drawings 2 determined by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the low-accuracy time-saving state ends, the state shifts to the low-accuracy non-time-saving state. In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 of the number of time-savings determined by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the high-accuracy time-saving state ends, the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, that is, the small hit rush occurs. Transition.

At first glance, the transition from the high-accuracy time-saving state to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state seems to be a disadvantageous state transition for the player, but as mentioned above, a small win rush is realized in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, so it is advantageous for the player. This is a state transition. Therefore, when the high-accuracy time-saving state ends by completing the variation of the special drawing 2 determined by the number of time-saving times, the player does not lose interest but can rather feel elated.

[12-2. Rush rush chance production]
Hereinafter, a description will be given of the rush rush performance, which is a performance executed from the start of the time saving state (high accuracy time saving state and low accuracy time saving state). Rush entry chance production means that at the start of a time saving state, it is reported that although the current state is a time saving state, it is unclear whether it is a high accuracy time saving state or a low accuracy time saving state, and in the fluctuations during the time saving state, the current state is This is a performance that notifies whether the state is a high-accuracy time-saving state (that is, a state where the state shifts to a high-accuracy non-time-saving state that is a small hit rush state after the special 2 fluctuation of the specified number of times ends) or a low-accuracy time-saving state. .

FIG. 514, FIG. 515, and FIG. 516 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a rush rush chance performance. 514, FIG. 515, and FIG. 516, an example will be described in which the number of time saving times is 10 and all fluctuations in the time saving state are negative fluctuations.

(A) is a state in which the time-saving jackpot has been completed. The same decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is stopped on the performance display device 1600. In addition, the expected value of the ball obtained when winning a jackpot increases in the following order: a low probability jackpot with time savings, a high probability jackpot with time savings, and a high probability jackpot with no time savings. For example, when a set of "7" decorative symbols is selected, the combination of decorative symbols may be selected so as to ensure a highly accurate, time-saving, no-jackpot win. In addition, when an odd number of decorative symbols is selected than when an even number of decorative symbols is selected, the expectation of winning a high probability time saving jackpot is higher than a low probability time saving jackpot. , a combination of decorative patterns may be selected.

Note that an effect may be performed in which the decorative symbols are promoted during the jackpot. Specifically, for example, even if you win a high-accuracy, time-saving, no-hit jackpot, but the symbols are confirmed, the odd or even numbers will stop, and even if a promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game and the decorative symbols are promoted to a "7" series. good.

(B) is a state in which the time-saving jackpot has ended and the time-saving state has started. A display indicating that the rush chance has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), since the time-saving state has started, a display (right-handed display) prompting the player to execute the so-called right-handed hit and enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. There is. Furthermore, at the start of the time saving state, there is a large right-hitting display (three arrows labeled "Right-hitting!!") at the middle lower part of the effect display device 1600, and a small right-hitting display ("Right-hitting!!") at the top right of the effect display device 1600. A single arrow with the words "Right hit!!") is displayed.

(D) is a state in which the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 from the state of (C) and the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 has started. The large right-handed display has been erased from the effect display device 1600. Further, at the upper left of the effect display device 1600, a display indicating the maximum number of remaining time reductions is displayed. As mentioned above, the number of time reductions is 7, 8, or 10 times, so in the state (D) where no fluctuations of special map 2 have been completed, the maximum value is "10 times remaining". is displayed. Further, a message saying "Power up the character in 6 seconds!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the power-up effect of the character is performed using six changes from the first change to the sixth change of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. In the power-up performance, an image of a character wearing an aura is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the aura color is stepped up during the six fluctuations.

For example, the peripheral control ROM stores a scenario management table for power-up effects. The scenario management table stores scenarios and distributions of power-up effects for each of the low-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy time-saving state. The scenario shows the color of the aura in each of the six changes. In each scenario, it is assumed that the aura color at the final variation of the power-up effect is white, blue, green, red, and rainbow-colored in the order of increasing expectations for a highly accurate time-saving state. Note that the rainbow color is selected only when the current state is a high-accuracy time-saving state.

It is also desirable that the aura color does not step down (for example, to white in the next variation of blue) in the six variations of each scenario. This is because there is a risk that players' expectations will be diminished. Further, for example, when the final aura color in the power-up effect is the same, the setting may be such that the fewer the number of fluctuations in which the final aura color is reached, the higher the expectation level of a highly accurate time-saving state. Specifically, for example, when the final aura color is red, the case where the color reaches red at the 6th variation of special figure 2 and the case where the color reaches red at the 4th variation of special figure 2, The latter is more likely to be a highly accurate and time-saving state. Note that the former may have a higher degree of expectation that it is a highly accurate time-saving state. This is because it can maintain expectations until the final (sixth) change.

Furthermore, in each scenario, the aura color may be promoted by one level, may be promoted by multiple levels, or does not need to be promoted by one change. If the aura color is promoted by multiple levels in one change, for example, it may be stepped up from white to green without passing through blue, or it may be stepped up in order from white, blue, and green in the change. You may. In each scenario, the aura color that is displayed first in the first variation of special map 2 does not have to be the one with the lowest expectation (that is, it does not have to be white).

Note that "6 seconds" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is an index indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in which the power-up effect is performed, and is different from the actual 6 seconds. In other words, for example, as will be explained later, the first change in the time saving state is "6 seconds left" (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining six changes), and the second change is "6 seconds left". 5 seconds" (meaning that a power-up effect will be performed using the remaining 5 fluctuations) is displayed. In other words, since the remaining time indicates the number of fluctuations remaining until the rock destruction effect is performed, the display indicating the maximum number of times saved may not be performed.

(E) is the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state, and is a continuation of (D). The effect display device 1600 displays a character wearing an aura and a message that says "6 seconds left."

(F) is the state at the end of the first variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. After the state (E), the color of the aura is promoted from white to blue until the end of the change, and a display indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted ("Power up!!") is displayed on the production display device 1600. will be displayed. (G) is a state in which the second variation of the special figure 2 has started after the time saving state has started. The character's aura color remains blue, and the expression "5 seconds left" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The same effect is repeated until the fifth variation of special map 2.

(H) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the sixth time after the time saving state starts. In the sixth variation of special figure 2, the color of the aura is promoted to red, and a display ("Power up!!") indicating that the aura color has been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 514, red is the final aura color in the power-up effect.

(I) is the state at the end of the sixth special map 2 after the time saving state starts. In the sixth variation, after the step-up of the aura color is completed, the introductory effect of the rock destruction effect performed in the seventh to tenth special figure 2 variations is executed. In (I), "Destroy the rock!" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the introduction performance. The character destroys rocks in the rock destruction effect only when the current state is a high-accuracy time-saving state.

(J) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the seventh time after the time saving state starts. A rock destruction effect has started, and an image of a character hitting a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that during the rock destruction performance, for example, the character wears a red aura, which is the final aura color of the power-up performance.

As a result, even during the rock destruction performance, the player does not forget the expectation level of being in a highly accurate time saving state. Conversely, the character may not be surrounded by an aura during the rock destruction performance. This is because some players do not want other players to know their expectation level. Note that if the character is covered with an aura during the rock destruction performance, the aura color may be stepped up even during the rock destruction performance.

(K) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the seventh time after the time saving state starts and is a continuation of (J). The effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the rock is cracked due to the character hitting the rock, but the rock remains unbroken. (L) is the state at the end of the 7th variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. A display indicating that the rock destruction performance is still continuing (“Not yet!!”) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. After this, the same performance is repeated.

(M) is the state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the 8th time after the time saving state starts. In the rock destruction effect, an image of the character hitting the rock again is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (N) is the state at the end of the 9th variation of special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. A display (``Bet on this blow!'') indicating that the next variation of special figure 2 is the last variation in which the rock destruction effect will be performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(O) is the state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the 10th time after the time saving state starts (that is, the last time of the time saving state). An image of a character punching a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that the number of cracks in the rock may increase each time the character hits the rock. In (O), there are more cracks in the rock than in (M).

(P) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the 10th time after the time saving state starts and is a continuation of (O). The effect display device 1600 displays an image indicating that the rock has been successfully destroyed (that is, an image indicating that the current state is a high-probability time-saving state and that the state will transition to a high-non-time-saving state at the end of the change). ing. Note that after an image in which the rock has failed to be destroyed is displayed, a revival effect may be performed and an image in which the rock has been successfully destroyed may be displayed. (Q) is the state at the end of the 10th variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. An image indicating a transition to a highly accurate non-time-saving state (“Rush rush!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, when the number of time savings is 7 times in a high-accuracy time-saving state, the image of the rock being destroyed at the 7th variation of special map 2 and the image of transitioning to a high-accuracy non-time-saving state (i.e., (P), (Q) ) image. However, the remaining number of times in the upper left is displayed as "4 times remaining"). Similarly, when the number of time savings is 9 times and the state is in a high-accuracy time-saving state, an image of a rock being destroyed at the 9th change in special map 2 and an image of transitioning to a high-accuracy non-time-saving state (i.e., (P), ( Image of Q). However, the remaining number of times in the upper left corner is displayed as "2 times remaining."

In the example described above, the time saving states where the number of time saving times is 7 and 9 are not selected in the low probability time saving state. If there is a low probability time saving state where the number of time saving times is 7 and 9 times, a rock destruction effect that ends in failure with a small number of fluctuations will be performed, so it will not be possible to give the player a sense of elation. be.

FIGS. 516 (P') and (Q') are examples of rock destruction effects when the current state is a non-time saving state. (P') is the 10th variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state and is a continuation of (O). In the rock destruction performance, an image of a character failing to destroy a rock is displayed on the performance display device 1600. (Q') is a state in which the 10th variation of the special figure 2 has ended after the time saving state started. A display indicating that the rush chance has ended is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After this, the state shifts to a low-reliability non-time-saving state.

For example, in a power-up effect, an image of the press operation section 303 and an image prompting the press of the press operation section 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the press of the press operation section 303 is detected, It may be possible to notify whether or not the aura-colored step-up is possible. Similarly, for example, in a rock destruction effect, an image of the press operation section 303 and an image prompting the press of the press operation section 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the press of the press operation section 303 is detected. , it may be possible to notify whether or not the rock can be destroyed.

In addition, when the fluctuation during the time saving state, that is, during the rush rush performance is a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot is notified by a performance different from the performance of destroying rocks, for example. This is to clearly distinguish and make the player recognize whether he or she won the jackpot or whether the transition to the high-accuracy time-saving state was successful.

As a specific effect, for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the shutter group is closed so as to cover the effect display device 1600. The closed state of the shutter group is maintained for a long time (for example, about 2 minutes) depending on the fluctuation pattern, for example. Thereafter, when the shutter group opens, an icon indicating the type of jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, the decorative pattern is in a stopped state. On the other hand, the jackpot may be notified by an effect of destroying rocks. Thereby, the player cannot immediately recognize whether he has won a jackpot or whether he has entered a high-accuracy time-saving state, so he can maintain a sense of tension.

[12-3. Production during small hit rush]
FIGS. 517 and 518 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the performance during the small win rush. (A) is the state at the end of the final fluctuation of the high accuracy time saving state, that is, the same state as in FIG. 515(Q). (B) is a state in which the highly accurate non-time-saving state is fluctuating. In the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a display (``Rush!!'') indicating that the current state is a high-accuracy non-time-saving state (that is, a small win rush) is displayed.

In addition, in (B), there is a total number of pitches acquired display area and a timer display area at the lower right of the effect display device 1600. In the total number of pitches acquired display area, the total number of pitches acquired since the start of the small hit rush and the number of pitches paid out by the small hit and the jackpot are displayed. In addition, for example, it is desirable that the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into a general winning hole or a starting hole other than the big winning hole is not included in the total number of balls acquired.

Note that, for example, the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into the general winning hole may also be included in the total number of balls acquired, but in this case, at the time of the entry, a predetermined number is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is desirable to output an image, output predetermined sounds from various speakers, and output predetermined light from various lamps. This is to make the player aware that the total number of balls won increases by entering the game ball B into the general winning hole.

In addition, the display of the total number of balls acquired will continue until the end of jackpot variations that cannot necessarily be transferred to a high-probability non-time-saving state (i.e., high-probability time-saving jackpot variations and low-probability time-saving jackpot variations). Counting of the total number of pitches acquired stops at the end of the fluctuation. However, if you win a jackpot that does not necessarily allow you to transition to a high-probability non-time-saving state, but then you are able to transition to a high-probability non-time-saving state again without falling to a low-probability non-time-saving state, you will be able to win the total again. The pitch count will be redisplayed and counting will restart from the value at the most recent count stop. In addition, if you win a jackpot that does not necessarily allow you to transition to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, but you win a high-accuracy, no-time-saving jackpot during the time-saving state that you transitioned to due to the jackpot, the high-accuracy, no-time-saving non-jackpot. At the start, the total number of pitches acquired may be redisplayed and counting may be restarted.

The timer display area displays the duration of the small win rush counted from the start of the small win rush. The start of the small hit rush may be the end of a high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot game, the end of the final fluctuation in a high-accuracy time-saving state, or the start of the first fluctuation in a high-accuracy no-time-saving state. good.

(C) is a state where the high-accuracy, time-saving, no-jackpot variation has ended in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state. Since the timer in the timer display area indicates the time taken to complete the small win rush, the timer is stopped at the end of the jackpot fluctuation during the high probability non-time saving period (at the end of the jackpot fluctuation). (D) is a jackpot game with high accuracy, time saving, and no jackpot. Even during the jackpot game, the total number of balls acquired is displayed and added. Although the timer is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot, the timer may be displayed in a stopped state.

(E) is a high-accuracy, time-saving, no-jackpot game in progress, and is a continuation of (D). When the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number of balls, the effect display device 1600 displays the arrival. The predetermined number of pitches has a plurality of stages, and for example, each time the total number of pitches acquired increases by 1000, a reaching display is performed. Therefore, in (E), a message "Over 1000 PT!!" indicating that 1000 shots have been reached is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition to the arrival display, various lamps may output predetermined light, various speakers may output predetermined sounds, or BGM may be changed. Note that, for example, after the total number of balls acquired reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 30,000 shots), the reaching display may not be performed.

Note that, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant or may be different. Specifically, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant such as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots, etc., or may be 1000 shots, 5000 shots, 10000 shots, etc. It may be set such that the later the stage, such as 20,000 shots, etc., the larger the difference from the previous stage.

(F) is the state immediately before the end of the jackpot game with high accuracy, time saving, and no jackpot. (G) is the state immediately after the end of the jackpot game with high accuracy, time saving, and no jackpot. A display indicating that the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, that is, the small winning rush will start again, is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, in (G), there is a history display area for the number of pitches acquired at the upper center of the effect display device 1600. In the acquired ball number history display area, a history of the total number of balls acquired in one jackpot and balls acquired in the small hit rush that won the jackpot is displayed. In (G), 2910 balls were obtained in the jackpot and the immediately preceding small win rush, so "2910" is displayed in the acquired ball count history display area.

(H) is a state in which the total number of balls acquired during the small hit rush has reached 5,000. When the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number of balls, the background image on the effect display device 1600 changes. Note that the predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages, and for example, the background image changes every time the total number of balls acquired increases by 5,000. Note that along with the change of the background image, predetermined light may be outputted from various lamps, predetermined sounds may be outputted from various speakers, or the BGM after the background image change may be changed. Note that, for example, after the total number of balls acquired reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 30,000 shots), the background image does not need to be changed.

In the example of FIG. 517, the total number of balls acquired is displayed every 1000 shots, and the background image changes every 5000 shots, so the total number of balls acquired is 5000, 10000, 15000, etc. ..., both the arrival display and the change of the background image are executed (in this example, the arrival display is always performed at the timing when the background image changes).

The arrival display and the change of the background image in the effect display device 1600 are performed in order according to a predetermined priority order, for example. For example, since the change in the background image is performed less often than the arrival display, the change in the background image can give the player a stronger sense of elation than the arrival display. Depending on whether the background image is changed first or later, the timing at which the player is given a stronger sense of elation differs.

Note that the display of arrival and the change of the background image may be performed simultaneously. By simultaneously performing the arrival display and the change of the background image, a synergistic effect can be obtained, and it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of exhilaration than when these effects are performed alone. Note that the same applies to the output of light and sound that is executed simultaneously with the arrival display and the change of the background image.

(I) is the state at the end of the time saving jackpot fluctuation. Since the rush chance performance is performed after the jackpot ends, it is desirable that at this point, it is not announced whether the time-saving jackpot is a high-probability, time-saving jackpot or a low-probability, time-saving jackpot.

(J) is the state at the end of the jackpot fluctuation with time saving, and is a continuation of (I). The total number of balls acquired and the cumulative time of the timer at the end of the jackpot fluctuation are displayed as a result on the performance display device 1600. The reason for displaying the result at this timing is that by winning the time-saving jackpot, it is not necessarily possible to switch back to the high-probability non-time-saving state (small win rush) without falling into the low-probability non-time-saving state. It is.

(K) is a state in which the time-saving jackpot has been completed. (L) is a state in which a rush rush chance has started. (M) is a state in which the final variation of the chance to enter the rush (final variation of the time saving state) is in progress, and an effect in which the rock is destroyed is being executed. (N) is the state at the end of the final variation, and is a state in which it is reported that the state will shift to a high-precision, non-time-saving state. (K), (L), (M), and (N) are the same as FIG. 514(A), FIG. 514(B), FIG. 515(P), and FIG. 515(Q), respectively, so detailed The explanation will be omitted.

(O) is a state in which a high-precision, non-time-saving state is fluctuating. If it is possible to return to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state again without falling into the low-accuracy non-time-saving state, the display in each display area will be as shown below, for example. The timer display in the timer display area inherits the value at the end of the previous highly accurate non-time saving state. In addition, the total number of balls acquired in the total number of balls acquired display area is the sum of the value at the end of the previous high-precision non-time-saving state, plus the number of balls obtained in the previous time-saving jackpot. Ru. Furthermore, an image corresponding to the total number of pitches acquired is displayed as the background image. In addition, the acquired ball number history display area further displays the history of the total number of balls acquired in the previous time-saving jackpot and balls acquired in the small hit rush that won the time-saving jackpot. These histories are displayed, for example, for the last 10 jackpots that were won without falling into a low-probability, non-time-saving state.

As a result, if the player is able to return to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state again without falling into the low-accuracy non-time-saving state, the previous state can be displayed, allowing the player to step over the low-accuracy non-time-saving state. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of balls that were obtained without losing. Furthermore, if the total number of pitches acquired and the timer are reset every time the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state ends, there is a lower possibility that these displays will show large values, giving the player a sense of excitement. Since this would make it difficult to give a sense of purpose, the display contents are as described above.

In addition, as mentioned above, the total value of the balls acquired during one jackpot game and the balls acquired in the highly accurate non-time saving state (small hit rush) immediately before the jackpot game is displayed in the acquired ball count history display area. Therefore, it is possible to display a numerical value larger than the expected value of the number of balls acquired per jackpot game using the acquired ball number history display area, which can give a feeling of exhilaration. Further, for example, the display mode may be changed depending on the value displayed in the acquired pitches history display area. Specifically, if the number is less than 5,000, the number is blue, if it is 5,000 or more and less than 10,000, the number is red, and if it is over 10,000, the number is rainbow-colored. In addition, although it is assumed that the most recent 10 times are displayed, from the 11th time onward, a value that is the sum of the values from 1 to 10 times may be displayed.

[12-4. Performance during jackpot]
The production during the jackpot will be explained below. For example, each time you win a high-precision time-saving jackpot without falling into a low-probability non-time-saving state, a song that can be played during the high-precision time-saving jackpot is added. For example, only song A can be selected in the first high-accuracy, time-saving, no-time-saving jackpot that is won without straddling the low-accuracy, non-time-saving state, and song B can be selected in the second, high-accuracy, time-saving, non-jackpot. Yes, the song C can be further selected in the third high-accuracy time-saving jackpot, and the song D can be further selected in the fourth and subsequent high-precision time-saving jackpots.

In addition, in the second and subsequent high-accuracy time-saving jackpots, the player can select a song to be played from the selectable songs by performing an operation using a predetermined operation section. In addition, if the player does not select a song, for example, the song A will be used in the first high-probability non-time-saving jackpot won without straddling the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the song A will be selected in the second high-probability non-time-saving jackpot. It is assumed that B plays music C when the third high-accuracy time-saving jackpot is played, and music D plays when the fourth and subsequent high-precision time-saving jackpots are played.

Also, the music that was being played during the high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot may continue to be played during the high-accuracy non-time-saving state that transitions after the high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot ends. Furthermore, even in the high-accuracy, non-time-saving state, music may be selectable by the player operating a predetermined operation section.

FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance during a high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot. Specifically, an explanation will be given of an effect in which all songs can be selected by inputting a predetermined command (hidden command) during a high-accuracy time-saving jackpot.

(A) is a state in which the second high-accuracy time-saving jackpot has started without falling into a low-accuracy time-saving state. (B) is a state in which the first round of the high-accuracy, time-saving, no-jackpot is being executed. A music selection box and an image explaining a music selection operation are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, since this is the second high-accuracy, time-saving, no-time-saving jackpot that was won without falling into the low-accuracy, non-time-saving state, songs A and B can be selected. B is selected.

These images are displayed, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a round start command for the first round from the main control MPU. Further, for example, at the same timing, an operation reception period of the operation unit for performing a song selection operation starts. The operation acceptance period ends, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a round end command for the final round from the main control MPU.

In the example of FIG. 519, by operating the rotation operation section 302, the cursor for selecting songs A and B is moved, and by pressing the center press operation section 303a, the currently playing song is moved by moving the cursor for selecting songs A and B. changes to the song indicated by.

Furthermore, the hidden command operation acceptance period starts when the peripheral control MPU receives the first round start command from the main control MPU and ends when the second round end command is received, for example. . (C) is the state after the hidden command is input in (B). All songs (songs A to D) are selectable.

Note that the hidden command is, for example, a command to press and hold the center press operation section 303a (for example, press and hold for 3 seconds or more). As described above, the operation acceptance period for hidden commands overlaps with the operation acceptance period for music selection.

In song selection, the peripheral control MPU detects that the central press operation unit 303a changes from a pressed state to a non-pressed state, and that the pressed state was not a long press (in the above example, the pressed state did not continue for more than 3 seconds). ), the song is determined.

If the central press operation unit 303a changes from the pressed state to the unpressed state and the player decides on a song, the player may have to manually select the song even though he intended to execute the hidden command. There is a risk that the user may misunderstand that the operation was incorrect and do not continue pressing the button until it reaches the long-press state, which is a hidden command. Furthermore, if the central press operation unit 303a is in a long press state and the song is determined when the press state changes from the press state to the non-press state, then when a hidden command is executed, the song is always Since the decision is executed, there is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the above-mentioned conditions are met, the song is determined.

In addition, for example, in the operation for notifying the winning or losing result of the reach effect, and in the determination operation on the character selection screen, etc., which will be described later, when the central press operation section 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state in this way, , it may be determined that the central press operation section 303a has been operated.

[13. Demo screen production]
[13-1. Normal demo screen production]
Hereinafter, an example of the presentation of the demonstration screen when the variation is not executed will be explained. FIG. 520 is an example of a timetable on the demo screen. The timetable includes the display content on the effect display device 1600, the display time of the display content, whether or not the volume adjustment jog can be accepted, whether or not the volume and light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, whether or not BGM is playing, and the predetermined movable body (role). It is defined whether the object (in this chapter, the rear movable decorative object 3110) is in a falling state.

In a state where a volume adjustment jog reception is possible, for example, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302, an image indicating the volume output from the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted. In a state where the volume/light intensity adjustment jog reception is possible, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image indicating either the volume or the light intensity is displayed, and the one can be adjusted, and the image is displayed. When the central press operation section 303a is pressed in the state where the volume is set, an image indicating the other of the volume and the light intensity is displayed, and the other can be adjusted.

Further, as described above, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is a decorative body that is movable in the vertical direction. The rear movable decoration body 3110 is located at the above-mentioned retracted position above the game board 5 or at the above-mentioned appearance position at the center of the game board 5, depending on the presentation state.

Below, the flow of specific effects on the demo screen will be explained. First, a fluctuation or jackpot is being executed (NO1). At the end of the fluctuation or the jackpot, the decorative pattern stops on the performance display device 1600 (NO2). Thereafter, if there is no pending variation, the fixed state of the decorative pattern is maintained (NO3). In NO1 to NO3, volume adjustment jog reception is possible, volume light intensity adjustment jog reception is not possible, variable BGM is being played, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not in the falling state, that is, is in the retracted position. However, in NO1, there may be a prohibited section in which volume adjustment jog reception is prohibited, such as during a predetermined reach effect or during a predetermined round of jackpot.

Subsequently, a predetermined video is displayed (NO4-1). Next, a telop image (also referred to as a volume/light intensity adjustment telop) indicating that it is possible to transition to the volume/light intensity adjustment screen while the predetermined image is displayed, and a character for determining the production state during subsequent changes. A telop image (also referred to as a character selection telop) indicating that a transition to the selection screen is possible is displayed (NO4-2).

Note that, for example, the video played back in NO4-1 and NO4-2 is a 30-second video, and is played in a loop between NO4-1 and NO4-2. In both No. 4-1 and No. 4-2, the volume adjustment jog cannot be accepted, the volume and light intensity adjustment can be accepted, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position. However, although BGM is playing in NO4-1, the BGM fades out from the beginning of NO4-2 (the volume decreases and eventually stops).

Next, a model demo movie of Pachinko machine 1 is displayed (NO5), then the manufacturer's logo is displayed (NO6), then a jog/button caution movie is displayed (NO7), and then a demo screen common to all manufacturers (GOTO) is displayed. Act prevention movie) is displayed (NO8).

Furthermore, after that, while the predetermined image is being displayed, a volume and light amount adjustment telop and a character selection telop are displayed (NO9). The display content of NO9 is the same as NO4-2. After the display contents of NO9 are displayed, the process returns to NO5. In No. 5 to No. 9, volume adjustment jog reception is not possible, volume light intensity adjustment jog reception is possible, and BGM is not played.

The operation of the rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described below. At the start of the model demo movie in NO5, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves downward and is in a falling state, that is, at the appearance position. After that, in NO6 to NO9, the rear movable decorative body 3110 maintains the appearance position. In addition, in NO9, in order to make the effect display device 1600 easier to see when moving to the volume light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen, the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the retracted position. In this case, for example, after the display of the volume/light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen is finished, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position again.

In NO5 to NO9, the rear movable decorative body 3110 which is not located at the retracted position moves to the retracted position when the game ball B enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). In NO5, if the game ball B enters the starting hole while the rear movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the retreat position to the appearance position, for example, the rear movable decorative body 3110 at the timing when the ball entry is detected. to rise. As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be quickly moved to the retracted position at the same time as the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the ball entering, and the visibility of the effect using the effect display device 1600 of the change can be made as little as possible. It's over.

In addition, in NO5, when the game ball B enters the starting hole while the rear movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the retreat position to the appearance position, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is once dropped to the appearance position. It may be raised after the temperature is lowered. This is because if an irregular movement is performed in which the rear movable decorative body 3110 that is descending suddenly starts to rise at the same time as the ball enters, some players may mistake this as an effect with high expectations for a jackpot.

Further, the motion of the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be determined according to the variation pattern of the variation performed by the ball entering. For example, a variation pattern in which an effect is performed in which the rear movable decorative body 3110 is lowered at the start of variation will be described. In NO5 to NO9, a variation pattern is selected in which a game ball B enters with the rear movable decorative body 3110 located at the appearance position, and an effect in which the rear movable decorative body 3110 descends at the start of fluctuation is executed. It shall be assumed that

In this case, for example, at the same time as the ball enters, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to the retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum lowering position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is performed. If the descending performance is a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, it is desirable to execute the descending performance without canceling it (in other words, to cause the descending performance to occur with a delay). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular effect (for example, light emission from a predetermined lamp attached to the rear movable decorative body 3110 or output of a predetermined sound from a speaker) may be performed, or the relevant The rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position while performing a specific irregular effect.

Furthermore, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (for example, moving the rear movable decorative body 3110 up and down a predetermined number of times with a predetermined amplitude) may be performed. good. Even if the descending performance is a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, these irregular processes are executed instead of the descending performance, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. In addition, in the first place, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not in the retracted position in NO5 to NO9, a variation pattern in which a production is performed in which the rear movable decorative body 3110 descends at the start of the variation (a descending production is executed at the start of the variation) The selection of the performance pattern) may be prohibited. Further, although the selection of the variation pattern is not prohibited (there is a possibility that a descending effect may occur), if the variation pattern is selected, the descending effect may not be executed. By doing this, even if the descending effect is not executed, the player can be made to think that the descending effect may have been selected.

In addition, in NO5, the game ball B enters the starting hole while the back movable decorative body 3110 is moving to the appearance position, and a variation pattern in which an effect is executed in which the back movable decorative body 3110 descends at the start of fluctuation. The same applies when is selected.

Specifically, in this case, for example, at the same time as the ball enters, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is raised once to the retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending production, and then the descending production is performed. Execute. Note that, before the raising, the rear movable decoration 3110 may be moved once to the appearance position (that is, the lowering effect is delayed). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised while performing a specific irregular effect. Note that, before the rise, the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be moved once to the appearance position. Moreover, in such a case, selection of the fluctuation pattern (a performance pattern in which a descending performance is executed at the start of the fluctuation) may be prohibited in the first place.

In addition, in NO5 to NO9, when the back movable decorative body 3110 is located below the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting hole, and when the movement starts, other movable bodies (back movable decorative body 3110) It is assumed that a variation pattern in which an effect is executed in which a different movable object) moves to the movable range of the rear movable decorative object 3110 is selected at the time of the ball entry. In this case, for example, interference between the movable bodies is avoided by first moving the rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position and then moving the other movable bodies. Also, when the rear movable decoration 3110 is at the appearance position and even if the other movable body (a movable body different from the rear movable decoration 3110) operates, it does not interfere with the rear movable decoration 3110 at the appearance position. , the other movable body is operated with the rear movable decorative body 3110 at the appearance position, and after the other movable body returns to the initial position, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the retreat position. It's okay. In such a case, the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position and the movement of a movable body different from the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be performed at the same time.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern (effect pattern), the other movable body (a movable body different from the rear movable decorative body 3110) may not be operated. At this time, the above-described irregular effects and irregular actions may be performed on the rear movable decorative body 3110 or the other movable body. Furthermore, in such a case, selection of a variation pattern (effect pattern) in which an effect in which another movable body moves into the movable range of the rear movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation may be prohibited.

Note that when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, a part of the effect display device 1600 is in a hidden state. Therefore, some players feel that the visual condition of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 in NO5 to NO9 is not good, and such players feel that they want to view the images in a good visual condition.

For such players, when the game ball B enters the starting port (when the game ball B enters the starting port, fluctuations begin and these images (for example, the model demo movie shown in Figure 520 stops) The rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position by a trigger other than the end of the video (e.g., when the video is finished). A specific trigger is, for example, the operation of a predetermined operation section (for example, the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b).

If the game ball B enters the starting hole while the rear movable decorative body 3110 is rising to the retracted position due to a trigger other than the game ball B entering the starting hole, the rear movable decorative body 3110 enters the starting hole. For example, the decorative body 3110 continues its upward movement and returns to the retracted position. In addition, while the back movable decorative body 3110 is rising to the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting hole, and the performance pattern determined based on the winning is caused to move the back movable decorative body 3110 down. In the case of the effect pattern, the rear movable decorative body 3110 may continue to ascend and return to the retracted position, and then the rear movable decorative body 3110 is lowered, or the rear movable decorative body 3110 may be lowered. The descending effect may be executed even during the ascent of 3110. In addition, if the game ball B enters the starting port with the back movable decorative body 3110 returning to the retracted position due to a trigger other than the game ball B entering the starting port, for example, if the game ball B enters the starting port, for example, Maintain evacuation position.

Note that the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position (a pattern in which the decorative pattern of NO2 is also shown in the stop image of NO9) is, for example, the decorative pattern displayed at the end of the fluctuation (NO2 It may be displayed in a reduced state compared to the pattern shown in ), or it may be displayed in the same size. In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the display size of the decorative pattern is changed, for example, when the back movable decorative body 3110 starts to descend in NO5, when the downward movement ends, or when the confirmed pattern in NO3 is displayed. . In addition, when displaying a decorative pattern in a reduced size, it is preferable to display it in an area that does not overlap the moving range of the back movable decorative body 3110. They may overlap.

In addition, in NO5 to NO9, an example was explained in which the back movable decorative body 3110 is located in front of the effect display device 1600, but instead of or in addition to the back movable decorative body 3110, another movable body may be used as the effect display device. 1600. However, when a plurality of movable bodies are located in front of the effect display device 1600, it is preferable that the movable bodies do not overlap (contact) in position after movement. Further, in NO5 to NO9, since the video is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the movable body that makes the video invisible is not moved. In particular, it is desirable not to make explanations to the player, such as volume and light intensity adjustment telops, invisible. Note that even if the movable body is moved to a position that overlaps with the position where such an explanation is displayed, it is moved once to the front of the effect display device 1600 in NO5, and when such an explanation is displayed, the movable body is The movable body may be returned to its original position. Further, the position and size of the explanation display for the player, such as the volume and light amount adjustment telop, may be changed depending on the position of the movable body.

[13-2. Another example of volume adjustment method]
Another example of the volume adjustment method will be described below. FIG. 521 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transition for volume adjustment. (A) is a state in which the decorative pattern determined after the fluctuation has stopped, ie, the state No. 3 in FIG. 520. (B) shows a state where the loop video is displayed on the effect display device 1600, ie, the state No. 4-1 in FIG. 520.

(C) shows a state in which a loop video and a character selection telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. This differs from No. 4-2 in FIG. 520 in that the volume and light amount adjustment telop is not displayed. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed in the state (C), the screen changes to a character selection screen. In the example in Figure 521, the volume adjustment (adjustment and setting of the output sound output from various speakers) is performed only after going through the character selection screen, and subsequent volume adjustments have the same meaning, so they are written in parentheses. This example differs from the example in FIG. 520 in that it cannot do the following (omitted).

(D) shows a state in which the character selection screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by pressing the central press operation section 303a in the state of (C). A character can be selected by rotating the rotation operation section 302, and the selected character can be determined by pressing the central press operation section 303a.

Note that the character selected here appears on the performance display device 1600 during a predetermined performance, performs a predetermined dialogue performance, or performs a predetermined action. In other words, the subsequent performance mode changes depending on the selected character. Further, depending on the selected character, the contents of the performance when the character appears (for example, the above-mentioned lines and actions) differ. Furthermore, for example, the volume of dialogue during production differs for each character. Furthermore, for example, the BGM differs depending on the selected character.

(E) is a state in which the character has been determined by pressing the central press operation section 303a in the state of (D). When a character is determined, for example, lines by the character are output from a speaker. The dialogue is output at a volume comparable to that of the character's dialogue performance performed during fluctuations, for example.

For example, many players find character A's dialogue performance to be noisy even at volume 3 (5 levels of volume (1 is the minimum volume, 5 is maximum volume)), and character B's dialogue performance is not noisy even at volume 5. Many players feel this way. In this way, by allowing the player to adjust the volume after actually listening to the character's lines when determining the character, the player can select the volume that is appropriate for him/herself.

(F) is the state after character selection. After a character is selected, the character selection screen is erased, and a display different from the volume adjustment screen, such as the aforementioned loop video, is displayed, for example. The reason why such a screen is displayed before the transition to the volume adjustment screen is possible is to prevent the volume adjustment from becoming a mere task for the player.

Specifically, for example, assume that character A whose lines are louder is selected on the character selection screen. At this time, if the game goes to the volume adjustment screen immediately after character A is determined, the player will simply lower the volume without thinking. On the other hand, once a display different from the volume adjustment described above is displayed, the player's attention is taken away from the character he or she has selected, so some players may almost forget the character they have selected by the time they are able to adjust the volume. There is. The player in question lowers the volume while vaguely remembering that he or she has selected Character A, so when Character A's lines appear later, the player reconfirms that the character he selected was Character A, thereby increasing his sense of security. You can get pleasure from it.

In (G), a loop video, a character selection telop, and a volume/light amount adjustment telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. (H) shows a state in which the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated in the state of (G) and the screen has shifted to the volume and light amount adjustment screen. By rotating the rotary operation section 302, the volume changes, and by pressing the central press operation section 303a, the screen shifts to the light amount adjustment screen. Although not shown, on the light amount adjustment screen, by rotating the rotary operation section 302, the light amount changes, and by pressing the central press operation section 303a, the screen shifts to the volume adjustment screen.

(I) is a state in which the loop video is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. For example, on the volume adjustment screen or the light amount adjustment screen, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the central press operation section 303a, the state returns to the state where the loop video is displayed.

Note that if the volume adjustment screen starts to change while being displayed on the performance display device 1600, the volume can be adjusted continuously, and the image for performing the volume adjustment is designed to improve the visibility of the performance that is being changed. To enable continuous display in a manner that does not significantly interfere with the display. This makes it possible to adjust the volume while checking the actual volume during fluctuations.

In addition, although we have explained an example in which you cannot move to the volume/light intensity adjustment screen without going through the character selection screen, in addition to or instead of going through the character selection screen, if certain conditions are not met, you can move to the volume/light intensity adjustment screen. It's okay if you can't. The specific conditions include, for example, the entry of the game ball B into the general winning hole from which a prize ball can be obtained upon entry, the passage of a predetermined time, etc. (or a combination thereof).

Note that the predetermined time may be made longer or shorter depending on, for example, the operation status of the operating means operable by the player. Furthermore, if the condition for changing the volume (output sound) is satisfied, the volume (output sound) may be changed thereafter without going through the character selection screen. Further, the changed volume (output sound) may end at the end of a specific number of changes. Note that in a particular performance that is changing, the performance may proceed at a volume (output sound) unique to the specific performance instead of the selected volume (output sound). Further, the number of selectable volume patterns on the volume adjustment screen may be increased by performing a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation section after character selection and before transition to the volume adjustment screen ( For example, if the predetermined operation is not executed, five levels of volume (output sound) can be selected, but when the predetermined operation is executed, ten levels of volume (output sound) can be selected. etc).

[14. Upstart production]
The upstart performance will be explained below. The upstart performance is one of the performances executed during SP reach (which is a special performance, and the SP reach that appears in the following explanation also corresponds to a special performance). SP reach is a reach effect that is more likely to be selected in jackpot fluctuations and less likely to be selected in loss fluctuations than normal reach effects. That is, SP reach is a reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot compared to a normal reach performance. In the upstart performance, a display indicating the level of jackpot expectation is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and when the line “Kara~no”, which will be described later, is displayed, the performance display device 1600 displays the line after the line is displayed. The jackpot expectation level displayed will be increased.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rising performance. (A) shows a state where the upstart performance has started during SP reach. For example, an image of the central press operation section 303a is displayed in a blurred state on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in (B), the background color of the image of the central press operation section 303a on the effect display device 1600 changes. The background color after the change shall be blue or red. Further, the higher the jackpot expectation of the change, the more likely red is to be selected as the background color after the change than blue.

Subsequently, in (C), the line "Kara-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image and background color of the central press operation section 303a are erased. Note that in (C), the image and background color of the central press operation section 303a may be continuously displayed. When the line is displayed, the expectation level of jackpot increases. Subsequently, in (D), the line is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the image of the central press operation section 303a is displayed again in a blurred state. For example, at the timing when the line is deleted from the effect display device 1600, the background color of the image of the central press operation section 303a is promoted from blue to red.

Next, in (E), the blurred image and background color of the central press operation section 303a are erased, and the large red image (red large push display) of the central press operation section 303a is clearly displayed on the production display device. 1600, prompting the user to press the central pressing operation section 303a. Note that the images of the central press operation unit 303a displayed at this point include, for example, a small blue image (small blue push display), a large blue image (large blue push display), and a large red image (large red push display). There is a large rainbow-colored image (Rainbow large push display). It is assumed that the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of the blue small push display, the blue large push display, the red large push display, and the rainbow large push display, and the rainbow large push display is selected only when there is a jackpot fluctuation.

In the state (E), the central press operation section 303a becomes the operation valid state, and when the central press operation section 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, it is announced whether the fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation or a miss fluctuation. be done. In (F), it is announced that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation.

In addition, in (A), the effect from when the blurred image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed until immediately before the clear image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed in (E) is changed to a stirring display effect. This is also called a button display effect, and the effect from when a clear image of the central press operation unit 303a is displayed until the display of the image ends is also called a button display effect.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the upstart effect. In the example of FIG. 522, in the inciting effect, the line "Kara..." is displayed, and the background color in the inciting effect is promoted, but in the example of FIG. 523, in the button display effect, the line "Kar... The line "No..." is displayed, and the button image in the button display effect is promoted.

(A) and (B) are the same as FIGS. 522(A) and (B), respectively, so the explanation will be omitted. Subsequently, in (C), the blurred image and background color of the center press operation section 303a are erased, the large blue push image is clearly displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the center press operation section 303a is pressed. are encouraged to do so.

Subsequently, in (D), the line "Kara-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to overlap the image of the central press operation section 303a. In addition, in (D), the image of the central press operation section 303a and the display prompting the press may be deleted in order to concentrate the player's consciousness on the line "Kara-no-". Subsequently, in (E), the line "Kara~no~" is erased from the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the line is erased, the large blue push image is promoted to the large red push image. . (F) is the same as FIG. 522(F), so the explanation will be omitted.

Note that when performing a promotion effect during a button display effect, the operation of the center press operation unit 303a is valid during the period from when the image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed in the button display effect until the promotion effect appears. It may be valid or it may be invalid. Since the operation of the central press operation section 303a is valid during this period, it is possible to satisfy players who want to know the winning or losing results quickly. In addition, since the operation of the central press operation section 303a is disabled during this period, it is possible to satisfy players who want to enjoy the performance until the end, and even though the image of the central press operation section 303a is displayed. If the first operation is invalid, it is confirmed that the promotion performance will be performed, and the player can feel a sense of elation.

In addition, in this way, even though the image of the central press operation part 303a is displayed, if the operation is invalid, it is confirmed that the promotion effect will be performed. Regardless of whether a promotion performance is performed during the performance, the operation of the central press operation section 303a may be enabled for a predetermined period of time after the button display performance starts.

Note that in the upstart performance, there may be a pattern in which the inciting performance is not performed and only the button display performance is performed. The type of image of the central press operation section 303a that can be displayed in the button display effect may be different between when the incitement effect is executed and when only the button display effect is executed without the incitement effect. .

Specifically, for example, in a pattern in which an inciting effect is executed, only a large blue push, a large red push, and a large rainbow push may be displayed in the button display effect; however, in a pattern in which an inciting effect is not executed, the blue It is assumed that a small push, a large blue push, a large red push, and a large rainbow push may be displayed. As a result, the pattern in which the inciting effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation than the pattern in which the inciting effect is not executed.

Further, in such a case, it is desirable that a pattern in which an inciting effect is executed appears more frequently than a pattern in which only a button display effect is performed without an inciting effect. This is because, as mentioned above, the pattern in which the inciting effect is executed has a higher expectation of a jackpot. For example, in a pattern in which no inciting effect is executed, BGM is played in the button display effect, but in a pattern in which inciting effect is executed, BGM is played in the inciting effect, but BGM is stopped in the button display effect and there is no sound. It is desirable to have the condition. Thereby, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the button display performance in a pattern in which a promotion performance with high expectations for a jackpot is executed.

For example, if the pattern is such that the inciting performance is executed only when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, and the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed during the valid period of the central pressing operation part 303a in the button display performance. A pattern in which an effect in which the vibration speaker 354 vibrates may be executed.

FIG. 524 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing at which the promotion performance in the upstart performance is performed. The promotion effect may be executed at any of timings 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 524, for example. Timing 1 is immediately after the inciting effect is started (for example, the timing in FIG. 522(A) or the timing immediately after the start in FIG. 522(B)). At timing 1, the player cannot recognize or only slightly recognizes the initial background color in the promotion effect, so when the promotion effect is performed at timing 1, the player who has little awareness of the background color It can give a sense of surprise.

Timing 2 is the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the inciting effect (for example, the timing in FIG. 522(C)). At timing 2, the player is completely aware of the initial background color in the promotion effect, so if the background color is blue, for example, the player will be disappointed, but at timing 2, the promotion effect will be performed. By doing so, you can eliminate this disappointment.

Timing 3 is the same time as the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing at the start of FIG. 523(C)). In the example of FIG. 524, it is assumed that the valid period of the central press operation section 303a ends at the same time as the button display effect ends.

At timing 3, the player is not yet able to recognize the type of image of the central press operation section 303a displayed in the button display performance, so when the promotion performance is performed at timing 3, it gives the player a sense of surprise. I can do it. Furthermore, when the promotion effect is performed at timing 3, even though the player has not yet recognized the type of image on the central press operation section 303a, at least the image with the lowest jackpot expectation (blue small push) You can feel a sense of elation because you are certain that there is no such thing.

Timing 4 is immediately after the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing immediately after the start of FIG. 523(C)). Specifically, timing 4 is a timing at which it is possible but difficult for the player to operate the central press operation section 303a, such as after 0.008 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button display performance. At timing 4, the player has little recognition of the type of image of the central press operation section 303a displayed in the button display performance, so when the promotion performance occurs, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

In addition, for a player who knows that a promotion effect may occur at timing 4, for example, by repeatedly pressing the central press operation part 303a before the start of the button display effect, the valid period may start. Therefore, it is possible to provide another game feature in which it is possible to execute the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a before the promotion effect.

Timing 5 is a timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the button display effect (however, in the first half of the valid period of the central press operation section 303a). At timing 5, the player has completely recognized the type of image on the central press operation section 303a, so if, for example, the image is a small blue push, the player will be disappointed, but at timing 5, the promotion effect will be displayed. By doing this, you can eliminate this disappointment.

Timing 6 is a timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the button display effect (however, in the second half of the valid period of the central press operation section 303a). At timing 6, since a considerable amount of time has passed since the image of the central press operation section 303a was displayed, the promotion effect can be shown to the player who has half given up on the appearance of the promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise.

Timing 7 is immediately before the end of the button display effect. By executing the promotion effect at timing 7, for example, the promotion effect can be shown to a player who is not willing to operate the center press operation section 303a even if he is prompted to press the center press operation section 303a. . Further, for example, if the valid period of the central press operation section 303a does not start until the promotion effect occurs even if the button display effect starts, the freeze may be caused by executing the promotion effect at timing 6 or timing 7. It is possible to realize a performance similar to a performance, and it is possible to create a strong sense of expectation in the player.

Note that when the promotion effect is executed after the start of the button display effect, pressing the central press operation section 303a may be used as a trigger for executing the promotion effect. Specifically, for example, from the start of the button display performance to the timing of the promotion performance (for example, any of timings 4 to 7), the image of the central press operation section 303a is displayed, but the operation of the central press operation section 303a is disabled. It is said that Then, at the timing of the promotion effect, the valid period of operation of the central press operation section 303a starts.

If the central press operation section 303a is pressed within the valid period, a promotion effect occurs, and the operation becomes invalid during the promotion effect. Then, the promoted button image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the valid operation period starts again. When the central press operation section 303a is pressed during the operation validity period, the winning or losing result for the fluctuation is notified.

Further, for example, although the valid period of the center press operation section 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the center press operation part 303a may be pressed between the start of the button display effect and the promotion effect timing (for example, any one of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, a promotion effect may occur. Thereafter, when the central press operation section 303a is pressed during the valid period after the promoted button image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the winning or losing result of the variation is notified. Note that it is desirable that the pattern in which the promotion performance is performed after the start of the button display performance is selected only when the jackpot fluctuates (that is, it is a pattern in which the jackpot is confirmed). Assuming that the pattern is selected in a winning variation, the player operates the center press operation section 303a expecting to be notified of the winning or losing result by button performance, but the player receives an unexpected development (whether it is a jackpot or not). This is because there is a risk that it will become a watermark if the development is not announced.

Further, for example, although the valid period of the center press operation section 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the center press operation part 303a may be pressed between the start of the button display effect and the promotion effect timing (for example, any one of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, a performance that makes the user expect a promotion performance (for example, a dialogue performance such as "Don't panic! You'll be promoted in a little while!") may be executed. In such a case, the promotion effect is not performed at the timing when the central press operation section 303a is pressed as described above, but the promotion effect is performed at the predetermined promotion timing.

Furthermore, for example, if a promotion effect occurs after the start of the button display effect, immediately after the line "Kara~no~" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the incitement effect is executed once again after the promotion, and then The button display effect may be performed again. In this case, the promotion target by the promotion effect may be the background color that appeared in the previous promotion effect, the image of the central press operation part 303a in the button display effect, or both. good.

Specifically, for example, if the inciting effect ends with a blue background, and after the small blue push display is displayed in the button display effect, "kara~no~" is displayed, then the background is promoted to a red background. An inciting effect may be performed, and a button display effect may be performed in which a small blue push display is displayed. Specifically, for example, if the inciting effect ends with a blue background, and after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect, "KA~RA~NO~" is displayed, then after that, the blue background The inciting effect may be performed again, and a button display effect with a large red push display may be performed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, an example was explained in which the promotion effect is performed by only one of the promotion effect or the button display effect, but the promotion effect may be performed by both. Furthermore, promotion performance may be performed multiple times within one promotion performance and one button display performance. In addition, although an example in which the background color changes as an inciting effect has been described, in addition to the background color, a shape that is displayed before the center press operation section 303a is displayed and overlaps with the area where the center press operation section 303a is displayed is explained. There is no need to be concerned about the background color, such as changing the color of the effects displayed (such as light gathering effects).

[15. Pending notice performance]
[15-1. Hold notice effect due to hold color change]
In this embodiment, a pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on a pending number designation command sent from the main control board 1310, but the display mode of the pending display remains unchanged until the pending display is used up. By changing , it is possible to execute a reservation notice performance that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation for the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the pending display. Further, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect that indicates the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed.

Specifically, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), the main control board 1310 sends a reservation number designation command and a preliminary determination command. . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the reservation number designation command and the advance determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, it creates a reservation advance notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the reservation number specified from the reservation number designation command. Select the pending notice determination table corresponding to the advance judgment information (jackpot, small hit, reach loss, loss) specified from the (number of pending memories) and advance judgment command, and select the judgment set in the pending notice determination table. The type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined by comparing the value with the read random number for deciding the pending notice.

In addition, in the reservation notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each reservation notice pattern is different depending on the advance judgment information (big hit, small hit, reach loss, loss) specified from the advance judgment command, and the judgment value for each reservation notice pattern is different. The appearance rates of the preview patterns are different.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), the number of pending items (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number designation command increases, and an effect is displayed. One additional hold display is displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the pending display (starting conditions are met), the number of pending items (number of pending memories) specified from the pending number specification command decreases. , the pending display on the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the production display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern, and the hold display is The display mode of the pending display can be changed every time the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on another pending display is started (starting conditions are met).

In addition, in this embodiment, at the time when the variable display of decorative patterns based on the suspended display (variable display of special symbols) is started (the start condition is met), the suspended display is erased. Even after the start of the variable display (variable display of special symbols), the pending display may be continuously displayed, and the display mode of the pending display may be changeable. In such a case, before and after the start of the variable display of decorative symbols based on the pending display (variable display of special symbols), the position where the pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved, like other pending displays. In this way, it may be possible to suggest the possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change by executing the hold change effect.

Next, a reservation color determination table in which multiple types of reservation color patterns are set for each reservation number (retention memory number) specified from the reservation number specification command will be explained with reference to FIGS. 525, 526, and 527. do. Note that the pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 525(A) is a reservation color determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot while there is no reservation and no variation is being executed. FIG. 525(B) is a reservation color determination table that is used when game ball B enters the starting slot without reservation and during variation execution. FIG. 526(C) is a reservation color determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot with one reservation. FIG. 527(D) is a reservation color determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot with two reservations. FIG. 527(E) is a reservation color determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot with three reservations. Note that there is no need to use the advance determination command to determine the pending color when there is no pending and no variation is being performed.

In the reserved color determination table, a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing when the reserved color can be changed, a distribution in the winning fluctuation of the pattern, and a distribution in the losing fluctuation are defined. Note that the start of the first variation is when the variation starts in a state where the suspension of the color change target according to the pattern is the first suspension (that is, the variation corresponding to the suspension will be executed in the next variation). It is. Similarly, the start of the second variation is when the variation starts in a state where the suspension of the color change target according to the pattern is the second suspension (that is, the variation corresponding to the suspension is executed in one variation after another). It's time. Similarly, the start of the third variation means that the variation is in a state where the suspension of the color change target according to the pattern is the third suspension (that is, the variation corresponding to the suspension is executed three times ahead). That's when it started.

The peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color at each timing according to the color indicated by the pattern. Note that the distribution in the pending color determination table is predetermined so that the expectation of jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. Further, the distribution of rainbow colors is predetermined so that they are selected only when the jackpot changes.

Note that in each pattern of the reserved color determination table, changes to reserved colors with low jackpot expectations are not performed. Specifically, for example, after the reserved color becomes blue, it does not return to white. This is because if there is a possibility of changing to a reserved color with a low expectation of jackpot, the player will not be able to feel a sense of anticipation even if the reserved color becomes a color with a high expectation.

Further, the reserved color determination table has a pattern in which color promotion is performed in multiple stages. Specifically, for example, there is a pattern in which the reserved color changes from white to red, skipping blue and green. Due to the existence of such a pattern, for example, even if the color remains white at the final timing of the pending color change, there is still a possibility that the color will change all at once to a color with high expectations for a jackpot, and the player's You can maintain your sense of anticipation until the end.

Further, for example, a reserved color of blue or higher may be selected only in the reach variation, or a reserved color of red or higher may be selected only in the variation in which SP reach is executed. In addition, if a variation is suspended while a jackpot variation is included in the variations being executed or pending, the peripheral control MPU forcibly changes all the pending color change patterns for the variation to white (i.e., You may decide on a pattern consisting of standard colors).

FIG. 528 is an example of a pending color determination table during variation. The pending color determination table during variation includes a pattern indicating the pending color at the timing when the variation pending color can change during variation execution, the distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, the distribution in the loss variation, and the variation for each variation pattern. Defined for each starting pending color. In other words, the peripheral control MPU determines the pending color change pattern during variation according to the pending color at the start of the variation, the variation pattern of the variation, and whether the variation is a hit variation or a miss variation.

Note that in the example of FIG. 528, three promotion timings are defined for each variation pattern, but the number of promotion timings may be different for each variation pattern. Further, the promotion timing itself may also be different for each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern that is executed in which the SP reach is varied, promotion timings include, for example, when the reach is established, when the SP reach develops, and when the second half of the SP reach starts. Note that the jackpot expectation level and change pattern of each reserved color are the same as in the reserved color determination table.

FIG. 529 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a reservation notice effect based on a change in reservation color. (A) is a state in which there is no pending change and the change is being made. (B) shows a state in which the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 while the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the pending color determination table of FIG. 525(B) is referred to, and the pending color at the time of winning and at the start of variation is determined to be green.

(C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which fluctuations corresponding to green pending have started. (E) is a state in which the fluctuation has developed into a reach. In (E), the hold remains green. (F) is a state in which the fluctuation has developed into SP reach. In (F), the hold remains green. (G) is a state in which the second half of SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of SP Reach, the hold turned red.

[15-2. Pending notice effect due to gacha coin change]
Up to this point, we have explained the suspension notice performance based on the suspension color change. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a reservation notice effect in which the reservation is displayed as a gacha coin and the reservation changes. In this hold notice performance, for example, when winning a prize, the hold is displayed in the form of coins (hereinafter referred to as gacha coins), and when the hold moves, the number of coins increases, or coins in a different form than usual (hereinafter referred to as gacha coins) are displayed. , called Rare Gacha Coin).

Then, for example, at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold, the effect display device 1600 performs the Gacha Gacha the same number of times as the number of Gacha coins and Rare Gacha coins, and obtains the same number of hold displays. Then, the pending display indicating the change currently being executed changes to the pending display of the color with the highest jackpot expectation among the acquired pending displays. Note that the pending display is not limited to changing to the color with the highest jackpot expectation, but may be changed to any one of the displayed pending displays. In addition, although the hold of Gacha coins and rare Gacha coins is displayed, the hold of Gacha coins and Rare Gacha coins may be displayed without executing Gacha Gacha at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold.

A gacha coin reservation determination table in which multiple types of gacha coin reservation patterns are set for each number of reservations (number of reservations stored) specified from the reservation number specification command will be explained with reference to FIGS. 530, 531, and 532. . Note that the gacha coin reservation determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 530(A) is a gacha coin retention determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot while there is no retention and fluctuation is not being executed. FIG. 530(B) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot without reservation and during fluctuation execution. FIG. 531(C) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot with one reservation. FIG. 532(D) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot with two reservations. FIG. 532(E) is a gacha coin reservation determination table used when game ball B enters the starting slot with three reservations. Note that there is no need to use the advance determination command to determine whether to hold Gacha coins when there is no hold and fluctuation is not being performed.

Similar to the reservation color determination table, the gacha coin reservation determination table includes a pattern indicating the type and number of gacha coins at the timing when the reservation color can change, distribution in the winning fluctuation of the pattern, distribution in the loss fluctuation, is defined.

The peripheral control MPU changes the type and number of Gacha coins at each timing according to the type and number of Gacha coins indicated by the pattern. In addition, the distribution in the gacha coin reservation determination table is predetermined so that the expectation of jackpot is higher in the order of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, and 5 rare gacha coins. It is being Furthermore, even the five rare gacha coins with the highest jackpot expectation may be selected based on the fluctuation of winnings.

Note that, similarly to the reservation color determination table, in each pattern of the gacha coin reservation determination table, changes to gacha coins with low jackpot expectations are not performed. Further, similar to the reservation color determination table, the Gacha coin reservation determination table has a pattern in which promotion of Gacha coins is performed in multiple stages. In addition, if a fluctuation is suspended while the fluctuation that is being executed or is pending includes a jackpot fluctuation, the peripheral control MPU will forcibly display a normal white reservation instead of a gachacoin reservation. You may also do so.

In addition, in the illustrated gacha coin reservation determination table, when gacha coin reservation is displayed, the gacha coin is always displayed from the time of winning, but for example, when winning a prize, the normal white reservation is displayed. , there may be a pattern in which the hold changes to a gacha hold by the start of the change corresponding to the hold. However, it is desirable that there be no pattern in which the gacha coin changes after the reserved color is promoted to blue or higher. This is because there is a risk that the expectation that the reserved color has been promoted may be lowered.

FIG. 533 is an example of a gacha coin reservation color correspondence table. In the gacha coin reservation color correspondence table, the correspondence between the type and number of gacha coins at the start of fluctuation, the reservation color with the highest jackpot expectation among the reservation display obtained from gacha gacha at the start of fluctuation, and jackpot fluctuation and loss. A distribution in which the corresponding response for each variation is selected is defined.

The gacha coin pending color correspondence table is designed to prevent a situation in which only a white pending display can be obtained even though a gacha gacha is executed using gacha coins. This is because if such a situation occurs, the player will not be able to get a sense of expectation from the performance in which the gacha gacha is executed.

Note that "coin" in the pending color column indicates that the gacha gacha is not executed and the variation is executed while the gacha coin or rare gacha coin is displayed as the pending gacha coin. In the gacha coin reservation determination table, the expectation of jackpot when gacha gacha is not executed is set low, but as shown in Figure 533, in the case of 5 rare gacha coins, which is the mode with the highest expectation of jackpot, gacha gacha is executed. If not, the setting may be such that the jackpot is confirmed.
Further, the gacha coin reservation color correspondence table does not need to include a pattern in which gacha gacha is not executed. That is, in this case, when a gacha coin or rare gacha coin pending display appears, it always changes to a pending display that has a jackpot expectation higher than the blue pending display.

In addition, regarding the jackpot fluctuation, the distribution to "coin", which indicates that the gacha gacha will not be executed and the fluctuation will be executed with the pending gacha coin or rare gacha coin displayed, is 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins. Whether it is 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, or 5 rare gacha coins, the rate is set lower than the rate at which the colored pending display changes (in the case of 1 coin, 32/ At 128 it remains a coin, but at 96/128 it changes to a different color). This is because expectations are generally higher when the display changes to a colored pending display, so it is possible to prevent the transaction from ending with coins as is.

Furthermore, depending on the distribution shown in the Gacha Coin Hold Color Correspondence Table, the hold color with the highest jackpot expectation is determined for multiple hold displays obtained using multiple Gacha Coins or Rare Gacha Coins. The colors of the pending display other than the highly expected pending colors are determined at random, for example.

Specifically, for example, if you have earned 3 coins and it has been decided to display red as the pending color, the pending color shown by the remaining 2 coins will have an expected degree exceeding red. This means that it is randomly determined from among "coin," "blue," "green," and "red," excluding the rainbow colors that have . Also, it is not done randomly, but in advance, for example, pattern 1 is ``blue,'' ``green,'' and ``red,'' pattern 2 is ``green,'' ``red,'' and pattern 3 is ``blue,'' ``red,'' and ``red.'' A plurality of patterns may be provided for each number of coins and final color, and the pattern may be determined from among them. In addition, if you do not decide on the pending color with the highest jackpot expectation (when deciding on one of the displayed pending colors), for example, pattern 2 is more likely to be promoted to red than pattern 1, etc. It is recommended to set the following.

In addition, in the gacha coin pending color correspondence table, all pending display colors obtained by a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins may be defined. In this case, even if the pending color with the highest jackpot expectation is the same, the distribution should be set so that the larger the number of pending displays with the corresponding pending color, the higher the jackpot expectation (specifically For example, if you use three gacha coins to obtain a "red, blue, white" pending display and the pending display changes to red, you can obtain a "red, red, red" pending display. If the pending display changes to red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher).

Note that the change pattern of the pending display in the variation after changing to the colored normal pending display at the start of the variation due to Gacha coins or rare gacha coins is determined using the pending color determination table during variation in FIG. 528. In other words, even if it is a gacha coin reservation notice, after changing to the colored normal reservation display, the reservation change pattern based on the reservation color is used as in the case where the reservation color change notice continues. However, for each pattern in the change pending color determination table in Figure 528, even if the distribution during jackpot fluctuations and the distribution during loss fluctuations of each pattern are different between when the gacha coin is pending and when it is not through the notice. good.

In addition, in the example mentioned above, the effect of changing the gacha coin hold to the hold color display due to gacha gacha is performed at the start of the change of the hold corresponding to the gacha coin, but it may be performed at a different timing after the start of the change. Good too. The timing includes, for example, immediately before the reach is established, immediately after the reach is established, and when the SP reach is developed when the SP reach is executed. However, for example, if an image prompting the user to operate a specific operation part is displayed during a reach performance, and the performance prompting the user to operate the operation part, the final timing must be before the start of display of the image. is desirable.

For example, if the final pending color is the same, the pending color will be changed so that the expectation of a jackpot will be higher if you go through the Gachacoin pending notice than if you do not go through the Gachacoin pending notice. It is desirable that the distribution in the determination table, gacha coin reservation color correspondence table, etc. be set.

In addition, in the above example, the number of gacha coin retention stages (5 stages: 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, 5 rare gacha coins) and the number of gacha coin retention stages. (5 levels of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow color) are the same, but may be different. Note that if the number of stages is different, it is desirable that the number of stages of gacha coin retention is larger. Since the gacha coin suspension eventually changes to the colored display, the player recognizes the final jackpot expectation level from the colored display. In other words, if there are many levels of reserved colors, it will be difficult for the player to grasp the final jackpot expectation level unless he remembers the order of jackpot expectation levels for all colors.

Although not shown in the figure, the peripheral control ROM contains, for example, a distribution in which the gacha coin retention display is selected as the retention at the time of winning, and a distribution in which the normal retention display (colored retention including white) is selected. A table defined for each variation pattern is stored. The peripheral control MPU refers to the table, selects the gachacoin holding display or the normal holding display, and refers to the gachacoin holding color correspondence table or the holding color determination table to change the holding according to the selected display mode. Decide on a pattern.

The jackpot expectation when the gacha coin pending display is selected is generally higher than the jackpot expectation when the normal pending display is selected, but the gacha coin pending (gacha) with the lowest jackpot expectation It is assumed that the highest-ranked reservation (red), which can be selected even if the normal reservation display fluctuates, has a higher expectation of a jackpot than one coin (1 coin).

FIG. 534 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a gacha coin reservation notice effect. (A) is a state in which there is no pending change and the change is being made. (B) shows a state in which the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 while the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the gacha coin reservation determination table of FIG. , FIG. 534 is a diagram when red is determined as the reserved color in FIG. 533.

(C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which fluctuations corresponding to the pending changes to gacha coins have started. At the start of the change, the pending display that was "1 gacha coin" has changed to "3 gacha coins". (E) shows a state in which the Gacha Gacha effect has been executed three times using three Gacha coins. The gacha coin pending color correspondence table is referred to, and the pending color with the highest jackpot expectation is determined to be green. Therefore, in (E), among the three pending displays obtained through the gacha-gacha performance, the one with the highest expectation of jackpot is colored green.

(F) is a continuation of the fluctuation. The pending display corresponding to the change has changed to green, which indicates the highest jackpot expectation among the three pending displays obtained through the gacha-gacha performance. (G) is a state in which the fluctuation has developed into a reach. In (G), the hold remains green. (H) is a state in which the fluctuation has developed into SP reach. In (H), the hold remains green. (I) is a state in which the second half of SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of SP Reach, the hold turned red.

After the gacha coin hold notice changes to the normal hold display (colored hold display including white), the way the hold display changes is the same as when the gacha coin hold notice is not passed, so (G), (H ) and (I) are the same as FIGS. 529(E), (F), and (G), respectively. In addition, for example, the three pending displays obtained in the Gacha Gacha performance may be set to "blue", "green", and "red", and the state shown in FIG. 534(F) is changed to red, and the state shown in FIG. 534(G) is The timing at which colors are promoted may be determined as appropriate, such as by showing the final color before the start of the reach shown in FIG.

[16. Reach collapse pseudo continuous effect]
Hereinafter, the reach collapse pseudo continuous performance will be explained. First, pseudo-continuous performance will be explained. Pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is performed multiple times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . "Ending the variation of the decorative pattern" includes, for example, a mode in which part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player is made to recognize that the variation in the decorative pattern has ended, and a mode in which the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, a pseudo-continuation pattern (a pattern in which a pseudo-continuation is determined if this pattern stops) stops in part. In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance in which the action is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called a pseudo-continuous performance of N consecutive performances. (the following natural numbers) is called the M-th pseudo-continuous performance.

In addition, while the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changing once, the player is given a hint that there is a possibility of performing the action again, but the action is actually executed again. A production that does not do this is called a ``pseudo-false production''. Furthermore, there is also a pseudo-fake effect in which two pseudo-continuous effects are executed, but the third pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, although the execution of the third pseudo-continuous effect is suggested. Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous performance will also be simply referred to as a "pseudo-continuous performance" or "pseudo-continuous performance."

A pseudo continuous performance occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. If it is determined to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous pattern on at least one of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops characters such as "Continued!" as a pseudo-continuous pattern in a medium decorative pattern. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative patterns (for example, all of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are odd or even numbers and no reach occurs) may be used as a pseudo continuous pattern.

In each variation, whether or not a pseudo-run is executed and the number of pseudo-runs when a pseudo-run is executed are defined in the variation pattern. Furthermore, the selection rate of the variable patterns in the variable pattern table is determined so that the greater the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

FIG. 535 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach collapse pseudo continuous performance. FIG. 535(A) shows a state where fluctuation has started. Subsequently, in (B), the left decorative pattern has stopped, and the right decorative pattern is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern, and is about to stop in a swinging manner (almost reaching a reach state). In (C), the decorative pattern maintains the state in (B), and an image prompting the user to further press the central press operation section 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(D) shows the state immediately after the central pressing operation section 303a is pressed in (C). The decorative pattern that was about to reach the ready state starts to fluctuate again, and a display ("x2!") indicating that the second pseudo series has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (E), the left decorative pattern stops again, and the right decorative pattern is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern and is about to stop, for example, in a swinging manner. Furthermore, a display ("x2") indicating that the second pseudo series is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the decorative pattern maintains the state of (E), and an image prompting the user to further press the central press operation section 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

It is assumed that similar performances are repeated and a fourth pseudo series is performed. In (G), the decorative pattern maintains the state of (E), and an image prompting the user to further press the central press operation section 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A display ("x4") indicating that the fourth pseudo series is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(H) is a state in which, although the center pressing operation part 303a was pressed in (G), the decorative pattern that was about to become a ready-to-reach state did not collapse and a ready-to-reach state was formed. A reach state is formed with an even number of decorative symbols. It is assumed that the expected value of the balls obtained in the jackpot is greater in the order of the decorative symbols being an even number, an odd number other than 7, and a 7. A display ("x4") indicating that the fourth pseudo series is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, although it was explained that it is about to become a reach (the vertical positions of the left and right decorative patterns are slightly different), from the state where it is a reach (the vertical positions of the left and right decorative patterns are the same), Fig. 535 As shown in (c), an image prompting the user to press the central press operation section 303a may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 536 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a ready-to-win symbol promotion performance that is executed following the reach collapse pseudo-continuous performance. The reach symbol promotion effect is an example of the SP reach. FIG. 536(I) shows a state where the ready-to-win symbol promotion effect has started. The words "Promote the reach symbol!!" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the reach symbol promotion performance, for example, an even number reach is promoted to an odd number reach or a 7 reach, or an odd number reach is promoted to a 7 reach. Here, the order of even number reach<odd number reach<7 reach is considered advantageous (for example, it is easier to hit the jackpot). In particular, this 7 reach is a very exciting performance (for example, jackpot expectation rate is over 80%). Note that in (I), since the reach collapse effect has ended, the display indicating the number of pseudo consecutive runs has been erased from the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (J), an image prompting the user to operate the central press operation section 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that a white effect image is displayed in the background of the image of the central press operation section 303a. Further, in (J), for example, the decorative pattern in reach is displayed in a shaking manner.

(K) is a state in which the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed in (J) and the ready-to-reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“Promotion!!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the decorative design has been promoted to odd reach. Additionally, the color of the background effect image has changed from white to blue.

For example, the color of the effect image of the ready-to-reach symbol promotion effect background is white when there is an even number reach, blue when it is an odd number reach other than 7, and red when there is a 7 reach. Note that even if the promotion of a ready-to-win symbol fails, a ready-to-win effect (for example, SP ready-to-reach effect) is performed using the relevant ready-to-win symbol, a win or loss is announced, and the symbol is determined.

Subsequently, at (L), the characters "Promote the reach symbol!!" are displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, in (M), an image prompting the user to operate the central press operation section 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, at this time, for example, the decorative pattern that is in reach is displayed in a shaking manner.

(N) is a state in which the center pressing operation part 303a is pressed in (M) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“Promotion!!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, the decorative pattern has been promoted to 7 reach. Additionally, the color of the background effect image has changed from blue to red. Although not shown, a ready-to-win effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect) using seven symbols is then performed, winnings and losses are announced, and the symbols are determined.

In addition, during the first period in which the reach collapse pseudo-continuous performance is performed, which is a performance of the same mode repeatedly (reach symbol mode), and from the end of the first period, the final reach symbol is determined (reach symbol promotion performance). It is desirable that the second period is longer than the second period up to the last period. Since players are most focused on the winning/losing results of the fluctuations, a longer second period in which winning/losing results are announced more directly can maintain player's interest, as well as the above-mentioned 7. Since the reach jackpot expectation level is set to an exceptional value, the longer the second period than the first period can provide the player with a feeling of exhilaration for a long time.

Further, it is desirable that the number of times that the central pressing operation section 303a is prompted to be pressed in the first period is greater than the number of times that the central pressing operation section 303a is prompted to be pressed during the second period. The longer the time from the start of the variation until the operation of the operation section is prompted, the more the player tends to think that if the operation of the operation section is prompted, the winning or losing result of the variation will be announced by the operation. . Therefore, in the second period in which the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation is long, if the number of times the player is prompted to operate the central press operation section 303a is large, the player will have to brace himself every time he operates, and there is a risk of fatigue. The number of times is as mentioned above.

Further, it is desirable that the time interval between the effects that prompt the user to press the central press operation section 303a that are repeated in the first period is shorter than the time interval between the effects that prompt the user to press the center press operation section 303a that is repeatedly performed during the second period. Hereinafter, the effect that prompts the user to press the central press operation section 303a will also be referred to as an operation request effect. As mentioned above, the second period is a performance that more directly announces the winning or losing results than the first period, so if it takes time between the operation request performances in the first period, the player's interest will be lost. This is because it cannot be maintained. In addition, the time interval between the effects that prompt the user to press the central press operation section 303a that are repeated in the first period is such that the first effect that prompts the user to press the center press operation section 303a is displayed in the second period after the end of the first period. This is the same reason why it is shorter than the time interval until

Further, it is desirable that the operation validity period in one operation request performance in the second period is longer than the operation validity period in one operation request performance in the first period. This is because there are players who want to perform the pressing operations slowly in the second period with a sense of tension, since the second period is a presentation that more directly announces the winning or losing results than the first period.

Depending on the contents of the reach collapse pseudo-continuation performance (for example, the number of pseudo-continuations is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3 times)), the operation request performance may not be executed even if the SP reach is subsequently developed. However, although the reach collapse pseudo-continuous performance has occurred, it is desirable that the ratio of operation request performances to be performed in the SP reach is higher than the ratio in which the operation request performance is not performed in the SP reach that has developed subsequently. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a feeling of exhilaration due to the occurrence of the reach collapse pseudo consecutive effect.

As mentioned above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 535 and 536, there is one type of display mode for the operation request effect in the first period, but there are multiple types of display modes for the operation request effect in the second period (one type with a blue effect). display and display with red effect).

Further, after the operation request performance starts, a timer (eg, a gauge) indicating the remaining operation validity period may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this case, the time from the start of the operation request effect until the timer is displayed in the first period is shorter than the time from the start of the operation request effect until the timer is displayed in the second period.

Further, although not shown, when the central press operation section 303a is pressed during the operation request presentation in the second period, a predetermined movable body may operate depending on the winning or losing result. Specifically, for example, if there is a jackpot variation, the movable body operates, and if it is a loss variation, the movable body does not operate. On the other hand, if the central press operation section 303a is pressed in the operation request presentation in the first period, the movable body does not operate regardless of the winning or losing result.

Furthermore, the movable body may also operate when the central press operation section 303a is pressed during the operation request presentation in the first period, but when the central press operation section 303a is pressed during the operation request presentation during the second period. (For example, the direction and amount of movement of the movable body are different, or the movable body that operates is different.)

Further, in the first period, a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) may be executed when the reach collapses and a pseudo series starts. There may be multiple types of such specific effects. Further, depending on the type of specific performance, it may be made to appear in such a way that the expectation of a jackpot due to the fluctuation is increased, or the next reach collapse is confirmed.

In addition, when a specific production with high expectations appears, it is desirable to prevent expectations from falling in the transition specific production (for example, if a green cut-in production appears, the blue cut-in effect does not appear). Further, in the first period, a predetermined movable body may operate when the reach collapses and a pseudo-continuation starts. Note that the motion of the movable body may be the same every time, or the motion or the moving accessory itself may be different depending on the current number of pseudo consecutive runs.

Further, although a plurality of operation request performances are executed in the first period, the time interval between operation request performances may be gradually shortened, or the time interval between operation request performances may be shortened from a predetermined number of times onward. It's okay. However, for example, the time interval between the last operation request performance and the last operation request performance may be longer than the time interval between other operation request performances.

[17. Sugoroku stage production]
The production during the Sugoroku stage will be explained below. The Sugoroku stage is an example of a specific performance state, and the Sugoroku performance is performed during the fluctuation and the game progresses. Specifically, a map of Sugoroku is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the back-bottom rotating decoration 3310 rotates during the movement, and when the rotation stops, the number indicated by the bottom-back center-rotating decoration 3310 is displayed. A character drawn on Sugoroku's map moves through the squares. The performance indicated by the square where the character stopped is executed in the variation or the pending variation.

Note that the rotating operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 does not necessarily have to be performed in all the variations. In a variation in which the rotating movement of the back-bottom rotating decoration 3310 is not performed, for example, the character does not move the grid, that is, remains in the same grid. In addition, as a trigger for starting the Sugoroku stage, it is possible to move to the Sugoroku stage with a predetermined probability at the start of fluctuation, or it is stipulated that the player stays in the Sugoroku stage after a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Alternatively, the transition may be made as part of a pre-read effect using the above-mentioned pre-judgment command.

FIGS. 537 and 538 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the performance on the Sugoroku stage. (A) is the state immediately before the fluctuation starts. A large decorative pattern is stopped at the center of the effect display device 1600. Also, nothing is displayed within the squares of Sugoroku. Also, assume that there are three pending changes at point (A). (B) shows a state where fluctuation has started. A large decorative pattern begins to change at the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the large decorative pattern at the center of the effect display device 1600 has been erased, and the small decorative pattern has been moved to the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Also, at the timing when the large decorative pattern is erased, a display indicating the content of the performance is displayed on the square of the Goroku. Further, for example, at this timing, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 starts rotating. Note that the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be started at the timing of (B).

In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating. The number on the back-bottom rotating decoration 3310 located at the top indicates the number of squares the character advances. In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is pointing to "2".

In (E), the character moves two squares. An "x" in the square after moving two squares indicates that no special performance will be performed. Therefore, no special effect is performed, and the decorative pattern stops at (F). Note that when the decorative pattern is stopped, a large decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (G), the camera for photographing the Sugoroku stage moves so that the character is located in the last square of the Sugoroku squares displayed on the production display device 1600. Execute the performance. The end of (G) is the same as (A). Subsequently, the next variation starts at (H). Details of (H) are the same as (B). After this, the same performance is repeated.

(I) is a state in which the final variation of the Sugoroku stage is being executed, and the details are the same as (C). (J) is a continuation of the final change. In (J), while the back-lower center rotating decorative body 3310 is rotating, a rising motion (a motion different from the rotating motion) is performed so that it approaches the pending display area (the pending display area for the fluctuation) in the effect display device 1600. do. Note that the raising operation can only be performed in the final variation. When the rising motion is performed, the contents of the sugoroku squares change to those with high expectations for a jackpot. The contents of the squares, which were "x", "?", and "×" in state (I), have all changed to "reach" in state (J).

In addition, it is set so that the probability that the upward movement will occur is higher when the final movement is a jackpot movement than when it is a losing movement. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation level due to the fluctuation is higher than the jackpot expectation level when the upward movement is not performed. Note that, as shown in (K), the back-lower center rotating decorative body 3310 may hide part or all of the hold display area, or may approach the hold display area but not hide it.

Further, the raising operation may be performed after the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has stopped (that is, after the number has been determined). However, it is desirable that the start of the rising motion is later than the start of the rotation motion in the final fluctuation. This is because, as described above, when the upward movement is performed, the expectation level of a jackpot increases, and the player can have a sense of expectation that the upward movement will be performed even after the rotation movement has started.

(K) is a continuation state of the final change. In (K), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position while being rotated. Note that the rotation decoration body 3310 may return to its initial value after the rotation of the lower back center rotation decoration body 3310 has stopped. In (K), the reservation in the hidden reservation display area has changed from the normal display to the blue reservation display (the reservation display with higher jackpot expectation than the normal reservation display).

Note that the rotating motion of the lower back center rotating decoration 3310 can be executed even in variations in production states other than the Sugoroku stage, but the probability that the rotating motion will be executed in each of a plurality of consecutive variations on the Sugoroku stage It is desirable that the probability that the rotational motion is executed in each of a plurality of consecutive variations in a performance state other than the stage is set to be lower. This is because the more variation the character moves through the squares on the Sugoroku stage, the more the player can enjoy Sugoroku.

On the other hand, there may be a production state in which the probability that the rotational motion is executed in each of a plurality of consecutive variations is set higher than that of the Sugoroku stage. This is because a sense of surprise can be provided to the player by providing a performance state in which the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310, which at first glance seems to be provided for the Sugoroku stage, rotates continuously.

Furthermore, although an example has been described in which the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back is rotated, an operation in which the position is changed may be performed instead of an operation in which the position does not change, such as a rotational movement. For example, the lower back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 may rise slightly while rotating (a rising width smaller than the rising movement in the final fluctuation).

[18. Specific zone production]
The effects of specific zones will be explained below. Examples of the specific zones include a pine zone and a super pine zone. The pine zone, for example, is the zone that enters during the Sugoroku stage in the previous chapter. Further, the super pine zone is a zone that may be entered regardless of the stage, for example.

Note that, for example, entering these specific zones is performed as a pre-reading effect. The look-ahead performance is a performance that executes a performance that suggests the winning or losing result of a pending variation before the start of the pending variation. The peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-judgment command regarding the reserved special symbol variations sent from the main control MPU, and determines whether each of the reserved special symbol variations is a hit variation (that is, a jackpot variation or a small hit variation). ) (pre-reading judgment), and based on this judgment result, it is possible to execute a pre-reading effect.

After entering the pine zone and the super pine zone, the entry state of these zones continues until a change corresponding to the pre-read determined hold (also referred to as a pre-read target change). It is assumed that the expectation of a jackpot is high for the fluctuations corresponding to the reservation determined in advance in the pine zone and the super pine zone. Further, it is assumed that the expectation of a jackpot due to the change in the look-ahead object is higher when the game enters the super-pine zone than when it enters the pine zone. In addition, while the jackpot variation is being executed or suspended, it is desirable that the pine zone and the super pine zone in which the newly suspended variation is the prefetch target variation are not executed.

FIGS. 539 and 540 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the pine zone effect. (A) shows a state in which variations during the Sugoroku stage are being executed. In (A), the pending variation that is second to the variation that is being executed is the prefetch target variation. A look-ahead effect is performed for the change in the look-ahead target from the change in (A). In (A), an effect is being executed in which a character stops at a square labeled "pine zone". (B) is a continuation of the fluctuation in (A). A display indicating that the player has entered the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (C), a decorative pattern is displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600. Further, a display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone ("in the pine zone...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the change has ended. In the next variation of (C), for example, the same effects as in (C) and (D) are performed.

(E) is a state in which the prefetch target variation has started. Subsequently, a display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (F) is a state in which reach is established in the look-ahead target variation. In a state where reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when a specific performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is being executed, such as the timing when reach is established, the display indicating that you are staying in the Matsu Zone will be erased, so that you can stay in the Matsu Zone until then. It is possible to draw the attention of the player who was paying much attention to the fact that a specific performance is being executed. Further, if the fact that the player is staying in the pine zone is constantly displayed, the player may continue to feel nervous and become tired. Note that the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone may be erased multiple times. Specifically, for example, it may be deleted every time the execution of the pseudo-association is determined.

In other words, before the SP reach performance (rock-paper-scissors game performance described later) starts, there are specific timings (when a reach is established, when a display confirming a pseudo-match appears, when a reach or a pseudo-match has occurred). (e.g., when a performance related to (emphasized)

In (G), the reach state continues. In (G), a display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is again displayed on the effect display device 1600. (G) is the timing when the player is waiting to see whether or not it will develop into SP reach, and at this timing, the indication that the player is staying in the pine zone where the expectation of jackpot is high is redisplayed, and the player , remembering that it is in the pine zone, you can expect it to develop into SP reach.

(H) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game effect, which is SP reach, has started. The rock-paper-scissors game performance is an SP reach that develops based on changes in the pre-read targets of the pine zone and super pine zone. The rock-paper-scissors game performance is, for example, a performance with extremely high expectations for a jackpot among the SP reach performances (for example, the expectation for a jackpot is the second highest after the SP reach-for-win performance, which is selected only when the jackpot fluctuates). Although the rock-paper-scissors game performance is not necessarily executed even if the game enters the pine zone, the variation pattern of the look-ahead target fluctuation is selected so that the rock-paper-scissors game performance is always executed when the game enters the super-pine zone. It is assumed that

Further, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game performance, the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is erased from the performance display device 1600, and remains erased even during the rock-paper-scissors game performance. The rock-paper-scissors game performance is a performance with extremely high expectations for a jackpot, and is intended to draw the attention of the players to the rock-paper-scissors game performance. For this reason, it is desirable that the expected level of jackpot is set higher at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game presentation than at the time of entering the pine zone.

(I) is a continuation of the rock-paper-scissors game performance. Rock, paper, scissors shouts are displayed on the production display device 1600. At (J), a rock-paper-scissors game is being held. The hand of the friendly character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (J), the effect display device 1600 displays a state in which the friendly character has won the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character (that is, it is notified that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation). In (K), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the jackpot has been won, and the decorative symbols are stopped at the jackpot combination.

FIG. 541 and FIG. 542 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of super pine zone production. For example, entering the super pine zone is executed as a pending preview performance. Specifically, for example, the suspension is displayed in a manner that indicates the possibility of entering the super pine zone (hereinafter also referred to as super pine suggestion suspension). In addition, a display indicating that the hold is confirmed to enter the Chomatsu zone (hereinafter also referred to as Chomatsu confirmed hold), for example, when winning a prize, the hold corresponding to the winning is displayed as Chomatsu suggestion hold, At the same time as the normal display mode of suspension is moved, it changes to super pine suggestion suspension.

(A) is a state in which a variation is being executed and three variations are pending. (B) is the state of (A), with a new change being suspended. In (B), when the winning time of the new hold is a super pine suggestion hold (a hold written as "Super Pine?"), if it is a confirmed hold, a hold written as "Super Pine!" and may be displayed in a color (for example, red) different from the standard color (for example, white). Super pine suggestion suspension is the suspension of look-ahead target variation. (C) is a state in which the fluctuation has ended.

(D) is the state where the next fluctuation has started. (E) is a continuation of the fluctuation in (D). In (E), the effect display device 1600 is executing a dialogue effect (``Maybe it's the super pine zone...'') that suggests entering the super pine zone. (F) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays an indication ("...") indicating that entry into the super pine zone was not possible although entry into the super pine zone was suggested.

(G) is the state after the next fluctuation of (F) has started. One Super Pine Suggestion Pending has been moved. In addition, in (G), a line production suggesting entry into the super pine zone (``Maybe it really is the super pine zone!!!'') is displayed again. The dialogue performance in (G) is a performance with a higher expectation of entering the super pine zone than the dialogue performance in (E). When performing a performance that suggests entering the super pine zone multiple times in this way, it is desirable that the expectation level of entering the super pine zone does not decrease during the multiple performance.

In (H), a display confirming that the game will enter the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As shown in (H), the super pine suggestion pending may change to the super pine confirmed pending at this timing. In addition, in the example of FIG. 541, the super pine suggestion pending changes to the super pine confirmed pending at the timing when the display confirming that entering the super pine zone appears, but the super pine confirmed pending changes before that timing. It goes without saying that it is acceptable for the to appear. Further, in the example of FIG. 541, the entry into the super pine zone from the presentation suggesting entry into the super pine zone is performed over two fluctuations, but it may be performed in one fluctuation.

In (I), a decorative pattern is displayed in the center, and a display indicating that the player is staying in the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the super pine confirmed pending state has changed to a highly anticipated state of pending display (in (I), the red pending display). For example, in this state, fluctuations are digested.

(J) is a state where the prefetch target variation has started. (K) is a state in which reach is established in the look-ahead target variation. Similar to the pine zone, when the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when a specific performance with a high expectation of jackpot is executed, such as the timing when reach is established, the display indicating that you are staying in the Chomatsu Zone is erased, so that you can stay in the Chomatsu Zone. It is possible to draw the attention of the player who was paying much attention to the fact that a specific performance is being executed. Further, if the fact that the game is in the super pine zone is constantly displayed, the player may continue to feel nervous and become tired. Note that the display indicating that the user is staying in the Super Pine Zone may be erased multiple times. Specifically, for example, it may be deleted every time the execution of the pseudo-association is determined.

In other words, similar to the above-mentioned pine zone, before the SP reach effect (the above-mentioned rock-paper-scissors game effect) starts, there are specific timings (when the reach is established, when the display that confirms the pseudo-match appears, It is advisable to temporarily erase the display indicating that the player is staying in the super pine zone, such as when performing (emphasizing) a performance related to the occurrence of a reach or pseudo-run.

At (L), the reach state continues. At (L), similar to the pine zone, a display indicating that the player is staying in the super pine zone is again displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the Chomatsu Zone is in a state where the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the Pine Zone, the player can once again experience a sense of elation by displaying the indication that the player is staying in the Chomatsu Zone.

(M) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game effect, which is SP reach, has started. As mentioned above, when entering the super pine zone, a rock-paper-scissors game performance is always executed. In (M), the display indicating that the player is staying in the Super Pine Zone is again erased from the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is possible to strongly appeal to the players that the game has entered a rock-paper-scissors competition performance.

(N) is a continuation of the rock-paper-scissors game performance. Rock, paper, scissors shouts are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, at (N), a display indicating that the player is staying in the Chomatsu Zone is again displayed on the effect display device 1600. As mentioned above, the super pine zone has higher jackpot expectations than the pine zone. Therefore, by displaying this display at the same time that the rock-paper-scissors game performance is actually being held, the player can enjoy the excitement due to the synergistic effect of the two highly anticipated performances: the rock-paper-scissors game performance and the super pine zone. You can get a feeling.

At (O), a rock-paper-scissors game is being held. The hand of the friendly character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (O), a state in which the friendly character has won the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (that is, it is reported that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation).

Further, in (O), the display indicating that the player is staying in the Chomatsu Zone has been erased from the effect display device 1600. This is because at the timing when the winning/losing result of the fluctuation has already been announced, only the winning/losing result is important to the player, and whether or not he/she stays in the super pine zone is not important. At (P), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the jackpot has been won, and the decorative symbols are stopped at the jackpot combination.

In addition, we have explained an example in which the super pine zone starts after the super pine suggestion pending appears, but if you cannot enter the super pine zone even though the super pine suggestion pending appears, for example, During the corresponding fluctuation, it is suggested that they will enter the Chomatsu Zone, but there will be a production in which they fail to enter.

In addition, in the example mentioned above, no special effects were performed for fluctuations that were not subject to look-ahead while staying in the Matsu Zone or Super Pine Zone, but specific effects (for example, the start of a rock-paper-scissors game effect) were not performed for these fluctuations. (such as a continuous performance that suggests the following) may be performed. Further, entry into the pine zone and super pine zone may be performed as a normal performance (a part of the performance performed within one change) instead of a look-ahead performance. Specifically, for example, a performance suggesting entering the pine zone or super pine zone, a performance of entering, and a rock-paper-scissors game may be executed in one change.

In addition, entering the Matsu Zone is basically done by the character stopping at the square that indicates the Matsu Zone on the Sugoroku stage, so unlike the Super Matsu Zone, the pending display may not indicate the Matsu Zone. desirable. If the pine zone is hinted at by the pending display on the Sugoroku stage, the contents of the Sugoroku squares that are not displayed until after the fluctuation starts will be suggested by the pending display, which may reduce the enjoyment of playing Sugoroku. Because there is.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Matsu Zone or Chomatsu Zone, for example, when a reach occurs, we have explained an example of erasing the display indicating that you are staying in the Matsu Zone or Chomatsu Zone. An image different from the display image (for example, a reach emphasis effect) may be displayed on the higher priority side so as to overlap. In short, the display indicating that the player is staying in the Matsu Zone or Chomatsu Zone cannot be recognized by the player (or, although it is displayed overlapping, the display indicates that the player is staying in the Matsu Zone or Chomatsu Zone). (the display indicating this is visible).

[19. Peeping performance on hold]
The hold peek performance, which is an example of the hold preview performance, will be described below. FIG. 543 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold peek performance. (A) shows a state in which variation is being executed. Three changes are pending in (A). In (B), a character appears from below the effect display device 1600, and the character appears in the hold display area without hiding the hold display corresponding to the change currently being executed (the hold display located at the bottom center of the effect display device 1600). Part (partially means completely hiding a predetermined number (for example, one) of the four holds, and/or hiding a part of each of the four holds (that is, not completely displaying the hold display for all four holds) The state of not being able to see things). Note that the character may hide the entire reserved display area. Further, the hold display (the hold display located at the bottom center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the change currently being executed by the character may be hidden.

In (C), the character disappears from the effect display device 1600, and a part of the hold display hidden by the character (the third hold in FIG. 543) changes to a green hold display in a highly anticipated manner. It's changing. (D) is the end of the fluctuation. The decorative pattern is stopped at a combination indicating that the fluctuation is a losing fluctuation. As in the example of FIG. 543, when only the pending display is hidden, it is desirable that the pending peek effect is executed only when the variation being executed is a missed variation.

In addition, if a hold peek effect is executed in a variation in which a normal deviation variation pattern (a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, about 10 seconds) in which special effects such as reach effects are not executed) is selected. In the example shown in FIG. 543, the character does not appear at the start of the change, but appears after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the start of the change. In addition, when a hold peek effect is executed in a shortened variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a special effect such as a reach effect is not executed, the variation time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds)), when the variation starts or The character may appear after an extremely short period of time (shorter than the above-mentioned 3 seconds) has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation.

Moreover, before (B), an inciting performance of the hold peek performance may be performed. Specifically, in the inciting effect, for example, a character appears on the effect display device 1600 and approaches the hold display area, but an effect that does not hide the hold display area is performed. Further, although an inciting effect is performed, a effect may be performed in which the character then disappears without hiding the reserved display area. In addition, in the above-mentioned shortening variation pattern, since the variation time is short, it is preferable that the inciting effect is not performed or is performed for a short time (for example, about 1 second). Furthermore, when such an inciting effect is performed and the character hides the hold display area, the hold display may always change.

Further, in the example of FIG. 543, a part of the pending display hidden in the character has changed, but there may be a pattern in which all pending displays change, or a pattern in which all pending displays do not change. It's okay.

In addition, even if the pending display is of a color with the same jackpot expectation level, for example, the jackpot expectation level will be higher if the game goes through the hold peek effect than if it does not go through the hold peek effect. do. Thereby, the player can feel a sense of elation when the hold peek performance is executed. Conversely, even if the pending display of a color has the same jackpot expectation level, the jackpot expectation level may be higher when the display does not go through the hold peek effect than when it goes through the hold peek effect. . Players' expectations in a hold peek performance in which the hold display changes with a high probability or always at the time of occurrence, but the expectation of a jackpot is suppressed, and a normal hold color change performance in which the jackpot cannot be predicted but the expectation of a jackpot is high. You can balance your senses.

Furthermore, as in the example of FIG. 543, in the effect display device 1600, it is preferable that the change in the hold display is announced when the character retreats from the hold display. If, before the character retreats, it is suggested that there will be a change in the pending color or the pending color after the change, the period during which the player feels a sense of tension in the pending peek performance will be shortened, and the interest will decrease. It is from.

However, for example, a light emitting body different from the effect display device 1600 (for example, a lamp or LED attached to the front wall 2101 of the starting port unit 2100, or a lamp or LED provided near the starting port unit 2100) When emitting light in a color equivalent to the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light-emitting body is may be caused to emit light in the reserved color. Usually, the player plays the game while mainly looking at the effect display device 1600, but can feel a sense of anticipation by feeling something unusual due to a change in the color of the light emitting body that slightly enters the field of view. .

Since the purpose is to make the player recognize the change in the color of the light emitter before the change in the reserved color of the effect display device 1600, the effect (control for) in which the reserved color of the effect display device 1600 changes is controlled. A change in the color of the light-emitting body may cause the player to experience a change in the color of the light-emitting body before the timing to execute the effect that changes the color of the light-emitting body, or even at the same timing, before the change in the pending color of the effect display device 1600. There is no problem as long as you can make them recognize it.

Further, immediately before causing the light emitting body to emit light, or immediately before changing the emission color of the light emitting body, it is preferable to cause the light emitting body to emit light in a reserved color (for example, white) in a normal display mode. Specifically, for example, when the hold color of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes from blue to green, the light emission color of the light emitting body changes from blue to white before the change of the hold color of the effect display device 1600. , and further changes from white to green. Although an example has been described in which the reserved color in the normal display mode is white, the color is not limited to white, and there is no problem as long as the color is not likely to be selected as the reserved color after promotion in this reserved change effect. Furthermore, when displaying white, there is no problem whether the display is lit or blinking. If it is lit, the user can pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and if it is blinking, it can be used to show that a pending change is being made.

Note that in such a case, it is desirable that the time during which the luminous body emits white light in the middle is extremely short (eg, shorter than the shortest variation pattern among all variation patterns). This is because if the light emitting body emits white light for a long time, the player may be misled if the pending display changes to white, which is less likely to be expected to be a jackpot.

In addition, when the hold display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a special mode of hold that cannot be expressed by color alone (for example, the above-mentioned super pine suggestion hold), the light emitting body is, for example, Light emission with a color that is not used in the hold color change (for example, if the effect display device 1600 can perform a hold color change of white, blue, green, red, or rainbow color, the light emitting body emits purple light) The pending display mode is expressed by executing a predetermined pattern of light emission. Examples of the predetermined pattern of light emission include a pattern in which red light flashes, a pattern in which red and green light is alternately emitted, and the like.

Further, in the example of FIG. 543, a series of effects in which the character hides the pending display and retreats is performed only once, but the effects may be performed multiple times. When the performance is executed multiple times, the mode of the pending display may change each time, the mode of the pending display may change at least once, or the mode of the pending display may not change even once. Good too.

Further, it is desirable that the hold peek performance is performed only for the hold of the special figure 1. When the game is progressing mainly by the fluctuation of special figure 2, for example, a very short fluctuation time is often selected such as in a time saving state, so it is necessary to execute the hold peek effect at high speed. This is because there is a risk of confusing the players.

Furthermore, multiple types of characters may exist in the hold peek performance. Each of the plurality of characters may have different levels of expectation, or some or all of the characters may have the same level of expectation. This expectation level may be a pending change expectation level in a pending peek performance, or may be a jackpot expectation level in a pending variation. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the degree of suspension expectation increases in the order of character A, character B, and character C, and character C is selected only when a suspension change is executed. Further, for example, character B may have a higher expected degree of pending change than character A, but character A may have a higher expected degree of jackpot when a pending change occurs. Further, character A and character B may have the same pending change expectation level and jackpot expectation level, and character C may have a higher pending change expectation level and jackpot expectation level than character A and character B.

In addition, it is desirable that the pending peek performance be performed only when the fluctuation being executed is a miss, but if the fluctuation being executed is a non-reach fluctuation or a reach fluctuation that does not have a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a normal reach is a miss) It is further desirable that the hold peek effect be performed only when the change (such as fluctuation, etc.) is the case. In other words, it is desirable that the hold peek performance not occur not only when the fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation, but also when the fluctuation is a fluctuation in which a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot such as SP reach is executed.

If a pending peeking effect occurs during a fluctuation in which SP reach is executed, the player may think that the pending fluctuation has higher expectations than the currently executed fluctuation, and This is because there is a risk that expectations regarding reach may fade.

[20. Still image production]
The still image performance will be explained below. The still image effect is an effect in which the effect display device 1600 displays a dynamic display in parallel with the display of a still image. A still image during a still image presentation may be a still image (for example, an object (sprite) such as a character image or background image) that was displayed as a dynamic display until just before the start of the still image presentation. Alternatively, the display may be a still image whose display starts at the same time as the start of the still image presentation. When the still image presentation ends, the still image is no longer static, and the still image changes to a dynamic display. Furthermore, when the still image presentation ends, the still image may be deleted and a new dynamic display may be displayed.

Note that in this chapter, the term "stillness of an image" includes not only complete stillness, but also a mode sufficient to make the player recognize that the image is still. Specifically, for example, images (objects) that are slightly shaking, effects applied to images (objects), images (objects) that are slightly enlarged or reduced, etc. can also be static. include.

[20-1. Rocket performance]
FIG. 544, FIG. 545, and FIG. 546 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a rocket effect. The rocket effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

When the rocket performance, which is an example of the SP reach performance, starts, in (A), a display indicating that the rocket performance has started is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In (B), an image of character A (the character with a white head in the figure), the line “Light the fuse!” by character A, and a rocket with the fuse ignited are displayed on the effect display device 1600. .

In (C), the image of character A has been erased from the effect display device 1600. Also, in (C), the fuse is shorter than in the state (B) (ie, the spark is traveling on the fuse). In (D), character A is displayed again on the effect display device 1600, and character A's line ``We don't have enough fuel! We can't launch the rocket as it is!'' is further displayed. Moreover, in (D), the fuse is shorter than in the state (C).

In (E), an image of character B (the character with a black head in the figure) and a line by character B saying "Replenish the fuel before the spark reaches the rocket!" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. has been done. Moreover, in (E), the fuse is shorter than in the state (D).

In (F), an image of character B and a line by character B saying "We will arrive in 5 seconds!" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, in (F), the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-up manner near the fuse, and the fuse is shorter than in the state in (E). Note that until (M) described later, the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-up manner near the fuse.

In (G), the line "Refill in 3 seconds!" and an image of character A trying to lift the fuel are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that the image "Replenish in 3 seconds!" is displayed until the end of FIG. 545 (N), which will be described later. In (G), the fuse is shorter than in (F). That is, from the start of (B) to the start of (G), a dynamic performance was performed in which the spark progressed along the fuse and the fuse gradually became shorter. On the other hand, from the start of (G) until the end of (M) (immediately before the special lottery result notification timing), which will be described later, a still image effect in which the images of the fuse and sparks remain still is executed.

In (H), an image of character A lifting fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (I), an image in which character A is about to throw fuel is displayed on effect display device 1600. In FIG. 545(J), an image of character A throwing fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (K), an image of character A trying to lift the fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (L), an image of character A lifting fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that the images of character A and fuel in (K) and (L) are the same as the images of character A and fuel in FIGS. 544 (G) and (H), respectively.

That is, from FIG. 544(G) to FIG. 545(J), a series of effects in which character A tries to lift the fuel, lifts the fuel, tries to throw the fuel, and throws the fuel is repeated. From FIG. 545(K), the series of performances starts for the second time, and by (L), the series of performances ends midway.

In (M), the image of the character A and the fuel is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the rocket image with the sparks and fuse stationary is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N), the static image is released, the spark reaches the rocket from the fuse, and the rocket is successfully launched. In other words, the effect display device 1600 displays an image that indicates that the special lottery result is a jackpot. is displayed. At (O), an image display indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600, saying "Jackpot! Congratulations!!".

FIG. 546 is an example of the final stage of the rocket performance when the special lottery result is a loss. In FIG. 546 (N') following FIG. 545 (M), the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the spark goes out in the middle of the fuse and the rocket launch fails, that is, an image notifying that the special lottery result is a failure. Displayed. At (O'), an image is displayed indicating that the special lottery result is a loss, saying "Unfortunate...". In addition, even if the special lottery result is a jackpot, an image notifying that the special lottery result is a loss as shown in FIG. 546 (N') at the timing of FIG. 545 (N) is displayed. Often, a revival performance (for example, a performance as shown in FIG. 545(N) or a performance dedicated to revival) may be performed after that.

Note that the dynamic display of the character A and the fuel during the still image performance may indicate the special lottery result. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, compared to when the special lottery result is a loss, characters such as "chance" may appear on the clothes worn by character A during the still image production. It is desirable that the percentage of selections is high for effects in which the fuel is displayed in a specific color (for example, red) during a still image effect.

Further, although an example has been shown in which a plurality of dynamic displays (character A and fuel) are displayed on the production display device 1600 during still image production, there may be only one dynamic display. In addition, if multiple dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image presentation, the fulfillment of a specific condition during the still image presentation (for example, game ball B enters a predetermined prize opening) is satisfied. Taking this as an opportunity, the number of dynamic displays may be increased.

Specifically, for example, each time a game ball B enters the predetermined prize opening during still image presentation, one additional character is displayed to support character A, up to a predetermined number (for example, five). may be done. Note that, for example, the additionally displayed character repeats a cheering performance, which is an example of a series of performances consisting of a plurality of performance elements, one or more times. Note that, similar to the repetition of the series of performances shown in FIGS. 544 and 545, the cheering performance may also end in the middle of the series of performances (for example, the cheering performance starts with performance A, then continues with performance B, performance C, etc.). In the case of a series of performances performed in this order, the cheering performance may end after performance A or performance B is performed in the Nth (N is a natural number) repetition of the series of performances).

Note that when a plurality of characters are additionally displayed, it is desirable that the timing of the cheering effects by the plurality of characters be synchronized. That is, when a new character is additionally displayed, the support performance of the new character starts in synchronization with the schedule of the support performance currently being performed by the additional display character that has already been displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that a character has been additionally displayed, and also attracts the player's attention to the cheering performance by a plurality of characters. Further, in addition to or in place of the additional display, a display indicating the number of characters who have already been additionally displayed or the number of characters who are scheduled to be additionally displayed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

It should be noted that among the dynamic displays during the still image performance, it is desirable that only those that suggest the special lottery result be those that have been displayed since the start of the still image performance (namely, character A and fuel). In other words, it is desirable that the dynamic display added when the above-mentioned specific conditions are met after the start of the still image presentation does not suggest a special lottery result. This is because if all of these dynamic displays suggest special lottery results, there is a risk that the player will be confused.

Note that it is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image presentation be displayed in a corner of the presentation display device 1600 other than the center (in the example of FIGS. 544 and 545, the lower right corner). Further, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image presentation is smaller than the display size of the still image (the rocket including the fuse and sparks in the examples of FIGS. 544 and 545). The special lottery results are announced only after the rocket is released from stationary motion, and the purpose is to draw attention to the rocket rather than the dynamic display.

In addition, the title display in Fig. 544(A) ("Launch the rocket! Successful launch and jackpot!") is prepared in multiple colors, for example, white, red, and rainbow colors, so that white < red < rainbow color. Expectations may be made to increase in order. Furthermore, a plurality of types of title display may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation level is 1% for white where the still image effect is not executed, 5% for red that is not executed, 100% for rainbow that is not executed, 10% for white that is executed, 20% for red that is executed, It is best to make the rainbow 100%. If the red color is the same both when the still image effect is executed and when it is not executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of a jackpot.

Further, when comparing white when the still image effect is executed and red when the still image effect is not executed, the white when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation. In other words, the degree of jackpot expectation is indicated by the title display color and the presence or absence of a still image effect, but since the still image effect has a greater contribution to the jackpot expectation level, the still image effect is determined by the higher title display color. The expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when a still image effect is executed in a lower title display color than when it is not executed. By doing so, even if white is displayed in the title display that is displayed before the still image effect is executed, the player's feeling of disappointment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, it is desirable that lamps do not emit light, sound is output from speakers, and movable bodies operate, etc., in accordance with the dynamic display during still image presentation. The special lottery results are announced only after the rocket is released from stationary motion, and the purpose is to draw attention to the rocket rather than the dynamic display.

The outline of the rocket effect described using FIGS. 544 to 546 is summarized as follows. First, a dynamic effect is performed in which the spark advances along the fuse and the rocket's fuse gradually shortens, and then the fuse and spark come to rest (the rocket also remains stationary). Then, while the fuse and the spark are stationary, a dynamic effect of the character A and the fuel is executed. Then, at the same time that the static state of the fuse and the spark is released, the dynamic performance of the character A and the fuel ends, and a performance that notifies the special lottery result (successful launch or failed launch of the rocket) is executed.

FIG. 547 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a schedule for a dynamic effect of character A and fuel after the start of the still image effect in the rocket effect. Each element in FIG. 547 represents a series of effects described above. Element 1 is a state where character A is trying to lift up the fuel, as shown in FIG. 544(G), and element 2 is a state where character A is trying to lift up fuel, as shown in FIG. 544(H). Element 3 is a state where character A is about to throw fuel, as shown in FIG. 544(I), and element 4 is a state where character A is throwing fuel, as shown in FIG. 545(J).

Pattern A is a performance pattern in which elements 1 and 2 are performed after the first series of performances, and then a rocket launch success performance or launch failure performance (i.e., a performance that notifies the special lottery result) is performed. be. In FIGS. 544 to 546 described above, the effect of pattern A was executed.

Pattern B is a performance pattern in which elements 1 and 2 are executed after the second series of performances, and then a rocket launch success performance or launch failure performance is performed. Pattern C is a performance pattern in which elements 1 and 2 are performed after the third series of performances, and then a rocket launch success performance or launch failure performance is performed.

In other words, patterns A, B, and C are performance patterns in which a series of performances ends midway and a rocket launch success performance or launch failure performance is performed. On the other hand, pattern D is a performance pattern in which a successful rocket launch performance or a failed rocket launch performance is performed after a series of performances exactly five times. In this respect, since pattern D is a different pattern from patterns A, B, and C, the case where pattern D is selected is better than the case where patterns A, B, and C are selected. However, it is desirable that the selection rate of each pattern is set so that the expectation of a jackpot is high. If the expectation level of jackpot is low for pattern D, which has the longest still image performance, there is a high possibility that the special lottery result will be a failure in the still image performance even though the player has been anticipating it for a long time. This is because situations that strongly discourage players often occur. Further, pattern D may be set to be selected only when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

In addition, since the still image production time becomes longer in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C, for example, the expectation of jackpot increases in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C (≦ pattern D). It is desirable that the selection rate of each pattern is set. If the expectation level of a jackpot is low in a pattern with a long still image performance, there is a high possibility that the special lottery result will be a failure even though the player has been expecting it for a long time in the still image performance. This is because situations that strongly discourage people frequently occur.

Note that, as described above, in any of the effect patterns, a series of effects is executed one or more times during the still image effect. As a result, the static state will not be lifted until at least one series of effects has been completed, allowing the player to prepare mentally for the effect in which the special lottery results will be announced, and ultimately the player's Excessive tension can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as described above, a plurality of effect patterns are predetermined in which the number of times a series of effects are executed differs. As a result, after a series of effects has progressed once, it is difficult for the player to predict at what timing the effect in which the special lottery result will be announced will be executed, so after the series of effects has progressed once, the player feels a sense of tension. can be provided. In other words, by predetermining the performance pattern shown in FIG. 547, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate sense of tension during the still image performance.

Although it is difficult to predict when the special lottery result will be announced, the timing at which the special lottery result will be announced is determined as a specific timing, as shown in FIG. 547. ing. In the example of FIG. 547, this is after element 2 or element 4 is executed. If there is a possibility that a special lottery result will be announced after all the elements (1 to 4) are completed, the tension will continue and the players will become fatigued. This is because there is a risk.

Note that all the effect patterns shown in FIG. 547 repeatedly execute a series of effects starting from element 1 and then proceeding to element 2, element 3, and element 4. There may be a performance pattern in which the order of elements or the elements at the start are different from the performance pattern shown in FIG. 547. Specifically, for example, there may be a performance pattern that repeats a series of performances that proceed in the order of element 3, element 4, element 1, and element 2. Furthermore, for example, there may be a performance pattern that repeats a series of performances that proceed in the order of element 4, element 2, element 1, and element 3.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, a still image effect is executed during SP reach, but for example, a still image effect may be executed before reaching the reach state (that is, while all decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner). may be executed, or a still image effect may be executed after reaching the ready-to-reach state and before starting SP ready-to-reach. Furthermore, a still image performance may be performed as a performance that suggests reaching a reach state, or a still image performance may be performed as a performance suggesting that SP reach starts after reaching a reach state and before the start of SP reach. may be executed. Furthermore, a series of effects may start before the still image effects are performed (for example, a series of effects may be executed more than once before the still image effects start, or the first (A still image performance may start during a series of performances.)

[20-2. Battle production]
FIG. 548, FIG. 549, and FIG. 550 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of battle effects. The battle performance is an example of an SP reach performance in which a still image performance may be executed. When the battle performance, which is an example of the SP reach performance, starts, in (A), a display indicating that the battle performance has started is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In (B), a main character (white character) and an enemy character (black character) are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), the main character and the main character's lines are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the enemy character and the enemy character's lines are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (E), an image of the main character and enemy characters jumping on each other is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), an image of the protagonist and enemy characters attacking each other in the air is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (G), an image of the main character and enemy characters landing is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

From the start of (G) to the end of FIG. 549 (J) (immediately before the timing of special lottery result notification), a still image effect in which the images of the main character and enemy characters remain still is executed. In (H), the images of the protagonist and enemy characters are stationary. Also, in (H), an image of an ally character (the character shaded with diagonal lines) is displayed that has a bandage (the word "bond" inside the circle) in the first aid kit.

In (I), the images of the protagonist and enemy characters continue to remain stationary. In addition, in (I), an image of an ally character putting a bandage (the word "package" inside a circle) in a first aid kit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 549(J), the images of the protagonist and enemy characters continue to remain stationary. In addition, in (J), an image of an ally character putting tweezers (the character "pi" inside a circle) in a first aid kit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (K), an image of an ally character putting gauze (the letter "ga" inside a circle) in a first aid kit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (K), before the ally character finishes putting gauze into the first aid kit, that is, before the series of effects in which the ally character puts things into the first aid kit ends, the image of the enemy character is unfrozen and the protagonist stands. An image of the enemy character falling down and a display indicating that the protagonist has won are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that in (K), after the ally character has finished putting gauze in the first aid kit, the freeze of the image of the enemy character may be canceled.

In the example in Figure 549, the image of the main character in (J) is the same as the image of the main character in (K) (the pose has not changed), and the main character remains stationary from (J) to (K). , the main character may also be released from stillness. At (L), a message "Jackpot! Congratulations!!" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Like battle effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension by executing a still image effect immediately before announcing the special lottery results, but since the player does not know when the static image will be released, the still image effect is You have to be nervous throughout. Therefore, by performing a dynamic display during a still image performance, it is possible to distract the player, and in turn, it is possible to relieve the player's sense of tension.

In addition, players who have seen the still image performance in the battle performance will learn that the special lottery result will be announced just before the dynamically displayed ally character finishes putting the gauze into the first aid kit, so the same performance will be repeated again. When executed, you can enjoy the performance without getting too nervous until your ally characters start putting gauze into the first aid kit.

In addition, when the dynamic display during the still image performance is in a specific mode, the mode of the dynamic display may be selected so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a jackpot is high. Specifically, for example, when the bandage in (I) is red, the selection rate of the effect is adjusted so that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is higher than when the bandage is white. is set.

However, if the selection rate of the particular aspect is high, the expectation of a jackpot due to the appearance of the dynamic display itself during the still image presentation becomes high, and the player's interest in the appearance of the particular aspect diminishes. Therefore, when a dynamic display appears during still image production, the appearance rate of the specific mode is low (for example, 1/4 or less), and even if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the specific mode will not appear. It is desirable that the selectivity of is determined to be low (for example, 1/2 or less).

Furthermore, a plurality of dynamic displays may be displayed during the still image presentation. If multiple dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image presentation, it is possible to indicate that a specific condition during the still image presentation (for example, game ball B enters a predetermined prize opening) is met. The number of dynamic displays may be increased based on this opportunity.

Specifically, for example, each time the game ball B enters the predetermined prize opening during still image production, one additional ally character may be displayed up to a predetermined number (for example, five). . Note that the additionally displayed ally character also performs the same performance as the ally character in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K), for example. Note that when a plurality of ally characters are displayed, it is desirable that the performances by the plurality of ally characters be synchronized. That is, when a new ally character is additionally displayed, the cheering performance of the new ally character starts in synchronization with the schedule of the cheering performance being performed by the already displayed ally characters. This makes it easier for the player to notice that a character has been additionally displayed, and also attracts the player's attention to the cheering performance by a plurality of characters.

Note that among the dynamic displays during the still image presentation, it is desirable that only the ally characters that have been displayed since the start of the still image presentation suggest the special lottery results. In other words, it is desirable that the dynamic display added when the above-mentioned specific conditions are met after the start of the still image presentation does not suggest a special lottery result. This is because if all of these dynamic displays suggest special lottery results, there is a risk that the player will be confused.

Note that it is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image presentation be displayed in a location other than the center of the presentation display device 1600 (in the lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 548 and 549). Further, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during still image presentation is smaller than the display size of the still images (the main character and enemy characters in FIGS. 548 and 549). The purpose of notifying the special lottery results is to only inform the enemy character and the main character after the static state is released, and to draw attention to them.

Furthermore, it is desirable that lamps do not emit light, sound is output from speakers, and movable bodies operate, etc., in accordance with the dynamic display during still image presentation. The purpose of notifying the special lottery results is to only inform the enemy character and the main character after the static state is released, and to draw attention to them.

Further, dynamic display by the ally characters in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K) may also be performed before the start of the still image presentation. This allows players to check the dynamic display of their ally characters before the still image performance starts, and provides special lottery results to players who have seen the still image performance during the battle performance in the past. It can remind you when to notify.

Although it is difficult to predict when the special lottery results will be announced, similar to the series of effects and schedule for the rocket performance (Figure 547), the special lottery results will be announced. The execution timing is determined as a specific timing. For example, the special lottery result is announced just before the ally character finishes putting a bandage in the first aid kit or just before the ally character finishes putting the bandage in gauze. If there is a possibility that a special lottery result will be announced just before the end of all the elements, the tension will continue and the players may become fatigued. be.

Note that, for example, like the dynamic display during the still image effect of the rocket effect described above, the dynamic display of the ally character during the still image effect may be an effect in which a series of effects are repeated one or more times. Specifically, for example, an ally character puts a bandage in a first aid kit, an ally character puts bandages in a first aid kit, an ally character puts tweezers in a first aid kit, and an ally character puts gauze in a first aid kit. A series of effects performed in the order of , may be repeatedly performed one or more times.

In addition, the title display in Figure 548(A) ("Victory the enemy character! Victory is a jackpot!") is prepared in multiple colors, for example, white, red, and rainbow colors, and white < red < rainbow color. Expectations may be made to increase in order. Furthermore, a plurality of types of title display may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation level is 1% for white where the still image effect is not performed, 5% for red where it is not performed, 100% for the rainbow that is not performed, 10% for white where the still image effect is performed, and 20% for red where the still image effect is performed. , the executed rainbow should be 100%. If the red color is the same when the still image effect is executed and when it is not executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation, and the red color when the still image effect is executed is higher. When white is compared with red when the still image effect is not executed, white when the still image effect is executed has a higher jackpot expectation. By doing so, even if white is displayed in the title display that is displayed before the still image effect is executed, the player's feeling of disappointment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, a series of performances by the ally character may start before the still image performance is performed (for example, the series of performances may be executed one or more times before the still image performance starts). , the still image effect may start during the first series of effects).

FIG. 550 is an example of a presentation when a still image presentation is not performed during a battle presentation. Following FIG. 548(G), the process moves to FIG. 550(H'). At (H'), the freeze of the image of the enemy character is released, and an image of the enemy character falling down while the main character is standing, and a display indicating that the main character has won are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, in (H'), an image of a teammate character putting a bandage in a first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 548 (H) is displayed.

In (I'), the effect display device 1600 continues to display an image of the enemy character falling while the protagonist is standing, and a display indicating that the protagonist has won. Also, in (I'), an image of a teammate character putting a bandage in a first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 548 (I) is displayed.

At (J'), the effect display device 1600 continues to display an image of the enemy character falling while the protagonist is standing and a display indicating that the protagonist has won. Also, in (J'), an image of a teammate character putting tweezers in a first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 549 (J) is displayed.

At (K'), the effect display device 1600 continues to display an image of the enemy character falling while the protagonist is standing, and a display indicating that the protagonist has won. Also, in (K'), an image of an ally character putting gauze in a first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 549 (K) is displayed. Subsequently, at (L'), a display similar to that of FIG. 549 (L) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, there are cases where the still image effect is executed during the battle effect and cases where the still image effect is not executed, so that it is possible to increase the timing that gives the player a sense of tension.

Although we have described examples in which still image effects are executed and cases in which still image effects are not performed before the notification of special lottery results during battle effects, as in the examples of FIGS. 548, 549, and 550, still image effects are The dynamic performance during the still image performance (the ally character putting something in the first aid kit) when the static image performance is performed, and the dynamic performance performed after the special lottery result is announced when the static image performance is not performed are the same. It is desirable that

Because these are common, for example, a player who has seen a dynamic performance that is executed after the notification of the special lottery result when the still image performance is not performed will be able to distinguish between the dynamic performance and the notification of the special lottery result. Since the user remembers the simultaneity of , when viewing the dynamic performance during the still image performance, the player can be more aware that the special lottery result will be announced soon. In addition, players who have seen a dynamic effect during a still image effect remember that the special lottery result will be announced after the dynamic effect starts, so players who have seen a dynamic effect during a still image effect may remember that the special lottery result will be announced after the dynamic effect starts. If a dynamic effect is executed after being notified that the lottery result is a loss, the real special lottery result may be announced after the dynamic effect (in other words, a revival effect may be performed). I can feel a sense of anticipation.

In addition, the selection rate of the performance is determined so that the expectation of jackpot when a still image performance is performed before the announcement of the special lottery results during the battle performance is higher than the expectation of jackpot when the still image performance is not performed. It is desirable that the Since the still image performance is a performance that gives the player a sense of tension, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which a jackpot is announced in exchange for the sense of tension. On the other hand, the selection rate of the effect is set so that the expectation of jackpot when a still image effect is performed before the announcement of the special lottery results during the battle effect is higher than the expectation level of jackpot when the still image effect is not performed. It may be specified. As a result, even when the still image performance is not performed and the player does not feel much tension, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which the player is notified of a jackpot and can feel a sense of elation all at once.

In addition, if the still image effect is not executed and the special lottery result is a loss, in FIG. is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and continues until FIG. 550 (K'). Note that even if the main character is defeated, a dynamic display of an ally character putting things into a first-aid kit similar to those shown in FIGS. 550 (H') to (K') is executed.

In addition, if the still image effect is executed and the special lottery result is a loss, in FIG. An image of the main character falling while the character is still standing and a display indicating that the main character has been defeated are displayed on the effect display device 1600. After this, the image of the protagonist falling down while the enemy character remains standing is displayed, and the dynamic display of the ally character putting things into the first aid kit continues to be executed.

The dynamic display that is continuously executed is, for example, a series of effects shown in FIGS. 548(H) to 549(K), or a series of effects that are repeatedly executed. In this case, for example, the size of the dynamic display of the ally character is not changed until the series of performances has been completed at least once, and the size of the dynamic display of the ally character is changed at a predetermined timing beyond the one time. Make it bigger. Thereafter, the series of effects is ended, and, for example, an image of an ally character taking care of the main character is displayed, and a decorative pattern of an incorrect combination is displayed.

In addition, when a still image effect is performed during a battle effect, even though the special lottery result is a jackpot, in FIG. A display indicating that the player has been defeated may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In other words, an effect may be performed that makes the player think that the special lottery result is a failure.

In this case, similar to the above-mentioned effect in which the special lottery result is a loss, following FIG. will continue to be displayed, and the effects performed by the ally characters will also continue. For example, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the hero fell down, a revival effect is performed to notify that the special lottery result is a jackpot. In the revival performance, for example, an image of an ally character caring for the main character is displayed, and the main character makes a fist pump while lying down.

Note that the resurrection effect may be performed, for example, at a predetermined timing when the size of the ally character that is a dynamic display has not changed yet, or may be performed at a predetermined timing after the size of the ally character has increased. It's okay. Alternatively, one of these two types of timing may be selected according to a predetermined selection rate, and the revival effect may be set to be executed at the selected timing. In this case, it is desirable that the selection rates of the two types of timing are different. If the revival effect is executed at a timing when the selection rate is low, it can surprise the player and instantly improve the player's sense of elation. Note that although the description has been made using two types of timing, there may be two or more types of timing.

Note that the series of performances performed in the battle performance may end in the middle of the series of performances. Specifically, for example, the above-mentioned production in which the ally character puts a bandage in the first aid kit (Element 1), the production in which the ally character puts bandages in the first aid kit (Element 2), and the production in which the ally character puts tweezers in the first aid kit (Element 2). In a series of performances performed in the order of Element 3), and the production in which an ally character puts gauze in the first aid kit (Element 4), Element 1 and Element 1 are executed in the Nth (N is a natural number) repetition of the series of productions. The series of effects may end immediately after execution of element 2 or element 3.

551 and 552 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of battle production. Differences between FIG. 549 and FIG. 550 will be explained. In FIGS. 551 and 552, a timer effect is added. Regarding the contents of presentations other than the timer presentation, FIGS. 551(A) to 551(F) are the same as FIGS. 549(A) to 549(F), respectively, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In (A), for example, a timer is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the start of the battle effect, that is, the start of the title display, and the timer value starts decreasing. A timer is a dynamic display where the timer value decreases over time. The initial value of the timer in (A) is 30 seconds. Although the timer is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device 1600, it may be displayed at another position as long as the player can recognize the content of the battle effect.

In (A) to (E), the timer value decreases as time passes. In (E), the timer value becomes 0 seconds. In (F), a message "Maybe..." is displayed in the area where the timer value was displayed.

Still image production starts from (G). In (G), in the area where the timer value was displayed, a message ``Hot or Super Hot?'' indicating the expected level of jackpot in the special lottery result is displayed. In (H), in the area where the timer value was displayed, the message "Very Hot!" is displayed, indicating that there is a very high expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. The displays in the area where the timer was displayed in (F) to (H) are all expectation level suggestive displays that suggest the level of expectation of a jackpot as a result of the special lottery. Note that the expectation level suggestion display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the area where the timer was displayed.

Further, from (F) to (H), the expectation level suggestion display changes across the start of the still image performance. The expectation level suggestion display maintains a dynamic display before and after the start of the still image performance. Note that the display area and display content of the expectation level suggestion display may be different as long as the player can recognize that it is a performance within a timer performance.

The lighting mode of the various lamps when the expectation level suggestion display is performed may be the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation level suggestion display, and the light emission mode from the start of the expectation level suggestion display until the start of the still image production is based on the expectation level. After the still image effect starts, the light emission may be performed in a light emission mode corresponding to the suggestive display effect, and may correspond to the still image effect.

In the example of FIG. 551, the expectation level suggestion display changes across the start of the still image performance, but the timer value may decrease across the start of the still image performance. That is, the timing at which the timer value starts decreasing may be before the start of the still image effect, and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds may be after the start of the still image effect. In this case, the timer display maintains a dynamic display before and after the start of the still image effect.

Note that when the timer display is performed across the start of the still image presentation, the lighting mode of the various lamps may be the lighting mode that corresponds to the timer display, or the lighting mode from the timer display starts until the still image presentation starts. After the still image effect starts, the light emission mode may correspond to the timer display effect, and after the still image effect starts, the light emission may correspond to the still image effect.

Subsequently, in (I), the expectation level suggestion display that remained dynamically displayed over the start of the still image effect is erased, and the timer effect has ended. That is, the display is the same as when the timer effect is not executed. In other words, the timer effect ends during the still image effect before the special lottery result is announced. What is more important to the players is the notification of the special lottery result after the still image presentation, rather than the display that suggests the degree of expectation, so it is possible to end the timer presentation before the notification and allow the players to concentrate on the still image presentation. desirable.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display, which is a dynamic display, is executed over the start of the still image performance, but the still image performance is longer than the time from the start of the expectation level suggestion display to the start of the still image performance. It is desirable that the time from the start to the end of the expectation level suggestion display is short. When the still image performance ends, the special lottery result will be announced, but if the expectation level suggestion display continues as a dynamic display for a long time even after the static image performance starts, the player's attention will be drawn to the expectation level suggestion display. This is because there is a risk that the tension created by the still image performance will be excessively reduced.

552(J) to 552(M) are the same as FIGS. 548(I) to 549(L), respectively, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the sound output from various speakers in response to the expectation level suggestion display is one shot (that is, the sound is output only once without being repeated), and after the output of this one shot is finished (the player After the sound of this one shot is no longer audible), the still image effect ends and a dynamic display starts to show the special lottery results.

Note that the timer effect may end before the start of the still image effect, for example, before the start of the still image effect, that is, while dynamic display is being performed. Specifically, for example, the timer value becomes 0 seconds before FIG. 551(H), the expectation level suggestion display is displayed from FIG. 551(H) to FIG. Image rendering may be started.

However, if the timer effect ends before the start of the still image effect, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than if the timer effect is not executed, but if the timer effect is executed over the start of the still image effect. It is desirable that the selection rate of the performance is set lower than the expected level of jackpot when the game is played. This is because when the timer performance and the still image performance are executed at the same time, a synergistic sense of anticipation due to the two performances is given to the player, rather than when they are not executed at the same time. Further, the performance in which the timer performance is executed over the start of the still image performance may be selected only when the special lottery result is a jackpot (that is, a performance that confirms the jackpot).

As mentioned above, by making the timer appear and displaying the expectation level suggestion display after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the player can expect the expectation level suggestion display to appear from the time the timer appears. .

Note that the timer effect may appear in SP reach, movie reach, etc. other than the battle effect. Further, in the same type of variation pattern, it is desirable that the selection rate of the timer effect is determined so that the expected level of jackpot when the timer effect appears is higher than the expected level of jackpot when the timer effect does not appear. Further, it is desirable that there is no variation pattern in which a timer effect always appears.

Although the timer effect in which the timer value decreases is explained here, the timer is not displayed in FIGS. 551(A) to 551(E), and the dynamic effect in FIGS. Only the expectation level suggestion display may be displayed. If the expectation level suggestion display is a still image in such a case, the expectation level suggestion display does not necessarily appear in the battle performance, so the player does not expect the expectation level suggestion display to appear. There is a risk that the display indicating the level of expectation may not be noticed. Therefore, as described above, the expectation level suggestion display is dynamically displayed before and after the start of the still image performance.

In addition to the above-mentioned timings, the timer display start timing is, for example, at the start of fluctuation, during all decorative symbol fluctuations, when the left decorative symbol stops, when the right decorative symbol stops, after reach is established and before the start of SP reach, or It may be a predetermined timing after the SP reach start and before the special lottery result notification.

Further, the timer value may start decreasing at the same time the timer is displayed, or the timer value may start decreasing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the timer was displayed. If the timer value starts to decrease after a predetermined period of time has passed after the timer is displayed, the timer value will not be displayed at the timing when the timer is displayed, but will be displayed at the timing when the timer value starts decreasing. It's okay.

In addition to the above-mentioned timings, the timer value becomes 0 seconds, for example, when all decorative symbols are changing, when the left decorative symbol stops, when the right decorative symbol stops, after reach is established and before SP reach starts, after SP reach starts. Also, it may be at a predetermined timing before the special lottery result is announced, or at a timing when the special lottery result is announced. Note that, for example, the timing at which the timer value starts decreasing and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds are selected, and the initial value of the timer is determined based on the selected timings.

Note that a plurality of timers may be displayed simultaneously in the timer presentation. In this case, the display start timing, the timer value decrease start timing, and the timer value reaching 0 seconds may be different for each of the plurality of timers. Further, in this case, the effects executed after the timer values of the plurality of timers reach 0 seconds may be different. In this case, before executing the timer effect, a display suggesting that a plurality of timers are displayed simultaneously, a display indicating the number of timers to be displayed simultaneously, etc. may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Also, in one change, multiple timer effects are performed in order (that is, a new timer is displayed after the timer value of one timer becomes 0 seconds and the timer becomes hidden). It's okay. In this case, the effects executed after the timer value of each of the plurality of timers reaches 0 seconds may be different. In addition, when the timer effect is executed multiple times, a display indicating that the timer effect will be executed after this, a display indicating the number of times the timer effect will be executed after this, etc., etc. during and before the execution of the timer effect, etc. may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Note that the selection rate of the performance is set so that the expected degree of jackpot when a plurality of timers are displayed sequentially or simultaneously is higher than the expected degree of jackpot when only one timer is displayed. In addition, when multiple timers are displayed sequentially or simultaneously, for example, the expectation level suggestion display, which is a dynamic display that is shown after the last timer value of the multiple timers reaches 0 seconds, may be displayed as a static image. straddles the start of. Thereby, the player can be made to understand that the still image performance is a performance directly connected to the notification of the special lottery result, and the still image performance can attract attention.

Furthermore, when a plurality of timers are displayed simultaneously or in sequence, still image rendering may be performed a plurality of times. In this case, for example, an expectation level suggestion display, which is a dynamic display that is displayed after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, is executed over each of the starts of the plurality of still image effects. Thereby, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to each of the plurality of still image performances.

Note that the timer effect may be executed as a prefetch effect. In this case, for example, the display and decrease of the timer value starts from a change before the change to be read ahead, and the timer value becomes 0 seconds at the change to be read ahead. Although the description has been made using a timer effect in FIG. 551, other dynamic display effects may be executed instead of the timer display, which is a dynamic display.

[20-3. Reel production]
553 and 554 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of reel effects. The reel effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

In (A), a reel performance, which is an example of an SP reach performance, starts. At the start of the reel performance, a title image (for example, “Make the same numbers line up in a straight line on the reels!”) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. When the reel performance starts, images of the reels of the slot are displayed on the performance display device 1600, and images in which numbers in the reach state are stopped are displayed in the middle row of the left reel and the middle row of the right reel. The numbers displayed in the middle row of the left reel and the middle row of the right reel remain stationary until the reel performance ends. Furthermore, in the reel image in (A), the middle reel is further displayed in a fluctuating state.

In (B), the fluctuation speed of the middle reel gradually slows down, and the same number as the number in the reach state appears in the upper row of the middle reel. In (C), the number stops between the top row of the middle reel and the middle row of the middle reel, and after 10 seconds the number stops at either the top row of the middle reel or the middle row of the middle reel. Stop anywhere!” is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

This display "It will stop somewhere in 10 seconds!" is an effect that suggests the execution of a countdown effect, which will be described later, and is displayed in the same area as the area where the countdown effect, which will be described later, is displayed. In addition, in order to clearly recognize that the countdown effect described later is being executed, a display saying ``We will stop somewhere in 10 seconds!'' may be displayed in a larger area than the area in which the countdown effect is displayed. In this case, the area where the countdown effect is displayed may partially or completely overlap.

From (C) to FIG. 554 (N), which will be described later, the numbers on the reels are stationary, that is, a still image effect is being executed. Further, from (D) to (N) in FIG. 554, a countdown display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), a countdown display ("10") indicating 10 seconds remaining is displayed. Further, in (D), two supporting characters are displayed at the left end and right end of the effect display device 1600, and the supporting effect is executed from (D) to FIG. 554(N). The cheering effect and countdown display effect are dynamic display effects during the still image effect. In (D), the two supporting characters are holding fans facing downward.

In (E), a countdown display ("9") indicating 9 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding folding fans on the right side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (F), a countdown display ("8") indicating 8 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding fans on their left side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (G), a countdown display ("7") indicating 7 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding fans on their right side with one leg kicked out are displayed.

In (H), a countdown display ("6") indicating 6 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding folding fans facing downward, similar to those in (D), are displayed. In (I), a countdown display ("5") indicating 5 seconds remaining is displayed, as well as two cheering characters holding fans on their right side with both feet on the ground, similar to (E). . In Figure 554 (J), there is a countdown display ("4") indicating 4 seconds remaining, and two cheering characters holding fans on their left side with both feet on the ground, similar to Figure 553 (F). Displayed.

In (K), a countdown display ("3") indicating 3 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding a folding fan on the right side with one leg kicked out similar to that in Figure 553 (G) are displayed. ing. In (L), a countdown display ("2") indicating 2 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding fans on their right side with both feet on the ground similar to Figure 553 (D) are displayed. ing. In (M), a countdown display ("1") indicating one second remaining, two cheering characters holding folding fans facing downward, and two cheering characters similar to those in FIG. 553(E) are displayed. There is.

In (N), a countdown display ("0") indicating 0 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding fans on their left side with both feet on the ground similar to Figure 553 (F) are displayed. ing. In other words, between FIG. 553 (D) and FIG. 554 (N) during the still image performance, as a dynamic display, a countdown display that counts down for 10 seconds, and a series of performances by two supporting characters are repeated. is being executed. The countdown display is not a series of effects that are repeatedly executed, that is, it is an aperiodic effect.

Note that the series of effects as the dynamic display (the cheering effects for the supporting characters) is as described above in the examples of FIGS. One of the performances is to hold a fan on the left and right side with both feet on the ground, hold a fan on the left and right side with both feet on the ground, and hold a fan on the right side with one leg kicked out.

The countdown display, which is an aperiodic performance, and the display of a support performance by a support character, which is a periodic performance, may be displayed close to each other or overlapping each other. If they are displayed far away from each other, there is a risk that one of the effects may be missed. In this way, by making both the countdown display and the cheering performance display easy to see at the same time, players who want to gradually raise their mood by paying attention to the countdown display and timing the notification of special lottery results, and the cheering performance can It is possible to meet the needs of both the player and the player who wants to keep his/her mood high during the reel performance.

Further, the visibility of one of the countdown display and the cheering effect display may be made higher than the visibility of the other. Specifically, for example, an effect may be applied only to one of the objects, an effect larger than the other may be applied to the one, or the display size of the one may be made larger than the display size of the other. By increasing the visibility of the countdown display more than the visibility of the cheering performance, it becomes easier to gradually raise your mood as the countdown progresses. It becomes easier to increase.

After the countdown display (N) reaches 0, the stillness in the still image effect is canceled. In other words, the decoration image of the middle reel displayed on the effect display device 1600 starts slowly again. At (O), the numbers on the middle reel move from the upper row to the middle row, and the same numbers stop in a straight line, and it is announced that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Note that, for example, if a specific condition is satisfied during the still image performance, the stillness of the still image performance may be forcibly canceled, that is, the intermediate performance may be skipped and the transition to (N) may be made. . At a predetermined timing after the start of the still image presentation (for example, during a period from 7 seconds to 3 seconds remaining in the countdown display), a plurality of game balls B are fired by operating the handle 182 into a predetermined starting port. Examples of the specific conditions include a case where a prize is won or a case where a plurality of game balls B pass through the gate section 2003 that starts normal symbol fluctuation.

It should be noted that among the dynamic effects during the still image effects (the support effects for the support characters), a plurality of display modes may exist in the series of effects described above. Specifically, for example, there are multiple colors of clothing for the support character (for example, if red is selected, the expectation of a jackpot is set to be higher than if white is selected). . Furthermore, a series of productions consists of a plurality of display modes (display modes of each support character in FIGS. 553(D) to (G)), but a series of productions with multiple types of display modes that make up the series of productions are different from each other. May exist. On the other hand, among the dynamic effects during the still image effects, it is desirable that the display mode be single for aperiodic effects (countdown display in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554). In other words, even if the form of a series of performances changes, it is desirable that the form of the aperiodic performance does not change. In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 553 and 554, the timing of notification of the special lottery result is notified in an aperiodic manner, so the player cannot accurately time the notification because the aperiodic presentation does not change. can.

Note that a suggestive effect that suggests that a series of effects that can be repeatedly performed during the still image effect will be displayed may be executed before the start of the still image effect. The suggestive effect may be executed even when a series of effects that may be repeatedly executed during the still image effect is not executed (that is, a so-called false effect may exist).

It is desirable that the suggestive performance is a performance that allows the player to guess that a series of performances that can be repeatedly executed will be displayed. Specifically, for example, at the timing of FIG. 553(B), although not shown, an effect is executed in which cheering characters are displayed with noise applied to the right and left corners of the effect display device 1600, An example of the suggestive performance is a performance in which effects are concentrated on a character. Thereby, the player can guess the appearance of the support character, and in turn, can feel a sense of anticipation. Note that it is desirable that the above-mentioned aperiodic performance is not performed while the suggestive performance is being performed. This is to prevent the player's attention to the aperiodic performance from being reduced by the suggestive performance in a situation where it is not certain that a series of performances that can be repeatedly executed during the still image performance will be displayed.

Note that it is desirable to change the light emission mode of a predetermined lamp or to output a predetermined sound from a speaker in accordance with the countdown display. The special lottery result is the most important concern for players, and since the special lottery result is announced after the countdown display ends, the players' sense of anticipation is increased by emitting light and sound in time with the countdown display. improves. However, in order to prevent the player from feeling too nervous, it is desirable that the light emission mode of the predetermined lamp and the mode of the predetermined sound be as shown below.

For example, the light emission mode of the predetermined lamp is such that it is turned off or remains lit (that is, it does not blink). Further, for example, only some lamps in the door frame or the game board repeat a predetermined lighting pattern, and other lamps remain off or remain lit. Furthermore, in order to prevent the player from feeling too nervous, it is desirable that the predetermined sound be SE (Sound Effect) rather than BGM (Background Music), for example.

Further, during the countdown display, for example, a concealed image may be placed over the front side of the countdown display as viewed from the player, so that part or all of the countdown display may be made invisible (or difficult to see). However, it is desirable not to make the countdown display invisible during the latter half of the still image performance. The countdown display effect can arouse a strong sense of expectation in the player, especially in the second half, and this is to prevent such a sense of expectation from diminishing.

[20-4. Bee extermination performance]
555 and 556 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a bee extermination effect. The bee extermination performance is an example of an SP reach performance in which a still image performance may be executed.

When the bee extermination performance, which is an example of the SP reach performance, starts, a display indicating that the bee extermination performance has started is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in FIG. 555(A). In (B), a display for introducing a bee extermination practice performance is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In (C), a display indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot when the queen bee is exterminated and that the central press operation section 303a should be pressed in order to exterminate the queen bee, and the central press operation section 303a The image is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (D), a display indicating that the special lottery result is not a jackpot even if the soldier bee is exterminated is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E), a display indicating the start of bee extermination practice is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), a practice performance for exterminating bees has begun. In (F), a sleeping queen bee (the large bee located in the center of the effect display device 1600), a plurality of soldier bees, an aim for exterminating the bees, and an operation instruction for the central press operation section 303a ("timing") are shown. Aim and press!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The practice performance is a dynamic performance in which a plurality of soldier bees each move as a dynamic display. Also, the aim is moving. In addition, the sleeping queen bee, for example, moves slowly up and down (displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 in (F)), but the sleeping queen bee has a nose lantern out. The chisel may be moving in a swaying manner.

In (G), the dynamic effect continues, with the queen bee shaking and moving to the top of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of moving soldier bees, a moving aim, and operation instructions for the central press operation unit 303a. are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (H), the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed and an indication that the insecticide is sprayed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In the bee extermination performance, when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bees and the central press operation section 303a is pressed, an image of the queen bee exterminated is displayed. In (J), the queen bee cannot be exterminated because the central press operation section 303a is pressed at a timing when the moving aim is on the soldier bee. Therefore, in (I), a display indicating that the queen bee could not be exterminated ("Wow...that saved me") is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, in the practice production, if the central press operation section 303a is pressed when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, for example, the display in (I) will indicate that the queen bee has been exterminated. The display shown in FIG. 556 (J), which will be described later, is replaced with a display such as "Keep up the momentum and do your best in the actual performance!". In other words, even if a display indicating that the queen bee has been exterminated in the practice performance (display indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot) is performed, the steps in FIGS. 556 (J) to (N) described later are executed.

Note that in the practice performance, settings may be made so that the queen bee cannot always be exterminated. Therefore, for example, if the aim is moved to a position other than the queen bee or only on the soldier bee, or if the aim is moved to a position where the queen bee can be exterminated, but the center press operation part 303a is pressed at that position, the queen bee An effect such as displaying an image of a failed extermination is performed.

Furthermore, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the practice performance may be set so that the queen bee can be definitely exterminated. To do this, for example, the aim can be moved only to a position that is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or the spray area of the insecticide can be increased so that the spray target includes the queen bee, even though it is possible to move only to a position other than the said position. , etc. are performed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 556(J), a display for introducing the actual bee extermination performance is displayed on the performance display device 1600. This display indicates that the actual performance will start with the soldier bees exterminated in advance. In (M), a stationary queen bee, a plurality of stationary soldier bees, a moving aim, and an operation instruction for the central press operation section 303a (``Press at the right time!'') are displayed. ing. Furthermore, the plurality of soldier bees that are stationary in (K) are not located on the queen bee.

In (L), at the timing when the aim is on the queen bee but not on the soldier bee, the central press operation part 303a is operated, and an indication that the insecticide is being sprayed on the queen bee is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (M), an image indicating that the queen bee has been successfully exterminated, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot is displayed. In (M), the queen bee, which had been statically displayed until just before, is no longer static. At (N), a display indicating that the special lottery result was a jackpot ("Jackpot! Congratulations!!") is displayed.

In addition, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, so that the queen bee can be exterminated in the actual production, for example, the aim will only move to a position that is above the queen bee and not above the soldier bee, or only move to a position other than that point. Although it is possible, it is desirable to carry out effects such as enlarging the spray area of the insecticide so that the queen bee is included in the spray destination. By forcibly exterminating the queen bee in this way, it is possible to eliminate mistakes in the operation of the central press operation section 303a by the player when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, in order to prevent the queen bee from being exterminated during the actual production, for example, the aim may be moved to a position that is not on the queen bee or only on the soldier bee, or the queen bee can be exterminated. Even though the aim can be moved to a certain position, even if the central pressing operation section 303a is pressed at that position, an effect such as displaying an image showing that the queen bee has failed to be exterminated is performed.

Note that in the example described above, only the central press operation section 303a was used for the bee extermination effect, but a plurality of operation sections may be used. Specifically, for example, the aim may be moved using the rotation operation unit 302. Further, for example, in a practice performance, the insecticide is injected by pressing the central pressing operation section 303a, and in a real performance, the insecticide is injected by pressing the outer pressing operation section 303b. Good too.

As mentioned above, in the actual performance of the bee extermination performance, during the still image performance (that is, when the still image of the queen bee and a plurality of soldier bees are being displayed), the pressing instruction for the central pressing operation section 303a is displayed. , when the central press operation section 303a is pressed, the special lottery result will be announced. In other words, since the operation of the central press operation section 303a during the actual presentation is important, the player's sense of tension is excessively high. Therefore, the player is likely to make a mistake in operating the central press operation section 303a.

In order to suppress the player's excessive nervousness and reduce the occurrence of operational errors, a practice performance is performed before the actual performance. As mentioned above, in the practice performance, the soldier bees move and get in the way, making it difficult to exterminate the queen bee, but in the actual performance, the soldier bees have been exterminated in advance, so the difficulty level of exterminating the queen bee is made low. As a result, the player can operate the central press operation section 303a with ease during the actual performance without feeling as much pressure as in the practice performance, reducing operational errors and improving the player's sense of satisfaction.

Note that the actual production time (the aim is moving and the center press operation unit 303a is enabled) is longer than the practice production time (the time the aim is moving and the center press operation unit 303a is enabled). It is desirable that the time required for This reduces the number of operational mistakes made by the player during the actual presentation, and also encourages the player to actively operate the central press operation section 303a during the actual presentation.

Further, in the actual production, multiple presses of the central press operation section 303a may be accepted. In this case, in the actual performance, for example, each time the central press operation section 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, insecticide is sprayed, and a performance that allows the queen bee to be easily exterminated is executed. Therefore, when a real performance that accepts multiple presses of the central press operation unit 303a appears, rather than when a real performance that accepts only one press appears, the effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot in the special lottery result is higher. It is desirable that the selection rate for Thereby, the player's motivation to operate the central press operation section 303a can be increased.

Similarly, in the practice performance, multiple presses of the central press operation section 303a may be accepted. In this case, in the practice performance, for example, an insecticide is injected each time the central press operation section 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, and a performance that allows the queen bee to be easily exterminated is executed. Therefore, when a practice effect that accepts multiple presses of the central press operation unit 303a appears, rather than when a practice effect that accepts only one press appears, the effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot in the special lottery result is higher. It is desirable that the selection rate for Thereby, the player's motivation to operate the central press operation section 303a can be increased.

Further, the success rate of exterminating the queen bee in the actual performance may be set to differ depending on the result of the practice performance (successful extermination or failure in exterminating the queen bee). For example, the line "It seems difficult as expected" displayed in FIG. 556(J) (the display that appears based on the pressing of the central press operation part 303a) is displayed when the expectation level of jackpot is low, If the expectation of a jackpot is high, it is desirable to replace the line with a line such as ``I failed, but I was close.'' Thereby, when the expectation of a jackpot is high, the player's motivation to operate the central press operation section 303a during the actual performance can be increased. Further, for example, a practice performance that always succeeds in exterminating the queen bee may be set to be selected only when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Further, as described above, in the practice performance, the player may always fail to exterminate the queen bee. In other words, the display in FIG. 556(J) may be made to appear only when the central press operation section 303a is pressed.

Furthermore, although the aim is displayed dynamically in both the practice performance and the actual performance, it is desirable that the movement of the aim be a regular movement (for example, a display that is repeatedly performed, such as moving in a figure 8 pattern). This makes it easier for the player to press the central pressing operation section 303a at a time when the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee. Further, the sight used for the practice performance and the actual performance may be selected from a plurality of types of sights, and it is desirable that the expectation level of the jackpot is set to be different depending on the selected plurality of types of sights. For example, the selection rate of these targets is determined so that if the size of the target is small, the expectation of a jackpot is low, if the size of the target is large, the expectation of a jackpot is high, and if the size of the target is extra large, the expectation of a jackpot is extremely high. It is being In addition, the selection rate of these sights is set so that, for example, when the sight is blue, the expectation of jackpot is low, when the sight is green, the expectation of jackpot is high, and when the sight is red, the expectation of jackpot is extremely high. It is determined.

Further, the number of selectable sights may be different between the practice performance and the actual performance. For example, the number of sights that can be selected in the actual performance may be greater than, less than, or the same as the number of sights that can be selected in the practice performance.

If the number of sights that can be selected in the actual performance is greater than the number of sights that can be selected in the practice performance, for example, in the practice performance, two types of sights can be selected, a small sight and a large sight, and in the real performance, a small sight and a large sight can be selected. Three types can be selected: a large sight and an extra large sight. At this time, since an extra-large target with extremely high expectations for a jackpot is selected only for the actual performance, the player can instantly increase his or her expectations for the actual performance.

Additionally, if the number of sights that can be selected in the actual performance is greater than the number of sights that can be selected in the practice performance, for example, in the practice performance, three types can be selected: a small sight, a large sight, and an extra large sight, In the actual performance, two types of sights can be selected: a large sight and an extra-large sight. At this time, since there is a possibility that an extra-large aim may be selected even in the practice performance, it is possible to increase the player's expectations at the time of the practice performance. Furthermore, since the small target with the lowest expectation of jackpot is not selected during the actual performance, the player's expectations can be increased even during the actual performance.

In addition, if the number of selectable sights in the actual performance is the same as the number of selectable sights in the practice performance, for example, in the practice performance, three types can be selected: a small sight, a large sight, and an extra large sight, Even in the actual performance, three types can be selected: a small aim, a large aim, and an extra-large aim. At this time, since the same level of expectation as the actual performance is shown in the practice performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the practice performance and the actual performance.

Note that the sights selected in the practice performance and the actual performance may be selected according to the selection rate set for each, or according to the selection rate set as a combination of the sights selected in the practice performance and the actual performance. May be selected. However, in any case, it is desirable that a target with a lower jackpot expectation than the target selected in the practice performance is less likely to be selected or not selected in the actual performance. As a result, it appears to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the actual performance than in the practice performance, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained or improved.

Specifically, when the targets to be selected in the practice performance and the actual performance are selected separately, the selection rate of the target with a low jackpot expectation in the actual performance is lower than the selection rate of the target in the practice performance. It is set. Further, for example, a target with a higher jackpot expectation than the target selected in the practice performance may be forcibly selected in the actual performance.

In addition, when the sights selected in the practice performance and the actual performance are selected as a combination, the selection rate of the combination in which the sight in the actual performance has a lower jackpot expectation than the aim in the practice performance is the selection rate of other combinations. is set lower. Furthermore, the combinations in which the aim in the actual performance has a lower jackpot expectation than the aim in the practice performance may not be included in the selection target.

In addition, in the actual presentation, it is desirable that no sound is output from the various speakers in order to allow the player to concentrate on operating the central press operation section 303a. If a sound is to be output, it is desirable that only the sound corresponding to the dynamic display, such as the sound of a moving sight, be output. In the practice performance, BGM or the like may be output from a speaker. In addition, in the actual performance, in order to make the players concentrate on operating the central press operation part 303a, various lamps installed in the door frame 3, game board 5, etc. are not blinked (i.e., they are turned off or kept lit). This is desirable.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be equipped with a movable body (not shown) that resembles a tool used to exterminate bees (for example, an insecticide can, an insect net, etc.). The movable body is movable on the front side of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. At this time, the movable body is used instead of a sight in the bee extermination performance. For example, in a practice performance and a real performance, when the central pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the movable body moves to the front side of the queen bee on the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

At this time, it is desirable that the movement mode of the movable body differs between when the queen bee is successfully exterminated in the practice performance and when the queen bee is successfully exterminated during the actual performance. For example, in a practice performance, if the queen bee is successfully exterminated, it is desirable not to move the movable body significantly (the performance display device 1600 displays a dynamic display in which the queen bee moves around the initial position of the movable body in front view). ). This is because if the movable body moves significantly, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the actual production, if the queen bee is successfully exterminated, the movable body may move significantly.

557 and 558 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the bee extermination effect. Differences from FIGS. 555 and 556 will be explained. Although FIGS. 555 and 556 show examples in which a less difficult actual performance is performed after a highly difficult practice performance, in the examples shown in FIGS. 557 and 558, the difficult A low practice performance can be performed. Furthermore, although it is possible to perform a practice performance multiple times, the difficulty level of the actual performance is high.

In this way, by performing a plurality of practice performances with a low difficulty level, the player can become accustomed to operating the central press operation section 303a and relieve tension. In addition, the player who has become accustomed to operating the central press operation section 303a through a plurality of practice performances and feels less nervous can enjoy the actual performance by feeling the strategy elements in the highly difficult actual performance.

Following FIG. 555(C), the process transitions to FIG. 557(D'). In (D'), the special lottery result is not a jackpot even if the soldier bee is exterminated, the practice performance starts with the soldier bee already exterminated, and there are two practice performances. A display shown is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At (E'), a display indicating the start of the first practice performance is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In (F'), similarly to Fig. 556(K), a queen bee is displayed as a static display, a plurality of soldier bees are displayed as a static display, and a moving aim is displayed as a dynamic display. and an operation instruction for the central press operation section 303a (``Press at the right time!'') are displayed. Further, the plurality of soldier bees that are stationary at (F') are not located on the queen bee.

In (G'), the central press operation section 303a is pressed at a timing when the aim is not on the queen bee, and an indication that insecticide is sprayed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in (H'), similar to FIG. 555(I), a display indicating that the queen bee could not be exterminated is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

At (I'), a display indicating the start of the second practice performance is displayed on the performance display device 1600. (J'), (K'), and (L') are the same as (F'), (G'), and (H'), respectively.

In FIG. 558 (M'), a display indicating that the actual performance has started and that the soldier bee and queen bee are moving in the actual performance is displayed on the performance display device 1600. (N'), a queen bee that is a moving static display, a plurality of soldier bees that are each moving dynamic displays, an aim that is a dynamic display for exterminating bees, and a central press operation section 303a. are displayed on the effect display device 1600. (O') is similar to (N').

At (P'), at a timing when the aim is on the queen bee but not on the soldier bee, the central press operation section 303a is operated, and a display indicating that the insecticide is being sprayed on the queen bee is displayed on the production display device 1600. . At (Q'), an image indicating that the queen bee has been successfully exterminated, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, is displayed, and the soldier bee continues to move. Note that when the queen bee is successfully exterminated, the display may indicate that not only the queen bee but also the soldier bees were exterminated. (R') is similar to FIG. 556(N).

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 557 and 558, the practice performance can be performed a plurality of times (up to two times) in the bee extermination performance. Furthermore, in the actual performance, the queen bee and the soldier bee are moving, but in the practice performance, the queen bee and the soldier bee are stationary.

In addition, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, there may be a surprise performance pattern in which the queen bee is exterminated in a practice performance and the special lottery result is directly notified (that is, the actual performance is not performed). Even in this case, there is a possibility that after a judge performance (practice performance) of the special lottery result using a still image performance, a judge performance (actual performance) of the special lottery result using a dynamic performance other than a still image performance will be performed. However, after the jackpot judge performance (actual performance) of the special lottery result using a dynamic performance that is not a still image performance, the judge performance (practice performance) of the special lottery result using a still image performance is not performed.

However, even if a surprise performance pattern exists, it is desirable that the selection rate of the surprise performance pattern is lower than the selection rate of other patterns (for example, 1/10 or less of the selection rate of other patterns). If the selection rate of the surprise performance pattern is low, the player's sense of elation can be instantly improved by winning with the surprise performance pattern, and conversely, if the selection rate of the surprise performance pattern where no actual performance is executed is high, This is because there is a risk that the player's expectations for the actual performance may decrease.

Note that at least one of the practice performances may be replaced with an operation explanation performance. The operation explanation performance is, for example, a performance that automatically executes performances (F') to (G') or (J') to (K') without any operation by the player. Specifically, for example, the operation explanation presentation does not display a prompt to operate the central press operation section 303a, and without enabling the operation of the central press operation section 303a, the insecticidal operation is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This differs from the practice performance in that it displays the effect of spraying the agent and displays the result of its retreat. Note that the surprise performance pattern described above may be applied to the operation explanation performance.

Note that, for example, in the practice performance and the actual performance described above, the queen bee may be displayed in an enlarged manner by zooming up the center portion of the performance display device 1600 while the queen bee is standing still. This makes it easier to zero in on the queen bee. Further, the zoom-up may also be performed for the above-mentioned model performance. Further, in the example of FIG. 558, the queen bee is moving in the actual production, but only the soldier bees may be moving and the queen bee may be stationary.

[20-5-1. Reach production where Daruma-san fell down]
FIGS. 559 and 560 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls. The reach effect in which Daruma-san falls is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In the following, still image effects include not only effects in which a dynamic display is performed along with the display of still images, but also effects in which only still images are displayed.

In the reach production where Daruma-san fell down, if the main character plays the demon of "Daruma-san fell down" and the main character wins against all other participants (hereinafter also referred to as non-oni), the fluctuation will be It's a jackpot. Note that if the main character turns around to face the non-demon and moves in that state after the main character shouts "Daruma-san has fallen," the main character has won against the non-demon. Furthermore, if the variation is a missed variation, a production in which the main character is touched by a non-demon occurs in a reach production in which Daruma-san falls.

FIG. 559(A) shows a state in which the reach effect in which Daruma-san falls has started after the reach mode of the decorative pattern has been shown. In (A), on the effect display device 1600, a dynamic display is performed in which the main character utters the line "Daruma-san ga", and during this time four non-demons gradually approach the main character. In (B), the main character utters the line "I fell!". Furthermore, in (B), when the main character finishes saying the line, he turns back to the non-demon and stops, and a still image effect is started in which the non-demon stops moving by the time the main character finishes saying the line.

In (C), the still image effect continues, and for example, the main character and the non-demon remain still as they were at the end of (B). In (D), the still image effect ends because two of the non-demons cannot stand still and move. The non-demon that moves in (D) will not appear in (E) and later, which will be described later. Note that even if the still images in the still image performances of (B) to (C) are canceled, the special lottery results corresponding to the fluctuations will not be announced. In other words, in (D), all the non-demons do not move, and none of the non-demons touch the main character.

Next, in (E), on the effect display device 1600, the main character utters the line "Da~ru~~ma~~", while the remaining two non-demons gradually approach the main character. Display is taking place. In (F), the main character utters the line ``Sa~m~ga~'', while a dynamic display is performed in which the remaining two non-demons gradually approach the main character.

In (G), similarly to (B), the main character utters the line "I fell!". Furthermore, in (G), as in (B), when the main character finishes saying the line, he turns back to the non-demon and stops, and by the time the main character finishes saying the line, the non-demon stops moving and stands still. Image production begins.

In addition, the stopping position of each non-demon in (G) is a position very close to the main character (specifically, the main character says "Daruma-san has fallen" after the stoppage is canceled). If a non-demon is touched by the main character within the period, the player will be able to recognize the position). Therefore, if you win against all the non-demons at the end of the still image performance starting from (G) (if all the non-demons move and the still image performance starting from (G) ends), the special lottery result will be It is a jackpot, and if the non-demon remains alive even after the still image performance starting from (G) ends, the special lottery result will be a loss. In other words, the still image effect starting from (G) can function as a judge effect indicating the special lottery result.

The still image rendering continues until FIG. 560 (J), which will be described later. In (H), the still image effect continues, and the main character's line ``Can you stand still for 5 more seconds?'' is displayed. In (I), a countdown display of 5 seconds declared by the main character's dialogue in (H) starts.

In FIG. 560(J), a display indicating that there are 4 seconds left in the countdown is displayed. In (K), a display indicating that there are 3 seconds left in the countdown is displayed, and the two non-demons cannot stand still and move, resulting in the end of the still image effect. In example (K), the remaining two non-demons are moving during the countdown, but if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the remaining two non-demons will move until the end of the countdown. The demon can move at any time.

Note that, for example, the timing at which the special lottery result is notified may be the same whether the special lottery result is a jackpot or not. Specifically, for example, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the non-demon can't stand still and moves when there are 0 seconds left on the countdown, and if the special lottery result is a loss, When there are 0 seconds left on the countdown, an effect occurs in which the main character is touched by a non-demon.

In (L), the main character utters the line ``All the non-demons have been found!'' indicating that he has won against all the non-demons, that is, the special lottery result was a jackpot. In (M), an image indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600, saying "Jackpot! Congratulations!!".

In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, for example, there is a non-demon who survives without moving even if the countdown starting from FIG. 559 (I) reaches 0 seconds, and after the countdown reaches 0 seconds ( The still image presentation may end at the same time as the time reaches 0 seconds, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the time reached 0 seconds. Then, while the main character again utters the line "Daruma-san has fallen!", the surviving non-demon touches the main character and announces that the special lottery result is a loss.

As described above, the countdown starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the still image presentation. In other words, even if the still image performance starts, the special lottery result is not shown at least until the countdown display starts, so the player does not become excessively nervous until the countdown display starts.

In addition, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the static state will be lifted and a dynamic display will start at some point until the countdown reaches 0 seconds, and if the special lottery result is a loss, the countdown will start. After the time reaches 0 seconds, the static state is released and dynamic display starts. In this way, the countdown display ends by the end of the still image effect, so it is a display that indicates the length of a part of the still image effect, and also indicates the end of the still image effect (Figs. 559 and 560). In this example, it is also a display indicating the timing for indicating the special lottery result. Therefore, after the countdown is displayed, the player's sense of tension and anticipation can be increased all at once.

In the reach effect where Daruma-san has fallen, the special lottery result is not shown at the end of the first still image effect, but is shown at the end of the second still image effect. Although it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the still image performance by showing the special lottery result at the same time as the static image is released, there are quite a few players whose sense of tension becomes too high. Therefore, by performing a series of performances that do not show the special lottery results at the end of the still image performance before a series of performances that show the special lottery results at the end of the still image performance, players can become accustomed to the still image performance. , it is possible to give the player an appropriate sense of tension without becoming excessive in the still image performance.

Hereinafter, the still image effect in which the special lottery result is not shown after the end of the still image effect is also referred to as a non-announcement still image effect, and the still image effect in which the special lottery result is shown after the end of the still image effect is also referred to as an informing still image effect.

Non-announcement still image presentations are prepared to get players used to still image presentations, and create a sense of expectation in players by spending a long time on notification still image presentations, which are important for players. be able to. On the other hand, the period of the notifying still image presentation may be shorter than the period of the non-notifying still image presentation. Since the non-announcement still image performance lasts for a long time, the player can get used to the still image performance in advance and does not become excessively nervous during the notification still image performance. The notification still image performance functions as a win/win notification performance that leads to notification of the winning or losing result of the special lottery, and the non-information still image performance functions as a mental preparation performance for mentally preparing.

In addition, there is a reaching effect in which Daruma-san has fallen (hereinafter also referred to as the reaching effect in which the first Daruma-san has fallen), in which the period of the alerting still image effect is longer than the period of the non-informing still image effect, and a non-indicating still image effect. There may also be both a ready-to-reach presentation in which the Daruma doll falls (hereinafter also referred to as a reach-to-reach presentation in which the second Daruma doll falls), in which the period of the notification still image presentation is shorter than the period of the presentation.

In this case, it is desirable that the expected level of jackpot when a reach effect in which the first Daruma doll falls down occurs is higher than the expected level of jackpot when a reach effect in which the second Daruma figure falls down occurs. By doing this, the longer the period of the notification still image presentation is than the period of the non-information still image presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot will be, and the longer the period of the notification still image presentation is, the more the player will feel special. Immediately before the lottery results are announced, the sense of excitement and anticipation can be instantly increased.

On the other hand, the expected level of jackpot when the ready-to-reach effect in which the first Daruma doll falls down occurs may be lower than the expected level of jackpot in the case where the ready-to-reach effect in which the second Daruma doll falls down occurs. By doing this, the expectation of a jackpot will be higher in cases where the period of the non-notification still image presentation is longer than the period of the notification still image presentation, and if the period of non-notification still image presentation is longer, the game Users can get a sense of anticipation from an early stage (before the start of the broadcast still image presentation).

In addition, in the still image production in the reach production in which Daruma-san falls down, a plurality of poses in which the non-demon stops may be prepared. For example, the poses of each non-demon are selected in the order of two-legged standing < one-legged standing < swan pose so that the probability that the non-demon moves when it is released from rest, that is, the expectation of a jackpot is increased. However, in the reach production where Daruma-san falls, it is desirable that the two-legged pose, which has the lowest jackpot expectation, appears at the highest rate. Since the pose with the lowest expectation of jackpot is likely to be selected, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling excessively nervous.

In particular, a performance in which a non-ogre stops in a swan pose (a performance with the highest jackpot expectation) may be executed only during jackpot fluctuations (that is, in this case, the appearance of the swan pose indicates a confirmed jackpot). As a result, especially when the player stands still in a pose with high expectations for a jackpot, the player can feel anxious for the stillness to be released in the still image performance.

In addition, the main control MPU selects the variation pattern in which the reach effect in which Daruma-san falls down is executed, but these stop poses of the non-demon during the reach effect in which Daruma-san falls down are performed by receiving commands from the main control MPU. It may be selected as a preview effect by the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU may suddenly select a pose with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, standing on one foot) in the non-announcement still image performance executed first, or select a pose with high expectation of a jackpot in the notification still image performance executed last. You may choose a pose with a high In the first non-announcement still image performance, if a pose with high expectations for a jackpot is suddenly selected, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation from an early stage, and the last non-announcement still image performance is If the player selects a pose with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, the player's sense of excitement and anticipation can instantly increase just before the special lottery result is announced.

In addition, in the reach effect where Daruma-san fell, for example, compared to the non-announcement still image effect that is executed first, the proportion of poses with a high expectation of jackpot (for example, standing on one leg) is selected compared to the proportion that is selected at the end. The proportion of poses with high expectations for a jackpot being selected in the notification still image performance is low. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player from the first non-announcement still image.

On the other hand, in the reach effect where Daruma-san fell, compared to the proportion of poses with a high expectation of jackpot (for example, standing on one leg) selected in the non-announcement still image effect executed first, the announcement still image effect executed last In the image presentation, the ratio of poses with high expectations for a jackpot being selected may be high. Thereby, the player can enjoy the performance up to the final notification still image performance without giving up on the appearance of a performance with high expectations for a jackpot.

In addition, in the reach effect where Daruma-san fell, the proportion of poses with a high expectation of jackpot (for example, standing on one leg) being selected in the first non-announcement still image effect was compared with the proportion of poses selected with a high probability of winning (for example, standing on one leg). In the image presentation, the ratio of poses with high jackpot expectations being selected may be the same. As a result, players can have a certain level of expectation for the non-announcement still image performance, and even if a pose with high expectations for a jackpot does not appear in the non-announcement still image performance, the player can still hold the final announcement still image performance. You can feel a certain sense of anticipation.

Note that in the reach effect in which Daruma-san falls down, still image effects may be performed three or more times. In this case, for example, by making only the end of the last still image effect the notification still image effect, the player's sense of tension can be further suppressed.

Furthermore, from the period of the dynamic display performance immediately before the non-announcement still image performance (the period in which the main character says ``Daruma-san ga~'' and ``I fell down!'' in Figures 559(A) and 559(B)), During the period of dynamic display performance immediately before the announcement static image performance (in Figures 559 (D) to (F), the main character says "Da~ru~ma~~" and "Sa~~n~ga~~") It is desirable that the period in which the As a result, the period of dynamic display immediately before the notification static image performance can be extended, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved during this period. On the other hand, the period of the dynamic display performance immediately before the non-information still image performance may be longer than the period of the dynamic display performance immediately before the notification still image performance. As a result, the period of the dynamic display immediately before the non-announcement still image performance can be extended, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated performance will be performed in the non-announcement still image performance. .

Further, for example, the period of the non-notification still image presentation is longer than the period of the dynamic display presentation immediately before the notification still image presentation. Thereby, the player can enjoy the notification still image performance while maintaining the sense of tension heightened by the non-information still image performance. On the other hand, the period of the non-notification still image presentation may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display presentation immediately before the notification still image presentation. As a result, it is possible to temporarily reduce the player's sense of tension that has been heightened by the non-announcement still image performance, so that the player does not feel excessive tension during the notification still image performance.

Further, for example, the period of the notification still image presentation is longer than the period of the dynamic display presentation immediately before the notification still image presentation. Thereby, the player can enjoy the notification still image performance while maintaining the sense of tension heightened by the non-information still image performance. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image presentation may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display presentation immediately before the notification still image presentation. As a result, the notifying still image performance is started after the player's sense of tension, which has been heightened by the non-notifying still image performance, is once lowered, and furthermore, the player's sense of tension does not become too high in the notifying still image performance.

Although the example shown in FIG. 559(A) starts after the reach mode of the decorative symbol is shown, the non-announcement still image effect is executed before the reach mode of the decorative symbol is shown. The reach mode may be shown after the completion of , and then the notification still image effect may be executed. By executing the non-announcement still image effect before the ready-to-reach mode is shown, the player may expect that the decorative symbols will stop in the ready-to-reach state after the still image is released in the non-announcement still image effect. I can do it.

In addition, there is the reach effect where Daruma-san falls down, in which the notification still image effect is executed after the non-information still image effect as described above, and the Daruma-san fall reach effect, in which only the alert still image effect is performed without the non-information still image effect. Both the falling reach effect and the falling reach effect may exist. In this case, the Daruma-san has fallen reach effect in which the non-informative still image effect is performed followed by the informing still image effect is better than the reach effect in which the non-informative still image effect is performed and only the informing still image effect is performed. It is desirable that the reach effect has a lower appearance rate but a higher jackpot expectation. As a result, when a non-announcement still image effect appears, there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot, so even players who are already accustomed to still image effects can gain a sense of anticipation with the appearance of a non-announcement still image effect. .

As described above, when executing the notification still image effect, although the special lottery result is shown in the dynamic display immediately after the end of the notification still image effect (for example, FIG. 560(K)), the display of the still image ends. A specific special lottery result can be determined after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, FIG. 560(M)). For example, by displaying an image that directly announces a jackpot as shown in Figure 560 (M), or by displaying a set of three decorative symbols, the specific special lottery result can be identified. ing.

Note that the predetermined time is shorter than the period of the notification still image performance, for example. Thereby, the player can determine the specific special lottery result while maintaining the tension created by the notification still image presentation. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the notification still image presentation. Thereby, the player can determine the state in which the tension caused by the notification still image effect has been alleviated and the specific special lottery result.

Further, the predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the non-announcement still image performance. This makes it possible to impress the player with the non-announcement still image performance compared to the period until the specific lottery result is announced. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the non-announcement still image performance. As a result, it is possible to impress the player with the predetermined time that shows the specific special lottery result and increase the player's sense of tension and anticipation during the predetermined time, rather than a non-announcement still image performance that does not show the special lottery result. can.

Note that the predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. This makes it possible to impress the dynamic display on the player compared to the period until the specific lottery result is announced. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. Thereby, it is possible to impress upon the player the predetermined time period in which the specific special lottery result is shown, rather than a dynamic display in which the special lottery result is not shown, and to increase the player's sense of tension and anticipation during the predetermined time period.

Further, in the non-announcement still image performance, it is desirable that the BGM that was playing until just before is played as is. As a result, although the image is still, the BGM remains the same, so the player can recognize that the non-announced still image performance is a series of performances that continue from the previous performance, and the still image is displayed. Even if this occurs, it will not make the player too nervous. On the other hand, in the broadcast still image production, it is desirable that the BGM is stopped or the volume of the BGM is lowered. As a result, not only the image becomes still, but the BGM is also stopped or reduced in volume, so that even a player who is accustomed to still image effects can feel a certain amount of tension in the informed still image effect.

Further, when the notification still image presentation ends and the dynamic display starts, a predetermined movable body may be operated. For example, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, by operating a predetermined movable body at the relevant timing, the player can easily recognize that it is a special lottery result, and the player's sense of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the non-announcement still image performance ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable that the movable body is not operated. This is because even after the non-announcement still image performance, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a jackpot even though the performance for showing the special lottery result continues.

Furthermore, a predetermined sound may be output when the notification still image presentation ends and the dynamic display starts. For example, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, by outputting a predetermined sound at the relevant timing, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a special lottery result, and the player's sense of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the non-announcement still image presentation ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable that the predetermined sound is not output. This is because even after the non-announcement still image performance, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a jackpot even though the performance for showing the special lottery result continues.

Note that in the example described above, the countdown display starts when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the still image effect, but the countdown display may start at the same time as the start of the still image effect. Furthermore, as described above, the still image presentation may end at the same time as the countdown ends. Therefore, if the countdown display starts at the same time as the still image performance starts, and ends at the same time as the still image performance ends, the countdown display becomes a display indicating the entire period of the still image performance itself. In this case, the player can time the end of the still image performance by looking at the countdown display, so that he or she can prepare mentally.

In addition, if the countdown display indicates a part of the period of the still image effect and ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is longer than the countdown non-display period in the still image effect. It may be the same, it may be shorter, or it may be shorter. In order to suppress the player's sense of tension in the countdown display, the longer the countdown display period of the still image presentation, the more the player's excessive sense of tension and anticipation can be suppressed. On the other hand, the shorter the countdown display period in the still image performance, the more the player's sense of anticipation and tension can be improved.

In addition, if the countdown display indicates a part of the period of the still image effect, starts after the start of the still image effect, and ends before the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is , may be longer than the total countdown non-display period (i.e., the sum of the period from the start of the still image presentation to the period before the countdown display and the period from the end of the countdown display to the end of the still image presentation), or may be the same. It's fine, and it can be short.

Note that the countdown display may start before the start of the still image effect, and may end while the still image effect is being executed (before or at the end). As a result, as mentioned above, the player can mentally prepare by looking at the countdown display during the still image performance and timing the end of the still image performance, and the countdown display can also be displayed before the start of the still image performance. By looking at the still image performance, you can time the start of the still image performance and prepare mentally even before the still image performance starts.

Note that in the above-described example, the countdown display is performed only in the notification still image performance, but the countdown display may also be performed in the non-information still image performance. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation level when the countdown display is executed in the non-announcement still image performance is higher than the jackpot expectation level when the countdown display is not executed in the non-announcement still image performance. The countdown display suppresses the player's sense of nervousness, but if the expectation level of the jackpot is low even though the countdown display has been performed multiple times, it will be difficult to feel nervous and the frequency of feeling of elation due to the jackpot will be reduced. This is because, since the prices are not high, it becomes difficult to increase the interest of the players.

On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when the countdown display is executed in the non-announcement still image presentation may be lower than the jackpot expectation when the countdown display is not executed in the non-announcement still image presentation. As a result, the less the number of times the feeling of tension is suppressed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so that the frequency of winning a jackpot in a high sense of tension increases, and the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, the period of the countdown display performed in the notification still image performance may be longer, the same, or shorter than the period of the countdown display performed in the non-information still image performance. .

Since the special lottery result is shown after the notification still image performance ends, the notification still image performance tends to increase the player's sense of tension compared to the non-information still image performance. Therefore, since the period of the countdown display executed in the non-information still image presentation is longer than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-information still image presentation, the effect of suppressing the player's sense of tension becomes greater. On the other hand, the period of the countdown display executed in the non-announcement still image presentation is shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-information still image presentation, so that the needs of players who desire a sense of tension can be met.

Note that in the non-announcement still image performance as well, a countdown display may be performed during a part of the period of the non-information still image performance, or a countdown display may be performed during the entire period of the non-information still image performance.

In addition, when a countdown display is executed during a part of the still image performance, the pattern of the countdown display period is as follows: (1) The countdown display starts from the start of the still image performance, and before the end of the still image performance. (2) Pattern B in which the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect and ends before the end; (3) Pattern B in which the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect, There is also a pattern C that ends when the still image presentation ends.

When a countdown display is executed during a part of the non-announcement still image performance, it is desirable that the performance be selected in the order of pattern B<pattern C<pattern A so that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-information still image effect ends, the non-information still image effect is less likely to attract the player's interest than the information still image effect. Therefore, by setting high jackpot expectations for pattern A where the countdown display starts at the same time as the non-announcement still image performance starts, and pattern C where the countdown display ends at the same time as the end of the non-announcement still image performance. , it is possible to draw the player's attention from the start to the end of the non-announcement still image performance.

On the other hand, when a countdown display is executed during a part of the notification still image performance, it is desirable that the performance be selected in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C so that the expectation of a jackpot is high. In other words, in the notification still image performance, the later the start timing of the countdown display and the later the end timing, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Once the countdown display starts, you can enjoy the performance while hoping that the countdown will not end too soon.

Furthermore, when pattern B with a low jackpot expectation appears in the non-information still image presentation, pattern C with a high jackpot expectation appears in the notification still image presentation in order to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. It is desirable that it be specified so that it is always selected.

Note that if the timing at which the still image effect ends is the same as the timing at which the countdown display ends, the countdown display may be made recognizable for a predetermined period even after the timing at which the still image effect ends. Specifically, for example, when the countdown display reaches "0", the static image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, but the countdown display "0" remains displayed for a predetermined period of time, or the countdown display ends. Effects such as enlarging the display, making the countdown display translucent, or covering the countdown display with effects such as smoke may be performed. This allows the countdown display to leave a lasting impression on the player.

Note that the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-announcement still image performance is preferably longer than the length of the countdown non-display period in the notification still image performance. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-announcement still image performance, by lengthening the countdown non-display period, it is possible to attract the attention of the player and create a sense of tension. On the other hand, the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-announcement still image performance may be shorter than the length of the countdown non-display period in the notification still image performance.

Furthermore, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the total period of the non-information still image performance may be larger than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the total period of the notification still image performance. desirable. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-announcement still image performance, by increasing the proportion of the countdown non-display period to the entire period of the non-announcement still image performance, it is possible to attract the attention of players and create a sense of tension. I can do it. On the other hand, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the total period of the non-information still image performance is smaller than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the length of the total period of the notification still image performance. good.

[20-5-2. Another example of reach production in which Daruma-san fell down]
FIG. 561 shows another example of a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls. In FIGS. 559 and 560, an example has been described in which the non-information still image effect is executed only once, but in FIG. 561, the non-information still image effect is executed a plurality of times.

Following FIG. 559(D), the process moves to FIG. 561(E'). In other words, (E') is the state immediately after the first non-announcement still image performance ends. In (E'), the main character utters the line "Daruma-san ga" on the effect display device 1600, and a dynamic display is performed in which two non-demons gradually approach the main character. In (F'), the main character utters the line "I fell!". Furthermore, in (F'), when the main character finishes saying the line, he turns back to the non-demon and stops, and a still image effect starts in which the movement of the non-demon stops by the time the main character finishes saying the line.

In (G'), the still image effect continues, and for example, the main character and the non-demon remain still as they were at the end of (F'). In (H'), the non-demon did not move even after a predetermined period of time had passed since the still image effect started, so the still image effect ended and the image displayed in (G') faded out. . Furthermore, the image gradually fades out from (H') to (I').

The effect of (J') is the same as in FIG. 559(E), and the subsequent effects are the same as in FIGS. 559 and 560. Even if (I') ends and the dynamic effect starts, the special lottery result is not shown, so the still image effects up to (I') are non-announcement still image effects.

As mentioned above, at the end timing of the first non-announcement still image performance (Fig. 559(C) to (D)), the still image continues to move without fading out (without applying effects, etc. to the still image). The display has been switched to In other words, at the moment of switching to dynamic display, the entire still image that had been displayed as a non-announcement still image becomes unrecognizable to the player. On the other hand, at the end timing of the second non-announcement still image performance (FIG. 561 (H') to (I')), the still image fades out and switches to dynamic display.

In this way, by performing multiple non-announcement still image effects in one reach effect where Daruma-san falls, the player will become more accustomed to the still image effect, and the player's feeling of excessive tension towards the still image effect may be reduced. can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as the number of non-announcement still image performances increases, the player may become bored with the non-announcement still image performances. Therefore, when multiple non-announcement still image performances are performed in one reaching performance in which Daruma-san falls, by fading out the image at the end of some of the non-announcement still image performances, the non-announcement still image performance Variations occur in the game, and the player does not get bored even if the non-announcement still image performance is performed a plurality of times. Note that even in the case where a non-announcement still image effect is performed only once in the ready-to-reach effect in which Daruma-san falls, the image may be faded out at the end of the one non-announcement still image effect.

Note that it is desirable that the fade-out time in a non-broadcasting still image effect that involves a fade-out is shorter than the image rest time in the non-broadcasting still image effect. This is because, if the fade-out time is longer, there is a risk that the sense of tension that has been heightened by the display of still images in the non-announcement still image performance will be completely resolved within the fade-out time. In addition, in order to temporarily alleviate the tension caused by displaying still images, the fade-out time when the image fades out after the non-announcement still image effect is completed is longer than the image pause time in the non-announcement still image effect. Good too.

In the example of FIG. 561, after the image displayed in the non-announcement still image effect is faded out and completely erased, the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell down" at (J') is started. However, the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell down" in (J') may be started during or from the beginning of the fade-out of the image displayed in the non-announcement still image effect.

Specifically, for example, from timing (H') or (I'), the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell down" at (J') is started. In this case, for example, a semitransparent image that is fading out is displayed superimposed on the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell down" in (J'). As a result, it is possible to dynamically display ``Daruma-san Fell Down'' while retaining the lingering impression of the still image effect for the player.

In addition, there is a first display time that is the display time of a still image in a non-announcement still image performance that involves an image fade-out, and a second display time that is a still image display time in a non-announcement still image performance that does not involve an image fade-out. , may have the same or different lengths. For example, if the expectation level of reaching the jackpot when Daruma-san falls differs depending on the appearance or absence of a non-announcement still image performance accompanied by a fade-out, the first display time and the second display time are different, so the player cannot use the non-announcement still image By paying attention to the display time during the production, you can create an even greater sense of tension and anticipation.

For example, by making the second display time longer than the first display time, the length of the second display time can be brought closer to the total length of the first display time and the fade-out time. By maintaining a balance between the lengths of time, it is possible to impress players with both performances. However, in order to maintain a balance in the length of time between performances, it is desirable that the second display time is shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time. Note that the second display time may be longer than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

On the other hand, since the second display time is shorter than the first display time, the difference between the total length of the first display time and fade-out time and the length of the second display time can be increased. , a series of effects consisting of a non-announcement still image effect and a fade-out can strongly impress the player.

Further, the length of the third display time, which is the display time of the still image in the notification still image presentation, and the length of the first display time may be the same or different. For example, by making the third display time longer than the first display time, it is possible to increase the sense of tension in the notification still image that reports the special lottery result. Particularly, when the third display time is longer than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time, this effect becomes noticeable. Note that the third display time may be longer than the first display time, and the third display time may be shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

As mentioned above, the expectation level of the jackpot may vary depending on the form of the still image in the still image performance (for example, if the non-demon stands on both legs, stands on one leg, or takes a swan pose) (Different levels of jackpot expectations). For example, after a non-announcement still image display in which a still image with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a demon standing on one leg or a swan pose) is displayed, a fade-out is executed to display a still image with a high expectation of a jackpot. This can be clearly recognized by the player, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

On the other hand, for example, after a non-announcement still image display in which a still image with low expectations for a jackpot (for example, a demon standing on both feet) is displayed, the still image is immediately erased and the next Since the game transitions to a performance of 1, it is possible to suppress player's disappointment. In addition, there is a fade in the case of a non-announcement still image performance that has multiple non-announcement still image performances with different expectations, and there is no fade in the case of a non-announcement still image performance that does not have multiple non-announcement still image performances with different expectations. , may also be used.

Note that when the image is being faded out, it is desirable not to maintain the lamp lighting mode that was used in the previous non-notification still image presentation. Specifically, for example, when an image is being faded out, instead of the lighting mode of the lamp that was performed in the previous non-announcement still image display, the dynamic display immediately after (the protagonist character "Daruma-san fell down") The lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the scene that says, "It's!". Thereby, the player can recognize that the non-announcement still image performance has ended at the time when the image fade-out starts, and the player can turn his attention to the next performance.

Further, when the image is being faded out, it is desirable not to maintain the sound that was output in the previous non-announcement still image performance. Specifically, for example, when an image is being faded out, instead of the sound that was output in the previous non-announcement still image production, the dynamic display immediately after (the main character saying "Daruma-san fell down!") The sound that corresponds to the production is output. Thereby, the player can recognize that the non-announcement still image performance has ended at the time when the image fade-out starts, and the player can turn his attention to the next performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 561, a non-announcement still image effect that does not involve an image fade-out and a non-announcement still image effect that involves an image fade-out are performed within one change (the reach effect in which Daruma-san falls). However, one of these non-announcement still image effects does not have to be executed within one reach effect in which Daruma-san falls.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 561, the non-notification still image presentation with image fade-out was executed after the non-notification still image presentation that did not involve image fade-out, but the non-notification still image presentation with image fade-out was executed. A non-announcement still image effect without image fade-out may be executed later. By executing a non-announcement still image performance with an image fade-out, the player feels the afterglow of the non-announcement still image performance due to the fade-out. You can also enjoy still image production.

Note that the non-announcement still image effect may be ended by an image effect other than fade-out, as long as it leaves a lasting impression on the player. For example, changing the contrast, brightness, and/or transparency of an image, and converting the image into monochrome or color are examples of the image effects. Another example of the image effect is displaying another image or a moving image superimposed on the image displayed in the non-announcement still image effect. In addition, instead of fading out, for example, part or all of the image may be displayed with cracks or holes, and part or all of the display content of the image itself may change, resulting in a non-announcement static state. The image rendering may end.

Furthermore, even if it is possible to perform both a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls, which involves a non-announcement still image effect with a fade-out, and a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls, which does not involve a non-announcement still image effect with a fade-out. good. If both are possible, it is desirable that the reach effect in which Daruma-san falls, which is a non-announcement still image effect accompanied by a fade-out, has a higher expectation of a jackpot. If the fade-out is included, it is possible to leave a lingering impression on the still image performance, but if the expectation level of the jackpot is low, the player will have a strong impression that the special lottery result is a loss, and the Daruma-san falls down. This is because there is a risk that interest in reach performance may fade.

On the other hand, for example, a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls without a non-announcement still image effect with a fade-out is more likely to lead to a jackpot than a reach effect in which Daruma-san falls down without a non-announcement still image effect with a fade-out. It can be expensive. As a result, for reach effects in which Daruma-san falls, which uses a non-announcement still image effect with a fade-out, the lingering effect of the fade-out leaves an impression on the player, and a non-announcement still image effect with a fade-out causes Daruma-san to fall. As for the reach performance, it is possible to leave an impression on the player due to the high possibility of a jackpot, and it is possible to leave a well-balanced impression on the player with both performances.

Note that the image may also be faded out at the end of the notification still image presentation. By fading out the image at the end of the notification positive image performance, for example, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the player can feel the afterglow of the performance that led to the jackpot, and can feel a sense of elation. .

[20-6. Notification process selection reach production]
FIG. 562, FIG. 563, and FIG. 564 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the notification process selection reach effect. The notification process selection ready-to-reach effect is an example of the SP ready-to-reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

In FIG. 562(A), the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state. In (B), the notification process selection reach effect has started. Furthermore, in (B), still image presentation has started. In (B), on the left side of the effect display device 1600, there is a gauge image for indicating the expectation that the special lottery result in the fluctuation being executed is a jackpot, and on the right side of the effect display device 1600, The images of police lamps used to announce the special lottery results at once (that is, to directly indicate whether the special lottery results are a jackpot or a miss without suggesting the degree of jackpot expectation) are each static. Displayed as an image.

In (C), the image of the performance operation section 301 is displayed in the center of the performance display device 1600 while the image of the gauge and the image of the patrol lamp corresponding to the notification process selection reach performance are displayed as still images. Also, one of the gauge image or the police lamp image (the gauge image in (C)) is displayed in the same bright manner as in (B), and the other (the police lamp image in (C)) is displayed in a darkened manner. .

The image of the production operation section 301 displays a display indicating that by pressing the central press operation section 303a, the notification method indicated by the image displayed in a bright manner can be selected. In addition, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the image on the production operation unit 301 can be used to switch between an image displayed in a bright mode and an image displayed in a darkened mode (that is, select a notification method). There is a sign showing what can be done. Note that the image of the production operation section 301 may be displayed as a still image, or, for example, the central press operation section 303a within the image may move up and down, the rotation operation section 302 within the image may rotate, or the center press operation section 303a within the image may rotate. The image may be displayed as a dynamic display such as a moving arrow within the image.

When the player presses the central press operation section 303a in (C), or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the image of the production operation section 301 in (C) was displayed, the notification method displayed in a bright manner is selected. be done. Note that when a predetermined time has passed since the image of the production operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, one of the two (for example, expectation level suggestion) may be forcibly selected, or the expectation level suggestion or one shot may be selected at random. Announcement may be selected.

In addition, in (C), both the image of the gauge and the image of the patrol lamp may be displayed in a bright manner without changing from the state of (B). In this case, for example, in (C), when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated to the left, the expectation level suggestion is selected, and when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated to the right, the one-shot notification is selected, and the corresponding An image suggesting a selection method by operation is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, if a predetermined period of time has passed since the image of the production operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, for example, one side (e.g., expectation level suggestion) is forcibly selected, or the expectation level suggestion is randomly selected. Alternatively, one-shot notification is selected.

(D) is a state in which one-shot notification is selected in (C). In (D), the still image effect is finished, the still image is released, and only the image of the police lamp is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600. In (D), a dynamic display in which a patrol lamp lights up is displayed as a display indicating that the special lottery result in the variation was a jackpot. In (E), an image is displayed that more clearly indicates that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Note that a predetermined movable body may be moved in (D).

For example, if the special lottery result in the variation is a loss, in (D), for example, a dynamic display is performed in which the effect display device 1600 goes dark without the police lamp flashing, and in (E), a dynamic display is performed in which the effect display device 1600 goes dark. An image is displayed to notify that the special lottery result is a loss, such as "...Loss."

FIG. 563 (D') shows a state in which the expectation level suggestion is selected in FIG. 562 (C). At (D'), the still image effect is finished and the still image is released, only the image of the gauge is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the message "Charge the gauge!" is displayed. The gauge can be charged to a maximum of 8 levels, and in (E'), the gauge has been accumulated to 3 levels, and a display (``Not yet!'') indicating that there is still a chance to accumulate the gauge is displayed on the production display device 1600. Displayed. Note that, for example, the gauge may be set to accumulate up to the maximum value of 8 levels only when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Note that if the expectation level suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the central press operation section 303a being operated after the image of the production operation section 301 in (C) is displayed, In (D'), it is not necessary to increase the number of gauge stages. There is a possibility that the player did not operate the central press operation section 303a because he did not want to know the level of expectation, and this is to satisfy the wishes of such a player.

At (F'), the state returns to the same state as in FIG. 562(C). However, the number of gauge stages displayed as a still image may reflect the number of stages accumulated in the previous performance, as in (F'), or may reflect the number of stages accumulated in the previous performance, as in (C), or may reflect the number of stages accumulated in the previous performance, as in (C). It may also be displayed without.

(G') is a state in which the expectation level suggestion is selected in (F'). In (G'), as in (D'), the still image effect ends and the still image is released, only the image of the gauge is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the message "Charge the gauge!" is displayed. be done. However, it differs from (D') in that the gauge is accumulated from the number of stages accumulated in the previous performance.

In (H'), the gauge has accumulated up to the fourth level, and a display (``More, more!'') indicating that there is still an opportunity to accumulate the gauge is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At (I'), the state returns to the same state as at (F').

Then, if you select the expectation level suggestion and repeat a series of effects that accumulate the gauge a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the expectation level suggestion effect ends when the effect that accumulates the gauge the predetermined number of times ends, and the current display is A display indicating that the number of stages of the gauge indicates the expectation of a jackpot is displayed ("That's it!" in (J')). (J') is the state at the end of the performance in which the gauge is charged for the predetermined number of times. In state (J'), the gauge is filled to level 6.

In (H'), the image of the gauge is darkened and the image of the police lamp is displayed in a bright manner. Furthermore, although an image of the performance operation section 301 is displayed, a display prompting the user to press the central press operation section 303a is displayed, but a display prompting the user to operate the rotary operation section 302 is not displayed. In other words, after executing the effect of accumulating the gauge a predetermined number of times, the one-shot announcement is forcibly selected in (H'). In other words, the number of gauge stages in (J') indicates the jackpot expectation.

FIG. 564 (I') shows the state in which the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed in (J'), and similarly to FIG. 562 (D), the special lottery result is indicated by lighting or non-lighting of the patrol lamp. Note that if a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of (J') started, the process shifts to FIG. 564 (I') even if the central press operation section 303a is not pressed. Subsequently, in (J'), similar to FIG. 562(E), an image is displayed that more clearly informs that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Note that after selecting the expectation level suggestion, a still image effect is performed in which the notification method is selected again (for example, FIGS. 563 (F') and (I')); In this case, as shown in FIG. 562(D), a one-shot announcement indicating the special lottery result is made by displaying the patrol lamp.

Although the static display of the still image performance gives the player a sense of tension and anticipation, some players feel that the static display lacks interest because it is static. Therefore, as mentioned above, in the notification process selection reach performance, in the still image performance, the notification method of the special lottery result can be selected from expectation level suggestion or one-shot notification, so even for such players, the still image It can arouse interest in directing.

In addition, as mentioned above, while it is possible to select multiple times for the expectation level suggestion or one-shot announcement in the still image production, it seems that only the one-shot announcement police lamp can be selected in the final still image production. It is set. As a result, in the notification process selection reach effect, the special lottery result will finally be shown in a single notification. Furthermore, in the notification process selection reach performance, it is possible to select the expectation level suggesting performance a plurality of times, so that the player's expectation can be gradually increased. Furthermore, even after selecting the expectation level suggestion effect one or more times, it is possible to switch to a one-shot announcement, so the player can learn of the special lottery result once he or she is satisfied with the expectation level, which can further increase the player's expectations. It never gets boring.

In addition, in the example mentioned above, when the expectation level suggestion is selected, the number of stages of the gauge increases in the performance that accumulates the gauge, but the number of stages of the gauge does not increase and the performance ends with the previous stage number. You may. For example, if the gauge remains below a predetermined level (for example, 0 level) even after the performance of filling up the gauge a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) is completed, a jackpot may be determined.

In addition, when filling up the gauge, for example, a repeated hitting effect is performed in which the player is encouraged to hit the operation part such as the central press operation part 303a repeatedly, and the number of stages of the gauge is increased in such a manner that the gauge is accumulated according to the number of repeated hits. It's okay to be hurt. However, the maximum number of stages of the gauge in each performance that accumulates the gauge is determined before the start of the performance by a predetermined distribution based on the special lottery results, and after reaching the maximum number of stages, the number of stages of the gauge is determined repeatedly. However, the maximum number of stages shall not be reached.

As mentioned above, the still image performance executed in the notification process selection reach is the case where expectation level suggestion is selected among the effects in which both expectation level suggestion and one-shot announcement are selectable (Fig. 562(C)). This includes a first still image effect in which a continuous hit effect is not executed, and a second still image effect in which a continuous hit effect is executed when the expectation level suggestion is selected. Further, the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach includes a third still image effect (FIG. 563 (H')) in which only one-shot notification can be selected.

The effective period of the effect operation section 301 may vary depending on the type of still image effect. For example, after the third still image presentation, the special lottery result that is most important to the player is forcibly shown, so the third still image presentation is It is desirable that the valid period is longer than the valid periods in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. In addition, when the expectation level suggestion is selected in the second still image performance, a continuous hit performance is performed that allows the player to enjoy checking the expectation level through his/her own operations, so that the player can be sure of the continuous hit performance. It is desirable that the effective period of the second still image effect is longer than the effective period of the first still image effect so that the second still image effect can be executed.

Further, the size of the image of the performance operation section 301 displayed during still image performance may vary depending on the type of still image performance. For example, after the third still image presentation, the special lottery result that is most important to the player is forcibly shown, so the third still image presentation is It is desirable that the image of the effect operation section 301 in is larger than the image of the effect operation section 301 in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. In addition, when the expectation level suggestion is selected in the second still image performance, a continuous hit performance is performed that allows the player to enjoy checking the expectation level through his/her own operations, so that the player can be sure of the continuous hit performance. It is desirable that the image of the effect operation section 301 in the second still image effect be larger than the image of the effect operation section 301 in the first still image effect so that the second still image effect can be executed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, the one-shot announcement was selected by operating the center press operation section 303a in the third still image production, but multiple operation sections (for example, the center press operation section 303a, the outer circumferential press operation 303b and the rotary operation section 302), and the one-shot notification may be selected by operating the operation section. In this case, for example, the jackpot expectation level may be different depending on the operating unit selected.

Further, the image of the effect operation section 301 may appear at the same time as the start of the still image effect, or may appear after the start of the still image effect. Furthermore, the length of time from the start of the still image presentation until the image on the presentation operation section 301 appears may vary depending on the type of still image presentation. For example, in the order of third still image effect>second still image effect>first still image effect, the time from the start of the still image effect until the image of the effect operation section 301 appears is long.

A special lottery result is shown after the third still image effect, a continuous hit effect is executed after the second still image effect when the expectation level suggestion is selected, and the first still image effect when the expectation level suggestion is selected. After the image presentation, the successive hit presentation is not performed and the level of expectation is suggested. In other words, since the effects that are important to the player are performed in the order of third still image effect>second still image effect>first still image effect, in this order, after the still image effect starts, the effect operation unit 301 By lengthening the time it takes for the image to appear, it is possible to give the player a period of time to mentally prepare for the operation to start an important performance.

In addition, in the above example, we explained the effect in which the gauge gradually fills up to a predetermined stage after a predetermined period of time has passed after the expectation suggestion is selected, but even if the gauge fills up to the predetermined stage at the same time as the expectation suggestion is selected. good. This allows the player to immediately check his/her expectation level. In this case, the gauge may gradually accumulate to the predetermined stage at the same time that the expectation suggestion is selected, or the gauge may reach the predetermined stage without passing through any intermediate stages at the same time as the expectation suggestion is selected. Good too.

Note that if the expectation level suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the center pressing operation section 303a being operated, for example, the image of the production operation section 301 is displayed as shown in FIG. 562(C). The erased image may be displayed, and in this case, the number of gauge stages does not need to be changed. Thereby, the player can be given an incentive to operate the performance operation section 301 because the player recognizes that the level of expectation will not increase unless the performance operation section 301 is operated. However, in the last performance in which expectation level suggestion can be selected, even if expectation level suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without the central press operation section 303a being operated, the gauge It is desirable to perform a performance that accumulates.

Note that in the above-mentioned example, the number of stages of the gauge was 0 at the timing before the player selected the expectation level suggestion (timing in FIG. 562(B)); All of them may be accumulated. However, if it is specified that the jackpot is confirmed when the gauge is fully charged, if the gauge is completely filled at that timing, the jackpot will be confirmed at that timing, and the player will not be able to select the notification process. In such a case, it is desirable that at most only a portion of the gauge is filled at the relevant timing, since there is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the reach effect to the end.

The image of the production operation unit 301 in the final state may be decorated with effects or change its color depending on the expected level of jackpot (for example, if the gauge is at a predetermined number of stages or more, the color is red; if the gauge is at the predetermined level), If it is less than the number of stages, it may be white, etc.). Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation not only by the gauge but also by the image on the effect operation section 301.

In addition, in the notification process selection reach performance, the image of the performance operation unit 301 in the selection performance other than the last where both expectation suggestion and one-shot announcement can be selected, and the final selection performance where only one-shot announcement can be selected. The image of the operation unit 301 may be the same. As a result, since the image on the production operation unit 301 does not change even in the final state, the player estimates the jackpot expectation level only based on the stage of the gauge, so the player's consciousness is focused on the production where the gauge accumulates. be able to.

Also, for example, the display period of the image of the production operation section 301 and the valid period of the production operation section 301 (the central press operation section 303a and the rotation operation section 302 are the same. However, the last In the selection performance, the display of the image on the performance operation unit 301 may be started before the effective period of the performance operation unit 301 starts.The final selection performance is based on the player's expectations during the notification process selection reach performance. This is a performance that can be enjoyed in the highest state, and by starting the display of the image on the performance operation unit 301 before the start of the effective period of the performance operation unit 301, the player can ensure the final selection operation. You can do it and enjoy it.

In addition, the valid period of the performance operation unit 301 in the last selection performance in which only one-shot announcement can be selected is the validity period of the performance operation unit 301 in the last selection performance in which both expectation level suggestion and one-shot announcement can be selected. Longer is desirable. Thereby, the player can reliably perform the final selection operation and enjoy the game. Note that the valid period of the performance operation unit 301 in the last selection performance in which only one-shot announcement can be selected is the validity period of the performance operation unit 301 in the last selection performance in which both expectation level suggestion and one-shot announcement can be selected. It may be shorter or may be the same.

In addition, when the expectation level suggestion effect is selected, multiple still image effects are executed, but even in the dynamic display executed between the multiple still image effects, the expectation level suggestion effect and the one shot image effect are executed. Images of the performance operation section 301 in selection performances other than the last in which both notifications can be selected may be displayed. Thereby, the player can mentally prepare for the selection operation in the next still image performance.

[20-7. Holding gathering performance]
FIGS. 565 and 566 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a reserved gathering performance. The pending group performance is an example of a performance in which a still image performance may be performed. In FIG. 565(A), all the decorative patterns are changing, and three are pending. In addition, in (A), five pending displays are displayed, but the central pending display is a pending display corresponding to the change being executed, and each of the other pending displays is a pending display corresponding to the next four changes. This is the corresponding pending display.

In state (A), if game ball B further enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004) and obtains a new holding, there is a possibility that a holding gathering performance will start. be. (B) shows a state in which the pending gathering effect has started due to the above-mentioned trigger. Since the game ball B enters the starting hole and acquires a new hold, there are four holds in (B). When the pending gathering performance starts, a performance in which the Great Demon King appears is executed on the performance display device 1600.

In (C), a still image effect starts, and the Great Demon King that appeared in (B) is displayed as a still image for a predetermined period of time. Note that in the still image performance, the pending display on the performance display device 1600 does not change.

In (D), the still image effect is completed, and an effect in which the main character appears is performed on the effect display device 1600 by dynamic display. In (E), the main character utters the line "A chance to meet on hold!", and each hold display on the effect display device 1600 moves to the top of the main character image.

In (F), in the effect display device 1600, the hold displays that have been moved above the main character are combined to form one sphere (hereinafter also referred to as a courage sphere). As a result, the pending display is temporarily no longer displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (G), a state in which the main character is throwing a courage ball is displayed. In (H), a state in which the Great Demon King catches a courage ball thrown by the main character is displayed.

In (I), the still image effect starts, and the Great Demon King receiving the courage ball is displayed as a still image. In FIG. 566 (J), which will be described later, the still image performance also functions as a judge performance in order to notify a hold that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

In FIG. 566(J), the still image effect is finished and the still image is released, and the effect display device 1600 indicates that the special lottery result of either the pending variation or the currently executed variation is "WIN!!" and is a jackpot. There is a display indicating that.

Subsequently, in (K), in addition to the display in (J), a hold display is displayed in the original area, and a display indicating which special lottery result corresponding to the hold is a jackpot is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 566, the pending display corresponding to the fluctuation one after the other in the execution is shining with an effect, and the special lottery result corresponding to this fluctuation is a jackpot. In addition, in (J) and (K), all decorative designs are changing.

Note that the appearance timing of the effect indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot (the effect in (K), hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot effect) may be immediately before or at the end of the variation being executed. Thereby, the player's sense of tension can be maintained until the end of the variation being executed.

In the illustrated example, the jackpot effect has a size that covers the pending display corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation, but it may have a smaller size than the pending display. Specifically, for example, the jackpot effect may be an effect that occurs only inside the pending display corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation (such as the inside of the pending display lighting up).

Further, the jackpot effect may overlap a part of the pending display corresponding to the jackpot, and a part of the jackpot effect may protrude from the pending display. Further, the jackpot effect may overlap at least a part of the pending display corresponding to the jackpot, and may be displayed in a layer that has priority over the pending display in the effect display device 1600 (that is, a layer on the near side when viewed from the player). . That is, in this case, at least a portion of the pending display is hidden due to the jackpot effect.

In addition, if all the special lottery results of the pending changes and the changes in progress are losers, for example, in (J), if all the special lottery results are losers, such as "Unfortunate..." A display indicating that this has occurred is performed, and the pending display is displayed again on the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as in (B) to (D), that is, in the normal manner.

In addition, when there is a jackpot variation in the running variation and the pending variation, the jackpot effect may be displayed after performing the same effect as the loss described above. In this case, after the loss effect, the jackpot effect may be displayed after displaying "WIN!!" as a revival effect, or the jackpot effect itself may be revived without displaying "WIN!!" You can also use it as At this time, the jackpot effect is a variation after the next time of the variation being executed, and may start from a variation before the jackpot variation.

In addition, if there is no jackpot variation in the running variation or pending variation, the pending variation will be quickly digested after the pending set performance ends (specifically, for example, if the variation time is 2 seconds or less It is desirable that a variation pattern with a short degree be selected). Players will not be interested in fluctuations that are known to be negative in the special lottery results, and if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation is long, players will continue to be disappointed, and players will be disappointed. This is because it reduces interest.

Further, if there is a jackpot variation in the running variation and the pending variation, the variation before the jackpot variation may or may not be quickly digested. By quickly digesting the fluctuations that precede the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to quickly end fluctuations in which the special lottery result is known to be a loss, and move on to the jackpot game, which saves the player's playing time. Increased efficiency. On the other hand, if the fluctuations before the jackpot fluctuation are not digested quickly, the player's elation over winning the jackpot can be maintained during the period of these fluctuations that are not digested quickly.

As described above, in the pending set performance, it is notified whether or not there is a variation in which the special lottery result is a jackpot among the variations in progress and the variations on hold. Since there are 5 fluctuations when you add up the fluctuations in execution and the fluctuations on hold, the pending set performance is successful according to the jackpot expectation level in the 5 fluctuations. For example, if the special lottery result of the current variation is a loss and the special lottery result of the pending next variation is a jackpot, then in the normal performance, a loss effect will be performed for the current variation, but the pending result will be a loss. In the performance, a performance is performed that indicates a jackpot in the fluctuations during the execution. In other words, since the chances of a performance that takes a long time to appear is reduced, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest.

As mentioned above, at the end of the first still image performance (that is, the still image performance with the pending display displayed), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot variation among the running variations and pending variations. Judgment results are not shown.

Note that, for example, the hold change effect may be performed after the first still image effect ends until the hold display is no longer performed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, during the period shown in FIG. 565(D)). Specifically, for example, the hold change performance is performed so that the jackpot expectation level of the change corresponding to the hold display that has been changed to red is higher than the jackpot expectation level of the change that corresponds to the hold that has not changed the hold display. conduct. The tension given to the player by the first still image effect is temporarily relieved by the end of the still image effect, but since the pending change effect is performed at the above-mentioned timing, even during the period until the courage ball is formed, the game can be continued. It can give people a sense of expectation.

In the example of FIG. 565, the pending gathering chance is executed in (E), and the courage sphere is formed in (F), but even if the pending gathering chance fails and the effect in which the courage sphere is not formed is executed. good. Specifically, in (F), the formation of the courage sphere fails and each pending display returns to its original position, and the position of the pending display remains unchanged and displayed until the fluctuation is completed. For example, instead of (G) and (H), a scene where the main character attacks the Great Demon King with his bare hands is performed, and instead of (I), a still image of the Great Demon King after being attacked is displayed. A still image effect is performed (that is, a still image in a mode different from (I) is displayed). Thereafter, as in FIG. 566(J), it is announced whether or not there is a jackpot variation among the running variations and pending variations.

In addition, the expectation level of a jackpot when a still image performance as a judge performance is performed after a successful pending gathering chance is higher than the expectation level of a jackpot when a still image performance is performed as a judge performance after failing a pending gathering chance. . In other words, the expectation of jackpot is higher if the pending group chance fails and the special lottery result is announced when the still image effect is performed and the still image is canceled while the pending display is displayed. The expectation level of a jackpot is higher when the special lottery result is announced by performing still image production and canceling the still image in a state where the display is not displayed.

Note that if the hold display is displayed during the still image performance, the hold display may be a dynamic display. For example, each hold display may be displayed in a swinging or rotating manner, or the brightness of each hold display may change even if the hold display itself is stationary, or the effect attached to the hold display may change. It's okay. By dynamically displaying the pending display during the still image performance, the dynamic display and the still image are contrasted and recognized as distinct from each other.

Incidentally, it is preferable that the jackpot effect is continuously displayed until the change to the hold that indicates a jackpot ends. This is because it can give the player a sense of security.

However, on the other hand, if a display indicating a confirmed jackpot is displayed for a long period of time (until the changes to the pending jackpot that indicate a jackpot are finished), the player next to you may look at you with disdain, and you may feel uncomfortable. For example, it may be displayed until just before the change in progress ends, until the end of the change in progress, or until the start of the next change in the change in progress. The display may be displayed only for a relatively short period of time.

This relatively short time may be, for example, shorter than static display (I), less than half of dynamic display (J), or less than half of dynamic display (J). It is preferable to set the second half period of period and dynamic display (J). By erasing the fluctuation being executed or the fluctuation being executed at the start of the next fluctuation, the player's consciousness is directed toward the jackpot game state, so the player prepares for the jackpot game (for example, when the jackpot starts (e.g., being conscious of changing to right-handed batting).

In the example described above, the jackpot effect is displayed until the end of the variation where the special lottery result is a jackpot, but it may be deleted during the execution of the variation where the special lottery result is a jackpot and before the end. . Thereby, it is possible to draw the attention of the player not only to the jackpot effect but also to the fluctuating performance in which the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Furthermore, when erasing the jackpot effect, the jackpot effect may be erased suddenly, or the jackpot effect may be erased gradually (for example, by increasing the transparency of the jackpot effect and gradually erasing it). By suddenly erasing the jackpot effect, the player is not left with any aftertaste of the jackpot effect, so that the player's consciousness can be quickly turned to the jackpot game. Further, by gradually erasing the jackpot effect, it is possible to leave a lingering impression of the jackpot effect on the player and strengthen the impression of the jackpot effect.

Further, when erasing the jackpot effect, another effect may be applied to the jackpot effect and then erased. Specifically, for example, after making the jackpot effect unrecognizable by applying another effect on top of the jackpot effect, that other effect is erased, or if another effect is applied on top of the jackpot effect, but the jackpot effect is not recognizable. After making it recognizable, the jackpot effect is deleted together with the other effect. By applying another effect to the jackpot effect and erasing it, it is possible to leave a lingering impression of the jackpot effect on the player and strengthen the impression of the jackpot effect.

[20-8. Split reach production]
FIG. 567 and FIG. 568 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a divided reach effect. The split reach effect is an example of a reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 567(A), all decorative patterns are changing.
If the expectation of jackpot differs depending on the decorative symbols that stop in the reach state (for example, the reach state of the "7" symbol has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach state of other decorative symbols), the reach state with a lower jackpot expectation When the decorative patterns stop in this state, there is a risk that the player's sense of excitement may decrease. In the split ready-to-win performance, a plurality of timings are provided for determining the decorative symbols that stop in the ready-to-reach state, so it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's sense of elation.

In (B), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper and lower display areas have the same reach effect (a battle between the main character (white character in the figure) and enemy character (black character in the figure)). performance) is being executed as a dynamic display. However, in one (top) display area, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped in a reach mode, and in the other (bottom) display area, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are fluctuating. be.

In (C), following (B), the same reach effect is executed as a dynamic display in the upper and lower display areas, and the attacks of the main character and the enemy character hit each other. In addition, in (C), similarly to (B), in one (upper) display area, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped in a ready-to-reach manner, and in the other (lower) display area, , the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changing.

In (D), among the upper and lower display areas that were divided in (B) to (C), the display area (upper display area) in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected. Furthermore, in (D), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect is started. In the still image effect, for example, the display content that was displayed in the upper display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. Even during the still image presentation in (D), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern remain stopped (still) in a ready-to-reach mode.

In (E), the still image effect is finished, the still image is released, and the dynamic display is restarted. In (E), as a display showing the special lottery result, an image of the main character losing to the enemy character, a display saying "Unfortunate...", and a decorative pattern that stops at a losing combination are displayed. After the still image effect in (D) ends, the special lottery result is shown in (E), so the still image effect in (D) also functions as a judge effect.

FIG. 568 (D') shows a state in which the display area (lower display area) in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changing is selected after (C). At (D'), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect is started. In the still image effect, for example, the display content that was displayed in the lower display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. Note that in (D'), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a changing manner even during the still image performance.

In (E'), the still image effect is finished, the still image is released, and the dynamic display is restarted. In (E'), the battle effect between the main character and the enemy character is performed again, and at the same time, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are fluctuating while forming the reach mode (which decorative pattern stops in the reach state). It is unclear in (E') whether to do so). Furthermore, at (E'), a message saying "Which symbol will make you reach!?" is displayed.

In (F'), the battle performance between the main character and the enemy character continues, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped in the reach state. At (G'), still image production starts. After the still image effect (G') ends, a special lottery result is shown at (H'), which will be described later, so the still image effect (G') also functions as a judge effect.

Note that in the still image effect in (G'), the same still image as the still image in FIG. 567(D) is displayed. In other words, when the display area in the reach state is selected from the split display state, and when the display area in the non-reach state is selected from the split display state and then goes through (D') to (F'), Still images are common in still image production. Thereby, it is possible to make a strong impression of the still image on the player.

In (H'), the still image performance has ended, the stillness has been canceled, and the dynamic display has resumed. In (H'), as a display showing the special lottery result, an image of the main character winning against the enemy character, a display saying "Victory!!", and a decorative pattern that stops at a jackpot combination are displayed.

As mentioned above, immediately after the start of the split reach effect, the display area is divided vertically, and in one display area, the reach effect is performed while the decorative symbols stop in the reach state, and in the other display area, while the reach effect is performed, the display area is divided vertically. Also, the decorative pattern is fluctuating without stopping in the reach state.

Thereby, since it is not known which decorative pattern will result in a reach until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the split reach performance, the player can feel a sense of tension and anticipation even after the start of the reach performance. Further, by executing a still image effect after one of the divided display areas is selected, it is possible to make the player more clearly recognize which display area has been selected.

In addition, if a display area with fluctuating decorative patterns is selected from the divided display areas, after the still image effect is executed, an effect will be added to help the user recognize which decorative pattern will lead to a reach state. By displaying the decorative symbols dynamically and then making them stand still in the ready-to-reach state, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

Furthermore, from the divided display areas, the expected jackpot when the display area where the decorative symbols are fluctuating is selected is the same as the expected jackpot when the display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in the reach state is selected. It is desirable to set it higher. This is because if a display area with fluctuating decorative symbols is selected, there is still a possibility that a decorative symbol with a high probability of winning a jackpot will be in a reach state (for example, a "7" symbol may be a reach state). be.

However, in the display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in the reach state, if the reach state is formed with a decorative symbol with a high expectation of jackpot (for example, the "7" symbol), the decorative symbols will change. The jackpot expectation level when the display area is selected may be set lower than the jackpot expectation level when the display area in which the decorative symbols are stopped in a ready-to-reach state is selected.

Note that in the still image effect (FIGS. 567 (D) and 568 (D')) after one display area is selected from the divided display areas, an effect that prompts the user to operate a predetermined operation unit is executed. Good too. In this case, for example, by operating the predetermined operation section, the static state is canceled and the performance proceeds.

In addition, the number of types of operation parts that may prompt operation in the still image effect after the display area where the decorative pattern is changing is selected (Fig. 568 (D')), the decorative pattern is in the reach state. It is desirable that the number of types of operation parts whose operation may be prompted in the still image presentation after the stopped display area is selected (FIG. 567(D)) is greater than the number of types.

Specifically, for example, in a still image presentation after a display area in which a decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, operation of only the central press operation section 303a may be prompted, and the decorative pattern may be in the reach state. In still image production after a stopped display area is selected, there is a possibility that operation of either the center press operation section 303a or the outer circumferential press operation section 303b may be prompted.

As mentioned above, the still image effect after the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected also functions as a judge effect. It is better to have the possibility of operating more operating units.

Furthermore, even if the number of selectable operation parts is the same, the type of image that prompts the operation in the still image presentation (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changing is selected. It is preferable that the number of types of images that prompt operation in the still image presentation (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected is greater than the number.

Specifically, for example, in a still image presentation after a display area in which a decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, there is a possibility that only an image in which the central press operation part 303a is displayed in white or red is displayed. , In the still image presentation after the display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected, an image in which the center press operation section 303a is displayed in white or red, or a main character character inside the center press operation section 303a is displayed. An image may be displayed that depicts

As mentioned above, the still image effect after the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the ready-to-reach state is selected also functions as a judge effect. It is better to have the possibility of seeing more images in order to have different expectations.

Also, based on the valid period of the operation part in the still image effect (Fig. 568 (D')) after the display area where the decorative pattern is changing is selected, the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected. It is desirable that the valid period of the operation unit in the still image production (FIG. 567(D)) after the operation is performed is longer. If the player operates the operation part during the still image performance after the display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in the reach state is selected, the judge performance will start. There is a desire to ensure that this is carried out reliably, and for this reason it is desirable that the validity period be long.

Furthermore, in the still image presentation (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changing is selected, it is desirable that the BGM that was being played just before is played as is. On the other hand, in the still image effect (FIG. 567(D)) after the display area where the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach state is selected, it is desirable that the BGM stops or the volume of the BGM decreases. As a result, the movement of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern and the BGM are linked (the BGM plays while the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are changing, and the BGM stops or becomes small in the reach state). Particularly in the still image performance during the ready-to-reach state, not only is the image static, but the BGM is also stopped or reduced in volume, making it possible to enhance the sense of tension.

However, even in a still image effect after a display area in which the decorative pattern is stopped in a ready-to-reach state is selected, it is desirable that a effect sound corresponding to the effect prompting the user to operate the operating unit is output. This is to ensure that the player is prompted to operate the operation section.

Note that when the static image effect (FIG. 567(D)) ends and the dynamic display starts after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changing is selected, the predetermined movable body may be operated. It's okay. For example, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, by operating a predetermined movable body at the relevant timing, the player can easily recognize that it is a special lottery result, and the player's sense of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the static image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) ends after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changing is selected and the dynamic display starts, it is preferable that the movable body is not operated. . This is because even after the still image performance, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a jackpot even though the performance to show the special lottery result continues.

Additionally, when the static image effect (Fig. 567 (D)) ends and the dynamic display starts after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changing is selected, a predetermined sound may be output. Good too. For example, when the special lottery result is a jackpot, by outputting a predetermined sound at the relevant timing, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a special lottery result, and the player's sense of excitement is improved. On the other hand, when the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) ends and the dynamic display starts after the display area in which the decorative pattern is changing is selected, the predetermined sound should not be output. is desirable. This is because even after the still image performance, the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a jackpot even though the performance to show the special lottery result continues.

Note that the series of effects shown in FIGS. 568 (E') to (F') may be repeated. Specifically, for example, in the first production (F'), a decorative symbol with low jackpot expectation (for example, a "6" symbol) becomes a reach state, and then the production (E') is performed again. be exposed. Then, in the second performance (F'), a decorative symbol with a high expectation of jackpot (for example, a "7" symbol) becomes a reach state, and the performance progresses to (G'). By proceeding with the performance in this manner, it is possible to suppress a drop in the player's sense of expectation even if the first performance (F') becomes a ready-to-win state with a decorative symbol with a low expectation of jackpot.

Note that in the split display in FIGS. 567(B) to 567(C), different effects may be performed in one display area and the other display area. This allows the player to enjoy two types of performance with one change. In addition, if the jackpot expectations of the performances displayed in each display area are different, the player not only has to decide whether or not the decorative symbol is in the reach state, but also which of the performances with different jackpot expectations is selected. You can watch the show with a sense of tension and anticipation.

In addition, when performances with different jackpot expectations are executed in each divided display area, for example, in the display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in the reach state, the performances with high jackpot expectations are executed, and the decorative symbols fluctuate. An effect with low expectation of jackpot is being executed in the display area where the player is playing. As mentioned above, the expected jackpot when a display area where the decorative symbols are in a reach state is selected is lower than the expected jackpot when a display area where the decorative symbols are fluctuating is selected. By performing a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot in a display area where the symbols are stopped in a ready-to-reach state, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment when the display area is selected.

On the other hand, when performances with different jackpot expectations are executed in each divided display area, for example, in a display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in a reach state, a performance with a high jackpot expectation is executed, and the decorative symbols fluctuate. A performance with high expectations for a jackpot is being executed in the display area where the player is playing. As mentioned above, the expectation of a jackpot when a display area where the decorative symbols are changing is higher than the expectation of a jackpot when a display area where the decorative symbols are stopped in a ready-to-reach state is selected. By executing a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot in a display area where the symbols are changing, when the display area is selected, an extremely high expectation of a jackpot can be obtained, which strongly improves the player's sense of elation. be able to.

[21-1. Cut selection performance]
During the execution of a fluctuation, the expected jackpot in the fluctuation, such as a pending change performance, a look-ahead pending change performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a preview performance of the fluctuation, a reach performance, a zone change performance, etc. Various performances are performed to show the following. Although these effects can arouse a sense of anticipation, some players may find these effects bothersome. A cut selection performance provided for such a player, in which cutting the performance can be selected, will be explained.

In addition, the pending change performance that indicates the fluctuation may, for example, change the mode of the pending display that corresponds to the fluctuation that is being executed, among the pending displays displayed on the performance display device 1600, to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot that is currently being executed. It is a performance that The look-ahead pending change performance is, for example, a performance that changes the mode of the pending display corresponding to the pending variation among the pending displays displayed on the performance display device 1600 to indicate the jackpot expectation level of the pending variation. be.

In addition, as described above, in the pseudo continuous performance, the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is performed multiple times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. It is a performance that is carried out. The ready-to-win performance is a performance in which the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped at the same pattern and the middle decorative pattern is varied to make the player expect that the variation being executed is a jackpot variation.

For example, the preview performance of the fluctuation may be, for example, a notice that a reach performance will be executed in the fluctuation being executed, a notice of a specific reach performance that may be executed, or a notice that may occur. It is a performance that foretells the state of the performance. The zone change performance is, for example, a performance that increases expectations for a jackpot by shifting the performance state to a zone where a specific performance is executed. The zone change performance may be performed as a look-ahead performance to increase expectations for a jackpot in a pending variation, or may be performed in order to increase expectations for a jackpot in an ongoing variation.

FIG. 569, FIG. 570, FIG. 571, FIG. 572, and FIG. 573 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of cut selection effects. FIG. 569(A) shows the state at the end of the variation immediately before the cut selection effect is executed. In (A), the decorative patterns are stopped in an incorrect combination, and the normal background (a road and two trees on the side of the road) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The background is an image that has a lower priority than the decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is placed in a layer on the back side when viewed from the player), and is generally not displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is the image with the lowest priority among the images currently available. The normal background is the background with the lowest jackpot expectation among the backgrounds displayed during fluctuation in each game state except for jackpot games and small win games. In addition, the normal background is also displayed when a symbol is confirmed in a losing variation.

(B) shows the state at the start of the variation in which the cut selection effect is executed. The normal background continues to be displayed from the previous variation, and the decorative pattern begins to vary. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the normal background is displayed in the variation in which the cut selection effect is performed. (C) is a state in which the left decorative pattern is stopped in the variation. (D) is a state in which the right decorative pattern is stopped in a non-reach state during the fluctuation.

(E) is a state in which a medium decorative pattern called "Run" (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-Run pattern) is about to stop in the fluctuation. When the pseudo-continuation pattern stops (including a temporary stop in the form of slight shaking), it is determined that the pseudo-continuation starts or progresses. In (F), a display ("x2") indicating that the pseudo-continuous pattern stops and the second pseudo-continuous pattern starts in the variation is displayed. Further, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the start of the pseudo-run and to improve the player's sense of anticipation, the normal background is not displayed in (F) (that is, it is not visible).

Note that an image "not displayed" on the effect display device 1600 means that the image itself is not displayed, and that although the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it has a higher priority than the image. This concept includes both the fact that it is hidden by an image and therefore cannot be seen.

(G) is a state in which the second pseudo series has started and all the decorative symbols have started changing again, and the pending display indicating the change has changed to blue, and the expectation of jackpot has improved. There is. (H) is a state in which the left decorative pattern is stopped in the second pseudo-row. Although not shown, "x2" may be displayed to make it clear that the second pseudo-run is being executed in (G) and (H).

(I) shows a state in which the cut selection effect has started. In (I), a message explaining the performance scheduled for the future in the change is displayed. In Figure 570 (J), the performance that will continue in the future (the performance that makes people expect a jackpot, such as the preview performance and the pending change performance that were decided at the time of the fluctuation start) will continue to be displayed as is, or the performance that will continue in the future (the performance that will continue A message is displayed suggesting that the user has two options: to cut out (not display) the special lottery result (without displaying the performance that makes people expect a jackpot, such as a preview performance or a pending change performance), or to show the special lottery result.

In addition, during the cut selection performance (FIGS. 569 (I), 570 (J), and 570 (K)), the normal background and suspension (the suspension corresponding to the fluctuation during execution), All of the holdings 1 to 4) and the decorative designs are not displayed (that is, they are not visible). Although not shown, the fourth symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600 even while the cut selection performance is being executed. The fourth symbol is, for example, a symbol indicating a special lottery result that is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, a corner area on the effect display device 1600), and is displayed in a smaller size than the decorative pattern. It is.

This allows the player to easily recognize these two options. In the illustrated example, the cut selection effect is executed after the second pseudo series, but in this way, it is also possible to execute some effect that suggests the level of jackpot expectation before the cut selection effect. desirable.

Note that the cut selection performance is usually executed after the performance in which the second series of pseudo sequences in which the background is made invisible is determined. Since the performance that improves the expectation of a jackpot by making the background invisible is executed before the cut selection performance, I feel that the expectation of a jackpot will also improve for the cut selection performance, and the expectation is high. Some players improve.

At (K), a screen is displayed that allows the user to select whether to continue the planned performance as it is, or to cut the planned performance and show the special lottery result. It is assumed that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a cross key that can be operated by the player, and selections are made using the cross key. By providing the cut selection performance, it is possible to satisfy the wishes of both players who want to thoroughly enjoy the expected performance and players who want to know the result immediately.

(L) is the state immediately after "Continue as is" is selected in (K) of the cut selection effect. A display ("x3") indicating that the pseudo-continuous pattern has stopped and the third pseudo-continuous pattern has started is displayed. Further, in (L), the background is normally not displayed (that is, it is not visible). In other words, when "Continue as is" is selected, a performance that increases the jackpot expectation level is executed even after the cut selection performance.

(M) is a state in which the third pseudo-sequence has started and all the decorative patterns have started changing again. (N) is a state in which the left decorative pattern has stopped in the third pseudo-row, and the pending display indicating the change has changed to green, increasing the expectation level. (O) is a state in which the right decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state in the third pseudo-row. (P) is a state in which the message "CHANCE!" indicating that the expectation level is improved is displayed in the ready-to-reach state.

(Q) is a state in which the decorative symbols in the ready-to-reach state move to the upper left and upper right on the effect display device 1600, and the normal background is faded out in order to shift to the SP ready-to-reach effect. (R) is a state in which the faded out normal background is completely invisible. Note that in (Q) and (R), the hold display is displayed as is without fading out, but it may be faded out in the same way as the background.

FIG. 571(S) shows the state at the start of the first half of SP reach, and the title image of the first half of SP reach is displayed. During SP reach, in principle, a reach state decorative pattern and a pending display are displayed. (T) is a state in which the titles in the first half of SP reach have been deleted. (U) is a state in which the specific performance of the first half of SP reach has started. The first half of the SP reach in Figure 571 is an effect in which the main character catches a flying rock and throws the rock away, which develops into the second half of the SP reach, and when the character is crushed by a rock, a failure is announced.

In (V), an image of the main character catching a rock is displayed. In (W), an image of the main character throwing a rock is displayed. In (X), an image indicating that the main character succeeded in the mission in the first half of SP Reach is displayed. (Y) is a state in which the movable body has moved to a position covering the effect display device 1600. By covering the effect display device 1600 with the movable body, a part of the decorative pattern and the pending display are no longer visible. Note that part or all of the pending display indicating the change may be made invisible due to the movable body. Further, the movable body may make all of the decorative patterns invisible, or all of the pending display may become invisible.

(Z) is a state where the second half of SP reach has started, and the title image of the second half of SP reach is displayed. In the second half of SP reach, a battle occurs between the main character and the enemy character, and if the main character wins, a jackpot is announced, and if the enemy character wins, a loss is announced. In addition, in (Z), the movable body that appeared in (X) returns to the reference position, and the entire effect display device 1600 is in a visible state. In addition, at (Z), the pending display indicating the change changes to red, and the expectation of a jackpot is improved.

In (A2), an image in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. In FIG. 571 (B2), an image is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character are attacking each other. Furthermore, in (B2), the pending display indicating the change changes to gold, and the expectation of a jackpot is improved.

In (C2), an image is displayed in which the main character has been defeated by the enemy character. In (D2), the medium decorative pattern is stopped, and the decorative pattern is stopped in a mismatched combination. After that, for example, displays other than the pending display on the effect display device 1600 are faded out and erased. Note that at this time, the pending display may also be faded out. Thereafter, for example, on the normal background, in addition to the pending display, a missed combination decorative pattern is displayed, and the decorative pattern is completely stopped and the pattern is finalized.

In addition, in the case of jackpot fluctuation, instead of (C2), an image of the main character winning over the enemy character is displayed, and instead of (D2), the decorative symbols are stopped at the jackpot combination. After that, for example, displays other than the pending display on the effect display device 1600 are faded out and erased. Note that at this time, the pending display may also be faded out. After that, for example, a jackpot combination decorative pattern is displayed on top of the normal background in addition to the pending display, and the decorative pattern stops completely and the pattern is confirmed.

In addition, after the decorative patterns stop at an incorrect combination in (D2), displays other than the reserved display fade out and disappear, and then when the normal background is made recognizable or when the normal background is made recognizable. It is desirable to output normal BGM or a normal lamp after a predetermined period of time has passed. This is because the normal BGM and normal lamps allow the player to prepare for the next change. Furthermore, even if the next change is not pending and the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is desirable to continue outputting the normal BGM and the normal lamp. The normal BGM is the BGM with the lowest jackpot expectation among the BGMs output during fluctuation in each game state excluding jackpot games and small win games, and the normal lamp is the BGM for each game except jackpot games and small win games. This is the lamp pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation among the lamp patterns output during fluctuation in the current state.

Note that the cut selection effect may appear again after "Continue as is" in FIG. 570(K) is selected. This is because, although the player chooses to continue the planned performance, if he actually continues the performance, he may feel that the performance is redundant. Note that if the timing at which the cut selection effect appears and the timing at which a scheduled effect appears are the same, it is desirable that the cut selection effect be displayed with priority. The timing to make the cut selection effect appear again is, for example, after the timing when entering the third pseudo-sequence is confirmed until reach is established (after (M) or (N) in Figure 570), or during the first half of SP reach. Immediately before the start (after FIG. 570(R)), etc. In other words, in one variation, the number of times the background becomes normally invisible due to something other than the cut selection effect is greater than or equal to the number of times the cut selection effect is executed.

FIG. 573 (K') is the same state as FIG. 570 (K), but with the cursor selected to "I want to know quickly" to show the special lottery result with the effect cut. (L') is a state in which "I want to know quickly" is selected in (K'). Since it was selected to cut the effect, the intermediate effect was significantly (all) cut, and in (L'), an image showing that the main character was defeated by the enemy character, similar to that in Figure 572 (C2) ( In other words, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed. In other words, when "I want to know quickly" is selected, no preview performance that increases the jackpot expectation level is performed after the cut selection performance.

In (M'), as in FIG. 572 (D2), the medium decorative pattern is stopped and the decorative pattern is stopped in a combination of out of alignment. Even if the performance is drastically cut, the variable time selected at the time of winning does not change, so a message is displayed at (N') indicating that there is extra time. For example, the message (N') may be displayed until the variable time period ends, or may be displayed until a predetermined time (eg, 20 seconds) before the variable time period ends.

If the message is deleted before the predetermined time before the end of the variable time, then, for example, on the effect display device 1600, in addition to the pending display, the out-of-place combination decorative pattern is displayed on the normal background, and the decorative pattern is completely The machine stops and the pattern is finalized. Note that the predetermined movable body may operate after the normal background is displayed and before the decorative pattern stops completely. However, the predetermined movable body does not move through the maximum movable width as shown in FIG. It is desirable to

In this case, it is desirable not to output the normal BGM or the normal lamp after the normal background becomes recognizable. This is to prevent players from being misled into thinking that the next variation will start immediately even though there is sufficient time before the next variation starts. Further, it is preferable that the next variation is not suspended and the normal BGM and normal lamp are not output even if the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

As the message (M') indicates, there is a long time period from when the special lottery result is displayed until the end of the variable time period, so the player can complete other errands during that time. In addition, especially as in the illustrated example, if many performances with high expectations for jackpots are scheduled to be executed despite fluctuations in losses, by cutting these performances with high expectations for jackpots, It is possible to suppress the disappointment that the player would feel if the player did not make the cut.

Furthermore, for example, if a winning game is a change that is currently being executed or a change that has been put on hold for the next time onward, if a winning game starts while the player is completing other errands, the player will be disadvantaged. Since there is a risk of giving a profit, a display indicating the remaining variation time of the variation currently being executed may be displayed together with the message.

In addition, for example, when displaying a screen that confirms the start or continuation of a pseudo-continuation (when the pseudo-continuation pattern is stopped), or just before the start of SP reach, you can expect a jackpot after the background is normally invisible. From the first time, which is the time until the performance that improves the level is executed, the period from when the background normally becomes invisible in the cut selection performance until "I want to know quickly" is selected and the change ends The second hour is longer. As a result, even if the performance is cut, the player can secure sufficient time to complete other errands. However, it is desirable that the total first time in one fluctuation be longer than the second time.

On the other hand, the second time may be shorter than each of the first times. For players who have selected ``I want to know quickly'' because they do not have any particular business to attend to and want to avoid disappointment if they lose despite the appearance of a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, they may not be able to receive special lottery results. This is because if the time from when the change is shown to the end of the change is long, the user will feel bored for a long time.

Similarly, in order to ensure that the player has enough time to attend to other matters when the performance is cut, the second period is, for example, from the start of the performance that increases the jackpot expectation level. It is longer than the third time, which is the time until the end, and the fourth time, which is the time from the start of the performance to improve the jackpot expectation level to the execution of the performance to actually improve the jackpot expectation level. On the other hand, the second time may be shorter than the third or fourth time in order to prevent the player who has selected "I want to know quickly" in the cut selection presentation from feeling bored for a long time.

In addition, from the 5th hour, which is included in the 4th hour, from the start of the performance that improves the jackpot expectation level until the performance that actually improves the jackpot expectation level is executed, the performance that actually improves the jackpot expectation level is executed. It is desirable that the sixth period from when the game is played until the end of the performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot is longer. This is because if the performance that actually improves the jackpot expectation level is executed at an early timing, the player will become bored during the sixth period, which is a longer period. On the other hand, the sixth time may be shorter than the fifth time. This is because some players recognize the improvement in their jackpot expectation level at an early timing and want to leisurely enjoy the performance of the sixth hour, which is a long time.

Note that it is desirable that the cut selection effect appears only in a specific variation pattern (for example, less than half of all variation patterns). This is because if the cut selection performance appears in many variable patterns, players who do not particularly want to cut the performance will find it troublesome to select "Continue as is" every time, and their interest will decrease. In particular, in a shortening variation variation pattern (a variation pattern with a short variation time that is selected only when a predetermined number or more are on hold), there is no need to cut the performance, so no cut selection performance appears.

The specific pattern includes, for example, a variation pattern in which the first half of the SP reach is performed, a variation pattern in which the first half and the second half of the SP reach are performed, and other fluctuation patterns with high jackpot expectations. Since the cut selection performance appears in a variable pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, even players who do not want to cut the performance can have expectations for the appearance of the cut selection performance itself.

Note that the cut selection effect may always occur when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the pachinko machine 1 is designed to allow the player to select a production mode at the start of a variation, and to switch to the selected production mode from the next variation, switching the production mode is This is just one example under certain conditions, and the cut selection performance may be made to occur without fail when changing the performance mode is selected.

In addition, in the cut selection performance, when "I want to know quickly" (that is, cut the performance) is selected, there will be a preview performance in the middle (a special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation during execution will be a jackpot or a loss). The announcement effects such as the revival effects (i.e., the special lottery results that correspond to the fluctuations during execution, which directly indicate whether the result is a jackpot or a miss) have been cut significantly (all). (notice effects) may be executed without being cut. Announcement performances such as revival performances are performances that maximize the exhilaration of the player, and are also extremely rare (premium) performances, so they are also useful for players who cut the production in the cut selection performance. This is because it is an extremely important performance.

When a notification effect is performed when the effect is cut in the cut selection effect, for example, the notification effect may be performed between (M') and (N'), or the message of (N') may be The notification effect may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) before the end of the variable time period, and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the notification effect may be performed.

[21-2. Reach change effect]
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a reach change performance which is a performance that allows the player himself to select and change the content of the reach performance that is being executed during fluctuation. FIGS. 574, 575, and 576 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of reach change effects.

Similar to FIG. 570(P), FIG. 574(A) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is in a ready-to-reach state and the message "CHANCE!" is displayed, indicating that the expectation level is further improved. In (A), the normal background is displayed. Further, in (A), the pending display indicating the change is displayed in green, which indicates a higher jackpot expectation than the normal display mode.

(B) shows a state in which the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state move to the upper left and upper right on the effect display device 1600, and are about to fade out and disappear in order to shift to the SP ready-to-reach effect. (C) is a state in which the faded decorative pattern is completely invisible. In (C), the pending display indicating the change has changed to red, indicating even higher jackpot expectations. Note that in (B) to (C), as in FIGS. 572 (Q) to (R), not only the decorative pattern but also the normal background may be faded out and erased.

(D) is the SP reach performance with the highest jackpot expectation among the reach performances that can be performed by the pachinko machine 1 (excluding reach performances that guarantee a jackpot such as full rotation reach), "Shura no Endu Reach" The title is displayed. A special background image (in the figure, a flame-like background) is displayed while "Shura's End Reach" is being executed. "Shura's End Reach" is an SP reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, so when the dedicated background image is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the normal background is displayed. Hereinafter, the dedicated background image will also be referred to as a high expectation background.

(E) shows a state in which the reach change effect has started. In (E), the "Shura no Endu" reach with high expectations for a jackpot is executed, but if the fluctuation is a losing fluctuation, a message is displayed indicating that the player will feel embarrassed. has been done. In (F), a message is displayed indicating that the reach performance can be changed to the "Small Fish Advance Reach" performance, which has the lowest level of expectation among the SP Reach.

In (G), a screen is displayed that allows the user to select whether to continue executing the currently running "Reach for the End of Shura" performance or change it to "Reach for the Advance of Small Fish." Like the cut selection effect described above, the reach effect can be selected using the cross key. By providing a reach change effect, it is possible for players who want to enjoy the highly anticipated "Shura no Endu Reach" and to attract attention from other players by executing "Shura no Endu Reach". It is possible to satisfy the needs of both the players who want to avoid the game (especially those who do not want to attract attention in the case of a losing fluctuation) and the players who want to avoid attracting attention.

As shown in the figure, during the reach change performance, it is desirable that a high expectation background is displayed continuously from the time when the title "Shura's End Reach" is displayed. This is because if the high expectation background is once erased without the player's will, there is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will be diminished.

(H) is the state immediately after "・Strongest Reach "Shura's End" is selected in (G) of the reach change effect, and is a continuation of (D) of "Shura's End Reach" . In (H), an image is displayed in which the hero character heads towards the enemy character to help the heroine character. In (I), an image is displayed in which the main character confronts an enemy character and accumulates power. In FIG. 575(J), an image is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character are hitting each other.

In (K), an image of the main character falling down, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a loss, is displayed. An image of the character falling down is displayed). In (L), the medium decorative pattern stops and the decorative pattern stops in a winning combination (if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the decorative pattern stops in a jackpot combination in (L)). After that, for example, if the special lottery result is a loss, the displays other than the pending display on the performance display device 1600 are faded out and erased, and, for example, a combined decorative pattern of the loser in addition to the pending display is displayed on the normal background. is displayed, the decorative pattern completely stops, the pattern is confirmed, and the special lottery result is a loss, the special background of "Shura no Endu Reach" is displayed without fading out the display on the effect display device 1600. The decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is completely stopped on the image and the pattern is determined.

FIG. 576 (G') is the same state as FIG. 574 (G), but with the cursor selected on "Weakest reach 'Advance of small fry'". (H') is a state in which "・Weakest reach 'Advance of small fry'" was selected in (G') and "Advance reach of small fry" has started. Note that if the player does not operate the cross key, for example, "Small Fish's Advance Reach" may be forcibly selected. In particular, if the player does not operate the cross key during a losing variation, it is preferable to forcibly select "Small Fish's Advance Reach".

Further, for example, a fake reach change effect may occur, and the fake reach change effect does not require any operation by the player, and the predetermined "Advance of small fry" or "Advance reach of small fry" may occur. is executed automatically.

It should be noted that since the ``Small Fish's Advance Reach'' is an SP reach with low expectations for a jackpot, the normal background is displayed even during the reach effect in order to prevent players from having excessive expectations. As shown in the diagram, even if you change the reach effect to the less expected "Small Fish's Advance Reach", the pending display will be the same as when entering the reach change effect (including before entering) (in the figure, it will be red) ) is displayed. This makes it difficult to attract the attention of other players because the "Small Fish's Advance Reach" with a low expectation of a jackpot is being executed, and a pending display with a high expectation of a jackpot is displayed, making it difficult for players to can secretly maintain a sense of anticipation.

In (I'), an image is displayed that foretells that rocks will fall from above the main character. In (J'), an image is displayed showing that rocks are falling from above the main character and that if the main character can avoid the rocks, it will be a jackpot. In (K'), an image is displayed in which the main character is unable to avoid the rock and is crushed by the rock, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. In (L'), the medium decorative pattern is stopped, and the decorative pattern is stopped in an out-of-place combination. Thereafter, for example, each decorative pattern is moved to its normal position and the pattern is finalized.

In addition, since ``Small Fish's Advance Reach'' is a reach effect with low expectations for a jackpot, in order to avoid giving players excessive expectations, the reach effect during normal times (during fluctuations) is It is desirable to output the same sound effects, BGM, and lamps as when the program is not running).

The execution time of "Small Fry's Advance Reach" starts from the start of "Shura's End Reach" in Fig. 574 (D), until "Small Fry's Advance Reach" is selected in Fig. 576 (G'), and the reach change effect is performed. It is desirable that the time is shorter than the time it takes to complete the process. This is because ``Small Fish's Advance Reach'' is a simple reach effect with low expectations for a jackpot, so there is a risk that players will get bored if it takes a long time. Even if "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is selected, the fluctuation time remains unchanged, so while "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is being executed, the symbol will be hidden to adjust the time, and the "Please wait for a while" message will be displayed. A message such as "Please do so" may be displayed.

In addition, it is desirable to make the decorative pattern unrecognizable once when the "small fish march reach" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen switches to "small fish march reach". As a result, the player can expect that the ten-pai symbol in the reach will be promoted (for example, the reach with the decorative pattern "7" has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach with other decorative symbols).

In addition, when "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen switches to "Small Fish's Advance Reach," the image on the effect display device 1600 may be blacked out. It is also possible to display a production that does not appear in either "Reach" or "Small Fish's Advance Reach." By displaying such a special switching screen, the player can feel a sense of anticipation even if he selects "Reach for the advance of small fry."

In addition, when "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen switches to "Small Fish's Advance Reach", the start screen of "Small Fish's Advance Reach" will be displayed so that it will gradually become recognizable. You may. Specifically, for example, the start screen may be gradually faded in from a translucent state, or the movable body may be moved onto the effect display device 1600 when the screen is switched, and then the movable body may be gradually returned to the reference position. or Note that when the start screen is made gradually recognizable, the decorative patterns may also be displayed so as to become gradually recognizable.

On the other hand, when "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is selected in the reach change effect and a special switching screen is displayed when the screen switches to "Small Fish's Advance Reach", a performance with low expectations for jackpot will be performed from now on. However, since some players may not want to see unnecessary effects, the start screen of "Reach of the Small Fry" may be displayed in such a way that it can be immediately recognized. Note that when the start screen is made instantly recognizable, decorative patterns may also be displayed so as to be immediately recognizable.

In addition, although the starting screen can be gradually recognized, the decorative pattern may be displayed so that it can be immediately recognized, or the starting screen can be made immediately recognizable, but the decorative pattern can be gradually recognized. It may be displayed so that it is possible.

In the example mentioned above, when switching to the start screen of "Small Fish's Advance Reach", the same hold display as when entering the reach change effect was displayed, but the hold display was changed to the default setting with the lowest expectation of jackpot. The display mode may be returned to, or the pending display may be hidden. As a result, even the pending display will be changed to the default display or hidden, which has the lowest expectation, when "Small Fish's Advance Reach", which has a low expectation of winning a jackpot, is being performed, making it possible to attract the attention of other players. sex becomes extremely low.

In addition, even when displaying a hold display in the same manner as when entering the reach change effect in "Small Fish's Advance Reach", in order to prevent unnecessary attention from other players, "Small Fish's Advance Reach" When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of "Advance Reach", the pending display may be returned to the default display or may be hidden.

Note that the predetermined time is longer than, for example, the time from the title display of "Shura's End Reach" until "Small Fish's March Reach" is selected and the reach change effect ends (i.e., the display time of the high expectation background). It can be long or short. If the predetermined time is longer than the display time of the high expectation background, and the high expectation background has a higher jackpot expectation than the pending display,

In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, the time it takes for the screen to change to "small fish's advance reach" when "small fish's advance reach" is selected in the reach change effect (i.e., the high expectation background becomes unrecognizable). (The time it takes for the background to become recognizable) may be longer or shorter.

In addition, during the predetermined time, for example, when "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen switches to "Small Fish's Advance Reach", the start screen of "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is gradually changed. In the case of recognition, the time may be longer or shorter than the time from the start of displaying the start screen until the start screen can be completely recognized.

In addition, for "Shura's End Reach", it is a reach performance with extremely high expectations for a jackpot, so it would be good to have a special BGM played, but for "Small Fish's Advance Reach", it is a reach performance with a low expectation for a jackpot, so a special BGM should be played. It is desirable that the BGM of normal fluctuations be played or silently, rather than the BGM of .

For example, during the period from the start of the reach change performance to the end of the explanation of the reach change performance (Fig. 564 (E) and (F)), the dedicated BGM of "Shura no End Reach" is played as is, and the reach change performance is played as is. When it becomes possible to select (FIG. 564(G)), the dedicated BGM is turned off and switched to silence. Since the reach selection screen is silent, the player can calmly think about which reach to select.

In addition, it is desirable that the time of the silent state in the reach change performance is longer than the time of the non-silence state in the reach change performance. This is because if the silent state continues for a long time during a game, other players may notice something unusual and end up attracting attention from other players. On the other hand, in order to make the player think slowly about which reach effect to select, the silent period in the reach changing effect may be shorter than the non-silent period in the reach changing effect.

In addition, for "Shura's End Reach", it is a good idea to output a lamp with a special pattern, which is a reach effect with an extremely high expectation of a jackpot, but for "Advance of Small Fish Reach", it is a reach effect with a low expectation of a jackpot, so It is desirable to output the same lamp as during normal fluctuations that are not in the reach state or when the symbol is stopped.

In addition, during the reach change effect, the lamp output of the special pattern that was output in "Shura's End Reach" may continue, but on the reach selection screen, the player can calmly select which reach. It is desirable to stop the lamp output of the dedicated pattern in order to make the user think about whether to do so.

In addition, for "Shura's End Reach", it is a reach performance with extremely high expectations for a jackpot, so it is good to move a movable body, but for "Small Fish's Advance Reach", it is a reach performance with a low expectation for a jackpot, so it is recommended to move it. It is desirable that the body not move, or even if it does move, it only moves within a predetermined range (for example, 1/2 or less of the range of movement). However, in the event that the jackpot variation is selected as ``Small Fish's Advance Reach'', in order to give the player a sense of exhilaration, for example, when a swinging variation is performed that makes it appear that all the decorative symbols have stopped, etc. , the movable body may be moved larger than the predetermined width.

Also, for example, if the movable body moves from the reference position and is fixed at the position after the movement between the start of "Shura's End Reach" and the start of the reach change performance, during the reach change performance However, the movable body may remain fixed at the position after the operation. This is to make the player aware that the "Shura's End Reach" has started even during the reach change performance. After that, if "Small Fish's Advance Reach" is selected in the reach change effect, a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the screen switches to "Small Fish's Advance Reach", the timing of winning or losing announcement, or the timing of symbol confirmation) etc.) to return the movable body to its reference position.

In addition, in the above example, in the reach change effect, it is possible to select "Shura's March Reach", which has the highest jackpot expectation among SP reaches, and "Small Fish's March Reach", which has the lowest jackpot expectation among SP reaches. However, in addition to or in place of the "small fry advance reach", a reach with the lowest expected jackpot (for example, a normal reach) may be selectable.

[21-3. Sound presence/absence change production]
The sound presence/absence pending change effect will be described below. Normally, when the mode of the hold display changes, it is accompanied by a sound effect, but in the sound effect/hold change effect described below, the hold display becomes unrecognizable with the sound effect, and the mode of the hold display changes. There is a sound effect in which the pending display is promoted to a state with a high expectation of a jackpot, and a soundless display in which the pending display becomes invisible without sound effects and the state of the pending display is not promoted to a state with a high expectation of a jackpot. It is doable.

In the sound presence/absence hold change effect, if a sound effect is performed, there is a possibility that the hold may further change in the form of jackpot expectation level in the change (i.e., the game after the sound effect is performed). (In the process of progressing, the sound presence/absence pending change performance that makes it possible to execute the sound presence/absence pending change performance again continues), and if the soundless performance is performed, the said hold has a high expectation of a jackpot even further in the said fluctuation. It is confirmed that there will be no change in the mode (that is, the sound presence/absence pending change effect will not be executed again in the course of the game after the soundless effect is performed, and the sound presence/absence pending change effect will end). do. Therefore, in the sound presence/absence pending change performance, the player desires that the sound performance continues without the no sound performance appearing.

FIG. 577 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sound presence/absence pending change effect. (A) shows the state at the end of the variation immediately before the sound presence/absence pending change effect is executed. (B) is a state in which variation has started in which the sound presence/absence pending variation effect is executed, and all decorative patterns are varying.

(C) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is stopped. In (C), a sound effect is performed, and the sound effect "Piron!!" is sounded, and the hold display indicating the change is obscured by smoke and becomes unrecognizable. (D) is a state in which it is possible to recognize that the smoke that appeared due to the effect with sound is hidden, and that the pending color indicating the change has been promoted to blue. Since the effect with sound has been performed, the change effect with and without sound pending is continued, and there is a possibility that the display changes to a mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot.

Note that the timing of outputting the sound effect in the sound presentation may be before, at the same time, or after the appearance timing of the display that hides the hold display indicating the change. By outputting the sound effect before the timing of the appearance of the display, the player can quickly see that the hold status will be promoted, and his/her expectations are immediately increased. By outputting the sound effect at the same time as the appearance of the display, the synergistic effect of auditory and visual effects can improve the player's expectations. By outputting the sound effect after the appearance timing of the display, when the display appears, the player can watch with a sense of tension as to whether the performance to be performed will be a performance with sound or a performance without sound. I can do it.

(E) is a state in which the right decorative pattern is stopped in a non-reaching state. In (E), a sound effect is performed, the sound effect "Piron!!" is sounded, and a sword is stabbed into the hold display indicating the change, making the hold display unrecognizable. (F) is a state in which it is possible to recognize that the sword that appeared as a result of the sound effect has been broken, and that the hold indicating the change has been promoted to green. Since the effect with sound has been performed, the change effect with and without sound pending is continued, and there is a possibility that the display changes to a mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot.

(G) is a state in which the pseudo-connection pattern indicating the start of a pseudo-connection pattern has stopped in the medium decorative pattern. In (G), a soundless effect is performed, and without sound effects, a pink heart is pierced into the hold display indicating the change, making the hold display unrecognizable. In (H), the heart that appears due to the soundless effect is enlarged, and the change continues to be suspended, making it unrecognizable. By making the hold display unrecognizable even in a soundless performance, it is possible to create a slight sense of expectation in the player that the hold may be promoted even in a soundless performance (the effect described above). This sense of anticipation can be created if the timing at which the sound is output is set later than the timing at which the display that hides the hold display appears.

In (I), the heart is enlarged and faded out to be hidden, and it is possible to recognize that the hold indicating the change remains green. Since the soundless performance has been performed, the sound presence/absence pending change performance is completed, and in this variation, the pending change to a mode with higher jackpot expectation than green is not performed. Note that sound effects may also be output in the soundless production, and even in this case, even if the soundless production is executed (i.e., the display that has not been promoted even if the pending display becomes recognizable) After execution), it is better to prevent the pending display from being promoted during the change, but it is not limited to preventing the pending display from being promoted.

Note that a common effect image is used to make the hold display unrecognizable in both sound and soundless effects (smoke image, sword image, and heart image in the illustrated example), but soundless effects If performed, a dedicated effect image may be used. For example, the pink heart effect image in (G) and (H) is used only for soundless effects, and when the heart effect image is used for sound effects, the red heart effect image is used. It is a good idea to make it possible to do so. By preparing a special performance image for a soundless performance (an image that is not present in a performance that makes the hold display unrecognizable when changing to a hold in a sound performance), for example, if you are wearing earphones etc. Even a player who is not listening to the sound output from 1 can easily be made aware that the pending display color will not be promoted any further.

Further, after the soundless effect is executed, it is desirable that the effect that makes the hold display unrecognizable is not executed until the variation ends. This is because if a performance that makes the pending display unrecognizable is performed after the soundless performance is executed, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that the sound presence/absence pending change performance has not yet ended.

In addition, after the soundless performance is executed (especially when the sound presence/absence pending change performance ends with a pending display (for example, blue) with low expectations for a jackpot), it becomes difficult to maintain the player's interest in the fluctuation. Therefore, even if you do not perform any preview performance that makes you expect a jackpot (excluding the jackpot confirmation performance that announces that it is a jackpot) from the time the soundless production is executed until the symbols are fixed and stopped. good. In addition, as shown in FIG. 577(A), the decorative pattern is also made to swing only around or in the vicinity of the position displayed when the decorative pattern comes to a fixed stop. It is preferable to continue performing the shaking fluctuation until the time of , but if a jackpot confirmation performance is to appear during the shaking fluctuation, the decorative pattern may be changed to a different fluctuation from the shaking fluctuation.

Although the hold display indicating this change is unrecognizable in the performance with sound, there is a possibility that the player has forgotten the color of the hold display before the start of the performance with sound. For example, if the original pending display color is blue, the expectation of a jackpot will not be that high even if it is promoted to green, but if the original pending display color is green, the expectation of a jackpot will be high because it will be promoted to red or higher. is high. In other words, there is a difference in the sense of anticipation felt by the player during the performance with sound, depending on the color of the hold display before the start of the performance with sound. Therefore, when the hold display indicating the change in the sound effect is unrecognizable, the second liquid crystal display, which is a display device different from the effect display device 1600, or a predetermined light emitting device (hereinafter these devices are called the second hold display) (referred to as a display device) may display a pending display color before the start of the sound effect. Similarly, for the soundless performance, the second hold display device may display the hold display color before the start of the soundless performance.

In addition, in the case where the second hold display device shows the hold display color before the start of the sound effect, a predetermined effect is performed to make the hold display shown by the second hold display device unrecognizable. The pending display may be promoted.

In addition, in the case where the second hold display device shows the hold display color before the start of the soundless effect in the soundless effect, the hold display color on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time after the end of the soundless effect (for example, the hold display color on the effect display device 1600 in the soundless effect) Although the hold display on these devices immediately becomes unrecognizable after a period of time (shorter than the time during which it becomes unrecognizable), it is desirable that the hold display on the effect display device 1600 does not immediately become unrecognizable. The hold display on the second hold display device is only an auxiliary display for checking the hold display color when the hold display on the effect display device 1600 becomes unrecognizable. This is to return the player's attention to the performance display device 1600 where the main performance is performed after it is shown that the reserved color will not be promoted.

Hereinafter, the data used to execute the sound presence/absence pending change effect and the processing for executing the sound presence/absence pending change effect will be explained. FIG. 578 is an example of a final pending color distribution table showing the final color distribution of the pending display when the sound presence/absence pending change effect is performed in the deviation variation. FIG. 579 is an example of the final pending color distribution table showing the final color distribution of the pending display when the sound presence/absence pending change performance is performed in the jackpot variation. These final reserved color distribution tables are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

The final reserved color distribution table defines the final reserved color for each variation pattern. The final pending color distribution is set so that the expectation of jackpot increases in the order of white < blue < green < red < gold. The rainbow color is selected only in the jackpot variation, that is, it is a reserved color for jackpot confirmation.

FIG. 580 is an example of a pending color distribution table at the start of a variation, which shows the distribution of pending colors at the start of a variation in which a sound presence/absence pending change effect is performed. The variation start pending color distribution table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example. The hold color distribution table at the start of variation defines, for each final hold color, the hold color at the start of change when the sound presence/absence hold change effect is executed.

In other words, when the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the sound presence/absence pending change effect, the peripheral control MPU determines the final pending color from the final pending color distribution table based on the variation pattern, and based on the determined final pending color, determines the final pending color at the start of the variation. The pending color at the start of variation is determined from the pending color distribution table.

FIG. 581 is an example of a hold change timing table that defines the timing at which the sound presence/absence hold change effect can be executed. The pending change timing table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

In the example of FIG. 581, the timings at which the sound presence/absence pending change effect can be executed are when the left decorative symbol stops, when the right decorative symbol stops, when the first pseudo-continuous symbol stops, and when the left decorative symbol stops in the second pseudo-continuous series. time, when the right decorative symbol stops in the second pseudo series, when the second pseudo series stops, when the left decorative symbol stops in the third pseudo series, when the right decorative symbol stops in the third pseudo series, When a reach caption occurs, when the title of the first half of SP reach is displayed, when the first half of SP reach is started, in the middle of the first half of SP reach (at the specified timing), when the second half of SP reach develops, when the title of the second half of SP reach is displayed, when the second half of SP reach is shown The start time, the middle stage (predetermined timing) of the second half of SP reach, and the final cut-in time of the second half of SP reach are defined.

Note that the timing shown in FIG. 581 is just an example, and the sound presence/absence/hold change performance, which is a performance that makes the hold display unrecognizable, may be executable at other timings as well. For example, during a preview performance that indicates that a pseudo link may be executed, during a full-screen advance preview performance (a preview performance in which one moving image is displayed on the entire performance display device 1600), from a normal reach performance to an SP The timing of developing into a reach effect, the time of the first half of SP reach indicating whether or not to branch to the second half of SP reach, the time of a specific preview effect (for example, a preview effect indicating that SP reach will start from now), SP When a jackpot expectation increase effect occurs during reach (for example, "Chance" in red is displayed), when a predetermined movable body moves, and when a branch effect indicating whether the state changes (for example, when 50 changes are completed) Assuming that there is a time-saving state A that ends and a time-saving state B that ends when 100 fluctuations are completed, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving state being stayed in the 50th fluctuation of the time-saving state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B. There are performances to announce (that is, performances to announce whether the state will fall to the normal state or the time-saving state will continue).

By making it possible to execute the sound presence/absence hold change performance, which is a performance that makes the hold display unrecognizable, at early timings such as when the left decorative symbol stops or the right decorative symbol stops, the player can recognize the change from an early stage. can be expected to be a jackpot fluctuation. In addition, by making it possible to execute a sound presence/absence pending change performance at the timing when the jackpot expectation level increases, such as when a pseudo consecutive symbol stops, when a reach telop occurs, or when the jackpot expectation level increases during SP reach, it is possible to perform a sound presence/absence pending change effect. The synergistic effect can improve the player's expectations.

In addition, by making it possible to perform a sound presence/absence pending change effect that makes the pending display unrecognizable after a ready-to-win state is formed, even if the pending display with low expectations for a jackpot develops into a reach effect. However, since there is still a possibility that the status of the pending display may be upgraded, the player can maintain a sense of anticipation. Especially in the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach (particularly at a slow timing such as the last cut-in in the second half of SP reach), by making it possible to execute the sound presence/absence pending change effect, SP Even when the reach is in progress, the player does not lose hope for winning the jackpot until the end.

A display that makes the pending display unrecognizable during a preview display that indicates that a pseudo-link may be executed, a full-screen pre-read preview display, or a specific preview display that increases expectations for the change in question. By making it possible to execute a certain sound presence/absence pending change performance, the expectation level of the jackpot has increased due to the pending change, and the player's expectation is that there is a high possibility that the predicted contents will actually be executed. can be improved.

In addition, by making it possible to perform a sound presence/absence hold change effect that makes the hold display unrecognizable during a branch effect that determines whether or not the state will transition, for example, if a play that strongly indicates that the time-saving state ends will occur. You can also expect to win the jackpot due to the fluctuations that are occurring. This is especially effective if the game machine is of a type (so-called falling type) in which the opportunity for ending the probability change is a lottery.

In addition, the final color in the sound presence/absence pending change effect includes colors with low jackpot expectations such as white and blue, so the sound presence/absence pending change effect may be performed even in variations where the decorative pattern does not form a reach state. good. In other words, for example, if the timings such as when the left decorative symbol stops, when the right decorative symbol stops, and when the full-screen pre-read notice is set as the timing at which the sound presence/absence pending change effect can be performed, when the decorative symbol does not form a ready-to-reach state, It is also possible to perform a change performance with or without sound.

In addition, for example, if the timings at which the sound presence/absence pending change effect can be executed are only when the left decorative symbol stops, when the right decorative symbol stops, and when the full-screen pre-read notice is performed, the reach state can be executed even in the fluctuation that forms the reach state. It is possible to end the sound presence/absence pending change effect before the reach state is formed, and the player's consciousness can be focused on the sound presence/absence pending change effect before the reach state is formed, and on the reach effect after the reach state is formed. can. It should be noted that the corresponding effects are performed at the timings shown in FIG. 581 (for example, the effect in which the left decorative pattern stops when the left decorative pattern is stopped) and the sound presence/absence hold change effect are performed at the same time (in the same situation). Therefore, although the pending display cannot be recognized, the player can recognize both performances.

FIG. 582 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process that is executed every time the timing shown in FIG. 581 arrives during a variation in which the sound presence/absence pending change effect is being executed. When the timing comes, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the performance non-execution flag is on (S5821). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the performance non-execution flag is on (S5821: YES), it ends the process.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the performance non-execution flag is off (S5821: NO), the peripheral control MPU determines whether the current pending display mode is the final pending color (S5822). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the current pending display mode is the final pending color (S5822: YES), it either executes neither the sound presentation nor the no-sound presentation, or executes the no-sound presentation. are performed according to a predetermined distribution (for example, 2/3 of the former and 1/3 of the latter) (S5823).

Subsequently, in step S5823, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute a soundless effect (S5824). If the peripheral control MPU determines not to perform the soundless effect (S5824: NO), it ends the process. If the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the soundless effect (S5824: YES), it sets the effect non-execution flag to ON (S5825), and ends the process. As a result, when the soundless effect is executed, the sound presence/absence pending variation effect ends (the sound presence/absence pending change effect is not displayed in the subsequent game progress process).

If the peripheral control MPU determines that the current pending display mode is not the final pending color (S5822: NO), it executes a promotion lottery according to a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) (S5826). The peripheral control MPU determines whether the promotion lottery in step S5826 was won (S5827). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the promotion lottery has not been won (S5827: NO), the process ends.

If the peripheral control MPU determines that the promotion lottery has been won (S5827: YES), the peripheral control MPU performs a sound effect, promotes the pending display mode (S5828), and ends the process. However, even if it is determined that the peripheral control MPU has not won the promotion lottery, the current timing is the last timing at which the last sound presence/absence pending change performance can be executed in the fluctuation pattern being executed. If it is determined, it is preferable to forcibly perform a sound effect and promote the pending display mode to the final color.

Note that the promotion probability of the promotion lottery in step S5826 may vary depending on the current timing and the current pending display color. For example, the promotion probability may be higher or lower as the current timing is closer to the last timing at which the last sound presence/absence pending change effect can be executed. Further, for example, the closer the current pending display color is to the final color, the higher or lower the promotion probability may be. Furthermore, in one performance with sound, the reserved color may be promoted by one level, or the reserved color may be promoted by multiple levels.

In addition, the promotion lottery in step S5826 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 581 or other timing described in paragraph [5264], and if the soundless change effect is selected, the presence or absence of sound will be changed in the subsequent game progress process. Although the pending change effect is not displayed, the change effect with sound may be made to appear even after the change effect without sound appears. Even in that case, cases without sound appear at a higher rate than cases with sound. This allows the player to have a slight expectation that even if the soundless change effect is executed, the change effect with sound may be revived.

[21-4. Hold & zone change production]
The holding and zone change production will be explained below. A hold & zone change performance is a hold & zone change performance in which multiple chance times arrive, and at each chance time, either a performance with a predetermined sound effect or a performance without a predetermined sound effect is performed. . If a predetermined sound effect is sounded during a chance time, a hold change is performed, and when a predetermined sound effect is not sounded during a chance time, a zone change is performed. Therefore, in the hold & zone change production, depending on the current situation during the chance time, the player may think, "Let's play a production that has sound effects!" or "Let's play a production that doesn't have sound effects!" A performance that changes what you think is a suspension and zone change performance. This will be explained in detail below.

FIGS. 583 and 584 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the hold & zone change effect. FIG. 583(A) shows the state at the end of the variation immediately before the variation where the hold & zone change effect is performed. (B) shows the state at the start of the variation in which the hold & zone change effect is performed. All the decorative patterns have started to change, and the pending display indicating the change has changed to blue. (C) shows a state in which the hold & zone change effect has started, and the title of the hold & zone change effect is displayed. In addition, in (C), the display position has moved to the upper left of the effect display device 1600 while all the decorative patterns are still changing.

In (D) to (G), an explanation of the holding and zone change effects will be given. (D) shows that there are 10 chances to change the mode and zone of the pending display. (E) shows that a hold change is performed when a predetermined sound effect is sounded, and that a zone change is performed when a predetermined sound effect is not sounded.

In (F), a table showing the pending display color and the jackpot expectation level corresponding to the zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At the time (F), the reserved color is blue and the zone is the normal zone, so the corresponding jackpot expectation level "1%" is displayed in shading.

In addition, the modes displayed in the hold & zone change effect are blue, green, and red, and the colors change in the order of blue → green → red, and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of blue < green < red. It shall be higher. Furthermore, if a sound effect is produced during a chance time while the hold display is red, the hold display mode will return from red to blue, that is, the change in the hold display mode will loop. do.

In other words, there is a situation where the expectation level of jackpot decreases when a sound effect is produced (for example, the pending display is red and when a sound effect is produced, the pending display becomes blue). Even if the pending display changes to red, which indicates the highest expectation of a jackpot, the player can enjoy the performance with a sense of tension. In addition, by looping the pending display mode during the pending change, it is possible to show the player multiple times the change to the pending display that has a high expectation of a jackpot, so it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation many times. can.

In addition, the zones that stay during reservation and zone change are normally the five zones of conqueror, conqueror, domination, and domination, and the changes occur in the order of normal → conquest → conquest → domination → domination, and usually = conquest < conquest. It shall be higher in the order of destruction < overlord = conquering. In other words, the zone change from Overlord to Domination is a zone change in which the expectation of jackpot decreases. Furthermore, when the zone is a quest, if a production in which no sound effect is produced occurs during chance time, the zone returns from the quest to the conqueror, that is, the change in the zone is looped.

In other words, there is a situation in which the expectation level of jackpot decreases when a performance that does not produce a sound effect occurs (for example, when the zone is dominated and a production that does not produce a sound effect occurs, the zone becomes normal). Even if you become the conqueror or conqueror with the highest expectation of winning the jackpot, you can approach the performance with a sense of tension. Further, by looping the zones during zone changes, it is possible to show the player multiple times the change to a zone with a high expectation of a jackpot, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved many times.

Furthermore, as described above, when changing zones, even if the zone changes from the normal zone to the champion zone, the jackpot expectation level does not change, but when the player changes from the champion zone to the king zone, the jackpot expectation level increases rapidly. As a result, it is possible to realize a sharp performance that tantalizes the player when changing from the normal zone to the conqueror zone, and instantly increases the player's sense of anticipation when changing from the conqueror zone to the conqueror zone. .

For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the hold change and zone change in the hold & zone change performance change only one step at each chance time, and although it is described as a zone, the performance state is managed in the control. This is synonymous with changing the production mode because it is changing the production mode.

In (G), a message indicating that the shaded area in the table in (F) is the current state is displayed. (H) is a preparation state for hold & zone change performance. A gauge 5831 indicating the remaining time of the hold & zone change effect and a zone display 5832 indicating the current zone state are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (H), the arrow displayed at the lower left of the gauge 5831 moves to the right as time passes, and when it moves to the lower right of the gauge 5832, the hold & zone change effect ends. Furthermore, each time the arrow moves to a blacked-out part of the gauge 5831, either a pending change or a zone change is executed. In other words, each blacked-out area in the gauge 5831 means a chance time in the hold & zone change performance. In the illustrated example, ten chance times are executed.

(I) is a state in which the arrow displayed under the gauge 5831 has started to move to the right in the hold & zone change effect. FIG. 584(J) shows a state in which the first chance time has arrived in the hold & zone change effect. In (J), a predetermined sound effect "Piron!!" sounds, and the pending display mode ("?") indicating the change and the current zone ("?? Zone") indicated by the zone display 5832 are recognized. It has become impossible.

Furthermore, since the sound effect was played during the first chance time, it is certain that the game will change to hold, but by making both the form of the hold display and the current zone unrecognizable, the player will notice that both change. We can expect that. Similarly, when the sound effect is not produced during the chance time, it is desirable that both the mode of the hold display and the current zone be made unrecognizable. It should be noted that even if it is unrecognizable, the mode of the pending display indicating the change in question and the current zone indicated by the zone display 5832 can be erased, covered with another image, or hidden with a movable object to make it unrecognizable. good.

(K) is the state immediately before the end of the first chance time. Since the sound effect is sounded during the first chance time, the pending display indicating the change changes from blue to green, and the zone remains the normal zone. Note that when the pending display indicating the change from blue to green becomes recognizable, it is desirable that the sound effect "Piron!!" continues to be output. This is because a synergistic effect is produced between the sense of expectation obtained from the visual sense of the pending display after the change and the sense of expectation obtained from the sense of hearing due to the sound effect, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Note that while the hold and zone change effect is being executed, it is desirable that BGM dedicated to the hold and zone change effect be outputted in order to heighten the player's expectations. Even when a pending change is made in a chance time, the dedicated BGM is output as is.

Note that, for example, the time from when the pending display becomes unrecognizable during the chance time until the changed pending display becomes recognizable is longer than the time from when the zone display 5832 becomes unrecognizable during the chance time to when the changed zone display 5832 becomes recognizable. It takes a long time to become recognizable. Zone change effects appear less frequently than hold change effects, which are also performed in various effects other than hold & zone change effects, so it takes a long time for the player to recognize the zone after the change. can provide a sense of tension.

Conversely, the time from when the pending display becomes unrecognizable during the chance time until the changed pending display becomes recognizable is longer than the time from when the zone display 5832 becomes unrecognizable during the chance time to when the changed zone display 5832 becomes recognizable. The time it takes to become recognizable may be short. This is because the zone change performance is a performance that appears less frequently than the pending change performance, so some players want to know the zone after the change as soon as possible.

(L) is a state in which the second chance time has arrived in the hold & zone change performance. In (L), the sound effect "Piron!!" that was output at the timing of (J) does not sound, and the mode of the pending display indicating the change and the current zone indicated by the zone display 5832 are unrecognizable. . Note that a sound effect different from the sound effect "Piron!!" outputted at timing (J) may be output as a false sound.

(M) is the state immediately before the end of the second chance time. Since the sound effect was not produced during the second chance time, the pending display indicating the change remains green, and the zone has changed from the normal zone to the conqueror zone. In order to create a sense of anticipation in the player at an early stage, a display indicating the zone after the change ("Overlord?" in the figure) is produced before the contents of the zone display 5832 after the change can be recognized. It may also be displayed on the display device 1600. Thereafter, at each chance time, a production with a sound effect or a production without a sound effect similarly occurs.

In addition, when a zone change is performed during chance time, for example, at the timing when the zone indicated by the zone display 5832 becomes unrecognizable, the special BGM for the hold & zone change effect is muted, and the zone after the change is recognized. BGM corresponding to the zone after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when the zone became available is output. Thereby, even players who have not seen the zone change can be made aware of the zone after the change by the BGM. Note that after the predetermined time period has elapsed, it is preferable to output the dedicated BGM for the hold & zone change effect again.

By performing the hold & zone change effect as shown in FIGS. 583 and 584 in one change, it is possible to hold the change multiple times and change the zone multiple times in one change, and the game It is possible to realize a tense performance that greatly raises or lowers the expectations of the audience.

FIG. 585 is an example of a chance time frequency table. The chance time number table is a table used to determine the number of chance times in the hold & zone change performance, and is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the hold & zone change effect, it determines the combination of the hold color and zone (final hold color and final zone) at the end of the hold & zone change effect. In addition, it is assumed that the distribution for selecting the combination of the final reserved color and the final zone in the jackpot fluctuation and the loss fluctuation is determined in advance so that the jackpot expectation level becomes the value in the table shown in FIG. 583 (F). .

The peripheral control MPU refers to the chance time number table and selects one chance time number from the number of chance times (the number marked with "○" in the diagram) corresponding to the determined combination of final reserved color and final zone. Determine. For example, if the final reserved color is blue and the final zone is normal, the peripheral control MPU determines the number of chance times from 5, 8, or 11 times. Note that for each combination of the final pending color and final zone, the distribution for selecting the corresponding number of chance times is, for example, equal (that is, for example, if the final pending color is blue and the final zone is normal, 5 times, 8 times, or 11 times are each selected with a probability of 1/3).

If the variation in which the hold & zone change production is executed is a jackpot variation, the peripheral control MPU will generate a sound effect with a probability of 6/10 (i.e., hold change) and with a probability of 4/10 at each chance time. The performance is performed by distributing no sound (that is, zone change). In addition, if the variation in which the hold & zone change production is executed is a missed variation, the peripheral control MPU will set the sound effect to sound with a probability of 4/10 and a probability of 6/10 to produce a sound effect in each chance time. Execute a performance that does not exist.

However, in the hold & zone change performance, in order to reach the final hold color and final zone, there are restrictions on the number of times the performance with sound effects and the performance without sound effects can be performed, so the performance with sound effects or the sound effect may be performed according to the restrictions. There are situations where it is decided to execute a no effect.

Specifically, for example, assume that the hold & zone change effect starts when the hold display is blue and the zone is the normal zone, the final hold color is blue, the final zone is the overlord zone, and the number of chance times is 10. Suppose that it is times. In this case, according to the table in FIG. 583(F), a total of 10 productions with sound effects and productions without sound effects are performed to reach the blue pending display and the conqueror zone from the blue pending display and normal zone. In order to do this, it is necessary to perform 3n times of presentation with sound effects and 5m+2 presentations without sound effects.

Here, n and m are both integers greater than or equal to 0, and 3n+(5m+2)=10, so (n, m)=(1, 1). Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to perform three productions with sound effects and seven productions without sound effects.

For example, if a performance with sound effects has been performed three times before the last chance time, a restriction occurs that prevents the performance with sound effects from being performed any more. Therefore, in this case, after the effects with sound effects have been executed three times, the effects without sound effects are always executed regardless of the above-mentioned distribution. Similarly, if 7 productions with sound effects have been executed before the last chance time, there will be a restriction that no production without sound effects can be executed any more, so 7 productions without sound effects will be executed. After that, regardless of the above-mentioned distribution, the effect without sound effects will always be performed.

Furthermore, zone change effects that appear less frequently can provide players with a stronger sense of anticipation than various effects other than hold and zone change effects, so be sure to use sound effects during the first chance time. It is also possible to perform a zone change by performing an effect without.

For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the hold change and zone change in the hold & zone change performance are performed in only one stage in one chance time, but in order to rapidly increase the expectations of the players. , may change in multiple stages in one chance time. For example, by using a plurality of stages of change, the zone change may be performed only once in the hold & zone change performance, and only the hold change may be performed during the remaining chance time. By executing the pending change more often than the zone change, a stronger sense of anticipation can be obtained.Since the number of zone changes is small, the player can concentrate on the zone change.

The pending change may be performed only once and only the zone change may be performed during the remaining chance time. By performing zone changes more often than pending changes, the player can enjoy many zone changes that appear less frequently and can provide a stronger sense of anticipation.

Note that the hold & zone change effect may always be executed in the next variation after a predetermined reach effect (for example, SP reach effect). This is to restore the expectations of players who have been disappointed due to their failure in the predetermined reach performance. In that case, in order to reduce the player's sense of disappointment, the zone may be changed by always performing a production without sound effects during the first chance time.

Note that in the examples of FIGS. 583 and 584, the normal background is not displayed in the hold & zone change effect, but the normal background may be displayed. For example, in a hold & zone change effect, the background dedicated to the hold & zone change effect may change to the normal background before and after the hold change or zone change (in other words, the hold display and zone after the change are recognizable). (changes to normal background when the background changes). In particular, for example, when there is a pending change or zone change that demotes the jackpot expectation level (in other words, when the pending display or zone becomes recognizable after being demoted), by changing to the normal background, the jackpot expectation level It is possible to make the player more strongly aware that the player has been demoted.

Additionally, the normal background may remain displayed before and after the hold change or zone change (that is, the hold display or zone before the change is recognizable, the hold display or zone is unrecognizable, or The background is usually visible through the pending display and zones are recognizable before the change). In particular, for example, hold change is a performance that is performed in various performances other than hold & zone change performances, so even if a special background is displayed, I wonder if it is just stirring up expectations. This is because some players may feel suspicious.

In addition, in the above example, since both the hold change performance and the zone change performance are included in the hold & zone change performance, it was explained as if the hold change performance and the zone change performance constituted one performance. However, the above-mentioned hold change effect and the above-described zone change effect may be different effects. In other words, there may be a variation in which only the above-described pending change effect is performed, or there may be a variation in which only the above-described zone change effect is performed.

[21-5. [Lights in front of the wind]
The light performance in front of the wind will be explained below. In the Wind Front Light performance, at the start of the performance, the pending display indicating the fluctuation is displayed in gold, which is the mode with the highest expectation of jackpot. Then, as time passes, the hold display indicating the change gradually becomes difficult to recognize (for example, the transparency gradually increases, the area gradually decreases, etc.).

If the pending display becomes completely unrecognizable at a predetermined timing, when the pending display becomes recognizable again, the pending display changes (demotes) to a mode with a lower jackpot expectation. ing. Further, if the pending display does not become unrecognizable at the predetermined timing, the pending display is displayed in the same manner. In other words, the player expects that the pending display will not become completely unrecognizable in the front lighting performance. Hereinafter, there are four types of pending display displayed in the front light effect: blue, green, red, and gold, and the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of blue < green < red < gold.

FIG. 586 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light effect in front of the wind. (A) shows the state at the end of the fluctuation immediately before the front light effect is executed. (B) shows the state at the start of the fluctuation in which the front light effect is executed. All decorative patterns begin to change, and the normal background becomes invisible. In addition, the title image of the light effect before the wind is displayed, and the mode of the pending display indicating the change changes to gold, which indicates the highest jackpot expectation.

In (C), a timer set to 15 seconds remaining is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the time remaining on the timer reaches 15 seconds, 10 seconds, and 5 seconds, the mode of the pending display indicating the change may be demoted. In the example of FIG. 586, the hold display mode is not demoted when there are 15 seconds left.

(D) shows a state where 3 seconds have passed since (C), and the pending display indicating the change has gradually become more transparent and difficult to recognize. (E) shows a state in which the timer has 10 seconds remaining. An image of smoke is displayed over the pending display indicating the variation, making the pending display indicating the variation completely unrecognizable. Although the pending display itself indicating the change is recognizable, the mode of the pending display indicating the change may be made unrecognizable (for example, the pending display indicating the change may be made gray (in the pending change effect). (colors that are not selected) or replace them with images of different shapes, etc.).

(F) shows a state in which one second has passed since the hold display indicating the change became completely unrecognizable. In (F), the smoke image displayed in (E) has been erased, and the pending display indicating the change can now be recognized. Furthermore, the pending display indicating the change has been demoted to red. Thereafter, similar effects will be performed as time passes. Note that when the mode of the hold display is demoted in the wind front light performance, it is desirable not to output the sound effect when the mode of the hold display is promoted in another hold change performance. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the mode of the pending display has been upgraded.

In addition, for example, the time period in which the pending display indicating the change in question in (E) is made unrecognizable makes the pending display indicating the change in question unrecognizable in other pending change performances (i.e., performances in which the mode of the pending display is promoted). shorter than time. Making the pending display unrecognizable in the front light effect is the same as demoting the mode of the pending display, so by shortening the period of time during which the pending display is rendered unrecognizable, players' expectations can be lowered while the display is rendered unrecognizable. The decrease can be suppressed.

Conversely, the time period in which the suspension display indicating the change in question in (E) is made unrecognizable may be longer than the time period during which the suspension display indicating the variation in question is rendered unrecognizable in other suspension change performances. Making the pending display unrecognizable in the front light effect is the same as demoting the mode of the pending display, so by making it unrecognizable for a longer period of time, players are reminded of the reality that the mode of the pending display is demoted. It is possible to gradually make the player accept the suspension display over time, and when the suspension display becomes recognizable, it is possible to alleviate the shock of the player when he sees the mode of the suspension display after being demoted.

Further, the time during which the hold display indicating the change in question in (E) becomes unrecognizable may be the same as the time during which the hold display indicating the change becomes unrecognizable in other hold change performances. This is because, since these times are the same, when the hold display becomes recognizable again in the front light performance, the player can expect, even if only for a moment, that the hold has been upgraded.

Note that when the hold display indicating the change is made unrecognizable in (E), hold displays corresponding to other changes (for example, all hold displays) may also be made unrecognizable. In this case, when the pending displays corresponding to other changes are made recognizable again, these pending displays may be changed to increase the jackpot expectation level. As a result, becoming unrecognizable is the same as being demoted for the pending display that indicates the change, but other pending displays will be promoted if they become unrecognizable, thereby reducing player disappointment. can.

In (G), in the wind front lighting performance, the pending display indicating the change is finally demoted to green. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the fluctuation when the wind front light performance is executed, and the pending display indicating the change in the wind front light performance has been demoted from gold, which has the highest jackpot expectation, for example, the timing when the jackpot is announced. Then, it is a good idea to change the pending display indicating the change back to gold. By redisplaying the golden pending display with the highest expectation of jackpot, a performance like a revival performance can be realized, and the player can be made to strongly recognize that he has won the jackpot.

After the end of the wind front light display, a golden pending display is displayed repeatedly with increasing and decreasing transparency until the golden pending display is completely recognized (for example, by reaching maximum transparency or by covering it with a smoke image in the same way as the wind front light display). If it becomes impossible, a red pending display with the next highest expectation of jackpot is displayed afterwards, and if it is not completely unrecognizable, a golden pending display is displayed as is. Thereby, even after the wind front light performance ends, a performance similar to the wind front light performance is executed, so that the player can be left with the afterglow of the wind front light performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 586, the wind front light effect is executed with all the decorative patterns fluctuating (no reach is formed), but when a predetermined reach effect is being executed or a predetermined When it is certain that the reach effect will be executed, the light effect in front of the wind may be executed. Typical reach effects include improving the player's expectations with the reach effect itself, improving the player's expectations with cut-in images during the reach effect, lines and messages in red letters, etc. When a reach effect occurs, the hold is promoted, etc., but when the reach effect is executed, the hold display is changed to the state with the highest expectation of jackpot, giving a sense of surprise, but during the reach effect, Since a performance that makes people expect to hold the hold is novel (in extreme terms, it can be said that it is a performance that disrespects the reach performance), for example, the quality of the reach performance image may be limited due to the capacity of the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. It is a good idea to perform a light effect in front of the wind when performing a low reach effect.

In addition, in the above example, when the hold display became unrecognizable, the mode of the hold display was always demoted when the hold display became recognizable again, but although the hold display was made unrecognizable, the hold display was again recognizable. When this happens, the same pending display as before it became unrecognizable may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide surprise and joy to players who were disappointed when the pending display became unrecognizable and the mode of the pending display was demoted.

However, although the Kazene no Hikari performance is a performance that demotes the state of the pending display, it is a performance that can display a large number of golden pending displays that have the highest jackpot expectation, so it is better not to use a performance that promotes the state of the pending display. good. In addition, since the hold promotion performance in which the hold display mode is promoted is frequently executed in addition to the front light performance, there is no need to intentionally execute the hold promotion performance in which the hold display mode is promoted in the front light performance. Therefore, it is decided that the hold promotion performance is executed in a performance other than the Kazene no Tori performance, and the player feels better if the hold is promoted with a specific sound effect.

FIG. 587 is an example of a light hold change table in front of the wind. The wind front light hold change table shows the hold display mode (final color) at the end of the wind front light display, the hold display mode (start color) at the start of the wind front light display, and the timing at which each change is possible (timer remaining time 15 seconds, 10 seconds and 5 seconds) after the change (including the case where there is no change). The front light hold change table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example. In the example of FIG. 587, the number of times the timing can be changed is three, but it is not limited to this and may be any number of times. The greater the number of changeable timings, the more the thrill that the mode of suspension display may be demoted can be given to the player, and the smaller the number of changeable timings, the more a sense of security can be given to the player.

The peripheral control MPU determines the final color and the starting color when it is decided to perform the front light effect. In addition, in the wind front light holding change table, the starting color is defined to be a mode other than blue, which has the lowest jackpot expectation, but in the example of FIG. 587, the gold color, which has the highest jackpot expectation, is always selected. Defined. In addition, in the front light holding change table, the final color is defined in such a way that a mode having a jackpot expectation level or less of the starting color is selected.

In the changeable timing table, it is defined that the pending display mode that is lower than the jackpot expectation level of the pending display mode before the changeable timing is selected. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 587, the pending display mode is defined to be demoted one step at a time at each changeable timing. That is, for example, if the final color is blue, the demotion will be performed after the pending display becomes unrecognizable at least twice in the front light effect. Note that multiple levels of demotion may be possible at each changeable timing.

In addition, in the wind front lighting performance, if the pending display indicating the relevant change becomes unrecognizable and is demoted, the timing at which the pending display indicating the relevant change becomes unrecognizable may occur before the middle of the fluctuation time of the relevant change. desirable. If the timing when the pending display indicating the fluctuation becomes unrecognizable occurs in the second half of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, the pending display mode with a high expectation of jackpot will be displayed for a long time, and then the pending display mode will be demoted. This is because there is a risk that the expectations of the players, which have been maintained for a long time, may suddenly drop.

Note that in performances other than the front lights performance, a performance that makes the pending display indicating the fluctuation in question unrecognizable may be performed; It is desirable to make the pending display indicating the fluctuation unrecognizable by using a different effect from (a display in which a smoke image is displayed over the pending display indicating the fluctuation). This is because if the pending display showing the change is made unrecognizable in a performance similar to the front lights performance, the player will feel anxious that the mode of the pending display will be demoted in the same way as the front lights performance.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 587, the intervals of the changeable timing in the front light effect are constant (5 second intervals in each case), but the intervals may be different. For example, because the interval between the second and third changeable timings is longer than the interval between the first and second changeable timings, the demotion of the pending display mode is concentrated in the first half of the Kazazeneto light performance. Therefore, if the player is not demoted in the first half, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security. For example, because the interval between the second and third changeable timings is shorter than the interval between the first and second changeable timings, the demotion of the pending display mode is concentrated in the second half of the Kazazeneto light performance. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the performance without being distracted until the second half.

In addition, in the case where the mode of the hold display is demoted multiple times in the Kazene no Tou performance, the image that makes the mode of the hold display that shows the change unrecognizable and the sound effect that is output when demoting are the same each time. may exist, or may be partially or entirely different. By having the same images and sound effects, it is possible for the player to calmly accept that the mode of the hold display has been demoted for the second and subsequent times. Because the images and sound effects are different, the player may not be demoted in the pending display mode if a different image appears or sound effect is output in the second and subsequent demotions. , we can hold some hope.

Furthermore, when demoting is performed in the form of a hold display in the wind front lighting performance, a predetermined movable body may be operated in order to make the player more clearly aware that the demotion is being performed. However, since this is a demotion effect, increasing the amount of movement of the movable body may adversely affect the player's feelings, so the amount of movement of the movable body must be small (for example, 1/2 of the maximum movable width). is desirable.

In addition, in the above example, only the hold display that corresponds to the fluctuation in progress in the wind front light performance was unrecognizable and demoted, but not only the hold display concerned but also the hold displays 1 to 4 (i.e., the first hold to 4) The hold display corresponding to the second hold) may also be made unrecognizable. In this case, it is desirable to elevate the mode of the hold display when making the hold 1 to hold 4 recognizable again. As a result, even if the expectation level of a jackpot of the currently executed variation is lowered due to the front light effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation for the pending variation in which the mode of pending display has been improved.

[21-6. Blackout production]
The blackout effect will be explained below. In the blackout effect, the display on the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the decorative patterns, pending display, and normal background become invisible. Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the state is completely blacked out, the blackout gradually dissolves and the decorative pattern, pending display, and normal background become visible, and at this time, the appearance of the pending display changes to the jackpot expectation level. There is a possibility that it has changed to a higher value.

Below, there are five types of pending display in the blackout effect: default (displayed in black in the figure), blue, green, red, and gold, and the expected jackpot is in the order of default < blue < green < red < gold. is assumed to be high.

FIG. 588 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a blackout effect. (A) shows the state at the end of the variation immediately before the variation in which the blackout effect is executed. A normal background is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and all decorative patterns are stopped. (B) shows the state after the fluctuation in which the blackout effect is executed starts. All decorative patterns are changing.

(C) is a state in which the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 is gradually decreasing (approaching black), and although decorative patterns, pending displays, and the normal background can be recognized, they are difficult to recognize. There is. In (D), the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 has decreased to the lowest (0), resulting in a blackout state. In the blackout state, decorative patterns, pending displays, and normal backgrounds are unrecognizable.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the state of complete blackout, in (E), the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 gradually increases and the blackout state is removed. In (E), although the decorative pattern, the reserved display, and the normal background can still be recognized, it is difficult to recognize them. Note that the pending display mode has been upgraded from the default to blue. In (F), the brightness of the entire performance display device 1600 is completely restored, and the decorative patterns, pending display, and normal background are completely recognizable. Note that even if the blackout state is resolved, the decorative patterns and the normal background may remain invisible. This is to make the player's attention strongly focused on whether or not the mode of the pending display has changed.

FIG. 589 is an example of a blackout time table. The blackout time table is a table that defines the distribution that determines the time when the blackout is completely blacked out in the blackout effect, and the mode of the suspended display that becomes recognizable again after the blackout is removed. The blackout time table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example.

When the peripheral control MPU decides to execute the blackout effect, it decides whether to make the blackout time short or long according to a predetermined probability. The predetermined probability is determined so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a long option is selected than when a short option is selected (for example, a variation that executes a blackout effect is a negative variation). In this case, short is selected at 224/256 and long is selected at 32/256, and when the variation that executes the blackout effect is a jackpot variation, short is selected at 64/256 and long is selected at 192/256. ).

The peripheral control MPU selects the length of complete blackout time by referring to the distribution indicated by the blackout time table. In the example of FIG. 589, if short is selected, 3 seconds or 5 seconds is selected, and if long is selected, 15 seconds or 20 seconds is selected. When a blackout effect is executed, the shortest time for long must be at least twice as long as the shortest time so that the player can easily determine whether the long or short has been selected. desirable. In the example of FIG. 589, the shortest time of long, 15 seconds, is three times longer than the longest time of short, 5 seconds.

Furthermore, the shorter the period of complete blackout (for example, when short is selected than when long is selected), the more decorative patterns, pending displays, and normal backgrounds will be displayed after blackout ends. It takes longer to do so.

The peripheral control MPU refers to the distribution indicated by the blackout time table and determines the mode of the pending display after the blackout corresponding to the selected time. In the blackout time table, the distribution is determined so that the longer the complete blackout time, the more likely it is that a pending display with a higher jackpot expectation will be selected.

In this way, the shorter the period of complete blackout, the lower the expectation of a jackpot. For example, if a short is selected, at a predetermined timing after the blackout (decorative patterns, pending display, and normal background are changed again) A specific sound effect may be output at a predetermined timing when the player becomes recognizable, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation. If long is selected, the player's expectations have been sufficiently heightened by the blackout, so it is not necessary to output the sound effect after the blackout.

Note that in the hold display that becomes recognizable again after the blackout when short is selected, the number of default distributions is greater than the total number of distributions in modes other than the default. On the other hand, in the hold display that becomes recognizable again after the blackout when long is selected, the default distribution is smaller than the total of the distributions in modes other than the default. In this way, we recognized that the long option was selected due to the large difference in the selection rate of the default pending display when short was selected and when long was selected (for example, it was completely blacked out). (If more than 5 seconds have passed since then, it will be known that the long has been selected.) This can improve the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, when the decorative pattern becomes recognizable again after the blackout, it is desirable that the manner in which the decorative pattern changes and is displayed is different depending on whether short is selected or long is selected. For example, when short is selected, the decorative pattern only sways slightly, but when long is selected, the decorative pattern oscillates violently. Also, for example, when short is selected, the face of the character drawn on the decorative pattern is expressionless, but when long is selected, the face of the character drawn on the decorative pattern is smiling. You may choose to have one.

In this way, by changing the display mode of the decorative symbols after the blackout has ended, the player can see the decorative symbols even after the blackout has ended, and can determine whether the short or long shot has been selected in the blackout performance. can remember whether or not a blackout effect has been selected (because the form of the pending display can change even outside of the blackout effect, there are cases where it is not possible to completely identify whether or not a blackout effect has been performed based only on the form of the pending display) ).

Note that the blackout effect may be performed multiple times in one variation. As a result, even if the initial blackout performance does not change to the pending display in which the expectation level of jackpot is high, the player can maintain a sense of expectation.

In the plurality of blackout performances, short and long may be mixed, all short may be selected, or all long may be selected. Furthermore, for example, a blackout effect may be executed multiple times before the reach state of the decorative symbol is formed, a blackout effect may be executed before and after the reach state is formed, or a blackout effect may be performed before and after the reach state of the decorative symbol is formed. A plurality of blackout effects may be performed after forming the blackout effect.

It takes a long time to perform multiple blackout effects, so if you want to perform multiple blackout effects before forming a reach state, In order to end the change, it is preferable to start a blackout effect as the effect at the start of the fluctuation.

Even if the blackout effect is performed only once, the blackout effect may be started as the effect at the start of the fluctuation. Due to the blackout effect occurring at the start of the fluctuation, players are unable to grasp what is happening at first, but once the blackout ends and the appearance of the pending display changes, the amount of surprise increases rapidly. A sense of anticipation can be provided to the player.

Further, when a blackout effect is performed after a ready-to-win state is formed, it is desirable that the blackout effect is completed before the timing of notifying a win or loss in the ready-to-reach effect. This is because the player's interest will not be improved even if the performance regarding the hold change is performed after the winning/losing notification timing.

Note that the mode for making the pending display, decorative pattern, and normal background unrecognizable may be different depending on whether short is selected or long is selected. For example, if short is selected, blackout is always performed, and if long is selected, blackout is displayed with a predetermined probability (9/10), and with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). If red is displayed on the entire device 1600 and the pending display, decorative pattern, and normal background are unrecognizable, it is determined that the game is long when red is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, so the player's Expectations can be dramatically improved.

In addition, contrary to the example in FIG. 589, in the blackout time table, the distribution is arranged so that the longer the period of complete blackout, the more likely it is that a pending display with a low jackpot expectation will be selected. It may be specified.

[22. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the rear and rear effect unit 3100 has a transparent guide behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A light radiation plate 3113 and a rear decorative board 3114 are provided, and each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. The side view type first LED 3114a shown in FIG. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are made to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a is transmitted from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the plate surface within the thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light is irradiated in a direction along the direction, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide and radiation plate 3113, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide and radiation plate 3113. Become. The light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is irradiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that constitute the decorative member, so that the transparent portion provided with the decorative portion 3150 is irradiated forward. The decorative members (decoration body 3111 and decoration sheet 3112) having luminosity will be decorated with light emission.

At this time, the light irradiated from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e within the thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to form the decorative body. 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, compared to the case where the first LED 3114a is directed forward to emit light. The distance to which the light is emitted forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and can be suppressed from appearing to emit light in a dotted manner. The sheet 3112 can be evenly decorated with light to make it look beautiful, and it is possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front and rear direction can be reduced. This makes it easier to secure a space for arranging the rear movable decorative body 3110, as well as arranging other presentation members (back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, etc.). It is possible to easily secure a space for playing games, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players by being equipped with various performance members.

Furthermore, the decorative member (rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative part 3150 has relief parts such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first outline part 3112a, the relief part can give the decoration part 3150 a three-dimensional effect, and the relief part can give the decoration part 3150 a three-dimensional effect. A sense of depth can be given to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear due to the lens effect. Therefore, the embossed part of the decorative body 3111 and the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration (decorative part 3150) with a sense of depth. Even if the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is made thinner, the decorative effect does not decrease, and it is possible to attract and entertain players, and the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be made thinner. The above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first outline portion 3112a on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 having relief portions such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. 3112, even if the transparent decorative body 3111 is not colored, the decorative body 3111 can be made to look colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet 3112, reducing the cost of the decorative body 3111. can be done. In addition, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the decoration body 3111 (rear movable decoration body 3110) can be easily changed, so it is possible to easily change the decoration (decoration part 3150). The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

Further, the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion where a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light, and the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 , light from other LEDs and performance display devices 1600 provided in this pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are the hologram of the first outline portion 3112a. By hitting the area, a predetermined hologram can be shown due to interference fringes of light, so the hologram can improve the appearance of the decorative part 3150 and strongly attract the player's interest. Accordingly, a three-dimensional effect can be given to a part of the decoration part 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the rear movable decorative body 3110 is made thin, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling thin.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the hologram is formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it is visible through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed part such as 3111c, the lens effect of the embossed part can give a sense of depth to the pattern such as a hologram, which can strongly attract the attention of players. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use printing technology to form the hologram portion, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in the decorative member consisting of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is made flat and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, the transparent decorative member The outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame-like object on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a sense of openness is imparted to the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110. At the same time, it is possible to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112) can be made more noticeable, the decorative effect of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be fully exhibited, and the rear movable decorative body The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that light is transmitted between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. is not diffusely reflected, the pattern of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decoration body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be fully exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, it is possible to reduce the front and rear dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 as much as possible, so that the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 can be made as small as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced and the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

Furthermore, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the pattern on the decorative sheet 3112 allows decoration up to the outer periphery of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). Therefore, by making the decoration of the member adjacent to the rear movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be presented to the player. It is possible to make a visual impact on the players and attract their attention, and also to entertain the large decorations, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 are housed from the rear, the first LED housing portions 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be accommodated. By housing the first LED 3114a in the portion 3113c from the rear, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back rear decoration board 3114 as close as possible, and the front and back of the rear movable decoration body 3110 The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into the thickness of the plate. Therefore, compared to the case where light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the light guiding and radiating plate 3113, there are parts of the light guiding and radiating plate 3113 where it is difficult for light to reach from the outer peripheral surface (for example, the central part). However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the area and irradiating light from its inner surface, the area can be made to emit bright light. 3112) can be illuminated evenly.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is of a side view type, simply by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and causing it to emit light, the first LED 3114a can be accommodated. Light can be irradiated from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects is reliably realized. be able to.

In addition, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light can be emitted to substantially the entirety of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, there is no need to change the reflective part 3113e, and it is possible to easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easily adaptable to model changes, design changes, and the like.

Note that the rear movable decorative body 3160 and the rear movable decorative body 3170 can also provide the same effects as described above. Note that the periodic shaking and rotation of the hold display and the periodic shaking and rotation of the decorative pattern may be a series of effects that are repeatedly executed in the dynamic display during the still image presentation.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the invention is not limited to this, and a game machine (parrot machine) that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as above can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, the decorative parts 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 include the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Although the example shown above is composed of the decoration by the first contour part 3112a, the second contour part 3112b, the first light diffusion part 3112c, and the second light diffusion part 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, it is limited to this. It's not something you do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be made into one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be provided on the decorative member.

<Slot machine>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. Hereinafter, the reference numerals described so far will be reset, and even if the reference numerals described so far and the reference numerals described below are the same, they indicate different things. 590 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 591 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 592 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 593 is the door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 594 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 593, FIG. 595 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 597(a) is an enlarged view of the Z2 section of FIG. 596, and FIG. 597(b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 section of FIG. 596, showing the state in which the connector holder has been moved. 598 is an enlarged view showing the main part of Fig. 597(a), Fig. 599 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, Fig. 600 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and Fig. 601 is a view of the case member from behind. 602(a) and 602(b) are perspective views of the main parts of the case member to explain the temporarily fastened state of the connector holder, FIG. 603 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, and FIG. 604 is the wiring relay member. 605 and 606 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, FIG. 607 is a perspective view of a stopper that stops the case member, and FIG. 608 is a perspective view of the stopper showing another form. FIG. 610 is a sectional view of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, FIG. 611 is a partial perspective view of the symbol variable display device showing another form of the handle, and FIG. 612 shows the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer body side. 613 is a cross-sectional view of the main parts showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display device, FIG. 614 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, and FIG. 615 omits the medal discharging device. 616 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 615, FIG. 617 is a rear view of the slot machine looking at the heat dissipation port from the back side, and FIG. 618 is a part of the slot machine showing the power supply. 619 is a perspective view of the power supply device looking up from below; FIG. 620 is a cross-sectional view of the side plate of the outer body and main parts of the power supply device; FIG. 621 is another embodiment; 622 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member with the transparent plate and the light emitting unit disassembled, FIG. 623 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member with the transparent plate disassembled, and FIG. 624 622 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line A-A of the door-shaped front member with the transparent plate attached, FIG. 625 is an exploded and assembled perspective view of the hinge fittings, FIG. 626 is a line diagram showing the chain of hinge fittings, and FIG. 627 is the door-shaped front side. 628 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening; FIG. 629 is a perspective view of the upper half of the door-shaped front member seen from the back side; 630 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the connector cut in the longitudinal direction, FIG. 631 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of a door-shaped front member showing another example of a hinge fitting, and FIG. 632 is a cross-sectional view of the door-shaped front member of FIG. FIG. 633 is a perspective view showing the model unit with the front opening/closing member opened, and FIG. 634 is a perspective view showing the door-shaped front member opened with the connector still connected.

As shown in FIGS. 590 and 591, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer body 100 with an open front, and a side-opening door-like shape with a rotating shaft 100a on the front of the outer body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 rotatably attached to the outer body 100, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by a driving means, and a case member that is detachable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface. 400, and an image display body 500 that displays an arbitrary image.

[1. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 590 to 593, the outer body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102, 102, so that the outer body 100 has a vertically elongated "mouth" when viewed from the front. A back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box shape with only the front side open. The left and right side plates 102, 102 are trapezoidal with front edges slightly inclined backward, and therefore the opening of the outer body 100 is inclined backward. In addition, on the top plate 103, when installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown), a plurality of (in the embodiment 4) through holes 132, 132... are bored.

[1-1. Outer body - partition plate]
Inside the outer body 100, a shelf-shaped partition plate 105 is provided approximately at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a generally convex shape in front view with a protrusion 106 in the center as shown in FIGS. The vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. Note that a cylindrical projection (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring processing (metal processing in which a short cylindrical projection is raised while enlarging the diameter of a pilot hole with a punch). The cylindrical projection is positioned by driving into a small hole (not shown) pre-machined in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. Further, openings 109 for wiring are formed at the innermost parts on both sides of the partition plate 105 between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

[1-1-1. Outer body - partition plate - bottom space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer body 100, a medal discharging device 110 for discharging medals as game media into a medal receiving tray 201 located at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal discharging device 110 from the medal discharging device 110 are provided. A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[1-1-1-1. Outer body - Partition plate - Lower space - Medal release device]
The medal discharging device 110 has a hopper 110b for storing medals attached to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means, and a medal discharging port 110c is provided on the front side of the device main body 110a. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-described auxiliary medal storage box 111 faces below the tip of the overflow gutter 110d. Incidentally, the medal discharging mechanism of the medal discharging device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and a detailed explanation thereof will therefore be omitted.

[1-1-1-2. Outer body - Partition plate - Bottom space - Power supply unit]
As shown in FIGS. 615 to 619, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion of the outer body 100 where three members, the bottom plate 101, the side plate 102 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the back plate 104, intersect at right angles. There is. The power supply device 112 is used to supply electricity to electrical components such as the medal discharging device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Port 104a is opened.

The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is made of transparent synthetic resin. This allows the inside of the device case 112a to be seen, making it easier to discover unauthorized manipulation of the board 112s (see FIG. 619) of the power supply device 112, etc. The device case 112a includes a top plate 112b that covers the top surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r that covers the bottom (see FIG. 619). On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a facing the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state. Blocked.

As shown in FIGS. 615 and 616, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and below the guard portion 102b is the upper plate 112b of the device case 112a. It is designed to be inserted into one side. As a result, even if one side of the device case 112a is not covered, the guard portion 102b closes the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102, making it impossible to insert foreign objects. FIG. 620 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is shaped like a groove. In this example, the edge of the top plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102, and the tip thereof is formed into the shape of the guard portion 102b. It is designed to fit into a groove.

In this way, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, if the surface of the outer body 100 that contacts the side plate 102 is made to have an open structure without a cover and is covered by the side plate 102 during use, it is possible to prevent the inside of the device case 112a. The board 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and work efficiency is improved since it is not necessary to cover the open surface after the board 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

A large number of ventilation holes 112g, 112g... are formed in the top plate 112b, side plate 112e, slope plate 112f, rear plate 112c, and bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a to prevent heat from accumulating inside. . The device case 112a is raised in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h, . Therefore, relatively cold air at a lower level can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g, . . . in the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer body 100, cold air from the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. Note that if an inverted L-shaped stepped portion 112j (see FIG. 619) that raises the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg portion 112h and the heat radiation port 104a can be formed. Even if there is a difference in height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[1-1-1-2-1. Outer body - Partition plate - Lower space - Power supply - Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 112 m and the heat dissipation port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 .

That is, the contour of the heat radiation port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiation port 104a. In addition, a protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat dissipation port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat dissipation port 104a in order to resist the floating movement of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protruding piece 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat dissipation port 104a in order to resist the sideways movement of the power supply device 112. Therefore, by simply pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat dissipation port 104a, the rear surface (inner side) of the device case 112a can be raised (lifted) upward (as shown in FIG. 615). Fixation in the right direction (overturning) is completed at . Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted in the downward direction by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 and in the left direction in FIG. 615 by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. With a simple operation of fitting the protrusion 112m, the movement of the power supply device 112 in directions other than the direction in which it is pulled toward you can be completely restricted.

On the other hand, a mounting piece 112k protruding from the front plate 112d has a plurality of through holes 112p for screws, and is fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 by passing a wood screw 112q through at least one of the through holes 112p. This restricts the movement of the power supply device 112 also in the direction of pulling it forward, so that the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[1-1-1-2-2. Outer body - Partition plate - Bottom space - Power supply - Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power supply from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulge was provided next to the heat dissipation port 104a and the power cord was pulled out from there, but in this position, even if the power cord was bundled, there was a high risk that it would rub against the ground. The slot machine 1 may be powered on during manufacturing, and the power cord must be placed outside the outer main body 100 in preparation for this. When moving the slot machine 1, there is a risk that the power cord may rub against the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

In contrast, in the heat dissipation port 104a of the embodiment, the cord outlet 104b is expanded upward from its upper side, and the power cord is pulled out from there. This provides enough height for hanging the bundled power cords in the air. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord during the manufacturing process of the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, installation is completed by simply setting the power supply device 112 at the inner corner of the outer body 100 and screwing in one wood screw 112q. Significant labor savings in installation work are possible. In addition, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, so especially when the part to be fixed is brought to the front (near side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, in the past, it was necessary to fix screws to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 were difficult to visually recognize, so there was a possibility of forgetting them.

Further, since the heat radiation port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, almost no extra steps or costs are generated even if the heat radiation port 104a is used to fix the power supply device 112. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are made to coincide with each other for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting protrusion 112m can also be integrally molded, resulting in almost no cost. Therefore, the total cost required for installing the power supply device 112 can also be reduced compared to the conventional case.

Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portions 112h and step portions 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as a countermeasure against heat generation in the power supply device 112, can be implemented at almost no cost.

[1-1-2. Outer body - partition plate - upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in the space above the partition plate 105 inside the outer body 100, and a wiring relay member 113, which is the core of the wiring means described later, is housed on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. (See FIGS. 590 and 591), and furthermore, a heat radiation vent 133 is formed in the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[2. Door-shaped front member]
FIG. 592 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 590 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal receiving tray 201 on the lower side of the front side, and an operating section 202 is provided approximately in the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 includes an insertion slot 203 for inserting medals, a performance button 204 that can be operated by the player, and a slot for inserting (or withdrawing) only one medal from among the medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, which will be described later. 1 coin input button 205 that instructs to input the maximum number of coins that can be used in one game (for example, 3 coins), and a MAX input button 206 that instructs to input the maximum number of coins that can be used in one game (for example, 3 coins), and a medal selector 207 that will be described later. a medal return button 208 for returning medals to the medal tray 201; a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (discharge command by payment) for medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409; A starting lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300, and three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c for stopping each reel 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is just one example, and the configuration is not limited thereto.

Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the input slot 203, and a medal gutter 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected to the bottom thereof. The medal selector 207 is a known device that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and when it is waiting for the player to insert medals, the flow path is moved to the medal gutter 212 side. Further, in a state where the insertion of medals is refused, such as when the number of medals exceeds the specified number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. The medal gutter 212 is such that its tip faces into the hopper 110b of the medal discharging device 110 when the door-shaped front member 200 is in the closed position covering the front surface of the outer body 100, and the medal gutter 212 is configured to face the inside of the hopper 110b of the medal discharging device 110. The medals flowing through the medal gutter 212 end up in the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the medal receiving tray 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing from the input port 203 through the medal selector 207 to the returning gutter 213 return to the medal receiving tray 201.

[2-1. Door-shaped front member - see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 has a size that covers the entire front surface of the outer body 100, and the upper half thereof has a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a, as shown in FIGS. 622 and 623. It is now 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the symbol variable display device 300 can be seen vertically side by side, and the frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200 allows the image to be displayed. The areas of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided into upper and lower regions. If one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 in this way, the positions of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be swapped vertically. However, you can use it as is.

[2-2. Door-shaped front member - see-through window - transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, rubber-containing methacrylic resin with excellent impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties; in the embodiment, "Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30" manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.) is used. ) has a substantially upside-down trapezoidal shape that spreads upward, and has an edge member 214b that bulges toward the front side with the side facing the player as the front side, on the periphery of three sides (left and right sides and top side) excluding the bottom side. 214b, 214b are integrally molded during resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally molded around the periphery of the flat transparent plate 214a, the edge member 214b becomes a reinforcing bar and increases the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. Even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 624, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens on the rear side (it is not solid but has a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having, for example, a pattern or letters on the surface, are incorporated into the internal space.

Although the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200 in FIG. 623, the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. 624. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are treated as an integrated component.

The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the drawings, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the location where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three peripheral sides of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, but may be provided on at least one of the sides.

In addition, reference numeral 218 in FIGS. 622 and 623 indicates a fixing member provided at the upper right and left corners of the transparent plate 214a, and a screw inserted through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view in FIG. 622) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (not shown), it is held in the state shown in FIG. 623 where it is fitted between the edge members 214b and 214b. The fixing member 218 plays a role as a corner decoration in appearance, and also serves as a corner decoration for the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view of FIG. 622) provided at the upper corners of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a, respectively. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, and serves as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

Further, in FIGS. 622 to 624, reference numeral 217a represents a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b represents a reflecting member that supports the light emitting body 217a. As shown in FIG. 624, the angles of the reflecting members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right sides are set so that a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitters 217a is reflected toward the surroundings of the slot machine 1. In addition, in the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitting body 217a can be placed closer to the front of the slot machine 1, so it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of a cape. , which is advantageous when emitting light toward the surroundings. Further, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

The light emitting unit 217 having the above configuration can be turned on during the game, especially when a jackpot is won, to make an effect that appeals to the surroundings that the jackpot has occurred. By performing a performance that is highly appealing to the surroundings in this way, the player who has won the jackpot can be noticed, and the eyes of many people make the player feel superior, making the game even more exciting. In addition, by promoting the fact that a jackpot has been won to those around you, it is expected that the popularity of the machine will increase and the operating rate will improve.

The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above configuration, and the bottom side of the plate is aligned with the groove 219 (see enlarged view of FIG. 623) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Insert the transparent plate 214a diagonally from the front side and fit it into the fitting style, and in that state, stand the transparent plate 214a upright and bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front side of the door-shaped front member 200. It is fixed with screws 603 (see Figure 590) passed through from the back. FIG. 624 is a cutaway of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time, and as is clear from this FIG. Even if the foreign object is forcibly inserted, there is almost no room for the tip of the foreign object to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[2-3. Door-shaped front member - locking device]
A lock device 215 is provided on one side of the free end of the door-shaped front member 200 and is operated to open and close using a dedicated key (not shown).

[3. Symbol fluctuation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotating display device, and includes and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be rotated individually by a driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. This is a well-known device in which a game is played by combining a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the circumferential surfaces of reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

The device case 302 is in the form of a modified hexagonal prism, as if it were an octagonal prism laid on its side, except for the three faces facing the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate part 305, and a right side in FIG. 600. A right side plate 306 , a left side plate 307 on the left side, a vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, an upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate part 305 and the rear plate 308 , a bottom plate 304 and a rear plate 308 It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a portion of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

Further, the top plate 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a used state where the finger can be placed and a non-use state where the finger can be placed on the top plate 305. It is designed to be carried around.

The configuration in which the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with the changeable handle 311 as described above is closely related to measures for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided at the opening 401 of the case member 400, thereby imparting sufficient strength to the opening 401 of the case member 400 to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to taking the device case 302 into and out of the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made changeable and laid down on the top plate 305 as in the embodiment, the handle 311 does not protrude, and the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing beam 402 without difficulty. Therefore, only by providing the handle 311 which can be changed as described above on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the opening 401 of the case member 400 in a direction that crosses the opening 401. Become. Incidentally, in the conventional device case, the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle, so there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member.

Note that the handle 311 in the embodiment has a structure that swings and changes between an upright use state and a face down non-use state, but the structure that allows the handle 311 to change between a use state and a non-use state is different from that in the embodiment. Not limited to form. For example, as shown in FIG. 611, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather and have retaining parts 315, 315 at both ends. The top plate portion 305 can be placed in a finger-hung use state by inserting the belt-shaped handle 311 provided therein, and pulling up the center from the face down non-use state shown in FIG. 611 to a finger-hung use state. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to a laid-down, unused state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 593 and 600, the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment has a flange-shaped lower handle 316 protruding from the bottom plate 304, and the device case 302 can be pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316 or By pulling it, it becomes easy to take it in and out of the case member 400.

[4. Case components]
The case member 400 has a size that almost matches the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 standing on both left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. It is box-shaped and includes a rear plate 405 standing upright on the rear edge, and a top plate 406 that covers the upper surfaces of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404, and has an opening 401 on the front.

In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the inner surfaces of the openings 401 of the side plates 404, 404 and the top plate 406 are reinforced with metal. Members 407, 407, 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing beam 402 that crosses the opening 401 is spanned between the reinforcing members 407, 407 of the side plates 404, 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 serves as an installation area for the symbol variable display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 serves as an installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409, which is a main control board, is attached to the inner wall surface of the rear panel 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board other than the main board 409 (for example, a sub board 510 (see FIG. 633)) is also installed in the wiring work space 408.

The top plate 406 of the case member 400 has skylight portions 443, 443 formed therein as shown in FIG. 590. The skylight portions 443, 443 are divided into two parts with a reinforcing band 444 in between to maintain the strength of the top plate 406, and each of the skylight parts 443, 443 is separated from the axis passing through the through holes 132, 132... of the outer main body 100. It is located in a region including the intersection, and is opened sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132, . . . . However, the front edge of the skylight portion 443 is located near the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found by groping using the periphery of the skylight part 443 as a reference, so even if the operator cannot look into the skylight part 443, the position of the through hole 132 can be determined quickly and easily. Here, the skylight portion 443 also functions as an opening in the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight sections 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation and replacement can be further reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 591, 594, 595, and 601, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 are protruded from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. It is positioned by fitting into boss holes 114, 114 pre-machined in 104. The bosses 410, 410 are provided near the wiring window 411, which will be described later, as shown in FIGS. This allows accurate positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104.

On the other hand, a recessed step 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, as shown in FIG. 591, and the recessed step 412 fits into the protruding step 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 that expands toward the rear is provided at the end of the recessed step portion 412 on the rear plate 405 side, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 to connect the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. Fitting with the recessed stepped portion 412 can be performed smoothly. In this way, the case member 400 is guided straight into the depths of the partition plate 105 by fitting the recessed part 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding part 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid or integrally press-molded on the plate 105, and a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is made to roll within the groove of the rail member 115. Good too. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 610, a convex rail member 116 may be laid or integrally press-molded on the partition plate 105, and flanges 415, 415 may be formed at both ends of the wheels 414 of the case member 400. The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the collars 415, 415 of the wheels 414.

Further, the case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 590, 591, 607, and 612 when it is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. This stopper 117 is pivoted to the front end of the partition plate 105 and two fixtures 118, 118 vertically installed on the top plate 103, as shown in FIGS. 590 and 591, and as shown in solid lines in FIG. 607. The forward direction of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is manually switched between an operating position in which the case member 400 is engaged with a part of the case member 400 and a non-operating position in which the case member 400 is not engaged as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. 607. Regulate movement. Note that if the stopper 117 is shaped like a key as shown in FIG. 608 and is engaged with a hook 416 provided on the case member 400, upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

Further, the stopper 117 pivoted to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the locking hole 442 provided through the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400, as shown in FIG. 612. With the case member 400 pushed into a predetermined position, the operating position and the non-operating position can be switched from inside the case member 400.

Further, the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is provided with a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole that penetrates toward the back plate 104 side of the outer body 100 . As shown in FIGS. 593, 594, and 613, the wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed in the case member 400, and is located below the main board 409. It is located at the position of It functions as an opening that connects the plates 104.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 594 and 601, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as a "temporary shelf") at a position approximately in the middle of the height of the empty space 417. Furthermore, recesses 419, 419, which are wiring passages extending to the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400, are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411.

Note that if the arrangement of the wiring window 411 is specified based on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol fluctuation display device 300, the wiring window 411 is located on the reel 301a of the symbol fluctuation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c, and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. It can also be said that it is arranged.

[5. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit that can display an image and is configured with at least a liquid crystal display (a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc. may also be used), and is capable of opening and closing the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 633) that closes at the same time. The image display body 500 can be rotated by attaching a hinge fitting 420 to the reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. freely supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 633, a sub-board 510 is attached to the back side of the image display body 500. Therefore, it becomes possible to integrally configure the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510, which facilitates handling and eliminates the wiring that connects the two, making it possible to perform wiring work inside the case member 400. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 pops out from within the case member 400, so that the workability of the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[5-1. Image display body - hinge metal fittings]
FIG. 625 is an exploded and assembled perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. Note that the hinge fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, so the upper portion will mainly be described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to a fixed member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see broken line area 500s in FIG. 625), and the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the members 420a.

The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf, one end of a long link 420d is attached to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and a short link is attached to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is rotatably attached to the pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge metal fitting 420 has a horizontal shaft bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf, and one end of the long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the shaft bearing piece 420f with a pin P3, and the lower surface of the shaft bearing piece 420f One end of the short link 420c is rotatably attached to the pin P4.

In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-bar rotational chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double-lever mechanism is configured in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain shaft bearing piece 420f serves as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 626(a) to 626(c), these lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centered on the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Each pin position is set accordingly. In other words, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a rotational center moving mechanism, and even if the rotational position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotational outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotational center of the image display body 500 change. The distance from the verandah is kept approximately constant.

Note that the overlapping regions 420g and 420h of the long link 420d and the short link 420c are set so that they overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated approximately 90 degrees (opened) (for example, the overlapping regions of the long link 420d The region 420g is expanded into a triangular shape so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. These pin holes 420i and 420j connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c by arranging them coaxially and inserting a bar-shaped stopper pin (not shown), thereby locking both lever mechanisms and fixing the image display. 500 in the open position.

[5-2. Image display body - lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 600 and 601, among the vertical reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400, the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 600) has a lock. A piece 421 is pivoted, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The image display body 500 is locked in the position where the upper part of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the opposite direction from the locked state, the image display body 500 is unlocked and becomes freely rotatable around the hinge metal fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation; The display body 500 is unlocked and can be freely rotated.

[5-3. Image display body - connector]
By the way, since the case member 400 is provided with an image display body 500 that can be opened and closed separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when visually checking the inside of the case member 400 or working inside the case member 400, To do this, it is necessary to first open the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side, and then open the image display body 500 on the back side, which may reduce work efficiency or cause trouble. .

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is the same as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are connected by an appropriate connecting device. 700, and in conjunction with opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200, the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 also rotates in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 rotates along with the door-shaped front member 200, and it becomes possible to see not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one horizontal opening operation.

Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment are such that the rotation locus of the image display body 500 is aligned with the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by both lever mechanisms of the hinge fitting 420. Although the rotation trajectory is approximated by the rotation center, there is still a relative deviation between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 629 and 630, the connector 700 of the embodiment includes a fixed sheath member 701 formed on the back surface of the free end side of the image display body 500, and a fixed sheath member 701 that slides into the inside of the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is stored in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is rotatably connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the locking device 215) with a stop shaft 703. be. By doing this, as shown in FIG. 628, the image display body 500 opens and closes together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200 as if it were an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200, and the two sides that occur at this time are The relative deviation in movement is absorbed by the rod 702 of the connector 700 as it moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701.

Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes the most from the rotating outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened by 90 degrees). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (the position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. Therefore, the length of the rod 702 can be made the minimum necessary length, and it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the connector.

Further, the stop shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the locking device 215 so as to be able to move up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. has been done. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the urging force of the spring 703a, and by moving it upward and lifting the lower end, the rod 702 of the connecting tool 700 can be attached and detached. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into a shaft hole 702a formed at the tip of the rod 702 and held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

Further, in FIG. 629, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever-type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the coupling device 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. It is for storing and holding inside the rod 702, and engages with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent blind movement of the rod 702. A knob piece 706 is provided on the side surface of the rod 702 to protrude in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and by pinching the knob piece 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702, the stopper 704 is unlocked. It looks like this. Further, a retaining piece 701a is suspended from the bottom surface of the distal end side of the fixed sheath member 701, and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. This retaining piece 701a comes into contact with the hook wall 702b when the rod 702 is fully protruded, and prevents the rod 702 from slipping out from the fixed sheath member 701.

Further, in FIG. 629, reference numeral 509 near the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the outer rotation edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 600, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402a that slopes downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging part 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is made of a synthetic resin with excellent lubricity, which is different from the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500 (replaceable). There is.

By the way, the relative deviation in movement caused by the difference in the rotation locus of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 can be avoided by using a flexible wire, in addition to the telescopic rod-type connector 700 as described above. can also be absorbed. However, if the connector is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will collide with the image display body 500 that is stopped in the open state at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, impairing the smoothness. There is a risk. In contrast, for example, the image display body 500 may be provided with a biasing means such as a coiled spring so as to always bias the image display body 500 in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 closes, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the connector under the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for co-rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not limited to the above. For example, the hinge metal fitting 420, which is one element for co-rotation in the above, is not limited to the double lever mechanism structure as described above, but is centered around a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. 630 and 631. It may be a simple method in which the image display body 500 is rotated.

The means for attaching the image display body 500 to the case member 400 has a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door, and the lock means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above ( When the lock piece 421) described above is added, the case member 400 remains locked in the state attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as when checking the inside of the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, the image display body 500 can block important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub board 510) in the wiring work space 408, which is effective in improving crime prevention performance. .

A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 can be inserted with a finger passed through the gap 10. It can be grasped. In addition, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front central portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight sections 443, 443), and a finger inserted through the handle opening 422 can be used to open the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be used appropriately for the handle opening 422 and the gap 10 depending on the location and posture of handling. For example, when transporting the case member 400 before it is assembled into the outer body 100, it is better to carry it in the form of a bag using the handle opening 422. On the other hand, when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, as shown in FIG. As mentioned above, since the handle opening 422 is hidden deep inside the outer body 100 and cannot be inserted with a finger, the case member 400 is pulled out by hooking the finger onto the reinforcing member 407 through the gap 10. Note that a lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 593 and 600) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and by holding the lower handle 316 and pushing or pulling it, the outer main body 100 The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integral with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws, and therefore the lower handle 316 is provided protruding from the front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. It's like being there.

[5-4. Image display body - frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire area above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 that surrounds the area below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, the front area of the symbol variable display device 300 in a frame shape, hangs integrally. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are framed by the frame member 501. The surface of this frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn on it. Although not shown in the drawings, the frame member 501 is equipped with an electric decoration that includes a light emitting source such as an LED, a light emitting control board that controls the light emitting source, and a decorative member that is placed in front of the light emitting source and can transmit light. A section has been established. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described below as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 633).

[5-4-1. Image display body - frame member - lighting device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided above and below the back side of the frame member 501, and the symbols of the symbol variation display device 300 are brightly illuminated by the illumination devices 502. Since the frame member 501 is installed vertically below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, the light source can be brought closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. can. Therefore, the means for assembling the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has the feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light amount compared to conventional lighting devices.

As shown in FIG. 593, the illumination device 502 exemplified as an embodiment includes a strip-shaped substrate elongated in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a). 503 and a large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are lined up, and the lower illumination device 502 has LEDs 504 placed inside a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is covered with a translucent cover plate 505 of milky white color, for example. On the other hand, the upper illumination device 502 has an LED 504 facing downward inside a translucent cover 507 having an upward U-shaped cross section and having a milky white color, for example.

The upper illumination device 502 is installed with the illumination direction directed diagonally downward from directly below toward the player, that is, toward the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, in order to direct the center line L of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 (see enlarged view in FIG. 593), which has relatively strong directivity, at an angle to the transparent plate 214a, the orientation of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set as described above. It is tilted diagonally downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

Furthermore, if a rod-shaped light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. The center line of the main irradiation area directed by the sum of reflected light may be set so as to obliquely strike the back surface of the transparent plate 214a. If the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a as described above, even if some of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no effect.

According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed toward the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific parts of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is directed obliquely to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer circumferential surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are illuminated. It was confirmed that a wide range was brighter and easier to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the illumination device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted in the see-through window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused throughout, or the transparent plate 214a is brightly illuminated and the reel 301a, It is presumed that a wide range of 301b and 301c appears bright or that it is due to their synergistic effect.

The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted for the lower illumination device 502, and of course can also be adopted only for the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. 621. Note that in FIG. 621, the upper lighting device 502 in FIG. 593 is placed on the lower side, and the lower lighting device 502 is placed on the upper side, so "top" in the above description of the lighting device 502 is replaced with "bottom". , and "lower" should be read as "upper".

By the way, when an LED is adopted as the light source of the illumination device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) it is driven at a low voltage, so it is not conventional to drive at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at startup and about 600 V at operation). (b) It has a longer lifespan than a cold cathode tube, (c) It is more durable than a glass cold cathode tube, and (d) It can emit multi-colored light, allowing for a wider range of performances. (e) It is lighter than a cold cathode tube used in combination with an inverter, and therefore there is less burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500.

[6. Wiring means]
For example, the medal release device 110 and the power supply device 112 attached to the outer body 100, and the input buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 on the operation section 202 of the door-shaped front member 200 (hereinafter, these will be simply referred to as " ) and, for example, the main board 409 in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as the "case member side electrical components" as a general term for the electrical components on the case member side) are electrical components. connected. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 633 and 634), which is composed of the front opening/closing member 90 and the case member 400, is removable from the outer main body 100, so that the model unit 50 can be replaced, etc. At this time, a rational wiring means is provided to easily connect or disconnect the main body side electrical components (casing side electrical components) and the case member side electrical components.

[6-1. Wiring means - wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 603 is attached to the upper inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. As shown in FIGS. 593 and 594, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400, and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electrical components and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electrical components, and connects to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 that is fixed with screws, a cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (in the embodiment, two large and small) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as two large and small boards) housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120. 122 and 123 (sometimes referred to as "terminal board for connector connection").

Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 603 and 604 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 is provided that pairs with a connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424.

On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 603 and 604 is attached in a non-fixed and freely movable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. As shown in , it is movable in the vertical direction, and can also be moved in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that pairs with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 that is connected to an electrical component on the case member side other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are of a board-fixing type that is fixed to a printed circuit board by a fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standard connectors are used.

The cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120 has two large and small openings 126, 127 through which the connectors 124, 125 pass, a support tube 128 protruding from a position parallel to the openings 126, 127, and a lower half. It has a tunnel-shaped wiring duct 129 extending forward.

The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. In this state, as shown by the dashed line L in FIG. They are connected to the electrical components on the main body side through openings 109 for wiring provided at the back of the partition plate 105, respectively. Of course, if there is an electrical component on the main body side (for example, the external relay terminal board 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 590) in the area above the partition plate 105, the It will be connected as is.

The following technical idea can be understood from the wiring means explained so far.

(a) On the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, there is a self-container between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. A wiring window 411 is formed at a height where the lower side of the wiring window 411 is located.

(b) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electrical components and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electrical components.
(c) A vertical wiring route is formed along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102, 102 of the outer body 100 to pass the wiring.
(d) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is led to the side of the case member 400, and from there is connected to the main body side electrical components through the wiring route.

In the gaming machine equipped with the above components (a) to (d), the main body side wiring 119 does not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 In order to bypass the wiring route provided along (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 599)), it is possible to bring the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. , the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c has been reduced compared to the conventional configuration, in which the main body side wiring 119 runs down approximately the center of the back plate 104 and passes behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. It can be made larger. Note that the larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the more powerful they will be when rotating.

[6-2. Wiring means - connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include a connector 425 at the end of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400, and a connector 425 on the side of the case member other than the main board 409. Connectors 427 at the ends of harnesses 426 connected to electrical components are respectively connected.

These two connectors 425, 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. 605. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 approximately in the center and protruding from both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-shaped panel fastener 432 (product name "Nylatch": registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and the wiring relay member 113 as shown in FIGS. 594 and 597(a). An attachment piece 431 is placed on the tip of the support tube 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support tube 128 and locked. Therefore, the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support tube 128 serving as the fixing means, and in turn is fixed to the wiring relay member 113, so that the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 are not disconnected from each other.

[6-2-1. Wiring relay board - connectors 425, 427 - temporary shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, that is, from the time of factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

The temporary shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 594, 595, 601, and 602, and A nearly horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, bench side plates 434 erected at both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. A space is provided between one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the center and the other two on the upper and lower sides so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can fit therein. Note that one bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure with a finger hook 436 extended at the tip, and by hooking a finger on the finger hook 436 and applying force in the direction of arrow X in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and in the bent state, the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily removed from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435. The imaginary line in FIG. 597(a) shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook 436 is bent into a key shape, and by doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed by pressing the button as shown by arrow Y. It's easy to do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 595, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. 435 , the connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 . Of course, even though it is called temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set to have enough strength to prevent it from coming off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, until the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427, which are integral with the connector holder 428, are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the work of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer body 100, the connectors 425, 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424, 426 may hit the parts inside the case member 400, and the parts, as well as the parts, may be damaged. There is no fear that it will damage itself.

Then, as shown in FIG. 597(b) → FIG. 597(a), in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer body 100, one bench side plate 434 is warped outward as described above. If the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its attachment piece 431 hits the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 will be attached to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), and in this state push in the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128. At this time, if a guide rail 440 for guiding is provided on the bench portion 433 as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 594 and 595, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 deep, which improves work efficiency. improves.

The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stabilized using the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 as a support base, and is spaced apart from the case member and does not come into contact with the outer body. Even if the model unit 100 and the model unit 50 move relative to each other, no unreasonable load is applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical ideas can be understood.
(a) a box-shaped outer main body with an open front and a back plate covered with a back plate, and equipped with a power supply device and other main body-side electrical components;
(b) a model unit in which a symbol variation display device for varying a plurality of symbols and other electrical components on the case member side are provided on a case member that is detachable from the outer body;

(c) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay main body side wiring connected to the main body side electrical components and case side wiring connected to the case member side electrical components;
(d) a connector attached to the tip of the case side wiring;
(e) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(f) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member to temporarily fix the connector holder;

(g) a fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before the model unit is attached to the outer body. (i) A gaming machine characterized in that, with the model unit attached to the outer main body, the connector holder is replaced from a temporary fixing member to a fixing means, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to a wiring relay member.

In the gaming machine described above, the attachment of the model unit 50 to the outer body 100 and the coupling of the connectors to each other are performed separately, but in contrast to this, for example, the connectors are directly attached to the model unit 50. A possible method is to automatically connect the connectors by pushing the model unit 50 into the outer body 100. However, with this method, if the large-mass model unit 50 vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation, etc., a large load is placed on the connector joint, resulting in concerns about reliability, and countermeasures are costly. be.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine is also conceivable in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two stages, upper and lower, and the upper door-shaped front member is a component on the model unit 50 side. However, in such gaming machines, if an excited player hits the door-shaped front member at the top during a game, a direct impact will be applied to the connector joint, which may make the connector joint unstable. There is an issue that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

In contrast, the gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200, and further, After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is combined with a component (wire relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. 594, and becomes an independent structure separated from the model unit 50. Therefore, even when using a low-cost, common connector that is soldered to a printed circuit board, there is no need to worry about reliability and durability during transportation or gaming. Further, since only the model unit 50 is to be replaced when changing the model, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not, the burden on the game center when changing the model is lightened.

[6-2-2. Connection of connectors 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, connector 425 and connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection between the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed with one operation of setting the connector holder 428 at a predetermined position on the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical matter, with a structure in which the two independent elements of the connectors 425, 427 and the connector holder 428 are brought together and integrated, there is a difficult problem of "accurate positioning" of the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125. encounter. In other words, unless the positioning of all four elements, the two connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side, is accurate, it is impossible to connect the connectors 425, 124 and the connectors 427, 125 all at once. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at a mass-produced level cost. One way to solve such problems is to use so-called drawer connectors, which have a mechanism that increases flexibility when connecting without soldering to the printed circuit board, but drawer connectors themselves are expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

In contrast, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122, 123 of the wiring relay member 113, which is a board support member, are divided and the connectors 124, 125 are attached to each, and at least one of the connector boards 122, 123 is connected to the wiring board 122, 123. It is placed in a non-fixed manner in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 in a direction perpendicular to the coupling direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 ("perpendicular" here does not necessarily mean a strict 90 degree angle). , which means approximately 90 degrees according to conventional wisdom). In such a configuration, when the connector holder 428 is aimed at connecting the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 will move to compensate for the deviation. Since the connectors 427 and 125 are moved for correction, it is also possible to connect the connectors 427 and 125.

In the above game machines, if you operate the connector holder while aiming at the connector on the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connectors due to manufacturing errors, etc. Since the unfixed connector connection terminal board moves freely with the connector to correct the deviation and absorb the error, it is possible to connect connectors that are not intended for connection. Therefore, it is possible to connect multiple systems of connectors at once using one connector holder. Moreover, the connectors used are general-purpose and inexpensive connectors, such as DIN standard connectors, which are used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and are therefore inexpensive.

Further, the connector holder is reliably fixed to the wiring relay member and, furthermore, to the back plate of the outer body via the wiring relay member using a fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, so even if the model unit moves, the movement is absorbed by the flexible harness, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder. . Therefore, even if there is relative movement between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder will move only with the outer body and will not be interfered with by the model unit, allowing the connector to connect properly. There is no load on the part at all. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is extremely high.

Note that, as in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is made movable and the large connectors 425 and 124 are set as the coupling criteria is more effective than the reverse configuration. , 427, and 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with less force, making it easier to automatically correct deviations. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 598, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled together before the other connector 427 and 125, thereby making it easier to align the connectors for coupling.

Furthermore, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 598, chamfers C ( If a straight chamfer or a curved chamfer is formed, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfer C will improve the connection between the connectors.

Furthermore, in addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are made movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to make either one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side movable. In that case as well, the same effects as above can be obtained. A specific example of such a connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. 606. In this example, a receiving tube 429a with a female thread is provided protruding from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, and on the other hand, ear pieces 427b having play holes 427a are formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving tube 429a of the connector holder 428 is provided with a receiving tube 429a. A play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted into the connector 427, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving sleeve 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 in one piece. Further, in the embodiment, two connectors are treated as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

In addition, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 593 and 601, the back side of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variable display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438, 438 that penetrate the side plate 404 (or rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409, etc., and are located on the right side of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 in FIG. Pull out the cable 313 (see Figure 601) of the reel board 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 from one wiring port 438 to the outside of the case member 400, and connect the cable 313 as shown in Figure 601. The cable 313 is placed in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned into the case member 400 through another wiring port 438 and connected to the main board 409 or the like. Note that cable stops 439 are provided in the cable groove 437 at predetermined intervals to prevent the cable 313 from falling out of the cable groove 437.

Therefore, the main board 409 and the like and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electrical components inside the case member 400, and there is no need to draw out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with wiring ports 438, 438 and a cable groove 437 to allow the cable 313 to detour outward is as follows.

The reel board 312 is installed on the non-hinged side of the door-shaped front member 200 on the side of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302), considering the workability of wiring to insert and remove the connector in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. If, on the other hand, the reel board 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the fully opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 590) and the reel board 312 will be in a close position. This is because the connectors face each other, making it impossible to secure a large working space necessary for inserting and removing the connectors.

However, on the other hand, if the connection parts of the boards to which the reel board 312 is connected (main board 409, sub board 510, image display body 500, etc.) are on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400, , the cable 313 crosses inside the case member 400. In this case, there is a risk that the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or conversely, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 and the cable 313 is routed around the outside as in the embodiment, the above-described trouble with the cable 313 does not occur. Furthermore, it is easier to perform wiring work when the device case 302 is pulled out slightly from its predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 can be considered as the wiring cost. There is room for things to be said. Therefore, when the device case 302 is set at a predetermined position, the cable 313 becomes slack, and depending on the amount of pullout, the slack of the cable 313 becomes large. If the cable 313 has a large amount of slack, the cable 313 may be inserted into the triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the inner corner of the case member 400, which is located parallel to the wiring port 438. It is possible to release the loose parts of the body.

Furthermore, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, there is a space between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Helps make effective use of available dead space. Note that the wiring using the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 does not need to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel board 312, and can be applied to all cables that cross the inside of the case member 400.

In addition, in FIG. 600, reference numeral 441 is a functionally separated relay terminal board.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory as a completed product with the case member 400 attached to the outer main body 100 and the necessary wiring completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the gaming machine installation island of the gaming hall, but at this time, as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. When fixing with the fixing member 601, open the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500, insert the fixing member 601 into the through hole 132 of the outer body 100 from inside the case member 400 through the skylight part 443, and then A fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight part 443 using a tool 602 such as a screwdriver to firmly connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper beam 600 of the gaming machine installation island. Note that since a plurality of through holes 132 are provided, any one of them can be selected and used as necessary. For example, even if there are variations in the position and size of the upper crosspiece 600, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper crosspiece 600 can be selected. Furthermore, when replacing the entire gaming machine, by changing the through hole 132 used, it is possible to prevent the problem of a hole in the fixing member 601 being formed at the same position on the upper crosspiece 600 (so-called stupid hole formation).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 614, a gap S is formed between the outer body 100 and the case member 400, and the heat generated from the image display body 500 etc. is transferred to the cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. , it passes from the skylight section 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent 133 of the back plate 104, and from there passes into the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, and this acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range, so the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this part, and the wiring relay member 113 The air is actively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located higher up. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[7. Symbols and symbol rows on each reel]
As shown in FIG. 635, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a symbol row (total of 21 symbols from array number 0 to 20) consisting of multiple types of symbols arranged at regular intervals. A reel band (design band) with a symbol) is attached. FIG. 635 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, the above arrangement number is written for convenience in order to identify the symbols arranged in the symbol row. Further, in FIG. 635, the reel 301a with the reel band 321a is shown as the left reel, the reel 301b with the reel band 321b is shown as the middle reel, and the reel 301c with the reel band 321c is shown as the right reel. In the description of , the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c are also written as necessary.

Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, three) of the symbols arranged in each symbol row in an opening 401 (also referred to as a symbol display window, hereinafter the symbol The display windows 401 are arranged so as to be visible through the display window 401 (see FIG. 636, which will be described next).

In addition, as shown in Figure 635, the types of symbols include "7" symbol filled in red (hereinafter referred to as "red 7 symbol"), "7" symbol filled in blue (hereinafter referred to as "red 7 symbol"), and "7" symbol filled in blue (hereinafter referred to as "red 7 symbol"). ``Blue 7 pattern''), ``BAR pattern,'' ``Cherry pattern with a cherry pattern,'' ``Watermelon pattern with a watermelon pattern,'' ``Replay pattern,'' and ``Bell pattern.'' ``Bell design'' with ``Bell design'', ``Design written as ``Yoshi'' (hereinafter referred to as ``Yoshi design'')'', ``Design written as ``Sei'' (hereinafter referred to as ``Sei design'')'' be. Furthermore, depending on the number of stars drawn inside the bell, the bell pattern can be divided into "Bell 1 pattern" with one star drawn on it and "Bell 2 pattern" with two stars drawn on it. can.

In FIG. 635, the "red 7 symbols" are two in arrangement number 3 and number 6 in the reel band 321a, one in arrangement number 12 in the reel band 321b, and one in arrangement number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue 7 symbol" corresponds to one of the arrangement numbers 16 on the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement numbers 3 on the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement numbers 15 on the reel band 321c. The "BAR pattern" corresponds to one with array number 11 on the reel band 321a, two with array number 6 and 9 on the reel band 321b, and one with array number 2 on the reel band 321c. The "cherry pattern" is one of the arrangement numbers 10 on the reel band 321a, three arrangement numbers 1, 14, and 17 on the reel band 321b, and 7 and 14 on the reel band 321c. These two are equivalent. The "replay symbols" are array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17 on the reel strip 321a, and array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, and 1 on the reel strip 321b. In the reel band 321c, the five array numbers correspond to number 1, number 5, number 8, number 13, and number 17. The "Bell 1 symbol" has three arrangement numbers 13, 15, and 18 on the reel band 321a, and five arrangement numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 on the reel band 321b. , in the reel band 321c, the three array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. The Bell 2 symbol corresponds to three symbols with array numbers 2, 5, and 8 on the reel band 321a, and two symbols with array numbers 0 and 4 on the reel strip 321c. The "watermelon pattern" has three arrangement numbers 9, 14, and 19 on the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 13 on the reel band 321b, and arrangement number 3 on the reel band 321c.・No. 6, No. 11, and No. 20 correspond to the four numbers. The "gift pattern" corresponds to one of the arrangement numbers 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement numbers 19 to the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement numbers 18 to the reel band 321c. The "regular symbol" corresponds to one with array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one with array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one with array number 18 in the reel band 321c. Note that the types of symbols are just examples, and are not limited to these types.

[8. Frame members]
FIG. 636 shows an enlarged view of the slot machine 1 viewed from the front, centering around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. According to FIG. 636, a symbol display window 401 is formed in the center of the frame member 501, and around the symbol display window 401, there are a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs (corresponding to "various indicators" described later). is shown to be placed. Parts of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) are made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and the images etc. (including videos) displayed on the image display body 500 are visible to the player. It has become. Each of the above configurations shown in FIG. 636 will be described in detail below.

[8-1. Design display window]
As shown in FIG. 636, from the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol rows of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. From the top, the three positions where this symbol is displayed are "upper row (or upper row position)" (for example, the position where "Bell 1 symbol" on reel 301a is displayed), "middle row (or middle row position)" (for example, , the position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed), and the "lower row (or lower row position)" (for example, the position where the "Bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

From the above, it is possible to display "number of rows x number of reels" symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 based on "number of stages (3) x number of reels (3)".

Various lamps are provided at the left end of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, hereinafter referred to as the display panel 501) (on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401), among which "BET1", "BET2" ” and “BET3” are the BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers on the BET lamps (numbers 1, 2, and 3 of “BET1”, “BET2”, and “BET3” above) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number according to the number of medals bet). In other words, "1" is 1 bet (the number of medals bet is 1), and "2" is the number of bets (the number of medals bet is 1). 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), and "3" corresponds to 3 bets (also called MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

The valid order is determined according to the number of bets. This "valid sequence" is also called a valid line. Hereinafter, it will be collectively referred to as the effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is judged to have been displayed as a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only when they are displayed side by side on one active line. In other words, even if the symbols constituting the symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination are individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not lined up on any active line (i.e., if the symbols are not lined up on any of the active lines (i.e., If the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not lined up on the active line), it will not be determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination has been displayed. In this way, if the symbol combinations corresponding to a predetermined winning combination are not lined up on the active line, it is determined that a disjointed pattern combination (i.e., a losing symbol combination) has been displayed.

Next, the number of bets and active lines will be specifically explained. In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as an example, in principle, a game with three coins is prescribed or recommended (the prescribed number is three). However, in the bonus state, a game with two coins is played (specified number of coins is two). In addition, the valid lines in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment are two lines: a straight line that goes up to the right (up-right line) and a straight line that goes down to the right (down-right line). Specifically, in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 636, the line 623b in which "BAR symbol - Replay symbol - Righteous symbol" is displayed (that is, the line rising to the right) and "Bell 1 symbol - Replay symbol - Bell 1 symbol" are displayed. ” (that is, the line 623a downward to the right) are the only two lines that are valid lines.

Note that the number of bets and active lines are not limited to the above example. For example, the active line may be any line that is visible to the player within the symbol display window 401, and may be arranged in one or more straight lines, or in a chevron-shaped or V-shaped arrangement. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or more effective lines may be set. Furthermore, the number of active lines may vary depending on the number of medals bet in a game.

The combination of symbols on the active line displayed in the symbol display window 401 in FIG. 636 is "Bell 1 symbol - Replay symbol - Bell 1 symbol" displayed on the downward-rightward line 623a, which is one of the effective lines. Since this combination of symbols corresponds to the replay role (replay role), in the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is played again. It becomes possible to do so. Note that even if "Bell 1 symbol - Replay symbol - Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the active line, it is difficult for the player to understand at a glance which combination of symbols has been displayed. However, by displaying the symbol combination "replay symbol - replay symbol - replay symbol" on the middle line which is not the valid line, the player can understand that he has won a replay prize. In addition, like the above-mentioned replay combination (replay combination), it is possible to prepare symbol combinations that are difficult to grasp at a glance on the active line, but are difficult to grasp when viewed in the entire symbol display window 401. , symbol combinations may be similarly prepared for other winning combinations. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance from the active line alone, when viewed in the entire symbol display window 401, the winning combination of the winning combination (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the active line). This makes it possible for the player to easily understand what has been done.

[8-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 636, on the display panel 501, the area around the symbol display window 401 is lit (or A plurality of indicators such as flashing lamps and LEDs are arranged. Among such a plurality of indicators, various indicators other than the special display LED 612 will be explained.

The error lamp 604 starts lighting up (or flashing) when some kind of trouble, malfunction, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "error") occurs while playing the slot machine 1, and indicates that an error is currently occurring. This lamp has the role of informing players, etc. (including hall staff, etc.) of the In FIG. 636, near the error lamp 604, the letters "ERR", abbreviated as "ERR", are drawn. Note that since it is difficult to indicate the details of the error by simply lighting or blinking the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the error that has occurred on the special display LED 612 provided separately. .

The section display lamp 605 starts lighting up (sometimes blinking) when the number-of-games management process, which will be described later, is started, and turns off when the number-of-games management process ends. That is, this section display lamp 605 is a lamp that has the role of informing players and the like (including hall attendants and the like) that the number of games management process is in progress. Note that the timing at which the section display lamp 605 starts lighting (or flashing) may be any timing within the game in which the number of games management process is started. "In the game in which the number of games management process has started" refers to the period from when the start lever 210 is operated until it becomes possible to insert game media (medals, credit data) to execute the next game (in the game) If the result of the game for which the number management process has been started is a replay, this corresponds to the period (until the automatic BET state is reached). For example, a plurality of modes include a mode in which it is possible to immediately insert gaming media when a special combination is selected in an internal lottery, and a mode in which it is possible to insert gaming media several seconds after performing a so-called freeze process. It may be determined in one of these modes with a predetermined probability. In the case of a mode in which it is possible to insert game media a few seconds after so-called freeze processing, by performing liquid crystal display or reel display during so-called freeze processing, players are made to expect that the number of games management process will start. An inciting performance may also be performed. Note that conditions for starting the game number management process will be described later.

The replay lamp 606 is a lamp that has the role of informing the player that if the game result is a replay (described later), the player can play the game again (play the game again without betting new medals). In FIG. 636, near the replay lamp 606, the letters "REP", abbreviated to "replay", are drawn.

The start lamp 608 is a lamp that starts lighting up (or flashes) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has the role of prompting the player to operate the starting lever 210 (starting operation). In FIG. 636, near the start lamp 608, the letters "STR", abbreviated to "start", are drawn.

The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp that has the role of encouraging the player to bet by continuing to light up (or blink) until the number of bets reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 636, near the medal IN lamp 610, the letters "INS", which is an abbreviation for insert (insertion of gaming value), are drawn.

The stored number display LED 613 displays the stored number of medals (gaming value) that can be used by the player when the player inserts medals or pays out medals according to game results. This display has the role of informing the player of the number of medals stored, and is composed of two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs (the left side is the stored number display LED 613a, the right side is the stored number display LED 613b). For example, if the upper limit of the number of stored medals that can be used by a player is 50, and the upper limit number is stored, "5" is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a, and the number of stored medals displayed on the LED 613b is displayed. By displaying "0", the number of stored medals, "50", is displayed so that it can be identified by the player.

The BET lamps 614 (614a to 614c) indicate the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting medals (gaming value) up to a specified number is performed before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. This is a display that has the role of informing the number of bets (BET number) of gaming value in one game by displaying the display, and is composed of three lamps corresponding to the number of BETs. Specifically, when the number of bets is 1, the BET lamp 614c is lit, and when the number of bets is 2, the BET lamp 614b is lit in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the number of bets is the upper limit of 3 (MAX BET). When this happens, the BET lamp 614a is further turned on, and all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on.

Note that the display of these display devices described above is controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 637 described later).

In addition to these, a bonus announcement lamp that announces the winning of the bonus game, which will be described later, and a 7-segment LED that displays the cumulative number of medals paid out in bonus games, etc., and counts bonus games, etc. are separately provided. Good too.

In addition, indicators such as the storage number display LED 613 and special display LED 612 (described later) are not limited to 7-segment LEDs as long as the information to be displayed can be displayed on the display. For example, the number of segments may be different from "7" (14 segments or 16 segments), or an LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, etc. may be used instead of LED. You can.

[8-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has the role of displaying the number of medals (gaming value) to be paid out in case there is a payout of medals (gaming value) in accordance with the game result, thereby informing the player of the number of medals (gaming value) to be paid out. The display is composed of two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs (special display LED 612a on the left and special display LED 612b on the right). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, the timing when the medals are paid out one by one is displayed. By changing the display contents such as "01", "02", .

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of displaying an instruction function to display the contents of an instruction by the "instruction function" in the game, in addition to the role of displaying the number of coins to be paid out. The details of the "instruction function" will be explained later, but to give an overview, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when it is decided to issue an instruction by the "instruction function" when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 , information indicating the pressed position and stop order of the reels 301a to 301c (replaced as the pressed order and position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed as an instruction function display, and depending on the contents of the display, When the reel 301 is stopped, a game result advantageous to the player is provided.

In addition, in the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of instructions (specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function, management of state transition, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function The main board 409 manages not only the control of functions and state transitions, but also the display of instruction functions on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, other display means (for example, the image display body 500) other than the display destination of the instruction function display also display instructions for the instruction function with the same content. However, such display may be controlled by a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510). The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub board 510 is illustrated in FIG. 637.

To explain with a specific example, when a push order minor combination (in this example, any one of "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6") is selected as a winning combination during the ART game, the main board 409 (especially Under the control of the CPU 1110), the special display LED 612 displays the instruction contents of "appropriate push order" corresponding to the won push order minor combination. Therefore, when the player understands the display contents of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the player can recognize the appropriate pressing order. On the other hand, information similar to the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 by a command or the like, so that the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 that has received the command It is possible to display an image on the image display body 500 indicating the order in which the buttons are pressed. A specific display example of the instruction function display will be described later in [10-3-6].

In the slot machine 1, it is possible to display such an instruction function in such a manner that one of the indicators on the display panel 501 also serves the function (in this example, the display is made on the special display LED 612 that displays the number of coins to be paid out). ). That is, the special display LED 612 will display the instruction function and the number of coins to be paid out, but by, for example, separating the display periods of each, it is possible to display the two without confusing them. In this embodiment, the function is also used to display the number of coins to be paid out, but a display having other functions may also be used, or a display exclusively for displaying the instruction function may be provided.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 lights up to notify the occurrence of an error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of error. It also has a function to display error information. The display timing of the instruction function display, payout number display, and error information display will be described later in [10-3-7] and the like.

[9. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 637 schematically shows the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. installed in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and a CPU 1110, ROM 1112, RAM 1114, input/output interface 1116, etc. are mounted on this main board 409. The main board 409 has a function that influences the result of the game (acquisition of gaming value), and specifically includes, for example, an internal lottery execution means for performing an internal lottery, and a bonus game based on the result of the internal lottery. , an RT state control means that controls the RT state, an ART first winning lottery means that performs an ART first winning lottery, a hell state where the game number management process is not in progress, and a plurality of advantageous states where the game number management process is in progress. A game state control means for controlling one of the states, an instruction function control means for controlling whether or not to permit the operation of the instruction function, and a game number for managing the number of games played by the player. It includes a game number management control means for executing management processing, a payout control means for paying out medals as prizes based on winning combinations, and the like. Details of each of these means will be described later.

Further, the slot machine 1 includes, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 637, a door open detection switch that detects the open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (storage medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. It is equipped with a lever detection sensor in the medal selector provided inside, and stop button LEDs (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lit around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409.

The single-sheet input buttons 205, 206, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, the storage release switch 209, etc. mentioned above are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons are operated using sensors (not shown). It is possible to detect the operation by the player and output the detected operation signal to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal that starts the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 300 (starts rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a is activated. , 211b, 211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively, is output to the main board 409.

Note that, hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c will be referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

In addition, the slot machine 1 houses other equipment along with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these equipments. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal release device 110 and the like.

The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, and right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor consists of a stepping motor, and each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can rotate and stop independently, and when rotating, multiple types of symbols are displayed continuously from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. is displayed while changing.

Further, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a position sensor 331a, 331b, 331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c. (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 207, the above-mentioned solenoid 207a and insertion sensor 207b are installed. The input sensor 207b detects medals inserted from the medal input slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the inserted sensor 207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path that reaches the input sensor 207b within the medal selector 207 is locked out and the insertion of medals is no longer accepted, and even if the player inserts a medal, the passage that reaches the input sensor 207b is locked out, and even if the player inserts a medal, the passage that reaches the input sensor 207b is locked out. The medals flowing through the return gutter 213 return to the medal receiving tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is also disabled, so neither bets nor accumulation of medals are performed by inserting medals.

The medal dispensing device 110 has a dispensing sensor 110e in the dispensing port 110c that detects dispensed medals one by one, and a dispensing medal signal for each medal is input from the dispensing sensor 110e to the main board 409. has been done. In addition, the auxiliary game medal storage box 111 is provided with a medal full sensor 111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is sent to the main board. 409. At this time, an error display is performed using the image display unit 500, special display LED 612, error lamp 604, etc. to notify that there is an abnormality in medal storage, and the players, hall employees, etc. are notified of the occurrence of the abnormality (see Fig. 681 described later). (corresponds to the "Auxiliary storage full error" shown in Figure 1).

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal release device 110. That is, the main board 409 outputs a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above. Further, a drive signal is inputted to the medal dispensing device 110 from the main board 409 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and in response to this, the medal dispensing device 110 performs a medal dispensing operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal dispensing device 110, or if there are no medals at all, the detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 110e outputs an abnormality signal of the medals being paid out to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, special display LED 612, image display body 500, etc., to notify players, hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred. equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected, for example, by a harness, and the main board 409 connects each of these indicators via corresponding ports. The lighting and display can be controlled.

The slot machine 1 includes a sub-board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409, and this sub-board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input/output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio). Amplifier) 1126, sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The sub-board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or turning on, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the lighting device 502, and the operation of the speaker 512.

Furthermore, when the main board 409 is provided with an external relay terminal board 131, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the gaming hall via this external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays the role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. Note that the connection configuration in FIG. 637 is only an example of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510) may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various gaming information managed by the sub board 510 and emergency information manageable by the sub board 510 (for example, error information notifying malfunctions or malfunctions of components of the slot machine 1) are stored in the hole. It becomes possible to output to the computer 1200.

In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1, and can only be operated by opening the door-shaped front member 200. Among these, the power switch 112v is used to turn on and off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is used to select one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that have different winning probabilities. It is configured to allow hall personnel to change from one set value to another. Further, the reset switch 112u is used to cancel an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated together with the setting key switch 112t when changing settings. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In a game played by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 after determining the number of medals to bet, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c rotates, and then the player presses the reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c. When you operate , each of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c is controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line, and the Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be awarded. However, since the number of sliding pieces is determined at the time the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated, the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is determined at the time the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated. . Therefore, instead of determining the game result from the combination of symbols displayed on the active line, the game result may be determined at the time when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated.

As described above, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c is provided with a reel band 321a, 321b, 321c, respectively (see FIG. 635). Then, when all reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is selected from the display contents displayed in the symbol display window 401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line). It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned active lines (up-right line 623b and down-right line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

In this example, the explanation is given on the assumption that there are two active lines, but if the slot machine 1 has a plurality of active lines, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will be displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. It is determined whether or not there is. As a result, if it is determined that symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in an amount equal to the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations. Note that in the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15 medals) can be defined as the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at one time (9 medals in this embodiment). In such a case, if the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple active lines exceeds the upper limit, the predetermined number of medals of the upper limit will be paid out, and the upper limit will be exceeded. The amount will be rounded down. Further, the amount exceeding the upper limit value is not divided and paid out to subsequent games.

In the following, the case where a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one active line will be described as It is said that the combinations are aligned, or the winning symbols are aligned.

The symbols of slot machine 1 include "Red 7 symbols", "Blue 7 symbols", "BAR symbol", "Cherry symbol", "Replay symbol", "Bell 1 symbol", "Bell 2 symbol", and "Watermelon symbol". As mentioned above, there are "7 red symbols," "7 blue symbols" and "BAR symbols" that stand out compared to other symbols. The design is simple and easy to identify. The ease of identification here refers to the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbols, including when the reels are rotating and when the reels are stopped. Because of the color and size of these symbols even while the reels are rotating, when the player performs a stop operation, it is easy for the player to aim and stop these symbols so that they are stopped within the symbol display window 401. (in other words, it is easy to press). Furthermore, regarding the "Gi design" and "Sei design", as can be seen from Figure 635, the two designs, "Gi design" and "Sei design" form a circular shape, which can be read as "Justice". Since they are arranged vertically adjacent to each other, and only one reel is arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, it is easy to press the reels.

These symbols are just symbolic symbols by themselves (one symbol alone does not correspond to the winning combination), but when combined in a predetermined manner, they become a combination of symbols that correspond to the winning combination. . That is, a predetermined game benefit is granted. Below, the permissible symbol combinations corresponding to each of the winning combinations shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 will be explained.

[9-1. Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, the winning combinations (including those called winning combinations) in the internal lottery executed by the internal lottery execution means and the corresponding symbol combinations will be explained using FIGS. 638 to 643. FIG. 638 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 1 is set. FIG. 639 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 2 is set. FIG. 640 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 3 is set. FIG. 641 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 4 is set. FIG. 642 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 5 is set. FIG. 643 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations when setting 6 is set. The lottery tables (also referred to as winning value determination tables) shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 are stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. Although details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, an internal lottery is executed by an internal lottery execution means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

[9-1-1. Overview of instruction function]
It is assumed that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, which will be described below, is provided with an instruction function using push order minor combinations as an example of the functions provided in the gaming machine. As for the push order bells 1 to 6, the alignment of the bell symbols can be displayed only when the order in which the reel stop button 211 is operated is correct. In a gaming machine equipped with an instruction function, the ART first win lottery is determined by the ART first win lottery executed by the ART first win lottery means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

When the player wins the ART first lottery, the ART game starts. In the ART game, the reels are stopped in accordance with the instruction by instructing the appropriate push order that can be expected to pay out the most medals, mainly when push order Bells 1 to 6 are selected as the winning combination in an internal lottery. To enable a player who performs an operation to obtain many medals. On the other hand, in the game period other than ART games (non-ART), the above-mentioned push order instructions are not given, so it is possible to make it uncertain to obtain medals in the correct push order, and medals are awarded for each game state. This can make a difference in the expected number of medals earned and the pace of medal consumption. Such an instruction function is an example of a function provided in the slot machine 1, and its detailed processing will be described later.

Also, to add more information about the pressing order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the pressing order (the order in which the reels 301 stop) is "Left-Middle-Right", "Left- There are six types: "Right-Middle", "Middle-Left-Right", "Middle-Right-Left", "Right-Left-Middle", and "Right-Middle-Left". In the following description, each pressing order will be referred to as a "sequential push," a "pinching push," a "middle order pushing," a "middle reverse push," a "reverse pinching push," and a "reverse push." Note that the "Press Order 123" written in the Notes 1 column of Figures 638 to 643 corresponds to the "Left-Middle-Right" press order (press order), and the "Press Order 132" corresponds to the "Left-Right-Right" press order. ``Press order 312'' corresponds to the press order ``Right-Left-Middle'' (reverse pinch press), and ``Press order 213'' corresponds to ``Middle-Left-Right''. ” corresponds to the press order (middle press), “press order 321” corresponds to the press order (reverse press) of “right-middle-left”, and “press order 231” corresponds to “middle-right-left” Corresponds to the pressing order (middle reverse press).

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a stop operation procedure for stopping the reels 301, during a game in which no instructions are given in the order of pressing, such as during a period when an ART game is not played (non-ART), the left reel 301a It is recommended to press "left ('sequential press' or 'pinch press')" which stops the reel first (that is, first performs the stop operation on the reel stop button 211a), and the middle reel 301b and right reel 301c. If a stop operation is performed that does not follow the recommended procedure, such as by stopping the game first, measures disadvantageous to the player may be taken, such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery.

Such a stop result in the slot machine 1 is, for example, when the winning combination is a winning combination corresponding to a pressing order minor combination (in this example, pressing order bell), the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211a, Depending on the order in which keys 211b and 211c) are pressed, the appearance of the stop result differs. Such a difference in the form of the stop result can be realized, for example, as follows. In other words, as winning combinations corresponding to the "Pushing order bell", there are multiple types of winning combinations each associated with an appropriate pressing order (specifically, "Pushing order bell 1" to "Pushing order bell 1" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643). For example, if the winning combination is "Push order Bell 1", the order of push (left, middle, right) corresponds to the "appropriate push order"), and the winning combination is determined by an internal lottery. A plurality of types of condition devices are allowed to operate depending on different combinations for each selected winning combination. At this time, depending on the order in which the reel stop buttons 211 are pressed, the symbol retraction control when stopping the reels 301 is under different priority control (for example, "number of sheets priority control" or "symbol combination number priority control"). By setting the button to be executed, it is possible to change the manner of the stop result based on the above-mentioned pressing order, and as a result, it is possible to make a difference in the number of coins to be paid out.

Here, "quantity priority control" means that when multiple condition devices are allowed to operate, the number of coins paid out is the highest at the time of winning (when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the active line). This refers to pull-in control that prioritizes the condition device that increases the number of symbols and draws the symbols of the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device from among the "drawable symbols" onto the active line and stops. In addition, "symbol combination number priority control" means that when the operation of multiple condition devices is allowed, priority is given to the condition device that can display the largest number of symbol combinations using "drawable symbols". However, it refers to pull-in control that pulls the symbol corresponding to the condition device onto the active line and stops it.

For example, "Press Order Bell 1", which sets the order of presses as "appropriate order of presses", is selected as the winning combination, and the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is "appropriate order of presses (left, middle, right order)". ”, the above-mentioned “number of sheets priority control” is performed, and when it is “inappropriate pressing order”, the above-mentioned “symbol combination number priority control” is determined to be performed. At this time, in the case of "appropriate push order", priority is given to the 8-card combination condition device that has the highest number of payouts at the time of winning, and the 8-card symbol combination is drawn onto the active line. On the other hand, in the case of "inappropriate push order", priority is given to the conditional device for a 1-card role or the conditional device for a 0-card role, and the symbol combination for a 1-card role or a 0-card role is drawn onto the activated line. In this way, when "Push Order Bell 1" is selected as the winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in the "proper push order", an 8-piece winning combination will be won, but "incorrect push order" When the reel 301 is stopped at ``, it is possible to win a winning combination (1-card winning combination, 0-card winning combination) with a smaller number of payouts than the 8-card winning combination.

Note that the symbols that can be drawn onto the active line when the reels 301 are stopped are limited based on the position of the reels 301 at the time of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 symbols). Depending on the timing (push timing) of this stop operation, there are symbols that can be retracted and symbols that cannot be retracted. As a result, the manner of the stop result also differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the push timing is also set in advance.

In this way, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination associated with the "appropriate push order" is won, the operation of a plurality of condition devices is allowed, and different priority controls are applied to control the attraction of symbols on the reels 301. By setting the It is possible to stop the game at a stop roll that can award a large number of medals.

Further, although not illustrated in FIGS. 638 to 643, other push order minor combinations may be prepared separately from push order bells 1 to 6, or a push order replay combination may be used. When using the push order replay combination, for example, when the condition device of "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 is activated, if the stop operation is performed in the appropriate push order, " ``Raise reply 1'' is displayed and the state shifts to a high reply state (for example, from RT1 to RT2), and if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect press order, ``Normal maintenance reply'' is displayed and the state shifts to a high reply state. It is preferable that there be no. However, in this case, regardless of the order in which the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role will be displayed, and the bonus of replaying the game (playing the next game without inserting gaming media (medals, credit data)) will be displayed. The privilege of receiving a lottery) will be granted.

The above is an overview of the instruction function in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. In the following explanation, the ART game using the push order bell as described above will be taken as an example of a special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is limited to the ART game. However, it includes other advantageous gaming states (for example, bonus games, AT games, RT games, etc.). In addition, the instruction function is not limited to the instruction function that uses the order of presses, but may also be used, for example, the position of the press (a combination in which the privilege given can be changed based on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211). It may be something that has been used.

[9-1-2. Type of winning role]
The lottery tables shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 will be explained. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared depending on the RT state, and FIGS. 638 to 643 show general state (RT0), RT1, RT2, RT3, bonus as an example of the RT state in the slot machine 1. Internal states and bonus states are shown. Note that in this specification, the general state, bonus internal state, and bonus state will be described as being included in the RT state. Here, the general state is a state in which the bonus flag is not established, neither in the bonus game nor during RT, and is controlled after the bonus game ends. The bonus internal state is a state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1, BB2, which will be described later) is won through an internal lottery, and the bonus winning state is carried over without transitioning to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous gaming state that is entered based on winning a bonus (specifically, BB1, BB2, which will be described later) through an internal lottery and displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus. Although BB1 and BB2 are shown as bonuses in FIGS. 638 to 643, other types of bonuses can be installed in the slot machine 1, such as RB bonus, single bonus (SB), etc. You may prepare it. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare states corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed explanation of each state is omitted because it is the same as that of a general gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning probability (or set number) for each winning combination is determined for each RT state, and is prepared in advance for each RT state. An internal lottery is conducted using the lottery table that has been created. In the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of an internal lottery, a conditional device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the activated conditional device is displayed on the active line as described below. A reel stop process is performed. If a winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the active line, medals are paid out based on the winning combination. In the payout of medals based on winning combinations, the number of medals paid out may be set to differ depending on the RT state and the number of medals (specified number) bet for the game. At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table corresponding to the specified number.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence between one condition device and the reel control pattern, so if you want to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination, you can There are cases where multiple conditions are met for the winning combination. By doing this, it becomes possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stopping outcomes (symbol combinations displayed on the active line) for one winning combination.

The winning combinations shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 can be roughly divided into bonus combinations (BB1, BB2), small combinations (watermelon, cherry, and bell), and replay combinations (replayed combinations). If a candidate does not win any of the roles, it is called a ``miss''. Note that although the "miss" is not strictly speaking a winning combination, it may be explained below as being included in the winning combination for convenience.

Here, to briefly explain each winning combination, a "bonus winning combination" is a winning combination that triggers the execution of a bonus game, and specifically, "BB1" and "BB2" correspond to the bonus winning combination. In the "replay role (replay role)", the BET process (state and process in which the start lever 210 can be operated), which will be described later, is performed without inserting medals, and the next game can be executed (replay). It is a role. The "minor win" is a win in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out depending on the win, and the number of medals paid out differs depending on the small win displayed on the active line. As mentioned above, the winning combinations "Pushing Order Bell 1" to "Pushing Order Bell 6" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 may also be collectively referred to as "Pushing Order Bell." In FIGS. 638 to 643, the number of payouts of the push order bells is shown in multiple ways because the number of payouts may vary depending on the stop order and stop position of the reel 301. On the other hand, the "common bell" is a bell combination that can always stop the bell symbol regardless of the order in which it is pressed. Details of each winning role will be described later.

For specific roles such as watermelon role, cherry role, and replay role, in addition to the normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, and normal maintenance replay role (indicated as normal maintenance rep in Figures 638 to 643). , special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role (indicated as special maintenance rep in Figures 638 to 643) are included in the winning combinations. Details of these special roles will be described later. In this specification, a concept that includes both the normal watermelon win and the special watermelon win is simply referred to as the watermelon win or watermelon, and similarly, a concept that includes both the normal cherry win and the special cherry win is simply referred to as cherry. It is called a winning combination or a cherry, and a concept that includes both the normal maintenance replay combination and the special maintenance replay combination is simply referred to as a maintenance replay combination, a maintenance replay, or a maintenance rep.

Furthermore, regarding the maintenance replay combination, in addition to the normal maintenance replay combination and the special maintenance replay combination, the winning combination includes a special maintenance replay combination (indicated as special maintenance replay combination in FIGS. 638 to 643). Details regarding this special maintenance replay role will be described later.

In addition, "unsuccessful" means that no winning combination has been selected as a result of an internal lottery regarding winning combinations. If it is a "miss", the symbol combinations corresponding to any winning combinations will not be stopped, unless the state of formation of the bonus combination has been carried over (that is, the internal state of the bonus).

Bells that don't matter in the order of pressing will pay out 9 medals regardless of the order in which they are pressed, whereas if the order of the bells is pressed in an incorrect order, one medal will be paid out or no medals will be paid out. . Therefore, by allocating the numbers in this manner, when the bonus state is controlled (bonus game), it is possible to increase the number of medals held by the player without substantially reducing them.

In addition, even if the internal lottery result is not a "miss" and you win any of the roles (bonus role, replay role, minor role), the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning role will be subject to the attraction control described later. The stop operation (operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at the appropriate timing (pressing position) is aimed to make the reel stop within the symbol display window 524 (more precisely, on the active lines 623a, 623b) within the possible range. If this is not done, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the active line. Therefore, even if you win one of the winning combinations as a result of the lottery, if the combination of symbols corresponding to this winning combination is not displayed on the active line, the same thing as when a "miss" is selected, as described below. In step S6 of FIG. 644, it is determined that the game result is a loss. However, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, if the stop operation is not performed at the appropriate timing (press position) for the bonus role and rare small role (watermelon role, cherry role), the corresponding combination of symbols will be placed on the active line. However, for other general small roles (press order bell, common bell) and replay roles, the corresponding combination of symbols will be displayed on the active line no matter when the stop operation is performed. The symbols are arranged in such a way that the symbols can be played (however, for winning combinations that require a pressing order, it is also necessary to perform the stop operation in the proper pressing order). In addition, if the game result is a loss despite winning some winning combination, instead of randomly displaying a "losing" symbol combination, we will display a message indicating that the winning combination was lost based on the winning combination. Control will be performed to display a predetermined symbol combination (stop roll) shown in the symbol display area. The symbol combination (stopped number) displayed at the time of such a loss is hereinafter referred to as a "zero" (or "zero").

Furthermore, in the description of this embodiment, the expression "bell zero" is used for "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6". Bell zeroing is when the bells are pressed in the correct order for each winning combination, but the bells are stopped in an incorrect order when the bells are pressed in the wrong order. This means that the symbol combination of the Bell winning combination that yields a payout is not stopped, and another symbol combination that loses the Bell winning combination is displayed. In the case of such a zero bell, the number of zero bells is displayed as a stop roll, and a payout (including no payout) is made that is smaller than the original number of bells.

In addition, in the description of this embodiment, the expression "barake" (barakeme) may be used in addition to the above-mentioned "zeroshi (zerojime)". "Barake" refers to a stop result that appears to be a combination of disparate symbols (so-called It means to be "uneven"). That is, the "uneven number" is one of the classifications related to the display mode of symbol combinations, and even if it is a random number, it does not necessarily mean a loss, so medals may be paid out.

[9-1-3. Winning form of winning role]
The winning combinations illustrated in FIGS. 638 to 643 include winning combinations in which only one winning combination is selected in one lottery opportunity (single winning combination), and winning combinations in which multiple winning combinations are selected simultaneously and overlappingly. It also includes roles (simultaneously elected roles). When a single winning combination is won, the subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the activation of a conditional device based on the winning combination. However, if a simultaneous winning combination is won, the subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the simultaneous operation of condition devices based on the respective winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. In the reel stop control when a simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority order (for example, a priority order such as "Replay>Small role>Bonus" or "Replay>Bonus>Small role") Accordingly, the reels are stopped while the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are allowed to be displayed, and benefits are paid out according to the winning combinations. Note that depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small roles, the method of setting the active line, etc., control may be performed so that simultaneous winnings win together, and if simultaneous winnings occur, each Benefits will be paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the minor role is a "non-carryover role" that can only be won in the winning game, and the winning state of the winning role that did not win in the winning game will not be carried over to the next game. Even if simultaneous winning of the winning combinations is selected, medals will not be paid out for the minor winning combinations that did not win in the winning game.

Furthermore, in the case where a bonus role and a minor role are won at the same time, the roles selected in such a combination are also called a duplicate role. Even if a bonus role and a minor role are won at the same time, the condition devices corresponding to each winning role operate at the same time, just as in the case where both minor roles are won at the same time. The reels are stopped while the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are allowed to be displayed according to the priority order such as "Game > Minor Roles > Bonus" or "Replay > Bonus > Minor Roles", and the reels are stopped according to the winning roles. The benefits will be paid out. However, regarding the bonus role, as mentioned above, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game, the winning state of the bonus role will be carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus role is displayed in the next game or later. It can be used as a "carry-over role". Specifically, the bonus winnings (BB1, BB2) are "carryover winnings". Furthermore, replay roles and minor roles (for example, the role of Bell) are "non-carryover roles." In this way, even when a "carry-over combination" and a "non-carry-over combination" are won at the same time due to the winning of a duplicate combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. If the symbol combination corresponding to the "carry-over combination" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning state of the "carry-over combination" is carried over to the next game or later. However, in such a "next game", if another minor role is won, both the "carryover role" and the "another minor role" will be won, but in this case, Since they were selected in different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate hands.

In addition, in the case of simultaneous winning, which symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is preferentially displayed on the active line is determined based on the priority setting in the reel stop processing.

Below, the winning combinations broadly classified above will be explained in detail.

[9-1-4. Bonus role]
The winning combinations “BB1” and “BB2” shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 are bonus combinations. When a bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding conditional device "BB1" is activated, reel stop processing is performed, and benefits are awarded based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a bonus game (BB game) is executed by displaying a symbol combination (a set of "red 7") corresponding to the condition device "BB1" on the active line. This bonus game is a game in which a player is provided with an opportunity to acquire medals in a concentrated manner over a plurality of games. A bonus game is played using the lottery table indicated in the status. Then, the bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a prescribed upper limit (for example, 30 games) or the cumulative number of coins paid out in the bonus game exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 200 coins). When the bonus game ends, the bonus state shifts to the normal state. Note that even if the symbol combination "BB1" or "BB2" is displayed on the active line, no medals will be paid out as a prize.

Here, the symbol combinations corresponding to "BB1" and "BB2" are arranged in such a way that they cannot necessarily be drawn onto the active line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 635). However, "BB1" and "BB2" are carry-over hands that can carry over the winning flag, so even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed (not aligned) in the winning game, the winning state will not be established in the next game or later. The bonus internal state is carried over and the game is played until the symbol combination is stopped.

Then, when a replay winning combination or a minor winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery while being controlled by the bonus internal state, the winning combination that can be displayed is determined in accordance with a predetermined priority order.

[9-1-5. Replay role]
The winning combination "Replay" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 is a winning combination of Replay (replayed combination). When a replay combination is won, a replay condition device is activated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed to be stopped and displayed on the active line (either line 623a or 623b), and based on this, the reels are stopped as described below. Processing (step S5 in FIG. 644) is performed. In the slot machine 1, when a replay win is won, the symbol combination of the replay role is controlled so that it is always displayed on the active line, so that it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay role is completed, and as a result, as a benefit of the replay role. In the next game, a bet is automatically made without the need to insert medals again or perform a bet operation (operation for inserting stored medals), and it is possible to replay the same game as the previous game. Note that even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, medals as prizes will not be paid out.

Replay roles include a maintenance replay role (displayed as "maintenance rep" in FIGS. 638 to 643), an up replay role (displayed as "up replay" in FIGS. 638 to 643), and a down replay role (displayed as "up replay" in FIGS. 638 to 643). 7-set replay role (displayed as "7-set fake rep" in Figures 638 to 643), and 7-set fake replay role (displayed as "7-set fake rep" in Figures 638 to 643). be. The maintain replay combination is a replay combination in which the RT state is not transferred and the current RT state is maintained. The up replay roles include up replay role 1, which can be selected only in RT1, and up replay role 2, which can only be selected in RT2, and up replay role 1 functions as a transition role from RT1 to RT2. The up replay combination 2 functions as a transition combination from RT2 to RT3. The lower replay combination is a combination that can only be selected in RT3, and functions as a transitional combination from RT3 to RT2. The 7-set replay combination is a replay combination that can only be selected in RT3, and when the 7-set replay combination is selected in RT3, it functions as a combination to which the ART game is added. The set of 7 fake replay combination is a replay combination that is selected only in RT3 like the set of 7 replay combination, and the ART game is not added even if it is selected in the internal lottery.

In addition, the maintenance replay roles can be selected individually in an internal lottery for the normal maintenance replay role and the special maintenance replay role, while the special maintenance replay role, up replay role 1, up replay role 2, down replay role, all 7 are selected. Both the replay role and the 7-set fake replay role are not selected individually in the internal lottery, but are always selected in duplicate at the same time as the normal maintenance replay role.

When "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the Special Maintenance Replay Role and the Normal Maintenance Replay Role, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed by "Left-Middle-Right". When the stop operation is performed in the order (forward press), the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance replay role will be displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance replay role will be displayed on the active line. When the stop operation is performed with (press), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line. If "Special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep" is selected in an internal lottery in a hell state that is not in the process of managing the number of games, the hell state will transition to an advantageous state. In addition, in an advantageous state where the number of games is being managed, if "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep" is selected in an internal lottery in advantageous states A to D, the transition to advantageous state E occurs; If ``maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply'' is selected in an internal lottery, the addition of the ART game will be confirmed.

If "Up Rip 1 + Normal Upkeep Rip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of Up Replay Win 1 and Normal Upkeep Replay Win, is selected in an internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 will be pressed in the order of "Right - Middle - Left". When the stop operation is performed with (reverse push), the symbol combination corresponding to up replay combination 1 will be displayed on the active line, and the other push orders (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle order push, middle reverse push) will be displayed on the active line. ), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination will be displayed on the active line.

If "Up Rip 2 + Normal Upkeep Rip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of Up Replay Role 2 and Normal Maintenance Replay Role, is selected in an internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 will be pressed in the order of "Right-Left-Middle". When the stop operation is performed with (reverse pinch push), the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 will be displayed on the active line, and the other press orders (forward press, pinch push, middle order push, reverse push, middle reverse push) will be displayed on the active line. ), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination will be displayed on the active line.

When "Downward Rip + Normal Upkeep Rip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of a down replay win and a normal upkeep replay win, is selected in an internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "Middle-Left-Right" ( When the stop operation is performed with the middle order press), the symbol combination corresponding to the down replay role will be displayed on the active line, and with other presses (order press, pinch press, reverse pinch press, reverse press, middle reverse press). When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

When the simultaneous winning combination of the 7 set replay role and the normal maintenance replay role, ``7 set replay + normal maintenance replay'' is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed by ``Right - Middle - Left''. If the stop operation is performed in order (reverse push) and at the appropriate timing (timing when 7 symbols can be pulled in), the symbol combination (double number of 7 symbols) corresponding to the 7-match replay combination will be displayed on the active line, and other than that If the stop operation is performed in the pressing order (sequential press, pinch press, reverse pinch press, middle order press, middle reverse press), or if the stop operation is not performed at an inappropriate timing even though it is a reverse press, it will correspond to the maintenance replay role. The symbol combination is displayed on the active line.

If "7 set fake replay + normal maintenance replay", which is a simultaneous winning combination of 7 set fake replay role and normal maintenance replay role, is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 will be set to "right-middle-left". When the stop operation is performed in the push order (reverse push), the symbol combination (7th zero) corresponding to the 7-set fake replay role will be displayed on the active line, and the other push orders (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push) will be displayed on the active line. When a stop operation is performed (press, middle forward push, middle reverse push), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the active line.

A feature of the game privilege of the replay game is that instead of paying out medals, an automatic BET is placed in the next game without consuming new medals. Furthermore, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve the payout of medals, there is little disadvantage to the hole even if the frequency of winning increases, for example, by increasing the probability of winning. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, the probability of winning is approximately once in every 6 to 7 times in the normal state (general state). This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per certain period of time) within a certain range. In other words, the winning combination called replay can have the role of suppressing excessive consumption of medals during game progress.

In addition, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role are evenly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, and 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role and the symbols that are also in the replay role By increasing the number of other symbols (symbols that do not constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination) placed between the symbols that constitute the corresponding symbol combination mode from 1 to at most 4, It is possible to arrange the combinations of symbols corresponding to replay combinations without the need for eye-stamping. In such a case, if the priority order of the winning roles to be displayed is "Replay (replay role) > Minor role > Bonus", then the condition device of the replay role and the other roles (minor role and bonus role) Even if the condition device operates at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination will always be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations corresponding to other combinations will not be stopped and displayed.

[9-1-6. Bell]
Next, the role of Bell, which is a winning role, will be explained. This Bell role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals upon winning. In this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned push order Bell 1 to push order Bell 6, there are common bells that can be pushed in any order as bell roles. When a common bell is selected in the internal lottery, the combination of bell symbols is displayed on the active line no matter what order the reel stop button 211 is operated.

[9-1-6-1. Bell in any order]
First, a bell (common bell) in which the degree of winning at the time of winning (winning rate and number of medals paid out based on winning) does not change depending on the order in which the reels 301 are pressed will be described.

When the "Bell in any push order" shown in Figures 638 to 643 is selected as a winning combination, one of the corresponding symbol combinations will always stop on the active line, regardless of the order and timing of pressing the reels. The conditioner operates so that the Therefore, when such a conditional device is activated, regardless of the order and timing of stopping the reel stop buttons 211 by the player, the symbol combination of the Bell winning combination is stopped and displayed to win the Bell winning combination, and the winning winning occurs. A medal payout (8 medals) will be given as a bonus.

[9-1-6-2. Press order bell]
Next, a description will be given of the push order bell in which the degree of winning at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) can change depending on the order in which the reels 301 are pressed.

The winning combinations “Push Order Bell 1” to “Push Order Bell 6” shown in FIG. 638 are winning combinations of Push Order Bells that are prepared mainly to ensure that benefits are given to players in ART games. . As described above, "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are each associated with one of the six appropriate press orders (see FIG. 638).

In addition, in FIG. 638, the winning probabilities of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are equal, and when they are added up, the winning probability of "push order bell" is 20478/65536, but "push order bell" The respective winning probabilities of "Press Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6" may be arbitrarily distributed under conditions that satisfy the above-mentioned total value. In this way, the probability of winning can be equally distributed among the six appropriate order of pressing of the "bells in the order of pressing" (the probability of winning for each of the 6-choice bells can be made equal); It is possible to make it difficult for the correct pressing order to be selected. In such a case, in a normal game where it is recommended to stop the left reel 301a first, it is possible to suppress the rate at which the push order bells win, and to suppress the payout rate in the normal game, the ART game etc. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in special games.

According to FIGS. 638 to 643, "Push Order Bell 1" is a winning combination of the Push Order Bell role in which forward pushing is the proper pushing order, and "Pushing Order Bell 2" is the winning combination of pushing order Bell in which pressing is the proper pushing order. "Push Order Bell 3" is a winning combination for the Push Order Bell role that makes the pinch push the proper push order, and "Push Order Bell 4" is the winning role for the Push Order Bell role that makes the middle push the proper push order. It is a winning combination of a push order small role that is a push order, and "Push order Bell 5" is a winning combination of a push order Bell role that has a reverse push as the proper push order, and "Push order Bell 6" is a middle reverse push. This is the winning combination of the push order Bell role where is the appropriate push order. Therefore, the "pressing order bell" in this embodiment is a so-called "six-option bell" in which the proper order of pressing is divided into six ways. Note that, as a matter of course, such an appropriate pressing order can be freely set within predetermined limits at the design stage of the gaming machine.

In this way, for the push order bells "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6", only if the stop operation is performed in the appropriate order, 8 medals will be paid out as if the bell has been won. is a winning combination that can be received, and if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect press order, "Bell Zero" will be displayed on the active line and you will receive fewer benefits (1 or more) than when winning the Bell combination. 0 medal payout) will be awarded.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, left pressing (sequential pressing or pinch pressing) is recommended in the non-ART state, which is not the ART state. Therefore, if a game is played according to the recommended procedure in a non-ART state, the push order bell (specifically, the push order bell 1 to push order Even if Bell 6) is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the Bell combination cannot be displayed on the active line. However, in the case of an ART game, a proper push order is instructed and a stop operation according to the instructions is allowed, making it possible to easily win a bell combination when a push order bell is won. In addition, if a player performs a stop operation that differs from the recommended procedure during non-ART and unfairly obtains medals, measures such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery will be taken to prevent the overall medal payout. The expected value of may be adjusted appropriately.

Further, the slot machine 1 does not need to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, except when an instruction function is displayed in an ART game, etc., when a specific push order is not recommended, the player may perform the stop operation in any push order; Since there is no recommended procedure, there is no need to make adjustments (measures such as temporary suspension of the ART lottery) in the event that a medal is unfairly obtained by performing a stop operation that differs from the recommended procedure, as described above. becomes. In addition, when a specific push order is not a recommended procedure, it is preferable to make the probability of winning for each push order in the push order minor combination the same. By making the winning probability the same for each push order, the expected value of the ball payout can be made equal regardless of which push order the game is played in, allowing players to play the game with confidence in their preferred push order. can.

[9-1-7. Rare small role]
Rare small roles as prize-winning roles include the role of watermelon and the role of cherry. The watermelon combination is a winning combination in which a payout of five medals can be expected when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line. The cherry combination is a winning combination in which a payout of two medals can be expected when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line.

[9-1-8. Special role]
As mentioned above, the watermelon role, cherry role, and maintenance replay role include the special watermelon role, special cherry role, and special maintenance replay role, in addition to the normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, and normal maintenance replay role, respectively. There is. If a special watermelon role, special cherry role, or special maintenance replay role is selected in an internal lottery when the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state described below, the transition destination from the hell state is in an advantageous state. One of the advantageous states A to E is determined. That is, in the hell state, the special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role function as a transition trigger role to an advantageous state (an end trigger role of the hell state). The probability of determining the transfer destination when these special roles are selected by internal lottery in the hell state will be described later. In addition, when the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is one of the advantageous states from advantageous state A to advantageous state E, a special watermelon win, a special cherry win, or a special maintenance replay win is selected in an internal lottery. Even if the normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, or normal maintenance replay role is selected, the same processing will be performed (the payout process of game media will be performed as a prize, but there will be a difference between a hell state and an advantageous state). (No migration processing is performed between the two.) In other words, the special role is a role that exhibits a different function from the normal role only when it is in a hell state. Note that the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display includes whether or not the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and if the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, the instruction function display is executed. It refers to multiple game states with different conditions.

In addition, to transition from a hell state to an advantageous state, a special watermelon role, special cherry role, or special maintenance replay role is selected in an internal lottery during the hell state, and the symbol combinations corresponding to these special roles are selected. It is preferable that the symbol combination corresponding to the special win is displayed on the active line, but even if the symbol combination corresponding to the special win is not displayed on the active line, the special watermelon win or the special watermelon win can be drawn in an internal lottery when the situation is in hell. The winning may be performed upon selection of the special cherry winning combination or the special maintenance replay winning combination.

Furthermore, as can be seen from FIGS. 638 to 643, the probability of being selected in the internal lottery differs depending on the settings for the normal combinations (normal watermelon, normal cherry, normal maintenance rep in RT2 and RT3). However, for special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance replay role), the probability of being selected by internal lottery is the common probability for all settings. In particular, although not shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, the winning value assigned to each special combination in the random number range of 0 to 65535 is unique and common to all settings. For example, assuming that the random number assigned as the winning value of the special watermelon is 10,000 to 10,448, the winning value of the special watermelon is 10,000 to 10,448 in all setting values of settings 1 to 6. The same applies to special cherries and special maintenance replays.

The above are the combinations of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and the symbols corresponding to each winning combination.

Note that the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is designed so that the hall personnel can set it to any one of settings 1 to 6, and for each setting, BB1, "BB1 + normal watermelon", "BB1 + normal cherry" , BB2, "BB2 + normal watermelon", "BB2 + normal cherry", normal watermelon, normal cherry, push order bells 1-6, common bell, normal maintenance rep, "up reply 1 + normal maintenance rep", "up reply 2 + normal maintenance The winning probabilities are different for "Reply", "Lower Reply + Normally Maintained Reply", "7-set Reply + Normally Maintained Reply", and "7-set Fake Reply + Normally Maintained Reply". On the other hand, the winning probabilities for the special prizes (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance rep) are the same for settings 1 to 6, and the winning probability for the special prizes does not change even if the settings are changed. In other words, the probability of winning the winning combination, which functions as a trigger for transition from a hell state to an advantageous state, is a common probability for all settings. However, the winning probability of the special watermelon, the winning probability of the special cherry, and the winning probability of the special maintenance rep may be the same for settings 1 to 6, or the winning probability of the special watermelon, the winning probability of the special cherry, and the winning probability of the special maintenance rep. Although different for each setting, the combination probabilities of special watermelon, special cherry, and special maintenance rep may be made the same for settings 1 to 6. Although not shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, so-called bonus winnings such as BB1 may also be divided into special BB1 winnings and normal BB1 winnings. For example, in FIGS. 638 to 643, the probability that the BB1 combination will be selected is 44/65536, but when divided into the special BB1 combination and the normal BB1 combination, for example, the probability that the special BB1 combination will be selected is 65536. The probability that the normal BB1 combination will be selected can be set to 11/65536. In this case, if you try to make it common for all settings, the probability that BB1 will be selected will generally differ depending on the setting, so the probability that the special BB1 role will be selected will be the same for all settings, and the normal BB1 role will be the same for all settings. It is preferable to provide a range in the ball payout rate by setting a difference in the probability of being selected.

Furthermore, the symbols are not limited to the symbols and combinations of symbols described above. Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned symbols, it is also possible to newly provide a plurality of types of symbols. Furthermore, the types of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the above-mentioned winning combinations are not limited to necessarily providing all winning combinations, and necessary types of winning combinations may be selected as appropriate.

For example, a bonus win and a minor win (or a replay win) may be set to win at the same time, and only when the reels 301 are stopped in the correct order, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay win will appear on the active line. There may also be provided push order replay combinations that are displayed.

In addition, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (bell winning combination in this embodiment) is displayed on the active line is determined based on the order in which the reel stop button 211 is stopped. Instead, a push position small winning combination determined based on the timing at which the reel stop button 211 is stopped may be prepared. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, a push position small win is defined as when the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (press position) or when it is performed at an inappropriate stop timing. , are small winning combinations that indicate different winning modes. When installing such a push position small winning combination, by giving instructions so that the player can easily recognize the correct pushing position in the ART game, when the pushing position small winning combination is won, the game To enable a person to easily win a prize with a corresponding combination, and to obtain many medals.

Note that the player of the slot machine 1 performs an internal lottery based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIGS. 638 to 643), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the number of coins to be paid out, and the arrangement of the symbols (FIG. 635). In some cases, it is possible to find a gaming method that can expect the maximum payout even in situations where it is impossible to know the winning combination selected by the player. Such a gaming method will hereinafter be tentatively referred to as a "maximum efficiency batting method." When playing the game using the maximum efficiency hitting method, depending on the reel stop position, it may be difficult to draw the symbol combination with the highest number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination onto the active line (watermelon, cherry, etc.). , chance eyes, etc.), the reels are stopped by pressing one of the reel stop buttons 211 at a specific timing that will result in the maximum payout in terms of expected value, taking into consideration their winning probabilities and the number of payouts. By pressing the remaining reel stop buttons 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol mode, symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations can be drawn in to obtain a large number of payouts. In other words, the maximum efficiency batting method can be said to be a gaming method that minimizes the chance of missing a winning combination.

[10. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be explained. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110, etc.).

FIG. 644 is an example of a main routine showing a basic processing procedure for one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial settings are performed in preparation for the start of the game. Particularly when starting up the power, etc., check the connections and operating status of the various devices mentioned above, check whether there is backup data, and if backup data exists, return it to the state before the power was turned off. Execute. If backup data does not exist, predetermined processing such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the slot 203, or by pressing the MAX input button 206 (or one coin input button 205) if there are already stored medals. and waits for the start lever 210 to be operated. That is, the BET process is executed from the time the number of bets for one game is determined until the start lever 210 becomes operable. Note that if the slot machine 1 is to be a 3-coin-only machine in which the game can be played by inserting 3 medals, the 1-coin insert button 205 may not be provided.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the starting lever 210, which was placed in a waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether any winning combination is to be the result of an internal lottery. Execute. This internal lottery process is performed at a stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, which start rotating in the subsequent step S4, are in a stopped state (they are brought into a stopped state by the player's stop operation). This is executed in order to determine whether or not the winning combination will be used as the lottery result of the game. That is, only if the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will be on the active line when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped. It is permissible to stop.

Next, in step S31, instruction function processing is performed as processing related to the ART instruction function (so-called ART navigation). In the instruction function process, not only the winning of the ART game and its start are determined, but also ART navigation is executed which instructs (instructs) the player about the order of presses etc. during the ART game. Details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 647 and the like.

In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all central controls related to the instruction function (ART initial winning lottery, determination of the number of ART games, execution of the ART game, RT state transition, display of the instruction function, etc.) do. On the other hand, the sub-board 510 manages auxiliary control related to the instruction function (navigation display on the image display 500, etc.), but even in such a case, the sub-board 510 controls the navigation displayed on the image display 500, etc. The displayed contents of the display are limited to those that are in accordance with the determination result of the designated function by the main board 409 (content that is not different from the designated function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content by the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Furthermore, the display content of the instruction function display that is controlled by the main board 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display content of the navigation display that is controlled by the sub-board 510 and displayed on the image display body 500 etc. are one pair. The correspondence relationship is not limited to one, but may be one to n (multiple patterns). That is, when the main board 409 performs some instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the sub-board 510 causes the navigation display on the image display body 500 etc. to be executed in a display mode corresponding to the instruction function display. The specific display mode of the navigation display does not need to be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 may decide which display mode to display the navigation, or the main board 409 may specify. Furthermore, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above configuration; for example, the main board 409 may perform all processing related to instruction function processing.

Furthermore, in the instruction function process in step S31 shown in this example, the processing content regarding the ART instruction function is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Here, since the internal lottery process is performed each time the game is executed, the ART first winning lottery, which is performed based on the result of the internal lottery process, is also performed each time the game is executed. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function process is finished before the reel rotation process in step S4, which will be explained in the next step, is started.

Next, in step S4, upon completion of the internal lottery process in step S3, a reel rotation process is executed to start rotating all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c start rotating, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are activated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are activated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) is lit to notify that the operation has been completed, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation process is executed. Note that the operation valid lamps are lamps built into each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, respectively.

In step S5, the player's press operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted, and a reel stop process that turns off the operation valid lamps in the order of reception and stops the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. Execute.

In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in a stopped state, check whether the winning combination symbols are all on the "active line" (the symbol corresponding to any of the winning combinations). A determination process is executed to determine the winning combination based on whether the combination mode is displayed or not. Specifically, by comparing the "display content displayed on the active line (symbol combination mode)" and the "symbol combination that is allowed to stop on the active line corresponding to the winning combination" Determine the winning role. Further, the determination process in step S6 may be performed based only on the "display content (combination mode of symbols) displayed on the active line". In addition, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the line (lower right line 623a) in which "Bell symbol - Replay symbol - Bell symbol" shown in FIG. The two lines on which are displayed (line 623b rising to the right) are defined as "valid lines". However, the number of valid lines is not limited to this.

In step S7, a medal payout process is executed based on the content of the gaming benefit corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6. Furthermore, if the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination that involves a change in RT state, such as type 2 BB, the respective RT state is changed (changes in RT state shown in FIGS. 638 to 643). Grant various gaming benefits such as re-playing and re-playing.

The above is the basic processing procedure for one game of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process) to step S4 (reel rotation process) are internal processes that are triggered by a series of external operations (starting operation) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively referred to as a startup process. This startup process will be specifically explained below.

[10-1. Startup process]
FIG. 645 specifically shows each process performed in the startup process.

In the start-up process, first, in step S101, insertion of medals or operation of the one-piece insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination in step S101 is satisfied and the process moves to step S102. This judgment is based on the insertion of medals equivalent to the MAX bet (in other words, in the case of a game with the specified number of 3 medals, inserting 3 or more medals, and in the case of a game with the specified number of 2 medals, inserting 2 or more medals) It is assumed that this condition is satisfied only when the 1-card insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 is operated, which results in a MAX bet.

In the next step S102, as a reception process, the number of bets (in this example, only MAX bet) is determined, and the active line lamp corresponding to the number of bets is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the specified number is three, two lines, an upward-toward-right line 623b and a downward-toward-right line 623a, become active lines; Turn on the lamp.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated, the process waits until the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted, and the process moves to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled, and if so, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted. If the operation of the starting lever 210 has been validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the starting lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied and the process moves to the next step S105.

Furthermore, unless the player makes a bet operation or inserts a medal in step S101, or does not make a MAX bet, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process moves to step S104. In this case, the determination in step S104 is also not satisfied, and the process returns to step S101 to repeat the subsequent processing.

Furthermore, in the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This automatically places the player in a MAX bet state when a MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. As a result, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

In step S105, in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated.

Next, in step S106, when the starting lever 210 is operated, rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started, and random numbers are extracted (obtained) based on the operation of the starting lever 210. As this random number, one of the random numbers from 0 to 65535 is extracted. Once the random number is extracted, the process moves to the next step S107. Note that the timing for extracting the random numbers at this time may be determined immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, or may be extracted during the programming process, such as after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

In step S107, a winning combination (verification of random numbers) is performed to determine which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random numbers (hereinafter referred to as extracted random numbers). In this hit determination, the extracted random number value is compared with a hit value determination table to be described later. The verification of random numbers performed here is to determine whether the extracted random numbers match (match, match) the random numbers of a predetermined winning combination. For example, when the winning random number of BB1 is 0 to 43, if the extracted random number is any one of 0 to 43, it is determined that BB1 has won. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the relevant winning combination is turned on. Note that the winning probability for each winning combination in the winning determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the winning determination table is as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643. Note that the winning probabilities differ depending on the settings for "BB1 + normal watermelon", "BB2 + normal cherry", the normal maintenance reply in RT2, and the "lower reply + normal maintenance reply" in RT3. However, the winning probabilities that differ depending on the settings are not limited to these, and the winning probabilities of BB1, BB2, normal watermelon, and normal cherry may differ depending on the settings.

In the flag processing, when determining a winning value judgment table that is a reference for judgment when comparing extracted random numbers in the game, the game status flags such as the BB game in progress flag, which will be described later, are referred to. Determine the winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (RT state flag) that is ON in the game is set, and extracted random numbers are compared. It is assumed that the game state flags are prepared according to the RT state, and include, for example, a general state flag, an internal bonus flag, and a bonus mid flag. When both the internal bonus flag and the bonus internal flag are in the OFF state, the normal state flag is always turned ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it is a "lose" that it does not correspond to any winning combination, and none of the condition devices is activated. Here, when any of the conditional devices is turned on (operated/established), it becomes possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the conditional devices that are satisfied. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the conditional devices is satisfied, the symbol combinations corresponding to any winning combinations cannot be aligned on the active line. Steps S106 and S107 described above are for performing a random number lottery inside the slot machine 1, and hereinafter these steps will be collectively referred to as an internal lottery or an internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of random numbers to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 644 described above).

Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 644, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the instruction function process shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 645, this instruction function processing may be executed as part of the flag processing in step S107 in FIG. 645, or after the flag processing in step S107 is completed, step S108 It may be executed until the wait timer times up.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing when flag processing or instruction function processing is executed, a group of conditional devices that are allowed to operate based on the winning combination, instruction contents of the instruction function that occurs, etc. , at least part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) through command communication (corresponding to an "instruction information command" to be described later). Note that the commands for notifying this information may be appropriately grouped commands.

Further, the command sent from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) as a result of the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment can adopt the following command mode. . In other words, the winning combinations are divided into groups based on their type, the order in which the reel stop button 211 is pressed, etc., and for the winning combinations selected by an internal lottery, the group containing the winning combination is displayed as a main display in a form that makes it possible to identify the winning combination. Commands can be sent from the board 409 to peripheral boards (eg, sub-board 510). Note that the classification criteria for grouping the winning combinations are not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, if the presence or absence of a pressing order is added to the classification criteria, all bell roles included in the pressing order bell (pressing order bell 1 to pressing order bell 6) are grouped together, and a common bell role as a bell regardless of the pressing order is grouped. By separating the bell roles into different groups, you can divide the bell roles into groups depending on whether or not there is a pressing order. At this time, the bell roles are divided into a group of bells that can be pressed in any order and a group of bells that can be pressed in any order. The same applies to replay combinations, and for example, they may be divided into a push order replay group and a normal replay group (no matter the push order). Further, all the winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence or absence of a pressing order, and in such a case, all the winning combinations can be divided into a group with a pressing order or a group without a pressing order. Furthermore, instead of grouping the winning combinations, condition devices based on the winning combinations may be grouped. Below, the command for notifying such grouped winning combinations will be explained in more detail.

First, regarding sending a command to notify grouped winning combinations, when the instruction function display is executed, a command that allows you to see all the details of the grouped winning combinations (command that allows so-called "complete navigation") may also be sent. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what type of winning combination is selected and the order in which the winning combination is pressed, so it can determine the reel stopping method that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to display a navigation display (so-called "complete navigation") that can reliably indicate the following.

In addition, when the instruction function display is executed for sending a command to notify grouped winning combinations, a command that allows you to see part of the breakdown of the grouped winning combinations (for example, a command that can instruct only the first stop) is required. "Partial navigation") may also be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize some information regarding the selected winning combination, it displays a navigation display (for example, only the first stop) that can partially instruct a method of stopping the reels that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to display a so-called "partial navigation" that allows you to indicate the following.

Furthermore, regarding the sending of a command to notify grouped winning combinations, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command may be sent that does not allow the details of the grouped winning combinations to be known. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize, based on the group indicated by the command, that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed. , unable to recognize any further information. For example, although it is known that the winning combination is one of the bells in the push order, the correct order of the push order and the specific details of the winning combination ("Bell 1 in the push order" to "Bell 6 in the push order") It can be recognized to the extent that it does not know whether it is true or not. Note that a command for notifying grouped winning combinations when such an instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a "conditional device command."

Furthermore, when the instruction function display is executed, the small combinations to be grouped do not need to be limited to the push order bell, and may be grouped including other combinations (for example, push order replay). . In other words, in this case, regardless of whether Bell is selected as the winning combination or another combination is selected, if the correct pressing order is the same, a command indicating the same group will be sent. means. Also, even if the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small winnings to be grouped to the pressing order bell, and it is also possible to group other winnings including other winnings, but in such a case, In this case, the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) that received the command cannot determine the type of winning combination (whether it is another winning combination or a bell), and the winning combination is instructed in a state unrelated to the instruction function display. (For example, if the instruction function is not executed, it is not possible to display a navigation on the image display body 500 indicating that another winning role has been won.) It is preferable to send commands by grouping them by type of small combinations in order of pressing, such as separating them from ``replay'' and ``replay''.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command that notifies the winning combinations grouped in this way, and the peripheral board side can independently notify the winning combinations and their associated winning combinations. Judging the order of pressing can be suppressed.

In the next step S108, it is determined whether the wait timer started in the previous startup process (specifically, the game immediately before the current game) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). Note that this timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the time when the reels start rotating in the game to the time when the reels start rotating in the next game. It is something. Here, if the wait timer times up (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied and the process moves to the next step S109. Further, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

In step S109, rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speed of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c becomes constant, the operation valid lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are turned on. This lighting allows the player to know that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

In the slot machine 1, the reels that have started rotating continue to rotate at the above-mentioned constant speed until a stop operation (pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) by the player is accepted. .

Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[10-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of matching the extracted random number values) is accepted as the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the winning combination) in the game. If the winning combination is accepted here, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is used as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery for subsequent processing (reel stop processing, This will be reflected in the judgment process, payout process, etc.).

In the slot machine 1, a range of random numbers (referred to as an extraction range) for performing random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 65535 (that is, 2 to the 16th power = 65536 random numbers). In addition, in this embodiment, the random number value of the extraction range is set from 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to this. When the extraction range of random numbers is expanded, the range of random numbers that can be extracted (the so-called denominator) increases by that amount, making it less likely that a particular random number will be extracted in a biased manner.

Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are further assigned in advance. For example, if a random number corresponding to the winning combination "BB1" is selected from among the random numbers within the extraction range (from "0" to "65535" in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment), the result of the internal lottery means that BB1 has been won, and BB1, which is a conditional device, is processed as an information command in the game. Furthermore, by using this, it is possible to calculate the winning probability of BB1 (probability that BB1 is selected as a result of an internal lottery, lottery probability) from the extraction range and the random number value corresponding to BB1. In the examples of FIGS. 638 to 643, the winning probability of BB1 in the general state is [total number of random numbers corresponding to BB1/total number of random numbers within the extraction range] of 384/65536.

In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random numbers are called winning values corresponding to each winning combination. In addition, if there are multiple winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined combination is consecutive random numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" within the extraction range, then the winning value of this predetermined combination is The range of values is the random number "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined (verified) that the extracted random number corresponds to one of the random numbers "1" to "4", it is determined that the player has "won the predetermined winning combination" as a result of the internal lottery. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, individual winning combinations (for example, BB1, BB2, watermelon, cherry, common bell, and maintenance replay) that win only one winning combination are prepared. However, as mentioned above, in addition to such a single winning combination, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are won at the same time may be prepared. When such a duplicate combination is prepared, the winning value of the duplicate combination is also included in the above winning value.

From this, the winning value ranges of all winning combinations are determined, and it is determined by internal lottery whether the extracted random number value falls within the winning value range of any of the winning combinations. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the winning value range of any winning combination, it will be a loss. In other words, the range of winning values for losers is outside the range of winning values for all winning combinations. Note that the winning value is also sometimes called the winning tolerance value.

By the way, a single winning combination is one in which one winning combination corresponds to one extracted random number value, and a simultaneous winning combination is one in which multiple (for example, two) winning combinations correspond to one extracted random number value. is the corresponding one. In other words, if the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. At this time, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations of the plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is permitted). However, even if multiple condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are established at the same time, the priority of the condition devices for simultaneous winning combinations is set, so in reality, all symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices are It is not always possible to stop on the effective line. For example, if a replay role and a bonus role are won at the same time, and priority is given to attracting the replay role, the reel stop processing in step S5 is performed to give priority to attracting the replay role, and Since the corresponding symbol combination can always stop on the active line regardless of the pressing order or the pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role cannot stop on the active line, and it is always possible to stop on the active line. The symbol combinations will be stopped.

Furthermore, according to FIGS. 638 to 643, during the bonus, the winning value of the bell (common bell) that can be expected to win (or win) regardless of the pressing order in the stop operation is within the extraction range. It occupies everything. In the present embodiment, if the replay is successful, an automatic bet is made and the next game is provided without consuming medals, and if the bell won in any order, eight medals are paid out. Therefore, when a bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals will be paid out during the execution period (during the bonus) of the bonus game.

As can be seen from FIGS. 638 to 643, in the slot machine 1 of this example, a special prize (special watermelon) that functions as a trigger for transition from the hell state to any of the advantageous states A to E is used. , Special Cherry, Special Maintenance Rep) are determined using internal lottery random numbers used in internal lottery (lottery of conditional device). Therefore, there is no need to use a new random number value different from the internal lottery random number value. Therefore, while improving the efficiency of the control burden, it is possible to create a new game experience using the hell state and the advantageous state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[10-3. RT state control processing]
The RT state control process performed in the slot machine 1 will be described below.

[10-3-1. RT state transition control processing]
FIG. 646 is an example of a block diagram illustrating RT state transition. Note that the RT state transition control is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

When the data value in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 is cleared (RAM clear), the normal state (RT0) is entered. The replay combination probability in the normal state (the combination probability of the maintenance replay role, up replay role 1, up replay role 2, down replay role, set of 7 replay role, and fake replay role of set of 7) is approximately 1/7.3. . In this general state, when a game is played over a certain period of time, the number of medals bet by the player to play the game is greater than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game. . That is, the general state is a state in which the number of medals decreases as the player plays the game. Note that in FIG. 646, the replay synthesis probability is expressed as the RP synthesis probability.

In the normal state, even though any of "Press Order Bell 1" to "Press Order Bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is not stopped in the proper order and 0 coins are reached. When the zero mark is displayed on the effective line, the CPU 1110 controls the normal state to transition to RT1. The replay synthesis probability in RT1 is approximately 1/7.3. In such RT1, when the game is played over a certain period of time, the number of medals bet by the player to play the game is greater than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game, as in the general state. There will be more people.

In RT1, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of Up Rip 1 is displayed on the active line, the CPU 1110 shifts from RT1 to RT2. control like this. When the RT state is transferred from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game is started on the condition that the player has won the ART first winning lottery, and the basic ART is in progress. In this specification, games during the basic ART, during the specialized zone (described later), and during the preparation of the specialized zone are collectively referred to as ART games. However, if you move from RT1 to RT2 without winning the first ART lottery, you will not be in the basic ART game, and the instruction function display and ART game number additional lottery will not be performed, which will be described later. However, in the case where the replay high probability state (for example, equivalent to RT2 in this example) is controlled in a state where the ART first winning lottery has not been won, the instruction function display will not operate if the push order bell is won. However, if the ball payout rate exceeds "1", the above-mentioned game number management process may be started. This is because a state where the ball payout rate exceeds "1" is an advantageous state for the player.

During the ART game, an ART game is executed in which the instruction function can operate continuously over a plurality of games (the instruction function display can be executed continuously over a plurality of games). Specifically, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 controls so that an instruction function display, which will be described later, is performed. It is also controlled by the sub board 510 so that the display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409. Furthermore, the replay synthesis probability in RT2 is approximately 1/1.6. In such RT2, when the game is executed over a fixed period, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is greater than the number of medals betted by the player to execute the game within the fixed period. That is, RT2 in which the instruction function display is performed is a state in which the number of medals increases as the player plays the game. However, one shot of ART games is set to 50 games, and unless you win the ART game number addition lottery, which will be described later, the game will end after 50 games. Specifically, if you win the ART game number addition lottery during the ART game, the ART game number will be added, and the ART game will continue until the added ART game number is used up in addition to the 50 games mentioned above. An instruction function display is performed. On the other hand, if you do not win the lottery to increase the number of ART games, the instruction function display described below will be displayed from the start of the basic ART game until 50 games have been played, but once 50 games have been played, the instruction function display will be displayed. finish. At the same time, the display by the sub-board 510 in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 also ends. When the display by the sub-board 510 in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function is completed, even if any of "Press Order Bell 1" to "Press Order Bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed. The proper order of shutdown operations is not specified. Then, when the 0th bell zero is displayed on the active line, the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT2 to RT1. In addition, even if the basic ART game ends, RT2 will be maintained until the 0th bell is displayed on the active line, so although the right to execute the replay game will be given frequently, the instruction function display will not be displayed. This will not be done.

In addition, in terms of probability, "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6" are not selected in the internal lottery during the ART game, and the specified number of games ( If the ART game number addition lottery is not won, 50 games may be used up; if the ART game number addition lottery is won, the sum of 50 games and the additional number of games) may be used up. In such a case, even if the prescribed number of games mentioned above has been played, the ART game will continue until the instruction function display is performed, and once the instruction function display is performed, the ART game will end. It is composed of

Further, in this example, one shot of the ART game is set to 50 games, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to 50 games.

In addition, in this example, the number of games is managed such that the ART game continues until the specified number of games, such as 50 games, is exhausted, but instead of this, the ART game is managed until the specified number of medals, such as 100 medals, are net added. The number of cards for which the ART game continues may be managed.

Furthermore, during the basic ART, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display. Therefore, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated in accordance with this instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT2 (however, when the symbol combination corresponding to up-reply 2 is displayed, it shifts to RT3). However, even though one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" was selected in the internal lottery and the proper order of stop operation of the reel stop button 211 was clearly indicated by the instruction function display, If the reel stop button 211 is not operated in accordance with this instruction function display, the zero number of bells is displayed on the active line, and the transition from RT2 to RT1 is made under the control of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

In RT2, when "Up Rip 2+Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to Up Replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from RT2 to RT3. When the RT state is transferred from RT2 to RT3, it becomes a specialized zone, and there is a high probability that an ART game will be added (details will be described later). In this RT3 as well, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 displays an instruction function display, which will be described later, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery. control so that It is also controlled by the sub board 510 so that the display is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

The specialized zone will end after 5 games. Specifically, when "lower rep + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery, if it is in the specialized zone (if 5 games have not been played), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay role is selected. Control is performed so that an instruction function display, which will be described later, is displayed. On the other hand, when "lower rep + normal maintenance rep" is selected in the internal lottery, if 5 games have been played since the special zone started, the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay role will be displayed. 638 to 643). Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT3 to RT2. Further, when the 0th bell zero is displayed on the active line in RT3, the CPU 1110 controls the RT state to be transferred from RT3 to RT1. The replay synthesis probability in RT3 is approximately 1/6. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination has not been displayed even though 5 games have been played since the start of the specialized zone, the control is performed to the basic ART game under the RT state of RT3. The lottery state during ART at this time is a high probability state. Therefore, even during the specialization zone or while preparing for the specialization zone, just like during the basic ART, if any of "Press Order Bell 1" to "Press Order Bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, the reel stop button will be pressed. 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display, and as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, the RT state will be maintained at RT3. When the stop button 211 is operated and the zero bell zero number is displayed on the active line, the process moves to RT1.

In any of the normal states, RT1, RT2, and RT3, when a bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated (when the bonus is established), the bonus is inside. In the bonus game is a state in which the bonus flag has been established but the bonus game has not yet started. In other words, when a bonus role is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus role is activated, but the condition device corresponding to this bonus role is such that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role in the game won in the internal lottery is on the active line. Even if the symbol combination is not displayed on the active line in the next game or later, it will continue to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. The replay combination probability within the bonus is approximately 1/7.3. Then, when a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus symbol is displayed on the active line within the bonus (when the bonus is won), the bonus game is started and the bonus is in progress. During such a bonus, when a game is played over a certain period of time, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is greater than the number of medals that the player bets to play the game within this certain period of time. . Then, when the bonus game ends, the normal state returns.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 controls the RT state to be any one of the general state (RT0 state), RT1 state, RT2 state, RT3 state, bonus internal state, and bonus state. Ru. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is equipped with an instruction function, and the execution of an ART game in which the instruction function can operate continuously over a plurality of games is basically performed in such an RT state. It is controlled by a separate system from the control of As mentioned above, the ART game using the instruction function is mainly executed in RT2 or RT3, but if the execution conditions for the ART game are satisfied (for example, winning the ART execution lottery), it can be executed in any RT state. , ART games can be executed. However, this does not apply if it violates restrictions such as rules; for example, the ART game cannot be executed in the bonus state. Below, the state control processing related to the instruction function will be explained in detail.

[10-3-2. Lottery related to ART]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the following lottery is held as a lottery related to ART. First, there are ART-related drawings that are carried out during the normal gaming state (hell state, advantageous state A to advantageous state D), which is neither an ART game nor a bonus, and an ART first-win lottery and an ART first-win lottery state transition lottery. Further, ART-related drawings performed during the ART game (during the basic ART, during the specialized zone, or during the preparation of the specialized zone) include the specialized zone drawing and the ART game number addition drawing. In addition, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 performs the ART first game as a lottery state related to ART in the normal gaming state (non-ART, RT1, RT2 and RT3 where no instruction function is occurring), which is neither an ART game nor a bonus. The winning lottery is controlled to one of multiple lottery states (advantageous state A to advantageous state D) with different degrees of advantage, and when neither the normal gaming state nor the bonus is in progress (during the ART game), the special zone lottery or It is controlled to one of a plurality of lottery states (ART medium low probability state, ART medium high probability state, specialized zone in progress, specialized zone in preparation) with different degrees of advantage for the ART game number addition lottery.

The hell state is a state where the operation of the instruction function is not determined, and when a special combination is selected in an internal lottery in the hell state, it will shift to one of the advantageous states A to E, but in these advantageous states A to E. , the operation of the instruction function is confirmed at least once (the instruction function display is performed at least once). In addition, when one game is executed in the hell state, the winning probability (probability of transition to advantageous state E) of 50 ART games is determined by internal lottery. This is the composite probability of the probability that the maintenance replay role) will be selected and the probability that the destination will be determined to be in an advantageous state E in the destination determination lottery (step S6012) when the special role is selected in the internal lottery. .

During the ART game, the CPU 1110 controls the lottery state related to ART to be one of an ART medium low probability state, an ART medium high probability state, a specialized zone preparation state, and a specialized zone state. The ART middle low probability state, the ART middle high probability state, the specialized zone preparation state, and the specialized zone state are collectively referred to as the ART middle lottery state. The ART medium-low probability state is a lottery state in which the probability of winning in the specialized zone lottery or the ART game number addition lottery, which is performed when the time is not normal (ART flag ON), is relatively low. The ART medium-high probability state is a lottery state in which the probability of winning in the specialized zone lottery or the ART game number addition lottery, which is held when the time is not normal (ART flag ON), is relatively high. The specialization zone preparation state is the lottery state when the specialization zone lottery has been won, but the specialization zone has not yet started (i.e., the specialization zone lottery has been won, but the RT state has not yet been transitioned to RT3. condition). The specialized zone state is a lottery state in the specialized zone.

As mentioned above, the specialization zone state and the specialization zone preparation state are both lottery states related to ART that are controlled when the specialization zone lottery is won in the ART medium-low probability state or the ART medium-high probability state. be. In addition, the CPU 1110 controls the ART medium lottery state during the basic ART (the lottery state related to ART that is not in the specialized zone or special zone preparation) only when controlled to the ART medium low probability state and the ART medium high probability state. Which of the ART medium low probability state and ART medium high probability state is to be controlled is determined based on the result of the ART medium lottery state transition lottery. This ART lottery state transition lottery is performed using the ART media lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 664, which will be described later. In the ART medium low probability state, a lottery for transition to the ART medium high probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device activated in response to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, in the ART medium-high probability state, a lottery for transition to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device activated in response to the result of the internal lottery. The specific transition probability in the ART lottery state transition lottery is as shown in FIG. 664, which will be described later.

The specific probability of winning in the specialized zone lottery is as shown in FIG. 665, which will be described later. The specialized zone lottery is conducted every game when it is not a normal time, depending on the ART lottery state and the condition device activated as a result of the internal lottery. If you win the specialized zone lottery, when "Up Rip 2 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery in the subsequent game, the reel stop button 211 will be pressed in the "Right-Left-Middle" pressing order (reverse). The CPU 1110 displays an instruction function so that the CPU 1110 performs a stop operation (pinching and pressing), and the sub-board 510 displays a display in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409. When the player operates the reel stop button 211 to stop according to this instruction, the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, the RT state changes from RT2 to RT3, and the specialized zone starts. Ru. However, in this embodiment, the special zone can be won only when Watermelon, Cherry, or Missing is selected in the internal lottery in the ART medium-low probability state or the ART medium-high probability state. Therefore, in the specialized zone state and the specialized zone preparation state, the result of the specialized zone lottery is always non-winning. Note that the specialized zone state ends after five games as described above. Thereafter, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the transition is made from RT3 to RT2, but the lottery state during ART at this time is controlled to be a high probability state.

The lottery for adding the number of ART games is carried out in the case of advantageous state B (when the ART game is executed when the precursor game is exhausted), and according to the conditional device activated as a result of the lottery state during ART and the internal lottery. This will be held in case you are not selected for the specialized zone lottery. However, the specialized zone lottery and the ART game number addition lottery may be performed simultaneously. The addition lottery for the number of ART games includes an addition determination lottery that determines whether or not to add the number of ART games, and an additional game that determines the number of games that will be added when it is decided to add the number of ART games. Includes a number-determining lottery. The specific probability of winning in the additional lottery is as shown in FIGS. 656 and 662, which will be described later. Further, the specific number of ART games to be added in the lottery for determining the number of additional games is as shown in FIGS. 657 to 660 and FIG. 662(b), which will be described later.

The lottery for determining the number of additional games is a lottery that is held when the lottery for determining the number of additional games is won, and the specific lottery probability in the lottery for determining the number of additional games is determined using FIG. , determines the number of games to be added according to the result of the internal lottery. Furthermore, when the ART is in the medium-high probability state, the number of additional games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery using FIG. 658, which will be described later. Similarly, when the specialized zone is in progress, the number of additional games is determined according to the result of the internal lottery using FIG. 659, which will be described later, and when the specialized zone is being prepared, using FIG. The number of additional games will be determined according to the results of the internal lottery. However, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is either "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep" or "Normal Maintenance Rep", the specific lottery probability in the lottery for determining the number of additional games is shown in Figure 662 ( The number of additional games to be added when winning the lottery for determining the number of additional games is as shown in FIG. 662(b).

[10-3-3. Instruction function processing]
As explained in step S31 of FIG. 644, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, after the main board 409 selects the winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIGS. 638 to 643 for the lottery table) , when the main board 409 performs the central processing of the instruction function processing and the special display LED 612 displays the occurrence of an instruction (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) displays an instruction with the same content. Function instructions can be visually displayed on other displays (navigation display, instruction generation effect). Note that although the display modes of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, it is required that the display content of both displays is in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

FIG. 647 is a diagram for explaining the general flow of instruction function processing. In FIG. 647, regarding the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1, a series of processes executed by the main board 409 and a series of processes executed by the sub-board 510 in response to commands from the main board 409 are shown together. ing. FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing related to generation of the instruction function executed by the main board 409 among the instruction function processing shown in FIG. 647. Here, we will first explain the outline of the instruction function process with reference to FIG. 647, and from [10-3-4] onwards, we will explain the process related to the generation of the instruction function with reference to FIGS. 648 to 655, etc. I will explain the flow of the game, including the following.

Note that various flags are used in the following explanation regarding instruction function processing, and these flags are used in the memory (for example, RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510) in the board that executes the instruction function processing. This is an internal flag that is held, and its value is rewritten or read by the CPU of each board (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118). Also, when flags with the same name are used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), these internal flags basically have a common data format, and the data from the main board 409 to the peripheral board is It is assumed that the values of the flags are synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to.

In addition to the internal flags mentioned above, variable data is sometimes used, and these variable data are also stored in the memory of the board that refers to the variable data (for example, the RAM 1114 in the case of the main board 409, the sub-board 510). (in the case of the main board 409, the CPU 1110, and in the case of the sub-board 510, the CPU 1118) reads or rewrites the value.

First, in step S61 in FIG. 647, the main board 409 executes processing regarding whether to generate an instruction function (processing related to generation of an instruction function). More specifically, it determines whether or not the ART first winning lottery is won, whether or not the ART game can be started, and the number of consecutive ART games.

Then, as a result of the processing related to generation of the instruction function, if it is determined to generate the instruction function, the main board 409 causes the special display LED 612 to display an instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game. Processing is performed (step S62). This instruction function display can indicate the proper stopping order of the push-order minor combinations established during ART, or indicate that predetermined symbols should be arranged in a predetermined stopping order.

Note that in the case of a game in which the main board 409 determines in step S61 that there is no need to display an instruction function, no specific instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612 in step S62.

The main board 409 displays the instruction function in step S62 based on the result of the process related to the generation of the instruction function in step S61, and also displays the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display using a command or the like. Send (instruction information command) to a peripheral board (for example, sub board 510). Note that if the instruction function display is not performed, this may be notified by an instruction information command, or the instruction information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary on the receiving side to determine whether the command has not been received after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. By doing this, the peripheral board (sub board 510) not only becomes able to recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also allows the peripheral board (sub board 510) to recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game. Display contents (instruction contents) can also be grasped.

Then, the peripheral board (subboard 510 in this case) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 in FIG. 647 based on the information included in the instruction information command. Note that in the instruction function process shown in FIG. does not limit the execution timing of each process (processing in step S62 and processing in steps S63 to S65).

First, in step S63, the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines whether or not an instruction function display is performed (or has been performed) in the game, and whether or not the instruction function display is performed (or has been performed). ), (YES in step S63), an instruction generation effect process is performed as the process in step S64. Further, if it is determined in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or has not been performed), the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) performs the instruction as the process in step S65. Performs function-related processing.

The instruction generation performance process in step S64 is an "instruction generation performance" that instructs the player on the stopping order and stop position of the reels 301 (symbols to aim for, i.e., timing for stopping operation), etc. on the image display body 500 or other display devices, etc. This is a process for displaying a so-called ART navigation and the like. Note that the instruction contents shown to the player by the instruction generation performance are limited to those in accordance with the display contents displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display process. For example, even though the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating "forward push" by the instruction function display, it is not allowed that the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation performance content is "reverse push". In addition, even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating "push sequentially" and the instruction generation performance content indicates that "the left reel 301a should be stopped first," the subsequent second A case where the reel 301b to be stopped is not specified is also not acceptable. In addition, the fact that the instruction content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-mentioned pressing order, but the instruction function display is a guideline for the pressing location. This also applies if the decision is made. That is, for example, even though the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating that "you should aim for the red 7 symbol on all reels" by the instruction function display, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation performance content is "BAR symbol". It is not acceptable to make players aim for the Red 7 symbol on only some reels.

In addition, regarding the specific presentation form of the instruction generation presentation, various presentation forms are conventionally known, such as displaying the push order and symbols on the LCD screen, lighting up LEDs associated with each reel 301a to 301c, etc. Any one or a combination of them can be used.

The instruction function-related process in step S65 is performed when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, in a game during non-ART, or in a game where the player wins a winning combination regardless of the order of presses even during ART). This is a process for displaying a predetermined performance screen. In addition, among the above-mentioned "winning combinations that can be pressed in any order", there are not only winning combinations that can be expected to pay out the maximum number of coins no matter what gaming method you play at the time of winning, such as the bell that can be pressed in any order; It also includes winning combinations in which the maximum number of coins cannot be expected to be paid out or in which no payout can be obtained. To explain in detail, it not only includes winning combinations (for example, watermelon combination) that can be obtained when playing with a gaming method that can expect the maximum payout (corresponding to the above-mentioned "maximum efficiency hitting method"), but also " A winning combination that cannot be obtained when playing with the "maximum efficiency hitting method" (for example, a symbol combination using symbols arranged on the opposite side of the symbol arrangement of the reels 301 from the symbol combination of the watermelon symbol described above is prepared, It also includes one-card winning combinations (so-called chance winning combinations) in which winning is determined by the stoppage of the symbol combination.

The instruction function process ends by performing the above steps S61 to S65. Below, each process (steps S61 to S65) performed as the instruction function process by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 will be described in detail.

[10-3-4. Processing related to generation of instruction function]
The flow of the game including the process related to the generation of the instruction function shown in step S61 of FIG. 647 will be described with reference to FIG. 648.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 648, it is determined whether the number of games management flag is ON. The number of games management flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the number of games management process is in progress. If it is OFF, it means that the game number management process is not in progress (that is, a state of hell). If the number of games management flag is ON (YES in step S601), the process advances to step S602.

In step S602, the number of games executed during the game number management process (the number of games played by the player while the game number management flag is set to ON) is counted. Specifically, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is incremented by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. After that, the process advances to step S603.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the advantageous states A to E and the pull-back state are prepared as states during the game number management process, as described above, and the game is controlled to one of these advantageous states.

Here, an outline of each of the advantageous states A to E and the pullback state will be briefly explained. Advantageous state A is a state in which 32 games are set as a ceiling, and if an instruction function display is performed once in a game after these 32 games have been executed, advantageous state A ends and the state shifts to a hell state. . Advantageous state B is a state in which 32 games are set as a ceiling, and after these 32 games are executed, the state is shifted to advantageous state E, which will be described later. Advantageous state C is a state in which 32 games are set as a ceiling, and when these 32 games are executed, the state shifts to advantageous state D, which will be described later, from the next game. In advantageous state D, 10 games are set as a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "CZ"), and during these 10 games as CZ, rare small roles (Watermelon role, Cherry role) are selected by internal lottery. If it is played, there is a 100% probability that the next game will be in advantageous state E, and if any one of "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery, there is a 1/4 probability. In the next game, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E, but when CZ ends without being shifted to the advantageous state E, the state is shifted to the hell state. The advantageous state E is a state in which the instruction function flag is set to ON and execution of the ART game is permitted, and the advantageous state E is the preparation state until the RT state is transferred from RT1 to RT2, the execution of the ART game, and the advantageous state E. include. Further, in this advantageous state E, the instruction function operates continuously for a specified number of games (in this example, "50 games + α" (α is the number of additional games)) at least as long as the game number counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value. However, once the specified number of ART games are played, the game ends unless the number of ART games is added. Further, after the advantageous state E ends, as long as the number of games management flag is ON (as long as the number of games counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold value), control is performed to a pullback state A or a pullback state B, which will be described later.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous state does not end and the state shifts to the hell state without displaying the instruction function even once. However, if the control is in one of the advantageous gaming states from advantageous state A to advantageous state E (particularly advantageous state A), and the instruction function display is not performed even once during the relevant number of games management process. Even if this is not the case, if a so-called bonus combination that increases medals is selected in an internal lottery, the instruction function display may not be performed as a special process (special process execution means).

By the way, in conventional slot machines, when a player wins the first ART lottery, a precursor game is played over multiple games (for example, 32 games), and the ART game is often executed after the precursor game is executed. Ta. In such conventional slot machines, even if you have not won the ART first lottery, there is a possibility that you have won the ART first lottery (for example, when a rare minor prize is selected in an internal lottery). The foreshadowing game is executed when That is, after the precursor game is executed, the ART game may or may not be executed. By executing an expectation effect during the precursor game that gives the player the expectation of winning the ART first lottery, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the precursor game.

However, in such conventional slot machines, if the player does not win the ART first lottery even though the precursor game has been executed, the player is greatly disappointed. In particular, if the result of the ART first winning lottery is not revealed until the preset precursor game is played, the player must play the precursory game even though there is a possibility that he or she has not won the ART first winning lottery. In addition, if the user has not won the ART lottery for the first time, the interest in the game will drop significantly. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the ART first winning lottery is won in the hell state and the transition destination is determined to be one of advantageous states A to advantageous states C (that is, the ceiling game (precursor game) When the transition destination is determined to be a set advantageous state), the instruction function display is always performed once when the set ceiling game is completed. As a result, players are no longer forced to play the precursor game even though they may not have won the ART first lottery, and the player can play the precursor game even though it is certain that the instruction function display will be performed at least once. will be executed. Furthermore, since the degree of profit for the player after the omen game is played varies depending on the advantageous state, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in interest without losing the significance of the omen game. . In addition, in this example, the instruction function display is configured to be displayed at least once when the set ceiling game (precursor game) is completed, but the operation of the instruction function display is not necessarily performed when the set ceiling game (precursor game) is completed. It is not limited to what is played only when the ceiling game is completed. For example, unless the result of the ART first winning lottery can be grasped at the time when the instruction function display is executed, the instruction function display may be activated in the middle of the precursor game. "A mode in which the result of the ART first winning lottery can be grasped at the time when the instruction function display is executed" means that if the number of activations of the instruction function display is determined to be once during the precursor game, the instruction function is displayed in the middle of the precursor game. This corresponds to a mode in which, when the display is activated, it is known at that point that the ART game will not be executed.

Further, as described above, the hell state is a state in which execution of the instructed function display is confirmed, and the advantageous state is a state in which execution of the instructed function display is confirmed. However, in the pullback state, execution of the instruction function display is not confirmed. Therefore, when defining a hell state and a non-hell state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E, pullback state A, and pullback state B), the hell state is a state in which it is impossible to allow execution of the instruction function display. A non-hell state is a state in which execution of the instruction function display is allowed.

Further, in advantageous state A, advantageous state B, and advantageous state C in this example, 32 games are set as the ceiling, but it goes without saying that the ceiling is not limited to 32 games. It is preferable that the number of games is set to 32 or less.

Further, in the advantageous state D of this example, 10 games are set as the CZ, but it goes without saying that the number of games that can be set as the CZ is not limited to 10 games.

In the processing after step S603, processing is performed according to the state. Specifically, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is ON (YES in step S603), advantageous state A processing is performed (step S604). If it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is OFF (NO in step S603), the process proceeds to step S605, and it is determined whether the advantageous state B flag can be ON (step S605). If it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is ON (YES in step S605), advantageous state B processing is performed (step S606). If it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is OFF (NO in step S605), the process proceeds to step S607, and it is determined whether the advantageous state C flag is ON (step S607). If it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is ON (YES in step S607), advantageous state C processing is performed (step S608). If it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is OFF (NO in step S607), the process proceeds to step S609, and it is determined whether the advantageous state D flag is ON (step S609). If it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is ON (YES in step S609), advantageous state D processing is performed (step S610). If it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is OFF (NO in step S609), the process proceeds to step S611, and it is determined whether the advantageous state E flag is ON (step S611). If it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (YES in step S611), advantageous state E processing is performed (step S612). If it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (NO in step S611), the process proceeds to step S613, and a pullback state process is performed (step S613).

Note that if it is determined in step S601 that the number of games management flag is OFF (NO in step S601), the process advances to step S614, and hell state processing is performed.

Hereinafter, the process in the hell state, each process in advantageous states A to E, and the pullback state process will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 649 to 655. 649 to 655 are flowcharts showing examples of each process executed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. Specifically, FIG. 649 is a flowchart illustrating an example of hell state processing. FIG. 650 is a flowchart illustrating an example of advantageous state A processing. FIG. 651 is a flowchart illustrating an example of advantageous state B processing. FIG. 652 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in advantageous state C. FIG. 653 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in advantageous state D. FIG. 654 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in advantageous state E. FIG. 655 is a flowchart illustrating an example of pullback state processing.

[10-3-4-1. Hell state processing]
In the hell state, first, it is determined whether a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) has been selected in the internal lottery (step S6011). In step S601, if it is determined that any one of the special winning combinations (special watermelon winning, special cherry winning, special maintenance replay winning) has been selected in the internal lottery (YES in step S6011), the selected special winning A migration destination determination lottery (step S6012) is performed according to the type of the transfer destination. This transfer destination determination lottery is a lottery to determine the advantageous state of the transfer destination, and the transfer destination is determined from advantageous states A to E.

In the transition destination determination lottery in step S6012, advantageous state A is determined with a probability of 59,600/65,536, advantageous state B is determined with a probability of 3,935/65,536, and advantageous state C is determined with a probability of 2,000/65,536. , advantageous state D is determined with a probability of 1/65,536, and advantageous state E is determined with a probability of 1/65,536. The slot machine 1 of this example is configured so that hall personnel can change any setting from settings 1 to 6, and each winning combination is selected in an internal lottery for each of these settings. There are different probabilities. However, the probability that a special win (special watermelon win, special cherry win, special maintenance replay win) will be selected in the internal lottery is the same regardless of settings 1 to 6. Here, the probability that the special watermelon role is selected, the probability that the special cherry role is selected, and the probability that the special maintenance replay role is selected may be common to settings 1 to 6, or each special role may be selected. Although the probability of being played differs depending on the settings, the combined probability that a special combination (special watermelon combination, special cherry combination, special maintenance replay combination) will be selected may be the same for settings 1 to 6.

When the destination is determined in step S6012, the destination is determined in steps S6013 to S6016, and a gaming state flag corresponding to the destination is set to ON.

Specifically, when it is determined that the transition destination is advantageous state A (YES in all steps S6013 to S6016), the advantageous state A flag is set to ON (step S6017). After that, the process advances to step S6018, and the ceiling number of games is set to 32 games (TA←32). After that, the process advances to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the transition destination is advantageous state B (YES in steps S6013 to S6015 and NO in step S6016), the advantageous state B flag is set to ON (step S6022). After that, the process advances to step S6023, and the ceiling number of games is set to 32 games (TB←32). After that, the process advances to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

Further, when it is determined that the transition destination is advantageous state C (YES in steps S6013 and 6014 and NO in step S6015), the advantageous state C flag is set to ON (step S6024). After that, the process advances to step S6025, and the ceiling number of games is set to 32 games (TC←32). After that, the process advances to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

When the precursor flag is set to ON in step S6019, the hell state flag is then set to OFF (step S6020), and the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state processing ends. do.

In addition, when the ceiling number of games is set, the foreshadowing effect is performed until the ceiling number of games is played. However, if you win the ART first lottery or the bonus role (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery during the omen performance (until the ceiling number of games are played), Even if the ceiling number of games are not all played, the ART game and bonus game are executed.

Further, when it is determined that the transition destination is advantageous state D (YES in step S6013 and NO in step S6014), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6026). After that, the process advances to step S6027, and the number of CZ games is set to 10 games (CZ←10). Note that at this time, the number of ceiling games is not set (the number of ceiling games may be set to 0 games). Thereafter, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), and the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state processing ends.

Further, when it is determined that the transition destination is advantageous state E (NO in step S6013), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6028). After that, the process advances to step S6029, and the number of ART games is set to 50 games (ART←50). When the number of ART games ART is set to 50 games (YES in step S6129), the ART flag is set to ON (step S6030). Thereafter, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), and the number of games management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state processing ends and the process returns to the main routine.

Note that if the special winning combination (special watermelon winning, special cherry winning, special maintenance replay winning) is not selected in the internal lottery (NO in step S6011), the processing in steps S6012 to S6021 is skipped, and the game ends. The number management state does not start (it does not transition to an advantageous state), and the hell state continues.

By the way, if the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed in the hell state, the state will be shifted to an advantageous state no matter what the result of the lottery is, and the instruction function display will always be performed once, so the internal lottery The determination of whether or not the special prize has been won (step S6011) and/or the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) correspond to the ART first winning lottery in a hellish state. However, when it is defined as the "ART game execution lottery", the determination of whether or not the special prize has been won in the internal lottery (step S6011) does not correspond to the "ART game execution lottery", and the transfer destination determination lottery Only (step S6012) corresponds to "ART game execution lottery".

In addition, in the hell state, if it is determined in step S6011 that a special winning combination has been selected (YES in step S6011), and a transfer destination determination lottery is performed in step S6012, the number of games management flag is set to ON, The game number counter GC starts counting from the next game. Even if it is in a hellish state and the bonus game is being executed, if it is determined in step S6011 that a special combination has been selected (YES in step S6011) and the transfer destination determination lottery is performed in step S6012, The game number management flag is set to ON, and the game number counter GC starts counting from the next game. Therefore, in this case, if the transition destination is one of advantageous states A to C, the ceiling game will be exhausted during the bonus game, and if the transition destination is advantageous state D, the chance zone ( CA) will be executed, and if the transition destination is advantageous state E, the ART game will start when the bonus game ends and the RT state shifts to RT2 (controlled to RT0 after the bonus game ends). It will be done. Furthermore, when the number of games management process is started (when the game state related to the instruction function display is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state), except for the above-mentioned special processing (i.e., the bonus role is not executed during the number of games management process) (except when the game is selected by internal lottery), the instruction function display is always performed at least once during the game number management process.

By the way, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when comparing the period when the number of games management flag is set to ON and the period when it is set to OFF, although the period when it is set to ON is longer, the number of games management flag is set to OFF. The period during which the number management flag is set to ON is configured to be 70% or less of the total game period. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, while suppressing the gambling nature, a decrease in interest is suitably suppressed.

[10-3-4-2. Advantageous state A processing]
In advantageous state A, first, in step S6031, the ceiling game is exhausted. Specifically, each time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the ceiling number of games set as 32 games (TA←TA-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6031, it is then determined whether a game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value G (step S6032 ). The predetermined threshold value G is a value set to prevent the number of medals as game media paid out to a player in one game number management process from exceeding a specified value. In this example, when the specified value is N, the predetermined threshold value G is set as the value obtained by dividing N by the slope value (the net increase in the number of cards per game). For example, if it is specified that the number of game media paid out to a player in one game management process does not exceed 3000 pieces, and the slope value is 2 [pieces/game], 1500 games is the predetermined threshold value G. Set. However, in a slot machine equipped with a bonus game, a value obtained by subtracting the number of bonus games to be completed in the shortest time from the above G may be set as the predetermined threshold value. For example, if it is specified that the number of game media paid out to the player in one game management process does not exceed 3000 pieces, the slope value is set to 2 [pieces/game], and the number of bonus games to be completed in the shortest time is set to 34 games. Then, 1466 games is set as a predetermined threshold.

If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6032), the process advances to step S6034, and an ART first winning lottery is performed (step S6034). The ART initial winning lottery performed in step S6034 is a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to advantageous state E. When the hand selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply" or "normal maintenance reply", the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery is as shown in Figure 661. . In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is neither "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep" nor "Normal Maintenance Rep", the winning probability in the ART first winning lottery is set to 1/65536. There is. FIG. 661 is a table used in the ART first winning lottery when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep" or "normal maintenance rep".

Here, the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6034 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6034 is as shown in Fig. 661 ("special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep" winning) As shown in the time column), it is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the relevant game number management process (the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process). be done.

Specifically, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first lottery is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number, in the ART first lottery The probability of winning is 4/65,536. The above-mentioned first specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first lottery, it is set as the predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment). It is preferable that the value is a value that can be digested without being terminated prematurely. In this embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when winning the ART first lottery is 50 games (if the additional lottery is not won), so the first specified number is 50 or more. It is preferable, but not limited to this. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the player wins the ART first lottery, it is preferable to set the number of games in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state to (50 games + α). In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", if the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is 100 or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will win for the first time. If you win the lottery and the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, there is only a probability of 4/65,536 that you will win the ART first-hit lottery. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART first winning lottery is won and the ART game is executed. First, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", the ART initial winning probability when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number (4/65536 in this example) is lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is greater than or equal to the first specified number. , compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process, the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process while keeping the winning rate the same. It is also possible to produce further effects such as the ability to realize a game that increases the ART first hit probability (in this example, 65536/65536) when K is greater than or equal to the first specified number. becomes.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance rep, as shown in FIG. is 4/65536.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. Based on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two levels: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the ART initial lottery is set to multiple levels, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip + Normal Keep Rip", the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART initial lottery may be made to gradually decrease as becomes smaller.

If the ART first winning lottery is won (YES in step S6035), the process advances to step S6036, and the ceiling game number is set to 0 (TA←0). After that, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6037), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6038), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6039), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (step S6040), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6041). After that, the process advances to step S6042, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process in step S6042 is a process for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6041, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the pressing order of "Right - Middle - Left". An instruction function display is performed so that the stop operation can be performed by pressing (reversely). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 to stop in accordance with this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6043), the advantageous state A process is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "Raise Reply 1 + Normally Maintain Reply" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though it is displayed, the process is changed from RT1 to RT2 in step S6042. No transition control is performed. If "up reply 1 + normal maintenance reply" is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6043, but the player did not follow it even though the instruction function display was performed. In this case, although transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6043. Incidentally, until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, an instruction function display is performed when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to Up Replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, control to move to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the upper replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Also, according to the lottery tables shown in Figures 638 to 643, "up reply 1 + normal maintenance reply" corresponds to only one press order condition device, but it can be applied to six press order conditions like the press order bell. It is preferable to have a corresponding condition device.

Note that the ART flag is an internal flag that indicates whether or not an ART game is in progress; when it is ON, it means that an ART is in progress; when it is OFF, it means that an ART is not in progress. , which means that it is in non-ART mode.

If the player does not win the ART first lottery in step S6034 (NO in step S6035), the process advances to step S6044, and it is determined whether the ceiling number of games is 0 (TA=0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), the process does not proceed to step S6053, which will be described later (that is, the processes in steps S6053 to S6061 are not performed), and the advantageous state A is continued without transitioning to the hell state. Ru.

If you win the ART first winning lottery (YES in step S6035), advantageous state A ends and you shift to advantageous state E even if the ceiling number of games has not been played, while you win the ART first winning lottery. If not (NO in step S6035), advantageous state A continues until the ceiling number of games is played. However, although it is not shown in FIG. 650, even if you fail in the ART first lottery (NO in step S6035) and the ceiling number of games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), you will receive a bonus prize in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. While this bonus game is being executed, an ART first winning lottery is held with a probability of 328/65536, and if the ART first winning lottery is won, the player is immediately transferred to an advantageous state E after the bonus game ends. On the other hand, if the ART first winning lottery is not won during execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TA←32), and the advantageous state A process is performed again.

If it is determined in step S6044 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA=0) (YES in step S6044), the process advances to step S6053, where the number of games counter GC that is currently being managed is displayed. After counting is started (after the number of games management flag is set to ON), it is determined whether the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). The determination as to whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once is determined by an internal lottery after the game number counter GC starts counting (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or flashing)). Any one of "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6" is selected, and the maximum payout number (in this example, 8 This corresponds to a determination as to whether or not a stop operation mode for dispensing coins) has been instructed at least once.

In step S6053, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6054), and the precursor flag is turned OFF. (step S6055), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6056), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6057), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6058). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6059, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6059), the advantageous state A processing is completed, and the process returns to the main routine.

Note that if it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function display has not been performed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6053), the number of instructions is set to 1 (step S6060), and the instruction The function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, in the advantageous state A processing, even if the ceiling number of games TA (32 games in this example) has already been played, it is determined that the instruction function display has not been performed even once. The hell state is not entered until the instruction function display is performed at least once, and the instruction function display is always performed at least once during the game number management process.

However, although not shown in FIG. 650, if a bonus game is executed after the game number counter GC starts counting, the instruction function is displayed even after the game number counter GC starts counting. Even if this has not been performed even once (even if the determination in step S6053 is NO), the processes in steps S6054 to S6059 are performed, and the advantageous state A is shifted to the hell state. For example, when the situation changes from hell state to advantageous state A, a bonus role (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery without winning the ART first lottery and a bonus game is executed, but the bonus game is still being executed. However, if the player does not win the ART first lottery and the ceiling game is set to 32 games after the bonus game ends and the advantageous state A processing is performed again, the instruction function display is not performed and the ceiling game is 32. When the game is played, the advantageous state A is transferred to the hell state, although the instruction function display is not performed even once after the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state A.

In step S6032, if it is determined that the game number counter GC counted during the game management process exceeds the predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6032), the process advances to step S6053. , it is determined whether the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). In this step S6053, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed at least once during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), after the processes in steps S6054 to S6059 are performed, the advantageous state A The time processing is completed and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, considering the composite probability (26280/65536) that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" will be selected in the internal lottery and the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability is Although this can only occur with an extremely low probability, the probability is that the game number counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold without displaying the instruction function even once after the game number counter GC starts counting. There may be a case where it is determined that it exceeds G (a case where it is determined NO in step S6032 and NO in step S6053). In this case, the processes from step S6054 to step S6059 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6060), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state A continues until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

In addition, as mentioned above, even after the set ceiling number of games TA (32 games in this example) has been exhausted, if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the relevant number of games management process, it will be hell. Since the advantageous state A continues without transitioning to the state, the remaining ceiling game number TA may become negative as a result of the subtraction processing performed in step S6031. Therefore, if the ceiling game number TA, which had an initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 due to game execution, the ceiling game number TA is set to "FF", and when the ceiling game number TA is "FF", the ceiling game number TA is set to "FF". As long as the advantageous state A continues without transitioning to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6031 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6044. As a result, even if the advantageous state A continues after the ceiling game number TA becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to avoid interrupting the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in step S6031, in addition to the process of keeping the remaining ceiling game number TA set to "FF" even if the game is executed when the remaining ceiling game number TA becomes negative, the remaining ceiling game number TA is set to "FF" in the first place. It may be a process of keeping it at "00" instead of setting it to "00". Furthermore, although the remaining ceiling game number TA has been described using a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is executed, it goes without saying that it may also be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is executed.

In addition, in this example, when the ceiling game number TA, which had an initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 due to game execution, the ceiling game number TA is set to "FF", but instead of this, , it may be a process of keeping 00 without setting it to "FF".

In addition, in this example, the initial value of the ceiling game number TA is 32 games, and a subtraction method is used in which the ceiling game number TA is subtracted each time a game is executed, but it goes without saying that an addition method may also be used. .

[10-3-4-3. Advantageous state B processing]
In advantageous state B, first, in step S6071, the ceiling game is exhausted. Specifically, each time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the ceiling number of games set as 32 games (TB←TB-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6071, it is determined whether the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). is determined (step S6072). If the game number counter GC is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6072), the process advances to step S6073, and a lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed (step S6073). Advantageous state B is a state in which it is determined that when the ceiling number of games TB of games is played, it will be shifted to advantageous state E and at least 50 ART games will be executed. The game number addition lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not to further increase the number of ART games. When the hand selected in the internal lottery is either “special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep” or “normal maintenance rep”, the probability of winning in the ART game number addition lottery is shown in Figure 662(a). That's right. In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is neither "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep" nor "Normal Maintenance Rep", the probability of winning in the ART game number addition lottery is set to 1/65536. ing.

The number of games added when winning the ART game number addition lottery is as shown in FIG. 662(b). In addition, in the case of "'Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip'" shown in FIG. This includes not only cases where the hand selected in the internal lottery is a ``Normal Maintenance Rep''.

Here, the ART game number addition lottery performed in step S6073 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply", the probability of winning in the ART game number addition lottery performed in step S6073 is as shown in FIG. 662(a), It is determined based on the difference K between the threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number, ART The winning probability in the game number addition lottery is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number, an additional lottery for the number of ART games will be held. The probability of winning is 4/65536. The above-mentioned second specified number can be set arbitrarily, but it is a value that allows the ART game to be used without ending halfway even if ART games are added based on winning the ART game number addition lottery. It is preferable that In this embodiment, when winning the ART game number addition lottery, a maximum of 300 games will be added, so the second specified number is preferably 300 or more games, but is not limited to this. do not have. Therefore, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 300 or more, there is a 100% probability that the number of ART games will be changed. If you win the additional lottery and the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is less than 300 games, there is only a probability of 4/65,536 that you will win the ART game additional lottery. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the probability of winning in the ART game addition lottery will be relatively small, so if you win the ART game addition lottery and the ART game addition is performed. However, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle of the game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the number of ART games will be added when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number. The probability of winning in the lottery (4/65,536 in this example) is the probability of winning in the lottery with the number of ART games added (in this example, 4/65,536) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number. 65536), the probability of winning in the ART game number addition lottery is fixed regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is said that it is possible to realize a game that increases the winning probability (in this example, 65536/65536) in the ART game number addition lottery when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number management process is greater than or equal to the specified number. It becomes possible to produce further effects.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 662(b), regarding the number of games added when winning the ART game number addition lottery, the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip". When this is the case, the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is different between the second specified number or more and the one that is less than the second specified number. Specifically, when the role selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", when the role selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", if the winning combination is not won. The number of added games is set to be larger than that of the previous version. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the number of ART games that will be added when winning the ART game addition lottery will be relatively small, so if you win the ART game addition lottery. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the ART game has been added, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number. Based on whether or not there is, the probability of winning in the ART game addition lottery is determined to be one of two levels: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the ART game number addition lottery is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip + Normal Keep Rip", the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process. As K becomes smaller, the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery may gradually decrease.

After that, the process advances to step S6074, and it is determined whether the ceiling game number is 0 (TB=0). If the number of ceiling games is 0 (YES in step S6074), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6075), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6076), and the advantageous state E flag is set to ON. (Step S6077), the number of ART games is set (Step S6078), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (Step S6079). After that, the process advances to step S6080, and RT state transition processing is performed.

Note that in step S6073, an ART initial winning lottery may be performed instead of the ART game number addition lottery. In this case, the ceiling game number TB is set to 0, and the process advances to step S6074.

The RT state transition process in step S6080 is a process for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6079, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the pressing order of "Right - Middle - Left". An instruction function display is performed so that the stop operation can be performed by pressing (reversely). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 to stop in accordance with this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6081), the advantageous state B process is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though it is displayed, the transition from RT1 to RT2 occurs in step S6080. No transition control is performed. If "up reply 1 + normal maintenance reply" is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6081, but the player did not follow it even though the instruction function display was performed. In this case, although transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6080, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6081. Incidentally, until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, an instruction function display is performed when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to Up Replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, control to move to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the upper replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Furthermore, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device that corresponds to 6 different pressing orders, such as a pressing order bell, for "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip".

Note that in step S6078, if the bonus lottery in step S6073 is not won, the number of games for one shot of the ART game (50 games in this example) is set, but if the bonus lottery in step S6073 is won, The number of games (50+α) obtained by adding the additional number of games α is set.

If it is determined in step S6074 that the number of ceiling games is not 0 (TB=0) (if determined as NO in step S6074), regardless of whether or not the ART game addition lottery in step S6073 is won. , the processes from step S6075 to step S6081 are not performed. In other words, the advantageous state B continues without transitioning to the hell state.

If it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold (NO in step S6072), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display was performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6082). That is, after the game number counter GC starts counting (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or flashing)), one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in an internal lottery. is selected, and the stop operation mode is instructed even once in order to pay out the maximum number of winning medals (8 in this example) among the winning payout numbers corresponding to "Press Order Bell 1" to "Press Order Bell 6". It is determined whether or not it has been done.

In advantageous state B, when the ceiling number of games TB is played, the state shifts to advantageous state E and the ART game is executed, but in step S6072 it is determined that the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value. (No determination may be made in step S6072). For example, an ART game is executed after transitioning from a hell state to an advantageous state E, and an additional ART game is added, and even though the ART game ends, the game number counter GC continues to count without transitioning to a hell state. In the case where the state is transferred to advantageous state B in a continued state (for example, when the ART first winning lottery is won in the pullback mode and the state is transferred to advantageous state B), the ceiling game TB is extinguished in the advantageous state B. This is a case in which the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). In such a case, if the instruction function display is performed even once, the transition will be forced from advantageous state B to the hell state, but during the game number management process, if the instruction function display is In rare cases, it may not have been done at all. In that case, even if you are in advantageous state B, you will not be transferred to advantageous state E (without executing the ART game), and after displaying the instruction function once, you will be forced to The advantageous state B will be transferred to the hell state. As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. Advantageous state B continues until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S6072 that the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold (NO in step S6072), in step S6082, it is determined whether the instruction function display was performed during the number of games management process. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display has not been performed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6082), the instruction count is set to 1 (step S6089), and the instruction function flag is set to 1 (step S6089). is set to ON (step S6090). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display was performed during the game number management process (YES in step S6082), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6083), and the precursor flag is set to OFF. (step S6084), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6085), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6086), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6087). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6088, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6088), the advantageous state B process is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. As a result, when the hell state is transitioned to any of the advantageous states A to E and the game number counter GC starts counting, even if the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold, The advantageous state B will not be transferred to the hell state without displaying the instruction function even once, and the transfer to the hell state will always occur after the instruction function display has been performed at least once.

Further, if it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold (NO in step S6072), after the set ceiling number of games TB (32 games in this example) is played, Even so, if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the number of games management process, the advantageous state B will continue without transitioning to the hell state, so as a result of the subtraction process performed in step S6071, The remaining ceiling number of games TB may become negative. Therefore, if the ceiling game number TB, which had an initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 due to game execution, the ceiling game number TB is set to FF, and when the ceiling game number TB is FF, the hell state or As long as advantageous state B continues without transitioning to another advantageous state, the process of step S6071 is not performed. As a result, even if the advantageous state B continues after the ceiling game number TB becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to avoid interrupting the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in step S6071, in addition to the process of keeping the remaining ceiling game number TB set to "FF" even if the game is executed when the remaining ceiling game number TB becomes negative, the remaining ceiling game number TB is set to "FF" in the first place. It may be a process of keeping it at "00" instead of setting it to "00". Further, although the remaining ceiling game number TB has been described using a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is executed, it goes without saying that it may also be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is executed.

[10-3-4-4. Advantageous state C processing]
In advantageous state C, first, in step S6091, the ceiling game is exhausted. Specifically, each time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the ceiling number of games set as 32 games (TC←TC-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the ceiling game number in step S6091, it is determined whether the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). is determined (step S6092). If the game number counter GC is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6092), the process advances to step S6094, and an ART first winning lottery is performed (step S6094). The ART initial winning lottery performed in step S6094 is a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to advantageous state E. When the hand selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply" or "normal maintenance reply", the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery is as shown in Figure 661. . In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is neither "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep" nor "Normal Maintenance Rep", the winning probability in the ART first winning lottery is set to 1/65536. There is.

Here, the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6094 is performed in the same manner as the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6034. In other words, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6094 is as shown in FIG. ”), based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game counter GC counted during the game management process (the number of games remaining until the end of the game management process K). Determined by

Specifically, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first lottery is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number, in the ART first lottery The probability of winning is 4/65,536. The above-mentioned first specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first lottery, it is set as the predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment). It is preferable that the value is a value that can be digested without being terminated prematurely. In this embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when winning the ART first lottery is 50 games (if the additional lottery is not won), so the first specified number is 50 or more. It is preferable, but not limited to this. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the player wins the ART first lottery, it is preferable to set the number of games in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state to (50 games + α). In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", if the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is 100 or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will win for the first time. If you win the lottery and the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, there is only a probability of 4/65,536 that you will win the ART first-hit lottery. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is small, the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART first winning lottery was won and the ART game was executed. First, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the ART initial winning probability when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number (4/65536 in this example) is lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number. , compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process, the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process while keeping the winning rate the same. It is also possible to produce further effects such as the ability to realize a game that increases the ART first hit probability (in this example, 65536/65536) when K is greater than or equal to the first specified number. becomes.

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance rep, as shown in FIG. The winning probability in the ART first lottery is always 4/65,536.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. Based on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two levels: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the ART initial lottery is set to multiple levels, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip + Normal Keep Rip", the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART initial lottery may be made to gradually decrease as becomes smaller.

If the ART first winning lottery is won (YES in step S6095), the process advances to step S6096, and the ceiling game number is set to 0 (TC←0). After that, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6097), the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6098), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6099), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (step S6100), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6101). After that, the process advances to step S6102, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process in step S6102 is a process for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6101, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the pressing order of "Right - Middle - Left". An instruction function display is performed so that the stop operation can be performed by pressing (reversely). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 to stop in accordance with this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6103), the advantageous state C processing is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though it is displayed, the transition from RT1 to RT2 occurs in step S6102. Although no transition control is performed, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6103. Incidentally, until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, an instruction function display is performed when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to Up Replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, control to move to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the upper replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON.

If the ART initial lottery in step S6094 is not won (NO in step S6095), the process advances to step S6104, and it is determined whether the ceiling number of games is 0 (TC=0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), the processes in steps S6106 to S6109, which will be described later, are not performed. That is, advantageous state C continues.

If you win the ART first winning lottery (YES in step S6095), the advantageous state C ends and you move to the advantageous state E even if the ceiling number of games has not been played, while you win the ART first winning lottery. If not (NO in step S6095), advantageous state C continues until the ceiling number of games is played. However, although it is not shown in FIG. 652, even if you fail the ART first lottery (NO in step S6095) and the ceiling number of games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), you will receive a bonus prize in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. While this bonus game is being executed, an ART first winning lottery is held with a probability of 328/65536, and if the ART first winning lottery is won, the player is immediately transferred to an advantageous state E after the bonus game ends. On the other hand, if the ART first winning lottery is not won during execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TC←32), and the advantageous state C processing is performed again.

If it is determined in step S6104 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC=0) (YES in step S6104), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6106), and the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF ( Step S6107), and the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6108). Then, in step S6109, 10 games are set as the number of games in the chance zone (CZ←10), the advantageous state C processing is completed, and the process returns to the main routine.

Further, if it is determined in step S6092 that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6032), the process advances to step S6112, and the instruction function is displayed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether this has been done (step S6112). Here, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times (YES in step S6112), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6113), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6114), The advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6115), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6116), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6117). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6118, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6118), the advantageous state C processing is completed, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, in advantageous state C, as in the case of advantageous state A, the composite probability (26280/65536) that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" will be selected in the internal lottery is ) and the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), this can only occur with an extremely low probability; There may also be a case where it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G without being performed at all (a case where it is determined NO in step S6092 and NO in step S6112). In this case, the processes of steps S6113 to S6118 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6119), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6120). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state C continues until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

In addition, even if the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold and the set ceiling number of games TC (32 games in this example) has been exhausted, an instruction may be issued during the game number management process. If the function display is not performed even once, the advantageous state C will continue without transitioning to the hell state, so as a result of the subtraction process performed in step S6091, the number of remaining ceiling games TA may become negative. It can occur. Therefore, if the ceiling game number TA, which had an initial value of 32 games, becomes 0 due to game execution, the ceiling game number TC is set to "FF", and when the ceiling game number TC is "FF", the ceiling game number TC is set to "FF". As long as the advantageous state C continues without transitioning to the hell state or other advantageous state, the process of step S6091 is not performed, and the determination in step S6104 is YES. As a result, even if the advantageous state C continues after the ceiling number of games TC becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to avoid interrupting the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in step S6091, in addition to the process of keeping the remaining ceiling game number TC set to "FF" even if the game is executed when the remaining ceiling game number TC becomes negative, the remaining ceiling game number TC is set to "FF" in the first place. It may be a process of keeping it at "00" instead of setting it to "00". Furthermore, although the remaining ceiling game number TC has been described using a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is executed, it goes without saying that it may also be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is executed.

[10-3-4-5. Advantageous state D processing]
In advantageous state D, first, in step S6131, the CZ game is terminated. Specifically, each time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of CZ games set as 10 games (CZ←CZ-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of CZ games in step S6131, it is then determined whether the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). is determined (step S6132).

If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6132), the process advances to step S6134, and an ART first winning lottery is performed (step S6134). The ART initial winning lottery performed in step S6134 is a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to advantageous state E, and is set to have a higher probability than any of advantageous states A to C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 663, when a rare small role (Watermelon, Cherry) is selected in the internal lottery, the probability of winning is 65,536/65,536 (100%), and the internal The ART first winning lottery in step S6134 is performed so that if any of "Press Order Bell 1" to "Press Order Bell 6" is selected in the lottery, the probability of winning is 16,384/65,536 (25%). will be held. In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply" or "normal maintenance reply", the winning probability in the ART first winning lottery is as shown in Figure 661. It is. In addition, if a bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected in the internal lottery during CZ in advantageous state D and a bonus game is executed, the bonus will be played unless the game number counter GC exceeds the threshold G. After the game is executed, the state is shifted to advantageous state E, and it is confirmed that the ART game will be executed.

Here, the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6134 will be described in detail. When the role selected in the internal lottery is a rare small role (watermelon role, cherry role), "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6", or a normal maintenance rep, the ART first win is performed in step S6134. The winning probability in the lottery is determined as described above (Fig. 663 and FIG. 661 (as shown in the column when the normal maintenance rep is won). On the other hand, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", the winning probability in the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6134 is as shown in FIG. As shown in the "Maintenance reply" winning column), the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the relevant game number management process (the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process) Determined based on

Specifically, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the specified number, the ART will win for the first time. The winning probability in the lottery is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the specified number, the winning probability in the ART first winning lottery is 4/65536. The above specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) will be played halfway. Preferably, it is a value that can be digested without terminating in . In this embodiment, the number of ART games to be played when winning the ART first lottery is 50 games (if the additional lottery is not won), so the above specified number must be 50 or more. is preferred, but is not limited to this. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the player wins the ART first lottery, it is preferable to set the number of games in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state to (50 games + α). In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", if the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is 100 or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will win for the first time. If you win the lottery and the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, there is only a probability of 4/65,536 that you will win the ART first-hit lottery. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is small, the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART first winning lottery was won and the ART game was executed. First, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the ART initial winning probability (real By setting the number of games (4/65,536 in this example) lower than the ART initial hit probability (65,536/65,536 in this example) when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is greater than or equal to the specified number, Compared to the case where the probability of winning in the ART first lottery is constant regardless of the number of games counter GC counted during the management process, the number of games remaining until the end of the number of games management process K is the specified number while keeping the winning rate the same. When the above conditions are met, it is possible to produce a further advantageous effect such as realizing a game that increases the ART first hit probability (in this example, 65536/65536).

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance rep, as shown in FIG. As mentioned above, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is always 4/65,536.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply", it is determined whether the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the specified number. Based on whether the winner wins or not, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two levels: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). , but not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the ART initial lottery is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip + Normal Keep Rip", the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART initial lottery may be made to gradually decrease as becomes smaller.

If the ART first winning lottery is won (YES in step S6135), the process advances to step S6136, and the number of CZ games is set to 0 (CZ←0). After that, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6137), the advantageous state D flag is set to OFF (step S6138), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6139), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (Step S6140), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (Step S6141). After that, the process advances to step S6142, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process in step S6142 is a process for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintain Rip" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6141, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the pressing order of "Right - Middle - Left". An instruction function display is performed so that the stop operation can be performed by pressing (reversely). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 to stop in accordance with this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on the condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 has been performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6143), the advantageous state D process is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow the instruction function display even though it is displayed, the transition from RT1 to RT2 occurs in step S6142. No transition control is performed. If "up reply 1 + normal maintenance reply" is not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag is not set to ON in step S6143, but the player did not follow it even though the instruction function display was performed. In this case, although transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S61042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6143. Incidentally, until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, an instruction function display is performed when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery. In other words, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to Up Replay combination 1 is displayed on the active line, control to move to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the upper replay combination 1 is not displayed on the active line because the instruction function display is not followed, RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Furthermore, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device that corresponds to 6 different pressing orders, such as a pressing order bell, for "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip".

If the ART first winning lottery in step S6134 is not won (NO in step S6135), the process proceeds to step S6144, and it is determined whether the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ=0). If the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), the processes in steps S6153 to S6160, which will be described later, are not performed. That is, the advantageous state D is continued without transitioning to the hell state.

If you win the ART first winning lottery (YES in step S6135), advantageous state D ends and you move to advantageous state E even if the CZ number of games has not been played, while you win the ART first winning lottery. If not (NO in step S6135), advantageous state D continues until the CZ number of games are played. However, although it is not shown in FIG. 653, even if you fail the ART first lottery (NO in step S6135) and the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), you will receive a bonus prize in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. While this bonus game is being executed, an additional lottery will be held in which the number of ART games will be added on with a probability of 328/65536, and if you win this additional lottery, you will be immediately transferred to advantageous state E after the bonus game ends. , the ART game including the added number of games is executed. On the other hand, if you do not win the additional lottery during the execution of the bonus game, 50 games are set as the number of ART games (ART←50), and after the bonus game ends, you are immediately transferred to advantageous state E, and 50 games are set as the number of ART games (ART←50). The ART game of the game is executed.

If it is determined in step S6144 that the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ=0) (YES in step S6144), the process advances to step S6153, and it is determined whether the instruction function display was performed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not (step S6153).

In step S6153, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6153), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6154), and the advantageous state D flag is set to OFF. is set to OFF (step S6155), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6156), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6157). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6158, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6158), the advantageous state D process is completed, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, in advantageous state D, as in the case of advantageous state A and advantageous state C, the composite probability ( Considering the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games) and the predetermined threshold value G (1500 games), the probability of this occurring is extremely low; There is also a case where it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value G without the function display being performed even once (when it is determined as NO in step S6132 and NO in step S6153). obtain. In this case, the processes of steps S6154 to S6158 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6159), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6160). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state D continues until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, even after the set number of CZ games CZ (10 games in this example) has been played, if the instruction function is not displayed even once during the number of games management process, it will be hell. Since the advantageous state D continues without transitioning to the state, the number of remaining CZ games CZ may become negative as a result of the subtraction process performed in step S6131. Therefore, if the initial value is 10 games, but the number of CZ games becomes 0 as a result of game execution, the remaining number of chance games CZ is set to "FF", and the number of chance games CZ becomes "FF". Sometimes, as long as the advantageous state D continues without transitioning to the hellish state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6131 is not performed, and the determination in step S6144 is YES. This prevents the game from being interrupted due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 even if the chance game (CZ) is continued after the number of chance games CZ becomes 0 due to game execution. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Note that in step S6131, if the number of remaining chance games CZ becomes negative, in addition to the process of keeping the remaining number of chance games CZ set to "FF" even if the game is executed, the number of remaining chance games CZ is set to "FF" in the first place. It is also possible to keep the value at "00" instead of setting it to "00". Furthermore, although the remaining chance game count CZ has been described using a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is executed, it goes without saying that it may also be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is executed.
[10-3-4-6. Advantageous state E processing]
Advantageous state E is a process during the ART game. In this advantageous state E, first, in step S6171, the ART game is digested. Specifically, each time a game is executed, one is subtracted from the number of ART games preset in step S6040, step S6067, step S6100, step S6140, or step S6197 (ART←ART-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of ART games in step S6171, it is determined whether the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example). is determined (step S6172).

If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6172), the process advances to step S6173, and it is determined whether or not the specialized zone is in effect (step S6173).

If it is determined in step S6173 that it is not in the specialized zone (YES in step S6173), the specialized zone lottery described above is performed using the specialized zone lottery table of FIG. 665 (step S6174). If the specialized zone lottery in step S6174 is won (YES in step S6175), the process advances to step S6176, and RT state transition processing is performed (step S6176).

The RT state transition process in step S6176 is a process for transitioning the RT state. Specifically, when "Up Rip 2 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the "Right-Left-Middle" pressing order (reverse pinching). An instruction function display is performed so that the stop operation can be performed by pressing (press). When the player operates the reel stop button 211 to stop in accordance with this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT2 to RT3. Note that when winning the specialized zone lottery, the ART medium lottery state is transferred from the ART medium low probability state or the ART medium high probability state to the special zone preparation state. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is displayed on the active line, the special zone preparation state is shifted to the special zone state.

In step S6177, an additional lottery is performed. In step S6177, in the lottery for determining the number of additional games, it is first determined whether or not to add the number of ART games.If it is determined to add the number of ART games (YES in step S6178), the process proceeds to the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, and A lottery will be drawn to determine whether the game will be added on. Then, in step S6180, the number of additional games N determined in the number of additional games determination lottery is added (ART←ART+N). As described above, the lottery for determining the number of additional games is performed using FIGS. 656 and 662(a), and the lottery for determining the number of additional games is performed using FIGS. 657 to 660 and FIG. 662(b). FIG. 656 is an example of a lottery table used in the lottery to determine the number of additional games, FIG. 657 is an example of a lottery table used in the lottery to determine the number of additional games when the probability is low during ART, and FIG. 658 is in the high probability state during ART. FIG. 659 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games when the specialization zone is in preparation. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games.

Note that when it is determined in step S6173 that the current zone is in the specialized zone (NO in step S6173), steps S6174, S6175, and S6176 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177. Further, when it is determined in step S6175 that the special zone lottery in step S6174 has been rejected (NO in step S6175), step S6176 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177.

In step S6181, an ART-during lottery state transition lottery is performed using the ART-during lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 664. As described above, this ART mid-lottery state transition lottery is a lottery to determine which of the ART mid-low probability state and the ART mid-high probability state should be controlled for the ART mid-lot lottery state during the basic ART. Then, based on the result of the ART lottery state transition lottery in step S6181, the ART lottery state transition process in step S6183 is performed.

To be more specific, in the ART medium-low probability state, referring to "low → high" in FIG. 664, the transition lottery to the ART medium-high probability state is performed with a probability according to the conditional device activated in response to the result of the internal lottery. is carried out (step S6181), and if this transition lottery is won (YES in step S6182), the transition to the ART medium high probability state is controlled (step S6183). If the transfer lottery in step S6181 is unsuccessful (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is completed, and the low probability state during ART is maintained. In addition, in the ART medium-high probability state, referring to "High→Low" in FIG. 664, the transition lottery to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability according to the condition device activated in response to the internal lottery result. If I (step S6181) win this transition lottery (YES in step S6182), I am controlled to transition to the ART medium low probability state (step S6183). If the transfer lottery in step S6181 is unsuccessful (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is completed, and the high probability state during ART is maintained. The ART lottery state transition lottery in step S6181 is performed using the ART lottery state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 664. FIG. 664 is a lottery table used for the ART lottery state transition lottery. Note that "low" shown in FIG. 664 means "ART middle low probability state", and "high" also shown in FIG. 664 means "ART middle high probability state". The ART medium lottery state transition lottery is executed each time an internal lottery is performed (every time a game is executed) in both the ART medium high probability state and the ART medium low probability state.

If it is determined that the lottery for determining the addition in step S6177 has been unsuccessful (NO in step S6178), the process proceeds to step S6184, and it is determined whether the ART game has been completed. In the ART game completion determination performed in step S6184, it is determined whether all the ART games to be executed have been completed, and if it is determined that all the ART games to be executed have been completed (YES in step S6184). , the advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S6185), the pullback state flag is set to ON (step S6186), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6187), and the ART flag is set to OFF (step S6186). S6188), the advantageous state E processing is completed and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6184 that the ART game to be executed has not yet been played (NO in step S6184), the process advances to step S6181 and the ART game is continued.

Although not shown in FIG. 654, there is a step of determining the RT state when the final game of the ART game ends (when the determination is YES in step S6184). If the RT state determined here is RT1, the pullback state A flag is set to ON in step S6186, and if the RT state determined here is RT2, the pullback state B flag is set to ON. The pullback states A and B will be described later.

In step S6172, if it is determined that the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold (1500 games in this example), that is, the number of games played by the player in the number of games management process exceeds the predetermined threshold. If it is determined that it exceeds (NO in step S6172), the process advances to step S6190, and it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process (step S6190). During the game management process, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed (YES in step S6190), it is determined whether the ART flag is ON (step S6191).

If it is determined in step S6191 that the ART flag is ON (YES in step S6191), the ART flag is set to OFF (step S6192), and the advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S6193), and the instruction The function flag is set to OFF (step S6194), the number of games management flag is set to OFF (step S6195), and the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6196). Thereafter, the process advances to step S6197, where the game number counter GC is set to 0 (GC←0), the advantageous state E processing is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. In other words, if the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold (NO in step S6172), even if the ART game is in the middle (the ART game Even if the termination condition is not met (even if the specified number of games (50 games in this example) has not been played), the ART game in progress will be forcibly terminated midway. Note that if it is determined in step S6191 that the ART flag is OFF (NO in step S6191), step S6192 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6193.

By the way, in advantageous state E, as in the case of advantageous state A, advantageous state C, and advantageous state D, one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by internal lottery. Considering the composite probability (26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games), it can only occur with an extremely low probability, but in terms of probability, the game number counter GC starts counting. If it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G without the instruction function display being performed even once since the instruction case) is also possible. In this case, the processes of steps S6191 to S6197 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6198), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6199). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state E will continue until the display is performed once, making it possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

In addition, as mentioned above, even after the number of ART games to be executed (50 games + α in this example) has been completely exhausted, the instruction function display is not performed even once during the number of games management process. If not, the advantageous state E continues without transitioning to the hell state, and as a result of the subtraction process performed in step S6171, the number of remaining ART games ART may become negative. Therefore, if the initial value is (50 games + α), but the number of ART games ART becomes 0 due to game execution, the number of ART games TA is set to "FF", and the number of ART games TA is set to "FF". When this is the case, as long as the advantageous state E continues without transitioning to the hell state or the pullback state, the process of step S6171 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6184. As a result, even if the advantageous state E continues after the number of ART games ART becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to avoid interrupting the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in step S6171, if the number of remaining ART games ART becomes negative, in addition to the process of keeping the number of remaining ART games ART set to "FF" even if the game is executed, the number of remaining ART games ART is set to "FF" in the first place It is also possible to keep the value at "00" instead of setting it to "00". Moreover, although the remaining ART games number ART has been described using a subtraction method in which it is subtracted each time a game is executed, it goes without saying that it may also be an addition method in which it is added each time a game is executed.

Here, the lottery for determining the number of additional ART games performed in step S6177 and the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply", the probability of winning in the lottery for determining the addition of the number of ART games performed in step S6177 is as shown in FIG. 662(a). , is determined based on the difference K between a predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number, ART The probability of winning in the lottery for determining the number of additional games is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number, the number of ART games will be added. The probability of winning in the final lottery is 4/65,536. The above-mentioned second specified number can be set arbitrarily, but even if ART games are added based on winning the lottery to determine the number of ART games to be added, it is possible for the ART games to be completed without ending halfway. It is preferable that the value is achievable. In this embodiment, when winning the lottery for determining the number of ART games to add, a maximum of 300 games will be added, so the second specified number is preferably 300 or more games, but is limited to this. It's not a thing. Therefore, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 300 or more, there is a 100% probability that the number of ART games will be changed. If you win the lottery for determining the additional number of ART games and the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is less than 300 games, there is only a probability of 4/65,536 that you will win the lottery for determining the additional number of ART games. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the probability of winning in the lottery for determining the number of additional ART games will be relatively small, so if you win the lottery for determining the number of additional ART games and It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the addition has been made. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the number of ART games when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number. The winning probability (in this example, 4/65536) in the lottery for deciding the number of ART games to be won when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number (in this example) By setting it lower than 65536/65536), the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games is fixed regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the number of games management process. To realize a game that increases the winning probability (in this example, 65536/65536) in the ART game number addition lottery when the remaining number of games K until the end of game number management processing is equal to or greater than the specified number while keeping the percentage the same. It is also possible to produce further effects such as making it possible to do this.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 662(b), the number of games to be added in the lottery to determine the number of additional games in step S6179 when winning the lottery to determine the number of additional games to be added to the number of ART games is also determined by the internal lottery. When the winning combination is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is different between the second prescribed number or more and the one less than the second prescribed number. Specifically, when the role selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", when the role selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep", if the winning combination is not won. The number of added games is set to increase compared to the previous version. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the number of ART games that will be added in step S6179 when winning the ART game number addition determination lottery will be relatively small. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the ART game has been added to an ART game by winning the addition decision lottery, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player. Become.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number. Based on whether or not there is, the probability of winning in the lottery for determining the number of ART games will be determined as one of two levels: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in a lottery for determining the number of ART games is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip + Normal Keep Rip", the number of games remaining until the end of the game management process is As the number of games K decreases, the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games may gradually decrease. In addition, above, we have explained that the probability of winning in the lottery for determining the number of ART games will be changed when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rep + Normal Maintenance Rep". Without changing the probability (65536/65536), refer to the table shown in FIG. 662(b) used for the lottery to determine the number of additional games when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is less than the second specified number. You may also do so. That is, the number of games to be added in the lottery for determining the number of additional games may be changed without changing the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of additional games to be added.

[10-3-4-7. Processing during pullback state]
The pullback state is controlled after the advantageous state E ends when all the number of ART games to be executed have been exhausted and the game number counter GC has not exceeded the predetermined threshold G (when it is determined YES in step S6184). In this example, a pull-back state A and a pull-back state B are prepared. The probability of winning the ART initial lottery is set higher than advantageous conditions A to C and advantageous condition E in both pullback conditions A and B, and lower than advantageous condition D, but It may be set higher than state D.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the ART game, the RT state is not transferred from RT2 to RT1 in principle, but the internal lottery selects "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6". Even though one of them was selected and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 was clearly indicated by the instruction function display, the reel stop button 211 was not operated according to the instruction function display, so the 0-piece bell was reached. When the zero mark is displayed on the valid line, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls the transition from RT2 to RT1. In this example, as described above, if the RT state is RT1 when the final game of the ART game ends (when determined as YES in step S6184), the control is made to the pullback state A, and the final game of the ART game ends. If the RT state at that time is RT2, control is made to the pullback state B. The pullback state is determined according to the RT state at the time the final game of the ART game ends, so even if the RT state at the time the final game of the ART game starts is RT2, the final state of the ART game In the game, when a 0-bell number is displayed on the active line, the RT state is transferred from RT2 to RT1, so that the control is set to the pullback state A.

The pullback state processing will be described below. In the pullback state, first, each time the game is executed, an ART initial winning lottery is performed according to the pullback state (step S6201). The probability of winning in this ART first winning lottery is as shown in the ART first winning lottery table in FIG. When the winning combination selected in is a combination other than "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply", it is as shown in the ART first winning lottery table in the pullback state of FIG. 666. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip+Normal Keep Rip", as shown in FIG. are doing. On the other hand, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is a winning combination other than "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", as can be seen from FIG. 666, the pullback state A and the pullback state B are compared. Therefore, the pull-back state B is more advantageous to the player than the pull-back state A in that it is easier to win the ART first winning lottery.

Here, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip+Normal Keep Rip", the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6201 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery performed in step S6201 is as shown in Fig. 661 ("Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip" winning). As shown in the time column), it is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the relevant game number management process (the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process). be done.

Specifically, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first lottery is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number, in the ART first lottery The probability of winning is 4/65,536. The above-mentioned first specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first lottery, it is set as the predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment). It is preferable that the value is a value that can be digested without being terminated prematurely. In this embodiment, the number of ART games to be executed when winning the ART first lottery is 50 games (if the additional lottery is not won), so the first specified number is 50 or more. It is preferable that there be. However, since the ART game does not start immediately even if the player wins the ART first lottery, it is preferable to set the number of games in consideration of the number of games in the preparation state to (50 games + α). In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games+α) games. Therefore, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", if the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is 100 or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will win for the first time. If you win the lottery and the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, there is only a probability of 4/65,536 that you will win the ART first-hit lottery. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is small, the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART first winning lottery was won and the ART game was executed. First, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the ART initial winning probability when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number (4/65536 in this example) is lower than the ART initial hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number. , compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process, the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process while keeping the winning rate the same. It is also possible to produce further effects such as the ability to realize a game that increases the ART first hit probability (in this example, 65536/65536) when K is greater than or equal to the first specified number. becomes.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is the normal maintenance rep, as shown in FIG. is 4/65536.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is less than the first specified number. Based on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the ART first lottery is determined to be one of two levels: high probability (65536/65536) and low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the ART initial lottery is set in multiple stages, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip + Normal Keep Rip", the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is K. The winning probability in the ART initial lottery may be made to gradually decrease as becomes smaller.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, after the advantageous state E ends, as long as the number of games management flag is ON (as long as the number of games counter GC does not exceed a predetermined threshold), the probability of winning in the ART first winning lottery is Although it is controlled to a relatively higher pullback state than the normal state (for example, advantageous state A, advantageous state C, or hell state), the control is not limited to this, and after the end of advantageous state E, a predetermined threshold value G and the number of games are managed. Even if the control is set to the pullback state only when the difference K between the number of games counter GC counted during processing (the number of remaining games K until the end of the number of games management process) is, for example, a third specified number or more. good. In this case as well, if the remaining number of games K after the end of the advantageous state E until the end of the number of games management process is, for example, less than the third specified number, the withdrawal state will not be controlled. It is possible to prevent a situation where the ART game is forcibly terminated midway even though the ART game has been executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Note that after the advantageous state E ends, the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process) is determined according to, for example, the third regulation. If the number is less than the number, the number of games management process can be terminated and the state goes to hell, or the number of games management process can be continued, but the probability of winning in the ART first lottery will be the same as the normal time above. It may be set to a probability (for example, 1/65536).

If you win the ART first lottery in step S6201 (YES in step S6202), is the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example)? It is determined whether or not (step S6205).

When it is determined that the number of games counter GC is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold value G (YES at step S6205), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6206), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games (step S6205). S6207), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6208). After that, the process advances to step S6209, and RT state transition processing is performed.

The RT state transition process in step S6209 is a process for transitioning the RT state, but this process is performed when the pullback state A is present, and is not performed when the pullback state B is present. This is because the RT state transition process in step S6209 is a process of transitioning the RT state from RT1 to RT2 as a preparation process for executing the ART game, so it is not performed in the pullback state B where the RT state is RT2, and This is so that the pullback state A, which is in the RT1 state, is shifted to RT2. After that, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6210).

If the game number counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (NO in step S6205), the process advances to step S6211, and the instruction function display is performed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not the request was made (step S6211). During the game management process, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed (YES in step S6211), the pullback state flag is set to OFF (step S6212). Specifically, if the current pullback state is pullback state A, the pullback state A flag is set to OFF, and if the current pullback state is pullback state B, the pullback state B flag is set to OFF. After that, if the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6213), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6214), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6215). Note that if it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (if it is determined NO in step S6213), the process skips step S6214 and proceeds to step S6215, where the game number management flag is set to OFF. (Step S6215). Thereafter, the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6216), and the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6217), ending the pullback state process and returning to the main routine.

By the way, even in the pullback state, as in the case of advantageous state A, advantageous state C, advantageous state D, and advantageous state E, any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by internal lottery. Considering the composite probability of being selected (26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games), it can only occur with an extremely low probability; If it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds the predetermined threshold value G without the instruction function display being performed even once after the counting has started (NO in step S6205 and NO in step S6211). ) is also possible. In this case, the processes of steps S6212 to S6217 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6218), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The pullback state continues until the display is performed once, and it is possible to ensure that the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process.

Note that when the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold (1500 games in this example) (NO in step S6205), normally, it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (step (No determination is made in S6213). However, very rarely, as described above, the determination in step S6211 is NO and the instruction function flag is set to ON in step S6219. In this case, it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is ON (determined as YES in step S6213).

Furthermore, if the game number counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (if the determination is NO in step S6205), the state will be shifted to the hell state regardless of the result of the ART first winning lottery. . To be more specific, if the game number counter GC reaches the predetermined threshold value G in step S6205, even if the ART first winning lottery in step S6202 is won, the ART game is not executed and the game returns to the withdrawal state. When the game ends, the game enters the hell state, and the count of the number of games counter ends (the number of games management process ends).

When it is determined that the ART initial winning lottery in step S6201 has not been won (NO in step S6202), a pullback state maintenance lottery is performed (step S6203). The mode of this maintenance lottery is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process).

To explain the maintenance lottery in step S6203 in detail, when the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number, and in the pullback state A, the probability of winning is 49/50. A maintenance lottery is held (i.e., the probability of winning is 1/50), and if it is in pullback state B, a maintenance lottery is performed so that the probability of winning is 19/20 (i.e., the probability of 1/20). ). Therefore, when the pull-back state A and the pull-back state B are compared, although it is easier to win the ART initial lottery in the pull-back state B, the pull-back state B is more difficult to maintain than the pull-back state A. On the other hand, when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number, a maintenance lottery common to pullback state A and pullback state B is performed. That is, regardless of whether the lottery is in the withdrawal state A or the withdrawal state B, the maintenance lottery is performed so that the probability of winning is 7/50 (the probability of winning is 43/50). In this way, when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number, the pull back state A is easier to maintain in the pull back state than the pull back state B, but the game number management process ends. When the remaining number of games K is less than the third specified number, there is a relatively high probability that the withdrawal state will transition to the hell state regardless of whether it is in the withdrawal state A or the withdrawal state B. . As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the probability of winning in the maintenance lottery will be relatively small, so even if the ART game is executed after winning the ART first lottery, the It is possible to prevent a situation where an ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", winning in the maintenance lottery when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number. The probability (in this example, 7/50) is calculated as the winning probability in the maintenance lottery when the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number (in this example, in the case of pullback state A) 49/50, or 19/20 in the case of pullback state B), so that the winning probability in the maintenance lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is possible to realize a game that increases the probability of winning in the maintenance lottery when the number of games remaining until the end of the number of games management process K is equal to or greater than the third specified number while keeping the winning rate the same, compared to the case where the winning rate is the same. It becomes possible to produce further effects such as.

The third specified number above can be set arbitrarily, but considering that if you win the maintenance lottery and maintain the pullback state, you will win the ART first lottery with a relatively high probability. It is preferable that the value is such that a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment) can be completed without ending the game halfway when the game is played. In this embodiment, the number of ART games to be played when winning the ART first lottery is 50 games (if the additional lottery is not won), so the third specified number is 50 or more. It is preferable, but not limited to this.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rep + normal maintenance rep", the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number. Based on whether or not there is a 7), but is not limited to this. For example, if the probability of winning in the maintenance lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance reply + normal maintenance reply", the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is small. The winning probability in the maintenance lottery may be gradually lowered as the number of participants increases.

If the maintenance lottery in step S6203 is unsuccessful (determined NO in step S6204), the process advances to step S6211, and it is determined whether or not the instruction function display was performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6211). During the game management process, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed (YES in step S6211), the processes in steps S6212 to S6217 described above are performed (that is, it is determined that the game will be transferred to the hell state). ), the pullback state processing is completed and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, during the game management process, if it is determined that the instruction function display is not performed (NO in step S6211), the processes in steps S6212 to S6217 are not performed, and the number of instructions is set to 1 ( Step S6218), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game number management process is started when the hell state is changed to the advantageous state. During the game number management process (that is, during the advantageous state or the withdrawal state), unless a specific condition is satisfied (for example, unless there is a bonus game execution history (execution history during the game number management process)) , it is guaranteed that the instruction function display will be performed once (see FIGS. 650 to 655). The instruction function display here refers to the number of payouts when a winning combination is selected in an internal lottery, in which the number of payouts of game media differs depending on the stop operation mode (for example, press order and press position) of the reel stop button 211. This refers to an instruction display that is performed so that the stop operation is performed in the most common stop operation mode. In this example, when "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are selected by internal lottery, the stop operation will be performed in the press order corresponding to the 8 coins with the highest number of payouts. This corresponds to the instructions displayed. Therefore, when a winning combination other than the winning combination in which the number of game media payouts differs depending on the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, the selected winning combination is designated (stop operation mode). Even if an instruction is given (navigated) which is the winning combination selected in the internal lottery, rather than an instruction from the above, the instruction does not correspond to the instruction function display referred to here. In this case, even if the target winning combination of the instruction function display (a winning combination in which the number of payouts of game media differs depending on the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211) is selected in the internal lottery, the highest number of payouts (in this example) Even if an instruction is given to the effect that a winning combination with a larger number of payouts has been selected than the number of payouts (for "Push order Bell 1" to "Press order Bell 6" is 8 pieces), the instruction is indicated by the instruction function display here. does not correspond to Further, even though the internal lottery selects a combination in which the number of payouts of game media differs depending on the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 and the stop operation mode is instructed, the player disobeys the instruction. , even if the stop operation is not performed in a manner that maximizes the number of payouts, it is assumed that the instruction function display here is performed. Furthermore, if the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, the subsequent RT state will be different (for example, "Up Rip 1 + Normal maintenance Rip 1" in this example is equivalent), and the reel stop button 211 must be operated in an appropriate stop operation mode. For example, even if an instruction for a stop operation mode is given when a replay role in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed is selected in an internal lottery, that instruction is also equivalent to the instruction function display here. do not.

By the way, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the ART game (including during the specialized zone and during the preparation of the specialized zone), as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, the changes from RT2 and RT3 to RT1 However, if the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the instruction function display, the transition may occur from RT2 or RT3 to RT1. In other words, the game is such that the player is given the right to choose whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is controlled by the pull-back state A or the pull-back state B. I can say that. Therefore, the states after the end of the advantageous state E are defined as a pullback state A in which it is difficult to win the ART first winning lottery but the pullback state is easy to maintain, and a pullback state A in which it is easy to win the ART first winning lottery but it is difficult to maintain the pullback state. The player himself/herself can select in which state the game will be played out of state B. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest in ART games, which tend to become monotonous when simply playing the game. In addition, even if you operate the reel stop button 211 without following the instruction function display and shift from RT2 or RT3 to RT1, after the ART game ends, the control will be changed to the pullback state A where the pullback state is likely to be maintained. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In particular, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display during the ART game (including during the specialization zone and during the preparation of the specialization zone), the control will be in the pullback state A, so a game in which the pullback state B is selected. The player will select a high-risk, high-reward game compared to the pullback state A, in which the player is likely to be transferred to the hell state but is likely to win the ART first lottery. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether the state after the end of advantageous state E is a relatively low-risk low-return state or a relatively high-risk high-return game is determined by the game. It can be selected according to the wishes of the person.

However, if the player attempts to select the relatively high-risk, high-return pullback state B, the player will be shifted from RT2 or RT3, where the replay combination probability is relatively high, to RT1, where the replay combination probability is relatively low. need to take the risk of If there are many remaining games in the ART game, there is a possibility that any of "Press Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6" will be selected in an internal lottery until the ART Game ends. Although it is expensive, the number of medals paid out as prizes to players during the ART game will be reduced (in some cases, the number of medals consumed for playing the game is greater than the number of medals paid out as prizes). There is a risk that the amount will increase. On the other hand, if there are only a few remaining games in the ART game, it is possible to obtain a larger number of medals as prizes paid out to players during the ART game. There is a risk that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" will not be selected. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pullback state is determined according to the RT state at the time the final game of the ART game ends, so that the transition to RT1 is not possible in the last game of the ART game. is preferred. However, any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is not necessarily selected in the internal lottery in the final game of the ART game. Therefore, for a player who wants to select pullback state B, it is preferable to hold out until the last minute before the final game of the ART game so as not to be shifted to RT1, but it is also possible to shift to RT1 at an earlier point. You can look forward to deciding at what point you want to transition to RT1.

In addition, some players may not desire the relatively high-risk, high-return pullback state B, but may use the instruction function display performed during the ART game (including during the specialized zone and during preparation for the specialized zone). Although there are cases where the reel stop button 211 is operated by mistake, this can actually add a sense of tension to the game during the ART game (including during the specialization zone and during preparation for the specialization zone). Moreover, even if the player does not desire the pullback state B, the game is played under a situation where the ART first winning lottery probability is relatively high, so the player does not feel a sense of loss.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when transitioning from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 during the ART game (including during the specialized zone and during the preparation of the specialized zone), the number of additional games Even if the player continues playing the ART game without stopping the progress of the ART game while performing the decision lottery, the probability of winning the ART first time lottery is controlled to the pull-back state B, which is relatively high, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

By the way, as described above, in step S602, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is incremented by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. In the slot machine 1 of this example, the predetermined threshold is set to 1500 games, and when this threshold is exceeded, the game number management flag is forcibly set to OFF, so in principle, the game number counter GC is set to OFF. It cannot exceed 1500. However, since the game number management process continues until the instruction function is displayed at least once during the game number management process, the game number counter GC may exceed 1500 games, although the probability is extremely low. obtain. In particular, in the slot machine 1 of this example, since the game number counter GC is processed using 8 bits, it is only possible to count up to 65,536 games. However, it cannot be said with certainty that the game number counter GC will not exceed 65,536 games. Therefore, in this example, when the game number counter GC reaches the threshold value of 15,000 games in step S602, the game number counter GC is set to FF. When the game number counter GC is FF, NO is determined in steps S6032, S6072, S6092, S6031 and S6172. As a result, even if the instruction function display continues to not be executed during the game number management process, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

[10-3-5. Performance processing when winning]
The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to perform a performance activation lottery based on the result of an internal lottery, and to execute a performance that can give players a sense of anticipation based on the result of this performance activation lottery. . Specifically, the internal lottery result information is sent as a command from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), and the sub-board 510, which has received this command, performs the effect activation lottery based on the internal lottery result information. The performance mode determined by the performance operation lottery is controlled to be displayed on the image display body 500, etc., and the audio performance is also performed at the same time.

Figure 667 is the effect operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT1, Figure 668 is the effect operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT2, and Figure 669 is the effect operation lottery table when winning the internal lottery in RT3. It is. As can be seen from FIGS. 667 to 669, in the internal lottery, BB1, "BB1+watermelon", "BB1+cherry", BB2, "BB2+watermelon", "BB2+cherry", watermelon, cherry, "push order bell 1" ~ "Press order bell 6", common bell, maintenance replay, "up rep 1 + normal maintenance rep", "up rep 2 + normal maintenance rep", "lower rep + normal maintenance rep", "7 matching rep + normal maintenance rep" It is configured such that the production can be performed when any one of a plurality of winning combinations such as "7 set fake rep + normal maintenance rep" is won. Among these multiple roles, for other roles except for the maintenance replay and "up-reply 1 + normal maintenance replay", regardless of the RT status from RT1 to RT3, when won in the internal lottery The performance activation probability is the same. On the other hand, regarding the maintenance replay and the "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip", the effect activation probability when winning in the internal lottery differs depending on which of the RT statuses is RT1 to RT3.

Note that in the winning combination columns of FIGS. 667 to 669, only the winning combinations (see FIGS. 638 to 643) that can be won in each state of RT1 to RT3 are described. The table used for the effect operation lottery is not necessarily limited to the effect table prepared corresponding to each of RT1 to RT3 as shown in FIGS. 667 to 669. For example, a common table may be prepared for data with the same performance activation probability, and tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 may be prepared only for data with different performance activation probabilities. FIG. 670 is another example of the production operation lottery table. To explain using FIG. 670, for example, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination columns of FIGS. 638 to 643, "Maintain Replay", "Up Reply 1 + Normal Maintain Reply", "Up Reply 2 + Normal Maintain Reply", For winning combinations other than "lower rip + normal maintenance rip", "7 set rip + normal maintenance rip", and "7 set fake rip + normal maintenance rip", common effect operation lottery as shown in Figure 670 (a) Among the winning combinations prepared as a table and shown in the winning combination columns of FIGS. 638 to 643, "Maintenance Replay", "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip", "Up Rip 2 + Normal Maintenance Rip", "Down Rip + For "Normal maintenance rep", "7 set rep + normal maintenance rep", and "7 set fake rep + normal maintenance rep", as shown in Figures 670(b) to 670(d), according to RT1 to RT3 respectively. A table may be prepared in which the performance operation probability is set. For example, if effect tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. 667 to 669, lottery tables for "number of RT states x number of winning combinations (condition devices)" are prepared. As a result, the amount of data becomes enormous and a long verification period is required, leading to an extension of the development period.On the other hand, if the bonus is not established and the replay synthesis probability is There are multiple RT states (RT1 to RT3) with different RT states, and this is the effect when winning a winning combination (Up Rip 1, Up Rip 2, Down Rip) that has the possibility of transitioning between these multiple RT states. Although the activation probability will be changed, the data capacity will be reduced by keeping the performance activation probability unchanged when a winning combination that is not a winning combination that transitions between multiple RT states (rare minor characters such as cherry or watermelon) is won. In other words, for winning combinations (replay combinations) whose winning probability changes depending on the RT state, unless the production activation probability is changed depending on the winning probability, even if the production is activated, replays will occur frequently and expectations will be lowered. However, there is no need to prepare multiple lottery tables for winning roles (bonus roles (BB1, BB2) and minor roles (Bell, Watermelon, Cherry)) whose winning probability does not change depending on the RT state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity.Especially, when the main 409 has to control, there is a limit to the capacity, so this effect is particularly significant.

Specifically, when the RT state is RT1, if a maintenance replay or "Up Reply 1 + Normal Maintain Reply" is won in the internal lottery, the performance will be performed with a probability of approximately 1/2. The normal gaming state before the start of the ART game (the gaming state before the ART first winning lottery is won and the symbol combination corresponding to Rip 1 is displayed on the active line) is also RT1, so in such a gaming state , the performance will be performed with a probability of approximately 1/2. On the other hand, when the RT state is RT2 or RT3, the performance is configured to be performed only with an extremely low probability compared to RT1. Hereinafter, RT1 will be referred to as a low-reply state in which the replay combination probability is relatively low, and RT2 and RT3 will be referred to as high-reply states in which the replay combination probability is relatively high.

When comparing the low rep state and the high rep state, the high rep state has a higher replay synthesis probability, but the high rep state is a state in which it is more difficult to perform an effect than the low rep state. When the performance is performed, the player expects to have won a bonus (BB1, BB2) or a rare small win (watermelon, cherry) that can be expected to be the first hit on the ART. However, if the effects are performed frequently in a high-reply state, there is a risk that the players will no longer have such expectations when the effects occur, and the effects themselves may become bothersome. There is a risk. Therefore, in this example, by making it more difficult for the performance to be performed in the high rep state than in the low rep state, it is possible to suitably give the player a sense of anticipation when the performance is performed. Furthermore, in this kind of game, the player is given the right to choose whether the RT state after the end of the ART game is controlled to be a high reply state or a low reply state. It can also be said that it has a unique gameplay. Therefore, the RT state after the ART game is divided into RT1, which is difficult to win a specific role (replay in this example) but has a high probability of effect activation, and RT1, which is easy to win a specific role (replay in this example) but has a high probability of effect activation. It becomes possible for the player himself to select in which state the game will be played, among RT2 and RT3, both of which have a low value. Even when considered in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in ART games, which tend to become monotonous when simply playing the game. In addition, for players who want to select RT1 as the RT state after the end of the ART game, where effects can be performed with high frequency, it is preferable to hold out until the last minute approaching the final game of the ART game so that the RT state does not shift to RT1. Since it is possible to shift to RT1 at an early point in time, it is possible to have fun deciding when to shift to RT1. In this way, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when transitioning from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 during an ART game, the number of additional games can be determined without stopping the progress of the ART game, etc. Even if the player continues to play the game, a highly anticipated performance will be performed more frequently in the RT state after the ART game ends, so it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, in each figure of FIGS. 656 to 670, as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, there are special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) and normal roles (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role). , normal maintenance replay role) are not shown separately. This means that when a special prize is selected in the internal lottery, it will function as a special prize only in the hell state, and if the number of games management flag is set to ON, it will function as a special prize in the internal lottery. This is because even if a special role is selected, the function as a special role will not be demonstrated. In other words, when the number of games management flag is set to ON and a lottery is performed using any of the tables in FIGS. 656 to 670, the lottery is performed without distinguishing between special winnings and regular winnings. will be exposed. For example, referring to the table in FIG. 663 used in the ART first winning lottery that is performed during the game number management process and not during the ART game, the special watermelon and the normal No matter which of the watermelons (see FIGS. 638 to 643) is selected, the ART initial winning lottery is performed with reference to the watermelon as a single winning combination shown in the table of FIG. 663.

As described above, by performing the processing in each step shown in FIG. 648, the processing related to the generation of the instruction function by the main board 409 (step S61 in FIG. 647) is performed, and based on the result of the processing, the processing in FIG. 647 is performed. Processing from step S62 onward of the processing related to the generation of the indicated instruction function is performed.

[10-3-6. Instruction function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 is configured to operate when it is determined to generate an instruction function as a result of the instruction function generation process (specifically, for example, when a press order minor winning combination is won during an ART game). , the instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects the display mode of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from among a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, display data is held in the ROM 1112 etc.). . The instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail below.

First, an example of the instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 636, the slot machine 1 is equipped with two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a, 612b) arranged side by side, and uses these special display LEDs 612a, 612b to display two-digit characters and numbers. The instruction function is displayed by displaying .

671 and 672 are diagrams for explaining the instruction function display. FIG. 671 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 672 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIGS. 671 and 672, the "segment display" column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the "content" column shows the content that the displayed alphanumeric characters mean. Furthermore, in FIG. 672, the "Navi display" column shows a display summary of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 etc. when the corresponding instruction function display is performed, and the "Usage" column shows the display summary of the effect display (navigation display) when the corresponding instruction function display is performed. The situations and situations in which the display is used are indicated. The navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 will be described later.

In the instruction function display of this example, the following rules are provided as an example of rules regarding instruction function display.

(1) Two 7-segment LEDs (7 segments) are used to display instruction functions (special display LEDs 612a, 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating the approximate location of the press, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the order of the presses.

(2) Regarding the period during which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started at least until the reception of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started, and the last reel 301 that is rotating is At the timing when the player's hand leaves the reel stop button 211 where the reel stop operation corresponding to has been performed, the display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display. That is, the period for displaying the instruction function and the period for displaying the number of coins to be paid out do not overlap. It should be noted that if there is no payout of gaming value (medals) as a result of the game, that is, if the number of coins to be paid out is "0", the number of coins to be paid out does not need to be displayed. As a supplementary requirement, if the instruction function display is performed and the number of coins to be paid out is not displayed, the instruction function display shall be canceled (hidden) at the same timing as when the number of coins to be paid out is displayed, but there are other exceptions. As a result, the instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.

(3) In a game where an instruction function is displayed using the special display LED 612, when any one of the rotating reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the instruction function display ( If the reel is not the reel indicated as the first reel to be stopped by the special display LED 612b (in other words, if a reel different from the instruction content is stopped first), or if the timing at which the reel stop button 211 is pressed is indicated by the instruction function display. (Special display LED 612a) Even if the timing does not correspond to the position indicated as a guide for the press location (in other words, the reel stop operation is performed at a position different from the instruction), all The display mode on the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation for the reel 301 is completed.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when it is determined to generate an instruction function, the main board 409 determines what instruction content to display on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as an instruction function display in the game. Determined based on the winning role. First, the instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly explained using FIGS. 671 and 672.

The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content of the "approximate press location" displayed on the special display LED 612a, within the range of not denying the "appropriate press location" based on the winning combination of the game. be able to. Specifically, for example, when "BB1 (7 red symbols)" is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 determines the instruction content to display "2" (7 red symbols) on the special display LED 612a. However, in addition to this, since the game method aiming at the "red 7 symbols" is not denied, an instruction content such as displaying "0" (no designation) may be determined.

In addition, the main board 409 determines the "appropriate push order" based on the winning combination of the game regarding the "push order" instruction content displayed on the special display LED 612b, similar to the "appropriate push location" instruction content. The content of the instructions can be arbitrarily determined as long as it does not negate the above. For example, it is assumed that an instruction function is generated in a game in which "push order bell 1" is selected as a winning combination in which the "proper push order" is "push order bell 1". At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction contents of the "press order" as "left, middle, right" (6 selection push order), and according to the display example of FIG. 672 (details will be described later). , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Furthermore, as the instruction content that does not reveal the second stop and the third stop, but only the "left" of the first stop, "left first (2 choices)" may be used as the instruction content, and in this case, According to the display example 672 (details will be described later), "A" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, in view of the condition that the "appropriate push order" is not denied, the push order instruction content only needs to include at least a game procedure based on the "appropriate push order." In other words, the instruction contents that have the possibility of the left reel 301a being stopped first include "left first or right first" (segment display "E" in Fig. 672) and "left first or middle first" (Fig. 672). 672 (segment display "F") may be used as the instruction content, or furthermore, the instruction content may be such that the pressing order is unknown (segment display "0" in FIG. 672).

Next, display examples shown in FIGS. 671 and 672 will be specifically explained. First, referring to Figure 671, there are four possible press locations: 0 (no designation), 1 (chance symbol), 2 (red 7 symbol), and 3 (BAR symbol). Numbers are set to be displayed. In addition, if "0" is displayed as a guide for the press location, it means that the guide for the press order is not specified, that is, the operation with a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game, but in such a case, Even if the reel stop button 211 is pressed without being aware of the stop timing (unspecified stop operation), symbol combinations based on some winning combinations do not necessarily line up on the active line. In other words, if you want to reliably stop the symbol combination based on the winning combination in a game in which "no designation" is selected, a predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed, such as the maximum efficiency batting method described above, is required. It is required to perform a stop operation at . Specifically, for example, if you win "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" during ART, "0" will be displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell will not be pressed properly. As long as you stop the game in order, you can match the symbol combinations of the bell combinations regardless of the stop timing (without missing anything). On the other hand, for example, if the special display LED 612a displays "0" when the winning combination is a combination that may be missed depending on the stop timing (for example, a watermelon combination), the winning combination may be missed depending on the stop timing. If the reel stop button 211 is pressed, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning combination will be missed.In order to ensure that the watermelon winning combination is won, it is necessary to make sure that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the watermelon winning combination are within the retractable range. It is necessary to press the reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing.

Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as a guide for the push location be a symbol that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reels 301 are rotating, but at an appropriate timing, aim at the symbol that is used as a guide and perform the stop operation. Even if it does, it is not necessarily necessary to stop the symbol on the activated line.

Further, regarding the symbols corresponding to "1" to "3" shown in FIG. 671, the corresponding symbols may be changed arbitrarily. For example, the "chance symbol" that is the target for "1" may be applied to a "correct" symbol or a "righteous" symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Furthermore, the target symbol for "2" may be a "blue 7" symbol instead of a red 7 symbol. Note that the segment display shown in FIG. 671 is only an example, and the segment display pattern can be increased or decreased within the range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, a segment display may be added for symbols other than those illustrated in FIG. 671 (for example, a watermelon symbol). In addition, the symbol set as a guide for the pressing location is not limited to one; for example, a segment display such as "either the red 7 symbol or the blue 7 symbol" may be set as a guide for the pressing location. You can. Also, although it is common to Figures 671 and 672, the correspondence between "content" and "seg display" does not have to be one-to-one, and multiple "seg displays" indicating the same "content" are prepared. You can.

Next, referring to FIG. 672, 16 display patterns are set to be displayed, and alphanumeric characters "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" are assigned as the display contents of the segment display. . The meaning of each display pattern will be explained in detail below. Note that when displayed in 7 segments, the capital letters "B" and "D" may be indistinguishable from the numbers "8" and "0", respectively, so in FIG. 672, "b" and "d" is displayed in lowercase letters.

The display "0" on the special display LED 612b is used when the order of presses is not limited (the order of presses does not matter). However, as stated in the "Purpose of use" column, it is not used only when the winning combination can be pressed in any order, but when it is a winning combination that can be won by making a choice, the pressing order is intentionally specified. It can be used even if you do not. Winning combinations that can be pressed in any order include Bell and Replay, as well as low winning combinations (rare combinations) such as chance, watermelon, and cherry. Therefore, when an instruction function display is performed when a rare combination is won, the display on the special display LED 612b will be "0", but at this time, the navigation display will display an expectation display such as "chance!" or a rare combination type display. You may also make it happen. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach to the player that this is a game with high expectations, which is different from normal games. In addition, in the latter case, where you do not intentionally specify the order of presses when the winning combination is a winning combination that can be won by multiple choices, the correct order of presses will not be specified, so the navigation display example will be "?・?・?" .

Displays "1" to "6" on the special display LED 612b are used when the stopping order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as the proper pressing order, and are used to display the so-called 6-choice pressing order. Can be done. When the instruction function display displays a pressing order of six options, the navigation display indicates at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped is obvious from the elimination method, but it may be explicitly stated.

In addition, the displays "7" to "9" on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined which of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first as the proper pressing order. It is possible to display the so-called three-choice pressing order. When the instruction function display shows the order of pressing three options, the navigation display indicates which reel should be stopped first.

When the special display LED 612b displays a pressing order such as "1" to "9" above, if the stop operation is performed according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b, the most frequent payout Advantageous game results are provided to the player, such as winning a prize in the order of pressing the bell at a stop type that corresponds to the number of coins. As mentioned above, in order to obtain the stop system that results in the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of winning combinations that may be missed.

Furthermore, "providing game results that are advantageous to the player" mentioned in the previous paragraph includes "suppressing the provision of game results that are disadvantageous to the player." A specific example will be described below. For example, a push order replay is prepared in which different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the push order, and when the push order replay is won, if the stop operation is performed in a "specific push order", the blue 7 symbol combination stops. Suppose it is possible. This set of 7 blue symbols is used as one of the effects to teach the addition, for example, if you win the press order replay during ART and it is internally determined that the number of ART games will be added. do. When the number of ART games is added when winning such a push order replay, displaying a "specific push order" as an instruction function leads to providing "game results advantageous to the player." On the other hand, if you win the press order replay but the number of ART games is not added, if the instruction function displays "specific press order", it will be assumed that the blue 7 symbol alignment has stopped due to the stop operation according to the instruction. However, since "game results advantageous to the player" such as adding the number of ART games are not provided, "game results disadvantageous to the player" are provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such "game results disadvantageous to the player," if the number of ART games is not added at the time of the above-mentioned push order replay win, "a specific push It is possible to display an instruction function that avoids the "order". By playing the game in accordance with such an instruction function display, the blue 7 symbol set that does not add to the number of ART games will not appear, so it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with disadvantageous game results. As a result, advantageous game results are provided to the player.

On the other hand, the displays "A" to "F" on the special display LED 612b are different from the case in which "1" to "9" are displayed, and the display "A" to "F" on the special display LED 612b is different from the case where "1" to "9" are displayed. Used when displaying. For example, in the case of display "A", it only indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, but does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (one of two choices) the reel to be stopped second. Further, for example, in the case of the display "d", it is only indicated that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, but it is not indicated whether the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Even if the proper pressing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected at the first stop, at the second stop it is necessary to select which of the remaining two rotating reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c). By allowing the user to choose whether to stop the system, four choices can be made as a result. Note that if the selection at the first stop satisfies the appropriate pressing order, then two choices can be made.

In this way, when the special display LED 612b displays a pressing order such as the above "A" to "F", even if you perform a stop operation according to the displayed contents, the pressing order may not necessarily be the correct one. However, if the player is finally able to select an appropriate push order, an advantageous game result is provided to the player, such as a push order bell winning a prize in the stop format that results in the largest number of coins to be paid out.

The display examples on each of the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, but in reality, a two-digit value that is a combination of these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the instruction function display of the first example, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode that makes it easy to understand the instruction contents, so that the player can It is possible to perform an appropriate reel stop operation while looking at the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and it is possible to expect a more advantageous gaming result than when no instruction function display is performed. In addition, by making it easier to attract the attention of the player to the display device that displays such an instruction function, it is possible to create a gaming experience not found in conventional gaming machines.

In addition, the display examples shown in FIGS. 671 and 672 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the order in which the buttons are pressed, but the symbols and the order in which they are pressed are grouped as appropriate. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected that the amount of data required for the main board 409 to display the instruction function can be reduced.

[10-3-7. Instruction generation performance processing]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the main board 409 displays the instruction function on the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation process, and also displays information similar to the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction content is notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510). Then, the sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) on the image display body 500 or the like in accordance with the display contents of the instruction function display (instruction generation effect processing).

That is, when the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment generates an instruction function, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, and at the same time, the image display body 500 displays a navigation display with the same instruction content as that of the instruction function. By doing so, the instruction content is announced in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

Further, as described above in the explanation of step S31 in FIG. 644, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. It is not necessary that the sub-board 501 determines the display mode for navigation display from among a plurality of display modes, as long as the display content does not contradict the instruction content by the instruction function display (1:n correspondence relationship). ).

As a display example of the navigation display, for example, when "push order bell 2" is selected in an internal lottery, "1" is displayed in the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" is displayed in the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and "3" is displayed in the corresponding position of the right reel 301b. By displaying "2" in the corresponding position of 301c, the stopping order of the left, right, and middle pinch presses is instructed. In this navigation display, based on the content of the instruction information command that indicates that the bell in the push order has been won, the display color of the image indicating the stop order may be changed to yellow to remind of the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (e.g. , when all reels 301 are rotating, this is the reel to be stopped first, and when two reels are rotating, this is the reel to be stopped second) than the image showing the other stopping order. It may also be highlighted.

Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content to be displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by audio output. For example, when is the left reel 301a, a voice such as "Left!" is output at a timing before the first stop of the reel. When performing audio output, different audio outputs (for example, You can use different characters, lines, intonation, etc.). By displaying the navigation including audio output in this way, it is possible to more reliably notify the player of the contents of instructions, and to increase the player's interest by providing a navigation display that changes according to the gaming situation. You can expect it.

In this way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by making it possible to display the instruction function display and the navigation display in parallel, the content of the instruction by the instruction function can be more reliably conveyed to the player.

FIG. 673 is a timing chart illustrating an example of display periods by various indicators. In FIG. 673, the vertical axis shows various display devices, and the horizontal axis shows display periods, such as at what timing in the progress of one game, display or transmission is performed. .

First, each item listed on the vertical axis of FIG. 673 will be explained. The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command, and when the instruction information 801 is ON, it means "send", and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means "standby", and no instruction information command is sent from the main board 409 to the sub board 510.

The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main board 409, and when the instruction function 802 is ON, it means "display", and the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the special display LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of gaming values paid out as a result of the game, and when the payout number 803 is ON, it means "display", and the special display LED 612 displays the number of payout coins. When the number of coins to be paid out 803 is OFF, it means "not displayed", and the special display LED 612 does not display the number of coins to be paid out. Note that the information regarding the number of coins to be paid out is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and program processing, it can be made re-displayable even after a power outage or the like.

Seg error 804 corresponds to displaying the details of the error (for example, type and contents) on the segment LED when an error is detected, and when the segment error 804 is ON, it means "display", and the special display LED 612 Details of the error are notified (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means "non-display", and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612.

The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510, and when the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means "display", and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means "non-display", and no navigation is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. Note that the liquid crystal navigation 805 displays navigation with content that does not contradict the display content in the instruction function 802. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, data related to the display by the sub-board 510, such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805, is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510, and even if a power outage occurs, the data can be read back as appropriate. shall be.

The liquid crystal error 806 corresponds to displaying the details of the error (for example, type and content) on the liquid crystal display when an error is detected.When the liquid crystal error 806 is ON, it means "display"; Details of the error are reported on the liquid crystal screen of the display 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means "non-display", and details of the error are not reported on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. Note that in the case of the liquid crystal error 806, error notification is performed with content that does not contradict the notification in the segment error 804.

The error occurrence 807 indicates the occurrence of an error, but in this figure, it may be interpreted as the main board 409 detecting the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error occurred (an error was detected) at the timing when it turned ON, and when the error occurrence 807 is OFF, it means that no error has occurred (an error was detected). (not). Note that if the error occurrence 807 turns OFF after turning ON, it means that the error has been resolved at the timing when it turns OFF.

Note that the display and transmission of the instruction information 801 to the segment error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

In addition, in FIG. 673 and other drawings, the "first stop button" refers to the reel stop button 211 that is pressed first among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the rotating reels 301a to 301c. It means that. Similarly, the "second stop button" means the reel stop button 211 on which the reel 301 is stopped second, and the "third stop button" means the reel stop button 211 on which the reel 301 is stopped third (i.e. last). This means the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed.

Next, the display period (including the transmission period, etc.) of each display shown in FIG. 673 will be explained. The timing chart in FIG. 673 is shown under a situation where the game is played without any error during AT when the instruction function is executed, and no payout occurs in the game.

In FIG. 673, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed down. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 indicates that the stop operation for all reels 301 ends from the timing when the press operation of the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable (the third stop button is pressed). will be displayed up to. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display starts to be displayed when the reel 301 starts rotating, and the display ends at the same timing as the instruction function display. Note that in the example of FIG. 673, the navigation display starts before the instruction function display starts, but the navigation display is displayed based on the contents of the instruction information command, and the contents of the instruction information command are Since the instruction content is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is still performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

In addition, in the timing chart of FIG. 673, the timing of "start accepting press of stop button" and the timing of turning on the instruction function 802 appear to be the same, but strictly speaking, after starting accepting press of reel stop button 211, , the special display LED 612 does not start displaying the instruction function. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the "display" of the instruction function 802 is performed prior to the timing of the "stop button press reception start", and in the processing on the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. Also, the instruction function display is executed before the timing when the stop button press reception starts. The timings of "start accepting stop button press" and "instruction function display" are the same in other timing charts shown in other examples.

In addition, in FIG. 673, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is set as the timing when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is set as the start timing of the rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-mentioned display (instruction function display and display navigation) is displayed at any timing during the period from when the start lever 210 is pressed to when the reel stop button 211 can be pressed. may be started.

[10-4. Reel stop processing]
When the starting process is completed, the reels that continue to rotate at a constant speed are in a waiting state for an operation (stop operation, that is, a press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) to stop the reels. FIG. 673 shows, as an example, the contents of reel stop processing using the "table method". Below, the flow of processing for reel stop control will be explained.

In the reel stop processing, first in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected in accordance with the condition device activated in response to the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns that correspond one-to-one to all the conditional devices, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition established in step S201, the standby state is maintained until the press operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, check whether the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c have already stopped, or whether the first reel stop flag is not ON (F=0, that is, OFF). At the same time, it is also determined whether any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has been pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c have been pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processing from step S202 onward is repeated.

Here, the order in which the press operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is as described above: "order press", "pinches press", "middle order press", "middle reverse press" In the following explanation regarding FIG. 673, for convenience, the order of these presses will be divided into six types: ``Push'', ``Reverse pinch push'', and ``Reverse push''. It is classified into three types of pressing order. That is, when the first stop reel is the left reel 301a, it is called a "forward push," when it is the middle reel 301b, it is called a "middle push," and when it is the right reel 301c, it is called a "reverse push."

In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a is in a stopped state (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF=0) and whether the press operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. do. In step S201, it is assumed that the left reel stop button 211a is pressed first (first) in accordance with the stop operation procedure of "press in order" from the standby state of the press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. If the determination is satisfied, the process moves to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0). The "first reel" here refers to the reel for which a stop operation is accepted first or the reel that stops first. In this example ("sequential push"), the stop operation for the left reel 301a is accepted first, so the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F=0). Therefore, the determination in step S203 is satisfied, and the process moves to the next step S204.

In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed for the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is controlled based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

In step S206, reel stop control tables for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c are determined. As mentioned above, since the slot machine 1 has only two active lines, the upward-right line and the downward-right line, at this point there is only one stop control table for the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c). can be determined. In other words, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (left reel 301a in this case) (this is called a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol in the upper or lower position can become the winning combination symbol. If the symbol is a certain symbol, select a reel stop control table that allows the corresponding winning combination symbols on the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) to align on the active line based on the corresponding symbol. It turns out.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is turned ON (F=1), and the process moves to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF=1), and the process moves to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON and the middle reel 301b and right reel 301c are still rotating, so this determination is not satisfied and the process returns to step S202 and repeats the subsequent processes. Execute.

Then, when the processing after step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in a stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the process moves to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b is in a stopped state (middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF=0) and whether the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. do. Here, since the stop operation procedure of "push in order" is followed, the press operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination in step S210 is satisfied, and the process moves to the next step S211.

In step S211, similarly to step S203 above, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0). Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F=1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied and the process moves to step S213.

In step S213, as a middle reel stop process, the stop position of the corresponding winning symbol is controlled based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating conditional device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). Execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second reel to stop (second reel), steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process moves to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned ON (MF=1). Then, the process moves to step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only in a stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeated again.

Furthermore, in the third step S202 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF=0) and whether the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c has been accepted. However, the subsequent processes such as steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes after step S210 (steps S211 and S213) described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF=1), and the process moves to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this point, this determination is satisfied and the reel stopping process ends.

Note that the same explanation as above can be given for the "middle push" stop operation procedure, so the details will be omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above explanation, so it will be explained below.

The difference between the "reverse push" stop operation procedure and the "forward push" or "middle press" stop operation procedure described above is step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). be. In other words, in the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is in a stopped state, and if there is any winning combination symbol in the lower position of the stopped positions on the right reel 301c, there are still two valid symbols. It is possible to align the corresponding winning combination symbols on any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables that can align the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line may be prepared, and one of them may be selected.

[10-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control is performed to draw the winning combination symbols (corresponding winning combination symbols) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, at the time when the player's operation to stop the reels is accepted, the range where the reels can be stopped within the symbol display window 401 (the range where the corresponding winning combination symbols can be drawn, for example, 4 symbols) minute) is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination symbol within that range, control is executed to draw it into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reels. The "range that can be retracted" here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the reel rotation direction from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. say. For example, if the retractable range is a maximum of four symbols, when the reel stop operation is accepted, the reels can be rotated up to four symbols further from that position.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning combination symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the retractable range. If there is, it is possible to move the corresponding winning combination symbol into the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the timing of pressing the corresponding winning combination symbol is a little early, if the winning combination symbol is within the pull-in possible range, the player can display the corresponding winning symbol as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of missed winnings (failure to obtain the game benefit corresponding to the winning combination due to failure to match the winning combination symbols).

In the slot machine 1, when a condition device corresponding to a replay winning combination, a common bell that can be pressed in any order, etc. is activated, the corresponding winning winning combination symbols can be arranged without fail without requiring the player to press his or her eyes. This is because the symbols forming the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay role, the bell role, etc., are arranged every four symbols at most. 635). In the reel pull control, when the maximum number of pulls is 4 (4 frames), the symbols placed at a maximum of 4 intervals as described above are always valid regardless of the push timing (press position). It is possible to draw it into the line.

Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are aligned in the middle row when a predetermined replay combination is won, paying attention to the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, there are at most other symbols between the replay symbols and the replay symbol. Four pieces are arranged (see Fig. 635). As a result, on the left reel 301a, no matter where on the reel the stop operation is accepted, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is activated, the replay symbol will always be drawn to one of the active lines and stopped. be able to.

Furthermore, if the result of the internal lottery is a combination of a bonus role and a minor role, the minor role is drawn in preferentially over the bonus symbol. If you win a combination of a bonus role and a minor role, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role is displayed in the winning game, the status of the bonus role will be maintained from the next game onwards, and you will not be able to play the next game. In a game in which a subsequent small winning combination (or replay winning combination) is not established, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is displayed.

The above is an example of the reel stop processing using the table method. Apart from this, there is a reel stop process using a control method, but since known processes can be applied to this as well, a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Further, in this embodiment, the reel stopping process may be performed using either a control method or a table method, and which method is to be adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing a control program.

[10-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop processing is completed, the main board 409 displays whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any active line in the symbol display window 401 (the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed). A judgment is made as to whether or not there are any. In FIG. 675, the content of this determination process will be specifically explained.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, it is determined whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any active line from the appearance of the stop marks in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination). It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed. In addition, especially when all the reels 301 are in a stopped state, a stopped number is called a stopped number.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is being played. This is to determine whether a predetermined game status flag (for example, bonus game in progress flag) is ON or OFF. If the flag during the bonus game is ON, the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process moves to step S302. Further, if the bonus game in progress flag is OFF, the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process moves to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether the symbol combination that has stopped on the active line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination that corresponds to a bonus combination). To explain the determination of symbol combinations using a specific example, if the bonus is BB1 shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is a symbol arrangement of "red 7" on the active line, When such a pattern arrangement is stopped on any diagonal line, it can be determined that the second type BB pattern (bonus pattern) has stopped. In this way, if it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the active line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process regarding the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process ends. do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 676. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process moves to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether the symbol combination that has stopped on the active line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination that corresponds to a replay combination), and if it is determined that it is a replay symbol, a replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, a MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game (MAX bet in this example). Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process in step S305, the replay winning flag is turned off (step S306), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination that has stopped on the active line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), the next determination process is to determine whether the symbol combination is a minor winning symbol (a symbol combination indicating a winning of a minor prize). ) (step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a small role symbol, as a process in step S309, a specified number of medals are paid out according to the small role symbols that are aligned (a specified number of medals are paid out from the medal dispensing device 110). put out). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the number of medals to be paid out display LED 612). As a result, the player is informed (announced, displayed) that a specified number of medals corresponding to the minor winning combination have been paid out. After the process of step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning winning flag is turned OFF (step S310), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a small role symbol (NO in step S308), none of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 described above are satisfied, and no The winning role symbols are also not available. Note that the number rolled at this time is also called a "missing number" (a combination of disparate symbols). In such a case, a loss process is executed (step S311). In the loss processing, if the winning flag that is in the ON state at this point is a winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF. Furthermore, if none of the winning flags is turned on (in this case, the losing flag is turned on), the losing flag is turned off. After the loss process in step S311, the determination process ends.

The processing from step S302 to step S311 described above is the processing executed when the control is in the normal state or the bonus internal state. Next, the processing after step S312 that is performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The process here is a process executed during a bonus game (BB game) controlled to a bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether the symbols paid out during the bonus game are aligned on the active line. The term "symbols paid out during the bonus game" as used herein means a general term for the symbol combinations that pay out medals when aligned during the bonus game. This symbol combination corresponds to a small winning combination for which the payout is specified in the state or internal state, but a special bonus dedicated winning combination may be prepared. When an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a payout process for a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the prepared bonus game payout symbols is executed (step S313). In the medal payout process, a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal dispensing device 110, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is informed (announced, displayed) that a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the payout combination during the bonus game have been paid out.

Following step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process is executed to determine whether or not to end the bonus game (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 677), and then the determination process is ended.

If it is determined in step S312 that the payout symbols during the bonus game have not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is turned OFF (step S315), and the process ends. Possible patterns in which the result in step S312 is NO include a case where the payout combination during the bonus game is won but is lost, and a case where the payout combination during the bonus game is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the establishment flag of the payout combination during the bonus game is turned OFF, and in the latter case, the losing flag is turned OFF. It should be noted that if a special bonus combination that is sure to be won during the bonus game is prepared, and furthermore, when the bonus combination is won, it is possible to win the prize without losing any winnings, the process of step S315 is performed. May be omitted.

The processing in steps S301 to S315 above is the gaming state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110), and thereafter, the ART game determination processing is performed in step S320.

As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an instruction function, so that it performs determination processing regarding the continuation or termination of the ART game, management of the number of games, etc. (ART game determination processing) for each game. There is a need to do. The ART game determination process corresponds to performance processing that affects the generation of instructions, and is therefore executed by the main board 409.

Note that the timing at which the ART game determination process is performed may be any appropriate timing among the determination processes shown in FIG. It is assumed that the ART game determination process of step S320 is performed later. Details of the ART game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 678.

[10-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 of FIG. 675 described above is satisfied, the bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be explained using FIG. 676.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, BB flag) is ON. If the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process moves to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned ON and the bonus flag is turned OFF. Next, in step S406, the total number of coins to be paid out during the bonus game count is cleared. As a result, the total number of coins to be paid out is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game onwards, a bonus game is started with the number of bets equal to the prescribed number for the bonus game (in this example, the prescribed number for the BB game is two).

Further, if the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case occurs when the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF. In other words, this may occur if some illegal means (for example, cheating) is performed or if the slot machine 1 malfunctions. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on and other indicators such as the above-mentioned LED are displayed to notify that an error has occurred.

[10-5-2. Bonus game end determination process]
Next, the bonus game end determination process in step S314 in FIG. 675 described above will be explained using FIG. 677.

First, in step S451, in response to the fact that medals were paid out in step S313 of FIG. 675 described above, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the cumulative number of medals paid out in the bonus game.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether the cumulative number of coins to be paid out exceeds the total number of coins to be paid out (for example, 200 coins) specified for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S454, and the cumulative number of coins paid out during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the paidout number display LED 612, etc.). ).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is turned off (step S460), and the process ends.

[10-5-3. ART game judgment process]
FIG. 678 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of ART game determination processing. As mentioned above in [10-3-3], etc., the ART game is a game that is executed based on winning ART in the ART lottery, and when the ART game is being executed, the small winning combination (in order of pressing) ( If you win the winning combination (press order bell), instruction information such as "appropriate push order" will be displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and an instruction performance (navigation display) in line with the instruction function display will be displayed. It is displayed on the image display body 500 or the like. The ART game determination process is a determination process regarding the start, continuation, end, etc. of such an ART game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) which is the main body controlling the ART. An example of the ART game determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 678.

First, an overview of the ART game will be explained. The ART game is started when the ART game start condition is satisfied, and continues to be executed in the subsequent game period until the ART end condition is satisfied. [10-3-3] As explained in the instruction function processing below, when the ART game start conditions are met, a predetermined internal flag (ART flag) is turned ON and the ART game is started; At the end of the ART game, the ART flag is turned OFF. Note that internal flags related to ART games, such as the ART flag, and information such as the number of ART games, which will be described later, are held in the memory (for example, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 that controls the ART games; Similar information may also be held in memory (eg, RAM 1122).

The conditions for the ART game to start (the conditions for the ART flag to turn ON) are detailed below in [10-3-2], but to put it simply, the ART is won in the ART first winning lottery. That's true.

In step S501 of FIG. 678, as the first process of the ART game determination process, the current ART flag is compared with the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game, and it is determined whether the ART flag is turned ON. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether the ART flag has changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the ART flag has been turned ON (YES in step S501), the number of ART games at the start of ART is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of ART games at the start of ART (so-called initial number of games) may be set in advance as a fixed number of games, the number of games may be drawn at the time of ART winning, or may be determined by other methods. However, as an example, it is assumed here that the initial number of games already determined in the instruction function process described above is set as the number of ART games at the start of ART.

By performing the process of step S502 as described above, the ART game starts from the next game. Note that at the start of the ART game, an effect is performed to clearly show the start of the ART game and the number of ART games to the player (for example, display of an ART start screen).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the ART flag is turned ON, that is, if the ART flag is OFF or the ART flag has been ON since the previous game (NO in step S501), the ART flag is It is determined whether the ART flag is ON (step S505), and if the ART flag is ON (YES at step S505), it is determined whether the ART flag is not in the specialized zone (step S506). Here, if it is determined that the ART flag is ON and it is determined that the specialized zone is not in progress (YES in step S505 and NO in step S506), it means that one of the ART games has been played. A process of subtracting "1" from the value of the number of ART games is performed (step S507). If it is determined in step S506 that the game is in the specialized zone (YES in step S506), the number of ART games is not subtracted, so step S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S508. If it is determined in step S505 that the ART flag is not ON (NO in step S505), the process ends because the ART game is not in progress.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the starting number of games determined at the start of the ART game, there is an additional function that adds the number of ART games based on satisfying a predetermined condition during the ART game. Suppose that we have . When the number of ART games is to be added, a predetermined internal flag (additional flag) is turned on, and the number of ART games to be added (additional number of games) is determined. Note that the conditions under which the addition is determined are not particularly limited, and may be the winning of a specific winning combination in a winning combination lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Furthermore, the method for determining the number of additional games is not limited to any particular method. The following steps S508 to S510 are processes that are performed when the game has a function to add on the number of ART games.

First, in step S508, it is determined whether the add-on flag is ON. If the add-on flag is ON (YES in step S508), the process of adding the number of add-on games to the current number of ART games is performed (step S509), and the add-on flag is turned OFF (step S510). As a result, the number of remaining ART games increases by the additional amount, and the duration of the ART games, which is advantageous to the player, is extended.

After the process in step S510 (if the add-on function is not provided, after the process in step S506), it is determined whether the current number of ART games is "0" (step S511), and if it is "0" Since this satisfies the conditions for ending the ART game, the ART flag is turned OFF (step S512) and the process ends. At this time, in addition to clearly indicating to the player the end of the ART game, information regarding the series of ART games (for example, the total number of medals paid out in the ART game, the number of consecutive ART games, etc.) should also be clearly indicated to the player. You can do it.

If it is determined in step S511 that the current number of ART games is not "0" (NO in step S511), the process ends without changing the ART flag because the ART game termination condition is not satisfied. As a result, the ART game continues in subsequent games.

Note that the ART game determination processing described in FIG. 678 is an example of processing when the game period (ART game period) controlled by the playing state for the ART game is a method in which one count is subtracted for each game. , if the ART game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, a method in which the ART game period is determined by the number of times ART navigation appears), it is desirable to perform appropriate ART game determination processing according to the subtraction method. .

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag indicating the start of an ART game (for example, an ART start flag) may be prepared separately from the ART flag for the ART game determination process. The ART start flag is an internal flag that is turned ON when the ART first winning lottery is won and the ART game start conditions are satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the ART game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the ART start flag is ON, and if the ART start flag is ON, the initial game of ART is determined in step S502. After setting the number, it is sufficient to perform processing such as turning the ART flag ON and turning the ART start flag OFF, and if the ART start flag is OFF in step S501, the processing from step S505 onward is performed. Just do it.

[10-6. Control of production operations]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various performance operations are controlled by the sub board 510 in accordance with the progress of the game. This is executed by the sub-board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118, etc.) based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, a previously prepared presentation mode is selected and executed. Such performance modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as a performance mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of performance modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

For example, the performance mode includes one that is completed only in the game (hereinafter referred to as a single performance mode), and one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous performance mode). Among these, single-shot presentation modes include a presentation that suggests the winning flag (suggestive presentation, notification presentation, details will be described later), presentation that announces the payout of medals (payout presentation, or a form that notifies even the number of medals to be paid out), etc. There is.

Suggestion performance is different from performance that directly informs the player of the winning flag (announcement performance), and refers to a performance that indirectly informs the player of the winning flag.For example, it refers to a performance that indirectly informs the player of the winning flag. This means displaying images expressing colors, etc. Further, the suggestion effect is performed even when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of a loss). In this case, the content is such that it is difficult to notice that the winning combination is a loss (for example, the content is ambiguous so that it can be assumed that any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game is a loss.

For example, if the winning flag is a bonus role or if you win in the ART first winning lottery, the notification effect clearly shows the result of the game to the player, such as "Bonus confirmed!" or "ART won!" It is something that can be informed. This performance is particularly effective when executed for winning combinations that are pleasing to the player (because there is a possibility of winning a large amount of medals) such as bonuses and ART. In other words, when the player wins the ART for the first time, it can be given the meaning of congratulating the player.

Note that the various presentation modes described above can be executed as displaying an image using the image display body 500, generating sound effects using the speaker 512, etc., emitting light or lighting using an LED decoration, etc. Such a presentation mode can make it difficult for the player to feel bored when the player continues playing the game for a long time. Note that the presentation mode is not limited to the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, etc. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. In addition, there are dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed in a different position from each reel and can be started and stopped as part of the performance without depending on the player's operation). Alternatively, lighting such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light such as a revolving light) may be provided to perform various effects. By adopting such a method, it is possible to fully entertain the players without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[10-7. Number of games management process]
By the way, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute a game number management process for managing the number of games by the game number management control means included in the CPU 1110. The number-of-games management control means of the CPU 1110 starts the number-of-games management process (starts the process of counting the number of games) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, and starts the number-of-games management process (starts the process of counting the number of games) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. By ending the number management process (ending the number of games counting process), the number of games played by the player during the number of games management process as a specific section is counted, and the number of games is managed. When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied and the number of games management process ends, the number of games counted in the number of games management process is initialized and returns to zero.

The above-mentioned predetermined starting condition for starting the number of games management process is a transition from the hell state to another state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E). That is, when it is determined that at least one instruction function display is to be performed immediately or after a plurality of games (for example, 32 games) have been played, the game number management process is started. Therefore, the number of games management process will start from the next game in which the special combination is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state.

The above-mentioned predetermined termination condition for ending the number of games management process is that the number of games counted during the number of games management process is set to a predetermined threshold (in this example, it is set to 1500 games as described above). ) has been reached and the instruction function display has been performed at least once (first condition), and even if the number of games counted during the number of games management process has not reached the predetermined threshold, the instruction function display may not be performed. The game state related to the execution shifts from an advantageous state to a hellish state (second condition). When either one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the number of games management process ends. For example, if the ceiling game is completed without winning the ART first lottery, even if the number of games counted during the game number management process has not reached the predetermined threshold, the instruction function display cannot be executed. The related game state changes from an advantageous state to a hellish state. When any one of the above two conditions is satisfied in the number of games management process, the number of games management process ends. Here, the transition of the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display from the advantageous state to the hell state may be performed immediately after the ART game ends, or after the withdrawal state after the ART game ends. You may also move to

Note that in this embodiment, the instruction function display is always performed at least once during the game number management process, but this is not essential. That is, the first condition described above may be that the number of games counted during the number of games management process reaches a predetermined threshold (the first condition may be that the number of games counted during the number of games management process reaches a predetermined threshold value). (can be excluded from the conditions).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when comparing the start condition for starting the number of games management process and the condition for ending the number of games management process, the starting condition for starting the number of games management process is higher. It is configured to be. Therefore, when comparing the period when the number of games management flag is set to ON and the period when the number of games management process is set to OFF, the period when the number of games management flag is set to ON is longer. ing. However, the period during which the number of games management flag is set to ON must not exceed 70% of the total period (the sum of the period during which the number of games management flag is set to ON and the period when it is set to OFF). It has become. Note that the period in which the number of games management flag is set to ON is the period in which it is controlled to one of the advantageous states A to E and the pullback state, and in this example, the threshold of 1500 games is reached in one shot. Maximum. Furthermore, the period in which the number of games management process is set to OFF is the period in which the control is in a hellish state. In this hellish state, the execution of the ART game is not confirmed (in other words, the operation of the instruction function display is not permitted, and the conditional devices described above are grouped), but the ART The winning probability in the first lottery (probability of being determined as YES in step S6011) is 1/20, and it is configured such that winning can be achieved by playing fewer games than the 32 games set as the ceiling number of games. There is. As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest while suppressing the gambling nature.

Further, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 has an ART game forced termination means, and even if the ART game is in progress, the CPU 1110 of the present slot machine 1 has an ART game forced termination means that is used to control the number of games (games) counted in the number of games management process even if the ART game is in progress. Based on the fact that the number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold, the ART game is immediately forcibly terminated. However, if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold. , the hell state will not be entered until the instruction function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold during the ART game, as long as there is no bonus game execution history during the game number management process, The ART game continues until the instruction function display is executed once. Conversely, if there is a history of execution of bonus games during the game management process, even if the instruction function display has not been executed even once during the game management process, the game count will not be counted in the game management process. When the number of games played (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold, the game enters a hell state, so if an ART game is in progress, the ART game will be forcibly terminated.

Furthermore, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 also has an instruction function display execution right extinguishing means. This instruction function display execution right extinguishing means is configured to extinguish the number of games (the number of games When the counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, a process is executed to eliminate the granted right to execute the instruction function display. However, even in this case, if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value. Even if it does, the transition to the hell state will not occur until the instruction function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold, the instruction function display will be 1 unless there is a history of bonus game execution during the game number management process. The granted right to execute the instruction function display is maintained without extinguishing until it is executed twice. Conversely, if there is a history of execution of bonus games during the game management process, even if the instruction function display has not been executed even once during the game management process, the game count will not be counted in the game management process. When the number of games played (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold, the game enters the hell state, so even if the right to execute the instruction function display has been granted, the right to execute the instruction function display will disappear. Become. Note that the right to execute the instruction function display corresponds to the right to execute an ART game in which the instruction function can operate continuously over a plurality of games, or the right to activate the instruction function display only once (one game). In addition, the state in which the right to execute the instruction function display is granted is during the precursor game (while the ceiling game is being played), or in the preparation state (the ceiling game has been played and the instruction function flag is set to ON, but the RT state is not active). RT1 state) corresponds to this state.

In the game after the ART game is forcibly terminated in this manner, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is controlled to a hellish state. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated, the RT state remains at RT2 or RT3, and shifts to RT1 based on the appearance of a zero bell zero. In this way, by forcibly ending the ART game based on the number of games counted in the game number management process reaching a predetermined threshold, the number of game media as prizes can be reduced in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the accidental occurrence of a situation in which a large amount of money is given, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress unnecessarily arousing the desire for gambling.

Note that even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold while the bonus game is being executed, the bonus game will not end midway and will be executed to the end. Ru.

In addition, if the bonus game is executed by winning BB in the hell state described above, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display during this bonus game will remain controlled to the hell state unless the special winning combination is won. There is even. If you are in this hell state and win a special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance rep) during the bonus game, the transition destination is any one of advantageous states A to D. For example, the game number management flag is set to ON, the game number counter GC starts counting, and the hell state is transferred to the destination advantageous state. However, if the transition destination is advantageous state E, the game number management flag is set to ON and the game number counter GC starts counting, but in the ART game, after the bonus game ends, the RT state changes from RT1 to RT2. It will start when it is migrated. Note that a lottery related to the execution of the instruction function display (ART first winning lottery, etc.) may not be performed during the bonus game or inside the bonus. For example, even if a special winning combination is selected in an internal lottery, the lottery for determining the transfer destination in step S6012 may not be performed, or the determination whether it is a special winning combination in step S6011 may not be performed. (i.e., the same as when a normal hand is selected). However, in the game in which the bonus combinations (BB1, BB2) are selected in the internal lottery, a lottery related to the execution of the instruction function display (ART first winning lottery, etc.) may be performed.

[10-8. Overall game flow]
The overall flow of the game in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 679. FIG. 679 is a time chart showing an example of the overall game flow. In order to explain the overall flow of the game, each control state in the slot machine 1 of this example will be explained first.

First, when viewed from the perspective of the RT state, the slot machine 1 of this example has a general state that is controlled after the end of the bonus game, an RT1 that is controlled when a 0-bell zero number appears, and a raised replay 1 in RT1. RT2, which is controlled when a symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay 2 appears or a symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay appears in RT2, RT3, BB1, which is controlled when the symbol combination corresponding to the higher replay 2 appears in RT2 Or the bonus internal state that is controlled when BB2 is won but the corresponding symbol combination has not appeared, or the bonus state that is controlled when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 has appeared and the bonus game is being executed. In other words, it is controlled by the RT state control means.

Also, from the perspective of the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display, there is a hell state where the execution of the instruction function display has not yet been determined, and an advantageous state where it is determined that the instruction function display will be executed at least once. One of the states A to E and the pullback state is controlled by the instruction function control means. As mentioned above, the advantageous states include advantageous states E in which the instruction function display is controlled by an ART game in which the instruction function display can operate continuously over multiple games, as well as advantageous states E in which the degree of expectation for transition to the advantageous state E is different. States A to D and a pullback state are prepared.

Further, the instruction function control means sets the instruction function flag to either an ON state in which operation of the instruction function is permitted, or an OFF state in which operation of the instruction function is not permitted. The operation of the instruction function by the instruction function control means is not permitted unless the ceiling number of games is exhausted even if the ART first winning lottery is won, and is permitted (ON) based on the ceiling number of games being exhausted. When the game ends, the permission is canceled (OFF).

Further, the number of games management control means sets the number of games management flag to an ON state where the number of games management control is performed (the number of games played by the player is counted) and an ON state where the number of games management control is not performed (the number of games played by the player is counted). OFF state (in which the number of games played by the player is not counted). The number of games management control by the number of games management control means is not executed in the hell state (OFF), but is executed based on the transition from the hell state to one of advantageous states A to E (advantageous states A to E) (ON). .

Furthermore, when viewed from the perspective of the game state that the player can grasp (hereinafter referred to as the "appearance state"), the general game state in which the number of ceiling games is not set and the execution of the instruction function display is not determined; A precursor game state in which execution of the instruction function display is confirmed and the number of ceiling games is set, a single instruction state in which the instruction function display is performed only once, and the instruction function flag is set to ON when the number of ceiling games is exhausted. (a state in which the ART game is ready to be executed, that is, a state in which the ART game can be executed when a symbol combination corresponding to Up Replay 2 appears), a symbol combination corresponding to Up Replay 2 appears, and the ART The player can understand that the player is in either the ART state where the game is in progress or the pull-back state after the ART game has ended (pull-back state).

The instruction function is allowed to operate in the above-mentioned preparation state and ART state, but is not allowed to operate in the general game state, precursor game state, or pullback state. However, in the case of a precursor game state or CZ state (advantageous states A and D in this embodiment), the state (predictor game state or CZ state) is played for a predetermined number of games (32 games in advantageous state A, and 32 games in advantageous state D). 10 games), but the instructions are not limited to this, and when the predetermined number of games have been played, an internal lottery will be held to select "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6". If any one of them is selected, the pressing order may be instructed, and when the predetermined number of games is played, the state will immediately shift to the hell state.

The number of games management control is not executed in the normal game state, but is started based on the selection of a special winning combination in the internal lottery (that is, the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state). Additionally, if it is determined that the number of games played by the player exceeds a predetermined threshold during the number of games management process (number of games management flag is ON), the instruction function display will indicate that the number of games played by the player has been executed more than once. Under the conditions (excluding when a bonus game is executed), the game number management flag is set to OFF.

Next, the overall flow of the game will be explained. When the RT state is RT1 and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state, the appearance state is the normal state. Note that in the normal state, both the instruction function flag and the game number management flag are OFF. Then, when a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is selected in an internal lottery in the hell state and transferred to one of advantageous states A to E, the number of games is managed. The flag is set ON. As a result, the appearance state is transferred from the general game state to the precursor game state (when transitioning to advantageous states A to C), CZ (when transitioning to advantageous state D), or ART game (when transitioning to advantageous state E).

In the precursor game state, the number of ceiling games is set and the instruction function flag is set to OFF. Then, when the ceiling number of games is exhausted, the instruction function flag is set to ON. In FIG. 679, the control is first made to the advantageous state A, and after the instruction function display is executed only once, the state is shifted to the hell state, and the game number management flag is set to OFF.

After that, when a special combination is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state and transferred to one of the advantageous states A to E, the number of games management flag is set to ON, and the appearance state changes to the normal game. state to the precursor game state. FIG. 679 shows a state in which the state is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state B.

When the ceiling game is completed in the advantageous state B, the appearance state shifts from the precursor game state to the preparation state, and the instruction function flag is set to ON. Then, when "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to up replay 1 is displayed by the player's stop operation based on the instruction function display, the RT state is reached. is transferred from RT1 to RT2, and the first ART game shown in FIG. 679 is started (the ART state is entered). When the ceiling game is completed in the advantageous state B and the precursor game state is shifted to the preparation state, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state B to the advantageous state E.

Note that during the ART game (in the ART state), the instruction function flag is set to ON, so even if "lower reply + normal maintenance reply" is selected in the internal lottery, the player will receive the instruction based on the instruction function display. As long as the player performs a stop operation, the RT state will be maintained at RT2, but if the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay is displayed due to the stop operation contrary to the instruction function display, the RT state will remain at RT2 with the instruction function maintained. It will be transferred from RT2 to RT1. However, if "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery and the stop operation is performed based on the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to up replay 1 will be displayed and the RT state will be displayed. returns from RT1 to RT2.

In addition, even if the instruction function flag is OFF, when "Up Rip 1 + Normal Maintenance Rip" is selected in the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to Up Rip 1 is selected by the player's stop operation. May appear accidentally. In this case, the RT state is transferred from RT1 to RT2, but the ART game is not started because the ceiling number of games has not been exhausted. Then, when the zero bell is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to R1.

When the first ART game shown in FIG. 679 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state E to the pullback state. The RT state is maintained at RT2 unless the 0th bell zero is displayed, but when the 0th bell zero is displayed, it shifts from RT2 to RT1.

The pull-back state ends when you lose the maintenance lottery, and along with this, on the condition that the instruction function display has been executed at least once (excluding when a bonus game has been executed), the execution of the instruction function display is terminated. The related game state is changed from a pullback state to a hell state. However, when the number of games counted by the game number management control means reaches the threshold value during the pullback state, if the instruction function display has been executed at least once, the game number management flag is set to OFF, and the instruction function display The game state related to the execution of is shifted from the pullback state to the hell state.

In this example, when the first ART game ends, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold, and FIG. 679 shows the state when the ART first winning lottery is won in the pullback state. It is shown. When the ART first winning lottery is won in the pullback state, the instruction function flag is set to ON, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E, and the second ART game shown in FIG. 679 is started. Ru. At this time, if the RT state has been shifted to RT1, the ART game is started upon the shift from RT1 to RT2, but if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game is started immediately. However, in this case, even if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game may be started after several games have been executed. Then, when the second ART game shown in FIG. 679 ends, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state E to the pullback state.

In this example, when the second ART game ends, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold, and in FIG. 679, in the pullback state, BB1 is selected by internal lottery. The current state is shown. When BB1 is selected in the internal lottery, the RT state until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed becomes the bonus internal state, and when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed, it becomes the bonus state, and the CPU 1110 has A bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means.

In addition, regardless of whether the bonus game is executed or not, if you fail the maintenance lottery without winning the ART first winning lottery in the withdrawal state, the withdrawal state ends, the state returns to the general game state, and the instruction function display cannot be executed. The related game state is changed from the pullback state to the hell state, and the game number management flag is set to OFF. Further, even if the bonus game is being executed, if the game number management flag is set to OFF, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

In FIG. 679, during the bonus state (during execution of the bonus game), it is determined that the ART first winning lottery is won and the transition to, for example, advantageous state B is made, and a ceiling game of 32 games is set, and the precursor game state is entered. The current state is shown. At this time, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is changed from the hell state to the advantageous state, and the game number management flag is set to ON. Then, when the bonus game ends, the RT state shifts from the bonus state to the general state (RT0), and when the zero bell zero is displayed in the normal state, the RT state shifts from the normal state (RT0) to RT1. be done.

In FIG. 679, since the ceiling game has not been played when the bonus game ends, the precursor game state continues. Then, when the 0 bell zero is displayed, the RT state is transferred from the general state (RT0) to RT1, and when the ceiling game is completed and the instruction function flag is set to ON, the appearance state is the precursor game state. will be moved to the ready state.

After that, when "up replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected in the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to up replay 1 is displayed, the RT state is transferred from RT1 to RT2 and as shown in FIG. 679. The third ART game is started and the game enters the ART state, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E.

During the third ART game, when the number of games counted during the game management process (i.e., the number of games played by the player after the game management flag was set to ON) reaches the threshold, the game The number management flag is set to OFF, and the game number management process ends. When the number of games management process is completed, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the ART game being executed is forcibly terminated. At this time, the ART game is forcibly ended midway even if the specified number of games has not been played. When the ART game is forcibly terminated in this way, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state, and the external state becomes the normal game state.

Note that even if the number of games counted during the number of games management process (i.e., the number of games played by the player after the number of games management flag was set to ON) reaches the threshold, the number of games management process will continue. If the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game, transition to the hell state is avoided until the instruction function display is executed at least once, and if the ART game is in progress, the ART game continues, The instruction function flag is also maintained in the ON state. When the instruction function display is performed once, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process ends, and the instruction function flag is also set to OFF and the currently running ART game is forcibly changed. The game is terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

However, if even one bonus game is executed during the number of games management process, even if the instruction function is not displayed even once during the number of games management process, When the number of games counted (i.e., the number of games played by the player after the number of games management flag was set to ON) reaches the threshold, the number of games management flag is set to OFF and the corresponding number of games management process is executed. At the same time as the instruction function flag is set to OFF, the ART game being executed is forcibly terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 679, if the ART first winning lottery is won during the execution of a bonus game (bonus state) and the state is shifted to an advantageous state, the number of games counted during the number of games management process When reaches the threshold, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process ends, even if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process, and the instruction function flag is set to OFF. is set to OFF, the ART game being executed is forcibly terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

Furthermore, even if the ART game is forcibly terminated, the RT state will remain at RT2 unless the 0 bell zero number is displayed, and will change to RT1 based on the 0 bell zero number being displayed. will be migrated. In FIG. 679, even after the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state, it is controlled to RT2 for a while, and then it is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

Then, when a special combination is selected in the internal lottery in the hell state and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the hell state to one of the advantageous states A to E (in FIG. 679, (A state in which the state has been shifted to an advantageous state C is shown), the number-of-games management flag is set to ON, and the number-of-games management process is started. Then, when the game is shifted to an advantageous state in which the number of portent games is set, the appearance state changes from the normal game state to the portent game state.

Although FIG. 679 does not show how the RT state is transferred from RT2 to RT3, the special zone lottery is won (YES in step S606), and the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 2 is on the active line. When displayed, the RT status is transferred from RT2 to RT3, and the special zone status is entered.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of this example, when the state is shifted to the advantageous state D, the state is shifted to the chance zone (CZ). However, in FIG. 679, since the mode of shifting to the advantageous state D is not explained, In the status column, illustration of the chance zone (CZ) is omitted.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, there is a period in which the number of games management flag is set to ON (a period in which the control is in an advantageous state) and a period in which the number of games management flag is set to OFF (a period in which the control is in an advantageous state). Compared to the period when the number of games management flag is set to ON), the number of games is set to be higher during the period when the number of games management flag is set to ON, and the number of games management flag is set to ON during the entire period. The period of stay is set not to exceed 70%. In the hell state, which is the period when the number of games management flag is set to OFF, the instruction function display is not executed, but the probability that a special combination is selected in the internal lottery is lower than 32 games, which is set as the ceiling number of games. The system is structured so that a special winning combination can be selected by playing a game with a small number of games. Moreover, even if the destination when the special winning combination is selected is not advantageous state B or advantageous state E, if the destination is advantageous state C or advantageous state D, the expectation of the ART game will be increased to the player. can give. Therefore, when the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value G, the game number management process is terminated and the transition is made to the hell state, but in the hell state, the advantageous state A Since the expectation that the ART game will be executed is higher than that of the ART game, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in interest while suppressing the gambling nature.

[10-9. Processing when abnormal condition occurs]
The processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during a game, an error notification is made depending on the type of error detected. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 lights up (or flashes), and the special display LED 612 can display an error display indicating the type of error. Note that the special display LED 612 normally displays the instruction function and the number of coins to be paid out. Further, although there are cases where no error is detected, a sudden power cut-off is also included in the abnormal state.

When an abnormal state as described above occurs, it is necessary to clear the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of a power outage, it is sufficient as long as the error display does not remain after the power is restored). The method of clearing the error varies depending on the error that has occurred, but often requires turning off the power (OFF/ON).

[10-9-1. RAM clear]
Here, clearing of data values in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 (RAM clear) will be explained.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when specific operations such as changing settings or turning the power OFF/ON, data values held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 are erased or initialized within the address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) is performed to rewrite the data to a value. Therefore, even when error cancellation processing is performed, there is a possibility that part of the data held in the RAM 1114 will be cleared if the power is turned off and on.

However, if an error cancellation process is performed while the instruction function is being displayed, or a power outage occurs while the medals are being paid out, the data used to display the instruction function and the number of coins to be paid out will be cleared by clearing the RAM. , it is assumed that there will be cases where the continuation of the game will be hindered. In the slot machine 1, in view of such problems, the target range of RAM clearing in the RAM 1114 is determined in advance.

FIG. 680 is a diagram for explaining data blocks of RAM. FIG. 680 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, with the top end being the starting end of the memory address and the bottom end being the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area where no data is read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is gathered at the end of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 680, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of "areas" are predetermined according to the type of data to be stored. Furthermore, five types of ranges for RAM clearing are defined: "clear range 0" to "clear range 4". Note that each clear range may include the unused area 1114z.

First, the clearing range of RAM clearing will be explained. "Clear range 0" means a target range equivalent to complete erasure, which is basically never performed. That is, RAM clearing in the clearing range 0 is not performed during normal maintenance or error processing. From another perspective, data values in the setting value data area 1114a are never cleared except when RAM clear is performed in the clear range 0. This means that the setting value data area 1114a is basically not cleared.

"Clear range 1" means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the time of starting a setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

"Clear range 2" means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, the data areas below the lamp ON data area 1114d are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

"Clear range 3" means the target range in which the RAM is cleared at the end of the bonus. Clearing the RAM from clear range 0 to clear range 2 requires work by a hall clerk, etc. to trigger each RAM clear, but clearing the RAM at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the bonus ends. is executed. Specifically, when clearing the RAM at the end of the bonus, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 1114i is not cleared.

Note that "clear range 3" is also a target range in which RAM is cleared when the power is simply turned OFF/ON. That is, when the power is turned off and on without changing the settings or performing a reset operation, the data area that is the target range in "clear range 3" is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the "clear range 3", the instruction contents of the instruction function are not erased by turning the power OFF/ON.

"Clear range 4" means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the start of every game. RAM clearing at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, in an internal process when the starting lever 210 is operated with the number of medals to be bet determined. Specifically, when clearing the RAM at the start of every game, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. Timer area 1114k is not cleared.

Next, each data area shown in FIG. 680 will be briefly explained. Setting values set in the slot machine 1 are stored in the setting value data area 1114a.

The door flag area 1114b stores information indicating the open/closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening/closing member 90), and the door monitoring timer area 1114c stores information indicating the open/closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening/closing member 90). Stores time information to recognize that it is open.

The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information regarding the lighting of lamps (for example, indicators disposed on the display panel 501, such as the replay lamp 606 and the start lamp 608). Information indicating the number of credits (number of stored medals) is stored in the number of credits area 1114e. Information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613 is stored in the credit display area 1114f. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the payout number (number of medals paid out), which is how many gaming values were paid out in the game. The payout display area 1114h stores information for displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the special display LED 612. The instruction function display area 1114i stores information corresponding to the contents of an instruction by the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612.

The replay input number area 1114j stores the number of gaming values to be input during the replay operation (the number of medals inserted during the replay). The interrupt check timer area 1114k stores timer information necessary for executing interrupt processing.

Information indicating the error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. The medal payout number area 1114m stores the payout number of gaming values to be paid out as a result of the game. The inputtable coin number area 1114n stores information indicating whether or not it is possible to input gaming value. The number of inserted medals area 1114o stores the number of gaming values inserted before the start of the game. The random number storage area 1114p stores random numbers used in the condition device.

In this way, in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, by setting the range in which the RAM is cleared for each of various actions (such as when changing settings or turning the power OFF/ON), efficient memory control can be expected.

Note that the range (capacity) of the RAM 1114 that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the gaming machine is defined, and data such as programs must be stored within the defined range. However, in recent years, for processing related to test signals and processing related to fraud, data related to the program for the processing is stored in an unused area outside the above defined range (for example, unused area 1114z in FIG. 680). is allowed. However, the use of such unused areas is limited to gaming machines that have an instruction function.

In addition, in the slot machine 1, after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510) determines whether or not to redisplay the data that was displayed before the RAM was cleared. ) can be determined for each type of data. That is, when the CPU 1110 (or CPU 1118) returns from a power failure, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may refer to the data stored in the data area that was not cleared in the RAM and redisplay the data as much as possible, or may display specific data (for example, , data related to the display of the number of coins to be paid out, data related to the navigation display, etc.) may theoretically be redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed under program control. Note that this includes referencing the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114.

[10-9-2. error indication]
Next, error display on the special display LED 612 will be explained. FIG. 681 is a diagram for explaining error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the "Notification type" column in FIG. By displaying a predetermined segment such as this, the type of detected error is notified in an identifiable manner. Among the errors shown in the "Notification type" column of FIG. 681, for each error other than "communication abnormality (at the time of series code error)" detected by the sub-board 510, the detection signal of each error is the main one at the time of occurrence. The board 409 is notified. Note that the errors shown in FIG. 681 are some of the errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and in addition to the errors shown, there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub board 510.

Below, an overview of each error shown in the "Notification Type" column of FIG. 681 will be explained.

"RAM error" is an error notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, "communication abnormality (when series code error)" is detected when there is an abnormality in the series code sent from the main board 409 to the sub board 510, but since it is detected by the sub board 510, a special display is displayed. No error is displayed on the LED 612.

"Changing settings" or "Checking settings" is not an error, but is shown in FIG. 681 because "setting value" is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the work. Setting values for the slot machine 1 are stored in a setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. Note that the notification timing for "Settings changing" is the time when a predetermined setting change operation starts, and the notification timing for "Settings confirmation in progress" is the start time for a predetermined settings confirmation operation.

"Unauthorized payout error" is an error that is notified when there is an abnormal payout. Specifically, when medals are not paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of a driving means (not shown) included in the medal dispensing device 110, a payout count switch (not shown) is a switch for counting the number of medals paid out, for example. (provided in the medal discharging device 110) is detected when the medal discharging device 110 is turned on. In addition, in FIG. 681, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is "when the main game is not stopped" or "when the main game is stopped". Detection when the main game is not stopped has a higher priority. However, no matter which timing it is detected, the same "HF" is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612.

"Inserted medal passing time 1 error", "Inserted medal passing time 2 error", "Medal passing order 1 error", "Medal passing order 2 error", "Medal passing interval time error", and "Inserted medal backward error" This is an error that is notified when there is an abnormality in the process from when medals are inserted through the medal slot 203 until they reach the hopper 1110b. The abnormalities mentioned here include not only abnormalities related to the passage of medals, but also abnormalities caused by the insertion of foreign objects other than medals.

In the slot machine 1, when the passage of the medals inserted through the medal slot 203 is detected by the input sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state), the medals are then passed through the lever sensor, selector sensor, and chute sensor. It reaches the hopper 110b while being detected as passing through. The lever sensor, selector sensor, and chute sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and each detects passage of a medal at a predetermined position (not shown). In addition, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the input sensor 207b is locked out, so even if the medal is input from the medal input slot 203, the medal passes through the medal selector 207 and the return gutter 213. It is returned to the storage tray 201. When the medal whose passing was detected by the input sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (regular medal passing sequence), the main board 409 determines whether or not the medal has been detected by each sensor, based on the detection time, etc. Detect each error listed above.

Provide an overview of each error. The "inserted medal passing time 1 error" is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign objects other than medals) remain near the inserted sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the inserted sensor 207b is It is detected when it continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms). "Introduced medal passing time 2 error" is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign objects other than medals) remain near the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor takes a predetermined time. (for example, 500ms) is detected. Note that the detection target period for the "inserted medal passing time 2 error" is always set, but the notification timing of the error is set at the start of medal acceptance (or at the end of the game, such as after the completion of the payout process).

The "medal passing order 1 error" is an error that is notified when the selector sensor detects a medal even though the lever sensor has not detected a medal (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when the lever sensor does not detect a medal during a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the selector sensor detects passing of the medal. The "medal passing order 2 error" is an error that is notified when the shoot sensor does not detect a medal after the selector sensor detects a medal. More specifically, the error is detected when the shoot sensor does not detect a medal during a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the selector sensor detects passage of the medal.

"Medal passing interval time error" is an error that is notified when medals pass in a manner that is not expected under normal conditions. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, some object is detected at a passing interval shorter than the shortest medal passing interval assumed under normal conditions (i.e., the passing interval when medals are continuously inserted). The error is detected when the situation of passing is detected a predetermined frequency (for example, five times in a row).

The "inserted medal retrograde error" is an error that is notified when a medal moves along a route other than the prescribed medal passing sequence, and in particular, when a backward movement is detected. Specifically, the medals are detected based on the order of medal detection by each sensor provided in the medal selector 207 (throwing sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, chute sensor, etc.).

Further, the "dispensing medal jam error", "dispensing medal empty error", and "auxiliary storage full error" are errors that are notified when there is an abnormality regarding medal dispensing or storage. To give an overview of each error, first, a "dispensing medal jam error" is an error that is notified when medals become jammed while dispensing medals from the hopper 110b. Specifically, the error is detected when the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or more. Furthermore, the "putout medal empty error" is an error that is notified when the medals in the hopper 110b become empty. Specifically, when the medals from the hopper 110b are not normally paid out and a retry of the payout (payout retry) is performed, if the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) or more after the payout retry. If not, the error will be detected. The "auxiliary storage box full error" is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, when the medal full sensor 111a of the auxiliary medal storage box 111 detects that more medals are stored than a predetermined standard, the error is detected.

The "priority" column in FIG. 681 indicates the priority level of notification among errors. In this example, the above priority means the priority when multiple errors are detected at the same time, and even if an error with a higher priority than the error is detected after one error is detected. , the displayed content is not changed. However, the priority of error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to display of an error detected later with a higher priority. Further, in the "SEG" column, a display example on the special display LED 612 is shown. In any case, in the slot machine 1, if a plurality of errors are detected, the game cannot be restarted (play the next game) unless those errors are cleared.

Further, in the "Notification Method" column, when "Video" is marked "O", for example, an image notifying the error is displayed on the image display body 500. However, the "video" notification image is required to have a display content that is no different from the error display on the special display LED 612. When the "sound" is "○", a notification sound is output from the speaker 512, for example. When the "lamp" is "o", for example, the error lamp 604 lights up or blinks. In addition, when notifying by sound output, lamp output, etc., the notification mode may be changed depending on the priority of the detected error. For example, if an error with a high priority is detected, an error with a low priority may be changed. The notification mode may be such that it is emphasized in comparison.

Further, the "Reset Cancellation" column indicates whether the error can be canceled by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. When an error that can be canceled by reset is canceled by reset, the data area of "clear range 2" (see FIG. 680) of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared.

Furthermore, when "immediately" is written in the "responsiveness" column, it means that the error can be detected on the main board 409 side while the slot machine 1 is in operation. For example, when an unauthorized payout error is detected, the main board 409 immediately issues a command notifying the detection. In other words, even if "immediately" is written, the error does not necessarily have to be displayed immediately upon detection of the error. For example, after the game result is obtained (after the payout process is finished, or (before the start of the process), an error may be displayed. Note that the illegal payout error is a highly urgent error that means that the gaming value is being paid out illegally.

[10-9-3. Processing when an error occurs]
In the following, a process to be performed when the error described in the previous chapter occurs during a game in the slot machine 1 (process when an error occurs) will be described. The specific details of the process when an error occurs differs depending on what kind of requirement definition the slot machine 1 has regarding errors. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 is equipped with a requirement definition (first requirement definition) regarding errors as shown below, and details of the processing performed when an error occurs in such a case will be described.
(1) Multiple errors are not grouped based on importance (for example, strong errors and weak errors).
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the instruction function display continues to be displayed.

682 and 683 are flowcharts (Part 1 and Part 2) for explaining the processing when an error occurs in this embodiment. 682 and 683 are combined into one flowchart, and this flowchart shows the overall processing procedure for one game based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 644, and further details the processing performed when an error occurs. It shows. Note that FIGS. 682 and 683 show an example of a processing procedure when the game progresses in the absence of power interruption (that is, in a state in which the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 684, which will be described later, is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing procedure of the power failure recovery process in this embodiment. In FIG. 684, the processing procedure is also applied when the power is turned OFF/ON in the processing of FIGS. 682 and 683.

[10-9-3-1. Processing when an error occurs (when there is no power outage)]
With reference to FIGS. 682 and 683, the processing procedure for one game (when there is no power outage) including processing when an error occurs will be described. Note that since the overall process flow overlaps with the series of processes shown in FIG. 644, detailed explanations of already explained processes will be omitted. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, each process in FIGS. 682 and 683 is executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). Furthermore, in order to make it easier to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with the "status of gaming machine" shown in FIG. 674 is also shown.

First, in FIG. 682, after a prescribed number of gaming values (specifically, medals) have been inserted as described in the BET process of FIG. 644, the game starts when the player presses the start lever 210. The process is started (step S801). Such a flow of the game corresponds to the process from "inserting medals" to "pressing the start lever" shown in FIG. 674.

When the start lever 210 is pressed to start the game, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device that is allowed to operate is acquired based on the winning combination (step S803).

Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not this is a section in which the special display LED 612 can display an instruction function. Here, the section in which the instruction function can be displayed means a game (for example, during an ART game) in which the instruction function can be displayed using the instruction function. Up to now, it has been mainly explained that the instruction function display is performed during the ART game, but in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the instruction function display is performed during a specific game period other than the ART game (for example, when the ART It is also possible to display an instruction function even in a chance zone (CZ), etc., where it is easy to do so. In such a case, an affirmative determination is obtained in step S804 even for games other than ART games.

If it is determined in step S804 that the section is in which the instruction function can be displayed (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 will issue an instruction using the instruction function) (YES in step S804), in step S803 Based on the acquired conditional device, the content of the instruction by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

After that, rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to "start of reel rotation" shown in FIG. 674. Then, by transmitting an instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 and the like to perform navigation display at a predetermined display timing regarding navigation display based on the received instruction information command. Note that in the slot machine 1, the instruction information command in step S808 may be transmitted at a timing before the start of rotation of the reels 301 (step S807).

Thereafter, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the instruction function display are as shown in FIGS. 671 and 672. Furthermore, the predetermined display timings for the "navigation display" and "instruction function display" are as described above with reference to FIG. 674. After the instruction function is displayed in step S809, in step S810, reception of pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that the section is not one in which the instruction function display is possible (specifically, if it is not determined that the main board 409 issues an instruction using the instruction function), (NO in step S804) , the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S811), and the reception of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started without the processing related to the instruction function shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809 being performed (step S811). Step S812).

Steps S810 and S812 correspond to "reel stop button press accepted" shown in FIG. 674. After the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process advances to step S813.

In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation was performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to "pressing the first stop button" shown in FIG. 674.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between pressing the first stop button in step S813 and pressing the second stop button thereafter (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), processing in step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process in step S819 is performed. In FIG. 683, if an error is detected in step S814, the process in step S819 is shown to be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining rotating reels 301. The process of step S819 may be performed after the reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301. This also applies to step S816. The processing after such error detection may have different priorities (importance) depending on the type of error, and the processing may be used differently based on the priority. For example, an error such as "HF (unauthorized payout error)" that is unlikely to occur under normal gaming conditions should be set as a high priority error. If such a high-priority error is detected, it is better to perform the process of step S819 without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining rotating reels 301. preferable.

In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (the second stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation was performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to "pressing the second stop button" shown in FIG. 674.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between pressing the second stop button in step S815 and pressing the third stop button subsequently (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), processing in step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process in step S819 is performed without waiting for the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining rotating reels 301 to be stopped.

In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (the third stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation was performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to "pressing the third stop button" shown in FIG. 674.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether an error has been detected during a predetermined period of time after the third stop button is pressed in step S817 (for example, until all reels 301 stop). (Step S818). Thereafter, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of whether or not an error is detected in step S818.

In step S819, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is ended. However, if it is determined in step S804 that the section is not one in which the instruction function display is possible (NO in step S804), the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, so special processing is required in step S819. There isn't.

After that, in step S820, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) stop, and winnings can be determined based on the symbol combinations that have stopped on the active line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to "stop all reels" shown in FIG. 674.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 683, the processing in steps S819 and S820 is performed regardless of whether or not an error has been detected during the game up to that point, but the subsequent processing is performed depending on whether or not it is determined that an error has been detected. It depends. Specifically, if no error has been detected during the game up to that point, the process from step S821 is performed, and if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the process from step S825 is performed. will be held.

First, as a normal process in which no error has been detected during the game up to that point, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the gaming value has been paid out. In the payout of gaming value, when it is confirmed that the winning combination has stopped based on the symbol combination that has stopped on the active line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error has been detected, so the game ends. If it is determined in step S821 that there is a payout (YES in step S821), the special display LED 612 starts displaying the number of coins to be paid out (step S822), and the game value (medals) is paid out (step S823). . After that, since no error has been detected, the game is ended.

On the other hand, as a process when an error has been detected during the previous game, first, it is determined whether or not the game value has been paid out (step S824).

The process in step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821), and steps S822 (displaying the number of coins to be paid out) and S823 are performed when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824). (Payout processing) processing is also the same.

However, if an error has been detected during the previous game, steps S826 and S827 are performed to cause the special display LED 612 to display the error. Note that when the payout process is performed in step S823, after the payout process is finished, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and then the processes from step S826 onwards are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, the processing from step S826 onwards is performed as is.

In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the type of error detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. 681. Thereafter, error cancellation processing is performed in accordance with the error notified by an error display by the hall clerk, sales office, etc. (step S827), and the game ends.

As described above, by performing the processes shown in FIGS. 682 and 683, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function display and the number of payout coins. It is possible to display the error and notify the type of error detected to the player or the hall clerk without interrupting the playback.

[10-10. Modified example]
In addition, in this embodiment, a method is provided to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player when the ART game is forcibly terminated midway even though the ART game is executed after winning the ART first lottery. , the winning probability in the ART first winning lottery executed in step S6034, step S6094, step S6134, and step S6201 is determined by the difference K( The number of games is determined based on the number of games remaining until the end of the number of games management process (K). Similarly, regarding the winning probability in the ART game number addition lottery in step S6073 and the additional game number determination lottery in step S6177, and the number of additional games in the additional game number determination lottery in step S6179, the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process It is determined based on K. Furthermore, the probability of winning in the maintenance lottery in step S6193 is also determined based on the number of games K remaining until the end of the number of games management process. However, the method for alleviating the player's disappointment caused by forcibly ending the ART game in progress is not limited to the above method. For example, the ART game being executed may be forcibly terminated midway due to the effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 and the instruction function display processing executed by the main board 409. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused to the player. The effect image displayed on the image display body 500 will be described below with reference to FIG. 685, taking as an example the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177 and the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, which are processes executed during the ART game. At the same time, the instruction function display process will also be explained. Note that FIG. 685 is an example of an effect image related to the add-on determination lottery and the add-on game number determination lottery.

The effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 is based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining time until the end of the game number management process). It is determined based on the number of games (K). Similarly, the mode of the instruction function display process executed by the main board 409 is also determined based on the number of games K remaining until the end of the number of games management process.

First, a case will be described in which the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number. During the execution of the ART game, if the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177 is won and the number of additional games for the ART game is determined by the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, the image display body 500 will display the image shown in FIG. 685(a). As shown in , an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 is displayed. Although the image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 204 makes the player expect that he or she has won the ART game addition determination lottery, even if the player loses the addition determination lottery in step S6177, the image prompts the player to operate the effect button 204 with a predetermined probability. Therefore, even if an image prompting the user to operate the performance button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that the player has won the ART game add-on lottery.

If the player loses the ART game addition decision lottery, even if an image prompting the player to operate the performance button 204 is displayed and the player operates the performance button 204, the image display body 500 will display the image shown in FIG. 685(b). A failed image is displayed.

When the player wins the ART game add-on lottery and an image prompting the player to operate the performance button 204 is displayed and the player operates the performance button 204, the image display body 500 displays the images shown in FIGS. 685(c) to 685(e). The number of additional games is displayed as shown in . Figure 685(c) shows that the number of added games is 20 games, Figure 685(d) shows that the number of added games is 70 games, and Figure 685(e) shows that the number of added games is 70 games. ) indicates that the number of games to be added is 300 games.

In addition, in Figure 685, "30G remaining" displayed at the top left indicates that the remaining number of ART games is 30 games, and "TOTAL 1400" displayed at the bottom right indicates that the number of games is currently being managed. This shows that the number of games counted by the game counter GC is 1400. In this embodiment, when the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example), the game number management process ends and the game goes from an advantageous state to hell. The “TOTAL” status displayed in the lower right corner will be
1400'' means that the remaining number of games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games.

Next, a case where the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number will be described. During execution of the ART game, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "Special Keep Rip+Normal Keep Rip", the probability of winning the add-on determination lottery in step S6177 is 65536/65536. Then, when the number of additional games of the ART game is determined by the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, the image display body 500 displays a message indicating that if the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number; Similarly, an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 204 is displayed (FIG. 685). As described above, although the image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 makes the player expect that he has won the ART game addition determination lottery, if he loses the addition determination lottery in step S6177. is displayed with a predetermined probability, so even if an image prompting the user to operate the performance button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that the player has won the ART game add-on lottery.

If the player loses the ART game addition decision lottery, even if an image prompting the player to operate the performance button 204 is displayed and the player operates the performance button 204, the image display body 500 will display the number of games remaining until the end of the number of games management process. Similarly to the case where the number of games K is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number, a losing image shown in FIG. 685(b) is displayed.

However, if the player wins the ART game addition decision lottery, an image prompting the player to operate the performance button 204 is displayed, and the player operates the performance button 204, the player wins the addition determination lottery in step S6177, and the player wins the addition determination lottery in step S6179. Even if the number of additional ART games is determined by the number determination lottery, the images shown in FIGS. 685(c) to 685(e) are not displayed on the image display body 500, and the images shown in FIG. 685(b) are not displayed on the image display body 500. The losing image shown in is displayed. Then, when the number of ART games that have already been specified to the player are used up (when the ART games that would be executed if they were not added are used up), the ART games are actually added and internally played. Even if the ART game continues, an end effect image indicating that the ART game has ended is displayed on the image display body 500. Therefore, although the ART game is continuing internally, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player will realize that the ART game is continuing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ART game is forcibly terminated midway through even though the ART game has been continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed, and it is also possible to prevent a decline in interest.

However, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", the ART game will be added with a probability of 65536/65536, so the symbol combination corresponding to the Special Maintenance Rip will be When displayed on the active line, the player will know that the ART game will be added at that point. Therefore, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number, the instruction function is displayed in such a manner that the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance rep is displayed on the active line (in order). Although the push instruction function is displayed, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number, the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance rep is not displayed on the active line. An instruction function display is performed. Specifically, out of the four pressing orders, excluding forward pressing (123 pressing order) and reverse pinch pressing (312 pressing order), the instruction function display is performed in the pressing order determined with equal probability. There is. Here, not only the forward press (123 press order) but also the reverse pinch press (312 press order) are excluded from the instruction function display, as can be seen from FIGS. 638 to 643. This is because the instruction function display is performed so that the up replay 2, which is the trigger for moving to the specialized zone, is displayed on the active line. Therefore, in order to avoid entering the specialization zone even though you have not won the specialization zone lottery, there are four ways to avoid entering the specialization zone even though you have not won the specialization zone lottery. Among the pressing orders, the instruction function display is performed in the pressing order determined with equal probability. This is because it is rare to enter the specialization zone, and one of the four pressing orders is frequently instructed, so this is to avoid confusion. In addition, when the hand selected in the internal lottery is a normal maintenance reply, one of the six press orders will be determined with equal probability, and the stop operation will be prompted in this determined press order. The instruction function display is performed as follows. As a result, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is less than the fourth specified number, even if the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", There is a low possibility that the player will understand this.

The fourth specified number above can be set arbitrarily, but even if an ART game is added, the ART game will not end midway and all the ART games including the added number will be used up. It is preferable that the value is a value that can be used. In this embodiment, the maximum number of ART games to be added is 300 games, so the fourth specified number is preferably 350 games or more, taking into consideration the initial number of ART games.

In addition, in this modification described above, when the ART game is added, if the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process K is less than the fourth specified number, the losing image shown in FIG. 685(b) is displayed. is always displayed, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if an ART game is added and the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is less than the fourth specified number, if a certain condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 685(b)) The losing image shown in FIG. 685(b) may be displayed when the player wins a lottery to determine whether to display the losing image shown in FIG. 685(b). Further, the above-described certain conditions may be changed depending on the number of games remaining until the end of the number of games management process (for example, the number of games remaining until the end of the number of games management process decreases). (e.g., the probability that a losing image will be displayed increases in proportion to the In this case, even if the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", the symbol combination corresponding to the Special Maintenance Rip is placed on the active line so that the player does not know this. The instruction function display is performed in a manner that is not displayed.

In addition, in this modification described above, even though the ART game is added based on whether or not the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number, as shown in FIG. 685 ( It is determined whether or not to display the losing image shown in b), but the criterion for whether or not to display this losing image does not necessarily have to be based on whether or not the number is less than the fourth specified number. . For example, by comparing the number of remaining ART games including the number of added ART games and the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process, the remaining number of ART games including the number of added ART games is the number of games remaining until the end of the number of games management process. When it is determined that the number of remaining ART games is less than K, an image indicating that ART games have been added is displayed, and the number of remaining ART games including the number of ART games that have been added is the number of games managed. When it is determined that the number of games remaining is greater than the remaining number of games K, a losing image may be displayed. In this case, even if the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", the symbol combination corresponding to the Special Maintenance Rip is placed on the active line so that the player does not know this. The instruction function display is performed in a manner that is not displayed.

In addition, in this modification, if the remaining number of games K until the end of the number of games management process is less than the fourth specified number, the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177 is won, and the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179 is won. Even if the number of ART games has been determined, a losing image indicating that the ART game will not be added is displayed on the image display 500, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in order to give the player the impression that even if an ART game is added, the ART game will not be forcibly terminated in the middle, the number of games added is smaller than the actual number of added games. An image indicating that the process has been performed may be displayed on the image display body 500. For example, if the remaining number of ART games is 30 games and the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is 50 games, if 50 ART games are added, the remaining number of ART games will be There will be 80 games. However, since the remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process is 50 games, it is not possible to play all 80 games, which is the remaining number of ART games. will be forcibly terminated. Therefore, even if the actual number of ART games added was 50 games, the number of games added (20 games or less) was smaller than the actual number of games added (50 games). An image showing this is displayed on the image display body 500. However, in that case, it is better to display the actual numerical value of the number of additional games in the data of the number of additional games lottery table. This is because if an additional value that is not included in the data of the additional game number lottery table is displayed, there is a risk that the player will notice. However, if this is done, a difference may occur between the threshold of 1500 games and the number of ART games currently being played (displayed). In that case, if the difference is smaller than the minimum number of additional games actually in the data of the number of additional games lottery table, the end effect image described later will be executed, and if it is larger, the number of ART games will be set to "0". At the point in time, an effect as shown in FIG. 685 may be performed based on the actual numerical value in the data of the additional game number lottery table. As described above, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the ART game has been completed, including the number of added games, and the player is disappointed due to the ART game being forcibly terminated in the middle. It is possible to prevent the user from giving the game a negative impression, and in turn, it is possible to prevent the user from losing interest in the game. In this case, even if the hand selected in the internal lottery is "Special Maintenance Rip + Normal Maintenance Rip", the symbol combination corresponding to the Special Maintenance Rip is placed on the active line so that the player does not know this. The instruction function display is performed in a manner that is not displayed.

By the way, even though it has been decided that ART games will be added, a losing image is displayed on the image display unit 500, or a smaller number of games are added than the actual number of games added. When an image indicating this is displayed on the image display body 500, it means that the ART game continues internally. Therefore, it is preferable that the end effect image indicating the end of the ART game is displayed on the image display body 500 until the number of remaining games K until the end of the number of games management process becomes zero. As a result, even if the ART game in progress is forcibly terminated, it appears that the ART game has ended, which is caused by the ART game being forcibly terminated in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, in this modification, as described above, the ART game being executed is stopped midway due to the effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 and the instruction function display processing executed by the main board 409. A method for reducing the disappointment that may be caused to the player due to forced termination will be explained using as an example the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177 and the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, which are processes executed during the ART game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to the ART initial winning lottery in steps S6034, S6094, S6134, and S6201, the ART game number addition lottery in step S6073, and the maintenance lottery in step S6203.

Note that the gaming machine typified by the slot machine 1 described in this embodiment can be expressed as a technical concept in addition to the gaming machine described in claim 1.

The gaming machine with technical philosophy 1 is

A gaming machine comprising a plurality of symbol rows that can be variably displayed and a stop operation means that can stop the variably displayed symbol rows, and in which a game result is displayed when the stop operation means is operated,
instruction control means capable of instructing the operation mode of the stop operation means;
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game in which instructions of the operation mode of the stop operation means can be continuously issued by the instruction control means;
an additional lottery means for performing an additional lottery regarding an additional number of games to be executed for the advantageous game;
an effect control means that controls a predetermined effect and is capable of performing control to perform an effect based on the result of the additional lottery;

As a game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, either an instruction permissible state in which execution of the instruction is permissible, or an instruction impossible state in which execution of the instruction is not permitted. an indication state control means capable of controlling the

instruction state transition control means capable of transitioning from the instruction allowed state to the instruction disabled state based on a parameter that can be updated as the game progresses satisfying a predetermined condition in the instruction allowed state; ,
Equipped with
The performance control means is

It is characterized by comprising means for controlling an effect based on the result of the additional lottery in the instruction allowed state based on parameters that can be updated as the game progresses, including whether or not to perform the effect. .

The gaming machine described in the above technical idea is equipped with an advantageous game (for example, an ART game) that can continuously generate instructions for the operation mode of the stop operation means. This type of gaming machine is also equipped with a winning combination lottery means that performs a winning combination lottery every time a game is executed.

In the above winning lottery, multiple winning combinations are selected as prizes, and prizes are awarded to players depending on whether the stop operation means is operated in a proper operating manner or when it is operated in an inappropriate operating manner. Instruction combinations with different amounts of game media are included. The instruction role corresponds to "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6" in this embodiment, and when operated in a proper manner, for example, 8 game media are awarded as a prize, and when an incorrect When operated in the operating mode, for example, 1 or 0 game media is awarded as a prize (if it is 0, no game media is awarded as a prize). The above-mentioned proper operation mode and inappropriate operation mode correspond to cases where the press order is correct and cases where the press order is incorrect, but are not limited thereto. For example, if the timing to stop the stop operation means (reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is correct, the appropriate operation mode is to award eight game media as a prize, and the timing to stop the stop operation means. If the answer is incorrect, this may be treated as an inappropriate operation mode, and for example, one or zero game media may be awarded as a prize (if it is zero, no game media will be awarded as a prize).

Although not described in the above technical concept, the gaming machine according to the present technical concept is an advantageous game in which an execution lottery is executed for an advantageous game in which an instruction for the operation mode of the stop operation means can be continuously generated over a plurality of games. It is equipped with an execution lottery means. Being able to continuously generate instructions for the operation mode of the stop operation means means that it is possible to continuously generate instructions for prompting the stop operation means to be operated in an appropriate operation mode over multiple games. It means that. Therefore, if the above-mentioned advantageous game execution lottery is in an instruction impossible state (hell state) described later, the transfer destination determination lottery described in this embodiment corresponds to the transfer destination determination lottery described in the present embodiment, and in an instruction permitted state (advantageous state or pullback state) described later. If so, the "ART initial winning lottery" or "additional determination lottery" described in this embodiment corresponds to the lottery. Note that the internal lottery in the hell state described in this embodiment is a lottery in which a special winning combination can be selected, but does not correspond to the above-mentioned "advantageous game execution lottery". This is because even if a special winning combination is selected in an internal lottery, it will only be decided that the hell state will be transferred to an advantageous state, and it is an advantageous game that can occur consecutively over multiple games (ART game). This is because it is not a lottery that determines the execution of ).

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present technical idea includes a display means (image display body 500) on which a predetermined display effect is performed. This display means is controlled by a performance control means (corresponding to the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510) so that a performance is performed based on the result of the execution lottery of the advantageous game or the result of the additional lottery. For example, a confirmation effect indicating that you have won a lottery for an advantageous game, an expected effect indicating that you may have won a lottery for an advantageous game, an additional confirmation effect indicating that you have won an additional lottery, or an additional lottery. The display means displays the number of advantageous games that have been added due to winning. It should be noted that the display means may also provide a display effect for instructing the operation mode of the stop operation means.

Execution of an advantageous game (for example, an ART game) If the result of the lottery is a specific result, an advantageous game is executed. In other words, execution of an advantageous game when an advantageous game is not in progress If the lottery result is a specific result, an advantageous game is executed immediately or after multiple games are executed, and an advantageous game is executed when an advantageous game is in progress. If the result of the lottery (additional lottery) is a specific result, an advantageous game will be added and the execution period will be extended.

As a lottery state in which an advantageous game execution lottery is performed, a plurality of lottery states are prepared in which the degree of expectation of obtaining a specific result differs. In the present embodiment, the lottery states when an advantageous game is being executed include an ART medium low probability state, an ART medium high probability state, a special zone in progress, and a special zone in preparation. In addition, as lottery states when an advantageous game is not being executed, hell conditions, advantageous conditions A to E, and a pullback condition are prepared, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to these.

In addition, the game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means is either an instruction permissible state in which execution of the instruction is permissible, or an instruction impossible state in which it is impossible to permit the execution of the instruction. It is configured to be controllable. The instruction permissible state corresponds to the advantageous state described in this embodiment, and the instruction impossible state corresponds to the hellish state described in this embodiment. Note that even if the instruction is allowed, the instruction function flag described in this embodiment is not necessarily set to ON, but the instruction can be executed at a desired timing (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied). It is possible to set the feature flag ON. On the other hand, in the instructable state, it is impossible to set the instructing function flag to ON, and the instructing function flag is defined as an advantageous state at the time the instructing function flag is set to ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period when the number of games management flag is set to ON corresponds to the above-mentioned instruction allowed state, and the period when the number of games management flag is set to OFF corresponds to the above-mentioned instruction-disabled state. .

Furthermore, when a special winning combination (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance rep) is selected in the internal lottery, the state changes from the instruction-disabled state to the instruction-allowed state. Here, a plurality of states with different expectations for execution of an advantageous game are prepared as the instruction permissible state. When the state is changed from the instruction-disabled state to the instruction-allowed state, the counting means counts parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. The parameter here refers to the number of games played in this embodiment, but it is not limited to this. It may also be the number of times the above-mentioned instruction combination has been selected in an internal lottery.

When the parameter counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the instruction-allowed state ends and the instruction-disabled state is entered. In this embodiment, when the parameter (for example, the number of games played) that is counted in the advantageous states A to E or the pullback state as the instruction-permitted state reaches a threshold value, the instruction-permitted state ends and the instruction-disabled state is reached. will be moved to Note that if the above parameters reach the threshold while an advantageous game (for example, an ART game) is being executed, even if the advantageous game that is being executed is in the middle (the provision that the advantageous game that is being executed is the end condition). Even if the number of games has not been played), the instruction-permitting state ends and the instruction-disabling state is entered, so the advantageous game being executed is forcibly terminated.

The above parameters are updated as the game progresses, and the updating method may be one in which they are added and updated as the game progresses, or they are updated by subtraction from the specified values as the game progresses. It may be a method. For example, if the above parameter is "number of games played", if the method is an additive update method, 1 will be added when one game is executed, and if the method is a subtractive update method, after one game is executed, the value will be changed from the specified value. 1 is subtracted. In this embodiment, when one game is executed, the number of executed games is incremented by one, and when the number of executed games reaches a threshold value, the instruction permission state ends. On the other hand, if the subtractive update method is used, 1 is subtracted from the above threshold value when one game is executed, and when the threshold value becomes 0, the instruction permissive state ends.

In this embodiment, when comparing the number of staying games in the instruction-permitting state and the number of staying games in the instruction-disabling state, the number of staying games in the instruction-permitting state is configured to be higher. In addition, in the instruction allowed state, when the counted parameter reaches a threshold value, the instruction is shifted to the instruction disabled state. In the hell state, which is a state in which instructions are not possible, it is not determined that the ART game will change to an advantageous state, but the expectation level for the ART game to be executed (the expectation level for the transition to advantageous state B or E) is at least The degree of expectation for the ART game to be executed in the advantageous state A is configured to be greater than the degree of expectation. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, while suppressing the gambling nature, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest.

By the way, based on the fact that a parameter (for example, the number of games played) that is counted in the advantageous states A to E or the pullback state as the instruction permission state reaches a threshold, the instruction permission state is shifted to the instruction disable state. In the gaming machine according to the present technical concept, as the above-mentioned parameters approach the above-mentioned threshold values, it is possible that players may feel disappointed when they win an additional lottery for increasing the number of advantageous games executed. becomes more sexual. For example, if the above parameter is "Number of games executed", if "Number of games remaining until the above threshold is reached" is smaller than "Number of advantageous games to be executed as advantageous games", if advantageous games are being executed. In this case, the advantageous game is forcibly terminated in the middle, and even if the player wins the lottery for executing the advantageous game, the player may be disappointed.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present technical idea, the performance based on the result of the additional lottery performed on the display means (image display body 500) is controlled based on parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. That is, based on the fact that the above-mentioned parameter has reached a specified value (for example, the number of games executed in the instruction permission state has reached the specified number of games), the addition is performed on the display means (image display body 500). The contents of the performance can be changed based on the results of the lottery. Specifically, when a player wins a bonus lottery before the above-mentioned parameters reach the specified value, a performance that indicates that he/she has won (hereinafter referred to as "pre-registration bonus presentation") is performed with a relatively high probability. , When the above parameters reach the specified value and you win the additional lottery, there will be an effect that indicates that you have won, and an effect that will indicate the number of additional games (hereinafter, these effects will be collectively referred to as "additional effects after the specified value") ) is only performed with a relatively low probability, and in most cases, only a normal performance (for example, the same performance as when losing the bonus lottery) is performed. When a performance that shows that the player has won the top-up lottery or a performance that shows the number of games that have been added is performed, it gives a feeling of elation to the player, but a performance that shows that the player has won even though he or she has won the top-up lottery is performed. If the performance indicating the number of added games is not performed, it is suppressed from unnecessarily giving the player a feeling of exhilaration. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling excited and then disappointed, and it is also possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, when the above-mentioned parameters have reached the specified values and a winning lottery is won, the effect indicating that the winner has been won or the effect indicating the number of added games will not be performed at all even if the probability is set. good.

In addition, in the gaming machine based on the present technical concept, when a player wins an add-on lottery, the probability that an effect indicating that he/she has won or an effect indicating the number of additional games will be performed is determined based on a predetermined value as a "pre-specified add-on effect." Although the probability is set in two stages: the probability that "additional performance after regulation" will be performed, the probability may be set in multiple stages instead. In this case, as the difference in the number of games between the above threshold value and the above parameter (i.e., the number of remaining games until the above threshold value is reached) becomes smaller, an effect indicating that the winner has been won in the execution lottery of an advantageous game is displayed. It is preferable that the probability that an effect indicating the number of added games is performed gradually decreases.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this technical idea, even if you win the additional lottery after the above parameters reach the specified value, the probability of winning the additional lottery is lower than before the above parameters reach the specified value, but you will still be eligible for the additional lottery. Although we are trying to make a display that shows that you have won or a display that shows the number of additional games, this is not limited to this, and even if you win the additional lottery, as long as the above parameters have reached the specified value. Either the performance indicating that the winner has won and the number of added games will not be performed, or the number of additional games may not be shown, but the effect may be made to indicate that the player has won the additional lottery. An effect may be performed that shows a false number of additional games that is smaller than the actual number of added games due to the additional lottery. When performing an effect that indicates a false number of additional games that is smaller than the actual number of additional games due to the additional lottery, perform an effect that indicates the number of games that is smaller than the difference in the number of games between the above threshold value and the above parameter. is preferred.

In addition, in the gaming machine based on the present technical idea, after the above-mentioned parameters reach the specified values, the effect indicating that the player has won the additional lottery or the effect indicating the number of additional games may not be performed or the effect may be relatively small. Although this is done with a low probability, in addition to this, even if the advantageous game is continued internally due to the addition of an advantageous game, there is no indication from the outside that the advantageous game has continued. In order to make it difficult to understand, when the number of advantageous games that have already been clearly shown to the player has been exhausted, the effect of ending the advantageous game is performed, and the effect indicating that the advantageous game is in progress is ended. It is preferable to do so. In this way, even though the advantageous game continues, after the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed ends, the advantageous game is executed instead of the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed. An effect (for example, the same effect as during normal play (when no advantageous game is being executed)) will be performed in which it is difficult to realize that the game is in progress. This reduces the possibility that the player will realize that the advantageous game has been continued, and the advantageous game may be forcibly ended midway through even though the advantageous game has been continued after winning the additional lottery. It is possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed due to this, and in turn, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest. However, even if the player is prevented from knowing that the advantageous game has continued, the instruction control means will still instruct the operation mode of the stop operation means. (It feels the same as when the operation mode of the stop operation means is instructed when the stop operation is not performed.)

[11. Omen production]
In this chapter, an example of the omen performance of the slot machine 1 will be explained. The slot machine 1 of this chapter performs an AT (assist time) entry lottery, which is an example of an advantageous gaming state, when a normal game is executed, and if the AT (assist time) is won in the lottery, the number of games selected in the lottery (for example, 0 games to 32 After the precursor game (selected from the game), the AT game (first special game state) starts.

AT is an advantageous game that allows you to easily receive a payout based on the winning small role compared to a normal game by using the image display 500 and the speaker 512 to perform a performance indicating the type of the winning small role. This is an example of the state.

Although the details will be described later, in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, in each game, the player wins the small prize of the middle 1st bell with a high probability (for example, 1/4.37 as described later). In this chapter, the middle 1st bell means that when the middle reel 301b is stopped for the first time after the symbol fluctuation display device 300 is started, the bell is on one predetermined line (for example, upward to the right) on the symbol fluctuation display device 300. If you can receive a high number of medals (for example, 10 medals) and stop the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c first, the symbol fluctuation display device 300 will display a bell on one line. It is a small role in which the player does not have all the medals and cannot receive medals.

For example, if you win the middle 1st bell during an AT game, there is a higher probability than in a normal game (for example, 1/1 during an AT game, 0/1 during a normal game excluding omen games), and the start lever Immediately after the button 210 is pressed, you will be notified that you have won the middle 1st bell (for example, "1" will be displayed on the image display 500 in a position directly above the middle reel 301b, or the speaker 512 will say "1st bell". !” is output). As a result, during the AT game, compared to during the normal game, it becomes easier to receive the payout of 10 coins due to the middle 1st bell.

[11-1. Various tables for omen production]
Hereinafter, first, the small prize winning probability, state transition winning probability, etc. in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be explained. FIG. 686 is an example of a small role lottery table. The small winning lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. The small prize lottery table shows the lottery value of each minor prize for each state (i.e., when the AT flag is OFF (during the normal game) and when the AT flag is ON (during the AT game)), and the lottery value of each minor prize when each minor prize is won. The number of medals to be paid out when the winning combinations are aligned on a predetermined line (generally called an active line) on the symbol variation display device 300 is defined.

The probability of winning each small role is the quotient of the corresponding lottery value divided by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of all the minor roles in the state. For example, the probability of winning a weak watermelon when the AT flag is OFF is 300/65536. In this chapter, the payout number and lottery value are the same when the AT flag is OFF and when the AT flag is ON. In addition, as mentioned above, since the value of the probability column (winning probability) can be calculated from the lottery value of each minor prize, the minor prize lottery table does not need to include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 686, the lottery values for the middle 1st bell, special bell, replay, and loser are higher than the lottery values for other small roles. These small winning combinations with a low winning rate that do not fall under any of the middle 1st bell, special bell, replay, and loss are also called rare small winning combinations.

FIG. 687 is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table. The AT first winning lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the AT first winning lottery table, the AT first winning lottery value in the normal game (excluding the AT precursor game (hereinafter simply referred to as the precursor game)) is defined for each small role won in the game. There is. The AT first lottery that is held during the normal game is also called the A1 lottery, and the AT first lottery that is held during the rescue state game that will be described later is also called the D1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value of the AT first winning lottery table is 65536. For example, if you win a weak watermelon during the normal game, you will win AT with a probability of 3000/65536 and move on to the omen game. In addition, in this chapter, the lottery value is the same for the A1 lottery and the D1 lottery. In addition, in the example of FIG. 686, the AT lottery table includes a probability column, but since the value of each probability column can be calculated as the quotient of the corresponding lottery value divided by the denominator 65536, the AT first lottery The table need not include a probability column.

FIG. 688 is an example of an omen game number lottery table. (a) is a drawing table for the number of portentous games when the first hit of AT is won during the normal game, and (b) is a drawing table for the number of portentous games when the first hit is won for AT during the rescue state game. It is. The portent game number lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. The precursor game number lottery when AT is won during the normal game is also called the A2 lottery. The precursor game number lottery when AT is won during the rescue state game is also called the D2 lottery, and the D2 lottery includes two types of lottery (D2-1 lottery and D2-2 lottery). Details of the D2-1 lottery and the D2-2 lottery will be described later.

The winning probability of the number of precursor games is the quotient of the corresponding lottery value divided by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of the number of precursor games in the state. For example, the winning probability for the number of precursor games of 5 games during the normal game (A2 lottery) is 4096/65536. In this way, since the value in the probability column (winning probability) can be calculated from the lottery value of each number of portent games, the number lottery table for the number of portent games does not need to include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 688(a), if AT is won during the normal game, the 5th game, 8th game, 16th game, or 32th game is selected, and the winning probability is 5 games < 8 games < 16 games. <32 games will be higher. In addition, in the example of FIG. 688(b), if AT is won during the relief state game, a precursor of 0 games, 1 game, 2 games, 3 games, or 4 games is selected, and the winning rate is D2- In the case of one lottery, the order increases in the order of 4 games < 3 games < 2 games < 1 game < 0 games, and the probability that the omens of 4 games will be selected is extremely high, and the probability that omens of other numbers of games will be selected is In a D2-2 lottery, the number of portent games of 0 is the most likely to be selected, and the number of portent games of 4 is the least likely to be selected.

FIG. 689 is an example of an AT stock lottery table. The details will be described later, but the precursor game basically consists of the final four games of the precursor game (third special game state), and the precursor game (first half game), which is the precursor game before the start of the second half of the precursor game. 2 special game state). (a) is an AT stock lottery table that is referenced during the first half of the portentous game, and (b) is an AT stock lottery table that is referenced during the second half of the portentous game. The AT stock lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example.

If the AT stock lottery is won during the omen game, the AT game will be stocked. The stocked AT game is released, for example, after the AT game that started after the precursor game ends, after the precursor game has passed, or without passing through the precursor game.

In the AT stock lottery table, the AT stock lottery value is defined for each small role won in the game. The AT stock lottery held during the first half of the omen game is also called the B1 lottery, and the AT stock lottery held during the second half of the omen game is also called the C1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value in the AT stock lottery table is 65536. For example, if you win Weak Watermelon during the first half of the game, you will win AT Stock with a probability of 1500/65536. In addition, in this chapter, the AT stock lottery value for each small role is different in the B1 lottery and the C1 lottery. In addition, in the example of FIG. 689, the AT stock lottery table includes a probability column, but since the value in each probability column can be calculated as the quotient of the corresponding lottery value divided by the denominator 65536, the AT stock lottery table includes a probability column. The table need not include a probability column.

FIG. 690 is an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table. The pseudo bonus lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409. A pseudo bonus is an example of an advantageous gaming state. For example, it is possible to win a pseudo bonus during a normal game and an AT game including a precursor game.

When a pseudo bonus is won, pseudo bonus precursor games within a predetermined number of games are executed. After the pseudo-bonus precursor game ends, when a specific small winning combination (for example, replay) is achieved, the reels are stopped in a predetermined pressing order, and the pseudo-bonus starts from the next game. The predetermined pressing order is notified by, for example, the image display 500 or the speaker 512.

In addition, in the predetermined pressing order, by aiming and pressing the bonus symbols (for example, "7" or "BAR"), the bonus symbols are moved to a predetermined shape (for example, "7, 7, 7"). , "BAR・BAR・BAR", "7・7・BAR", etc.), but even if the predetermined shape is not aligned, a pseudo bonus will be entered.

Note that during the pseudo bonus, for example, the same lottery value of the small winning probability table as when the AT flag is ON is referred to. Also, during the pseudo-bonus, similar to during AT, an effect indicating the type of the won minor prize is executed using the image display 500 and the speaker 512, and compared to the normal game, the payout based on the won minor prize is can be easily received.

The pseudo bonus ends with predetermined end conditions. The fact that a predetermined number of games have been executed since the start of the pseudo bonus, that more than a predetermined number of medals have been paid out since the start of the pseudo bonus, and that a predetermined small role has been achieved a predetermined number of times since the start of the pseudo bonus, etc. This is an example of the termination condition.

In this way, the section where the medals increase starts when the bonus symbols are arranged in a predetermined shape (for example, "7.7.7", "BAR.BAR.BAR", "7.7.BAR", etc.). In , they are generally called pseudo bonuses because they are very similar to real bonuses, but details regarding pseudo bonuses in this chapter will be discussed later.

FIG. 691 is an example of an AT initial game number lottery table. The AT initial game number lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409. The AT initial game number lottery table defines the number of AT games in the case of an initial AT win or an AT stock win for each state at the time of lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value of the AT initial game number lottery table is 128. For example, when AT wins the first time during a normal game, the probability that the initial number of AT games is 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, or 300 games is 32/128. Furthermore, the expected values of the initial number of AT games in the A1 lottery, B1 lottery, C1 lottery, and D1 lottery are 162.5 games, 112.5 games, 96.875 games, and 193.75 games, respectively. In other words, the expected value of the initial number of AT games is greater in the order of relief state game > normal game (excluding portent games) > first half portent game > second half portent game.

FIG. 692 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop type of various bells. (a) is an example of a stopped type of common bell. If the common bell is won, regardless of the order in which the reels stop, the bells stop at the middle rows of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c (all middle rows are aligned), and 10 medals are paid out.

(b1) is an example of a stop type when the middle reel 301b is stopped first when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bells stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c (aligned upward to the right), and 10 medals are paid out. (b2) is an example of a stop type when the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bells do not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells do not align horizontally or diagonally, but stop in a miss pattern, and no medals are paid out.

(c1) is an example of a stop type when the middle reel 301b is first stopped when a special bell is won when the AT flag is off (that is, when not in AT). In this case, the bells stop at the lower rows of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c (aligned at the lower rows), and two medals are paid out. (c2) is an example of a stop type when the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the special bell is won when the AT flag is off (that is, when not in AT). In this case, although the bells stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the bells are not aligned horizontally or diagonally and stop in a miss pattern, and one medal is paid out.

(c3) is an example of a stop type when the middle reel 301b is first stopped when the special bell is won when the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bells stop at the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c (aligned downward to the right), and 10 medals are paid out. (c4) is an example of a stop type when the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the special bell is won when the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bells do not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells do not align horizontally or diagonally, but stop in a miss pattern, and no medals are paid out. In other words, the special bell is configured such that the control for stopping the reels differs (the control for changing the symbols to be displayed is executed) depending on whether or not the AT is in progress (AT flag is on or not).

[11-2. Specific example of omen production]
FIG. 693 and FIG. 694 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an omen effect. (A) shows the state when the lever is on in the first half of the game. (A) is a game in which the first bell in middle school is won. If you win the special bell or the middle 1st bell during the first half of the game, 10 medals (the maximum payout number in the middle 1st bell winning game) will be paid out in the reel press order (the push that stops the middle reel 301b first) A performance indicating the following order is executed at a predetermined rate, and the player can obtain 10 medals by following the directions of the performance.

Note that the predetermined ratio may be the same as the ratio at which the push order effect is executed in the AT game, but it may be lower than the rate at which the push order effect is executed in the AT game and in the normal game excluding the precursor game. The rate may be higher than the rate at which the press order effect is executed. For example, if the execution ratio of the press order effect when winning the special bell or the middle 1st bell in the AT game or the normal game is 1/1 and 0/1, respectively, then when winning the middle 1st bell in the first half of the sign, The execution ratio of the press order effect is 1/2.

Specifically, for example, enemy characters are displayed on the image display body 500 at positions directly above each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c. Further, the central enemy character is displayed in such a manner that it appears to be in front of the other enemy characters, and the number "1" is displayed below the central enemy character. Further, "8" is displayed on the special display LED 612b, indicating that the pressing order with the middle reel 301b as the first stop is correct (see FIG. 672).

In addition to display effects using the image display body 500 and the like, in the push order instruction effect, a sound such as "Middle!" is output from the speaker 512, and the middle reel 301b is moved to the left reel 301a and The middle reel 301b may be lit more strongly than the right reel 301c to indicate that the middle reel 301b is to be stopped first.

In (B), the player first stops the middle reel 301b and then stops all reels in accordance with the instructions in (A). In the symbol variation display device 300, the bells are aligned upward to the right, and 10 medals are paid out. The image display body 500 displays an image of three enemy characters being pushed and defeated, and an image in which "10 GET!" is written indicating that 10 coins have been paid out. Further, the special display LED displays "10" indicating that 10 coins have been paid out.

(C) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the second half of the game. (C) is a game in which the first bell in middle school is won. If the middle 1st bell is won during the second half of the game, an instruction performance different from that during the first half of the game will be executed. In other words, an effect is executed that indicates the reel push order in which it is impossible to obtain 10 medals (here, the push order is such that the left reel 301a stops first), and the player can earn 10 medals by following the instructions of the effect. medals can be earned.

Specifically, for example, enemy characters are displayed on the image display body 500 at positions directly above each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c. Further, the left enemy character is displayed in such a manner that it appears to be in front of the other enemy characters, and the number "1" is displayed at the bottom of the left enemy character.

Furthermore, the line "Left!" indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop is displayed. Furthermore, the special display LED 612b may display "7" indicating that the pressing order with the left reel 301a being the first stop is correct (see FIG. 672), or the special display LED 612b may not light up.

Although the background image in the image display body 500 is not depicted in FIG. 693, for example, there may be a period in which the background image is displayed. The background image in the second half of the game) may be different. Further, the period during which the background image is displayed is longer in (A) than in (C), for example. In (C), since the number of remaining games until the start of AT is small, this is to draw attention to the main effect rather than the background image.

In (D), the player first stops the left reel 301a and then stops all reels in accordance with the instructions in (C). In the symbol variation display device 300, the bells are stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells are not aligned horizontally or diagonally, but are stopped in a miss shape, and one medal is paid out. In addition, the image display body 500 displays an image of three enemy characters being pushed and defeated, and an image stating "1 GET!" indicating that one card has been paid out. . Furthermore, the special display LED displays "1" indicating that one coin has been paid out. In addition, in (B) and (D), the aspect of the image displayed on the image display body 500 is common, but for example, since the number of medals paid out is larger in (B), more effects are displayed. Images in different modes may be displayed, such as an image in which the user is wearing a .

(E) is the state when the lever is turned on in a game in which a rare small winning combination is won in the second half of the sign. Note that even if a rare minor role is won in the first half of the sign, the same effects as (E) and (F) described below are performed. In (E), it is assumed that the strong cherry has been won. When a rare small winning combination is won during the second half of the game, for example, an image indicating a chance ("CHANCE!") and an image of the enemy character are displayed on the image display body 500.

It is desirable that the image size of the enemy character is larger than the image size of the character displayed when the lever is turned on in the game where the first bell is won. Also, for example, the winning rare small winning combination may be indicated by the clothes of the enemy character, the aura worn by the enemy character, or the color of the enemy character itself (for example, if the winning combination is cherry, red, watermelon), etc. If so, green, etc.) In (E), since the strong cherry has been won, for example, an enemy character wearing red clothes may be displayed.

In FIG. 694(F), the player has won a cherry on the symbol changing device 300 in FIG. 694(E). Two medals have been paid out. In addition, if a strong cherry is won, it is possible to arrange cherries on the lower row of the left reel 301a, the middle row of the middle reel 301b, and the upper row of the right reel. The image display body 500 displays an image of the enemy character that appeared in (E) being pushed away and defeated. Further, the special display LED displays "2" indicating that two coins have been paid out.

(G) is the state when the lever is on in the final game of the second half of the precursor (that is, the game immediately before the start of AT). In the final game of the second half of the harbinger, a rock-paper-scissors performance is performed. In (G), an image indicating that rock, paper, scissors is about to start is displayed on the image display 500. The hand displayed on the left side of the image display body 500 is the hand of the friendly character, and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. Also, in (G), as in (C), the middle 1st bell has been won, and an effect showing the pressing order to stop the left reel 301a first is being executed.

Note that the effect indicating the pressing order in which the left reel 301a stops first when the middle 1st bell has been won may be displayed until the end of the game, but since this is the final game of the omen game, Pressing order that stops the left reel 301a first until the final game result is displayed (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed after pressing the start lever 210, or when pressing the second stop button) You may delete the effect that shows. This is to make the players concentrate on the rock, paper, scissors presentation.

(H) is the state after the player first stops the left reel 301a and then stops all reels in accordance with the instructions in (G) in the final game of the second half of the precursor (i.e., the game immediately before the start of AT). It is. An image of an ally character winning over an enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors performance, an image notifying entry into the AT game, and an image showing that one coin has been paid out are displayed on an image display body 500.

(I) is the state when the lever is on in the AT starting game. An image (AT start! 100G!) indicating that an AT game that lasts at least 100 games has started is displayed on the image display body 500. In addition, (I) is a game in which the first bell in middle school is won. When winning the middle 1st bell during an AT game, a production showing the order in which the reels are pressed in order to pay out 10 medals is executed, and the player can obtain 10 medals by following the instructions of the production. .

As mentioned above, in the first half of the sign state, when the middle 1st bell or special bell is won, a middle press instruction (that is, an instruction to stop the middle reel 301b as the first stop) appears, so the player can win more medals. This will increase your interest. Furthermore, in the second half of the precursor state, a left push instruction (i.e., an instruction to stop the left reel 301a as the first stop) appears when winning the middle 1st bell or special bell, thereby suppressing an extreme increase in the number of medals a player obtains. This makes it possible to suppress hole loss. In other words, in the premonitory state of this chapter, it is possible to both increase the player's interest and reduce the burden on the hall, without depending on the setting of the AT transition probability of the slot machine 1.

[11-3. Various flows for omen production]
FIG. 695 is a flowchart illustrating an example of flag processing in step S107 in FIG. 645. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 draws a winning combination according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value indicated by the small winning probability table of FIG. 686 (S6721). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_FLG is off (S6722). When AT_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is an AT state, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not an AT state.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_FLG is on (S6722: NO), it executes the process when AT_FLG is on (S6723) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6723 will be described later. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_FLG is off (S6722: YES), it determines whether AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724).

When AT_ZN_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is a precursor state of AT; when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not a precursor state of AT. Note that AT_ZN_FLG is a generic term for AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2, which will be described later. When AT_ZN_FLG is on, it means that it is on when at least one of AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, and when AT_ZN_FLG is off, it means that both AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 are off.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6724: NO), it executes the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6725) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6725 will be described later. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724: YES), it determines whether AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726). When AT_ST_FLG is on, it indicates that the AT is stocked (that is, the stocked AT has not been released even though the AT stock lottery was won), and when it is off, it indicates that the AT is not stocked. Indicates that there is no state.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ST_FLG is on (S6726: NO), it executes the process when AT_ST_FLG is on (S6727) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6727 will be described later. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726: YES), it determines whether KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728). When KYUSAI_FLAG is on, it indicates a relief state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not a relief state.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6728: NO), it executes the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729), and ends the flag process. Details of step S6729 will be described later. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728: YES), it refers to the AT first hit lottery table and performs an AT first win lottery (A1 lottery) (S67210).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not AT was won in the AT first winning lottery in step S67210 (S67211). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT has not been won (S67211: NO), it ends the flag processing. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT has been won (S67211: YES), it refers to the A1 lottery column of the AT initial game number lottery table (FIG. 691) and performs the AT initial game number lottery (S67212). .

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the precursor game number lottery table and performs a lottery for the number of precursor games (A2 lottery, FIG. 688) (S67213). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the number of winning precursor games exceeds 4 games (5 games or more) (S67214).

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 4 or less (S67214: NO), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S67215) and ends the flag processing. When AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, it indicates that the current state is the late precursor state of AT; when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the late precursor state of AT.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 5 or more (S67214: YES), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG1 (S67216) and ends the flag processing. When AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, it indicates that the current state is the AT precursor first half state, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the AT precursor first half state.

FIG. 696 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing during an AT precursor, that is, processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6725). First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731: YES), it notifies the sub board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 sets the effect state 1 ( S6732). Performance state 1 is a performance state in which an operation instruction performance for first stopping the middle reel 301b is executed when the winning combination is "middle 1st bell" or "special bell". Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT stock lottery table for the B1 lottery, executes the AT stock lottery (B1 lottery) (S6733), and transitions to step S6738, which will be described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (S6731: NO), it notifies the sub board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (that AT_ZN_FLG2 is on), and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 sets performance state 2 (S6734). Performance state 2 is a performance state in which an operation instruction performance for first stopping the left reel 301a is executed when the winning combination is "Medium 1st Bell" or "Special Bell".

Note that only one of presentation state 1 and presentation state 2 can be set. That is, when executing the process of step S6731 or step S6734 in a state where one of the effect states has already been set, for example, after resetting the set effect state, the process of step S6731 or step S6734 is executed. Alternatively, a new performance state may be overwritten without resetting the already set performance state.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735). When C1_KINSH_FLG is on, it indicates that the C1 lottery is prohibited, and when it is off, it indicates that the C1 lottery is not prohibited.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735: YES), it refers to the AT stock lottery table for C1 lottery, executes the AT stock lottery (C1 lottery), and transitions to step S6738. do. In the AT stock lottery table described above, the AT stock winning rate is set lower in the C1 lottery (i.e., the lottery in the second half of the omen and when C1_KINSHI_FLG is off) than in the B1 lottery (i.e., the lottery in the first half of the omen). If the winning rate of AT stock is set low, the burden on the hall can be suppressed, and furthermore, in the latter half of the premonition, a rock-paper-scissors effect is performed to notify whether or not the AT stock will enter, so the winning rate of AT stock is low. This is because the player's interest is less likely to decrease.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that C1_KINSHI_FLG is on (S6735: NO), it refers to the pseudo bonus lottery table, executes a pseudo bonus lottery (C2 lottery), and proceeds to step S6738.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 (that is, any of the B1 lottery, C1 lottery, or C2 lottery) was won (S6738). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 has not been won (S6738: NO), the process moves to step S67311, which will be described later.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 has not been won (S6738: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT initial game number lottery table to determine the initial game number lottery of the stocked AT. Execute (S6739). In addition, when the number of games of the pseudo bonus is fixed, or when the end condition of the pseudo bonus is that a predetermined number of predetermined small winning combinations are achieved, it is not necessary to execute the process of step S6739. If the number of pseudo bonus games is determined by lottery, the number of pseudo bonus games is determined in step S6739 using, for example, a pseudo bonus game number lottery table (not shown).

Further, if a pseudo bonus is won, for example, the pseudo bonus is activated immediately. Specifically, the pseudo bonus starts after a predetermined time (period) has passed since the game in which the pseudo bonus was won and the result of the game in which the pseudo bonus was won (more specifically, the result of the game in which the pseudo bonus was won and the result of the game in which the pseudo bonus was won is shown) (The state transitions to the pseudo-bonus state.) The predetermined time (period) is, for example, the time (period) from when all reels stop to when the medal payout ends.) The pseudo-bonus starts. , that is, there is no precursor game for a pseudo bonus. Furthermore, since there is no precursor game for the pseudo bonus, there is no need to perform a performance indicating whether the pseudo bonus is valid (a performance equivalent to a rock-paper-scissors performance before the start of AT). Furthermore, the extinguishing game during the pseudo bonus may be subtracted from the precursor game. As a result, for example, it is possible to start a pseudo bonus while completing the second half of the precursor game, and furthermore, if the second half of the precursor game ends during the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus can be executed from the second half of the precursor game to the AT game. be able to.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_ST_FLG (S67310). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the remaining number of precursor games (S67311). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the number of remaining precursor games is 4 (S67312). When determining that the number of remaining precursor games is 4 (S67312: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns off AT_ZN_FLG1 and turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S67313).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether presentation state 1 is set (whether AT_ZN_FLG1 is on or not) (S67314). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the effect state 1 is not set (AT_ZN_FLG1 is off?) (S67314: NO), it ends the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the effect state 1 is set (AT_ZN_FLG1 is on) (S67314: YES), it executes a precursor blowout lottery (S67315). The precursor puncture lottery is a lottery for eliminating the ATs that have already been won (initial AT and stock AT) and ending the precursor state. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the puncture indicator lottery has been won (S67316). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the puncture symbol lottery has not been won (S67316: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 ends the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on.

When determining that the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 has won the precursory puncture lottery (S67316: YES), it turns off all flags (S67317), turns on KYUSAI_FLG (S67318), and ends the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on. do. In other words, although AT disappears due to winning the precursor blowout lottery, it is possible to enter a relief state.

In other words, by creating a game that does not necessarily shift to the second half of the omen even if the player wins the AT lottery and moves to the first half of the omen, the player does not just enjoy the omen performance, but also hopes that he will not win the blowout lottery. You can proceed with the game. Therefore, unlike the omens of conventional slot machines, which simply provide a sense of security, the slot machine 1 of this chapter can provide a thrill to the player even during the omens.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is not 4 (S67312: NO), it determines whether the remaining number of precursor games is 0 (S67319). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is not 0 (S67319: NO), the process transitions to step S67314 described above. If it is determined that the number of remaining precursor games is 0 (S67320: YES), AT_ZN_FLG is turned off (S67321), and the processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on is ended.

FIG. 697 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when AT is stocked, that is, processing when AT_ST_FLG is on (S6727). First, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 sets the effect state 1 (S6741). That is, in the stocked AT precursor, the middle press instruction appears when the middle 1st bell and the special bell are won, that is, the same state as the first half of the precursor. Note that in step S6741, performance state 2 (that is, the same state as the latter half of the sign) may be set instead of performance state 1.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742). When AT_STZN_FLG is on, it indicates that it is a stocked AT precursor state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not a stocked AT precursor state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_STZN_FLG is on (S6742: NO), the process transitions to step S6745, which will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742: YES), it sets 5 games as the number of precursor games for the AT stock precursor (S6743).

Note that the number of precursor games for the AT stock precursor does not have to be five games, but is preferably shorter than the average number of precursor games for the first AT (average number of precursor games in the A2 lottery). This is because even though ATs are stocked, if it takes a large number of games to play them, the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, if AT_FLG is off and AT_ST_FLG is on, the precursor game is always set via step S6743, so the AT stock will not be released without going through the precursor after AT ends. . In other words, when it comes to continuous AT, it always goes through the AT stock precursor.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_STZN_FLG (S6744). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining portent games in the AT stock (S6745). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the number of remaining portent games in the AT stock is 0 (S6746). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games remaining in the AT stock is not 0 (S6746: NO), it ends the process when AT_ST_FLG is on.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games in the AT stock is 0 (S6746: YES), it turns off AT_STZN_FLG (S6747), turns off AT_ST_FLG (S6748), and turns off AT_ST_FLG when it is on. Finish the process.

In addition, as mentioned above, the AT stock precursor is in the same state as the first half of the AT first hit precursor, and the performance state 2 should not be set in the AT stock precursor. In other words, in the AT stock precursor, AT stock is released without going through the same state as in the latter half of the AT first hit precursor.

FIG. 698 is a flowchart illustrating an example of relief state processing, that is, processing when KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 notifies the sub-board 510 that KYUSAI_FLG is on, and the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 executes an operation instruction performance that causes the left reel 301a to be the first stop regardless of the winning combination. (S6751).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT first winning lottery table and executes the AT first winning lottery (D1 lottery) (S6752). Note that the first winning probability in the D1 lottery is the same as the first winning probability in the A1 lottery (FIG. 687). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT first winning lottery (D1 lottery) has been won (S6753). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first winning lottery (D1 lottery) has not been won (S6753: NO), it turns off KYUSAI_FLG (S6754) and ends the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first winning lottery (D1 lottery) has been won (S6753: YES), it refers to the AT initial game number lottery table and executes the AT initial game number lottery (S6755). ).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the precursor game number lottery table for the D2 lottery and executes a lottery for the number of precursor games. However, if the player played the game in accordance with the operating instructions in the game before the game in which he won the Omen Puncture Lottery (that is, stopped the reels according to the notified order of pressing the reels), D2- 1 lottery is held and if the instructions are not followed, a D2-2 lottery shall be held.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the number of winning precursor games exceeds 4 games (5 games or more) (S6757). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is four or less (S6757: NO), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG2 (S6758), and ends the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 5 or more (S6757: YES), it turns on AT_ZN_FLG1 (S6759), and ends the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on.

FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing an example of processing after all reels are stopped. The process in FIG. 699 is performed, for example, immediately after YES in step S209 in FIG. 673. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_ZN_FLG2 is on (S6761). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is off (S6761: NO), the process transitions to step S6765, which will be described later.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is on (S6761: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether a left push navigation (that is, an operation instruction effect in which the left reel 301a is the first stop) has occurred in the game. is determined (S6742). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that left push navigation has not occurred (S6742: NO), the process moves to step S6765, which will be described later.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that a left push navigation has occurred (S6742: YES), it determines whether or not a middle press was made in the game (that is, whether the middle reel 301b was at the first stop) (S6763 ). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the middle press has not been made (that is, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c was at the first stop) (S6763: NO), the process moves to step s6765, which will be described later.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the middle button has been pressed (S6763: YES), it turns on C1_KINSHI_FLG (S6764). In other words, if you press the middle button even though the left button navigation is occurring during the second half of the sign (the state in which the performance state 2 is set), C1_KINSHI_FLG will be set and the C1 lottery will not be held. (See step S6735). This can prevent the player from first stopping the middle reel 301b and acquiring 10 medals when the middle 1st bell or special bell is won in the latter half of the sign.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the game is the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is not the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: NO), the process proceeds to step S6767, which will be described later.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 issues a left push navigation command to the sub board 510, that is, stops the left reel 301a as the first stop. A command for executing an effect indicating what to do is notified (S6766).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the number of remaining precursor games is 0 (S6767). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is not 0 (S6767: NO), it ends the process after all reels are stopped, which is shown in this flowchart.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games is 0 (S6767: YES), it executes a freeze effect for 10 seconds (S6768). During the freeze performance, the reels will not start even if the start lever 210 is pressed down. Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_FLG (S6769), and ends the process after all reels are stopped, which is shown in this flowchart.

[11-4-1. Specific example of omen performance 2]
FIG. 700 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. FIG. 700(A) shows a state where the AT game started in FIG. 694(I) has ended. As mentioned above, it is assumed that in the game shown in FIGS. 693(E) to 694(F) during the second half of the sign, the AT stock was won according to the left push navigation. In (A), a display indicating the result in the AT game (for example, the total number of continuous AT games and the number of medals acquired) is displayed on the image display body 500.

(B) shows a state in which the AT stock precursor game has started. Since it owns AT stock, it immediately enters the AT stock precursor game after the AT ends. As mentioned above, the AT stock precursor game has the same production state as the first half of the precursor when AT first hits. (B) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won, and a middle press instruction appears when the lever is turned on.

(C) is the final game of the AT stock precursor game. This is a game where the middle 1st bell is won, and a middle press instruction appears when the lever is turned on. Furthermore, since this is the final game of the omen game, a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed, and the ally character is in a state of winning. (D) is the starting game of the stocked AT.

The AT released in diagram 700 was acquired during the latter half of the prologue, as described above. In addition, if the player does not follow the left-press navigation in the second half of the game, C1_KINSHI_FLG will turn on, so stocking AT in the second half of the precursor means that if the left-press navigation appears, the player will follow the left-press navigation. In other words, the reels were stopped in the order in which the number of medals obtained at the middle 1st bell or special bell was reduced.

In this way, in the AT precursor stocked according to an operation instruction that is disadvantageous to the player, by not allowing the latter half of the precursor to appear when an operation instruction disadvantageous to the player appears, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Note that, as described above, in step S6741, presentation state 2 may be set instead of presentation state 1. As a result, the stocked AT precursor will be in the same state as the second half of the precursor, so the number of medals won by the player will be reduced, and the burden on the hole can be suppressed.

Further, for example, in step S6741, a lottery may be held and performance state 1 or performance state 2 may be selected and set according to the result of the lottery, or the player may operate the performance state 1 or 2 by pressing the performance button 200 before turning on the lever. The player may be able to select performance state 1 or performance state 2 by pressing , or the selection rate between performance state 1 and performance state 2 in the lottery may be changed by the player's operation.

Note that if the selection rate of the performance state can be changed by the player's operation, the selection rate of the performance state may be changeable depending on the operation mode. Specifically, for example, if the number of times the effect button 204 was pressed before the lever was turned on is less than 100 times, the effect state 1 is set, and if the number of times the effect button 204 was pressed before the lever was turned on is 100 times or more, the effect state 1 is set. If so, set the performance state 2. As a result, when the number of presses of the effect button 204 is small (less than 100 times), the time required for the press operation is short and it is possible to enter AT quickly, but since the effect state 2 is set, the left press navigation will appear, and the number of medals consumed before entering AT will increase. On the other hand, if the production button 204 is pressed many times (more than 100 times), the pressing operation takes a long time and it takes time to enter AT, but production state 1 is set, so the middle press navigation is It is possible to suppress the number of medals consumed until it appears and enters AT. In this way, different game features can be provided depending on the player's operations.

Furthermore, when releasing the AT stock, it may be possible to pass through both the first half of the precursor and the second half of the precursor, similarly to the first AT hit.

In addition, in the games shown in Figures 693 (E) to 694 (F), that is, the game in the second half of the first AT precursor game, when the AT stock is won while following the left push navigation, the effect that notifies the winning of the AT stock is as follows. The precursor game is not executed until the first hit AT starts. In addition, it will not be notified in any game other than the final game of the precursor game that is controlled after the initial AT ends, and will notify that the AT will be executed in the final game of the precursor game (notify that the AT has been stocked). It is desirable that the performance is not a performance that By not notifying the winning of the AT stock before the release of the first winning AT, the player does not know whether the AT stock exists or not, and can enjoy the game with a sense of tension after the first winning AT ends.

Furthermore, as described above, in the AT initial game number acquisition lottery, the C1 lottery has a smaller average number of games and is less advantageous than the A1 lottery. In other words, compared to the AT stock won when following the left-press navigation during the second half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the first half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the first half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the first to the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the second half of the first pronouncement will be more advantageous. The second half of the AT precursor is a state where the player enters AT after playing the remaining precursor games, and if the AT stock acquired in the second half of the AT precursor is given a greater advantage than the first AT, the player can earn a large amount of medals in a short period of time. This is because the burden on the hall will increase if they are acquired.

[11-4-2. Specific example of omen performance 3]
FIG. 701 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. (A) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the game during the second half of the sign. In the game (A), the special bell is won, and a left push navigation appears indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop, similar to FIG. 693(C). Furthermore, as described in the AT first hit table in Figure 688 and the AT stock lottery table in Figure 689, the AT first hit and AT stock winning rates when the special bell is established are extremely low (for example, 0). is desirable.

(B) shows a state in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped and then all reels are stopped in the game. Since the middle reel 301b is stopped first when the special bell with AT_FLG off is won, the bell stops at the bottom of all of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c, and two medals are paid out. In other words, the number of medals paid out is greater than when the left reel 301a is first stopped according to the left push navigation (in this case, one medal is paid out). In addition, a rare character holding a fan appears on the image display body 500, and a rare effect appears that provides support.

In (B), even though the special bell was established in the latter half of the sign and the left push navigation had occurred, the middle reel 301b was stopped first, so step S6764 is executed and C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on. That is, a disadvantageous situation for the player occurs in that the AT stock lottery is no longer held.

However, if the AT stock lottery is simply prohibited, the situation will be extremely disadvantageous for the player, so when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on, the AT stock lottery will not be held, but instead the pseudo bonus lottery that is advantageous to the player in step S6737 will be carried out. Note that it is desirable that the winning rate of the pseudo bonus is extremely lower than the winning rate of the AT stock lottery (AT stock lottery table in FIG. 689, pseudo bonus lottery table in FIG. 690). This is to prevent the player from creating an advantageous situation despite ignoring the left push navigation.

Furthermore, the rare effect mentioned above can only appear if you press the middle button (that is, the same operation as when following the navigation that appears during the first half of the sign), even though the left-press navigation appeared during the second half of the sign. This is a performance that does not appear depending on the results of a lottery such as a winning combination lottery or an AT lottery, and it is also a performance that will not appear if you operate the navigation system according to the instructions. Even if C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on due to a middle press, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by making a rare effect appear. Note that the AT stock lottery may be performed when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on, but it is desirable that the winning rate when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on is lower than when C1_KINSHI_FLG is off.

(C) is the state when the lever is turned on in the game in which the rare small winning combination (strong cherry) is won in the second half of the next game precursor of (B). In (C), no special effects are performed. (D) shows a state in which the player has won a cherry on the symbol changing device 300 in (C). There is no special performance in (D) either.

In the games (C) and (D), although a pseudo-bonus lottery is conducted, the winning rate is extremely low compared to the AT stock lottery. Here, for example, if a special effect such as the AT stock lottery (effects such as those shown in FIGS. 693(E) and 694(F)) is performed, even though the winning rate of the pseudo bonus is extremely low, the game It is desirable that no special effects be performed as mentioned above, as this may make people's expectations high.

In addition, in a game in which the left push navigation appears in the second half of the sign, even if the right reel 301c is first stopped, C1_KINSHI_FLG is not turned on. This is because if C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on in all operations other than the first stop of the left reel 301a, the player may be afraid of making an operation error and become excessively nervous, and the player may pay out more medals than planned. That's because there isn't. In other words, by setting the conditions for C1_KINSHI_FLG to be turned on (the rate at which AT lottery is executed decreases) to be the same as the pressing order in the first half of the omen, it is possible to create a sense of tension between the first half of the omen and the second half of the omen. can.

In addition, in the above example, when the special bell is won when AT_FLG is off, 2 medals will be awarded if the middle reel or right reel is made the first stop, and 1 medal will be given if the left reel is made the first stop. However, when the middle reel or right reel is first stopped, one medal may be paid out, and when the left reel is first stopped, two medals may be paid out.

As a result, when a special bell is won in the second half of the sign, if you press the middle button without following the left button navigation, not only will C1_KINSHI_FLG turn on, but the number of medals acquired by the special bell will also decrease, so the player must press the left button come to follow.

In addition, if a gaming method is performed in which the rate at which the lottery to transition to the AT state is executed decreases in the second half of the sign (a game in which the middle reel 301c is first stopped), the rate at which the lottery to transition to the AT state is executed decreases. Although this decreases, when viewed simply from the viewpoint of payout of medals, the rate at which the AT state transition lottery is executed is increased compared to a gaming method in which the left reel 301a is first stopped (a game in which the left reel 301a is first stopped).

[11-4-3: Another example of omen production 3]
FIG. 702 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the omen effect. FIG. 702(A) shows the same situation as FIG. 700(D), ie, a game where the stocked AT starts during the precursor to the AT's first hit. In the flowchart and lottery table described above, it is assumed that one AT is stocked when winning the AT stock lottery, but it may be possible to win a plurality of AT stocks in one AT stock lottery. That is, for example, if you win the AT stock lottery, the number of stocks will be determined by lottery. Here, it is assumed that a plurality of AT stocks have been acquired in the game during the second half of the precursor shown in FIGS. 693(E) to 694(F).

Note that, for example, although less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) of AT stocks can be acquired in one AT stock lottery, in order to prevent the player from obtaining an excessive number of medals, the number of AT stocks is The smaller the number, the higher the selection ratio (for example, the minimum stock number of one is 49152/65536, two is 8192/65536, etc.).

(B) shows a state in which AT has been completed. The same effect as in FIG. 700(A) is being performed. (C) is a game in which the second stocked AT precursor has started. Even if the AT ends in (B), the stock of AT remains, so the second stock AT precursor starts from the game following the end of the AT in (B). In (C), a rock-paper-scissors effect is being executed to notify whether or not the second stock AT entry is possible.

In this way, for each stocked AT, a notification effect (rock-paper-scissors effect) indicating whether or not the stock AT can be entered in the game immediately before the start of the stock AT is performed. However, regarding the notification effect when an AT stock is won, although it may be performed for the first AT stock, it is desirable that it not be performed for the second and subsequent AT stocks. If the notification effect is executed when the second and subsequent AT stocks are won, the player will be able to easily predict the number of stocks in advance, and the player will not be interested in the notification effect (rock, paper, scissors effect) that indicates whether or not the stock AT stock will start. This is because there is a risk of losing it.

(D) is a state in which all reels are stopped according to the left push navigation in the game (C). This notification performance is not performed here either. (E) is the next game after (D), and is a state in which AT has started. As shown in (E), in a game started by AT, an effect is executed to notify that AT has started for the first time.

Note that, as shown in (C) to (E), one game is selected as the number of games foreshadowing the second stock AT. In this way, when winning multiple AT stocks, it is desirable that the maximum number of games for the second and subsequent stock AT precursors be selected to be a shorter number of games than the number of games for the first stock AT precursor. . This is because, even though a plurality of AT stocks have been won, if the number of games leading to the second or subsequent stock AT is long, the player becomes irritated.

However, even for the second and subsequent stock ATs, it is desirable that the number of precursor games is 1 or more (that is, 0 games are not selected). This is because, if the number of precursor games for the second and subsequent stock ATs is 0, the player will become exhausted due to consecutive ATs, and the burden on the hole will become excessive. On the other hand, the number of precursor games for the second and subsequent stock ATs may be 0, and in this case, a large amount of medals can be quickly acquired by consecutive ATs.

Furthermore, when the maximum number of stocks (10) is obtained in one AT stock performance, it is desirable that all the precursors of the second and subsequent stock ATs be one game. As a result, stock AT starts at the beginning of one game, allowing players to guess that they have acquired the maximum number of stocks before releasing all of their stocks, which increases expectations. increase

Note that if a predetermined operation is performed and a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery may be held to increase the number of portent games for the second and subsequent stock ATs. The predetermined operation includes, for example, an operation of pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 three times before the starting lever 210, and the predetermined condition includes, for example, drawing a winning combination by pressing the starting lever 210. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the omen by the player's operation, which improves the interest of the player who wants to enjoy the omen effect. In addition, if a rare performance or the like is performed in the lottery, the interest of the players will not be reduced. Note that even if the start lever 210 is pressed after pressing the input button 206 different from the one-sheet input button 205, the lottery for delaying the release of the AT is not executed. In the example described above, the number of precursor games for the second and subsequent stock ATs is increased, but the number of precursor games for the first stock AT may be similarly increased.

[11-4-3: Specific example of omen production 4]
FIG. 703 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. (A) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the final game of the first half of the sign, and the same effect as in FIG. 693 (A) is performed. (B) shows a state in which all reels are stopped in the final game of the first half of the sign. In (B), the condition of step S6765 in FIG. 699 is satisfied, and the process of step S6766 is executed. That is, in (B), the left push navigation appears.

Specifically, in (B), the speaker also outputs the line "Left!". In this way, the mid-press navigation appeared in the first half of the sign, but before entering the second half of the sign (more precisely, when the first half of the game ended, but before the next game started) Furthermore, by notifying the player that the left reel 301a should be the first stop, it is possible to suppress mistakes in the order of pressing the reels in the second half of the premonition. Furthermore, by suppressing mistakes in the order of pressing the reels during the second half of the precursor, it is possible to prevent C1_KINSHI_FLG from being turned on during the second half of the precursor, that is, prevent the AT stock lottery from not being performed.

(C) is a state in which all reels are stopped in the final game of the first half of the sign, and is a continuation of (B). In (C), a line indicating that the left reel 301a should be the first stop is displayed on the image display 500, such as "Left!". The displayed lines are the same as those displayed when the lever is turned on during the second half of the sign. In addition, the line "Left!" displayed in (C) (hereinafter also referred to as the big left push line) is the "Left! ” (for example, FIG. 693(C), hereinafter also referred to as the small left press serif). Note that in (C), the operation instruction line (``Left!'') is still being output from the speaker.

(D) is the state when the lever is on in the first game of the second half of the prologue. The effect in (D) is the same as that in Figure 693 (C), but for example, the big left press dialogue that appeared in (C) is continuously displayed, and the dialogue for operation instructions from the speaker (" The difference is that "It's on the left!") is still output.

(E) is the state when the lever is on in the first game of the second half of the prologue, and is a continuation of (D). Although the big left push dialogue continues to be displayed on the image display body 500, the output of the operation instruction dialogue (“Left!”) from the speaker has ended. If dialogue continues to be output from the speaker, it may interfere with the games of other nearby players, so it is desirable that the output of the dialogue sound end before the display of the dialogue. Further, the big left press dialogue continues to be displayed until the first stop of the game. This makes it possible to suppress mistakes in the order in which the reels are pressed in the starting game in the latter half of the sign. On the other hand, the display of the dialogue may end before the output of the dialogue sound. This is because some players would like to enjoy the performance of the omen using the image display body 500.

Note that, for example, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 measures the time from sending the left push navigation command in step S6766 until the start lever 210 is pressed, and notifies the sub board 510 of the time. For example, when the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 determines that the measurement time has elapsed since the large left press serif was displayed, the CPU 1118 erases the large left press serif. Therefore, depending on the elapsed timing of the measurement time, the big left push lines may be deleted before the starting lever 210 is pressed, or after the starting lever 210 is pressed and before the first stop of the reel.

By doing this, if enough time has passed since the large left press line was displayed and the player has been sufficiently informed of the order of presses, the large left press line will be deleted and the game will be replaced with another effect. can attract people's attention. Note that the big left press line may be deleted after a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed without measuring the measurement time.

In addition, if the big left press dialogue is deleted after a predetermined time has passed, the predetermined time is set so that the big left press dialogue can be displayed across the first game and the next game of the second half of the sign. (Specifically, for example, about 5 seconds longer than the minimum time of 4.1 seconds for one game), or set a predetermined time so that the big left press dialogue is erased during the first game of the second half of the omen. (Specifically, for example, about 3 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest time for one game, 4.1 seconds, or the wait time when the game is played at the fastest time (that is, the maximum wait time) (approximately 1.5 seconds shorter than (approximately 2.5 seconds) It is preferable to perform a freeze effect in which the freeze time is set such that the shortest time of 4.1 seconds + freeze time>predetermined time is satisfied in the first game of the second half of the sign.

In addition, in FIG. 703, since the start lever 210 is pressed down before the large left press serif is deleted, the large left press serif continues to be displayed, but instead of the large left press serif being deleted, the small left press serif is displayed. A left-press line (that is, a line that is displayed in the second half of the sign when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is turned on when the lever is won) may be displayed. This display continues to be displayed until the first stop of the reels is made.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a is first stopped in the games of (D) and (E), and then all reels are stopped. In (F), the big left press dialogue has been deleted, and the same effect as in FIG. 693 (D) is performed.

Note that in the example of FIG. 703, as described above, the display size of the large left press serif is larger than the display size of the small left press serif, but the display size and display position of these serifs may be the same. In this case, as in the above-mentioned example, the lines that have been displayed since all the reels have stopped in the game that ends the first half of the sign can continue to be displayed when the lever is turned on in the game that starts the second half of the sign, but the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 When the lever is turned on, it is not necessary to send the left push navigation command to the sub-board 510.

In this case, even when the lever is on, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 displays the line based on the command transmitted in step S6766. By not transmitting the command again when the lever is turned on, it is possible to avoid failure or delay in receiving the command by the sub-board 510, and it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems in the display of the large left press serif.

In addition, in the second half of the game where the big left push dialogue continues to be displayed from (C), if the middle reel 301b is brought to the first stop without following the instructions of the big left push dialogue, the big left push dialogue The display time may be extended, or a small left press serif may be displayed.

In addition, in the second half of the game, if the middle reel 301b is brought to the first stop in a state where the large left press line has already been erased, the large left press line may be redisplayed, or the small left press line may be redisplayed. may be displayed. Through these processes, it is possible to make a player who made a mistake in the pressing order in the second half of the prologue understand the correct pressing order.

In addition, in the aforementioned number of portent games lottery table (FIG. 688), the number of portent games at the time of AT's first winning was 5 or more, but the number of portent games of 4 or less may be selectable. When the number of precursor games of 4 or less is selected in the first AT, for example, the second half of one game is executed, and the previous precursor game is set as the first half of the precursor game.

In this way, when the number of games in the second half of the sign is one game, it is desirable that the big left press dialogue be deleted at the latest during the one game (for example, 3 seconds after the start of display). If the number of games in the second half of the sign is 1 game, there is a high possibility that a confirmed effect announcing AT entry will be executed in that 1 game, so the big left push dialogue can be displayed during the entire period of the 1 game. This is because if this happens, it will interfere with such a confirmed performance (the above-mentioned rock-paper-scissors performance), and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. However, even in such a precursory latter half game consisting of only one game, if the middle reel 301b is first stopped after the large left press dialogue is erased, the large left press dialogue will be redisplayed or the small left press Messages may be displayed.

[11-4-4: Specific example 5 of omen production]
FIG. 704 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. The effect shown in FIG. 704 is an example of an effect performed when AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, that is, in the second half of the sign. (A) shows the state when the lever is turned on in a game in which a rare small winning combination is won in the second half of the sign. In (A), the same effect as in FIG. 693(E) is performed. In the game (A), it is assumed that the weak watermelon is won. However, the enemy character displayed in (A) may be displayed in a manner showing a watermelon (for example, the enemy character's clothes are green).

In addition, when the left reel 301a is first stopped, the weak watermelon is aligned upward to the right (that is, the watermelon is stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c) or aligned downward to the right. (In other words, the watermelon stops at the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c), and when the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c is first stopped, the lower stages are aligned (the left reel 301a, This is a watermelon symbol in which a watermelon stops at the bottom of the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c.

(B) shows a state in which the middle reel 301b is stopped as the first stop in the game (A). When the weak watermelon is established in the second half of the sign, the middle reel 301b is stopped as the first stop (that is, the same operation as when following the instructions (middle press navigation) when the special bell and the middle 1st bell are formed in the first half of the sign is performed. ) and a predetermined message are displayed on the image display body 500.

The predetermined message may be, for example, ``You can press the middle button, but if you press the left side first, the probability of drawing is higher! Ah! By the way, the probability of drawing is simply that it is easier to align the symbols. (hereinafter also referred to as a kind message) is displayed (in the figure, the above-mentioned message is omitted and is written as "You can press the middle button..."). Note that the kindness message may not only be displayed on the image display body 500, but may also be output as a sound from a speaker.

(C) is a state in which all the reels are stopped and weak watermelons are lined up. The kindness message has been deleted, and the same effect as shown in FIG. 694(F) is performed. Note that, as described above, when the middle reel 301b is brought to the first stop, the watermelons are aligned in the lower row. Therefore, when the middle reel 301b is first stopped and the maximum number of sliding frames on each reel is 4, in order to line up the watermelons, it is necessary for each reel to have a watermelon in the lower row, middle row, upper row, or upper row. It is necessary to press the reel stop button at the timing when the frame is located at the top two levels above (any of these five frames in total).

On the other hand, when the left reel 301a is first stopped, watermelons can be aligned either upward to the right or downward to the right. Therefore, when the left reel 301a is first stopped, in order to line up the watermelons, the watermelon must be on the bottom, middle, top, or 1 to 4 pieces above the top (any of these 7 pieces in total). It is only necessary to press the left reel stop button 211a at the timing when the reel is located at ( ). That is, when the left reel 301a is brought to the first stop, the player has more leeway in the timing of the eye press.

Therefore, by displaying the friendly message in (B), even a player playing the game on the slot machine 1 for the first time can learn the appropriate playing method. In order to reduce data capacity, instead of the message in (B), the message "Left!" similar to that in Figure 693 (C) etc. (i.e., the display recommending pressing left that is displayed during the first half of the sign) may be displayed.

Note that it is desirable that the kindness message be hidden after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display. This is because if the kind message is displayed even after enough time has passed for the player to fully understand the content of the kind message, the player feels that it is interfering with the performance performed on the image display body 500. be.

Furthermore, even after the predetermined time has elapsed and the kindness message is hidden, it is desirable that the kindness message can be displayed by pressing the middle reel stop button 211b without having to press the start lever 210 again. . This is to enable players who were unable to read the message while it was being displayed to be guided again about the gaming method. In other words, it is possible to display kindness messages multiple times in one game.

Note that it is possible to redisplay the kindness message without pressing the start lever 210 again in this way, but when the number of remaining portent games is 0 and the freeze effect is being executed (the process of step S6768 in FIG. 699 is not executed). ), the kindness message will not start displaying. This is to make the player concentrate on enjoying the AT game in a situation where the number of remaining precursor games is 0 and it is certain that the AT game will start from the next game.

In a 10-second freeze effect, for example, in the first 5 seconds, the screen suddenly blacks out and the blackout state continues, and in the latter 5 seconds, a display is displayed on the image display body 500 informing that AT has been won ( For example, a message such as "Congratulations!" is displayed. Note that the kindness message that was started to be displayed before the start of the freeze effect is erased by the time the last 5 seconds of the freeze effect starts at the latest.

In other words, when AT starts in the next game after the game in which the kindness message is displayed, the time required for the game is the game progress time plus 10 seconds of freeze time, so one kindness message is displayed. longer than the time taken.

Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kindness message is being displayed, only the display time of the kindness message may be reset while the kindness message continues to be displayed. Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kindness message is being displayed, the effect of displaying the kindness message may be restarted from the beginning. By performing these processes, a kind message is displayed until the predetermined time period elapses after the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again. Therefore, even if the player reads the message slowly, the display time of the kind message is extended, and the player can read the kind message to the end.

On the other hand, even if the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kindness message is being displayed, there is no need to reset the kindness message display time and redo the kindness message production. It does not have to affect the display performance. Some players press the middle reel stop button 211b multiple times in succession in order to reliably stop the middle reel 301b. This is to avoid this.

In the example of FIG. 704, the kind message has already been deleted at the time of (C), but since the kind message includes information advantageous to the player, the start lever 210 is pressed and the next time after the kind message is displayed. Even if the game starts, it is desirable to continue displaying the kind message until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the kind message. In this way, the kindness message can be displayed across multiple games (two games) in the second half of the harbinger, and cannot be displayed across multiple games unless the first game in the second half of the harbinger is finished within the predetermined time. It is also possible to display only one game.

However, when a game starts two games after the start of displaying the kindness message, it is desirable to forcibly hide the kindness message even if a predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of displaying the kindness message. This is because it is highly likely that the players play one game after another, thinking that the information in the kind message is unnecessary.

At this time, a new effect is executed by pressing the start lever 210, but for example, all of the display, sound, and light emission by the kindness message effect are changed to the display, sound, and light emission by the new effect. Prioritize. This allows the player to more reliably understand the gaming method. Further, for example, although the display of a kind message is given priority over the display based on the new performance, the new performance may be prioritized over the kind message performance regarding sound and light emission. This allows the player to understand the game method while also allowing the player to enjoy new effects.

Furthermore, for example, the new performance may be prioritized over the kindness message performance regarding all of the display, sound, and light emission. That is, in this case, the kindness message is deleted at the same time as the start of the new performance. As a result, especially if the new performance is a performance with high AT expectations, the player's sense of expectation is improved compared to the case where the friendly message continues to be displayed.

As mentioned above, the kind message is generally displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), but some players feel that the information on the kind message is unnecessary. Therefore, for example, at the start of the AT game, the kindness message is hidden. Furthermore, the 10 second freeze in step S6768 may not be executed. As a result, even if a kindness message is displayed in the final omen game, the kindness message can be erased by pressing the start lever 210 to immediately start the first AT game.

Furthermore, in this case, although the freeze effect in step S6768 is executed, the freeze time may be shortened. For example, if the freeze time is 0.5 seconds and the game is played at the fastest speed, the display time of the kind message will be 0.5 seconds of the freeze time plus the playing time of one game considering the weight4. .1 second is added, resulting in a total of 4.6 seconds, which can shorten the display time (5 seconds) of a kind message.

[11-4-5: Specific example of omen production 6]
FIG. 705 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an omen effect. (A) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the game following the game in which the puncture lottery in step S67315 was won in the first half of the sign, that is, the game in the relief state. As described above, after winning the flat tire lottery, all flags are turned off in step S67317, so the relief state is entered with the precursor state completed.

By providing a puncture lottery with a precursor as described above, even if the puncture changes to a precursor, it does not necessarily mean that the puncture goes into AT, so that the burden on the hole can be suppressed. On the other hand, by making it possible to enter a relief state after a precursor puncture, it is also possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In (A), an image of an enemy character is displayed on the image display body 100. Further, on the image display body 500, a left push navigation (that is, an operation instruction similar to that when the lever is turned on when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the first half of the sign) appears. Also, the enemy character's left-press navigation lines are displayed. Note that it is desirable that the enemy character and the dialogue be displayed in a manner that makes the player feel that something disadvantageous will happen if the player follows the dialogue, but no direct instruction to press the middle button is displayed. Further, a message such as "Don't be fooled by the enemy character!!" may also be displayed.

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped without following the left push navigation in (A). On the image display body 500, an image of a state in which damage has been caused to an enemy character is displayed. (C) shows a state in which all reels are stopped. An image of an enemy character being blown away is displayed.

In addition, in (B), if the left reel 301a is first stopped according to the navigation in (A), for example, the winning rate of AT in the relief state game will decrease, or the initial number of AT games at the time of AT winning will decrease. This results in a disadvantageous situation for the player, such as a decrease in the average value. When the left reel 301a is brought to a first stop, for example, an image of an enemy character being attacked may be displayed on the image display body 500 to suggest that the player is in a disadvantageous situation. good. In this way, by having a specification that allows a player to receive an advantageous lottery even if he or she does not follow the left-press navigation, it is possible to provide the player with strategy elements.

In the rescue state game, it may be set so that the AT first winning lottery can be received only when the reels are stopped in the correct pressing order. For example, the pressing order of the correct answer is 4 ways excluding the pressing order that stops the left reel 301a first (middle → right → left, middle → left → right, right → left → middle, right → middle → It may be possible that only one of the options on the left is the correct answer (the probability of winning the AT first lottery is 25% and the difficulty level for receiving the lottery is high), or three options are the correct answer. The specification may be such that the probability of receiving the AT first lottery is 75% and the difficulty level for receiving the lottery is low.

In this case, in the rescue state game, if the left reel other than the left reel 301a is stopped as the first stop, but the pressing order is not correct, in (C), for example, an image of being attacked by an enemy character is displayed. Good too.

In addition, when you win the AT lottery in the rescue state, if you played the game according to the operation instructions (middle press navigation) for the first half of the precursor in the game where you won the precursor puncture lottery, the D2-1 precursor game lottery table and operation instructions If the player has played the game without following the instructions, the number of portent games is drawn at step S6756 using the number of portent game drawing table of D2-2 (see FIG. 688 for both).

In the example of FIG. 688, for example, although the number of portent games can be selected between 0 and 4 games, if the operating instructions are followed (when using the number of portent game lottery table of D2-1), the maximum number of portent games can be selected. The number 4 games are selected at an extremely high rate. In addition, in a game in which the player wins the precursor blowout lottery, if the operation instructions in the first half of the precursor are not followed, the rescue state may not be entered in the first place. This is to penalize players who do not play according to instructions. Note that even if the player does not win at the first AT, it is desirable that the relief state game be completed in one game. By setting the rescue state to only one game, the player can enjoy the rescue state game with a sense of tension.

(D) is the state when the lever is turned on in the next game in the relief state. It is assumed that the first AT win is won in the rescue state, and in (D) the player enters the precursor state. It is desirable that the navigation indicating the push order not appear in the precursor to the winning AT in the rescue state. As described above, by not displaying the navigation indicating the order of pressing, the player can feel a sense of tension because he or she does not know whether or not the player has entered the premonition. Furthermore, since the number of winning AT precursor games in the rescue state game is four at most, the number of medals won by the player will not decrease significantly even if the navigation indicating the order of presses is not displayed.

On the other hand, the push order navigation may be displayed even after the next game in the rescue state. For example, the number of games for which the push order navigation can be displayed after the end of the rescue state is selected by lottery. For example, the push order can be displayed only in relief state games>The push order can be displayed up to the first omen game after the end of the relief state game>The push order can be displayed up to the second omen game after the end of the relief state game>The push order can be displayed in the relief state game The selection ratio in the above-mentioned lottery is set so that the pressing order can be displayed up to the third portent game after the end of the game>The pressing order can be displayed up to the fourth portent game after the end of the relief state game.

Note that a freeze effect may be performed in the game that has transitioned to the rescue state (for example, in (A)). In the freeze effect, all reels are first stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). For example, if a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the performance button 204 10 times or more) is performed during the 5 seconds of this stop state, a lottery will be drawn for the first AT in the relief state game, and if not, relief will be drawn. It is also possible to not perform the AT first winning lottery in this state.

When the predetermined operation is performed and an AT first winning lottery is performed, for example, although the reels are frozen, the reels are rotated in the forward direction (normal reel rotation direction) and an AT first winning lottery is performed. inform about something. On the other hand, if the predetermined operation is not performed and the AT first winning lottery is not held, for example, the reels may be kept in a stopped state or the reels may be rotated in the opposite direction to indicate that the AT first winning lottery has not been held. inform.

Note that in order to receive the AT first winning lottery in the relief state, a more difficult operation may be required than the operation of pressing the production button 204 ten or more times in the 5 seconds while the reels are in a stopped state in the above-mentioned example. Specifically, for example, if the production button 204 is pressed 20 times or more during the 5 seconds that the reels are stopped, or if the reels are stopped for 3 seconds (that is, shorter than the shortest playing time for one game (4.1 seconds)) There are cases where the production button 204 is pressed 10 times or more while the reels are in a stopped state. In other words, the rescue state may be a game state that is provided for a time shorter than the shortest playing time (4.1 seconds) of one game.

Note that, for example, if the AT first win is won in the relief state, a freeze effect may be executed in the final game of the precursor to make the time longer than other games of the precursor. As mentioned above, if AT is won in the rescue state, the navigation does not appear in the precursory situation, so a sudden freeze effect is performed and the player is notified of the first AT win, which sharply increases the player's sense of elation. be able to. Furthermore, in order to remind the player of an AT win, it is desirable that the AT win performance in the relief state be similar to the AT win performance (rock, paper, scissors performance) when the player goes through the foreshadowing described above.

[12. Chance zone production]
In this chapter, an example of the chance zone performance of the slot machine 1 will be explained. Slot machine 1 in this chapter refers to a normal game (a game in which an instruction does not occur (or an instruction occurs only with an extremely low probability) for the above-mentioned push order minor combination, although it is in the advantageous section described above). During the execution of the normal game (referred to as a normal game), an AT entry lottery, which is an example of an advantageous gaming state, is performed, and when an AT is won in the lottery, the AT game starts. Note that after winning the AT game, the AT game may be started after playing a precursor game of the number of games selected by lottery (for example, selected from 0 games to 32 games).

In addition, the slot machine 1 of this chapter performs a chance zone (hereinafter also referred to as CZ) entry lottery when executing a normal game, and if a CZ is won in the lottery, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) of CZ games are started. . Although the CZ game is an example of a normal game, it is also an advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to win AT with a higher probability than in normal games other than the CZ game. Note that, after winning the CZ game, the CZ game may be started after playing a precursor game of the number of games selected by lottery (for example, selected from 0 games to 16 games). Further, an instruction may be issued when the above-mentioned push order minor combination is won during the CZ game.

[12-1. Various tables]
Hereinafter, first, the small prize winning probability, state transition winning probability, etc. in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be explained. FIG. 706 is an example of a small role lottery table. The small winning lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. The small role lottery table includes the lottery value of each minor role for each state (general and inside BB (Big Bonus)), and the lottery value of each minor role for each state (general and inside BB (big bonus)), and the lottery value of each minor role when each minor role is won and the minor role is displayed in a predetermined manner on the symbol fluctuation display device 300. The number of medals to be paid out when the lines are aligned (generally called the active line) is defined. The small winning lottery is also called the A-1 lottery.

If you win BB in general, you will move to BB inside. When predetermined symbols are aligned on the symbol variation display device 300 inside the BB, the BB game starts, and after the BB game ends, the game returns to the general game.

Inside the BB, the probability of winning a replay is set higher than in the general public. In the slot machine 1 of this chapter, when a small winning combination is won in a game inside the BB, the small winning combination is given priority over the predetermined symbol. In the example of FIG. 706, a small winning combination is established with an extremely high probability within the BB (65535/65536), so it is extremely rare for the BB to win even within the BB. Furthermore, since the general public has a high probability of winning the BB (1/7.30), most of the normal games and AT games are executed inside the BB.

Further, even if the power of the slot machine 1 is turned off or the settings are changed while the slot machine 1 is inside the BB, the state remains inside the BB. However, if the RAM is cleared, the state will be initialized and the game will start from normal mode.

In addition, in the BB in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, the medals do not increase or only increase by a very small number (for example, in a BB game where 2 medals are paid out in a 2-player game, the number of medals is increased until a predetermined number of medals are paid out or a predetermined number of medals is paid out) The so-called zero bonus (the number of games played). Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, medals are increased not by bonuses but by AT games.

Note that the common bell is a bell that remains the same no matter what order the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c are stopped. In addition, the XYZ bell (X, Y, Z are mutually different numbers of 1, 2, or 3), which are the pressing order bells, causes the left reel 301a to stop at the Xth stop, the middle reel 301b to stop at the Yth stop, and the right reel 301c to stop. Bells are aligned only when Z-stopped, and if each reel is stopped in any other order, the bells will not line up on the reels and you will not be able to receive a payout, or the number of bells will be smaller than if the bells were won. (for example, one coin) is paid out. For example, in a game where 213 bells are achieved, the bells are aligned only when the middle reel 301b is stopped at the first stop, the left reel 301a is stopped at the second stop, and the right reel 301c is stopped at the third stop.

The winning probability of each small role is the quotient of the corresponding lottery value divided by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of all minor roles in the state, and the value in the probability column (winning probability) is the probability of winning for each minor role. Since it can be calculated from the lottery value, the small winning lottery table does not need to include a probability column. This also applies to other tables described later. In addition, in this chapter, the number of payouts is the same in general and inside BB.

FIG. 707 is an example of an AT initial winning lottery table. The AT first winning lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the AT first winning lottery table, the AT first winning lottery value in normal games other than CZ games is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The AT first lottery, which is held during regular games excluding CZ games, is also called the B-1 lottery.

FIG. 708 is an example of a CZ migration lottery table. The CZ transition lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the CZ transition lottery table, the lottery value for winning CZ in a normal game other than the CZ game is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The CZ transition lottery held during regular games excluding CZ games is also called the B-2 lottery.

FIG. 709 is an example of an AT first winning lottery table that is referred to at the start of each game in CZ (that is, when the lever is turned on (when the starting lever 210 is operated)). The AT first winning lottery table in FIG. 709 is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the AT first winning lottery table of FIG. 709, the lottery value for winning AT when the lever is turned on in the CZ game is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The first AT lottery that is held when the lever is turned on in a CZ game is also called the B-3 lottery.

FIG. 710 is an example of an AT first winning lottery table that is referred to during a pseudo game in CZ. The AT first winning lottery table in FIG. 710 is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the AT first winning lottery table of FIG. 710, the lottery value for winning AT during the pseudo game is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The AT first winning lottery conducted during the simulated game of the CZ game is also called the B-4 lottery.

It should be noted that the pseudo game is the following performance. The freeze effect starts at the start of the game or at a predetermined timing after the start of the game. During the freeze effect, for example, each reel may be stopped, or may rotate forward or backward. At a predetermined trigger during the freeze effect (for example, the operation of the start lever 210 or a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the freeze effect), each reel enters a pseudo-stoppable state. It should be noted that if the reels are stopped at the start of the freeze effect, the reels are assumed to rotate before entering a pseudo-stoppable state.

In a state in which each reel can pseudo-stop, each reel pseudo-stops at a predetermined trigger (for example, when a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the rotation, or when a reel stop button is pressed during the rotation, etc.). A pseudo-stop is, for example, a state in which the player can recognize the symbols corresponding to each piece, but the reels are not completely stopped (for example, the reels are slightly shaking). Note that, without pressing the reel stop button, the reels may automatically pseudo-stop after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the rotation.

After the pseudo-stop of each reel, the freeze effect ends at a predetermined trigger (for example, a predetermined time has passed since the pseudo-stop, or the start lever 210 is operated, etc.), and reel rotation in the actual game starts.

As mentioned above, a pseudo game is just a type of production, so a small role that appears to have won during a pseudo stop during a pseudo game is not actually realized, and the payout corresponding to the small role is I can't accept it. That is, during the pseudo game, not only the image display body 500 but also each reel (the stop system based on the pseudo stop) functions as a means for displaying effects.

Also, during normal gaming, after pressing each reel stop button, the reels can be stopped by sliding up to 4 frames, for example, but when the reels are spinning during a pseudo game, the reels can be stopped by pressing the reel stop button. When the reels are pressed to a pseudo-stop, there is no need to set an upper limit on the number of frames that can be slid. That is, during a pseudo game, no matter what timing the reel stop button is pressed, the reels can be pseudo-stopped in the stop shape determined by the time the reel stop button is pressed. It should be noted that, as in the normal game, it may be possible to allow only a maximum of 4 frames to slide.

Further, although the details will be described later, if the player continues playing the game while keeping the one-piece insertion button 205 pressed during CZ, there is a higher probability of winning AT than when the button 205 is not kept pressed. Table 2 is referred to in the B-4 lottery when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed, and table 1 is referred to in the B-4 lottery when the one-sheet input button 205 is not kept pressed.

Although it is troublesome for the player to play the game while keeping the single coin insertion button 205 pressed, the machine percentage (ball output rate) improves because the AT winning rate increases. On the other hand, by playing the game while maintaining the pressed state of the one-card insertion button 205, it becomes difficult for the player to play the game with so-called full weight (specifically, if the player's one hand is not playing the game) As a result, the increase and decrease in the number of balls rolled out per unit time becomes more gradual, making it easier for the hall to predict the number of balls rolled out and, in turn, making it easier to formulate business plans.

Furthermore, in order to prevent the one-sheet insertion button 205 from remaining pressed regardless of the player's operation, the structure of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is such that the upper surface of the surrounding area around the button and the upper surface of the button are approximately flat. (It is desirable that the structure is such that even if an object with a certain weight and a flat bottom is placed on the single-sheet input button 205, the single-sheet input button 205 will not be pressed down.)

In addition, during CZ, you can win AT at a higher probability than in a normal game even if you do not keep the one-card insertion button 205 pressed, so for players who want to play as many games as possible, inserting one card is a good idea. You can also choose not to press button 205.

FIG. 711 is an example of an AT additional lottery table. The AT add-on lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the AT add-on lottery table, the lottery value for winning the AT add-on is defined for each small winning combination won in the game.

The AT additional lottery is executed, for example, in place of the AT first winning lottery (B-1 lottery) when the lever is turned on during an AT precursor or during AT. When the AT add-on lottery is won, an AT add-on game number lottery is performed with reference to an AT add-on game number lottery table to be described later, and the selected number of AT games are added. The AT additional lottery is also called the C-1 lottery.

FIG. 712 is an example of an AT additional game number lottery table. The AT additional game number lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. The AT add-on lottery table defines a lottery value for winning each number of AT add-on games. The AT additional game number lottery is also called the C-2 lottery.

FIG. 713 is an example of a specialized zone transition lottery table. The specialized zone transition lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. Although details will be described later, during AT, a transition lottery to the specialized zone is executed instead of a CZ transition lottery. The specialized zone transfer lottery is also called the C-3 lottery. Note that the specialized zone refers to a zone where the number of AT games is added with extremely high probability or every game.

FIG. 714 is an example of a red 7 stop pattern table. The red 7 stop pattern table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. The details will be described later, but a pseudo game is performed during CZ, and when the game is executed according to a predetermined procedure during CZ, an AT first winning lottery is performed, and in the pseudo game, red 7 stops, and the stop type of the right reel 301c is determined with reference to the red 7 stop pattern table.

The AT expectation degree in each game in CZ is suggested by the stop position of the red 7 on the right reel 301c of the pseudo game in the game. For example, in the example of FIG. 714, the AT expectation level is higher in the order of middle red 7>upper red 7>lower red 7>lower frame (one frame below the lower) red 7>. In particular, the red 7 in the middle row is selected only when AT is won, that is, it is a roll that confirms AT winning.

FIG. 715 is an example of the symbol arrangement of each reel in the slot machine 1 of this chapter. FIG. 716 is an explanatory diagram showing an image of reels during CZ. As shown in FIG. 716, in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, a transparent liquid crystal 301ca is arranged to cover the upper stage of the right reel 301c, and a transparent liquid crystal 301cb is arranged to cover the lower stage of the right reel.

During CZ (at least during a pseudo game during CZ), images are displayed on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb, and the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c become invisible. In addition, in states other than CZ, the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb may be in a transparent state without displaying images, or images may be displayed as long as the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c are visible. Good too.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 714, when Red 7 stops on the upper row of the right reel 301c during CZ (very hot result) than when Red 7 stops on the lower row (very hot result), There are high expectations for AT to win. According to the symbol arrangement in FIG. 715, the symbols in the middle row of the right reel 301c are both blank when the red 7 stops at the lower row of the right reel 301c and when the red 7 stops at the upper row of the right reel 301c.

Therefore, by displaying images on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb during CZ to make the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c invisible, if a blank stops at the middle row of the right reel 301c, the player can Since it is not possible to recognize whether the red 7 has stopped on the upper or lower row of the right reel 301c, the player can maintain a sense of tension even when the right reel 301c is stopped.

Although the details will be described later, by performing a specific operation during CZ, the images displayed on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb can be erased, making the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c visible. You can also do it.

Note that the slot machine 1 may have a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c, for example, instead of the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb. In this case, for example, the initial position of the movable body is a position where the symbols of each reel are visible, and during CZ, the movable body moves to a position covering the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c, Make the upper and lower tiers invisible.

[12-2. Specific example of CZ production]
First, in order to make it easier to understand the outline of the CZ game, an example of the CZ performance will be explained before describing a flowchart for executing the CZ game. FIG. 717, FIG. 718, and FIG. 719 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects during CZ. FIG. 717(A) shows a state in which all reels of a game in which CZ has been won are stopped. In the game where the CZ is won, a freeze effect occurs for 5 seconds after the reels are all stopped, and the start lever 210 cannot be operated during the freeze effect, so the next game, which is the starting game of CZ, cannot be started. Can not. When the freeze effect starts, a message indicating that the CZ has been won is displayed on the image display body 500. For example, CZ is continuously executed for a maximum of 10 games, and if AT is won, CZ is discontinued in that game and AT starts from the next game.

(B) is a state in which all the reels of the game in which CZ has been won are stopped, and is a continuation of (A). In (B), the freeze effect continues from (A). If the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed during the CZ, a message is displayed on the image display body 500 indicating that the user can receive a preferential AT lottery during the CZ.

Further, in order to make sure that the player recognizes that the one-piece input button 205 is to be pressed, an image of the one-piece input button 205 with an arrow is further displayed on the image display body 500. Furthermore, an image of the MAX input button 206 may also be displayed on the image display body 500 in order to prompt the player to start the next game, which is the starting game of CZ.

(C) is a state in which the freeze effect in (B) has been canceled, the lever has been turned on, and the CCZ game has started (the state when the lever is on). In CZ, a pseudo game starts when the lever is turned on. The image display 500 continues to display an image of the one-sheet input button 205 with an arrow. In addition, since the CZ has started, the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is wrapped in an effect in order to give the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 a stronger impression on the player.

As mentioned above, if you keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed during CZ, you can receive the preferential AT lottery during CZ. ). In addition, in particular, in the AT first winning lottery table for CZ in FIG. If it is a cherry, the lottery value is 0, that is, the AT lottery is not performed. In other words, if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not kept pressed, not only will the user not receive preferential lottery values, but the frequency of AT lottery will be reduced compared to the case where the button 205 is kept depressed.

Therefore, in order to prevent the player from forgetting to keep the button pressed, the image indicating the instruction to continue operating the one-piece insertion button 205 will continue to be displayed even if the pseudo game ends and the main game begins, and the CZ Even if the game moves to the second game, it continues to be displayed. In other words, the continuous operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205 can be displayed across multiple games, and will continue to be displayed until the CZ ends (until the gaming state shifts to a gaming state different from the CZ). It is something that

Note that the single-sheet input button 205 can be pressed not only during the CZ game, but also when the game is not in progress (from the third stop during CZ until the start lever 210 is operated). It is preferable that an image indicating operation instructions be displayed. For example, this is to ensure that even a player who starts playing on the slot machine 1 in the middle of a CZ will recognize the operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205. In order to ensure that the operating instructions are recognized, a so-called demo screen etc. is not displayed when the game is not progressing in the CZ (from the third stop in the CZ until the start lever 210 is operated). It is more desirable.

Note that after the instruction to operate the 1-piece insertion button 205 in (B) appears, a telop image (“Keep pressing 1BET!”) showing an instruction to keep pressing the 1-piece insertion button 205 as shown in FIG. 719 appears. is preferably displayed on the image display body 500.

It is also desirable that this telop image remains displayed even if the game ends, for example, until CZ ends (including a state where the game is not in progress). Note that for reasons of drawing space, the display of the relevant telop image is omitted in drawings for CZ effects such as FIG. 717.

In addition, in FIG. 717(C), the lamps provided on the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are made to emit light, and the lamp provided on the right reel 301c is made not to emit light, and the player is asked to press the reel stop button to be operated. You can make it easier to understand. Furthermore, images are displayed on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb, which obstructs the visibility of the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c.

Although details will be described later, when the right reel 301c is brought to the first stop (stop during a pseudo game indicates a pseudo stop) in a pseudo game during CZ, the AT non-lottery flag is turned ON in the pseudo game. , you will not be able to win AT. Therefore, a message indicating an instruction to stop the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b before the right reel 301c (that is, an instruction to operate the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b) is displayed on the image display body 500. There is.

Furthermore, in order to make the instructions easier for the player to understand, the image display body 500 displays images of the left reel stop button 211a and middle reel stop button 211b with effects, and an image of the right reel stop button 211c. A display with a cross mark placed above and a are displayed.

(D) shows a state in which the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped according to the instructions in (C). In addition, during the CZ pseudo game, if you make the first or second stop of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, aiming at the red 7 in the middle row (that is, the middle row or the upper frame within 4 frames from the middle row) If you press the reel stop button at the timing when red 7 is located in ), red 7 will stop at the middle stage of the left reel 301a and right reel 301c. Note that as long as the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are respectively brought to the first stop or the second stop, the red 7 may be stopped at the middle stage regardless of the timing at which the reel stop button is pressed.

In addition, since the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped and only the right reel 301c is rotating, a cross mark is placed on the image display body 500 on the image of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b. and a display with an effect wrapped around the right reel stop button 211c are displayed. Further, on the image display 500, a message indicating an instruction to stop the red 7 (that is, an instruction to operate the right reel stop button 211c) is displayed in the middle row of the right reel.

Further, in order to make the instruction easier to understand, the lamps provided on the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b may not emit light, and the lamp provided on the right reel 301c may emit light.

(E) is a state in which the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b are stopped, and is a continuation of (D). For example, it is the same as (D) except that if the red 7 stops in the middle of the right reel 301c, a message indicating that it is extremely hot is displayed on the image display 500.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b are stopped, and is a continuation of (E). As explained using FIG. 714, in the pseudo game during CZ, the AT winning expectation differs depending on the stop position of the red 7 on the right reel 301c. In addition, due to the pattern arrangement of the right reel 301c described above, in a state where the visibility of the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c is obstructed by the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb, red 7 is stopped at the upper or lower row of the right reel 301c. In this case, the player cannot recognize in which direction Red 7 has stopped.

Therefore, for players who want to know exactly where Red 7 stops, the details will be described later, but for example, depending on the amount of operation of the start lever 210, the images on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb are erased. The upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c are gradually made easier to see.

In (F), as an instruction to operate the starting lever 210, for example, an image of the starting lever 210 is displayed on the image display 500 along with an arrow, and if you want to know the stop position of the red 7, operate the starting lever 210. A message is displayed indicating that it is OK. In other words, the instruction in (F) is not an effect that announces or suggests the result of the AT lottery, but is an operation instruction for improving the visibility of the reels. It should be noted that since the pseudo game is just a performance, the reels during the pseudo game are part of the performance display. In other words, the instruction in (F) can be said to be a display for canceling the display (the display of the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb) that obstructs the visibility of the effect display. Note that, for example, the instruction to operate the starting lever 210 in (F) may be displayed until the starting lever 210 is operated.

In (C) to (E), instructions for the two operation parts, the single sheet input button 205 and the reel stop button, appear at the same time, but in (F), an instruction for the start lever 210 is added, and three Instructions for the operation unit appear at the same time.

For example, in (C), operation instructions for the reel stop button to stop the left reel and middle reel are displayed, and in (D) to (F), operation instructions for the reel stop button to stop the right reel are displayed. As shown, the operation instruction for the reel stop button can be displayed multiple times in one game (including the pseudo game and the main game).

In addition, in (D) to (F), if you stop the right reel by following the operation instructions for the reel stop button to stop the right reel, the AT winning is confirmed by the stop shape of red 7 as shown in Figure 714 ( In other words, there are cases in which the lottery results are directly announced (AT confirmed when middle red 7 stops) and cases where AT is expected (a chance when upper red 7 or lower red 7 stops).

Furthermore, even if you win AT in CZ, as shown in FIG. It is desirable that the probability is set lower than the probability (7/8) of stopping. This is because if the probability of Red 7 stopping in the middle row is set high, the player will lose expectations for the AT lottery result in the game and may lose interest when Red 7 does not stop in the middle row. be.

FIG. 718(G) shows a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during the pseudo game during CZ according to the instructions in (D) to (F), and the instruction display for the reel stop button is also erased. There is. In (G), red 7 is stopped in the middle of the right reel 301c. During the CZ pseudo game, if you aim for the red 7 on the top row of the right reel 301c and make the third stop (that is, press the reel stop button at the timing when the red 7 is located on the top row or one piece above the top row). ), Red 7 will stop at the stop position determined using the Red 7 stop pattern table. Note that, regardless of the timing at which the reel stop button is pressed, the red 7 may be stopped at the stop position determined using the red 7 stop pattern table for the right reel 301c.

Furthermore, in (G), the player does not follow the instruction to operate the starting lever 210, and the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c remain invisible due to the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb. In addition, in (G), since the red 7 is stopped in the middle of the right reel 301c, a message (Good Job!!) indicating that there is a high possibility of AT winning is displayed on the image display body 500.

Although details will be described later, the remaining time of the freeze effect is overwritten to 5 seconds after the third stop of the pseudo game. That is, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the third stop, the freeze effect ends and the reels start rotating in a normal game. Also, during these 5 seconds, the notification effect of the AT lottery result can be executed. In (G), an image of the main character used for the notification effect is displayed on the image display body 500. In (G), an image of the main character standing is displayed.

Note that even after the third stop, an image with an arrow for instructing to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed is displayed on the image display body 500 until the CZ ends. There is a possibility that multiple CZ games are played consecutively, and if you stop pressing the 1-card insertion button 205 in the middle, the AT winning rate in the games after the cancellation will be lower than the 1-card insertion button 205. This is because it will drop compared to if it were continued.

(H) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation of (G). In (H), the freeze effect is continuing. A message indicating that the AT lottery result will be announced by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(I) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation of (H). In (I), the freeze effect is continuing. A message instructing to press the MAX input button 206 repeatedly and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

In (H) and (I), instruction effects for two operation units, a single sheet input button 205 and a MAX input button 206, appear. As mentioned above, in FIGS. 717(C) to 717(E), instruction effects for two operating units also appeared, and these two operating units were the one-sheet input button 205 and the reel stop button. In this way, while instructions for multiple operation units are being executed, the player will be required to perform various operations as the operation unit to be operated changes, so the player must carefully observe the instructions. I started playing games and never got tired of them.

(J) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation of (I). In (I), the freeze effect is continuing. It is assumed that the player follows the instruction to repeatedly hit the MAX input button 206. The image display body 500 displays an image of the main character wrapped in an aura and a message (Yes!!) indicating that the player has won AT.

In addition, in (J), it is announced that you have won AT, but the details will be explained later, but if you win AT in a pseudo game during CZ, the game that has finished the pseudo game and transitioned to the real game is not yet available. Since the AT state is not set, if you erase the character or instructions wearing the aura displayed in (J) in this game, you may quit the game when the game ends. Therefore, it is preferable to continue displaying the character and instructions wearing the aura displayed in (J) until the game shifts to the AT state.

Note that if the MAX input button 206 is not repeatedly pressed, the AT lottery result will be notified after the end of the freeze effect and by the end of the normal game that starts immediately after the pseudo game. Note that if AT has not been won, for example, even if the MAX input button 206 is repeatedly pressed, the main character will not be covered with an aura and will collapse by the end of the freeze effect.

Note that, in order to leave the player with the aftertaste of the CZ being executed, the instruction effect of the start lever 210 may be displayed across the CZ and at the start of the normal game after the CZ ends. However, in regular games that are not simulated games, hiding the reels will increase the difficulty of the eye rolls and may cause players to miss out on small prizes, putting them at a disadvantage. It is desirable to display it on the image display body 500. At this time, the images on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb obstruct the visibility of the effect image displayed on the image display body 500, and when the start lever 210 is operated, the images on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb are displayed on the image display body 500. 500 to improve the visibility of the effect image.

FIG. 720 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the effect during CZ. Following the effects shown in FIGS. 717(A) to (F), the effect shown in FIG. 720 is performed. Mainly, the differences from FIG. 718 will be explained. In (G2), the right reel 301c is stopped at the third stop during the CZ pseudo game according to the instructions in (D) to (F). In (G2), symbols other than red 7 are stopped in the middle row of the right reel 301c. Furthermore, if Red 7 is stopped at the top or bottom of the right reel 301c, a blank will be stopped at the middle stage, and if Red 7 is stopped at the bottom of the frame of the right reel 301c (one frame below the bottom stage), it will be blank at the middle stage. The bell has stopped.

Furthermore, in (G2), the player does not follow the instruction to operate the starting lever 210, and the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c remain invisible due to the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb. Also, in (G2), the red 7 is not stopped in the middle row of the right reel 301c, so although the probability of AT winning is not high, there is a message indicating that there is still a chance (it is too early to give up! ) is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, in (G2), an image of the main character falling down is displayed on the image display body 500.

(H2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during the pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation of (G2). In (H2), the freeze effect is continuing. By repeatedly pressing the MAX input button 206, a message indicating that the AT lottery result will be announced (If the main character stands up by repeatedly pressing the MAX input button 206, the AT lottery is won; if the main character does not stand up, the AT lottery result is not won) and a MAX with an arrow. An image of the input button 206 is displayed on the image display body 500.

(I2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation of (H2). In (I2), the freeze effect is continuing. A message instructing to press the MAX input button 206 repeatedly and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(J2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during a pseudo game during CZ, and is a continuation of (I2). (J2) is the performance when AT is not won in CZ. A message (boo...) indicating that the AT was not won and the main character who was unable to stand up are displayed. Although not shown, if AT is won in CZ, the same effect as in Figure 718 (J) will be performed, except that red 7 is not stopped in the middle of the right reel 301c. .

(H2) is a state in which the pseudo game has ended, and is a continuation of (J2). A message indicating that the pseudo game has ended is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, the operation instruction image for the one-sheet input button 205 continues to be displayed.

(I2) is a state in which the pseudo game has ended and the real game has started. However, it is assumed that a weak chance winning combination or a strong chance winning combination has been selected as the winning combination when the lever is turned on. Here, the weak chance hand is a "bonus symbol" on the upper row of the left reel 301a, a "bonus symbol or watermelon" on the middle row of the middle reel 301b, and a "red 7" on the upper row of the right reel 301c (the red 7 is on the middle row of the right reel 301c. Suppose that the hit (unstoppable) is a losing move that can be stopped. In addition, the strong chance winning combination is a stoppable loss with a "bonus symbol" on the upper row of the left reel 301a, a "bonus symbol or watermelon" on the middle row of the middle reel, and a "red 7" on the middle row of the right reel.

After the pseudo game ends, the main game starts, for example, when a predetermined time period elapses or when the starting lever 210 is operated. The effect of (I2) is the same as that of FIG. 717(C). In the case where a weak chance role or a strong chance role is selected as a winning role when the lever is turned on, if the AT lottery in the pseudo game is not won, a performance similar to CZ may be performed in the main game. That is, after (I2), the same performance as after (D) is performed in this game.

In the main game in such a case, by executing the same instruction performance as in the pseudo game, the player can reawaken the sense of expectation of the player who was disappointed in not being able to win AT in the pseudo game. .

As shown in the example of the small winning lottery table in FIG. 706, the appearance rate of a strong chance winning combination (that is, the probability that Red 7 will stop at the middle stage of the right reel 301c) is higher than the appearance rate of a weak chance winning winning combination (that is, the probability that Red 7 will stop at the middle stage of the right reel 301c). It is desirable that the probability that Red 7 does not stop in the middle row be lower than that. As a result, even in the pseudo game, even if the same effect as the pseudo game appears in the main game, the probability that Red 7 will stop in the middle of the right reel 301c is lower than the probability that Red 7 will stop in the middle of the right reel 301c. The probability is higher. In other words, neither the production in the pseudo game nor the production similar to the pseudo game in the main game will arouse excessive expectations.

FIG. 721 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the operation amount of the starting lever 210 during the pseudo game of the CZ game and the visibility state of the symbols on the lower row of the right reel 301c hidden by the transparent liquid crystal 301cb. In FIG. 721, the relationship between the lower stage of the right reel 301c and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb will be described, but the same applies to the relationship between the upper stage of the right reel 301c and the transparent liquid crystal 301ca.

As described above, an image is displayed on the transparent liquid crystal 301cb during the CZ, so that the entire lower stage of the right reel 301c is prevented from being viewed until the starting lever 210 is operated. (A) shows the visual state when the starting lever 210 is operated to a position of 3/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position. In this case, for example, the image in the upper 3/10th part of the transparent liquid crystal 301cb is erased, and the pattern in that part becomes visible. (B) shows the visual state when the starting lever 210 is operated to a position of 8/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position. In this case, for example, the image in the upper 8/10th part of the transparent liquid crystal 301cb is erased, and the pattern in that part becomes visible.

In other words, when the blank symbol No. 11 stops in the middle of the right reel 301c in a pseudo game, by following the instruction to operate the starting lever 210 in FIG. 717(F), the visibility of the reels improves and the player It is possible to know the stop position of Red 7 and, by extension, the AT expectation level. On the other hand, for players who do not want to know the AT expectation level until the notification effect (repeated hit effect of the MAX input button 206) is performed, by ignoring the instruction to operate the start lever 210, the player cannot know the AT expectation level. , can maintain a sense of tension.

Note that the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 is determined in real time. For example, when the starting lever 210 is operated to 10/10 of its maximum range of motion, the image of the upper 10/10th of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cb is erased (that is, it is all visible), but when the player presses the starting lever 210 When the applied force is weakened and the starting lever 210 is operated only up to 3/10 of its maximum movable width, the image is erased only up to 3/10 of the upper part of the transparent liquid crystal 301cb. In other words, in order to maintain good visibility of the reels, the player needs to maintain the operating state of the starting lever 210.

Note that, as described above, it is considered that many players continue to press the one-piece insertion button 205 because the AT lottery value is preferentially treated if the one-piece insertion button 205 is kept pressed during the CZ. In order to maintain good visibility of the reels while receiving the preferential AT lottery, the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the start lever 210 are placed at a distance that allows a typical adult to operate them simultaneously with one hand. It is desirable that

However, even with this arrangement, it is difficult for the player to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the start lever 210 at the same time. When the storage release switch 209 (storage medal settlement switch) is operated when 3/10 or more is visible or all the symbols on the reels (10/10) are visible, the start lever 210 The predetermined visual recognition state may be maintained even if the operation is stopped.

Note that the instruction to operate the starting lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reels may be erased at a timing after the starting lever 210 is operated in accordance with the operating instruction (for example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation). If the right reel is fully visible (10/10 is visible) and the operation instructions remain displayed, it may interfere with the display of other effects and the player may not be able to fully enjoy the game. This is because there is.

In addition, the operation instructions are generally displayed every game during CZ, but as mentioned above, the player operates the storage release switch 209 and selects to maintain a good visibility state. In this case, since the player's intention has been confirmed, the operation instruction may not be displayed at all in subsequent games in the CZ.

In addition, when you select to maintain a good visibility state and do not display any operation instructions, the visibility state that is being maintained may be changed (for example, from 8/10 to 5/10). Therefore, when the storage release switch 209 is operated again, it is preferable to initialize the visibility state before the change (to 0/10, that is, the invisible state). Furthermore, the timing for instructing the operation of the starting lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reels is not the timing when the storage release switch 209 is operated again, but is displayed after the timing when the storage release switch 209 is operated again. (Timing to be displayed every game during CZ) It is better to do this. Further, in this way, each time the storage release switch 209 is pressed, maintenance and release may be repeated.

Note that the operation instruction is displayed after the second stop of the pseudo game of the CZ start game, but the starting lever 210 is not activated before the display of the operation instruction (for example, after the first stop and before the second stop in the pseudo game). Even when operated, the degree of visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c (display range of images displayed on the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb) may be changeable. If the starting lever 210 is operated before the second stop of the pseudo game and the degree of visibility of the upper and lower right reel 301c is changed, for example, the instruction may not be displayed after the second stop. , it may be determined by a lottery based on a predetermined distribution whether or not to display the instruction.

In addition, if the start lever 210 is not operated even though the operation instruction is displayed, there is a possibility that the player is not aware of the operation instruction, so the operation instruction may be displayed over the next game. It may be displayed continuously.

As mentioned above, by keeping the one-piece input button 205 pressed, you can receive a preferential AT lottery, and by pressing the right reel stop button 211c (right reel 301c stop type), you can receive a lottery. It is possible to suggest the result, and if the reel stop buttons are not pressed in the correct order, the AT lottery cannot be won. In other words, it can be said that maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and operating the reel stop button are closely related to the transition to the AT game. Therefore, for each of the operation instruction for instructing to maintain the pressed state of the one-sheet input button 205 and the operation instruction for instructing the operation of the reel stop button, multiple types of production variations (for example, display mode with or without effects) , different display sizes, etc.) is desirable. By having various performance patterns, the player will not get bored with these operation instruction performances and will be able to perform the operations more reliably.

On the other hand, when the start lever 210 is operated, the visibility of the production display is improved, but the more closely the transition to the AT game is related to the more the one-sheet input button remains pressed and the reel stop button is operated. It's not that I'm doing it. Therefore, it is preferable that the operation instruction for operating the starting lever 210 has only one pattern of effect (although multiple types of effect variations may be provided).

[12-3. Various flows for CZ production]
Next, an example of processing for realizing CZ effect will be explained. FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing an example of the flag processing in step S107 in FIG. 645. This flowchart shows an example of the process until each reel stop button becomes valid. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for a winning combination (A-1 lottery) according to the random numbers extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value indicated by the minor lottery table of FIG. 706 (S70001 ).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs an AT first winning lottery (B-1 lottery) according to the small winning combination won in step S70001 and the lottery value indicated by the AT first winning lottery table in FIG. 707 (S70002).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT first win was won in the B-1 lottery (S70003). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first win has been won (S70003: Yes), it sets the AT flag to ON (S70004) and sets the AT counter (a counter that counts the number of remaining AT games) to 100. The flag is set (S70005), and the flag processing ends.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first win has not been won (S70003: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 transfers to CZ according to the small winning combination won in step S70001 and the lottery value indicated by the CZ transfer lottery table in FIG. 708. A lottery (B-2 lottery) is held (S70006). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the CZ transition has been won in the B-2 lottery (S70007).

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ transition has been won (S70007: Yes), it sets the CZ flag to ON (S70008) and sets the CZ counter (a counter that counts the number of remaining CZ games) to 10. (S70009), and the flag processing ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ transition has not been won (S70007: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 ends the flag processing.

FIG. 723 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed when all reels are stopped (third stop). The process in FIG. 723 is executed instead of the ART game determination process in step S320 in FIG. 675. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the AT flag is on (S70101). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is on (S70101: Yes), it transmits an AT command to the sub board 510 (S70102), and ends the process.

When determining that the AT flag is off (S70101: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the CZ flag is on (S70103). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ flag is off (S70103: No), it ends the process.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ flag is on (S70103: Yes), it transmits a CZ start command to the sub board 510 (S70104). Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes a freeze process for 5 seconds (S70105). During this 5-second freeze, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 executes, for example, the effect described in FIGS. 717(A) and 717(B).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the one-sheet input button 205 is pressed (S70106). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the one-sheet input button 205 is pressed (S70106: Yes), it sets the press-down maintenance flag to ON (S70107), and ends the process. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the one-sheet input button 205 is not pressed (S70106: No), the process ends.

Note that the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 continues to monitor whether the single-sheet input button 210 is pressed during CZ (that is, while the CZ flag is on), for example, even after the press-down maintenance flag is set to on. , when it is detected that the one-sheet input button 210 is not pressed, the press maintenance flag is reset to OFF. As a result, during CZ, when pressing the one-sheet insertion button 210 is interrupted, the player cannot receive the preferential AT lottery. Note that the determination in step S70106 whether to maintain the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be made until the time when the starting lever 210 is operated at the start of the next game. That is, if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed down when the lever is turned on in the CZ start game, the press-down maintenance flag may be set to on.

FIG. 724 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flag processing in step S107 in FIG. 645 when the CZ flag is on. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery of winning combinations (A-1 lottery) according to the random numbers extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery values indicated by the minor lottery table of FIG. 706 (S70201 ).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the value of the CZ counter (S70202). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs an AT first winning lottery (B-3 lottery) according to the small winning combination won in step S70201 and the lottery value indicated by the CZ medium AT first winning lottery table in FIG. 709 (S70203).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT first win was won in the B-3 lottery (S70204). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first win has been won (S70204: Yes), it sets the AT flag to ON (S70205) and sets the AT counter (a counter that counts the number of remaining AT games) to 100. The CZ flag is set (S70206), the CZ flag is set to OFF (S70207), and the process moves to step S70208, which will be described later.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first win has not been won in the B-3 lottery (S70204: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 sets the freeze time to 1 hour and starts the freeze process (S70208). During this freeze, the pseudo game shown in FIG. 717(C) etc. is played.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 starts pseudo rotation of each reel (reel rotation in a pseudo game) (S70209). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns each reel stop button into a valid state for pseudo-stopping the reels (S70210), and ends the process. Note that although reel rotation and stopping in the pseudo game is a type of performance, only the main board 409 can execute the process of rotating and stopping the reels, so these processes are executed by the main board 409. In addition, especially in this chapter, there are processes in which the AT winning rate etc. change depending on the operation mode etc. during the simulated game, that is, processes that affect the balls put out during the simulated game, and these processes are also executed by the main board 409.

FIG. 725 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the first pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the first pseudo stop was the left reel 301a (that is, whether the left reel stop button 211a was pressed) (S70301). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop was the left reel 301a (S70301: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops at the middle of the left reel 301a, and ends the process. .

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop is not the left reel (S70301: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the first pseudo stop was the middle reel 301b (that is, whether the middle reel stop button 211b was pressed). Determination is made (S70303). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop was the middle reel 301b (S70303: Yes), it controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, and ends the process.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo-stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70303: No), that is, if it determines that the first pseudo-stop is the right reel 301c, it sets the AT non-lottery flag to ON. (S70305), the right reel 301c is controlled so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the right reel 301c (S70306), and the process ends. As a result of the process in step S70305, if the right reel 301c is brought to a first pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ, it becomes impossible to receive the AT lottery in the pseudo game.

FIG. 726 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of second pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the second pseudo stop was the left reel 301a (that is, whether the left reel stop button 211a was pressed) (S70401). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo-stop was the left reel 301a (S70401: Yes), it determines whether the AT non-lottery flag is on (S70402).

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is on (S70402: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the left reel 301a (S70403), and executes the process. finish. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT no-lottery flag is off (S70402: No), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops in the middle of the left reel 301a (S70404), and sets the hold down flag. is on (S70405).

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the hold down flag is on (S70405: Yes), it refers to Table 2 of the AT first hit lottery table in FIG. 710 and performs an AT first win lottery (B-4 lottery). Execute (S70406). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the hold down flag is off (S70405: Yes), it refers to Table 1 of the AT first hit lottery table in FIG. 710 and performs an AT first win lottery (B-4 lottery). Execute (S70407).

Following step S70406 or step S70407, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT has been won in the B-4 lottery (S70408). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has not been won (S70408: No), the process ends.

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT has been won (S70408: Yes), it sets the AT flag to ON (S70410), sets the AT counter to 100 (S70411), and sets the CZ flag to OFF. (S70411), the process ends.

In step S70401, if the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo stop was not the left reel 301a (S70401: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the second pseudo stop was the middle reel 301b (that is, the middle reel stop button 211b was pressed). (S70412).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo-stop was the middle reel 301b (S70412: Yes), it determines whether the AT non-lottery flag is on (S70413).

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is on (S70413: Yes), it controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the middle reel 301b (S70415), and executes the process. finish. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is off (S70413: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b (S70416), and proceeds to step S70405. Transition.

In step S70412, if the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo-stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70412: No), that is, if it is determined that the second pseudo-stop is the right reel 301c, the AT no lottery The flag is set on (S70417), the right reel 301c is controlled so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the right reel 301c (S70418), and the process ends. As a result of the process in step S70417, when the right reel 301c is brought to a second pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ, it becomes impossible to receive the AT lottery in the pseudo game.

In addition, by stopping the left reel 301a or middle reel 301b as the first pseudo-stop and second pseudo-stop, respectively, it is possible to receive a lottery using the AT first winning lottery table for CZ with preferential lottery values. . Furthermore, by continuing to press the 1-card input button 205 through the processing of steps S70405 and S70406 described above, a lottery using Table 2, which has a more preferential lottery value among the AT first winning lottery tables for CZ, is entered. be able to.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, if the AT no-lottery flag was off after the second pseudo-stop, the B-4 lottery was executed according to the hold-down flag; When the AT non-lottery flag is turned on and the B-4 lottery is conducted according to the rules, if you have won an AT prize, cancel the AT prize (turn off the AT flag and set the value of the AT counter to zero). It may also be a specification.

FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing an example of the process at the time of the third pseudo stop in the pseudo game during CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the third pseudo stop was the left reel 301a (that is, whether the left reel stop button 211a was pressed) (S70501).

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop is the left reel 301a (S70501: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the left reel 301a (S70502), The freezing time of the currently executing freeze is overwritten to 5 seconds (S70503), and the process ends. In this case, the AT lottery is not being held, so during this overwritten 5-second freeze, for example, the image display 500 displays a message saying, ``In the next game, do not press the reel stop button in the wrong order.'' It would be a good idea to display a message such as "Hey!".

If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop was not the left reel 301a (S70501: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the third pseudo stop was the middle reel 301b (that is, whether the middle reel stop button 211b was pressed). (S70504). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop was the middle reel 301b (S70504: Yes), it controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the middle reel 301b (S70505), The process moves to step S70503.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70504: NO), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 reads the AT win/loss result in the game (the lottery result in FIG. 710) and the red 7 stop pattern table in FIG. 714. Accordingly, a stopping pattern of the right reel 301c in the pseudo game is drawn (S70506). Then, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls the right reel 301c according to the stop pattern determined in step S70506 (S70505), and transitions to step S70503.

FIG. 728 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the third stop of the main game of the game in which the pseudo game is executed. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the AT flag is on (S70601). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is on (S70601: Yes), it transmits an AT start command to the sub board 510 (S70602), and ends the process.

When determining that the AT flag is off (S70601: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the value of the CZ counter is 0 (S70603). If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the value of the CZ counter is not 0 (S70603: No), the process ends. If the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the value of the CZ counter is 0 (S70603: Yes), it sets the CZ flag to OFF (S70604), and sends a CZ end command to the sub board 510 (S70605). , ends the process.

[12-4. Specific example of CZ production 1]
In the above-described example of the effect during CZ, the game feature was to make the player press the red 7 during the pseudo game, but a game feature that does not require the press of the red 7 may be adopted in at least some games of CZ.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned example, in the pseudo game, if the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are made to make the first stop or the second stop while aiming at the red 7 in the middle row (that is, the middle row or 1 to 4 from the middle row), If I pressed the reel stop button at the timing when Red 7 was positioned on the top of the pieces), I was able to stop Red 7 on the middle row. Also, in the pseudo game, if you aim for the red 7 on the top row of the right reel 301c and make the third stop (that is, if you press the reel stop button at the timing when the red 7 is located on the top row or one piece above the top row), Red 7 could be stopped at the stop position determined using the Red 7 stop pattern table. Hereinafter, a game including such a pseudo game will also be referred to as a game with eye-catching.

On the other hand, in the CZ of this chapter, if the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped as the first stop or the second stop, and the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop in the pseudo game, each reel stop button Regardless of the pressing timing, a pseudo game is played in which Red 7 stops at the middle stage of the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b, and for the right reel 301c, Red 7 stops at the stop position determined using the Red 7 stop pattern table. It may also include games to play. Hereinafter, such a game will also be referred to as a non-pressing game. In the non-click game, there is no need to aim for the red 7 in the middle row in the pseudo game, so the operation instructions for each reel stop button in FIGS. 717(C) to (F) do not appear.

In addition, in the non-clicking game, even if you do not press each reel stop button, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pseudo game, the red 7 will stop on the middle row of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, and the red 7 will stop on the right reel 301c. Red 7 may be stopped at a stop position determined using a stop pattern table.

For example, when a game without eye press can be executed as in this chapter, the B-4 lottery based on the press maintenance flag (S70405 to S70411) and the right reel stop pattern lottery (S70506), for example, It is executed when the lever is turned on (after step S70202 of the CZ flag processing in FIG. 724).

For example, if you win an AT lottery (B-3 lottery or B-4 lottery), for example, a game with eyeballs will be played 3/4 of the time, and a game without eyeballs will be played 1/4 of the time. . Also, for example, if you do not win the AT lottery (B-3 lottery and B-4 lottery), for example, a game with a target is executed at a rate of 1/8, and a game without a target is executed at a rate of 7/8. is executed. In this way, because the distribution of games with eye-pressing and games without eye-pressing is determined, when a game with eye-pressing is executed (when an operation instruction for the reel stop button appears), there is no eye-pressing. The level of expectation for AT winning is higher than when the game is executed (when no operation instruction for the reel stop button appears).

However, whether a game with eye-pressing or a game without eye-pressing is executed depends on the AT lottery result, but does not directly depend on the right reel stop pattern lottery result (i.e., the right reel's stop pattern lottery result). It is preferable not to refer to the stop pattern lottery result to determine whether a game with eye presses or a game without eye presses is to be executed. If whether a game with a hit or a game without a hit is directly dependent on the right reel stop pattern lottery result, players can more easily predict the stop system of the right reel. This is because there is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the game with a lot of attention.

Note that the probability of winning AT in the B-4 lottery is 1/11.96 when the AT press keep flag is off, and 1/10.62 when the AT press keep flag is on, so the above-mentioned Considering the distribution of games with eye-pressing and games without eye-pressing, the frequency with which games with eye-pressing are executed is lower than the frequency with which games without eye-pressing are executed. On the other hand, as described above, when an AT is won, the rate at which games with eyeballs are executed is higher than the rate at which games without eyeballs are executed. As a result, less than half of each game is played with eyeballs, so players develop a sense of rarity in games with eyeballs, and when winning an AT, the percentage of games with eyeballs is more than half. Because the player is forced to press his/her eyes, the player can enjoy the game while having high expectations for the game.

Note that when a game with eye-pressing is executed, a eye-pressing valid period (reel stop button valid period) may be determined. In this case, if the reel stop button is not pressed within the eye-pressing valid period, the reels are stopped as if the reel stop button had been pressed at the end of the valid period. In addition, the effect image that indicates that the eye press is in effect (the effect image of the activated reel stop button, the effect image that is repeatedly displayed as if to emphasize the activated reel stop button) is displayed as an image. It may be displayed on the display 500. As a result, the player is required to perform the eye press within the time limit, and can enjoy the game of measuring his or her eye press skill. Note that the effect image may indicate the remaining time of the eye-pressing effective period.

Note that if the eye press is executed within the eye press validity period, it is desirable that the effect image is not erased immediately, but is completely erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reel stop button was pressed. This leaves the player with a feeling of anticipation in a game with eye-catching.

Furthermore, when the eye press is executed within the eye press validity period, a pattern for immediately erasing the effect image and a pattern for not immediately erasing the effect image may be selected by lottery. In this case, it is desirable that the distribution of these patterns be determined so that a pattern that immediately erases the effect image has a higher AT winning expectation than a pattern that does not immediately erase the effect image. .

Also, for example, a plurality of eye-pressing valid periods are determined in one pseudo game, such as the first pseudo-stop eye-pressing valid period is 3 seconds and the second pseudo-stop eye-pressing valid period is 5 seconds. The length may be different. For example, some players feel more nervous as the notification timing of the AT lottery results gets closer (that is, from the first pseudo stop to the second pseudo stop), so for these players, the first pseudo stop is By setting the effective period for pushing the second pseudo-stop to be longer than the effective period, the user can carefully push the second pseudo-stop even under high tension, making it easier to succeed.

In addition, some players find it difficult to press the button when many reels other than the one they are trying to stop are in their field of vision, so they may have difficulty pressing the button at the second pseudo-stop (when only two reels are rotating). Since the effective period for pushing the first pseudo stop (all reels are spinning) is set longer than the effective period, you can carefully push the first pseudo stop. , it becomes easier to succeed.

In addition, even if multiple eye-pressing valid periods are determined for a single eye-pressing game, the above-mentioned effect image indicating that the eye-pressing valid period is still in effect and the remaining valid period will be displayed. is desirable.

In addition, in a pseudo game of a game with eye-pressing, if the normal stop control up to 4 frames is used, for example, in the first pseudo-stop, the eye-pressing fails and a red 7 appears in the middle row of the left reel 301a. If it is not possible to stop the left reel 301a, an instruction to pseudo-rotate the left reel 301a again and press the left reel stop button 211a again may be displayed. In that case, in the second first pseudo-stop, it is preferable to stop the output of BGM to make the game silent or to turn off the lamp in order to make the player concentrate on the eye presses and avoid failure. Further, in the second first pseudo-stop, for example, the BGM or the lamp lighting pattern may be changed to create a sense of anticipation.

If the second first pseudo-stop fails to press the button, a third first pseudo-stop may be performed. In this way, the left reel stop button 211a may be pressed many times until the eye press is successful, but each time the same effect is repeatedly displayed on the left reel stop button 211a. However, it is better to set an upper limit on the number.

Further, a game may be executed in which pseudo-stops with eye-pressing and pseudo-stops without eye-pressing are mixed. Specifically, for example, in a pseudo-game in one game, the first pseudo-stop is by eye-pull (it will stop if you aim for the red 7 on the middle row of the left reel 301a or middle reel 301b), and the second pseudo-stop is by eye-pull. No push (regardless of the timing of pressing the reel stop button, red 7 stops in the middle row of the left reel 301a or middle reel 301b), the third pseudo stop is a push (aim for the red 7 within the frame of the right reel 301c) For example, a game may be executed in which Red 7 stops according to the selected right reel stop pattern.

In such a game, an operation instruction effect for the reel stop button is displayed in a pseudo stop with a touch press, and an operation instruction effect for the reel stop button is not displayed in a pseudo stop without a touch press. Note that, as described above, the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 shown in FIG. 717(F) may be displayed before the first pseudo-stop.

In such a situation, for the first pseudo-stop and the third pseudo-stop, operation instructions for the three operation parts consisting of the single-sheet input button 205, start lever 210, and reel stop button are displayed, and for the second pseudo-stop, , operation instructions for two operation sections consisting of a one-sheet input button 205 and a start lever 210 are displayed. In this manner, by reducing the number of operation units to which operation instructions are directed during the second pseudo-stop, the operational burden on the player is reduced, and fatigue can be suppressed.

In addition, in a situation where a pseudo stop with multiple clicks is performed in this way, for example, in the first pseudo stop, if the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b is stopped according to the operation instruction for the reel stop button, the AT An effect may be performed that indicates the expectation of winning. Specifically, for example, when Red 7 is stopped in the middle row, an effect to increase the level of expectation (for example, changing the background color of the image display body 500 to red or changing the BGM) is executed. This increases the player's motivation to follow the operating instructions.

Further, after the second pseudo-stop, if the operation instruction for the reel stop button is followed, an effect may be performed to notify the result of the AT lottery. Specifically, for example, if AT wins, Red 7 will always stop in the middle row in the second pseudo stop, and if AT does not win, Red 7 will always stop in a place other than the middle row in the second pseudo stop. Bye. This increases the player's motivation to follow the operating instructions.

In addition, even in a game where pseudo-stops with eye-pressing and pseudo-stops without eye-pressing are mixed, if the pseudo-stop with eye-pressing is executed multiple times, the reel stop button for the relevant pseudo-stop will be disabled. The length of the periods may be different. In this case, some players feel more nervous as the AT lottery result notification timing gets closer, so for these players, the period of validity of the pseudo-stop that occurs later is more important than the effective period of the pseudo-stop that occurs earlier. By setting the effective period for pressing the button to be longer, the user can carefully press the button for the subsequent pseudo-stop even under high tension, making it easier to succeed. On the other hand, some players find it difficult to press the button when many reels other than the reel they are trying to stop are in their field of view, so the reel stop button is activated before the reel stop button is valid. The validity period of the pseudo-stop reel stop button may be set longer.

Note that, as described above, when AT is won in CZ, AT starts from the next game in which AT is won, without any precursor or normal game. Additionally, if AT is won with one or more remaining CZ games, the CZ for the number of games remaining at the time of AT winning may be started immediately after the end of the AT, without intervening regular games. . With this kind of specification, it is possible to win AT multiple times in 10 games of CZ, and CZ and AT can be alternated without a regular game in between, such as CZ → AT → CZ → AT. A situation arises in which

In such a situation, since CZ and AT are performed alternately and continuously, the player may become bored with the CZ performance and the AT performance. Therefore, in a situation where CZ and AT are performed alternately without a normal game in between, it may be possible to change the production mode and BGM during CZ and AT.

In this case, for example, at the start of the CZ and AT, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start, an image resembling the effect button 204 (and/or cross key, etc.) may be displayed to change the effect mode or BGM. You may give instructions. Note that the operation instructions for the production button 204 for changing the production mode and BGM include the operation instruction for maintaining the depressed state of the one-sheet input button 205, the operation instruction for each reel stop button, and the operation instruction for the start lever 210. can be displayed simultaneously with at least one operation instruction. In other words, operation instructions for up to four operation means can be displayed simultaneously, and it is possible to present more options to the player and provide new operability.

[12-5. Specific example of CZ production 2: Eye-pull practice production]
As mentioned above, in the pseudo game in CZ, the visibility of the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c is obstructed by the image display of the transparent liquid crystal 301ca and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb, so the difficulty level of pressing red 7 on the right reel is difficult. is by no means low. Furthermore, as described above, by operating the starting lever 210 during a pseudo game, it is possible to remove the obstruction to the visibility of the upper and lower rows of the right reel 301c, but the starting lever 210 must be kept in the operating state. In order to return to the inhibited state, it is not at all difficult to press the button while maintaining the operation of the starting lever 210. Furthermore, if you proceed with the pseudo game according to the operation instructions, the right reel 301c will be pseudo-stopped as a third pseudo-stop, and the stop system of the right reel 301c of the third pseudo-stop will suggest the result of the AT lottery. Alternatively, since the player is directly notified, the player becomes more nervous about the third pseudo-stop and is more likely to fail in eye-pressing.

Therefore, in the CZ described below, it is possible to have the player practice eye pressing before executing the third pseudo-stop.

FIG. 729 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the performance during CZ (eye-pressing practice performance). In the slot machine 1, a transparent liquid crystal 301aa is arranged to cover the upper stage of the left reel 301a, and a transparent liquid crystal 301ab is arranged to cover the lower stage of the left reel. By displaying images on the transparent liquid crystal 301aa and the transparent liquid crystal 301ab, it is possible to prevent the upper and lower rows of the left reel 301a from being viewed. Note that the slot machine 1 may have a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a, for example, instead of the transparent liquid crystal 301aa and the transparent liquid crystal 301ab. Further, the slot machine 1 has a visibility state change button 216 with a switch.

(A) shows a state where the CZ game has started (a state when the lever is on), and the same effect as in FIG. 717(C) is being executed. (B) shows the starting state of the eye-pressing practice effect in the pseudo game. In (A), when the visual recognition state change button 216 is pressed once or for a long time (the ON state of the visual recognition state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined period of time), the eye press practice effect starts. In (B), images are displayed on the transparent liquid crystal 301aa and the transparent liquid crystal 301ab, and visibility of the upper and lower rows of the left reel 301a is obstructed.

Furthermore, in (B), an image of an angel descending is displayed on the image display 500, and an instruction to operate the starting lever 210 is displayed: "You want to practice. Please operate the starting lever." Further, similarly to FIG. 717(F), an image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow may be displayed on the image display body 500 in order to make the operation instruction easier to understand.

(C) is a state during the eye-pressing practice performance in the pseudo game, and is a continuation of (B). An operation instruction to stop Red 7 on the left reel 301a (that is, an operation instruction for the left reel stop button 211a) is displayed on the image display body 500 as an angel's line (``Now, let's stop Red 7 on the left reel''). There is.

(D) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in accordance with the instruction to operate the starting lever 210. The images on the transparent liquid crystal 301aa and the transparent liquid crystal 301ab are erased, and the upper and lower rows of the left reel 301a are now visible. Note that the relationship between the operation amount of the starting lever 210 and the visible state of the upper and lower symbols of the left reel 301a is the same as that shown in FIG. 721, for example. Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the operating state of the starting lever 210 is maintained, the operating instruction for the starting lever 210 may be deleted as shown in (D).

(E) shows a state in which the left reel 301a is stopped in the eye-catching practice performance. In (E), the left reel 301a is successfully pressed, red 7 stops in the middle row, and a line by an angel praising the player is displayed.

After the eye-pressing practice performance is completed, the left reel 301a is pseudo-rotated again to return to the performance in (A). In addition, for players who do not have confidence in eye pressing after practicing once, if you press the visibility state change button 216 again once or long after returning to (A), The eye-pushing practice effect may be started again (there is no need to set a limit on the number of times the eye-pushing practice effect can be executed in one pseudo game).

It should be noted that during the eye push practice performance, only the left reel 301a may be made operable. That is, it is not necessary to enable only the left reel stop button 211a and not to enable the middle reel stop button 211b and the right reel stop button 211c.

Note that the practice performance may be executed not only during the pseudo game during CZ, but also during a normal game or AT other than CZ (that is, it may be executed in any state of the game). That is, during the normal game or AT, when the visibility state change button 216 is pressed once or for a long time (the ON state of the visibility state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined period of time), the eye press practice performance may be started.

Please note that no pseudo game is performed during the normal game or AT, and the reel is an area that shows symbols that indicate the lottery results rather than an effect, so when performing the eye-pressing practice effect during the normal game or AT. In this case, the image display body 500 may display the actual reel arrangement, reel rotation speed, and transparent liquid crystal display to perform eye-catching practice, or the effective line may be set to only one line in the middle, The visibility of the reels may be reduced within a range that does not overlap with the effective line. Further, even when the game is not being executed, for example, by pressing the production button 204, it is possible to perform the eye-catching practice production even when the game is not being executed. good. In this case, since the game is not being executed, for example, an eye-pull practice effect is performed using the image display body 500 without using the reels. Further, even when the game is not being executed, if the visual recognition state change button 216 is pressed once or long (the on state of the visual recognition state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined period of time), only a pseudo game may be played. This allows the player to practice easily without consuming game media.

Since the proportion of CZ games in the total number of games is not that high, by making it possible to perform eye-pressing practice effects at various times in this way, even players who are not good at eye-pressing can practice sufficiently. This increases the success rate of eye-catching in the simulated game during the actual CZ, which in turn improves the sense of anticipation in the simulated game.

Note that the visibility state change button 216 is a button for starting the eye-pressing practice effect, so it is an operation unit that does not affect the progress of the normal game. In particular, players who are good at eye-pressing have few opportunities to use the visibility state change button 216. Therefore, the visibility state change button 216 is not used by operating parts used in normal games (for example, the start lever 210 or each reel stop button). It is desirable that the button be placed in a position where no buttons are placed. Specifically, for example, the visibility state change button 216 is a lower panel (disposed between the medal tray 201 and the reel stop button), and generally displays the model title of the slot machine 1. panel).

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the lower panel in the normal arrangement when playing the slot machine 1 is close to the vertical position of the hopper 110b, when the visibility state change button 216 is provided on the lower panel, In order to reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine 1, the switch that detects the depression of the visibility state change button 216 may also be used as the switch that counts the medals paid out from the hopper 110b.

However, if these switches are used together, the eye press practice effect will not be performed just by pressing the visibility state change button 216, but only when the visibility state change button 216 is held down for a predetermined time or longer. It would be good to be able to perform a practice performance by pressing the button. It is desirable that the predetermined time be longer than the time it takes for one medal to be paid out from the hopper 110b, for example. Even if a plurality of medals are paid out in succession, the medals are paid out one by one, so the visibility state change button 216 repeats the on state and off state each time one medal is paid out. . Therefore, if the predetermined time is longer than the time it takes for one medal to be paid out from the hopper 110b, the eye-pushing practice effect will not start due to the payout of the medal.

Furthermore, in order to prevent players from forgetting that if they continue to press the one-sheet insertion button 205, they can receive preferential AT lottery tickets, an image instructing them to press the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed even during practice performances. It is desirable that it remain displayed.

[12-6. Pseudo game during normal game]
In the above-mentioned example, a CZ game in which a simulated game is performed has been described, but a simulated game may also be performed in a normal game that is not a CZ game. In a pseudo-game in a normal game, if you press the reels in the correct order, the bells pseudo-stop and line up in the middle of the reels, winning AT. In addition, even if you do not answer correctly in the order of pressing, there is a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) that the bells will align upward to the right and pseudo-stop and you will win AT, and a predetermined probability (3/4) that you will lose. The eyes (the bells are not aligned in a straight line) are falsely stopped and AT cannot be won.

In the normal game, if a predetermined condition is met, a pseudo game is won. Specifically, for example, when the lever is turned on in the normal game, a preparatory lottery is performed, and if the preliminary lottery is won, a pseudo game lottery is performed. It is assumed that the winning rate in the preliminary lottery is, for example, 1/2. In the pseudo game lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo game is 1/50.

In addition, in the normal game, if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is repeatedly pressed (an operation for the same operation means as the one-sheet insertion button 205 in CZ, but the player's actions are different), the winning rate in the preliminary lottery will increase. It increases. The winning rate in the preliminary lottery when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is repeatedly pressed is 1/1.8. In other words, it is advantageous for the player to continuously press the one-card insertion button 205 every game. Note that, as a definition of repeated hits, if the time from when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is turned OFF until it is turned ON again is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 500 ms), it is treated as having been repeatedly pressed.

In addition, if you keep pressing the one-piece insertion button 205 (long press, not repeatedly) in the normal game (that is, if you perform the operation to give preferential treatment to the AT winning rate during the CZ pseudo game in the normal game), the preparation If no lottery is held, or even if one is held, the winning rate of the preliminary lottery is extremely low (for example, 1/65536). Players can be entertained by advanced game characteristics in which advantageous situations can be obtained by performing different operations on the one-card insertion button 205 during CZ and in the normal game.

FIG. 730 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo game executed during a normal game. In this chapter, in addition to the transparent liquid crystal 301aa, the transparent liquid crystal 301ab, the transparent liquid crystal 301ca, and the transparent liquid crystal 301cb, the slot machine 1 includes a transparent liquid crystal 301ba that covers the upper part of the middle reel 301b, and a transparent liquid crystal 301ba that covers the lower part of the middle reel 301b. Transmissive liquid crystal 301bb is arranged so as to cover. By displaying images on the transparent liquid crystal 301ba and the transparent liquid crystal 301bb, it is possible to prevent the upper and lower stages of the middle reel 301b from being viewed. Note that the slot machine 1 may have, for example, a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the middle reel 301b instead of the transparent liquid crystal 301ba and the transparent liquid crystal 301bb.

(A) shows the state immediately after the CZ ends, and the reels are stopped. At the timing when CZ ends and switches to the normal state (normal game) (for example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the third stop reel stop button is pressed in the CZ final game), one piece as shown in (A) An operation instruction prompting the user to press the input button 205 repeatedly is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, the operation instruction indicates that by repeatedly hitting the one-card insertion button 205, it becomes easier to win the pseudo game.

Furthermore, following the operating instructions will make it easier to win the simulated game, which will create an advantageous situation for the player, and since the operating instructions are important information for the player, the instructions should be long enough for the player to understand. Preferably displayed in hours. Specifically, the display time of the operation instruction may be longer (for example, 5 seconds) than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest playing time for one game of the slot machine 1 (wait timer time-up time). desirable. Therefore, the operation instructions can be displayed across multiple games.

In addition, instead of specifically determining the display time of the operation instruction, the operation instruction is displayed until the game returns to the normal state after the CZ ends and the game starts for the first time (when the start lever 210 is operated). Good too. In addition, the display time of the operation instruction (for example, 5 seconds longer than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest playing time for one game of slot machine 1) has elapsed, or the first game that has transitioned to the normal state after the end of CZ has started. When any of the following conditions is satisfied (starting lever 210 is operated), the operation instruction may be deleted.

Note that after this operation instruction display is erased, if the one-sheet input button 205 is not pressed repeatedly, or if it is pressed for a long time as in the case of CZ instead of being pressed repeatedly, and the predetermined conditions are met ( If the predetermined conditions are met (and the preparatory actions before the winning combination lottery are performed), an operation instruction prompting the user to press the one-card insertion button 205 repeatedly may be displayed again. Note that a preparatory operation for the winning combination lottery, such as inserting a medal or pressing the MAX insert button 206, is an example of the predetermined condition.

Therefore, for example, if a medal is inserted while pressing and holding the one-sheet insertion button 205 after the CZ game is switched to the normal game and the operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed and erased, the message ``Wait a minute! , Do you want to continue accepting the lottery? You're such an idiot! Make 1 BET repeatedly, you idiot...'', etc., an instruction for operating the 1-card insertion button 205 is displayed.

Note that the mode of the operation instruction (first operation instruction) that appears when switching from CZ to the normal game is the same as the mode of the operation instruction (second operation instruction) that is redisplayed during the normal game. It may be different or it may be different.

Specifically, for example, for the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction, the display time, display size, and display position of the operation instruction, the presence or absence of audio output at the same time as the operation instruction, and the volume and output of the audio The time etc. may be made different.

For example, the longer the display time of the operation instruction, the larger the display size, and the closer the display position is to the center of the image display body 500, the stronger the impression of the operation instruction can be. Further, when the sound is outputted at the same time as the operation instruction, the impression of the operation instruction can be stronger than when the sound is not outputted at the same time. Furthermore, the larger the volume of the sound and the longer the output time, the stronger the impression of the operation time.

During the CZ, the player must press and hold the one-card insertion button 205 for a long time, and if the player continues to press and hold the one-card insertion button 205 when the game shifts to the normal game, it will actually be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, by executing the first operation instruction in a manner that makes a strong impression (for example, making the display time of the first operation instruction longer than the display time of the second operation instruction), the player can return from CZ to the normal state. At the time of switching, the operating method of the one-sheet input button 205 can be reliably changed.

In addition, some players do not look at the operation instructions properly, or forget to make consecutive hits even though they have seen the operation instructions, even though they were playing the game when the operation instructions were issued immediately after the end of CZ. Therefore, by issuing the second operation instruction in a manner that gives a stronger impression than the first operation instruction (for example, by making the display time of the second operation instruction longer than the display time of the first operation instruction), it is possible to It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting the repeated hitting operation.

For example, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) is required from when the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction is displayed until it is erased, it is possible to win the pseudo game and start the pseudo game within the predetermined time. Also, it is desirable that the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction is not deleted until the predetermined time period has elapsed. For example, if the display of the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction is erased at the start of the pseudo game, the impact of the appearance of the pseudo game may cause the player to forget how to repeatedly press the one-card insertion button 205. It is from. In this case, during the simulated game, the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction, the operation instruction for the reel stop button, and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 will be displayed at the same time.

In addition, if a player does not see the operation instructions immediately after the CZ ends (for example, another player is playing during the CZ and immediately after the CZ ends, and the player changes after that), the player may insert one coin. He does not know that he can obtain an advantageous situation by repeatedly pressing the button 205. In addition, since slot machines in which the lottery results are affected by the operation of the one-card insertion button 205 are not generally known, the second operation instruction is given in a manner that is less impressive to players who have not yet played the CZ game. Even if the user executes the above, there is a possibility that the user may be skeptical about operating the one-sheet input button 205 itself. Therefore, if the second operation instruction is given in a manner that gives a strong impression (for example, the display time of the second operation instruction is longer than the display time of the first operation instruction, etc.), it may be difficult for the player to repeat the operation. It can increase motivation.

Next, (B) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the normal game where the player wins the pseudo game. The pseudo-game during the normal game is activated when the lever is turned on in the game in which the pseudo-game lottery is won, but it may occur after a predetermined number of games or less. However, if you win both the pseudo game in the normal game and the CZ when the lever is turned on in the normal game, the CZ will be executed with priority, and the pseudo game in the normal game will be canceled or carried over and executed after the CZ ends. do.

When the pseudo game starts, images are displayed on each of the transparent liquid crystal 301aa, transparent liquid crystal 301ab, transparent liquid crystal 301ba, transparent liquid crystal 301bb, transparent liquid crystal 301ca, and transparent liquid crystal 301cb, which obstructs the visibility of pieces other than the middle row of all reels. It will be done.

In addition, if you win the pseudo game during the normal game, press the 6 options (left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, right) → middle → left). The selection probabilities for each pressing order are equal (1/6 in each case). When the player presses each reel stop button according to the selected pressing order to pseudo-stop the reels, the bells line up in a straight line in the middle row and the AT is won.

In (B), the image display unit 500 displays the line "Guess the order of pressing and align the bells!" and images of each reel stop button with "?" written on it and decorated with effects. indicates operation instructions for each reel stop button.

(C) is the state when the lever is turned on in the normal game where the pseudo game is won, and is a continuation of (B). The image of each reel stop button is still displayed. Furthermore, a message indicating that by operating the starting lever 210, the image on each transparent liquid crystal will be erased and the upper and lower rows of each reel will become visible, and an image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow are displayed. They are displayed on the display 500, each indicating an operation instruction for the starting lever 210.

Note that when the starting lever 210 is operated during the pseudo game of the normal game, the images on each transparent liquid crystal are erased to such an extent that the upper and lower rows of each reel are visible. If the reels are pressed in the correct order and the bells line up in the middle row, it is possible to recognize that the AT has been won even if the upper and lower rows are not visible.

On the other hand, if the reels cannot be pressed in the correct order, the bells will not line up in the middle row. As described above, even if the reels are not pressed in the correct order, the bells will line up upward to the right with a predetermined probability and the AT will be won. In addition, if the player cannot get the correct answer in the reel pressing order and also does not win an AT, the bell stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b and the winning number stops.

Therefore, if the bells do not line up in the middle row and the bells pseudo-stop in the middle row of the middle reel 301b, the player can determine the result of the AT lottery without looking at the lower row of the left reel 301a and the lower row of the right reel 301c. I can't. The details will be described later, but when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the third pseudo-stop in the pseudo-gaming, the result of the AT lottery will be announced, but for players who cannot wait, the winning result can be announced by operating the start lever 210 mentioned above. This allows you to check quickly.

The trigger for erasing the image of the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 is, for example, the same as the trigger for erasing the image for the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 during the CZ described above. Further, the relationship between the operation amount of the starting lever 210 and the area in which no image is displayed on each transparent liquid crystal is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 721, for example.

(D) is a state in which the reel pressing order in the pseudo game cannot be answered correctly, the bells are not aligned in the middle row, and the bells are pseudo-stopped in the middle row of the middle reel 301b. In (D), each transparent liquid crystal obstructs the visibility of the upper and lower rows of each reel, so it is impossible to determine whether or not the AT has been won.

(E) is a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated after the state in (D) is reached. When the starting lever 210 is operated, the images on each transparent liquid crystal are erased, and the upper and lower rows of each reel are also visible. In (E), the bells are aligned upward to the right and the AT is won. Furthermore, in (E), since the depressed state of the starting lever 210 continues for a predetermined period of time, the image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow, which is an operation instruction image, has been erased.

(F) is the state at the end of the pseudo game. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the third pseudo-stop, the images on each transparent liquid crystal are erased even if the start lever 210 is not operated, and it is determined whether the bells are aligned upward to the right, that is, AT is selected. The image display body 500 also informs whether or not the image is displayed. After the performance (F), the pseudo game ends and the reels of the normal game start rotating.

Note that if the starting lever 210 is operated by a predetermined amount or more (for example, 5/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position of the starting lever 210) after the third pseudo-stop, the reel checks whether the bells are aligned upward to the right. Therefore, the image displayed on the image display body 500 may also be changed to an image that notifies the result of the AT lottery.

Therefore, if the result of the AT lottery is announced after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the third pseudo-stop, a player who cannot wait for the predetermined period of time can operate the start lever 210 to let the player know that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. In some cases, the result of the AT lottery is announced without waiting for the AT lottery, and in other cases, the player recognizes the result of the AT lottery by operating the start lever 210 and checking the number of rolls on the reels, but the notification is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. There are cases and cases.

Although not shown in the figure, if you answer the reel in the correct order and align the bells in the middle row, a message indicating that you have won AT will be displayed on the image display 500, and the pseudo game will end and you will be able to play normally. The reels of the game start spinning.

As explained in this chapter, if the player does not press the one-card insertion button 205 repeatedly during the normal game, the player cannot receive an advantageous lottery, but if the player continues to press the button repeatedly, the player will get tired and may end up hitting the button repeatedly. There is also a possibility that the operation cannot be continued.

Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player in a disadvantageous situation by not performing the repeated tapping operation, the player should not press the single-card insertion button 205 repeatedly (also, if the same long-press operation as the operation during CZ is performed, the same effect will occur). ) When the starting lever 210 is operated (when the game is started), the push order navigation may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100). When each reel stop button is pressed in accordance with this push order navigation, the bells are aligned in the game (main game, not a pseudo game), and medals can be paid out. However, since this is still an operation performed without following the instruction to repeatedly press the one-card insertion button 205, it is better to prevent the special AT lottery from being performed even if the pressing order navigation is followed.

Note that the above-mentioned pseudo game may always occur in the first normal game after the CZ ends. By doing this, it is possible to give a player who was not able to win an AT in CZ a great chance to win an AT again, and it is possible to suppress player disappointment.

For example, in a pseudo game during a normal game, the display of the operation instruction for the start lever 210 in FIG. 730(C) is started before the operation instruction for each reel stop button in FIG. 730(B) is started, and then, The operation instructions for each reel stop button and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 may be displayed simultaneously.

In addition, if the pressing order in the pseudo game is not correct, the following lottery and performance may be performed. If the pressing order is not correct, the bell is moved upward to the right in the second pseudo-stop stage. Then, at the time of the third pseudo-stop, a lottery is held, and in the lottery, the bells are pseudo-stopped with the bells aligned upward to the right at the aforementioned predetermined probability (for example, 1/4), and the AT is won. However, if the one-card insertion button 205 is repeatedly pressed before the third pseudo-stop, there is a probability (for example, 1/3.5) higher than the predetermined probability in the lottery that the bells will be placed in a pseudo-stop with the bells aligned upwards to the right. Let me win AT.

Therefore, when the second pseudo-stop (that is, the preparatory operation for performing the lottery during the third pseudo-stop described above) is performed, an operation instruction prompting the repeated hitting of the 1-bet insertion button 205 (for example, "If you hit 1 BET repeatedly, a bell will be raised. ``It will be easier to get all the coins!'' and/or an image of the one-card input button 205 with an arrow) to prompt the player to repeatedly hit the coins. At the timing when the operation instruction prompting the continuous operation of the one-sheet input button 205 is displayed, the operation instruction is also displayed on the right reel stop button 211c at the same time, and at least if the start lever 210 is not operated, the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is also displayed at the same time. Displayed.

By performing such a lottery and performance when the pressing order in the pseudo game is not correct, players who place importance on the AT winning rate can press the one-card insertion button 205 repeatedly, and players who wish for a smooth progression of the game. It is possible to select different game characteristics depending on the player's preference, such as executing the third pseudo-stop without repeatedly hitting the one-card insertion button 205.

For example, the operation instruction prompting the user to repeatedly press the one-sheet input button 205 may be displayed blinking for a predetermined period of time (in other words, the display state and non-display state are repeated multiple times) and then erased. It may be deleted after only the state continues for a predetermined period of time. Note that, for example, in order to have the player reliably perform the repeated-hit operation of the single-reel insertion button 205 and to cause the bells to pseudo-stop in an upward alignment to the right with a high probability, the operation instructions for the right reel stop button 211c may be set during these predetermined times. These predetermined times may be set longer than the display time of the reel stop button 211c, or may be set shorter than the display time of the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c in order to make the player concentrate on the reel pseudo-stop operation.

In addition, the operation instruction to prompt the repeated hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be issued multiple times (for example, during the first pseudo-stop, during the second pseudo-stop, and both during preparatory actions for the lottery during the third pseudo-stop). ) may be executed at the same time as the

In addition, if an operation instruction prompting repeated hits of the single-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as an operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, from the voice corresponding to the operation instruction urging repeated operations of the single-sheet insertion button 205, The audio corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c is output with priority (for example, the audio that is prioritized is output at a louder volume than the audio that is not prioritized, or the audio that is not prioritized is not output and is given priority. (Even if a non-prioritized audio starts outputting first, the output of the non-prioritized audio is stopped and then the prioritized audio is output.) etc.), or the sound corresponding to the operation instruction to prompt the repeated hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c. Furthermore, these voices may have the same priority (for example, be output at the same volume and at the same time).

In the case where the operation instruction prompting the repeated hitting operation of the single sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the starting lever 210, the sound corresponding to the operation instruction urging the repeated pressing operation of the single sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 are displayed. The relationship between the corresponding voice and the voice corresponding to the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c and the start lever 210 when the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the start lever 210 The same holds true for the relationship between the voice corresponding to and the voice corresponding to .

In addition, if an operation instruction prompting repeated hits of the single-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as an operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction prompting repeated operations of the single-sheet insertion button 205 The lamp corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c is prioritized and output (for example, a prioritized lamp emits a stronger light intensity than a non-prioritized lamp, or a non-prioritized lamp is not output and is prioritized. Only the lamps with priority will be output (even if a non-priority lamp has started output first, the output of the non-priority lamp will be stopped and then the priority lamp will be output), etc. ), or a lamp corresponding to an operation instruction that prompts a repeated operation of the one-sheet input button 205 may be output with priority over a lamp corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c. Furthermore, these lamps may have the same priority (for example, they may be output at the same time with the same amount of light).

In the case where the operation instruction to press the single-sheet input button 205 repeatedly is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the start lever 210, a lamp corresponding to the operation instruction to press the single-sheet input button 205 repeatedly is displayed on the start lever 210. The relationship between the corresponding lamps, and the lamps corresponding to the operation instructions for the right reel stop button 211c and the start lever 210 when the operation instructions for the right reel stop button 211c are displayed at the same time as the operation instructions for the start lever 210. The same applies to the relationship between the lamp corresponding to .

Since the player can more easily recognize the operation instruction corresponding to the prioritized voice, it is preferable to set a high priority to the voice corresponding to the operation instruction for the operation that the player wants to perform more reliably. Similarly, since it is easier for players to recognize operation instructions that correspond to prioritized lamps, it is recommended to set a higher priority for lamps that correspond to operation instructions that you want the player to perform more reliably. .

In addition, if the timing of outputting the sound corresponding to the operation instruction to repeatedly press the one-sheet insertion button 205 overlaps with the timing to output other sound effects, the operation instruction to urge the one-sheet insertion button 205 to repeatedly press the button 205 is provided. The sound corresponding to this may be output with priority over the other performance sound, or the other performance sound may be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the operation instruction that prompts the repeated pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205. They may have the same priority.

Additionally, if the timing of outputting a lamp corresponding to an operation instruction that prompts the repeated pressing of the single sheet insertion button 205 overlaps with the timing of outputting a lamp corresponding to another effect, the repeated pressing of the single sheet insertion button 205 may be performed. The lamp corresponding to the prompting operation instruction may be output with priority over the lamp corresponding to the other performance, or the lamp corresponding to the other performance may be output in response to the operation instruction prompting the continuous pressing of the input button 205. It may be output with priority over other lamps, or they may have the same priority.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, when a pseudo game is executed during a normal game, there is a higher probability of winning AT compared to a normal game where a pseudo game is not executed, but a pseudo game during a normal game is, for example, It may be executed as a simple performance in which the AT lottery is not performed during the pseudo game, such as the fortune telling performance shown below. That is, there is no difference in the AT winning rate between a normal game in which a pseudo-game in which a fortune-telling performance is executed and a normal game in which a pseudo-game is not performed.

Specifically, for example, in a pseudo-game in which a fortune-telling effect is performed, if the reel press order is correct, the bells will pseudo-stop and line up in the middle of the reels, and even if the press order is not correct, the bells will appear at a predetermined probability. (for example, 1/4), the bells align upward to the right and make a pseudo-stop, and with a predetermined probability (3/4), a loss (the bells do not line up in a straight line) makes a pseudo-stop.

For example, if the bells line up during the pseudo-stop, at the end of the pseudo-game (FIG. 730 (F)), instead of the message "Congratulations on winning AT!", the message "Today's fortune is great luck! Good luck!" There may be some!” is displayed on the image display 500. On the other hand, if the bells are not aligned due to the pseudo-stop, at the end of the pseudo-game, instead of the message "Congratulations on winning AT!", the message "Today's fortune is bad...but let's do our best!" will be displayed. It is displayed on the image display body 500. In addition, instead of the message "Are you winning AT?" in FIGS. 730(D) and (E), for example, a message "What is your fortune today?" is displayed. By performing such a fortune-telling performance in a pseudo game, players can be entertained without increasing the AT winning rate (that is, without increasing the burden on the hall).

[12-7. Specific example of CZ production 3]
Another example of the CZ effect will be described below. In the above-mentioned example, by keeping the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed during CZ, it was possible to receive an advantageous AT lottery. In this chapter, we will explain that although the shortest playing time (wait timer time-up time) for one game of slot machine 1 during CZ is 4.1 seconds if the one-card insertion button is kept pressed during CZ, If the pressed state is not maintained, the shortest gaming time becomes longer (for example, it becomes 10 seconds, which is more than twice the time of 4.1 seconds).

For example, a player may issue an operation instruction to the one-piece input button 205 during CZ (a message displayed on the image display 500 in FIG. 717(B), a message displayed on the image display 500 in FIG. 717(C), etc.) The winning combination was drawn by operating the starting lever 210 without performing the operation indicated by the one-sheet input button 205 (image of the one-sheet insertion button 205, etc.) or performing an operation different from the operation indicated by the operation instructions. In this case, the wait timer time-up time of 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest playing time of the slot machine 1, is extended to 10 seconds. This increases the time required to complete one game during CZ.

Note that even if the shortest playing time remains 4.1 seconds by keeping the one-piece insertion button 205 pressed during CZ, if the one-piece insertion button 205 is kept pressed, Since it is necessary to progress through the game, it is difficult for even a player who is accustomed to playing the game to complete the game in 4.1 seconds. In other words, even if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed, the time required for one game during CZ becomes longer.

In addition, if the one-piece insertion button 205 is not kept pressed during CZ, the shortest playing time will be extended from 4.1 seconds to 10 seconds, which is more than twice the time of 4.1 seconds. However, if the average playing time for one game exceeds twice 4.1 seconds, then the shortest playing time after extension does not need to be more than twice 4.1 seconds (e.g. (The shortest playing time after the change may be about 7 seconds).

In this way, by increasing the shortest playing time during CZ and increasing the average playing time of the game, the burden on the hole can be alleviated. Furthermore, by increasing the average consumption time during CZ, players playing CZ can enjoy the CZ performance.

Furthermore, as the average consumption time during CZ becomes longer, people who are not playing slot machine 1 during CZ (for example, players who are playing at other slot machines around slot machine 1 during CZ) It is possible to frequently show the games in the CZ to people (such as people passing by the slot machine 1 in the CZ) and to attract interest in the slot machine 1.

For example, the AT winning rate in each game when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed during CZ is shown in the AT first winning table during CZ in FIG. 709 and Table 2 of the AT first winning lottery table in FIG. 710. When calculated from , it is approximately 1/10.43. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the CZ continues until the AT winning game or until 10 games are played, so if calculated from the AT winning rate in each game in the CZ, the CZ continues for an average of 6.67 games.

Further, according to the small winning lottery table in FIG. 706, the AT first winning lottery table in FIG. 707, and the CZ transition lottery table in FIG. 708, the probability of transition to CZ is about 1/603 during the normal game. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of normal games played in one day by 6.67×1/603 is the average number of CZ games played in one day. Assuming that 4000 normal games are executed in one day, an average of 44.2 CZ games are executed in one day.

For example, if 10 slot machines 1 are installed in the hall, a total of 442 CZ games will be executed by the 10 machines. If 442 games are played in the shortest normal playing time (4.1 seconds), the CZ game will be played for a total of 1814 seconds on 10 slot machines 1 in one day. Therefore, if the shortest playing time were doubled, the CZ game would run for a total of 1814 seconds (approximately 30 minutes) longer on one hole during the day, so the slot machine 1 in CZ The enjoyment of the slot machine 1 can be sufficiently announced even to those who do not play the game.

In addition, if the start lever 210 is operated (when the game is started) after performing an operation other than pressing and holding the one-sheet insertion button 205 (for example, a repeated tapping operation), or after performing no operation. However, in order to reduce the burden on the hole mentioned above, in principle, it is preferable not to display the optimal operation instruction (to avoid extending the shortest playing time) (long press of the single-card insertion button 205). Good.

On the other hand, in such a case, for example, an operation instruction such as the message in FIG. For example, the message may be displayed and the image of the one-sheet input button 205 may be highlighted at the same time.

However, if a game with an extended minimum playing time is played consecutively for a specified number of games (for example, 5 games), the player may not have the intention to play a game with the normal minimum playing time (4.1 seconds). Since the message is highly accurate, there is no need to display or highlight the above-mentioned message again.

If a game with an extended minimum playing time is played consecutively for a specified number of games, for example, "I told you that if you press and hold the 1 BET button, the playing time for the game will be shortened, but... "You are wasting the goodwill of the person...I'm sorry...", but the optimal operation content is displayed, but the above-mentioned message is redisplayed and the image of the one-sheet input button 205 is highlighted. It would be good to display it differently. By performing different displays in this way, even a player who has not noticed the operation instructions can easily notice the new display, whether it is by redisplaying the message mentioned above or highlighting the image of the one-card insertion button 205. It is from.

However, if special conditions are met while a game with an extended minimum playing time is being played, the minimum playing time may be shortened (it may be returned to the original 4.1 seconds, (It may be shortened to a value of more than 4.1 seconds and less than 10 seconds). This is to prevent players from being inconvenienced by making the average consumption time excessively long. However, if the shortest playing time is to be returned to its original value of 4.1 seconds, it is desirable to return it after the game in which the shortest playing time was extended has ended, that is, in the next or subsequent games.

Please note that the storage release switch 209 (stored medal liquidation switch) is not operated during the execution of a game for which the minimum playing time has been extended, and the production button 204 is not operated (for example, pressed once or long pressed). , are all examples of the special conditions mentioned above.

In addition, if the slot machine 1 is designed to allow a winning combination to be drawn during the execution of a game whose minimum playing time has been extended, winnings may be won during the execution of a game whose minimum playing time has been extended. The lottery of winning combinations is also an example of the above-mentioned special conditions. Furthermore, it is allowed that the winning combination is drawn during the execution of a game whose minimum playing time has been extended (even if the minimum playing time has been extended, a game whose minimum playing time has been extended is still being played). (in other words, allowing multiple winning combinations to be drawn in a single game), the shortest playing time is extended. Disadvantages can be alleviated.

However, if the system is designed to allow a winning combination to be drawn during the execution of a game with an extended minimum playing time, it is desirable that an upper limit to the number of drawings be set. For example, the number of drawings that can be executed depending on the number of medals (maximum credits) that can be inserted into the slot machine 1 (the maximum credits is 50 and the number of medals required for one game is 3, 50/3 = 16.666...smaller 16 times) is the upper limit.

If the lottery has been executed up to the maximum number of times, the minimum playing time for the next game may be returned to the normal 4.1 seconds, or if the lottery has been executed even once, the shortest playing time for the next game may be set to 4.1 seconds. The shortest gaming time may be returned to the normal 4.1 seconds.

In addition, if the design is designed to allow a winning combination to be drawn during a game in which the minimum playing time has been extended, the winning combination in the drawing when the lever is turned on for the game in which the minimum playing time has been extended is a bonus. (A winning combination in which the conditional device is activated until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is completed. Also called a carryover winning combination) and a winning combination of a lottery held during a game in which the shortest playing time has been extended. There may also be cases where it is a bonus.

In this case, for example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning bonus is displayed on the reels when the lever is turned on, the state shifts to the bonus game state of that bonus, and the ending condition of the bonus game state (for example, the number of medals to be paid out is When the number (for example, 300 or more) is satisfied, the bonus game state ends. Then, from the first game after the bonus gaming state ends, the reels can be stopped at the symbol combination that corresponds to the bonus won during the execution of the game for which the shortest playing time has been extended, and the symbol combination will appear on the reels. Once displayed, a bonus gaming state for a new bonus begins.

In addition, in the above case, for bonuses won by lottery during the execution of a game in which the minimum playing time has been extended, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus will not be displayed and the system will move to the bonus gaming state. Good too. By generating the bonus game state in this way, the player recognizes consecutive bonuses as if they were a single bonus that can earn a large amount of medals. The upper limit on the number of medals that can be earned with a single bonus is determined by the rules, but due to consecutive bonuses (the bonus symbols do not line up in the second bonus), the player may earn more medals than the rules. You can feel like you are getting the ball. In addition, in these consecutive bonuses, it is preferable to perform an effect so that the multiple bonuses appear to be one bonus, such as by continuously counting the cumulative number of medals obtained in the bonus without resetting the display.

In addition, even in a game where the shortest playing time is extended, the operation instruction to keep the one-piece insertion button 205 pressed, the operation instruction to press each reel stop button in a pseudo game, and the visibility condition of each transparent liquid crystal are made good. Three instructions consisting of operation instructions for operating the starting lever 210 can be displayed simultaneously. Note that the shortest gaming time extension process is not limited to the above-mentioned CZ, but may be executed during the CZ (for example, a special specialized zone described later) executed during the AT.

[12-8. CZ (specialized zone) that moves during AT]
The CZ executed during AT will be described below. If AT is won, the initial number of games (for example, 50 or more) is determined. In addition, based on the winning combination during the AT game or the AT portent game, a lottery for the number of AT games will be held, or a shift to a mode in which the number of AT games will be increased with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/2). The number of AT games can be increased by holding a lottery or by holding a lottery for moving to a specialized zone that increases the number of AT games each game.

This makes it possible to realize the number of AT games exceeding the initial number of games determined at the time of AT winning. Also, if you win a push order bell (123 bells, 132 bells, 213 bells, 231 bells, 312 bells, or 321 bells) during an AT game, the probability is higher than in a normal game (for example, if you win a push order bell during an AT game, /1, and 0/1 during the normal game excluding the precursor game), and immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, the correct pressing order is notified (for example, at a position directly above each reel on the image display 500). (Numbers indicating the pressing order are displayed, and a voice such as "Inside!" is output from the speaker 512.) This makes it possible to enjoy the game while increasing the number of medals during AT.

Slot machine 1 in this chapter is equipped with a specialized zone that is CZ in AT, and the specialized zone includes a normal specialized zone and a special specialized zone. When a specialized zone is won during AT, for example, there is a probability of 3/4 to move to the normal specialized zone, and a probability of 1/4 to move to the special specialized zone. The normal specialized zone is a general specialized zone in which the number of AT games is increased every game. On the other hand, the special specialization zone is a specialization zone in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to enter the specialization zone, and the details will be described later.

In addition, if you win a specialization zone again in a special specialization zone, instead of moving to a new specialization zone, you can return to the AT state that is not a specialization zone and, for example, play a predetermined number of AT games. After digesting it, move it to a new specialization zone. In this case, the predetermined number of games is, for example, less than the initial number of AT games (for example, 50 games), or less than the average number of AT games at one time, including the number of games added to the initial number of AT games. A short number of games is desirable.

However, in the special specialized zone, if the number of remaining AT games is small when the special zone is won again, the AT may end before the predetermined number of games are played. Therefore, at the end of the special specialized zone, it is preferable to add an AT game that is shorter (for example, 20 games) than the initial number of AT games, for example. By doing this, it is possible to maintain the AT state until entering the specialization zone again after the end of the specialization zone.

Note that it is desirable to start the specialized zone from the game following the game in which the player won the lottery for transition to the specialized zone. By doing this, it is possible to move to the specialized zone before the AT ends. Furthermore, if the number of remaining AT games becomes zero after the start of the specialized zone and before the end of the specialized zone, it is desirable to continue the AT state until the end of the specialized zone. By doing this, all the acquired specialization zones can be consumed during AT.

Next, an example of the performance in the specialized zone will be explained. As for the normal specialized zone, the same effects as the specialized zone in a general slot machine are performed, so illustration thereof is omitted. In the normal specialized zone, for example, when the lever is turned on for each game, the number of additional games is determined based on the winning combination, and an effect indicating the level of expectation is made to appear based on the winning combination or the determined number of additional games. Then, for example, the determined number of additional games is notified using the image display body 500 or the like at the third stop. Note that the normal specialized zone ends after a fixed predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games).

FIG. 731 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance in the special specialization zone. The special specialized zone ends, for example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time of transition to the special specialized zone, regardless of the number of games played. (A) shows the state at the end of the game in which the special specialized zone is won. A display indicating that the player has won the special specialized zone is displayed on the image display body 500.

(B) shows the state when the lever is turned on in the next game of (A), that is, the starting game of the special specialized zone. When the lever is turned on, the time (for example, 60 seconds) until the end of the special specialization zone is set in the timer. The gameplay is how many normal specialized zones can be stocked in these 60 seconds. You can also stock specialized zones.

It should be noted that the pseudo game is played continuously during this 60 seconds. If you keep the 1BET button pressed during the special specialization zone, the specialization zone stock probability will double, but the timer speed until the end of the special specialization zone will double (that is, it will be shortened to 30 seconds at the shortest). ). As a result, when the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed, more drawings can be drawn per unit time than when it is not kept pressed. If you do not keep it pressed, you can enjoy the special specialization zone for a longer time than if you keep it pressed. Note that the time until the end of the special specialization zone is not limited to one fixed value (60 seconds), and for example, one value may be selected from a plurality of values.

(B) shows an operation instruction message indicating that if the 1-sheet input button 205 is held down, the AT lottery will be given preferential treatment, but time will proceed at double speed, and an image of the 1-sheet input button 205 with an arrow. An operation instruction image is displayed. After this, a pseudo game similar to the above-mentioned CZ is played.

Specifically, if the specialized zone is won, pseudo games similar to those shown in FIGS. 717(B) to 718(J) are played, and if the specialized zone is not won, the pseudo games shown in FIGS. 717(B) to 718(J) are played. Following F), a pseudo game similar to that shown in FIG. 719 (G2) to (J2) is performed. The pseudo game is then repeated until the timer value becomes zero. Furthermore, when the timer value reaches zero, the special specialized zone may be terminated by forcibly ending the pseudo game in progress, or the special specialized zone may be terminated when the pseudo game in progress ends. Good too. Note that even during the specialized zone, a telop image instructing to keep pressing the one-sheet input button 205 shown in FIG. 719 may be displayed at all times, as in the case of CZ.

Furthermore, for example, in order to prevent players from becoming too excited about their gambling spirit, an upper limit on the number of specialized zones that can be stocked in one special specialized zone (for example, 10) may be set. desirable. Also, even if multiple specialization zones are stocked in one special specialization zone, each specialization zone will be released instead of releasing the stocked multiple specialization zones consecutively. It is preferable to play a predetermined number of normal AT games (that is, AT games that are not specialized zone games) between the two. That is, the game progresses as follows: end of special specialized zone -> normal AT -> specialized zone -> normal AT -> .

Furthermore, during the pseudo-gaming in the special specialized zone, a notification effect may be performed to notify that all winning stocks have been won, or it is not necessary to perform a notification effect for some or all of the stocks. (In other words, the player does not know the number of winning stocks (however, the number is greater than the notified number)). Further, the display in the notification effect may be erased once at the timing of transition to the normal AT game, or may be executed over the normal AT game.

Furthermore, since the special specialized zone can serve as an opportunity to greatly increase the number of medals acquired, the special specialized zone gives the player a strong sense of tension. Therefore, in order to relieve the player's own tension and play the game to the fullest, for example, when the reel stop button of the first pseudo stop and the second pseudo stop in the pseudo game is pressed, during the special specialized zone ( Or you can change the BGM of the period spanning from the special specialization zone to the next normal AT), or you can change the tone of the message displayed on the image display 500 (for example, "Master!! Red in the middle of the right reel. It is desirable to change it to a maid-like phrase, such as "Please stop the number 7!". Note that these operating means for changing the BGM and messages are the same operating means if you look at them together as the reel stop button, but if you consider each reel stop button as an individual operating means, you can think of them as different operating means. You can also do that.

Further, since the special specialized zone ends with the passage of time, for example, a countdown of the remaining time of the special specialized zone may be displayed on the image display body 500 so that the player can recognize the remaining time. The countdown starts, for example, when the special specialization zone starts (that is, when the lever is turned on), and the countdown progresses at double speed when the one-sheet input button 205 is pressed. In addition, at the start of the special specialized zone, the countdown will not be displayed at the timing of the first pseudo stop, second pseudo stop, or third pseudo stop in the pseudo game (for example, the first time), without displaying the countdown of the remaining time. May be displayed.

For example, if a countdown is displayed after the lever is turned on without displaying a message that directly announces or indirectly suggests the special specialization zone as shown in FIGS. 731(A) and (B), it is possible to At this point, the player does not know whether the normal specialized zone or the special specialized zone has started. Then, at the timing of the pseudo-stop, a countdown is suddenly displayed and the player can recognize that it is a special specialized zone, which immediately heightens the sense of anticipation.

In addition, when the countdown display is performed at a timing after the lever is turned on when there are multiple specialization zone times (for example, 60 seconds and 120 seconds are determined by lottery), for example, 30 seconds is displayed. It is possible to increase expectations by keeping secret whether the special zone is 60 seconds or 120 seconds, or by displaying 90 seconds and making players aware that it is a special zone of 120 seconds. .

Note that the operation means for changing the BGM and the tone of the message in the special specialization zone described above and the operation means for displaying the countdown (that is, for announcing the type of specialization zone) are the same. There may be one or different. By keeping these operating means the same, the player can change the BGM, change the tone of voice, and notify the special zone by operating the same operating means. Although it is difficult to get a sense of expectation, one can have a great sense of expectation regarding the operation of the same operating means. On the other hand, by making these operating means different, the player can have a sense of expectation regarding the operation of each of the different operating means.

[12-9. Relationship between instruction performances for different operation parts during CZ 1]
Hereinafter, the relationship between instruction effects for different operation units during CZ will be explained. As described above, during the pseudo game during CZ, the image display body 500 displays an instruction to keep the one-piece input button 205 pressed, an operation instruction for each reel stop button, and an operation instruction for the start lever 210.

Keeping the 1-piece input button 205 pressed is an operation related to the lottery result, and if this operation instruction is deleted, the player can no longer press the 1-piece input button 205 and receive an advantageous lottery. There is a risk. Further, if the operation instructions for each reel stop button are deleted, the player may not know whether to stop each reel or not. Furthermore, if the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is deleted, the player may mistakenly believe that the visibility of the reels cannot be improved, which increases the difficulty of pressing the eyes during a pseudo game, and reduces interest. There is a risk. Therefore, these problems can be solved by allowing three operation instructions to be displayed simultaneously on the image display body 500.

Below, three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, and the operation instructions are displayed in the following order: an instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed, an instruction to each reel stop button, and an instruction to operate the start lever 210. Let's look at an example to get started.

That is, in this example, first, an operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205 related to the lottery result during CZ is displayed to make the player understand the lottery method. Then, an instruction to press the reel stop button is issued to quickly stop the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b, which do not indicate a lottery result. Then, an instruction to operate the starting lever 210 is displayed to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c that indicates the lottery result, and to concentrate the player's attention on the right reel 301c.

The effect of displaying operation instructions in this order will be described below. First, as shown in FIG. 717(B), when it is determined to shift to CZ, the explanatory text of CZ is executed in a state before shifting to CZ. This explanatory text instructs, for example, to maintain the pressed state of the one-sheet input button 205 as described above. Since some players may not know which operation part the 1-sheet insertion button 205 is, in this explanation, the image of the 1-sheet insertion button 205 (an image imitating the 1-sheet insertion button 205) is used as an image, as described above. It is preferable to display it on the display body 500.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 717(C), when CZ starts, the explanatory text indicating the instruction to keep the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed down is erased, but the instruction to keep the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed down is erased. It is desirable that the image of the one-sheet input button 205 be continuously displayed so that the user can continuously recognize it. Further, when continuously displaying the image of the one-piece insertion button 205, the display size of the image may be continuously displayed without changing in order not to change the player's perception of the operation of the one-piece insertion button. , since it is considered that the player understands the mechanism of CZ after receiving the explanation, the display size of the image may be changed to be smaller than when the explanatory text was displayed, and the player may change the display size of the image to be smaller than when the explanatory text was displayed. Since keeping the button pressed is an important operation related to the lottery results, the display size of the image may be changed to be larger than when the explanatory text was displayed.

Note that the image may be displayed, for example, as a cycle effect that repeatedly flashes or moves at a predetermined period. If you want to continue displaying the image without changing the display size when the explanatory text is deleted, you can inherit the cycle that started when the explanatory text was displayed, or restart the cycle at that timing. You can start it.

Specifically, for example, the image is displayed as a cycle effect in which three display images are repeatedly displayed in the order of display image 1, display image 2, and display image 3, and display image 2 is displayed immediately before the explanatory text is erased. is displayed, at the timing of erasing the explanatory text, the cycle may be inherited by displaying display image 3, which is the next image after display image 2, to continue the cycle effect, or the cycle effect may be continued. The cycle effect may be restarted by displaying display image 1, which is the start image.

Furthermore, when the explanatory text is deleted, the display size of the image of the one-sheet input button 205 may be changed to a similar size (for example, approximately 0.7 times to 1.3 times). The appearance of the image of the one-sheet input button 205 may be changed before and after the explanatory text is deleted. Specifically, for example, even if the display size of the image of the one-sheet input button 205 is changed or not, the cycle performance itself (for example, the amount of movement, display position, and blinking speed, etc.) may be changed. Thereby, after the explanatory text is erased, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the operation of keeping the one-card insertion button 205 pressed.

Subsequently, while the instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed down is displayed, the contents of the instruction to operate each reel stop button are displayed on the image display body 500. Note that since it is assumed that the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed in accordance with the instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed, images of each reel stop button showing operation instructions for each reel stop button are is displayed, the image of the one-sheet input button 205 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

If the image of the 1-sheet input button 205 (image that instructs to keep the 1-sheet input button pressed) and the image of each reel stop button (image that instructs to press each reel stop button) are displayed at the same time, the current While the sound and lamp are being output to notify that the state is CZ, the sound corresponding to the operation instruction of each reel stop button (for example, pressing the right reel stop button 211c like "Right!") It is desirable to output a sound that instructs the reel stop button 211c) or a lamp (for example, a lamp provided on the right reel stop button 211c to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue)). This allows the player to reliably recognize that he is being asked to operate the reel stop button.

In addition, when issuing an operation instruction for each reel stop button, for example, some lamps provided in the slot machine 1 (for example, a lamp provided for the reel stop button to be pressed) may be used as a lamp corresponding to the operation instruction. The other lamps continue to emit light indicating that the current state is controlled by CZ.

Subsequently, while the instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed and the instruction to press each reel stop button are displayed, the contents of the instruction to operate the start lever 210 are displayed on the image display body 500. be done. Note that since it is assumed that the single-sheet loading button 205 is kept pressed in accordance with the instruction to keep the single-sheet loading button 205 pressed, an image of the starting lever 210 indicating an operation instruction for the starting lever 210 is displayed. The image of the one-sheet input button 205 does not necessarily have to be displayed when the one-sheet input button 205 is pressed.

In addition, even if the starting lever 210 is operated according to the operating instructions, it only improves the visibility in the production display, and we believe that operating the reel stop button is more important than operating the starting lever 210. It will be done. Therefore, when the image of each reel stop button is displayed, the image of the one-sheet input button 205 and the image of the start lever 210 do not necessarily need to be displayed.

When the image of the one-sheet input button 205 and the image of the start lever 210 are displayed at the same time, and when the image of each reel stop button and the image of the start lever 210 are displayed at the same time, the current state is CZ. While a sound or a lamp is being output to notify you of something, a sound or lamp that corresponds to an instruction to operate the start lever 210 (for example, a sound that instructs you to press the start lever 210, such as "hit the lever!") or a lamp is output. (For example, a lamp provided near the starting lever 210 is made to emit light in a predetermined color) is preferably outputted preferentially. This allows the player to reliably recognize that he is being asked to operate the starting lever 210.

Furthermore, when giving an instruction to operate the starting lever 210, only some of the lamps provided in the slot machine 1 (for example, the lamps provided in the reel stop button to be pressed) are emitted as corresponding lamps. , the other lamps continue to emit light indicating that the current state is controlled by CZ.

As described above, the operation instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed (first operation instruction), the operation instruction for each reel stop button (second operation instruction), and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 (third operation instruction) , multiple operation instructions can be displayed simultaneously. When displaying a plurality of operation instructions at the same time, at least a portion of the plurality of operation instructions may be displayed overlapping each other, or may be displayed without overlapping.

By displaying at least a portion of the multiple operating instructions overlappingly, the player can recognize that the images of the multiple operating instructions are integrated to form one large operating instruction display, which increases motivation for the operation. do. Furthermore, by displaying at least a portion of multiple operation instructions in an overlapping manner, it becomes easier to secure a space for displaying effects other than the operation instructions on the image display body 500, thereby realizing a variety of display effects using the space. can do. On the other hand, by displaying a plurality of operation instructions without overlapping them, the player can easily identify each of the plurality of operation instructions, making it easier for the player to understand the gaming method during the pseudo game.

Display patterns (1) to (4) when multiple operation instructions are displayed simultaneously will be described below.

(1) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed simultaneously, but the third operation instruction is not displayed. When displaying the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction in an overlapping manner, the first operation instruction should be displayed on the front side of the second operation instruction (in other words, in the overlapping part, only the first instruction is visible). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery. When displaying the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction overlapping each other, displaying the second operation instruction on the front side of the first operation instruction makes it easier for the player to recognize the instruction to press each reel stop button. Since the player presses each reel stop button at an early timing, the pseudo game can proceed smoothly. Furthermore, when the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed without overlapping each other, the player can identify the operations indicated by both instructions, and can more reliably carry out both operations. .

(2) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed simultaneously, but the second operation instruction is not displayed. When displaying the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlapping each other, by displaying the first operation instruction on the front side than the third operation instruction, the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, can be displayed. This makes it easier for players to recognize it. When displaying the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction in an overlapping manner, displaying the third operation instruction on the front side of the first operation instruction makes it easier for the player to recognize the operation instruction for the starting lever 210. The player can reliably operate the starting lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reels and proceed with the pseudo game, which in turn improves interest. Further, when the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify the operations indicated by both instructions, and can reliably perform both operations.

(3) A pattern in which the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed simultaneously, but the first operation instruction is not displayed. When displaying the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction in an overlapping manner, by displaying the second operation instruction on the nearer side than the third operation instruction, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the operation instruction for the reel stop button. After stopping the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b, which do not indicate the lottery result, the player can concentrate on the operation to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c, which indicates the lottery result. When displaying the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction in an overlapping manner, displaying the third operation instruction on the front side of the second operation instruction makes it easier for the player to recognize the operation instruction for the starting lever 210. , the player can first operate the start lever 210 to make the reels in a good visual state, and then concentrate on the operation to stop each reel. Further, when the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify the operations indicated by both instructions, and can reliably perform both operations.

(4) A pattern in which the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction are displayed simultaneously. This pattern includes, for example, the following patterns (4a) to (4h) due to the overlapping display of each operation instruction.
(4a) A pattern in which each of the first operation instruction, second operation instruction, and third operation instruction is displayed overlapping with both of the other two operation instructions.
(4b) A pattern in which the first operation instruction overlaps with the second and third operation instructions, but the second and third operation instructions are displayed without overlapping.
(4c) A pattern in which the second operation instruction overlaps with the first and third operation instructions, but the first and third operation instructions are displayed without overlapping.
(4d) A pattern in which the third operation instruction overlaps with the first and second operation instructions, but the first and second operation instructions are displayed without overlapping.
(4e) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction overlap, but the third operation instruction is displayed without overlapping either the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction.
(4f) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap, but the second operation instruction is displayed without overlapping either the first operation instruction or the third operation instruction.
(4g) A pattern in which the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap, but the first operation instruction is displayed without overlapping with either the second or third operation instruction.
(4h) A pattern in which each of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction is displayed so as to overlap with any of the other two operation instructions.

In pattern (4a), all the operation instructions overlap each other, giving the player the impression that the three operation instructions are integrated, making it easier for the player to notice the integrated operation instructions. Become. Furthermore, the total display area of the three operation instructions is reduced, and a wide area of the image display body 500 can be effectively used for other effects.

Note that in pattern (4a), there may be an area where all of the first operation instruction, second operation instruction, and third operation instruction overlap (i.e., the display area of the first operation instruction and the display area of the second operation instruction may overlap). The intersection set of the display area and the display area of the third operation instruction is not an empty set), or the area may not exist (that is, the intersection set is an empty set).

In pattern (4a), by displaying the first operation instruction, second operation instruction, and third operation instruction in order from the front, the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed, each reel stop button is pressed, and the start lever 210 is pressed. The impression that the player has regarding each operation can be strengthened in this order. In other words, the player is made to extremely strongly recognize the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, to ensure that the one-piece input button 205 remains pressed, and to be made to strongly recognize the operation of each reel stop button. This allows the simulated game to proceed smoothly and weakens the player's recognition of the instruction to operate the starting lever 210, which is not directly related to the progress of the simulated game.

In pattern (4a), by displaying the first operation instruction, third operation instruction, and second operation instruction in order from the front, it is possible to keep the single-sheet input button 205 pressed, operate the start lever 210, and press each reel stop button. The player's impression of each operation can be strengthened in the order of "press" and "press". In other words, the player is made to strongly recognize the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, to ensure that the one-card insertion button 205 remains pressed, and to make the player strongly recognize the operation of the start lever 210. By improving the visibility of the right reel 301c that shows the lottery results, it is possible to increase interest and weaken the player's recognition of the operation instructions for the left reel stop button 211a and middle reel stop button 211b that do not show the lottery results.

In pattern (4a), by displaying the second operation instruction, first operation instruction, and third operation instruction in order from the front, each reel stop button is pressed, the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed, and the start lever 210 is pressed. The impression that the player has regarding each operation can be strengthened in this order. In other words, the pseudo game is made to proceed smoothly by making the player recognize the operation of each reel stop button very strongly, and the player is made to strongly recognize the first operation instruction to maintain the pressed state of the one-piece insertion button 205 as much as possible, and the pseudo game is made to proceed smoothly. It is possible to weaken the player's recognition of the instruction to operate the starting lever 210, which is not directly related to the progress.

In pattern (4a), by displaying the second operation instruction, third operation instruction, and first operation instruction in order from the front, each reel stop button is pressed, the start lever 210 is operated, and the one-sheet input button 205 is pressed. The player's impression of each operation can be strengthened in the order of "maintain" and "maintain". In other words, the operation of each reel stop button is recognized very strongly to allow the pseudo game to proceed smoothly, and the operation of the start lever 210 is strongly recognized and the visibility of the right reel 301c indicating the lottery result is improved, thereby improving interest. By weakening the player's recognition of the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, excessive payout of medals can be suppressed, and the burden on the hall can be suppressed.

In pattern (4a), by displaying the third operation instruction, first operation instruction, and second operation instruction in order from the front, it is possible to operate the start lever 210, keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed, and press each reel stop button. The player's impression of each operation can be strengthened in the order of "press" and "press". In other words, the player is made to strongly recognize the operation of the starting lever 210 and the visibility of the right reel 301c showing the lottery result is improved, thereby increasing the interest. By maintaining the pressed state as much as possible, it is possible to weaken the player's recognition of operation instructions for the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b, which do not indicate lottery results.

In pattern (4a), by displaying the third operation instruction, second operation instruction, and first operation instruction in order from the front, the start lever 210 is operated, each reel stop button is pressed, and the one-sheet input button 205 is pressed. The player's impression of each operation can be strengthened in the order of "maintain" and "maintain". In other words, by making the operation of the start lever 210 extremely recognized and improving the visibility of the right reel 301c that shows the lottery results, the interest is improved, and by making the operation of each reel stop button strongly recognized, the pseudo game progresses smoothly. By weakening the player's recognition of the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, excessive payout of medals can be suppressed, and the burden on the hall can be suppressed.

Note that in pattern (4a), the positional relationship before and after the three operation instructions may be a three-block relationship. Specifically, for example, in a portion where the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction overlap, the first operation instruction is displayed in front of the second operation instruction, and in a portion where the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap, the first operation instruction is displayed in front of the second operation instruction. In this case, the second operation instruction is displayed in front of the third operation instruction, and in the area where the third operation instruction and the first operation instruction overlap, the third operation instruction is displayed in front of the first operation instruction. . However, in this case, in the part where the first operation instruction, second operation instruction, and third operation instruction all overlap, for example, any one operation instruction may be displayed, or an image other than each operation instruction may be displayed. It may be displayed or left blank.

In patterns (4b) to (4d), one operation instruction overlaps with two other operation instructions, but the other two operation instructions are displayed without overlapping each other. This gives the player the impression that the three operating instructions are integrated, making it easier for the player to see the integrated operating instructions, and also ensuring that the other two operating instructions overlap. Therefore, compared to pattern (4a), it is easier for the player to identify each operation instruction.

In patterns (4e) to (4g), one operation instruction does not overlap with the other two operation instructions, but the other two operation instructions are displayed in an overlapping manner. Thereby, the player can completely distinguish the one operation instruction from the other two operation instructions, and can easily execute the one operation instruction with certainty. On the other hand, it gives the player the impression that the other two operation instructions are integrated, and the integrated operation instructions tend to catch the player's attention.

Note that the relationship between the display positions of the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction in patterns (4b) to (4g) is the same as that explained in the above-mentioned pattern (1). The context of the display positions of the third operation instruction is the same as that explained in pattern (2) above, and the context of the display positions of the second and third operation instructions is the same as that of pattern (3) above. The content is similar to what was explained.

In pattern (4h), since each operation instruction is displayed without overlapping, the player can easily identify all the operation instructions, making it easier to reliably execute the operation indicated by each operation instruction.

For example, when images of the one-sheet input button 205, each reel stop button, and the start lever 210 are displayed as operation instructions, these images start displaying with special effects (for example, when the corresponding The display may start with the image fading in, or the display may start with images of the operating unit disassembled into a plurality of parts coming together to form an image of the operating unit, etc.). Display of the image may be started in the same manner as during display.

For example, an image of an operation instruction that starts displaying with such a special effect is displayed in front of images of other operation instructions. Thereby, even after the display of the image with the effect has started and is still being displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the image and more reliably cause the player to perform the operation indicated by the image. On the other hand, the image of the other operation instruction may be displayed in front of the image of the operation instruction that has started displaying with a special effect. As a result, when the player is accompanied by a special effect, the player focuses on the image with the effect, and after the effect ends, the player focuses on the other image located in the foreground. It is possible to make the player recognize the instructions in a well-balanced manner.

Further, when images of the one-sheet input button 205, each reel stop button, and the start lever 210 are displayed as operation instructions, each of these images may have a plurality of display modes. Furthermore, the AT winning expectation level may be indicated by these multiple display modes (for example, if an image of a large-sized reel stop button is displayed, the AT winning expectation level is high, and an image of a small-sized reel stop button is displayed). When is displayed, the AT winning expectation level is low, and when the red image of the 1 coin insertion button 205 is displayed, the AT winning expectation level is high, and the white image of the 1 coin insertion button 205 is displayed. (In some cases, the expectation level of winning AT is low, etc.)

For example, among images having a plurality of display modes, an image with a high AT winning expectation is displayed in front of images with other operation instructions. As a result, the player can easily recognize the image in which the AT winning expectation is high, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation. On the other hand, images of other operation instructions may be displayed in front of images of a mode in which the AT winning expectation is high. For example, even if an image of a reel stop button with a high expectation of AT winning is displayed, it does not necessarily mean that you will win AT, so an image of the 1-piece insertion button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery is displayed. This is because it is more advantageous for the player to display the button closer to the player to encourage the player to keep pressing the one-card insertion button 205.

Note that the operation of the reel stop button during the pseudo game is an operation performed for the progress of the pseudo game, and is not an operation for receiving a preferential lottery. , even if the operation is performed, it does not indicate the lottery result. Therefore, in particular, with regard to the image of the operation instruction for the reel stop button, it is possible to start displaying it with the above-mentioned special effects or to have the plurality of types of display modes mentioned above, so that the player can press the reel stop button. It is possible to increase expectations and motivation for pressing the button.

Note that when multiple operation instructions are displayed at the same time, at least a portion of the timing at which all the sounds corresponding to each of the multiple operation instructions are output may overlap, or only some of the sounds may be output. At least a part of the timings outputted may overlap, or the timings outputted for all sounds may not overlap at all.

If the output timings of sounds corresponding to operation instructions overlap, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize these operation instructions by ear, but since there is no interval between outputs of sounds for operation instructions with overlapping timings, the sense of speed can be improved. Increase. On the other hand, when the output timing of an operation instruction voice does not overlap with the output timing of other operation instruction voices, the player can more easily recognize the operation instruction indicated by the voice and more reliably execute the operation indicated by the operation instruction. It becomes easier.

Specifically, for example, the audio instruction to keep the one-piece input button 205 depressed in order to receive a preferential lottery may be duplicated with the audio of other operation instructions so that the player can clearly recognize it. First, regarding the audio instructions for pressing each reel stop button related to the progress of the pseudo game and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reels, in order to improve the sense of speed of the performance, the output timing is at least Duplicate some parts.

Further, when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed simultaneously, for example, all the sounds corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions may be output, or only some of the sounds may be output. By outputting all the sounds, it is possible for the player to hear all the instructions. Further, the reason why only some of the sounds are output is because if all of the sounds are output, the players will be confused because they will not be able to understand the instruction contents indicated by many of the sounds. When outputting only part of the audio, for example, the priority (for example, instruction to keep the one-piece input button 205 pressed in order to receive a preferential lottery) > To improve the visibility of the reel showing the lottery results The priority order is predetermined in the following order: operation instruction for the start lever 210 > instruction to press each reel stop button that may not show the lottery result), and a predetermined number (1 It is preferable to output audio corresponding to one or two operation instructions.

Further, when outputting sounds corresponding to each of a plurality of operation instructions, a volume difference may be provided for each sound. In this case as well, for example, the priority (for example, an instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed to receive preferential lottery results>an instruction to operate the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel showing the lottery results>) (instructions to press each reel stop button, which may not indicate the lottery result) are predetermined in order of priority, and the higher the priority, the higher the volume is preferably output.

Note that when multiple operation instructions are displayed at the same time, at least a portion of the timing at which all the lamps corresponding to each of the multiple operation instructions emit light may overlap, or only some of the lamps may emit light. At least a portion of the timings may overlap, or the timings at which all the lamps emit light may not overlap at all.

If the timings of the lamps corresponding to the operation instructions overlap, the player is more likely to be confused as to which operation part to operate, but since many lamps emit light at the same time, the player's sense of anticipation is improved. On the other hand, if the sound of the operation instruction does not overlap in timing with the lamps of other operation instructions, the player will be able to more easily pay attention to the operation instruction indicated by the relevant lamp, and will more reliably execute the operation indicated by the operation instruction. .

Specifically, for example, a lamp for instructing to keep the one-piece input button 205 depressed to give preferential treatment to the lottery may be emitted overlappingly with lamps for other operation instructions so that the player can clearly recognize it. First, regarding the lighting of the lamps for instructions to press each reel stop button related to the progress of the pseudo game and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reels, in order to improve the expectation of the player, the lamps are emitted. Overlap at least some of the timing.

Further, when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed simultaneously, for example, all the lamps corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions may be caused to emit light, or only some of the lamps may be caused to emit light. By making all the lamps emit light, it is possible for the player to recognize all instruction contents using the lamps. Further, the reason why only some of the lamps are made to emit light is because if all the lamps emit light, the player will be confused and unable to understand the instruction content shown by many lamps. When only some of the lamps are made to emit light, for example, the priority (for example, instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed to receive preferential lottery results > activation to improve visibility of reels showing lottery results) The priority order is predetermined in the following order: instruction to operate the lever 210 > instruction to press each reel stop button that may not show the lottery result), and a predetermined number (one or It is preferable to cause the lamps corresponding to the operation instructions (2) to emit light.

Further, when causing lamps corresponding to each of a plurality of operation instructions to emit light, for example, the light emission pattern of some or all of the lamps may be changed. In this case as well, for example, the priority (for example, an instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed to receive preferential lottery results>an instruction to operate the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel showing the lottery results>) Instructions to press each reel stop button (which may not show the lottery result) are predetermined in order of priority, and correspond to a predetermined number (1 to 3) of operation instructions from the lowest priority. It is a good idea to change the light emission pattern of the lamp used.

Furthermore, for example, if at least some of the lamps used overlap when emitting light from lamps corresponding to multiple operation instructions, for example, a lamp corresponding to only one of the plurality of operation instructions may emit light. Light emission occurs. In this case, for example, the priority (for example, an instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed in order to receive preferential lottery results > an instruction to operate the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel showing the lottery results > lottery (instructions for pressing each reel stop button, which may not show a result) are predetermined in order of priority, and it is preferable that the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction with the highest priority be emitted. Furthermore, in the case where at least some of the lamps used overlap in the light emission of the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions, for example, the light emission of the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions may be executed in order. It's okay.

[12-10. Relationship between instruction performances for different operation parts during CZ 2]
Below, three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, and the operation instructions are displayed in the following order: an instruction to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed, an instruction to operate the start lever 210, and an instruction to each reel stop button. Let's look at an example to get started.

For example, as shown in FIG. 730, the slot machine 1 includes a transparent liquid crystal 301aa, a transparent liquid crystal 301ab, a transparent liquid crystal 301ba, a transparent liquid crystal 301bb, a transparent liquid crystal 301ca, and a transparent liquid crystal 301cb, which cover the upper and lower stages of each reel. shall be taken as a thing. It is assumed that during the CZ pseudo game, an image is displayed on each transparent liquid crystal, and the visibility of the upper and lower rows of each reel is reduced.

In this example, first, an operation instruction for the one-card insertion button 205 related to the lottery result during CZ is displayed to make the player understand the lottery method. Next, by displaying an operation instruction for the starting lever 210, the player can understand the eye-catching game nature of the CZ pseudo game. Finally, operation instructions for each reel stop button are displayed to advance the pseudo game.

By displaying the operation instruction for the start lever 210 before the operation instruction for each reel stop button, for example, a player who is not good at pressing the start lever 210 can improve the visibility of the reels by operating the start lever 210. Players who are good at eye-pulling do not dare to operate the start lever 210 and perform eye-pressing in a simulated game with only the middle row of each reel visible. It is possible to provide a way to enjoy a simulated game that matches the skill of the player.

In addition, even for players who are good at eye-pulling, the game can progress more smoothly if they press with their eyes visible when all pieces on the reels are visible, rather than when only the middle row of the reels is visible. Therefore, the instruction to operate the start lever 210 is displayed before the instruction to operate each reel stop button is displayed.

Note that the pattern in which each operation instruction is displayed simultaneously, the overlapping of images of each operation instruction in the pattern, and the relationship between sounds and lamps corresponding to each operation instruction are the same as described above.

[12-11. Relationship between instruction performances for different operation parts during CZ 3]
Hereinafter, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions will be displayed in the following order: operation instructions for each reel stop button, instructions to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed, and operation instructions for the start lever 210. Let's look at an example to get started.

During the CZ, although it is possible to receive a preferential lottery by keeping the one-card insertion button 205 pressed, some players feel that keeping the one-piece insertion button 205 pressed puts a heavy physical burden on them. Furthermore, if you attempt to pseudo-stop each reel in accordance with the operation instructions for each reel stop button while maintaining the pressed state, there is a risk that you may accidentally release your hand from the one-sheet input button 205.

Therefore, in the CZ of this chapter, it is assumed that the player can receive a preferential lottery even if he or she stops keeping the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, once) during the CZ. Specifically, for example, even if pressing of the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted after the hold-down flag is turned on during CZ, the hold-down flag remains on as long as the number of interruptions is within a predetermined number of times. , if the number of interruptions exceeds a predetermined number, or if a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds) has elapsed since the interruption, the hold down flag is set to OFF.

FIG. 732 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of CZ effect. Mainly, the differences from the presentation in FIG. 717 will be explained. (A) is a state in which only the left reel 301a is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game of the CZ starting game, and is a continuation of, for example, FIG. 717(C). Also, in (A), it is assumed that the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed (that is, the press-down maintenance flag is on).

(B) is a state in which the pressing of the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted from the state in (A). If the pressing of the one-sheet input button 205 is simply interrupted, the effect display displayed on the image display body 500 is the same as that shown in (A). At the time of (B), the AT lottery has not yet been conducted, and even if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted after the first pseudo-stop, one sheet is inserted again before the second pseudo-stop. If the button 205 is continuously pressed, the AT lottery can be won, so in (B), the presentation state of (A) is maintained.

(C) shows a state in which the middle reel 301b is pseudo-stopped while the single-sheet input button 205 is not being pressed. When the middle reel 301b is stopped while pressing the 1-sheet input button 205 is interrupted, the operation instruction for the 1-sheet input button 205 that has been displayed since the start of CZ is emphasized (specifically, A different aspect from the image of the single sheet input button 205 that is displayed from the start of CZ, such as a large size) Operation instructions for the single sheet input button 205 (for example, an image of the single sheet input button 205 and a message saying "Keep pressing!") message) is displayed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that unless he continues to press the one-card insertion button 205, he will not be able to receive the preferential lottery.

As explained in FIG. 726, the slot machine 1 has a specification in which the AT lottery during the pseudo game is performed at the time of the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game, and when the second pseudo stop is performed with the press-down maintenance flag turned off. , since a lottery using Table 1 in FIG. 710 (that is, a lottery in which the AT winning rate is not preferentially treated) is performed, if the second pseudo-stop is performed while the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not held down, this In addition to the operation instruction for the single sheet input button 205 that has been displayed from the beginning, the operation instruction for the highlighted one sheet input button 205 is displayed.

Therefore, at the timing when the highlighted operation instruction for the single sheet input button 205 is displayed, the single sheet input button 205 is not pressed, so the operation instruction has the meaning of not only a call for attention but also a warning. (In addition to displaying the image of the one-sheet input button 205, it is also preferable to display a message "Keep pressing!" at the same time.)

However, since the pseudo-game itself can be played without keeping the 1-piece insertion button 205 pressed, as mentioned above, the operation instructions for the 1-piece insertion button that have been displayed since the start of CZ and the highlighted 1. In addition to the instruction to operate the sheet input button 205, an instruction to operate the right reel stop button 211c is also displayed.

Note that the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be replaced by other operation instructions (in the example (C), the message "Stop red 7 in the middle row of the right reel!", the image of the right reel stop button 211c, and The image of the one-sheet input button 205 that has been displayed since the start of CZ may be displayed overlapping the one-sheet input button 205, or may be displayed without overlapping. If they are displayed overlappingly, the position and manner in which the operating instructions and the other operating instructions are visible (for example, the operating instructions displayed on the front side are displayed semi-transparently or blinking, etc.) It is desirable that

Note that if the operation instructions for the one-sheet input button 205 that has been displayed since the start of CZ and the operation instructions for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 are displayed at the same time, the one-sheet input button that has been displayed since the start of CZ It is desirable to output the voice corresponding to the highlighted operation instruction of the one-sheet input button 205 without outputting the voice corresponding to the operation instruction of the button 205. This is because the instruction content itself in these two operation instructions is the same, so it is sufficient to output only the warning voice in the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205.

(D) is a continuation of (C), in which pressing of the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted. This is the same as in FIG. 717(E) except that the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 is displayed on the image display body 500.

(E) is a continuation of (D), in which pressing of the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted. This is the same as in FIG. 717(F) except that the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 is displayed on the image display body 500. We believe that the operation instruction to maintain the pressed state of the one-piece input button 205, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, is more important than the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c or the start lever 210. Therefore, the operation instruction to keep the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 pressed is continuously displayed.

However, it is possible to advance the pseudo game by improving the visibility of the right reel 301c without keeping the one-piece insertion button 205 pressed, so it is possible to proceed with the pseudo game by improving the visibility of the right reel 301c. Not only the operation instruction and the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205, but also the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 are displayed.

However, some players feel that keeping the 1-sheet insertion button 205 pressed is a great physical burden and feel that they do not need to receive preferential lottery tickets. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display, the display of the operation instruction may be erased. Furthermore, if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is held down again (maintained in the pressed state), the player is considered to have recognized the highlighted instruction to press the one-sheet insertion button 205, so the display is erased. Good too. In addition, when the AT lottery is performed during the pseudo game (the second pseudo stop is performed) with the one-sheet insertion button 205 resumed being pressed, an advantageous AT lottery using table 2 in FIG. Since the lottery has been held, the display may be deleted.

Further, the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be displayed only once for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) and for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second). The display may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, five times).

(F) is a continuation of (E), in which a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205, or the state in which the single-sheet input button 205 has resumed being pressed. be. Since the highlighted operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205 has been deleted, the state is similar to that shown in FIG. 717(F).

Note that the last AT lottery in the CZ ends with the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game in the final game of the CZ. Therefore, after the second pseudo-stop of the pseudo-game of the final game of CZ, even if the press of the one-piece insertion button 205 is interrupted, the lottery will not be affected, so even if the press of the one-piece insertion button is interrupted, the drawing will not be emphasized. It is not necessary to display an operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205.

It should be noted that freezing may always be applied after all reels of the main game in the final game of CZ are stopped. For example, during the freeze, the image display body 500 displays messages such as "Congratulations!" (if you won AT in the final CZ game) or "Too bad...!" (if you did not win AT in the final CZ game). A display indicating the results may be displayed. In addition, even if you stop pressing the one-piece insertion button 205 during the freeze (during the period from when all reels stop until the next game starts (reels rotate)), the highlighted one-piece insertion button 205 The operating instructions may not be displayed.

In addition, although an example has been described in which the holding down flag is not set to OFF even if the holding down of the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted for a predetermined number of times, if the specified number of times is multiple times, the highlighted 1 There is a possibility that the operation instruction for the insert button 205 will be displayed multiple times (it may be displayed multiple times in one game, or it may be displayed only once in one game, but it may be displayed across multiple games called CZ). (e.g., it may appear multiple times in an advantageous state in which it is executed).

Further, when the highlighted operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205 is being displayed, a new opportunity for displaying the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be satisfied. In this case, when the new opportunity is met, the operation instructions for the highlighted one-sheet input button may be newly displayed, or the operation instructions for the already highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform a new operation display, or, although no new operation display is performed, the display time of the new operation display may be added to the display time of the emphasized operation instruction that is already displayed.

[12-12. Relationship between instruction performances for different operation parts during CZ 4]
Below, three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, and the operation instructions are displayed in the following order: operation instructions for each reel stop button, operation instructions for the start lever 210, and instruction to keep pressed for the single sheet input button 205. Let's look at an example to get started. Also in the CZ of this chapter, it is assumed that even if the holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted up to a predetermined number of times (for example, once) during the CZ, a preferential lottery can be received.

FIG. 733 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of CZ effect. Mainly, the differences from the presentation in FIG. 717 will be explained. (A) is a state where the left reel and middle reel are pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game during CZ, and is the same state as FIG. 717(D). An operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205 and an operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, which have been displayed since the start of CZ, are displayed. In addition, in (A), the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed.

(B) is a continuation of (A) and is in the same state as FIG. 717(E). In addition to the operation instructions for the one-sheet input button 205 and the right reel stop button 211c, which are displayed from the start of Z, there are three operation instructions for the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel. is displayed. Furthermore, in (B), the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed.

(C) shows a state in which the state of pressing the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted in the state of (B). For example, if you interrupt the pressing state of the one-sheet input button 205 while three operation instructions are displayed, the operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205 that is displayed at the beginning of CZ will be highlighted (specifically). Specifically, the image of the single sheet input button 205 is different from the image of the single sheet input button 205 that is displayed from the start of CZ, such as the size is large). Continue!" message will be displayed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that unless he continues to press the one-card insertion button 205, he will not be able to receive the preferential lottery.

As explained in FIG. 726, the slot machine 1 has a specification in which the AT lottery during the pseudo game is performed at the time of the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game, and when the second pseudo stop is performed with the press-down maintenance flag turned off. , since a lottery using Table 1 in FIG. 710 (that is, a lottery in which the AT winning rate is not preferentially treated) is performed, if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted after the second pseudo-stop, the next Since there is a possibility that the lottery using table 2 in FIG. In addition to the operation instructions for , an operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 is displayed.

Therefore, at the timing when the highlighted operation instruction for the single sheet input button 205 is displayed, the single sheet input button 205 is not pressed, so the operation instruction has the meaning of not only a call for attention but also a warning. (In addition to displaying the image of the one-sheet input button 205, it is also preferable to display a message "Keep pressing!" at the same time.)

However, since the pseudo-game itself can be played without keeping the 1-piece insertion button 205 pressed, as mentioned above, the operation instructions for the 1-piece insertion button that have been displayed since the start of CZ and the highlighted 1. In addition to the instruction to operate the sheet input button 205, an instruction to operate the right reel stop button 211c is also displayed.

It should be noted that the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be replaced by other operation instructions (in the example (C), a message such as "If you want to check where Red 7 has stopped, operate the start lever!", The image of the lever 210, the image of the right reel stop button 211c, and the image of the one-sheet input button 205 that has been displayed since the start of CZ) may be displayed overlappingly, or may be displayed without overlapping. However, if they are displayed overlapping each other, the operating instructions and other operating instructions may be displayed in a position or manner that makes them visible (for example, the operating instructions displayed on the front side may be displayed semi-transparently or blinking). etc.) is desirable.

Note that if the operation instructions for the one-sheet input button 205 that has been displayed since the start of CZ and the operation instructions for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 are displayed at the same time, the one-sheet input button that has been displayed since the start of CZ It is desirable to output the voice corresponding to the highlighted operation instruction of the one-sheet input button 205 without outputting the voice corresponding to the operation instruction of the button 205. This is because the instruction content itself in these two operation instructions is the same, so it is sufficient to output only the warning voice in the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205.

In the example of FIG. 733, since the pressing of the one-piece insertion button 205 is interrupted after (B) (that is, after the second pseudo-stop), the AT lottery in the pseudo game has ended, that is, after the second pseudo-stop. In the pseudo-game, a lottery using table 2 in FIG. 710 (that is, a lottery with preferential AT winning rate) is conducted. In other words, by the second pseudo-stop of the pseudo game of the next game, there is a possibility that the holding down of the one-card insertion button 205 will be resumed and the lottery using table 2 in FIG. 710 will be held again in the pseudo game. be.

Therefore, for example, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the press of the single sheet input button 205 was interrupted in state (B), the operation instruction for the highlighted single sheet input button 205 is displayed. Okay, if the pressing of the one-piece insertion button 205 is interrupted in state (B) and the predetermined operation is executed until the second pseudo-stop of the pseudo-game of the next game (for example, the (pseudo-game) of the next game is When the lever is turned on (in other words, when the winning combination lottery is executed), an operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet insertion button 205 may be displayed.

Note that the highlighted operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205 may be erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds) from its appearance, or may be erased at the timing when the one-sheet input button 205 is resumed being pressed. It is preferable to erase it at the timing when the pseudo-game lottery is performed while the one-sheet insertion button 205 is resumed (timing when the second pseudo-stop is performed). Further, the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be displayed only once for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) and for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second). The display may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, five times).

In (D), since the holding down of the one-sheet input button 205 is resumed, the highlighted operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205 is erased, and the state is the same as in FIG. 717(F).

Note that the last AT lottery in the CZ ends with the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game in the final game of the CZ. Therefore, after the second pseudo-stop of the pseudo-game of the final game of CZ, even if the press of the one-piece insertion button 205 is interrupted, the lottery will not be affected, so even if the press of the one-piece insertion button is interrupted, the drawing will not be emphasized. It is not necessary to display an operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205.

It should be noted that freezing may always be applied after all reels of the main game in the final game of CZ are stopped. For example, during the freeze, the image display body 500 displays messages such as "Congratulations!" (if you won AT in the final CZ game) or "Too bad...!" (if you did not win AT in the final CZ game). A display indicating the results may be displayed. Note that even if pressing of the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted while the freeze (the display) is being performed, the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 does not need to be displayed.

In addition, although an example has been described in which the holding down flag is not set to OFF even if the holding down of the one-sheet input button 205 is interrupted for a predetermined number of times, if the specified number of times is multiple times, the highlighted 1 There is a possibility that the operation instruction for the sheet input button 205 will be displayed multiple times.

Further, when the highlighted operation instruction for the one-sheet input button 205 is being displayed, a new opportunity for displaying the operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be satisfied. In this case, when the new opportunity is met, the operation instructions for the highlighted one-sheet input button may be newly displayed, or the operation instructions for the already highlighted one-sheet input button 205 may be displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform a new operation display, or, although no new operation display is performed, the display time of the new operation display may be added to the display time of the emphasized operation instruction that is already displayed.

[12-13. Relationship between instruction performances for different operation parts during CZ 5]
Below, three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, and the operation instructions are displayed in the following order: operation instructions for the start lever 210, instructions to keep the one-sheet input button 205 pressed, and operation instructions for each reel stop button. Let's look at an example to get started. The CZ in this chapter and the next chapter differs in the specifications of the CZ from the example described above. Hereinafter, CZ in this chapter and the next chapter will also be referred to as CZ2.

As shown in FIG. 735 and the like, the slot machine 1 of this chapter and the next chapter includes a transparent liquid crystal 301aa, a transparent liquid crystal 301ab, a transparent liquid crystal 301ba, a transparent liquid crystal 301bb, a transparent liquid crystal 301ca, and a transparent liquid crystal 301cb, which cover the upper and lower rows of each reel. , shall be provided. It is assumed that during the CZ pseudo game, an image is displayed on each transparent liquid crystal, and the visibility of the upper and lower rows of each reel is reduced.

Similarly to CZ, a predetermined number of CZ2 games (for example, 10 games, however, when AT is won, the game ends with the AT winning game) of CZ2 are executed, and a pseudo game is played at the start of each game. Also in the CZ2 pseudo game, an instruction to aim for red 7 appears in the middle of each reel. However, in the CZ2 pseudo-game, when the player presses the reel stop button, the reels stop without slipping (so-called bit stop) with the reels remaining at the timing of the press. That is, in the pseudo game, the player can always stop Red 7 in the middle row by pressing Red 7 in the middle row.

In the CZ2 pseudo game, in addition to or in place of the AT lottery at the second pseudo stop executed in CZ, red 7 is drawn at each of the first pseudo stop, second pseudo stop, and third pseudo stop. AT lottery is executed when the bit stops at the middle stage. This AT lottery is also called the B-5 lottery. In other words, CZ2 has a game that requires skill in pushing red 7 to the middle row during a pseudo game.

In addition, the pseudo game of CZ2 is a game in which you push red 7 to the middle row, but an image is displayed on each transparent liquid crystal and the visibility of the upper and lower rows of each reel is obstructed, so that only the middle row can be seen (so-called 1 Many players find it difficult to press the button when the window is open.

Therefore, in CZ2 as well as in CZ, when the start lever 210 is operated during a pseudo game, the images on each transparent liquid crystal are erased and all pieces on each reel can be seen (so-called all windows (3 windows) open state). becomes. However, in order to give an incentive to players who are good at eyeballing, the AT lottery value for red 7 in the middle row with one window open is higher than the AT lottery value when red 7 is stuck in the middle row with all windows open. It is assumed that the AT lottery value when the AT lottery value is made to stop at a bit is more preferential.

In addition, the AT lottery value of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is higher than the AT lottery value when Red 7 is stopped in the middle row without maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 (that is, with the press-down maintenance flag turned off). It is assumed that the AT lottery value is preferential when Red 7 is kept in the pressed state (that is, the pressed maintenance flag is turned on) and is brought to a stop in the middle row.

FIG. 734 is an example of an AT lottery table showing the lottery value of the AT lottery executed when Red 7 is brought to a pit stop in the middle stage at each pseudo-stop of CZ2. As mentioned above, the AT lottery value with one window open is more preferential than the AT lottery value with all windows open (Table 4 is more preferential than Table 3, and Table 6 is more preferential than Table 5). ). In addition, as mentioned above, the lottery value when the one-sheet input button 205 is kept pressed is more preferential than the lottery value when the one-sheet input button 205 is not kept pressed (table 5 is better than table 3, (Table 6 is given preferential treatment.)

In the example of FIG. 734, when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not kept pressed and the red 7 is stopped by opening one window (Table 4), the lottery value (5000) is the one-sheet insertion button 205 pressed down. It is higher than the lottery value (3500) in the case where all windows are opened and Red 7 is stopped by keeping the value (Table 5). In other words, if we compare keeping Red 7 in the middle row by keeping the single-sheet input button 205 depressed and stopping Red 7 in the middle row with one window open, we can see that Red 7 can be stopped in the middle row with one window open. The contribution to the preferential treatment of the lottery value of the B-5 lottery is greater by making the lottery stop. Many players feel that it is more difficult to make Red 7 stop in the middle row with one window open than to make Red 7 stop in the middle row by keeping the 1-card input button 205 depressed, and it is more difficult. This is to provide an incentive for performing certain operations.

Hereinafter, CZ2 will be explained (mainly the differences from CZ). FIGS. 735 and 736 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect of CZ2. FIG. 735(A) shows a state in which all reels are stopped in a game in which CZ2 is won. In the game where you win CZ2, a freeze effect occurs for 5 seconds from when the reels come to a complete stop, similar to the game where you win CZ, and since no operation of the start lever 210 is accepted during the freeze effect, the next game, that is, CZ Unable to start.

When the freeze effect starts, a message indicating that CZ2 has been won is displayed on the image display body 500. For example, CZ2 is continuously executed for a maximum of 10 games, and if AT is won, CZ2 is discontinued in that game and AT starts from the next game.

(B) shows a state in which all the reels of the game in which CZ2 was won are stopped, and is a continuation of (A). In (B), the freeze effect continues from (A). In CZ2, a message is displayed indicating that an advantageous result for the player can be obtained by pressing the button.

(C) is a state in which all the reels of the game in which CZ2 was won are stopped, and is a continuation of (B). For example, from the timing (C), an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal, and one window is opened.

In (C), the operation instruction ("Start Lever You can change the size of the window by clicking on the button.If you successfully push the button with one window, it's super hot!'' and an image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow) are displayed.

As mentioned above, since the selection between one window open state and all windows open state is the operation that contributes the most to the lottery value of the B-5 lottery, in this way, the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 appears before the operation instructions for the one-sheet input button 205 and the operation instructions for each reel stop button.

In addition, since it is necessary for the player to confirm whether or not he/she can successfully push the bit with one window open, the player must operate the starting lever 210 before starting CZ2 as shown in (C). Instructions (that is, operation instructions for increasing the visibility of reel effects) are given.

For example, when the start lever 210 is operated at a timing before the start of CZ2 as shown in (C), the image on each transmissive liquid crystal may be erased and the state may be changed to the state where all windows are opened. Furthermore, in this case, an image may be displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal again by the start of CZ2 to return to one window opening. This allows the player to check whether one window is open or when all windows are open, making it easier to decide which one to play the pseudo game with. Further, before starting CZ2, it may be possible to check the state of one window open and the state of all windows open multiple times.

Note that during the CZ2 pseudo game, it is possible to erase the images displayed on each transparent liquid crystal at any time, so the operation instruction for the starting lever 210 (for example, the image of the starting lever 210) is not valid during the CZ2 (at least It is desirable that the images on each transmissive liquid crystal be displayed continuously (until they are erased).

In addition, in FIGS. 735 and 736, an example will be described in which the starting lever 210 is not operated, that is, the pseudo game is proceeded with one window displaying an image on each transparent liquid crystal.

(D) is a state in which the freeze effect up to (C) has been canceled and the CZ2 game has started (the state when the lever is on). In CZ2, a pseudo game starts when the lever is turned on. An operation instruction to keep the 1-bet insertion button 205 pressed (message "If you keep pressing 1BET, the lottery will be even more preferential!" and an image of the 1-card insertion button 205 with an arrow) is further displayed as an image. It is displayed on the body 500.

In addition, by continuing to press the one-sheet insertion button 205 during the CZ2 pseudo game, you can receive a preferential AT lottery. It is desirable that the button 205 (image of button 205) be continuously displayed. Further, after (D), it is desirable that a telop image indicating an instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet input button 205 as shown in FIG. 719 be displayed on the image display body 500.

(E) is the state at the start of the pseudo game of CZ2, and is a continuation of (D). Operation instructions for pressing each reel stop button (a message "Aim for Red 7!" and an image of each reel stop button with an effect) are further displayed on the image display 500. In addition, in the CZ2 pseudo game, the stopping order of the reels does not matter, that is, even if the reels other than the right reel 301c are brought to the third pseudo stop, the lottery will not be disadvantageous.

(F) shows a state in which the left reel 301a is pseudo-stopped in accordance with the operation instructions for each reel stop button that appeared in (E). In addition to the three operating instructions, an image of the main character is displayed. In (F), we succeeded in making the red 7 stop in the middle row of the left reel 301a and received the B-5 lottery, so for example, the message "GOOD!!" is displayed on the image display 500. Ru. In addition, if you fail to make the red 7 stop in the middle row, you will not be able to receive the B-5 lottery, so the message "BAD..." will be displayed as shown in Figure 736 (F'). be done.

Note that, for example, if Red 7 is pseudo-stopped in the middle row without holding down the one-sheet input button 205 (i.e., when the B-5 lottery is received), or the pseudo-stop is simply made regardless of the stopping position. In this case (that is, when an operation is performed that may result in receiving a B-5 lottery), an operation instruction for the highlighted one-sheet input button 205 as shown in FIG. 732 is displayed on the image display body 500. It's okay. This is to allow players to receive lottery tickets with more preferential treatment.

FIG. 736(G) shows a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game. A message indicating that the AT lottery result will be announced by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(H) is a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game, and is a continuation of (G). In (I), the freeze effect is continuing. A message instructing to press the MAX input button 206 repeatedly and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(I) is a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game, and is a continuation of (H). It is assumed that the player follows the instruction to repeatedly hit the MAX input button 206. The image display body 500 displays an image of the main character wrapped in an aura and a message (Yes!!) indicating that the player has won AT.

Note that if the MAX input button 206 is not repeatedly pressed, the AT lottery result will be notified after the end of the freeze effect and by the end of the normal game that starts immediately after the pseudo game. Note that if AT has not been won, for example, even if the MAX input button 206 is repeatedly pressed, the main character will not be covered with an aura and will collapse by the end of the freeze effect.

Note that, in order to leave the player with the aftertaste of the CZ being executed, the instruction effect of the start lever 210 may be displayed across the CZ and at the start of the normal game after the CZ ends. However, in regular games that are not pseudo-games, hiding the reels will increase the difficulty of the eye rolls and may cause the player to miss out on small prizes, putting the player at a disadvantage. It is desirable to display the At this time, the image imitating each transparent liquid crystal obstructs the visibility of the effect image displayed on the image display body 500, and when the start lever 210 is operated, the image imitating each transparent liquid crystal disappears from the image display body 500. This is done to improve the visibility of the effect image.

[12-14. Relationship between instruction performances for different operation parts during CZ 6]
Hereinafter, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions will be displayed in the following order: operation instruction for the start lever 210, operation instruction for each reel stop button, and instruction to keep pressed for the single sheet input button 205. Let's look at an example to get started. The CZ in this chapter and the next chapter differs in the specifications of the CZ from the example described above. Hereinafter, CZ2 will also be executed in this chapter.

In the CZ2 pseudo-game, it is difficult to make Red 7 stay in the middle row with one window open, while the AT winning rate is not high when all windows are open. Therefore, in CZ2 of this chapter, before the first pseudo-stop in which the B-5 lottery may be executed, a practice effect for practicing the bita push is executed. Although the practice performance is realized by a pseudo game in which the reels come to a stop, the AT lottery is not executed during the practice performance.

Furthermore, in practice performances, by operating the starting lever 210, the images on each transparent liquid crystal display can be erased and the state can be changed from one window open to all windows open, allowing the player to It is possible to confirm in advance whether the eye pushing skill is suitable for opening one window or opening all windows through a practice performance.

FIG. 737 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the effect of CZ2. FIG. 737 (D2) shows a state where the pseudo game of the practice performance has started, and is a continuation of FIG. 735 (C). When the practice performance starts, the reels will pseudo-rotate and each reel stop button will be activated. An operation instruction for pressing each reel stop button (a message "Start practice! Aim for red 7!" and an image of each reel stop button with an effect) is displayed on the image display body 500.

(E2) is a state in which the left reel 301a is brought to a first pseudo stop in the practice performance. I attempted to press the button with one window open, but because Red 7 was not stopped in the middle of the left reel 301a, I was not only shown the image of the starting lever 210, but also the message again (``Don't force yourself to operate the starting lever.'') You can make it three windows!'') to prompt the player to operate the starting lever 210 again. As a result, it is possible to perform a push with a difficulty level (one window open or all windows open) suitable for the player.

(F2) is a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in the practice performance. Since the actual simulated game (that is, the simulated game in which the B-5 lottery can be executed at each simulated stop) will now begin, operation instructions for the start lever 210 and operation instructions for each reel stop button are displayed. In addition, in the practice performance, if the starting lever 210 is operated to change the state to all windows open, for example, at (F2), an image is displayed on each transparent liquid crystal, and the state is returned to one window open. . In addition, in one practice, some players may not be able to decide whether to open one window or all windows, and some players may not have confidence in pushing the bits, so we made it possible to perform multiple practice effects in one simulated game. Good too.

(G2) is a state in which the actual pseudo game in CZ2 has started. After the end of the practice performance, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed or when a predetermined operation section (for example, the performance button 204) is operated, the reels are simulated rotated and the actual simulated game is started. (G2) is the same as FIG. 735(D) except that the image of each reel stop button is displayed as an operation instruction image. After (G2), the process transitions to FIG. 735(E).

[13. Seesaw game production]
Below, the seesaw game effect executed in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be explained. The reel arrangement in the slot machine 1 of this chapter is the same as that shown in FIG. 715. Although details will be described later, in the seesaw game performance, medals move to a seesaw accessory mounted on the slot machine 1, and when the player operates the starting lever 210, the angle of the seesaw part in the seesaw accessory is adjusted. I can do it. If the medals can stay on the seesaw section for a predetermined period of time or longer, the seesaw game effect is successful, and an advantageous result can be obtained for the player.

On the other hand, if the medals cannot stay on the seesaw part for a predetermined period of time and the medals fall from either end of the seesaw part, it means that the seesaw game performance has failed, and this is a problem for the player. Favorable results cannot be obtained.

If the winning seesaw game performance is successful during the normal game (when the AT flag is OFF), a lottery to enter the AT is basically held. Furthermore, if the winning seesaw game performance is successful during the AT game (when the AT flag is ON), a lottery is basically held to increase the number of AT games.

[13-2. Slot machine equipped with seesaw accessories]
The structure of the slot machine 1 equipped with a seesaw accessory will be described below. FIG. 738 is a perspective view of the slot machine 1 equipped with a seesaw accessory. FIG. 739 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine 1 (excluding the outer main body 100) equipped with a seesaw accessory. FIG. 740 is a front view schematically showing the seesaw accessory.

In FIGS. 738 and 739, among the configurations already explained in the exploded perspective view of the slot machine in FIG. 590 and the perspective view of the slot machine in FIG. , description and explanation of reference numerals are omitted. Further, in FIG. 739, the outer main body 100 is the same as the outer main body 100 in FIG. 590, so its description is omitted. Further, for convenience of explanation, a door portion 555, which will be described later, is omitted in FIG. 739.

The slot machine 1 of this chapter has a seesaw accessory 550 in the shape of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box. The seesaw accessory 550 is attached to the upper left part of the transparent plate 214a when viewed from the rear. The image display body 500 of this chapter has a recess 500a for storing a seesaw accessory 550 in the upper right corner when viewed from the front.The seesaw accessory 550 includes a seesaw part 552, a shaft part 553, and It has a claw portion 556. The seesaw box 551 has a door portion 555 that can be opened and closed on the back side.

The seesaw portion 552 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape whose longitudinal direction is the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The seesaw portion 552 has a convex portion along the longitudinal side of the seesaw portion 552 on the front side when viewed from the front to prevent the medals from falling toward the front when viewed from the front. Further, the seesaw section 552 is equipped with a weight sensor (not shown) for detecting whether medals are retained on the claw section 556. Additionally, a movable piece 552a and a movable piece 552b are provided along both side surfaces of the seesaw portion 552. The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b are movable vertically upward.

The shaft portion 553 fixes the seesaw portion 552 to the seesaw box 551. A stepping motor (not shown) that is rotatable in left and right directions when viewed from the front is mounted on a fixing part 553a that fixes the shaft part 553 and seesaw part 552. By rotating the stepping motor in the left-right direction as viewed from the front in accordance with the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 in the left-right direction, it is possible to adjust the angle of the seesaw portion 552 in the left-right direction as seen from the front.

Furthermore, a stepping motor (not shown) that is rotatable in the depth direction when viewed from the front is mounted on the fixed portion 553a. When a long press of the production button is detected at a predetermined timing, the stepping motor rotates in the front view depth direction, thereby making it possible to tilt the seesaw section 552 in the front view depth direction.

The claw portion 556 is provided on the intersection line between the top surface of the seesaw box 551 and the right side surface in the front view, and extends toward the lower left in the front view. The claw portion 556 is provided at approximately the same position as the seesaw portion 552 in the depth direction. Furthermore, the claw portion 556 has a tip portion 557 that is a movable piece. Further, the claw portion 556 is equipped with a weight sensor (not shown) for detecting whether medals are retained on the claw portion 556.

The bottom of the seesaw box 551 is provided with a seesaw success pipe 558 and a seesaw failure pipe 559. The seesaw success tube 558 has an opening 558a extending along the long side of the bottom surface of the seesaw box 551 toward the back. An opening 559a directly connected to the seesaw failure pipe 559 is formed in the bottom of the seesaw box 551.

The inner diameter of the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 is larger than the diameter of the medal. The ends of the seesaw success pipe 558 and the seesaw failure pipe 559 that are not connected to the seesaw box are led to the return gutter 213. Inside the seesaw success tube 558 and seesaw failure tube 559, a sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the medals that have passed. In addition, in order not to obstruct the visual recognition of the symbol display device 300, it is desirable that the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 be made of a transparent material. In addition, in FIG. 738, the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 are made of transparent materials, and their description is omitted.

In addition, an opening/closing member (not shown) is provided on the medal gutter 212 in this chapter, and although the opening/closing member is normally closed, when the opening/closing member is opened, the medal gutter 212 has a size that allows the medal to pass through. Form an opening. Further, the opening/closing member is equipped with a sensor capable of detecting a medal when the medal passes through the opening formed when the opening/closing member is opened.

The slot machine 1 includes a conveyor 561 that starts from a vertically downward position of the opening/closing member and extends to the left when viewed from the rear, and a conveyor 561 that starts from the left end of the conveyor 561 when viewed from the rear and reaches the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550. and an extending conveyor 562.

The transport route of medals in the seesaw game effect will be explained below. In a game where a seesaw game effect starts, the player needs to insert four medals. In the game, when the insertion sensor 207b detects a medal inserted from the medal slot 203 and the main board 409 receives a detection signal of the third medal, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls the opening/closing of the medal gutter 212. The members are opened and the conveyors 561 and 562 are operated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, and the operation of the starting lever 210 (operation in the up and down direction) becomes effective, allowing the game to proceed.

When a fourth medal is inserted into the medal slot 203 in a state in which the game can be played (a state in which three medals have been inserted), the opening/closing member on the medal gutter 212 opens the medal. The medals fall onto the conveyor 561 through the opening formed by this, and the medals are conveyed onto the conveyor 562 by the conveyor 561, and conveyed by the conveyor 562 to the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the medal detection signal from the sensor provided in the opening/closing member, the CPU 1110 closes the opening/closing member.

In addition, when inserting medals from the credit (storage device), the opening/closing member opens after the specified number of three medals are inserted from the credit (storage device), and when one medal is inserted, the medal is released. falls onto the conveyor 561.

Note that at this point, the angle formed by the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 90°), and the claw portion 556 can hold the fourth medal that has been conveyed. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives a medal detection signal from the sensor provided in the claw part 556 for a predetermined period of time or more, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 operates the starting lever 210 to adjust the inclination of the seesaw part 552 (to advance the game). (left/right operation, which is different from the up/down direction). Furthermore, both the vertical and horizontal operations of the starting lever 210 may be enabled at the time when the third medal is inserted.

Furthermore, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives a medal detection signal from the sensor provided in the claw portion 556 for a predetermined period of time or longer, the CPU 1110 stops the conveyor 561 and the conveyor 562.

When the player performs an operation (for example, pressing down the start lever 210) after a predetermined timing in the seesaw game production, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 adjusts the angle between the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 to a predetermined value (for example, by pressing the start lever 210). 180°) or more, the medal held by the claw portion 556 falls onto the seesaw portion 552. Further, since the starting lever 210 is pressed down (up and down operation) with three medals inserted, a winning combination is drawn and the game is started.

Note that, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 does not receive a medal detection signal from the sensor provided in the claw portion 556 for a predetermined period of time or more, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 returns the angle formed between the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 to the original state. The tip portion 557 is operated.

If the medal falls from either end of the seesaw section 552 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the medal started staying in the seesaw section 552, the medal passes through the seesaw failure pipe 559 from the opening 559a and is returned. The medal moves to the gutter 213, and the fourth medal is returned to the player. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the detection signal from the sensor installed in the seesaw failure pipe 559, it transmits a signal indicating that the seesaw game performance has failed to the sub board 510, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510, To perform a performance corresponding to failure of the seesaw game performance.

If a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without the medal falling down after the medal started staying in the seesaw section 552, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 moves the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw section 552 vertically upward. to operate. The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b after operation become walls at both ends of the seesaw part 552, and medals are prevented from falling from both ends of the seesaw part 552. Further, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 operates a stepping motor that is provided in the seesaw section 552 and is rotatable in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, to return the angle of the seesaw section 552 to the horizontal direction.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 opens the door portion 552 to the back side, and further operates a stepping motor that is provided on the seesaw portion 552 and is rotatable in the front view depth direction according to the player's operation, thereby opening the seesaw portion 552. Tilt in the depth direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the medals staying on the seesaw part 552 pass through the seesaw success tube 558 through the opening 558a, move to the return gutter 213, and the fourth medal is returned to the player.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the detection signal from the sensor installed in the seesaw success tube 558, it transmits a signal indicating that the seesaw game production was successful to the sub board 510, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510, A performance corresponding to the success of the seesaw game performance is executed.

Further, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives a detection signal from the sensor provided in the seesaw success tube 558, it operates a stepping motor that is provided in the seesaw section 552 and is rotatable in the depth direction when viewed from the front. The inclination of the portion 552 in the depth direction when viewed from the front is returned to its original (horizontal) state. The transport route for medals in the seesaw game performance has been described above.

[13-3. Overview of seesaw game production]
Below, various tables for realizing the seesaw game effect will be explained. FIG. 741 is an example of the small prize lottery table of the slot machine 1 of this chapter. In the small winning lottery table of FIG. 741, the number of coins to be paid out for the push order bell is 9 in principle, but it changes depending on the push order and the game situation. Details will be described later.

FIG. 742 is an example of a seesaw game effect entry lottery table. The seesaw game effect entry lottery table is stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409, for example. In the seesaw game performance entry lottery table, the lottery value for winning the seesaw game performance in games other than games where the seesaw game performance is executed (including normal games and AT games) is defined for each small role won in the game. has been done.

Note that during the normal game, in addition to the AT winning from the seesaw game performance, an AT first winning lottery is performed using the AT first winning lottery table shown in FIG. 707, for example.

FIGS. 743 and 744 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a seesaw game performance performed during a normal game, and show an example when the seesaw game performance fails. When a seesaw game effect is won in a normal game, an effect notifying that the seesaw game effect has been won is performed when all the reels of the normal game are stopped. state.

In FIG. 743(A), the losing symbols are stopped on the symbol fluctuation display device 300. A message is displayed on the image display body 500 indicating that the player has won the seesaw game performance and that if the seesaw game performance is successful, he will have won AT. From FIG. 743(A) to FIG. 744(I) to be described later, the reels of the normal game are all stopped, and the seesaw game effect itself has not started.

In addition, if the push order bell is won during the execution of the winning seesaw game effect in the normal game, no matter which push order bell is won, the reverse push (that is, the order of right reel 301c, middle reel 301b, left reel 301a) When the game is completed by pressing the button to stop the reels, control is executed to change the reel stop control so that 3 coins are paid out. A message indicating that the game can proceed without reducing medals is displayed on the image display 500. In addition, in FIG. 743(B), a reverse push guide image (consisting of a leftward arrow and a number indicating the stop order of each reel displayed within the arrow) is displayed in the area above each reel of the image display body 500. Press order navigation) is displayed.

In FIG. 743(C), a message is displayed on the image display body 500 indicating that an explanation of the seesaw game performance is about to be performed. In FIG. 743(D), a message indicating that it is necessary to insert four medals into the medal selector 207 in a game in which a seesaw game effect is performed is displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 743(E), a message indicating that when four medals are inserted into the medal selector 207, the fourth medal will be moved to the seesaw accessory 550, and an image imitating the seesaw accessory are shown in the image. It is displayed on the display 500. In FIG. 743(F), a message indicating that the fourth medal will return to the medal tray 201 via the return gutter 213 when the seesaw game effect is finished, and an image imitating a seesaw accessory are displayed as an image. It is displayed on the body 500.

In FIG. 744(G), a message is displayed on the image display 500 urging the user to operate the starting lever 210 to adjust the inclination of the seesaw section 552 and to make the medal stay on the seesaw section 552 for 5 seconds. Further, by displaying an image imitating the starting lever 210 on the image display body 500, the player is prompted to operate the starting lever 210, and by operating the starting lever 210 left and right, the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is adjusted. It shows that things change.

In FIG. 744(H), a message indicating that the emitted light color of the LED mounted on the seesaw section 552 indicates whether or not the medal is likely to fall from the seesaw section 552 (that is, whether the expectation level is low or high). , and an image imitating a seesaw accessory are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 744(I), there is a guide for inserting four medals, that the fourth medal inserted will stay in the claw part 556 of the seesaw accessory 550, and that when the starting lever 210 is operated, the tip part 557 will operate. A message indicating that the medal will move from the claw portion 556 to the seesaw portion 550 is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, an image imitating a seesaw accessory 550 is displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 744(J) shows the lever-on state of the game following FIG. 744(I), that is, the game in which seesaw game effect is performed. The seesaw game effect is realized by a pseudo-game that is started by turning on the lever, and during the pseudo-game, the reels rotate in reverse in a frozen state (that is, an invalid state in which the reels do not stop even if each stop button is pressed). In FIG. 744(J), medals are staying on the seesaw part 552. In addition, in a game where a seesaw game effect is executed, a reverse push guide image (an image with a number written inside an arrow pointing to the left), a gauge indicating the remaining medal retention time until AT acquisition, and a support message, is displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 744(K), the medal cannot be retained in the seesaw part 552 for 5 seconds and falls into the seesaw failure tube 559, and the sensor in the seesaw failure tube 559 detects the medal, that is, seesaw game production. This is a state in which AT was not acquired due to failure.

In FIG. 744(K), there is a reverse push guide image, a message indicating that the seesaw game performance has failed ("Too bad...I look forward to the next one!"), and a character image indicating that the seesaw game performance has failed (fan A character image holding a character facing downward) is displayed on the image display body 500.

When the sensor in the seesaw failure tube 559 detects a medal and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the frozen state is released (that is, the stop button is enabled) and the stop button is pressed, for example, the losing eye or the previously stopped eye is stopped. When the pseudo game is finished and a predetermined operation part (for example, the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206) is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the main game (a normal game in which the reels rotate 4 times) is started. starts.

FIGS. 745 and 746 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a seesaw game performance performed during a normal game, and show an example when the seesaw game performance is successful. FIG. 745 (K') is a continuation of FIG. 744 (J), and is a state in which the seesaw game performance was successful (that is, the medals were able to stay in the seesaw section 552 for 5 seconds). In FIG. 745 (K'), the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw section 552 are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw section 552 is fixed horizontally. Further, the door portion 555 opens. The reels are also stopped.

Further, in FIG. 745 (K'), a performance button long press guidance image and a reverse press guidance image (that is, two operation guidance images) are displayed. The performance button long press guidance image is a message indicating that if the performance button 204 is kept pressed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the seesaw part 552 will tilt toward the back in front view and the medal will move to the seesaw success tube 558. This image consists of a production button press guidance message, and an image imitating the production button 204 with an effect and an arrow attached. Further, a character celebrating the AT win by turning his fan sideways is displayed on the image display body 500.

Note that the long press time of the effect button 204 until the seesaw part 552 tilts may not be a predetermined time but may be indefinite. The predetermined time is determined by a predetermined distribution, for example, such as 2 seconds for 32/128 distribution, 3 seconds for 64/128 distribution, and 5 seconds for 32/128 distribution. Further, for example, the predetermined time may be set to be longer as the amount indicating the amount of medals stored, such as the number of credits, is larger.

FIG. 745(L) shows that the seesaw part 552 is tilted to the back in front view and the medal passes through the open door part 555 and moves to the seesaw success tube 558, and the sensor installed in the seesaw success tube 558 is shown. has detected a medal. Note that even if you press and hold the performance button 204 according to the long press guidance image, the special sound effect corresponding to the long press of the performance button 204 will not be output, and the BGM will not change (this will not be output while the seesaw game performance is being executed). It is desirable not to change the BGM that is currently playing. At the time of FIG. 745 (K'), it is sufficiently suggested that AT will win, so if a special sound effect is output here or the BGM is changed, the player will have excessive expectations (AT This is because there is a risk that the player will be given additional benefits in addition to the player's acquisition.

Moreover, in FIG. 745(L), the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw part 552 have returned to the reference position. In addition, a message indicating that AT has been won (“AT won!”), a reverse push guide image, and a performance button long press guide image (that is, two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500. . Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213. Also, in FIG. 745(L), the reels are stopped.

FIG. 745(M) is a continuation of FIG. 745(L), and a message is displayed on the image display 500 indicating that there is a chance to add the number of AT games to the acquired AT. Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. In addition, as will be described later, the maximum number of AT games that can be added with one chance to add is 2 games, and since the player is only given a profit that is not large at all, If a message is displayed that forces the player to perform an action such as "Keep pressing and holding!", there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that the chance of winning is extremely hot, so do not force the player to perform an action such as "Press and hold to tilt the screen." It continues to display messages indicating that something will happen if the operation is performed.

In addition, even after it is confirmed that the seesaw game performance has been successful and the AT has been won, the long press guidance image of the performance button is displayed on the image display body 500, so that there is a chance to add AT after the seesaw game performance is successful. Even when the game is being executed, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the success of the seesaw game performance, thereby maintaining the player's sense of elation. Furthermore, since the player strongly remembers that he only has to press and hold the performance button after successfully performing the seesaw game, he will not be confused about the operation in subsequent seesaw game performances.

Further, in a state where an AT add-on chance is being played, the reels rotate in the reverse direction at a higher speed than when a seesaw game is being played. This makes it possible for the player to feel an increased sense of elation at having won the AT and being further rewarded.

In addition, here, it is assumed that a top-up chance will always appear after an AT win, but whether or not a top-up chance will be held depends on the predetermined distribution (for example, 32/128 when a top-up chance will be held, 96/9 when a top-up chance will not be held). 128) may be determined.

In FIG. 745(N), an effect is performed to increase the number of AT games. Here, if the starting lever 210 is operated in a timely manner, the number of AT games will be added. The operation guidance display for the starting lever 210 here is a guidance display indicating that a suggestion effect indicating the level of expectation will be displayed.

Specifically, the timing at which the blacked-out portion of the gauge displayed on the image display body 500 moves to the right and at least a portion of the blacked-out portion overlaps with the diagonal lined portion of the gauge. If the starting lever 210 is operated, the number of AT games can be increased successfully. However, if the player does not operate the starting lever 210 no matter how long it takes, the hall will be inconvenienced, so a predetermined valid time (for example, 2 seconds) for the starting lever 210 is provided.

On the other hand, if the start lever 210 is operated at a timing when even a part of the blacked-out area does not overlap with the shaded area of the gauge, the AT game count will fail and the game will proceed to the main game. Alternatively, the effects shown in FIG. 746 (S) and later, which will be described later, and the effects shown in FIG. 747, which will be described later, may be executed. Note that the blacked-out part may continue to move left and right within the gauge until the start lever 210 is operated, or the same effect as when the top-up fails will be performed when the right end of the gauge is reached. It's okay to be hurt.

In this way, in the seesaw game performance, the operation of the starting lever 210 (left and right operation different from the operation (up and down direction) for advancing the game) causes the medals to continue to stay in the seesaw part 552, and the operation of the starting lever 210 ( By synchronizing the timing of the operations (up and down operations similar to those for advancing the game), it is possible to provide a new game experience in which the player's operation skills are directly linked to the player's profits, and in turn, the game It can increase interest.

In addition, in FIG. 745(N), a starting lever operation guide image, which is an image of the starting lever 210 for prompting the operation of the starting lever 210, a reverse push guide image, and a performance button long press guide image (that is, three (operation guide image) is displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 745(O) shows the state after the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 745(N). A message is displayed on the image display indicating that it will be announced later (FIG. 745(P)) whether or not the operating timing of the starting lever 210 in (N) is the timing at which an additional AT game number can be obtained. Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

As mentioned above, the three guide images of the reverse push guide image in FIG. The displayed state shifts to a state in which two guide images, the reverse push guide image and the production button long press guide image shown in FIG. 745(O), are displayed at the same time, but during this time the reels are Continue rotating. This is to notify the propriety of the top-up and the number of top-up games at the stop of the reel ((P) to be described later). Immediately after the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 745(O), the reels continue to rotate in the opposite direction, so that the player's sense of tension can be maintained.

Note that in FIG. 745 (N), if the starting lever 210 is operated at a timing when at least a part of the blacked-out area overlaps with the shaded area of the gauge, the reel will start temporarily after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). Stop (FIG. 745(P) described later). Note that the predetermined time may be selectable from a plurality of values, such as 8 seconds, 10 seconds, or 15 seconds. In this case, it is desirable that the selection rate be determined so that the expectation of obtaining a more advantageous result is higher when a long time is selected as the predetermined time (for example, if a long time is selected as the predetermined time) 8 seconds is 16/128, 10 seconds is 32/128, 15 seconds is 80/128, and when the addition is successful (one game addition), 7 seconds is 32/128, 10 seconds is 64/128, 15 seconds is 32/128 and when the addition fails, 7 seconds is selected as 80/128, 10 seconds as 32/128, and 15 seconds as 16/128). By doing so, the player can feel a sense of exhilaration the longer the reels continue to rotate in reverse after operating the starting lever 210.

Note that the operation guide image for the starting lever 210 that is hidden in FIG. A state may be provided in which three guide images, the guide image, the performance button long press guide image, and the operation guide image of the starting lever 210, are displayed at the same time). For example, the display color of the message "Which one is it now!" in Figure 745(O) is white and red, and the display color is set so that expectations are higher when the display color is red than when the display color is white. Assume that the color selection rate is determined. In other words, when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the newly displayed operation guide image for the starting lever 210 in FIG. 745(O), the display color of the message in FIG. can be executed.

Furthermore, before the above-mentioned predetermined time period until the reel temporarily stops has elapsed, instead of the operation guidance image of the starting lever 210, an operation guidance image of another operation part such as the MAX input button 206 is displayed. (In other words, three guide images, ie, a reverse push guide image, a production button long press guide image, and an operation guide image for the MAX input button 206, may be displayed at the same time). Note that even if an operation guide image for another operation unit is displayed instead of the operation guide image for the starting lever 210, a player who is playing the game absentmindedly may operate the same operation unit many times. Therefore, even if the guidance image is displayed again, the operation of the starting lever 210 may be enabled while the operation guidance images of other operation units are being displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 745(O), before the predetermined time period elapses, the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 or the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed, and the operation is performed according to the operation guidance image. It is a good idea to display the additional results even before the reels temporarily stop. As a result, a player who wants to know the result quickly can just follow the operation guidance, and a player who wants to feel the tension until the end can just wait for the reels to temporarily stop.

Furthermore, during the above-mentioned predetermined time period until the reels temporarily stop, operation guidance images for the start lever 210 and the MAX input button 206 may be displayed multiple times. In that case, if the start lever 210 or the MAX injection button 206 is operated other than the last display of the plurality of times, the result of addition may be displayed, but a display suggesting the result of addition (for example, It is desirable that the percentage of displaying the above-mentioned white display or red display is higher than the percentage of not displaying a display that suggests an additional result. Thereby, even if the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated at times other than the last display of the plurality of times, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained until the latter half of the performance. When the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated at the end of the plurality of times, it is preferable to display the result of the addition even before the reel temporarily stops.

Further, for example, the first display of the plurality of times displays only the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210, and the last display of the plurality of times displays the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 lever and the MAX input button 206. In this way, the number (types) of operation units to be guided may be greater in the last display than in the first display. As a result, the number of displayed operation guide images increases (the number of types increases), giving players the pleasure of deciding which operation section to operate (which type of operation section will be displayed) in the end. can give.

Further, for example, the first display of the plurality of times displays an operation guide image for the start lever 210 and the MAX input button 206, and the last display of the plurality of times displays an operation for only one of the start lever 210 lever or the MAX input button 206. For example, when a guide image is displayed, the number of operating units whose operations are guided may be smaller in the last display than in the first display. As a result, the number of displayed operation guide images decreases, allowing the player to enjoy anticipating which operation section will eventually be narrowed down.

Furthermore, before the predetermined time period elapses, as shown in FIG. 745(O), if neither the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 nor the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206, which is a different operation part, is displayed, <the start lever 210 When an operation guidance image is displayed (that is, the same operation guidance image is redisplayed) < When an operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206, which is a different operation unit, is displayed, the expectation level increases in the following order: It is good to have a selection rate set. If the operation guide image for the start lever 210 is displayed again, the player may think that something will happen, and if the guide image for an operation section different from the start lever 210 is displayed, the player may feel particularly strange. This is because I think that I can expect an additional benefit for memorizing it.

In addition, when the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 or the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed before the predetermined time period has elapsed, in order to give the player a sense of tension to be informed of the result of the top-up. , the BGM may be muted, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. At this time, in order to give players a sense of tension as they are informed of the result of the addition, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be replaced with a still image (even if the effect image is slightly shaken or enlarged or reduced). (including a mode that feels static to the player), enlarge or reduce the effect image, and change the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) to a single color (e.g. gold or blackout) or multiple colors (e.g. rainbow) It is best to display it as .

Before the predetermined time period elapses, operate the operation unit according to the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206, and when the AT addition is announced, the predetermined movable body operates (for example, , the shutter 301d, which will be described later, returns to the reference position after covering half of the reel), and if AT addition is not announced, it is desirable that the predetermined movable body does not operate. Further, at this time, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. In addition, at this time, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be a still image (including modes in which the effect image is slightly shaken, enlarged or reduced, but still appears to the player), or the effect image is The background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (for example, gold or blackout) or in multiple colors (for example, rainbow).

Furthermore, the display color of the image of the start lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 that is displayed before the predetermined time has elapsed may be changed, or effects may be added to these images (i.e., There may be a plurality of display modes for the operation guidance image of the starting lever 210, and there may be a plurality of display modes for the operation guide image for the MAX input button 206). However, it is desirable that expectations are set higher when the display color is changed or effects are added.

Furthermore, when the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 is displayed in FIG. In order to prevent the game from becoming too exciting, it is desirable to continue outputting the BGM that was being output immediately before the operation guide image was displayed. However, in order to give the player a sense of tension from an early stage, The BGM may be muted, the BGM output volume may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Also, at this time, in order to avoid stirring up expectations too much, it is desirable to continue displaying the background of the effect image that was displayed immediately before the operation guide image was displayed, but In order to give the player a sense of tension, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be replaced with a still image (including modes in which the effect image is slightly shaken or enlarged or reduced, but still appears to the player). ), the effect image may be enlarged or reduced, and the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (for example, red or blackout) or in multiple colors (for example, rainbow).

In accordance with the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745(N), the starting lever 210 was operated to move to the state shown in FIG. 745(O) (that is, the reels rotated in the opposite direction and the user asked, "Now which way!" is displayed), it is desirable to not operate the movable body in order to avoid stirring up expectations too much. However, in order to give the player a sense of tension from an early timing, even if the predetermined movable body operates (however, according to the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or MAX input button 206 that is redisplayed in FIG. 745(O)) (It is desirable that the movement distance and movement time are short compared to the movement of the movable body when the operation is performed.) For example, if you win the additional AT game number, it will be 128/128, and you will not win. In this case, the movable body may be operated with a distribution of 32/128 or the like (in other words, if the movable body operates, there is a high probability of winning an additional AT game).

Also, when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745(N) and the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 745(O), the feeling of anticipation is not aroused too much. Therefore, it is desirable to continue outputting the BGM that was being output immediately before the operation, but in order to give the player a sense of tension from an early stage, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased. , the BGM itself may be changed, or special sound effects may be output. In addition, at this time, in order to avoid stirring up expectations too much, it is desirable to continue displaying the background of the effect image that was displayed immediately before the relevant operation, but the background of the effect image (or (the effect image itself) into a still image (including modes in which the effect image is slightly shaken or enlarged or reduced but still appears to the player), enlarging or reducing the effect image, or the background of the effect image. (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (for example, red or blackout) or in multiple colors (for example, rainbow).

Furthermore, the display color of the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 displayed in FIG. (There may be multiple aspects). However, it is desirable that expectations are set higher when the display color is changed or effects are added. Furthermore, the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 redisplayed in FIG. 745(O) has higher expectations than the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745(N). The operation of the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745 (N) may be made easier to select than the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 that is redisplayed in FIG. 745 (O). In the guide image, a mode with a higher expectation level may be selected more easily.

Also, from the valid operation time of the start lever 210 for suggesting the degree of expected addition in FIG. 745 (N) (as described above, for example, 2 seconds), the display is again displayed for the notification of the additional result in FIG. 745 (O). It is desirable that the effective operating time of the starting lever 210 corresponding to the operating guidance image of the starting lever 210 and the effective operating time of the MAX input button 206 corresponding to the operating guidance image of the MAX input button 206 are longer. This operation is performed in a situation where the top-up is confirmed, so the purpose is to provide the player with a feeling of elation for a longer period of time.

Subsequently, in FIG. 745(P), a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (for example, 2 games) is displayed on the image display body 500. Note that the message indicating the number of games does not directly indicate the number of games as shown in FIG. Often, in this case, for example, the total number of add-on games is announced when the add-on chance has completely ended and the player returns to the main game.

Also, red 7 (three identical symbol combinations) is aligned in the middle of the reels. If the start lever 210 is successfully operated in FIG. 745(N), a lottery is held for the number of AT additional games, and the player wins 2 games or 1 additional game. When the starting lever 210 is successfully operated, the number of additional games is drawn, for example, with 96/128 as an additional game and 32/128 as an additional two games.

If you win 2 games (advantageous results are obtained), the reels will temporarily stop (the reels will stop) when the red 7s line up (the same symbol combination is displayed) as shown in Figure 745 (P). (a state in which it is shaking up and down without completely stopping), and if you win one game (no advantageous result was obtained), for example, the same stop as the previous game (main game) The reels temporarily stop at a stop where the red 7 is on the same level or diagonally on two of the three reels, but the red 7 is not aligned. In addition, if you win two games (if the same symbol combination is displayed), if you enter a special state (specialized zone, etc.) after the predetermined time has elapsed when the reels are temporarily stopped, good.

In addition, in FIG. 745(P), the reel temporarily stops for a predetermined time, and after the elapse of the predetermined time (temporarily stopped time), the reel rotates in the reverse direction again as shown in FIG. 746(Q), which will be described later. It is desirable that the stopping time be different from any of the times from when the starting lever 210 is operated until the reels temporarily stop (for example, 5 seconds shorter than any of the times until the reels temporarily stop). Further, it is preferable that the time during which the reels are temporarily stopped is not selectable from a plurality of values, but takes only one value. When the reels are temporarily stopped, the result has already been announced, so if multiple temporary stop times are prepared, for example, if the temporary stop time is long, the result will be more than the announced number of additional games. This is because there is a risk that players may have excessive expectations that the number of games may have been added.

Further, in FIG. 745(P), a reverse push guidance image and a production button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. Note that in the pseudo game, the reels are temporarily stopped rather than completely stopped, but the reels may be completely stopped also in the pseudo game. However, when the reels are brought to a complete stop even in a simulated game, a simulated game design is placed near a predetermined lamp or LED in order to make the player aware that a simulated game is being played. It is preferable to cause a light emitting body such as an LED to emit light, or to display an image having a predetermined size (for example, a message such as "Pseudo game in progress" or "FREE PLAY") on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 745 (P), after the reels stop rotating and the predetermined time described above has elapsed, special conditions (for example, a re-addition lottery is held, the number of credits is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, etc.) are met. In this case, the additional chance is given again as shown in FIG. 746(Q). On the other hand, if the special condition is not satisfied after the above-mentioned predetermined period of time has passed after the reels have stopped rotating, the game can be started by operating the starting lever 210 as described later (in other words, without rotating the reels in the reverse direction again). (based on the operation that is the trigger for proceeding), the game shifts to the main game.

In FIG. 746(Q), an additional chance is given again, and the same effect as in FIG. 745(M) is performed. In this way, if you succeed in the top-up chance, the top-up chance may loop. For example, when the above special conditions are met, a loop rate is selected according to a predetermined distribution (for example, a loop rate of 50% is 64/128, 66% is 48/124, 80% is 15/128, 90% is 1 /128 distribution). If the top-up chance is successful, a lottery is made to determine whether the top-up chance will be held again according to the selected loop rate. Note that the top-up chance may be continued as long as the top-up chance is successful until a predetermined number of top-up chances (for example, 10 times) are completed.

Note that the reel rotation time in the first top-up chance is longer, for example, 10 seconds, than the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first top-up chance. As a result, the player can increase his/her anticipation of whether or not a top-up will occur over a long period of time during the reel rotation, and furthermore, since the reel stop time is short, the player can smoothly reach the second top-up opportunity. You can proceed or end the chance to make a bid.

Further, the rotation time of the reels in the first top-up chance may be, for example, the same as the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first top-up chance. As a result, since the reel rotation and the reel stop are performed at the same tempo, the player can easily time the end of the reel stop by feeling the length of the reel rotation.

Further, the reel rotation time in the first top-up chance may be shorter than, for example, the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first top-up chance, and may be, for example, 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of time the player feels nervous about whether or not a top-up will be given, thereby suppressing fatigue of the player, and to lengthen the time during which the player feels a sense of elation when a top-up is made.

Note that the rotation time of the reels in the second and subsequent top-up chances is, for example, 7 seconds, which is longer than the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first top-up chance. As a result, the reels will smoothly advance from the reel stop to the second and subsequent top-up chances, and the expectations for how many games will be added due to the long reel rotation time in the second and subsequent top-up chances. can be increased.

Further, the rotation time of the reels in the second and subsequent top-up chances may be, for example, the same as the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first top-up chance. As a result, the relevant reel rotation and the relevant reel stop are performed at the same tempo, making it easier for the player to time the end of the second and subsequent reel revolutions by experiencing the length of the relevant reel stop time. .

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent top-up chances may be shorter than the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first top-up chance, and may be, for example, 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of time the player feels nervous about whether or not a top-up will be given, thereby suppressing fatigue of the player, and to lengthen the time during which the player feels a sense of elation when a top-up is made.

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent top-up chances is shorter than the reel rotation time in the first top-up chance, for example. In this way, in the second and subsequent chance to add on, the reel rotation time is short and the number of AT games is added one after another in a short period of time, so the player can feel refreshed.

In addition, the reel rotation time for the second and subsequent top-up chances is selected at a predetermined selection rate from a plurality of times shorter than the reel rotation time for the first top-up chance, such as 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 7 seconds. It's okay. In this case, it is preferable that the longer the reel rotation time is, the higher the expectation level is, similar to the rotation time of the reels in the first chance to win.

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent top-up chances is, for example, the same as the reel rotation time in the first top-up chance. This makes it easier for the player to time the end of the second and subsequent reel rotations by experiencing the length of the first reel rotation.

Further, the reel rotation time for the second and subsequent top-up chances is longer than the reel rotation time for the first top-up chance, for example. Since the number of medals obtained by the player increases when the second and subsequent additions are made, the speed at which the medals increase can be suppressed by taking time for the second and subsequent reel rotations.

In addition, in order to give the player a sense of surprise by starting the reel rotation without making the player aware of the reel rotation start timing for the next top-up chance, the reel rotation time for the top-up chance is different from the reel stop time for the top-up chance. It may be a different time (i.e. a time that cannot be selected as the reel stop time)

Although we have explained the comparison between the reel rotation time and the reel stop time in the top-up chance, and the comparison between the reel rotation times in the top-up chance, the reel rotation time can also be read as the reel average rotation time, or the reel stop time can be replaced with the reel rotation time. It may also be read as average downtime. By selecting the rotation time of the reels in a predetermined manner from a plurality of times, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing at which he will be notified of the success or failure of the add-on, and a sense of surprise can be provided. By selecting the stop time of the reels according to a predetermined distribution from a plurality of times, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the next top-up chance will start, and a sense of surprise can be provided.

In FIG. 746(R), a message indicating that the number of AT games for one game has been added is displayed on the image display body 500, and the reels are temporarily stopped at the same stop point as the stop point of the previous game. This is the same as FIG. 745(P) except for the following.

In addition, similar to the first top-up chance, after FIG. 746(Q), an effect may be performed to incite whether or not the winner has been won as in FIG. 745(O), and in this effect, an operation guide image of the start lever 210 will be deleted, but you may proceed with the production without the operation guidance image being displayed, or you may redisplay the operation guidance image of the start lever 210, or you may perform a different operation such as the MAX input button 206. An operation guide image of the section may also be displayed.

By redisplaying the operation guide image for the starting lever 210, the player feels a sense of anticipation, thinking that there will still be opportunities to operate the starting lever 210 after this (that is, there will still be a chance to increase the winnings). By displaying operation guide images of different operation units, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that he or she may be able to obtain further benefits by operating another operation unit. In this performance, the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the operation guide image is displayed, the performance mode of the operation guide image (display mode, BGM, movable body), etc. are the same as in FIG. 745(O).

However, if the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected from multiple times such as 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 7 seconds as the time for the reels to rotate backwards for the second and subsequent top-up chances, To avoid redisplaying the operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 and not displaying the operation guidance image of different operation parts such as the MAX input button 206 so as not to spoil the exhilarating feeling caused by the addition of the number of AT games. is desirable. In addition, if the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is displayed and the operation is performed according to the operation guidance image, even before the reel is temporarily stopped as described above. The result of the addition is displayed, but if the operation guide image is displayed when the shortest time (3 seconds) has been selected as the reel reverse rotation time, the player will have to wait until the end of the shortest time. It is likely that the operation will not be able to complete. In other words, players will feel stressed if they are unable to complete an operation even though they intended to do so, and additional results will be displayed if the player is able to complete the operation by the end of the shortest time. The timing is only slightly faster. Therefore, as mentioned above, when the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected as the time for reverse reel rotation, the operation guide image of the start lever 210 is redisplayed and the operation of different operation parts such as the MAX input button 206 is performed. It is desirable to not display the guide image.

It is confirmed that the above-mentioned special conditions (for example, an additional lottery will be held) and the additional chance will be held again, but the number of additional games may be "+1" or "+2" each time. As mentioned above, when adding 2 games, Red 7s line up, and when adding 1 game, Red 7s line up (however, even though they line up, they don't line up). In addition, when one game is added on, a predetermined distribution may be used to stop the roll of Red 7 Tenpai or the loss roll of Red 7 that is not even Tenpai.

At this time, there is a pattern 1 in which the reels temporarily stop when the red 7s line up (ie, "+2"), and then the reels temporarily stop when the red 7s line up at the next chance to add. Similarly, there is a pattern 2 of red 7 tenpai (i.e., "+1") temporary stop → red 7 tenpai pseudo stop, and a pattern 3 of loss (i.e., "+1") temporary stop → loss temporary stop. In Patterns 1 to 3, since the same number as the previous chance to win at a later chance to win is stopped, the player's expectations are not unnecessarily raised or lowered.

In addition, there is a pattern 4 in which the red 7 is temporarily stopped → red 7 tenpai temporary stop, and a pattern 5 in which the red 7 is temporarily stopped → the loss is temporarily stopped. In Patterns 4 and 5, the number of top-up games is smaller in the later top-up chances, so it is possible to make the player think that the loop of top-up chances is about to end and prepare mentally. It is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the game ends.

Furthermore, there is a pattern 6 in which a loss temporary stop → red 7 set temporary stop, and a pattern 7 in which red 7 tenpai temporary stop → red 7 set temporary stop. In patterns 6 and 7, the number of top-up games is larger in the later top-up chances, so that the player's sense of excitement can be gradually increased.

Furthermore, there is a pattern 8 in which red 7 tenpai temporary stop → loss temporary stop, and a pattern 9 in which loss temporary stop → red 7 tenpai temporary stop. In patterns 8 and 9, the number of additional games is the same but the stop result is different, so even if only the same number of games as the previous time are added, the player does not get bored with the temporary stop performance of the reels.

FIG. 746(S) shows a state in which the loop rate lottery for the bonus chance has been missed (the bonus lottery has not been performed). A message is displayed on the image display indicating that the lottery for the number of additional games was not performed because the lottery for the number of additional games was missed in the loop lottery for the additional chances. In addition, although the reels are full of red 7s on the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b, the reels are temporarily stopped at the stop where the red 7s are not aligned (Fig. 746 showing the results of the additional lottery) The stop roll of R) is continuously displayed). Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 746(T), a message is displayed on the image display body 500 indicating that a special movie will be provided as an apology for not winning the loop lottery of additional chances. By displaying the special movie, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment of a player who is disappointed when the loop of top-up chances ends. Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. Furthermore, even after the additional lottery is not held, the stopped numbers of the reels continue to be displayed. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the main game has started when the reels rotate.

In FIG. 746(U), the reverse push guide image and the production button long press guide image are erased, and the special movie is displayed on the image display body 500. The slot machine 1 of this chapter includes a shutter 301d, which is a movable body that covers the entire reel and makes the (temporary) stop eye invisible.

At the start of the special movie, the shutter 301d is closed to cover the entire reel (making symbol combinations indicating that an advantageous result was not obtained unrecognizable as shown in FIG. 746(T)), thereby discouraging the player. It is possible to draw attention to the special movie and, in turn, entertain the players. In order to entertain players, special movies are premium productions (movies that appear when the AT winning expectation is extremely high (e.g., 99% or more), and the appearance rate is extremely low (e.g., normal games and AT games). 1/32768 or smaller) movie), or a dedicated movie that does not appear in the effects executed in the normal game or AT game (that is, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 does not select it when the game starts (lever on)) It is desirable to do so.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 746(U), it is desirable that no guide images be displayed in order to make the player concentrate on the special movie, but if a predetermined operation is performed (for example, MAX When the input button 206 is operated), a reverse push guidance image can be displayed to confirm the push order in this game, and when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display of the special movie, operation guidance for the start lever 210 is displayed. It may also be possible to display an image and change the performance state (for example, the sound output in the performance, the display mode of the performance, etc.). This allows the player to complete preparations for the main game while the special movie is being displayed.

Further, during the special movie, the reverse push guide image and the effect button long press guide image may be continuously displayed from (T). As a result, the same guide image as after a successful seesaw game is displayed, allowing the player to enjoy the satisfaction of having obtained an advantageous result due to the seesaw game effect and the chance of winning, even while the special movie is being displayed. I can chew it.

FIG. 746(V) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the special movie. When the 1-piece input button 205 is pressed, the shutter 301d is released and the reels are visually checked again to reconfirm the contents of the last addition (as mentioned above, the result of the 1-game addition and the 2-game addition causes a temporary stop). A message is displayed on the image display body 500 indicating that it is possible to do so. The special movie itself is not unusual for players who play slot machine 1 in this chapter extremely many times, so it is more interesting to be able to reconfirm how advantageous the results were than the special movie. This is because it increases.

In the state shown in Figure 746(V), press the one-coin insertion button 205 (the slot machine in this chapter has a specified number of three coins, so if you press the one-coin insertion button 205 only once, the operation of the start lever 210 will not be valid). However, when the operating means for advancing the game (which gives a sense of the player's intention) is operated (based on the operation), the shutter 301d opens and the entire reel (the symbols on the reel is ) becomes visible, and the special movie displayed on the image display body 500 is erased.

Note that while the shutter 301d is closed, all the reels remain stopped, so the stopping stitch when the shutter 301d is opened is the same as the stopping stitch in FIG. 746(T), so the shutter 301d You can reconfirm the stop eye before closing. Alternatively, all the reels may be rotated while the shutter 301d is closed, and the reels may be stopped when the shutter 301d is opened, so that the number of stops is the same as in (T).

In addition, when the one-piece insertion button 205 is pressed before the end of the special movie to make the combinations of symbols on all reels visible, the timing at which the reels become visible at a predetermined ratio (for example, 16/128) The reels may rotate substantially simultaneously (within a 0.5 second difference, for example), and then automatically stop. The automatic stop positions at this time may be set to red 7 (that is, promoted from the additional stop position of 1 game in Figure 746(T) to the additional stop position of 2 games), or The stop eye at 746(T) may be displayed.

At this time, for example, the probability of being promoted to red 7 is set to be higher than the probability of displaying the stop number in (T). For example, the probability of being promoted to red 7 is 1/200, and by displaying the stop number in Figure 746(T), the player can finally confirm the number of games that were added on at the last chance to make more money. By displaying the same symbol combination, it is possible to increase the player's sense of exhilaration when the AT game starts. Further, it may be set so that the probability that the stopped number is displayed in FIG. 746(T) is higher than the probability of being promoted to a set of red 7s.

By doing this, the player can feel a sense of anticipation even during the special movie after the top-up chance ends. Also, before the end of the special movie, press the 1 coin insertion button 205 three times (or press the MAX BET button with 3 or more medals in the credit (storage device)) and hit the start lever 210 to play the game. Even when progressing, the above-mentioned promotion effect of the stop number may be performed.

In the above example, the special movie is displayed when the player does not win the AT game increase in the increase chance (in other words, in a situation where the player is disappointed), but even in other cases, the A special movie may be displayed when the user goes through a disappointing situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 746 (R), if the number of AT games is the lowest in the bonus chance, but the number of AT games is the lowest (no advantageous result was obtained), the lowest number in (R) After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the number of additional games was announced, the special movie effect shown in FIG. 746(U) may be executed. Particularly, in this case, if the promotion effect is performed by pressing the one-card insertion button 205 in FIG. 746(V), it is possible to remove the player's disappointment and immediately give him a sense of elation.

Further, for example, a background image suggesting that the normal game and the AT game are staying in a high probability state (a state in which it is easy to win AT or CZ, or a state where it is easy to win in addition to the number of AT games) is displayed on the image display body 500. However, if the background image changes to a background image that suggests that you are staying in a low probability state (a state in which it is difficult to win AT or CZ, or a state in which it is difficult to win in addition to the number of AT games), A special movie effect shown in FIG. 746(U) may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the background image suggesting that the user is staying in the probability state is displayed.

For example, if the power is turned on after the slot machine 1 cannot be played due to a power outage due to a lightning strike or the like, the special movie from FIG. You may also perform a performance.

Note that a part of the effects that may be displayed during the normal game or the AT game may be displayed during the special movie. For example, if there is a first effect that appears during the normal game and a second effect that has a higher AT winning expectation than the first effect (for example, both appear when the starting lever 210 is operated (i.e., when the lever is turned on) It is advisable to display a part of the second performance in the special movie. As a result, players who know the second performance can recall the time when they won AT with that performance and soak in the afterglow, while players who do not know the second performance can win the second AT in the subsequent regular game. When a performance appears, one can feel a sense of anticipation by thinking that since it appeared during a special movie, it is a performance with high expectations for AT winning.

As mentioned above, if you operate the starting lever 210 while the special movie is displayed, the pseudo game will end and you will move on to the real game, but if you do not operate the starting lever 210 no matter how long it takes, you will not be able to enter the hole. To avoid this, it is preferable to make the transition from the pseudo game to the real game occur after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is preferable that a special movie is created according to this predetermined time, but in order to save the capacity of the ROM 1120 of the sub-board 510, a movie with a time shorter than this predetermined time is repeated multiple times. It may also be displayed.

Furthermore, if the time of one movie is short, it is possible to make the combination of symbols on the reels visible between the movies repeated multiple times so as to change the player's line of sight. At this time, in order to draw the player's attention to the symbol combinations on the reels, an image (for example, a background image) that appears during the normal game or AT game may be displayed on the image display body 500 between movies. .

In addition, in FIG. 746(T), the reason why the presentation button long press guidance image is displayed even after the top-up chance ends is as follows. If you succeed in producing a seesaw game and press and hold the production button 204, the seesaw part 552 will tilt in the front view depth direction, but if you stop pressing after the medal falls into the seesaw success tube 558, the seesaw part 552 will return to its original tilt. Even if the player returns to , and then presses the performance button 204 for a long time, the seesaw portion 552 will not tilt in the front view depth direction again in the pseudo game.

Here, for example, when the top-up chance ends in FIG. 746(S), one dummy medal falls from the claw part 556 to the seesaw part 552 at a predetermined rate (for example, 1/1000). Therefore, in this case, the dummy medal cannot be moved to the seesaw success tube 558 unless the presentation button 204 is kept pressed until the timing when the dummy medal falls onto the seesaw section 552.

Further, if the dummy medal can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the number of AT games is added. Therefore, in order for the player to obtain an advantageous result, the performance button long press guidance image is displayed even after the top-up chance has ended. Note that this dummy medal is stored in a predetermined storage position (not shown) in the slot machine 1, and when the lottery at a predetermined ratio in FIG. 746 (S) described above is won, the dummy medal is removed from the storage position. In either case, whether the medal can be moved to the claw part 556 and the seesaw success tube 558, the dummy medal returns to the storage position (not shown).

However, since the special movie itself is a valuable exclusive performance, you can delete the long-press guidance image of the performance button and display only the special movie, or you can display only the special movie and the special The display of the movie and the presentation press guide image may be alternately repeated.

It should be noted that if the medals can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the number of AT games will be increased, but it is possible to reduce the technical intervention of the player so that even players with low skills can play the game. In order to make the game more enjoyable, it is preferable that additions be made at a predetermined rate (for example, 1 game is added at 1/10, 2 games are added at 1/20). Note that some players prefer the slot machine 1 with large technical intervention elements, so if the medals can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the additional number of AT games may be determined.

In addition, if a lottery for adding the number of AT games is held based on moving medals to the seesaw success tube 558, although the special movie itself is valuable, it is advantageous to the player who wants to add the number of AT games. The player will feel more excited if the result is a positive result, so at the same time as the display of the special movie ends, the reels are displayed at almost the same time (within a 0.5 second difference, for example) that the reels become visible. It is recommended that the rotation is performed.

[13-4. Practice performance]
FIG. 747 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a practice presentation of an extra chance in a seesaw game presentation. Following FIG. 746(S), that is, when the additional chance ends without winning the additional chance loop lottery, an additional chance practice performance starts in FIG. 747(T'). In FIG. 747 (T'), a message indicating that the practice performance can be started is displayed. Further, in FIG. 747 (T'), a reverse push guide image and a production button long press guide image are displayed on the image display body 500. The practice performance is performed with the reels temporarily stopped.

Note that the time from FIG. 746(S) to FIG. 746(T) (the time from when the result of the additional lottery is shown until the special movie starts) and from FIG. 746(S) to FIG. 747( T') (the time from when the result of the additional lottery is shown until the practice performance starts), the former The latter is shorter.

In the practice performance, a performance similar to the operation performance of the start lever 210 in the above-mentioned top-up chance can be performed with the reels temporarily stopped. Since the reels are rotating during the actual top-up chance performance, even if the player wants to concentrate on the display on the image display 500, the player may be distracted by the rotating reels and have difficulty concentrating. The level of difficulty is high because it becomes difficult to grasp the timing of the operation. On the other hand, in the practice performance, the reels are temporarily stopped, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the display on the image display body 500 and grasping the timing to operate the start lever 210, so that the difficulty level is low.

Since the seesaw game effect does not appear frequently, by making the practice effect appear, the player can improve the operation of the starting lever 210 during the chance to win. Further, if a practice effect is executed after failing to operate the starting lever 210 in the top-up chance, a player who is not good at this operation can be allowed to practice. In addition, there are cases where the above-mentioned special movie performance is performed without performing this practice performance, but it is also possible to distribute each by lottery, or the special movie performance and practice performance may be divided each time the additional chance is failed. They may appear alternately. In addition, in the case of allocating by lottery, it is better to set a higher rate of allocation for practice performances than for special movie performances, since practice performances lead to actual profits.

Furthermore, after the end of the additional chance, it is determined whether or not the practice performance will be performed according to a predetermined distribution (for example, 96/128 to perform the practice performance, 32/128 to not perform the practice performance), and not to perform the practice performance. The above-mentioned special movie effect is executed in such a case. The reason why the practice performance is given a higher priority than the special movie performance is that it leads to practical benefits for the players.

In FIG. 747 (U'), in order to lower the difficulty level of the practice performance, the practice performance is performed while the reels (symbol combinations indicating the result of the additional lottery) are maintained being displayed. The display contents on the image display body 5000 are almost the same as in FIG. 745(N). However, the purpose is to allow players to practice, and in order to avoid giving the misunderstanding that they will be added to the game, the operation guide image that prompts the player to operate the start lever 210 has been changed from the one displayed in FIG. 745 (N). is also displayed in a smaller size. In FIG. 747 (U'), after the message "Practice is available" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the same guidance display "Practice available" as in FIG. 746 (Q) may be displayed.

Instead, in order to make it easier for the player to succeed in the operation in the practice presentation, a chance presentation is performed in which the ratio of the size of the blacked-out and/or diagonal portion of the gauge displayed on the image display 500 to the size of the gauge is added. The movement speed of the blacked-out part of the gauge may be made lower than when the additional chance is produced. By lowering the difficulty level of the practice performance in this manner and making it easier for the player to succeed in the operation, it is possible to easily make the player feel a sense of accomplishment upon success.

On the other hand, in order to make it easier to succeed in the actual performance by intentionally raising the difficulty level and practicing, we will reduce the ratio and increase the movement speed of the blacked out part of the gauge compared to when the chance is created. Good too. By increasing the difficulty level in this way, players can feel a greater sense of accomplishment when they succeed, and even if they fail, they can gain confidence that they can handle it because the actual game is easier.

In order to make the player concentrate on practice, the BGM that was playing in FIG. 747 (T') is muted (the volume is suddenly turned off) before the operation guide image for the starting lever 210 is displayed in FIG. 747 (U'). (to zero or fade out) or suppress the volume. This BGM muting or volume suppression may be performed in synchronization with the timing when the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 is displayed, or at a predetermined timing after the operation guidance image for the starting lever 210 is displayed. It's okay to be hurt.

Note that in order to avoid a situation in which the display on the image display body 500 in FIG. may be moved to a position where it overlaps with the symbols on the reels, and the same content as that displayed on the image display body 500 in FIG. 747 (U') may be displayed by the transparent liquid crystal of the movable body.

At this time, the transparency of the transmissive liquid crystal display may be lowered to make the reel symbols completely invisible, or the transparency may be increased to display the reel symbols (some or all of them). ) may be made visible, although the visibility level will deteriorate.

In FIG. 747 (V'), a message is displayed indicating that when the practice performance starts, pressing the MAX input button 206 will return to the main game. This is because players who are skilled in the operations in the add-on chance performance feel that the practice performance is unnecessary. Further, a gauge for a practice performance, a reverse push guidance image, and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 747 (W') shows a state in which the player has pressed the MAX input button 206 in FIG. 747 (V'). After the practice performance is completed, the transition from the pseudo-game to the main game occurs, and the reels are rotating in order. Note that the random delay processing is a well-known technique, so its explanation will be omitted.) Further, numbers indicating reverse push are written on the top of each reel on the image display body 500. Furthermore, since the reel to be pressed first is the right reel 301c, the light emitting body provided on the right reel 301c is lit. In addition, in the above example, the practice performance is performed at the end of the pseudo game, but the practice performance may be performed during the main game that is performed following the pseudo game.

Furthermore, even if you successfully operate the starting lever 210 at the right time in a practice production (that is, operate the starting lever 210 at a timing when at least a part of the blacked out part of the gauge overlaps with the shaded part), it is only a practice performance. Therefore, the number of AT games will not be added. However, if the start lever 210 is successfully operated, the lamp will emit light in a manner that is not present in the effect that appears during the game and that appears based on the lottery result when the start lever 210 is operated. (dedicated light emission pattern), sound effects (dedicated sound effects), and BGM (dedicated BGM) may be played. In this way, by preparing a dedicated performance, the player's motivation to succeed in the practice performance increases. In addition, by performing special effects (light emission, sounds, and/or BGM) that cannot appear during the main game, players will not be misled into thinking that the practice effect is the main game. be.

On the other hand, if the operation timing of the start lever 210 fails in the practice performance, the lamps will not emit light in these dedicated light emission patterns, and the dedicated sound effects and dedicated BGM will not be played.

Note that the above-described special movie performance may be performed after the practice performance is performed. For example, after a practice effect is executed after an extra chance effect is executed, the player is tired from operating the starting lever 210 at the right timing, so a valuable special movie is shown to encourage the player. It can be both relaxing and entertaining at the same time.

Furthermore, if it is possible to practice multiple times in one simulated game, the player's skill will increase and it will be easier to succeed in the chance to add on, so there is a risk that the ball payout rate will increase, which in turn increases the burden on the hole. Therefore, it is desirable that the exercise can be performed only once. Further, practice may be performed only once after the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on.

If practice can be performed only once, it is preferable that the guide for the practice performance displayed in FIG. 747 (U') be erased when the start lever 210 is operated in the second and subsequent practice performances. In addition, in situations where it is acceptable for the ball output rate to increase (in the case where the design value is such that the ball output rate does not change much even if the skill of all players increases), it is possible to practice multiple times. There may be no limit to the number of times of practice.

In addition, when the practice is successful, it is preferable to display a message indicating that the practice was successful, such as "Congratulations on your success! Let's do your best in the actual performance!", on the image display body 500, for example. It is desirable that this message is different from the message when the start lever 210 is operated in the top-up opportunity ("Which one is it now!" in FIG. 745(O)). This is because if the message is the same for the actual game and the practice game, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that he or she will be able to obtain an additional number of AT games.

[13-5. Two-choice production of fate]
FIG. 748 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the additional chance performance (two-choice fate performance) in the seesaw game performance. The chance of winning in FIG. 748 depends on the operating direction of the starting lever 210 (for example, whether to hit from above or from below), not the timing of operating the starting lever 210 as explained in FIG. The appropriateness of addition of the amount will be determined.

When a fateful two-choice performance is performed, for example, when a seesaw game performance is successful, a loop rate is selected according to a predetermined distribution (for example, a loop rate of 50% is 64/128, 66% is 48/124, 80 % is 15/128, 90% is 1/128).

Further, if the starting lever 210 is hit from above or from below according to a predetermined distribution, it is selected to win an additional number of AT games. The predetermined distribution is predetermined, for example, the correct answer is 48/128 to hit from above, and the correct answer is 80/128 to hit from below. In this case, it is better to hit the starting lever 210 from below. AT has a high winning rate.

Further, when the starting lever 210 is hit from the correct direction and the number of AT games is won, the number of games to be added is determined according to a predetermined distribution (for example, 1 game 64/128, 2 games 64/128).

Following FIG. 745 (M), in FIG. 748 (N''), a fateful two-choice performance is executed as an additional chance. In FIG. 748 (N''), the reels continue to rotate at high speed in reverse, and a message (title display) indicating that the fateful two-choice challenge has started is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 748 (O''), a message indicating a guidance to hit the starting lever 210 from above is displayed on the image display body 500, which is an example of a guidance display as a request effect requesting an operation of the starting lever 210. . A reverse push guide image and a production button long press guide image are displayed on the image display body 500. In FIG. 748 (P''), a message ("ka...") indicating that there is a possibility that there is an operation direction other than hitting the starting lever 210 from above is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 748 (Q''), a message indicating a guidance to hit the starting lever 210 from below is displayed on the image display body 500, which is an example of a guidance display as a request effect requesting operation of the starting lever 210. . Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 748 (R'') shows the state after the starting lever 210 is hit from above or from below. As a result of this operation, a message ("Which one is it?") is displayed on the image display body 500, instructing whether or not the player has won an additional AT game number. Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

Note that when FIG. 748 (O'') is displayed, the start lever 210 is valid for operation only from above. Further, when FIG. 748 (Q'') is displayed, the start lever 210 is valid for operation only from below. Further, when FIG. 748 (R'') is displayed, the starting lever 210 is valid for operation from above and from below.

Therefore, the player who did not read the explanation to the end and hit the starting lever 210 from above at the point in time in FIG. ''), the player who hits the starting lever 210 from below has an advantage (as described above, there are many cases in which the correct answer is to hit the starting lever 210 from below).

In other words, players who are not accustomed to playing slots and who play at a slow speed are at an advantage. (There was no suggestion or instruction to ``hit the start lever from below!''). Note that the operation for the operation from below the starting lever 210 may be enabled from the timing shown in FIG. 748 (O''). This is because it is troublesome for players who have experienced the above-mentioned top-up chances many times to wait for the timing when the operation from below becomes effective.

However, since the ball payout rate is higher when the starting lever 210 is hit from below, in order to reduce the burden on the hole, when the starting lever 210 is pressed upwards when Fig. 748 (Q'') is displayed. The operation may be valid for operations from above and below.

In addition, when the correct answer is given to the operating direction of the starting lever 210 and an additional number of AT games is obtained, a display similar to that shown in FIGS. 745(P) and 746(R) is displayed on the image display body 500, The reel temporarily stops at a stop point similar to that shown in FIG. 746(P) and FIG. 746(R). Furthermore, it is determined whether another top-up chance will be given according to the selected loop rate.

In addition, when the top-up chance loops, there is a production (timing production) in which the possibility of adding on the number of AT games is determined by the timing of the start lever 210 explained using FIG. A performance (operation direction performance) that determines whether or not the number of AT games can be added may be mixed. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the number of AT games will be increased and the loop lottery is won, which effect will be executed according to a predetermined distribution (for example, a timing effect of 64/128 or an operation direction effect of 64/128). Alternatively, a selection screen for timing performance and operation direction performance may be displayed to allow the player to select which performance to perform.

In addition, if you cannot get the correct answer to the operation direction of the starting lever 210 and cannot obtain the additional AT game number, you may move on to the main game, or you can move on to the actual game (special movie display ) may be executed.

In addition, Fig. 748 (O''), that is, a situation where the operation guidance for hitting the starting lever from above (hereinafter also referred to as guidance from above) is displayed, and Fig. 748 (Q''), that is, the operation for hitting the starting lever from below. For example, the presentation mode differs as shown below between a situation where guidance (hereinafter also referred to as guidance from the bottom) is displayed.

In a state where the guidance is displayed from above, it is desirable that the BGM volume continues from the time point in FIG. 748 (N''). Although the probability of winning an additional AT game number is lower when hitting the starting lever 210 from above, if the player suppresses or mutes the volume here, the timing when the guidance appears from above is lower. There is a possibility that the driver may mistake this as the final timing of the fateful two-choice performance and hit the starting lever 210 from above, resulting in a loss. On the other hand, comparing the case of hitting the starting lever 210 from above and the case of hitting the starting lever 210 from below, there is no extremely large difference in the expected increase in the number of AT games. Since there is a sufficient expected value for the background music, the BGM may be suppressed or muted.

On the other hand, when the guidance is displayed from below, it is very close to the final timing of the fateful two-choice performance, and since both options are presented, the BGM is suppressed to increase the tension. You can also mute the sound.

The effective time for operating the start lever 210 when the top-down guidance is displayed first (note that the top-down guidance is displayed before the bottom-down guidance is omitted below) is the bottom-down guidance that is displayed later. (The fact that the guidance from the bottom is displayed after the guidance from the top is omitted below) is desirably shorter than the effective operation time of the starting lever 210 when is displayed. By shortening the effective operation time of the starting lever 210 when the guidance is displayed from above, even if the player hits the starting lever 210 from above prematurely, the operation will not become effective. After looking at both options, the user can reconsider the direction in which to press the starting lever 210.

When the guidance is displayed from the top or from the bottom, the expectation level (the expectation level of winning the additional lottery) is increased (for example, "Hit the start lever from above!" or "Start lever") It is also possible to perform an effect in which the level of expectation is varied depending on the guidance display itself for the operation means, such as displaying in red letters, ``Hit me from below!''.

For example, if the message "Hit the start lever from above!" is displayed from above, the guidance will be displayed in white text at 8/10, and in red at 2/10, and the guidance will be displayed from below. 6/10 is in white text, 4/10 is in red text, and as shown, the appearance frequency of the expectation level increase effect is higher than when the guidance is displayed from the bottom than when the guidance is displayed from the top. It is desirable that the value be higher when the If the expectation level suggestion effect is displayed frequently when the guidance is displayed from above, even though the probability of winning the additional AT game number is low, the player may mistakenly think that the probability is high and the probability of winning the additional AT game number is low. This is because there is a risk of continuing to operate the starting lever 210.

In addition, there may be cases where guidance is displayed from the top but not from the bottom. In this case, for example, if the guidance is displayed from the top but the guidance is not displayed from the bottom after that, the guidance from the top may not be displayed. If the message in 8/10 is in white text and 2/10 in red text, and if the guidance is displayed from the bottom after the guidance is displayed from the top, the message in the guidance from the top will be in 2/10. When the message in the guidance from the top is displayed in a highly anticipated manner, it is easier for the message from the bottom to be displayed later, as shown in white text and red text in 8/10. It is desirable that the

Also, at the start of the fateful two-choice challenge, it may be possible to forcibly prevent winning of the additional AT game number at a predetermined rate (that is, whether you hit the starting lever 210 from above or below), or forcibly. If the player does not win the additional AT game number, it is desirable that the guidance is displayed from the top, but the guidance is not displayed from the bottom after that. This is to avoid arousing players' expectations too much by not displaying guidance from the bottom, where expectations are high, because no matter how the starting lever 210 is operated, players will not be able to win an additional AT game number. Further, if the starting lever 210 is tapped from above at this time, it is desirable that after a predetermined period of time it is announced that the player has not won the additional AT game number. This is to give players at least a little sense of anticipation, even though they did not win the forced increase in the number of AT games.

Further, even if the guidance is displayed from above, the guidance may not be displayed from below at a predetermined rate (for example, less than 5/10); in this case, the starting lever 210 is It is valid only for operation (that is, even if you hit the starting lever 210 from below, you will not win an additional AT game). At this time, if the expectation level increasing effect appears when the guidance is displayed from the top, the guidance from the bottom will be more likely to be displayed after the guidance from the top, compared to the case where it does not appear. Good too. In addition, if there is a possibility that the guidance will not be displayed from below after the guidance is displayed from above, even if you operate the starting lever 210 according to the guidance from above, AT will be added at a predetermined rate (for example, 6/10). It may be arranged so that the player does not win (that is, the fateful two-choice performance always fails).

When the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above, and when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below when the guidance is displayed from below, the starting lever 210 is operated. The display is based on the operation of the starting lever 201 during a predetermined period until the result is displayed (display similar to FIG. 745(P) or FIG. 746(R)) as to whether or not the hitting direction was correct. An effect that increases the expectation level (for example, a cut-in of a character image displayed in red, lamp lighting in a predetermined pattern, or a predetermined sound effect) may be performed. However, if the guidance is displayed from the top, the performance will not be performed on 8/10, but will be performed on 2/10, and if the guidance is displayed from the bottom, it will be performed on 6/10. For example, the frequency of occurrence is lower when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below than when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above. It is also desirable that the number of patterns for increasing the level of expectation is smaller when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below.

As mentioned above, in cases where there is a possibility that the guidance will not be displayed from the bottom after the guidance is displayed from the top, it is better to have an effect that increases expectations when the guidance is displayed from the top. , the guidance from the bottom may be more likely to be displayed after the guidance from the top, compared to a case where the guidance does not appear.

If you follow the guidance from the bottom, you have a higher probability of winning the additional AT game number, so if you dare to follow the guidance from the bottom, there is no need to excessively increase expectations, and there is a need to have many variations. This is because there is no.

It is desirable that the effect that appears when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guide from above when the guide is displayed from above is an effect that does not indicate whether or not the number of AT games should be increased. If a player who does not know that the guidance appears from below prematurely operates the start lever 210 according to the guidance from above, and an effect indicating whether or not to increase the number of AT games appears, the player will This is because the player may misunderstand that the timing when the guidance appears from above is the final timing of the fateful two-choice performance, and end up being unable to view the guidance from below forever, resulting in a loss.

Specifically, when guidance is displayed from above, the effect that appears when operating the start lever 210 according to the guidance from above is an effect that only indicates the added expectation level (for example, character A is displayed, If character B is displayed, the expectation level is 80%, and if character B is displayed, the expectation level is 50%, and if a red message is displayed, the expectation level is 80%. It is desirable that if a white message is displayed at 50% of the time, the player has won an additional AT game with a 50% expectation level.

On the other hand, when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below when the guidance is displayed from below, it is desirable that the effect that appears is an effect indicating whether or not the number of AT games should be added. All options are presented to the player at the same time the guidance is displayed from the bottom, so if the player follows the guidance from the bottom, there will be no benefit to the player even if the performance indicating whether the number of AT games is appropriate or not is executed. This is because there is no difference.

Furthermore, if you follow the guidance from the top, an effect will be executed that does not indicate whether or not the addition of the number of AT games is appropriate, but if you follow the instruction from the bottom, an effect that indicates whether or not the addition of the number of AT games is appropriate will be executed. If the player realizes that the probability of winning the AT game increase is higher if the player follows the guidance from below, the ball payout rate will increase and the burden on the hole will increase, so the player should follow the guidance from below. Even if it is a case, an effect that does not indicate whether it is correct or not may be performed.

In other words, if you hit the start lever 210 from above while the guidance is displayed from above, the level of expectation will be shown and you will not be notified whether or not the number of AT games will be added, so the game will be like a later announcement, and from below. When the starting lever 210 is tapped from below while the guidance is being displayed, it is announced whether or not the number of AT games will be added, so the game is similar to being notified first.

Note that, when the user follows the guidance from above, an effect may be performed that indicates whether the additional lottery is successful or not. If an effect indicating a win is displayed, it would be advantageous to operate later, but there will be many players who operate first, and the additional winning rate will decrease for the hall as a whole, reducing the burden on the hall. suppressed.

If you do not follow the guidance from above and do not operate the start lever 210 when the guidance is displayed from above, a special performance (the performance that does not indicate whether or not the addition of the number of AT games mentioned above is appropriate) will be executed. The effect progresses to the above-mentioned FIG. 748 (P'') without any change. On the other hand, even if you do not follow the guidance from below and do not operate the start lever 210 when the guidance is displayed from the bottom, if the starting lever 210 is not operated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (the effective period for which the operation from below is enabled is It is desirable that a special performance (for example, a dancing character be displayed) be performed after the video is finished. A special effect that was not displayed when you did not follow the guidance from the top is displayed when you do not follow the guidance from the bottom and do not operate the start lever 210, so the number of AT games will be higher if you follow the guidance from the bottom. It can be hinted that the probability of winning is high.

In addition, in FIG. 748 (R''), if the message "Now, which one?" is displayed forever, it will cause trouble to the hall, so for example, if the starting lever 210 is not operated after the guidance is displayed from below, When a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the process may be performed assuming that the starting lever 210 has been struck from above.

If you do not press the start lever 210 from above after the guidance appears from the top, you will be notified of the propriety of adding on the number of AT games after the first predetermined time has elapsed, but if you do not press the start lever 210 from above after the guidance appears from the bottom, If the starting lever 210 is not pressed after that, the propriety of adding on the number of AT games will be notified after a second predetermined time period shorter than the first predetermined time period has elapsed. This is because if you follow the instructions from below, you have a higher probability of winning the additional AT game number. Furthermore, the propriety of adding on the number of AT games may be notified by tapping the starting lever 210 from below in accordance with the guidance from below.

When the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above while the guidance is displayed from above, it is desirable that the movable body does not operate. On the other hand, when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below when the guidance is displayed from below, it is desirable that the movable body moves all or part of its movable width. If the movable body operates while the guidance is displayed from above, the player continues to operate the starting lever 210 from above, misunderstanding that the probability is high, even though the probability of winning the additional AT game number is low. This is because there is a risk that the

In addition, the movable body is moved a predetermined number of times before the guidance is displayed from above, and the movable body is moved a predetermined number of times from the end of the display of the guidance from the top until the display of the guidance from the bottom starts. By operating it, it may be hinted that it is more advantageous to operate the starting lever 210 according to the guidance from below. However, when each operation guide is displayed, it is better not to operate the movable body in order to ensure that the player recognizes the operation guide. Also, before the guidance is displayed from above, and after the display of the guidance from above ends and before the guidance is displayed from below, all movable bodies may be operated, or some of the movable bodies may be operated. You can do it like this.

Further, it is desirable that the time from the start to the end of displaying the guidance from above is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from above. This is because if the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's expectations will increase, and there is a risk that the player may prematurely hit the start lever 210 when the guidance is displayed from above. Conversely, the time from the start to the end of displaying the guidance from above may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from above. This is because it is possible to increase the player's expectations by lengthening the operation time of the movable body, rather than making the player properly recognize the guidance from above, which is an operation guidance with a low probability of winning an AT add-on.

In addition, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the top may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body from the end of the guidance display from the top to the start of the guidance display from the bottom. desirable. This is because by moving the movable body for a long time after the guidance is displayed from above, it can be hinted that following the guidance from below has a higher probability of winning the AT additional prize. Conversely, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the top is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body between the end of the guidance display from the top and the start of the guidance display from the bottom. It's okay. This is to make the player aware that although the probability of winning the AT add-on is low, there is an option to hit the starting lever 210 from above, and since there is a good chance that the player will not win the AT add-on even if they follow the guidance from the bottom, there is also a possibility of not winning the AT add-on. This is to avoid stirring up expectations too much by not allowing it to operate for a long time.

Further, it is desirable that the time from the start to the end of displaying the guidance from the bottom is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from the top. If the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's expectations will increase, and there is a risk that the player will prematurely hit the start lever 210 when the guidance is displayed from above. This is because by setting the time longer than that, it is possible to make the player sufficiently aware of the operation that has a high AT add-on winning probability. Conversely, the time from the start to the end of displaying the guidance from the bottom may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from the top. If the movable object is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's expectations will increase, and there will not be enough time to make the player aware of the operations that have a high AT add-on winning probability, so the player will It is more likely that the operator will operate according to the guidance from a low position, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

In addition, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the bottom may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body between the end of the guidance display from the top and the start of the guidance display from the bottom. desirable. Since the player pays attention to the movement of the movable body while it is moving, by moving the movable body for a long time after the guidance is displayed from above, the player will be able to see the guidance from below immediately after the movement of the movable body is finished. The player can be made aware of the guidance that is displayed and has a high expectation of AT additional winning. Conversely, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the bottom is longer than the time from the start to the end of the movement of the movable body between the end of the guidance display from the top and the start of the guidance display from the bottom. It's okay. If the movable body is operated for a long time, there is a good chance that even if you follow the guidance from below, you will not win the AT add-on, so the movable body is not operated for a long time to avoid stirring up expectations too much.

In addition, in the fateful two-choice performance, the propriety of adding on the number of AT games was determined by the operating method of the starting lever 210, but the more times the operating guidance for the starting lever 210 appears (in other words, the more The more operation opportunities there are), the higher the expectation of an increase in the number of AT games (hereinafter also referred to as "how many times can you operate?" effect) may be implemented.

In this case, for example, when it is determined that the number of AT games will be increased and the loop lottery is won, a predetermined distribution (for example, timing effect 40/100, two-choice fate effect 35/100, how many times can you operate it 25) /100 distribution) determines which top-up chance will be played.

If the effect of how many times you can operate is selected, for example, if the number of AT games is added on, a lottery is drawn in advance, and if you win the number of AT games added, the number of operations is 1 time: 10/100, 2 times: 35/ 100, 3 times: 55/100, and if you do not win the AT game number addition, the number of operations will be divided as 1 time: 65/100, 2 times: 25/100, 3 times: 10/100 .

The "how many times can you operate" effect is executed during a pseudo game (that is, while the reels are rotating in reverse), similar to the timing effect and the two-choice-of-fate effect. To show how many times you can operate the starting lever 210, first, there is an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image imitating the starting lever 210), an image indicating that this is the first operation (for example, a message saying "First time!"), is displayed. When the number of operations of one time is selected, if the start lever 210 is operated within the valid operation period, Fig. 745 (O) is displayed, and then Fig. 745 (P) and Fig. 746(R) and the effects shown in FIG. 746(S) are executed.

When the number of operations of two times is selected, if the starting lever 210 is operated within the valid period of the first operation, or when the valid period of operation ends, an image (for example, " "Not yet!" message is displayed.

Then, in the second operation guidance, an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image imitating the starting lever 210) and an image indicating that this is the second operation (for example, a message saying "Second time!!") is displayed. When the number of operations of two times is selected and the start lever 210 is operated within the valid period of the second operation, Fig. 745 (O) is displayed, and then Fig. 745 (P) is displayed according to the result of the additional lottery. ), FIG. 746(R), and FIG. 746(S) effects are executed.

When the number of operations of 3 times is selected, if the starting lever 210 is operated within the valid period of the second operation, or when the valid period of operation ends, an image (for example, " The message “Next is the last!!” will be displayed.

Then, in the third operation guidance, an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image imitating the starting lever 210) and an image indicating that this is the third operation (for example, a message saying "Third time!!!") is displayed. If the number of operations of three times is selected and the start lever 210 is operated within the valid period of the third operation, the display shown in FIG. Accordingly, the effects shown in FIGS. 745(P), 746(R), and 746(S)(P) are executed.

Note that as the operation guidance continues for the first time, second time, and third time, the display during the operation guidance may become a display with a higher expectation level. For example, in the first operation guidance, the background image, the image of the starting lever 210, and the message "1st time!!" are displayed in blue, and in the second operation guidance, the background image, the image of the starting lever 210, and the message "2nd time!!" are displayed in blue. For the third operation guidance, the background image, the image of the starting lever 210, and the message "Third time!!" are displayed in red. Further, for example, as the operation guidance continues for the first, second, and third time, the display size of the image of the starting lever 210 may be increased.

In addition, when the first operation guidance evolves to Figure 745(O), when the second operation guidance develops to Figure 745(O), the expectation level of the display in Figure 745(O) is It may be displayed as high. Specifically, for example, if the first operation guidance progresses to Figure 745(O), the background image and the text "Not yet!" are displayed in blue, and the second operation guidance progresses to Figure 745(O). If it develops into , the background image and the text "Now which one!" are displayed in green.

In this way, by providing additional chances with different operation methods such as timing effect, two-choice fate effect, and how many times can you operate the effect, players will not get bored, and all kinds of additional opportunities will be available. Since it is difficult to get the hang of the operation, it is difficult to increase the ball hitting rate, and the burden on the hole can be reduced.

[13-6. Seesaw game production during AT]
FIG. 749, FIG. 750, FIG. 751, FIG. 752, and FIG. 753 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the normal see-saw game performance. During AT, for example, if a predetermined rare combination (a small combination with a low probability of formation (for example, 1/30 or less)) is achieved, then a predetermined normal combination (a small combination with a high probability of formation) with a high probability (for example, more than 1/10) is achieved. For example, if you win a small prize (more than 1/30), there is a low probability (for example, 1/1000 or less) (for example, if a weak watermelon included in the specified rare prize is won, you will win 1/8 of the prize). If the strong watermelon included in the winning combination is achieved, 1/4, and when the push order bell included in the predetermined normal winning combination is achieved, 1/2048), a lottery is held to enter the specialized zone. The specialized zone continues for 10 games, and a seesaw game effect is executed every game. If each seesaw game performance in the specialized zone is successful, the number of AT games will be added.

In addition, odd-numbered games (1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th games) in the specialized zone are called specialized zone A, and 321 bells (9 coins paid out) are forcibly established in specialized zone A. A control change is made. That is, in the main game in specialized zone A, if the reels are stopped by a reverse push, nine pieces can be paid out.

The even-numbered games (2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, and 10th games) in the specialized zone are called specialized zone B, and the control has been changed so that 132 bells (5 pieces paid) are forcibly established in specialized zone B. will be done. In other words, in the main game in specialized zone B, if the reels are stopped by a pinch hit, five pieces can be paid out. Therefore, in the 10 games of the specialized zone, the specialized zone A game and the specialized zone B game are played alternately. Note that the technology for forcibly winning the winning combination and the technology for changing the control table for stopping the reels are well-known technologies, so their explanations will be omitted.

FIG. 749(A) shows the state when all the reels of the game in which the specialized zone has been won are stopped. In (A), a message indicating that the number of AT games will be added if the seesaw game performance is successful is displayed on the image display body 500. In FIG. 749(B), explanation of the seesaw game effect has started, and the same display as in FIG. 743(C) is performed. In addition, in the seesaw game effect executed in the normal game, an explanation was displayed forcibly reaching 321 bells and pressing the reverse button (Fig. 743 (B)), but the player could play the game according to the navigation during AT. Because we understand that the seesaw game during AT will increase the number of medals (this contradicts the message "You can enjoy the seesaw game without reducing medals too much!"), the seesaw game during the specialized zone. This kind of display is not performed in the performance.

The contents displayed on the image display body 500 in FIGS. 749 (C), (D), (E), (F), and FIGS. 750 (G) and (H) (explanation regarding seesaw game effect) are as shown in FIG. 743, respectively. The display contents are the same as those in (D), (E), (F), and FIGS. 744 (G), (H), and (I), so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 750(I) shows the lever-on state of the game following FIG. 750(H), that is, the game in which the seesaw game effect of the first game of the specialized zone (specialized zone A) is performed. In the seesaw game performance in the specialized zone, the reels rotate in reverse by realizing a pseudo game that is started by turning on the lever, similarly to the seesaw game performance executed during normal play.

In addition, in FIG. 750(I), medals are accumulated on the seesaw part 552, and a reverse push guidance image as a batting style presentation showing a batting style advantageous to the player and the remaining medals until the number of AT games is added are displayed. A gauge indicating the residence time and a support message are displayed on the image display 500.

FIG. 750(J) shows a state in which the seesaw game performance is successfully performed by operating the starting lever 210 in the left and right directions (an operation different from the operation (up and down direction) for advancing the game). In FIG. 750(J), the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw section 552 are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw section 552 is fixed horizontally. Further, the door portion 555 opens. In addition, in FIG. 750 (J), the performance button long press guidance image, the reverse press guidance image (i.e., two guidance images), the character who celebrates the increase in the number of AT games by turning his fan sideways, and the image display 500 is displayed.

FIG. 750(K) shows that the seesaw section 552 is tilted toward the back in front view due to the long press of the effect button 204 according to the long press guide image of the effect button, and the medal passes through the open door section 555. The medal is moved to the seesaw success tube 558, and the sensor attached to the seesaw success tube 558 detects a medal. Moreover, in FIG. 750(K), the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw part 552 have returned to the reference position. In addition, a message indicating that you have won the AT game number addition (“AT addition!”), a reverse push guidance image, and a performance button long press guidance image (i.e., two guidance images) are displayed on the image display body 500. has been done. Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

FIG. 750(L) is a continuation of FIG. 750(K), and a message indicating that there is a chance to increase the number of AT games (additional increase chance) is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, a reverse push guide image and a performance button long press guide image (ie, two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500. Note that, similar to the seesaw game performance won during the normal game, even after it is confirmed that the seesaw game performance has been successful and the player has won the additional AT game number, the performance button long press guidance image and the image display body 500 is displayed.

In addition, when an additional chance is being played, the reels rotate in the opposite direction at a higher speed than when a seesaw game is being played. In addition, here, it is assumed that an additional chance to increase the number of AT games will always appear after succeeding in the seesaw game effect and winning the increase in the number of AT games, but whether or not the additional opportunity to increase the number of AT games will occur depends on the predetermined distribution (e.g. , 32/128 when an additional top-up chance is taken, 96/128 when it is not taken).

In FIG. 751(M), an effect is performed to increase the number of AT games. Here, as in FIG. 745(N), when the starting lever 210 is operated at a timely manner (up and down operation similar to the operation (up and down direction) for advancing the game), the number of AT games is added. However, similar to the chance of winning in the normal see-saw game performance, a predetermined valid time (for example, 2 seconds) of the starting lever 210 may be provided. In addition, in (M), a starting lever operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 for prompting the operation of the starting lever 210, a reverse push guidance image, and a production button long press guidance image (that is, three guidance images) are shown. displayed on the image display.

FIG. 751(N) shows the state after operating the starting lever 210 in FIG. 751(M). A message is displayed on the image display indicating that whether or not the operating timing of the starting lever 210 in FIG. 751(M) is a timing at which an additional number of AT games can be obtained will be announced later. Further, a reverse push guide image and a performance button long press guide image (ie, two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 751(O), a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (2 games) is displayed on the image display body 500. Also, red 7s are aligned in the middle of the reels (three identical symbol combinations). If the start lever 210 is successfully operated in (M), a lottery is held for the number of additional AT add-on games, and the player wins either two games or one add-on game. When the starting lever 210 is successfully operated, the number of additional games is drawn, for example, with 96/128 as an additional game and 32/128 as an additional two games.

Similar to the AT add-on chance that developed from the seesaw game effect that entered the normal game, if you win 2 games (advantageous results are obtained), red 7s are aligned (3 identical symbol combinations) If the reels temporarily stop in this state and you win one game (no advantageous result was obtained), for example, if the reel is the same as the stop number of the previous game (main game) or red 7 is tenpai. The reels will temporarily stop at a stop where the red 7s are not aligned. Further, in FIG. 751(O), a reverse push guide image and a production button long press guide image (that is, two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 751(P), a message indicating that operating the start lever 210 will move to the main game, a reverse push guide image, and a performance button long press guide image (i.e., two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500. is displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 751(Q) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 has been operated in FIG. 751(P), and the main game has started. Since this game is the first game in the specialized zone, a band indicating that the game is in the specialized zone A is displayed on the image display body 500 (not a band, but a background image, etc.) indicating that the game is in the specialized zone A. ). Furthermore, numbers (reverse presses) indicating the stop order of each reel are displayed above each reel on the image display body 500. FIG. 751(R) shows a state in which 321 bells are stopped according to the stop order, the bells are aligned in the middle of the reel, and nine medals are paid out.

FIG. 752(S) shows the lever-on state in the second game of the specialized zone. The pseudo game has started and the seesaw game effect has started. The second game of the specialized zone is specialized zone B, so 132 bells are established. Instead of the reverse push guidance image, there is a pincer guidance image (with the number 132 and the words "Pinching!" displayed at the upper left of the image display 500) as a batting technique effect that shows a player's advantageous hitting method. This is the same as in FIG. 750(I) except that a combination of ) is displayed.

FIG. 752(T) is the same as FIG. 750(J) except that the seesaw game effect has been successfully performed and a pinch guide image is displayed instead of the reverse push guide image. FIG. 752(U) shows that the seesaw part 552 is tilted to the back in front view and the medal passes through the open door part 555 and moves to the seesaw success tube 558, and the sensor installed in the seesaw success tube 558 is shown. This is the same as FIG. 750(K) except that a medal has been detected and a pincer guidance image is displayed instead of the reverse push guidance image.

FIG. 752(V) shows a state where a message indicating that there is a further chance to add on the number of AT games (additional add-on chance) is displayed on the image display body 500, and instead of the reverse push guidance image, a message is displayed on the image display body 500. This is the same as FIG. 750(L) except that a guide image is displayed.

Fig. 752 (W) shows a state in which an effect is being performed to increase the number of AT games, and Fig. 751 ( Same as M). FIG. 752(X) shows the state after operating the starting lever 210 in FIG. 752(W), except that a pinch guide image is displayed instead of the reverse push guide image. Same as N).

FIG. 753 (Y) shows a state where a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (2 games) is displayed on the image display body 500, instead of the reverse push guidance image. , is the same as FIG. 751(O) except that a pincer guidance image is displayed. Fig. 753 (Z) shows a state in which a message indicating that operating the start lever 210 will move to the main game is displayed, and a pinch guide image is displayed instead of a reverse push guide image. Except for this, it is the same as FIG. 751(P).

FIG. 753 (AA) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 has been operated in FIG. 753 (Z), and the main game has started. Since this game is the second game in the specialized zone, a band indicating that the game is in the specialized zone B is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, numbers indicating the stop order of each reel are displayed above each reel of the image display body 500. FIG. 753 (AB) shows a state in which 132 bells are stopped according to the stopping order, the bells are aligned diagonally downward to the right on the reel, and five medals are paid out.

In addition, if the seesaw game performance in the special zone fails, the main game will proceed if the starting lever 210 is operated or after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without executing the top-up chance. In addition, if you fail in the AT top-up chance in the specialized zone, the screen for the number of top-up games will not be displayed, and if you operate the start lever 210 or after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, you will be returned to the main game. Transition.

In the above example, in the 10 games of the specialized zone, the game of specialized zone A and the game of specialized zone B are played alternately. If you get 132 bells (payout of 5 medals) according to the pincer guidance image in the game, from the 3rd game onwards in the specialized zone, 321 bells (payout of 9 medals) will be established even if it is an even numbered game. The reverse push guide image may also be displayed. In this case, the specialized zone may be displayed as specialized zone A in the third and subsequent even-numbered games, or may be displayed as specialized zone B even though 321 bells are achieved.

However, if all 321 bells are achieved in the third and subsequent even-numbered games in the specialized zone and the reverse push guide image is displayed, the ball output rate will increase and the burden on the hole will increase, so the pinch hit in the second game will be difficult. The guide image is preferably deleted after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds longer than 4.1 seconds, which is the minimum time for one game) has elapsed since it was displayed. Furthermore, even if a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the pincer guide image was displayed, the pincer guide image is deleted before the game in which the pincer guide image was displayed ends (for example, at the second stop). It's okay. As a result, players who did not notice the pinch guide image or mistakenly thought that there was no need to pinch the ball because it had been deleted, would get 132 bells in the third and subsequent even-numbered games in the specialized zone, reducing the ball payout rate. Since it cannot be raised, the burden on the hall is reduced.

However, even so, the payout rate of slot machine 1 is designed on the assumption that 321 bells will be obtained in the third and subsequent even-numbered games in the specialized zone, so although the pincer guidance image will be deleted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. , it is desirable that its display size be larger than the reverse push guide image. In addition, as mentioned above, it is important to follow the guidance of the pincer guidance image in the second game of the specialized zone, so the pincer guidance image may be highlighted (for example, displayed blinking or displayed multiple times). ) is preferable.

Note that after the pincer guidance image is erased, the player may forget how to hit the ball, so as a remedy, if special conditions are met, the pincer guidance image may be redisplayed. . For example, in the first game of the specialized zone, if you follow the guidance of the reverse push guidance image, a lottery will be held to redisplay the pinch guidance image (for example, win at 1/2, lose at 1/2), and the re-display lottery will be held. Winning a display lottery is an example of a special condition. In this way, the special condition is preferably a condition that is satisfied when the operation guidance (reverse push guidance image guidance) of the first game of the specialized zone is followed.

Note that the pincer guidance image that is redisplayed when the aforementioned special conditions are met may be displayed with the aforementioned highlighted display. Also, if you follow the instructions on the pincer guidance image in the second game of the specialized zone and earn 132 bells, you can earn 321 bells in all subsequent games of the specialized zone, so the number of coins acquired has increased, or A blessing performance may be performed to celebrate the transition to a state where a large amount of medals can be obtained (all controlled by nine bells). When a blessing effect is performed, for example, the reels stop after the second game in the specialized zone ends and before the third game (i.e., the game in which 321 bells are achieved and a reverse push guide image is displayed). The device remains in a frozen state, and a blessing performance is performed in the frozen state.

For example, when performing a blessing performance, instead of paying out 5 medals with 132 bells at the end of the second game, special conditions (for example, predetermined settings such as the start lever 210) are set during the blessing performance. The payout of the five medals may be executed by satisfying the condition (based on the operation of the operation unit, etc.). Furthermore, during the blessing performance, 4 of the 5 medals were paid out, and the remaining 1 medal was received by operating the start lever 210 and starting the 3rd game of the specialized zone. It may be paid out at any time (during execution of the third game). By delaying the payout of medals in this way, players may feel strange when the second game is over, and worry that something advantageous will happen to the player. The user can feel a sense of expectation as if he or she has won more medals than the payout number of 15 medals.

In addition, if you do not follow the instructions on the pincer guidance image for the second game of the specialized zone, the bells will not line up on the reels in that game and the number of coins paid out will be 0, and in addition, the number of pieces paid out will be 0, and the number of pieces paid out will be 0 in the third game of the specialized zone. In all games after the game, 132 bells may be achieved and the pincer guidance image may appear. In this way, if the player does not follow the guidance in the second game of the specialized zone, the ball payout rate decreases, so the player can face the second game of the specialized zone with a sense of tension.

In addition, if you do not follow the pincer guide image displayed in the second game of the specialized zone (also called the front pincer guide image) and the pincer guide image in the second game of the specialized zone, you will be given three games. The display mode may be different or the same as that of the pinching guide image displayed after the first pinching guide image (also referred to as the post-pinching guide image).

By making it easier for players to recognize the front-pinching guide image, there is an advantage that players can more easily benefit from the third game onward in the specialized zone (establishment of 321 bells), but there is a disadvantage that the burden on the hole increases. There is. By making it easier for the player to recognize the post-pinching guide image, there is an advantage that it becomes easier to recognize the pressing order for the third game onwards, which was changed due to the player making a mistake in the pressing order, but it also reduces the number of coins to be paid out. The disadvantage is that the guidance image of 132 bells is easy to recognize, which increases the burden on the hall. For example, by using the following display mode, it is possible to determine the ease of recognition of the front pinch guide image and the rear pinch guide image.

For example, a plurality of pinch guide images may be displayed for both the front pinch guide image and the rear pinch guide image. Specifically, for example, the image display body 500 displays the pinch guide image at the upper left of the image display body 500 shown in FIG. It may be displayed in the center of the However, for the front pinching guide image, the large front pinching guide image displayed in the center of the image display body 500 is displayed only once to make it difficult to recognize, and for the rear pinching guide image, the image is A post-pinching guide image displayed on a display body 500 is displayed multiple times to make it easier to recognize.

Also, for example, regarding the post-pinching guide image displayed in the third game of the specialized zone, it is displayed from the middle of the second game of the specialized zone in order to inform the player of the press order that has just been changed. It may be made easier to recognize. Specifically, for example, the post-pinching guide image is displayed from the second stop of the second game in the specialized zone (at the time of the second stop, it is determined whether or not the presses were pressed in the correct order).

Further, the display position of the image display body 500 may be different or the same for the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image. For example, the front pinch guide image may be displayed in the center of the image display 500 to make it easier to recognize, and the rear pinch guide image may be displayed at the upper left of the image display 500 to make it difficult to recognize. . Conversely, it is also possible to display the rear pinch guide image in the center of the image display 500 to make it easier to recognize, and to display the front pinch guide image in the upper left of the image display 500 to make it difficult to recognize. good.

Further, the display time lengths of the front pinch guide image and the rear pinch guide image may be different or may be the same. For example, in order to make it easier to recognize the front pinch guide image, it is displayed for a longer time than the rear pinch guide image. Conversely, in order to make it easier to recognize the rear pinch guide image, it may be displayed for a longer time than the front pinch guide image.

Note that the sound effects, number of times they are output, and volume when the front pinch guide image is displayed are the same as the sound effects, number of times they are output, and their volume when the rear pinch guide image is displayed. may be the same or different. For example, regarding the front pinch guidance image, since the pressing order is as expected for the player, the sound effect corresponding to the front pinch guidance image (for example, "Pinch it!" corresponding to the pressing order) will only be played once. However, since the post-pinching guide image is displayed when the push order has been changed, it is necessary to output the post-pinching guide image in order to inform the player of the changed press order. It is desirable to output a sound effect (for example, "pincer hit!" corresponding to the order of presses) multiple times.

In addition, if you follow the guidance for both the front and rear pinch guide images, the ball payout rate will increase, so from the perspective of the player's benefit, the corresponding sound effects should be output multiple times. Alternatively, from the viewpoint of increasing the burden on the hall, each corresponding sound effect may be output only once. In addition, especially if you follow the front pinch guide image, the ball output rate will increase more, so when the front pinch guide image is displayed, the corresponding sound effect will be played only once, and when the rear pinch guide image is displayed, the corresponding sound effect will be played only once. The sound effect may be output multiple times.

For example, in the first game of the specialized zone, if you are unsuccessful in the lottery to re-display the front-pinch guidance image, which was conducted according to the guidance of the reverse push guidance image, in the second game of the specialized zone, the front-pinch Even if the hitting guide image is displayed, the corresponding sound effect may not be output. This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult for the player, in which the sound effect is not output at the same time as the front pinch guidance image, and the front pinch guidance image is not redisplayed, which is difficult for the player, ie, the burden on the hole can be easily reduced. Even if the above special conditions are not met, it is not necessary to output the corresponding sound effect when the front pinch guide image or the rear pinch guide image is displayed.

Note that for each of the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image, the output of the corresponding sound effect may start before the pinching guide image starts to be displayed, or the output of the corresponding sound effect may start before the pinching guide image starts displaying. The output of the corresponding sound effect may be started at the same time, or the output of the corresponding sound effect may be output after the display of the pincer guide image starts.

By starting the output of the corresponding sound effect at the same time as the display of the pincer guide image starts, the guidance can be appealed visually and auditorily at the same time, so that the player can reliably recognize the pincer guide. In addition, although there are generally individual differences in visual and auditory reaction speeds (there are also individual differences in whether visual or auditory reaction speeds are faster), the response is faster than the display of the pincer guidance image. If you start outputting the corresponding sound effect, it will be easier for people whose auditory reaction speed is slower than visual to recognize both at the same time. For people with high auditory reaction speed, it is easy to recognize both at the same time.

Note that for each of the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image, the display time of the pinching guide image and the output time of the corresponding sound effect may be the same length, or the display time of the pinching guide image may be longer than the display time of the pinching guide image. The output time of the corresponding sound effect may be longer, or the output time of the corresponding sound effect may be shorter than the display time of the pincer guidance image.

Since the display time of the pincer guide image and the output time of the corresponding sound effect are the same length, it becomes easy to recognize that the pincer guide image and its output sound are integrated. Since the output time of the corresponding sound effect is longer than the display time of the pincer guide image, the player can easily notice the sound effect even when the volume in the hall is high because the sound effect is output for a long time. Since the output time of the corresponding sound effect is shorter than the display time of the pincer guide image, the player can concentrate on the effect displayed on the image display body 500.

In addition, regarding the presentation mode and the time and timing of the performance in the seesaw game performance (including the additional chance performance) during AT, and the time and timing at which the performance is executed, regarding matters not mentioned above, the seesaw game performance during the normal game (including the additional chance performance) ) can also be used. Specifically, for example, the display mode of each guide image, the length and timing of the display time, the rotation mode of the reel, the length and timing of the rotation time, in the seesaw game effect (including the top-up chance effect) during AT, Items not explained above, such as the output mode and output time of sound effects and BGM, the light emission mode of the light emitting body, the length and timing of the light emitting time, and the operation mode of the movable body, are related to the seesaw game production during the normal game. It can also be similar to that in (including additional chance performance). However, since this is a seesaw game performance during AT, it is not possible to take a performance mode that depends on the fact that the normal game is in progress.

[13-7. Suddenly see-saw game production]
Above, we explained an example in which the seesaw game effect starts from the next game in which the seesaw game effect is won, but below, when the lever of the game that wins the seesaw game effect is turned on (that is, when the lever of each game is turned on, the success or failure of the seesaw game effect is determined by lottery) The sudden seesaw game effect in which the seesaw game effect starts from the point where the seesaw game effect is started will be explained using FIG. 754.

FIG. 754 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sudden seesaw game effect. FIG. 754(A) shows the state when the lever of the winning game is turned on in the sudden seesaw game effect. The sudden seesaw game performance is realized not by a pseudo game but by a real game. Therefore, each stop button is valid during execution of the seesaw game effect, and it is possible to stop each stop button and receive medals while executing the seesaw game effect.

In addition, if you suddenly win the seesaw game effect in a game where the push order bell is established, an image that guides the push order of the push order bell (in Fig. 754 (A), since 321 bells are established, the reverse push image) Display. As a result, the player can feel a sense of exhilaration from suddenly winning the seesaw game performance and being able to receive payouts based on the push order bell.

In a game where the seesaw game effect is suddenly won, the medal moves to the claw part 556 of the seesaw accessory 550 at the same time as the lever is turned on, the tip part 557 operates, and the medal falls from the claw part 556 to the seesaw part 552.

In addition, in the aforementioned seesaw game performance, four medals were inserted and the fourth medal moved to the claw part 556, but in the sudden seesaw game performance, the dummy medal plays the role of the fourth medal. The dummy medals are stored in a predetermined storage position (not shown) in the slot machine 1, and when the seesaw game suddenly starts, the dummy medals move from the storage position to the claw part 556, and if the seesaw game is successful. In either case, the dummy medal returns to the storage position (not shown).

In the sudden seesaw game effect, the seesaw game is started without explaining the seesaw game effect as described above (FIGS. 743(C) to 744(I)). Although this can provide a surprise to the player, the medals may be moved to the seesaw section 552 after a video explaining the seesaw game performance is shown.

In FIG. 754(A), medals are staying on the seesaw part 552. In addition, in FIG. 754(A), a reverse push guidance image as a batting style effect that shows a batting style that is advantageous for the player, a gauge that shows the remaining medal retention time until AT acquisition, and a support message are displayed as images. It is displayed on the body 500.

FIG. 754(B) shows a state in which the seesaw game performance has been successful. In FIG. 754(B), the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw section 552 are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw section 552 is fixed horizontally. Further, the door portion 555 opens. A reverse push guide image and a production button long press guide image are displayed on the image display body 500. Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

In FIG. 754(C), the presentation button 204 is pressed for a long time, the seesaw part 552 is tilted to the back in the front view, the medal passes through the open door part 555, moves to the seesaw success tube 558, and the seesaw This is a state in which the sensor installed in the success tube 558 has detected a medal. Furthermore, the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw portion 552 have returned to their reference positions. Further, a message indicating that AT has been won, a reverse push guidance image, and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

FIG. 754(D) shows a state in which all the reels of this game in which a seesaw game effect is suddenly performed are stopped. When all reels stop, the game becomes frozen. If you win the chance to increase the number of AT games at a predetermined rate (for example, 1/2) of suddenly succeeding in the seesaw game production, and if you win the chance to increase the number of AT games, the freeze state shown in FIG. 754 (D) Become. Even if the seesaw game performance is suddenly successful, if the chance to increase the number of AT games is not won, the game does not enter a freeze state even after the main game ends, and AT starts from the next game. In other words, if the additional chance is not won, the AT for the initial number of games will be started, and if the additional chance is won, the AT for the initial number of games plus the additional number of games will be the chance to start.

In FIG. 754(D), one medal falls onto the seesaw section 552 again with the movable pieces 552a and 552b of the seesaw section 552 being raised. This frozen state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

FIG. 754(E) shows the state where the freeze state has ended. In FIG. 754(E), a presentation button long press guidance image is displayed. When the production button is held down in the state shown in Fig. 754(E), the production button 204 is held down and the seesaw section 552 is tilted toward the back in the front view, and the medal passes through the open door section 555 and the seesaw is successful. The screen moves to tube 558, and the number of AT add-on games is notified. Furthermore, when it is detected that a medal has passed through the open door portion 555, the performance button long press guide image is deleted.

Note that, as described above, the sudden seesaw game effect is realized by this game, so that all the reels can be stopped by operating each stop button during the seesaw game. In other words, for example, while the small roles are completed and the medals are being paid out, the 5 seconds that are the time for the medals to stay in the seesaw section 552 may elapse and the production button long press guidance image may be displayed. obtain.

If the performance button long press guidance image is displayed while medals are being paid out, it is desirable to temporarily stop the medal payout in order to make the player concentrate on the long press guidance of the performance button 204. For example, it is determined that 9 medals will be paid out by aligning 321 bells, and the timing of the payout of the fifth medal and the timing that 5 seconds have passed since the medals were retained in the seesaw section 552. , are the same, the fifth medal is paid out, and the payout is temporarily stopped without paying out the sixth medal. In other words, the main board 409 controls the payout of medals, and the main board 409 also performs the process of stopping the control of medal payouts, so the main board 409 counts the 5 seconds that are the time for the medals to stay. ing.

In addition, because the payout was temporarily stopped in order to make the player concentrate on the long press guidance image of the performance button, when the long press guidance image of the performance button was erased (the medals passed through the open door 555) It is only necessary to restart the payout at the time of detection). If the starting lever 210 is operated before the restarted payout ends, the next game can be started. In addition, even if you start the next game while a payout is being made, the same process that is performed when operating the start lever when a payout is not being made will be performed, and if a payout is made during the game. However, the payout sound is output. When the next game starts and each reel rotates, it is desirable that the remaining payouts are made while the reels are still rotating and the payouts are completed by the time the next game ends. This is because if the remaining payouts are not completed by the time the next game ends, if a new payout is obtained in the next game, the players may be confused because the payouts for two games will be mixed together.

However, the maximum number of medals that can be paid out in one slot machine game is 15, and it is possible that the next game will end before the restarted payout is completed. The processing of payouts will be carried out across multiple games, but in that case, it is better to end the payouts that are restarted quickly (to avoid causing confusion), so the reels (symbol fluctuations) will not rotate. It is better to execute the processing related to payout intermittently whether the machine is running or stopped.

For example, if this game where the seesaw game performance suddenly starts is finished within 5 seconds (the shortest time for one game is 4.1 seconds), 5 seconds, which is the time for the medals to stay in the seesaw section 552, will have elapsed. You can start the next game before you start. In other words, it is possible to suddenly perform a seesaw game effect over a plurality of games (two games). Note that in this case, there is a possibility that the player suddenly wins the seesaw game in the second game as well. In that case, the seesaw game may be suddenly stocked and the seesaw game may be suddenly started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed.

In addition, when the main game is finished (the reels (symbol fluctuations) are stopped), the 5 seconds for retaining the medals in the seesaw part 552 in the seesaw game effect suddenly ends, and the effect button long press guidance image is displayed. If the start lever 210 is operated while is displayed, the next game will be started. When the next game is started, it is desirable that the performance button long press guide image be displayed in the same position and size as the previous game even at the start of the next game. If the display position and display size of the performance button long press guidance image displayed across games is changed, it may become difficult for the player to recognize the performance button long press guidance image.

[13-8. Another example when the seesaw game performance fails]
FIG. 755 is an explanatory diagram showing another example when the seesaw game performance fails. FIG. 755(A) shows a state in which the seesaw game has started, and is similar to FIG. 744(J). FIG. 755(B) shows a failure in the seesaw game production, that is, the medals cannot be retained on the seesaw part 552 for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds) after the seesaw game starts, and the medals are removed from the end of the seesaw part 552. It is in a state where it has been dropped. The medals that have fallen from the end of the seesaw section 552 pass through the seesaw failure pipe 559 from the opening 559a and move to the return gutter 213. In other words, if the time the medals stay on the seesaw part 552 is less than the predetermined time (5 seconds), even if the medals stay on the seesaw part 552, the performance button long press guide image is not displayed.

FIG. 755(C) shows the state immediately after the seesaw game performance fails. In FIG. 755(C), when the seesaw game performance fails, the game immediately shifts to the main game instead of the failure performance in the pseudo game. When transitioning to the main game, for example, a random delay process is performed on each reel so that each reel rotates normally (sequential rotation). When a seesaw game performance fails and a seesaw game performance failure performance is performed, some players become strongly disappointed, so the occurrence of such disappointment can be suppressed by promptly returning to the main game. Further, in FIG. 755(C), a reverse push guide image is displayed.

In addition, if the seesaw game performance fails and you return to the main game, the game can be executed in the shortest time of 4.1 seconds by combining the pseudo game in which the seesaw game performance was performed and the main game. . For example, if the player has already acquired AT for the number of games that cannot be used up by the time the hall closes, it is better for the player to advance the game quickly than to acquire additional AT games. In order to increase the rate, even in a game where a seesaw game effect is performed, the seesaw game is intentionally made to fail so that it can be executed in 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game.

On the other hand, in the seesaw game presentation, the fact that the medals were able to stay in the seesaw section 552 for 5 seconds means that the game in which the seesaw game presentation was executed could not be executed within 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game. It means that. In this way, when the seesaw game effect is successful and an advantageous result is given to the player, the ball dispensing speed can be suppressed by not allowing the game to proceed in the shortest possible time.

In the seesaw game production, if the medals can stay in the seesaw part 552 for 2 seconds (shorter than 4.1 seconds, which is the minimum time required for playing one game), the seesaw game production is successful (the movable part of the seesaw part 552 552a to display a presentation button long press guidance image). In this case, even in a game where a seesaw game effect is performed, the game can be progressed in the shortest time while winning AT or acquiring the number of AT additional games.

Note that even if the seesaw game performance is based on whether or not the medals can be retained in the seesaw section 552 for a shorter time (for example, 2 seconds) than 4.1 seconds, which is the minimum time required to complete one game. , as shown in FIG. 745 (K'), in the seesaw game performance, the reverse push guidance image, the performance button long press guidance image, the operation guidance for the start lever 210, and (that is, the operation guidance for the three operation parts) are performed at the same time. However, in order to ensure that the player understands all the operations, it is desirable that the length of time that these are displayed simultaneously is longer than a specific time. On the other hand, in order to suppress an increase in the number of balls to be paid by making it difficult for the player to understand each operation, the length of time for which these operations are displayed simultaneously may be shorter than the specific time. 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game, is an example of the length of the specific time.

For the same reason as above, in the seesaw game performance, the length of time when the reverse push guidance image, the performance button long press guidance image, and (the operation guidance for the two operation parts) are displayed at the same time is as follows. It may be longer or shorter than the specific time.

In addition, in the seesaw game performance, after the reverse push guidance image and the performance button long press guidance image are displayed, the operation guidance for the start lever 210 is further displayed, and the operation guidance for the three operation parts is displayed at the same time. However, the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game performance is performed until the operation guidance for the starting lever 210 is displayed may be longer or shorter than the specific length of time.

By making the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game performance is performed until the operation guidance for the start lever 210 is displayed shorter than the length of the specific time, the seesaw game performance can be made to progress quickly. As a result, the ball dispensing speed can be increased. In addition, since the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game performance is performed until the operation guidance for the start lever 210 is displayed is longer than the length of the specific time, the seesaw game performance may take more time. Therefore, the ball dispensing speed can be reduced.
4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for one game, is an example of the length of the specific time.

For the same reason as above, the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game effect is performed until the effect operation guide image is displayed may be longer or shorter than the specific time. Good too.

[13-9. Another example of a chance to add to the seesaw game performance]
FIG. 756 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another example of an additional chance performed in a seesaw game effect. In the example of the chance to increase the number of AT games explained using FIG. (For example, 8/128), the player may be forced to win an additional AT game number regardless of the operating timing of the starting lever 210 for the next chance for an additional chance.

The example in FIG. 756 is an example in which the player is forced to win an additional AT game number when the seesaw game performance is successful. FIG. 756(A) shows a state in which the top-up chance has started, and is similar to FIG. 745(M).

In FIG. 756(B), as in FIG. 745(N), a message prompting the operator to operate the starting lever 210 at the same timing, an image imitating the starting lever 210, and a gauge indicating the timing are displayed on the image display. 500 is displayed. However, in FIG. 756(B), an image imitating the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow), indicating that the player has already won the additional AT game number when the seesaw game performance is successful. It shows.

In addition, when the seesaw game performance is successful and the AT game number addition has already been won, a special display (for example, rainbow) will be displayed on the starting lever 210 during the chance of addition at a predetermined ratio (for example, 60/128). You can also do this.

In addition, although it is possible to execute a special display (for example, a rainbow) if you have already won an additional AT game number, the operation mode of the start lever 210 (timing, whether you hit it from above or below) Since emphasis is placed on the game playability due to (such as , etc.), it is desirable that the appearance rate be less than 1/2.

Note that when a special display (for example, a rainbow) is displayed, the same sound effect as when the special display is not displayed (an image imitating the starting lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed) may be output, or the same sound effect as the normal mode may be output. A sound effect different from the sound effect when the image imitating the starting lever 210 of the embodiment is displayed may be output. The same goes for the light emitting body; when a special display (for example, a rainbow) is displayed, the light emitting mode of the light emitter is the same as when no special display is displayed (an image imitating the starting lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed). Alternatively, the light emitting mode may be different from the light emitting mode when the image imitating the starting lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed. However, when outputting different sound effects, it is preferable to display different light emission modes.

If you do not win the additional AT game number when the seesaw game performance is successful, and whether or not you win the additional AT game number is determined by the operation timing of the starting lever 210, the starting lever 210 during the additional chance will be specially displayed ( For example, it is not displayed in a rainbow color, but in a normal manner.

As a result, if the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow) during the chance to add on the number of AT games, the player can not only feel elated by winning the number of AT games to add on, but also Since it is understood that there is no need to operate the starting lever 210 at the right timing, it is also possible to suppress the feeling of fatigue caused by aiming at the timing during the top-up opportunity. Further, in FIG. 756(B), a reverse push guide image and a long press effect button guide image are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 756(C) shows a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in FIG. 756(B), and is the same state as FIG. 745(O). FIG. 756(D) shows a state where the number of AT additional games is announced, and is the same state as FIG. 745(P).

In FIG. 756(D), when the starting lever 210 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the game shifts to the main game as shown in FIG. 756(E). In this way, if the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) in FIG. Since it was possible to give a feeling of euphoria, it is desirable that the opportunity to increase the score does not loop.

As a result, after the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (e.g. rainbow), operation guidance for the two operation parts, the reverse push guidance image and the production button long press guidance image, may be displayed. Further, the operation guidance for the operation part of the starting lever 210 is displayed, but the operation guidance for the operation part 3 is not displayed. Therefore, after announcing the number of additional games in FIG. 756(D), the game shifts to the main game as shown in FIG. 756(E).

Further, for example, if an upper limit (for example, 5 times) is set for the number of loops of the top-up chance, and if the top-up chance that reaches the upper limit (i.e., the last) is won, the image of the start lever 210 may be forcibly changed. It may also be displayed with a special display (for example, a rainbow). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the feeling of disappointment that the upper limit of the number of loops has been reached and no more chances for additional bids will be looped.

By displaying the image of the start lever 210 in a special display (for example, a rainbow) both in the first loop and in the top-up chance when the loop reaches its upper limit, players are made to feel hopeful and discouraged. Therefore, it is preferable not to display the above-mentioned special movie or practice effect at the end of the pseudo game after the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow).

Note that when the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow), the additional chance may be looped further. As a result, for example, after the player is forced to win the AT game number addition at the chance to add on the number of AT games one time before the upper limit of the number of loops and displays the image of the starting lever 210 in a special display (for example, a rainbow), the player wins the loop lottery. , for example, when the upper limit of the number of loops is increased, the AT game number increase is forcibly won, and the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow). Since the image of the starting lever 210 can be displayed twice (eg, consecutively) in a special display (eg, rainbow), the player's sense of anticipation can be strongly improved.

Also, for example, even though the image of the starting lever 210 was not displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow) during the chance to add on the number of AT games one time before the upper limit of the number of loops, by hitting the starting lever 210 at the right time, you could win the extra number of AT games. Then, if you win the loop lottery and reach the chance to add the upper limit to the number of loops, you will be forced to win the additional AT game number as a bonus for reaching the upper limit of the number of loops, and the start lever 210 will be activated. Images may be displayed in rainbow colors.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, an example will be described in which, when a player is forced to win a lottery for an additional number of AT games, the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow) regardless of the timing of operation of the starting lever 210. However, even in a slot machine 1 in which such a lottery for forcibly winning a lottery is not performed, the image of the starting lever 210 may be displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow).

For example, at a predetermined rate when an AT additional chance is made, the ratio of the size of the blacked out part and/or the shaded part of the gauge indicating the operation timing of the start lever 210 to the size of the gauge is increased compared to normal; By lowering the movement speed of the blacked out part of the gauge than usual, the difficulty level of the operation timing of the start lever 210 is lowered (However, although the difficulty level of the operation timing is lowered, it is not always possible to succeed. ), the expectation level of winning the number of AT add-on games may be increased.

In this way, when the difficulty level of the operation timing of the start lever 210 is lowered, the image of the start lever 210 is specially displayed in order to show the player that the expectation of winning the AT add-on game number is higher than the normal operation timing. (for example, a rainbow). In addition, when the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, a rainbow) and the starting lever 210 is operated, the propriety of adding the number of AT games may be notified as soon as the starting lever 210 is operated. The propriety of increasing the number of AT games may be notified after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start lever 210 was operated.

In addition, the special display (for example, rainbow) on the starting lever 210 that may be displayed when the AT game number additional lottery has already been won is performed and the effect displayed when the starting lever 210 is operated, and the AT game number additional lottery. Although the player has not won the lottery, if the operation of the starting lever 210 is an operation that will win the AT game number addition lottery (by operating it at the right time, hitting it from above, etc.), the same effect will be displayed. However, if they are different, the special display (for example, rainbow) on the start lever 210 is more flashy (for example, the display size is large, the display has many colors). It is preferable that the output sound of the BGM or sound effect used is large, or the amount of light emitted by the light emitting body is large.

[13-10. Another example of seesaw game production during AT]
FIGS. 757 and 758 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the seesaw game effect executed during AT. In FIG. 749 and the like, an example has been explained in which the seesaw game effect is won according to a predetermined probability during each game during AT, but in addition to the lottery with the predetermined probability, in FIGS. For example, the seesaw game performance starts when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from when all the reels of the game immediately before the AT start game are stopped, or when the MAX input button 206 is pressed or the lever is turned on in the AT start game.

FIG. 757(A) shows the state when the lever is on in the AT start game. 321 bell is established, and a display guiding the reverse push is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, a timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the image display body 500, indicating that the seesaw game effect will start when 100 seconds have elapsed.

Further, a display indicating the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the image display body 500. The shortest time for one game is 4.1 seconds, and the seesaw game effect is performed 100 seconds after the start of AT, so even if all games are played for the shortest time, the seesaw game effect will start in the 25th game from the start of AT. starts. The initial number of AT games is set to 30 games, which is larger than the 25 games, in order to make the seesaw game performance at least once at least once and entertain the player when the AT starts.

In addition, in the seesaw game effect that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed from the start of AT, it is desirable not to give results that give the player an advantage, such as an increase in the number of AT games, but instead to provide special images that do not appear in other effects. It is desirable to display messages, etc. For example, if a seesaw game effect is executed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of AT, and a seesaw game effect is performed when a predetermined time elapses from the end of the seesaw game effect, then the seesaw game effect is successfully executed. In this case, if an advantageous result is awarded, it would be more advantageous for the player to advance the game slowly, and this may cause a delay in the game progress and an increase in the burden on the hole, so it is recommended not to award an advantageous result. desirable.

In addition, for example, if you have won a general AT additional game number lottery (an additional lottery without the seesaw game effect described above) before 100 seconds have elapsed, then the general AT additional game number lottery (If you win the above-mentioned add-on lottery where the seesaw game is not played), the result will not be announced (or a part of it will be announced (for example, if you win the 20-game add-on, only 10 games will be announced)), and the result will be announced at that time. The notification may also be made at the same time as a seesaw game that is played over time. By doing so, the player can be made to recognize that an advantageous result has been given even though no advantageous result has been given.

Note that the timer does not directly indicate the number of seconds remaining until the seesaw game starts, but for example, a gauge with 10 levels is displayed, and the gauge accumulates by 1 level every predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds). The seesaw game performance may be started when the gauge is filled up to the stage. If the timer directly indicates the number of seconds remaining until the seesaw game starts, the player may become distracted by the timer, play the game in haste, and may end up making mistakes in the order of presses, etc. be.

Note that a predetermined lottery (for example, winning 32/128, non-winning 96/128) may be performed when AT is won, and if the lottery is won, the gauge will be set to a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value (for example, 5 levels). You may start a seesaw game effect when the number of points has accumulated up to 1). As a result, the player can expect a seesaw game effect even when the gauge is in the middle of filling up to the 10th level.

FIG. 757(B) shows a state in which all the reels in the game of FIG. 757(A) are pressed and stopped in the order in which they are pressed, and the bells are aligned in the middle row. The display of the number of remaining AT games has decreased by one game, and the timer indicating the remaining time until the seesaw game performance has advanced by 5 seconds.

FIG. 757(C) shows a state in which the timer indicating the remaining time until the seesaw game performance has reached 0 seconds. When the timer reaches 0 seconds, a message indicating that the seesaw game will start is displayed on the image display body 500, such as "Start the seesaw game!", indicating that a seesaw game effect will be executed in the next game.

In FIG. 757(C), when all the reels are stopped, the timer indicating the remaining time until the seesaw game effect starts is 0 seconds, but while the game is being executed (while the wait timer is operating and the reel If the remaining time reaches 0 seconds (during rotation), a message indicating that the current performance will be stopped and the seesaw game will start will be displayed on the image display body 500, and the seesaw game performance will be executed in the next game. Ru.

757(D), (E), (F), and FIG. 758(G), (H) are the lever-on states of the game in which the seesaw game effect is executed, and the contents of these effects are as shown in FIG. 744, respectively. This is the same as (C), (D), (E), (F), and FIG. 745(G).

FIG. 758(I) shows a state in which the medals have fallen onto the seesaw section 552 and the seesaw game has started. Since this seesaw game effect is executed in the main game, the reels are rotating in order. A reverse push guide image, a gauge indicating the remaining time of the seesaw game, and a support message are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 758(J) shows a state in which the seesaw game performance has been successful. The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b of the seesaw part 552 rise, and the inclination of the seesaw part 552 is fixed horizontally. Additionally, a special image consisting of an image of a standing character and the message "GOOD" is displayed. Further, a reverse push guidance image and a performance button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 758(K) shows a state in which the effect button 204 is pressed for a long time in the state of FIG. 758(J), the door portion 555 is opened, and the medal has passed through the seesaw success tube 558. At this time, operation guidance for the start lever 210 similar to that shown in FIG. 745(N) is further displayed, and a reverse push guidance image, a production button long press guidance image, and operation guidance for the three operation parts are displayed simultaneously. .

FIG. 758(L) shows a state in which the start lever 210 is operated at the right time in the state of FIG. 758(K) (i.e., the blacked out part in the gauge displayed on the image display 500 in FIG. 758(L)). This is a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated at a timing when at least a portion of the and the hatched portion overlap. A special message congratulating you on your timely operation, a reverse push guide image, and a performance button long press guide image are displayed on the image display body 500. Note that the medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

In addition, in the above example, if all the games are played in the shortest time (4.1 seconds), the seesaw game effect is performed only once after the predetermined time has elapsed, but for example, if the initial number of games is 60 or more, By doing so, the seesaw game may be played multiple times (twice). Note that, for example, if a seesaw game effect triggered by the passage of time can be executed twice in one AT, when the operation guidance of the start lever 210 in FIG. 758 (K) for the first seesaw game effect is followed. A message may be displayed indicating that the AT is still continuing. If the seesaw game effect is forcibly executed a plurality of times each time the player enters AT, the player can become accustomed to operating the seesaw game.

Also, for example, if the initial number of games is selected from two types of 30 games and 60 games in a predetermined distribution (30 games 64/128, 60 games 64/128), when 30 games are selected, The seesaw game performance based on the lapse of a predetermined time may be executed at least once, and when 60 games are selected, the seesaw game performance based on the lapse of a predetermined time may be executed at least twice.

In this case, for example, if 60 games are selected as the initial number of games, but 30 games are announced, and the start lever 210 is operated at the right time in FIG. A performance may be performed to notify that the winner has been selected. It should be noted that the player will eventually understand that he has actually won 60 games after completing the AT, so even if the starting lever 210 is not operated in FIG. The notification performance may be performed with.

Further, for example, if the seesaw game effect is successfully performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed and the start lever 210 is operated at the right time, the effect state of the normal game after the end of AT may be changed. Specifically, for example, the production stage may be changed or the main character displayed may be changed. Further, at this time, a list of selectable performance states is displayed, and the player may select a performance state to change the performance state of the base game after the AT ends.

Further, for example, if an AT is won in the normal game and an AT is further won during a precursor game before the AT starts, the AT won during the precursor game is stocked. After the first winning AT ends, the stocked AT starts after playing a precursor game within a predetermined number of games (for example, a normal game within 5 games). In this case, if you succeed in the seesaw game performance based on the passage of time during the AT game in which you won first and operate the starting lever 210 at the right time in FIG. For example, a message such as "stock x 1" may be sent.

Further, depending on the operation status of the starting lever 210 by the player (for example, the larger the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 (the longer the amount of time the operating range from the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined value)), the seesaw game effect is performed. The remaining time may be subtractable. For example, each time you play 5 consecutive games with full weight (that is, 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time for each game), the remaining time may be subtracted by 30 seconds, or depending on a predetermined small role (for example, the push order bell). Every time you receive a payout five times, the remaining time is subtracted by 30 seconds. Thereby, by making the game progress quickly, it is possible to quickly reach the seesaw game effect.

The above is one embodiment of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than slot machines, such as pachinko machines and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Although the present invention has been described above in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents can be made within the spirit of the appended claims. It includes the configuration.

1 Slot machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening/closing member 100 Outer body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection portion 107 Installation Piece 108 Mounting piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharging device 110a Device main body 110b Hopper 110c Discharge port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Payout sensor 111 Auxiliary storage box for game medals 111a Medal full sensor 112 Power supply device 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Ventilation hole 112h Leg part 112i Ventilation space 112j Step part 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection 112m-1 Projection piece 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Board 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Support tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay Terminal board 132 Through hole 133 Ventilation port 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Medal slot 205 Single coin input button 206 MAX input button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage Release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Lock device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflective member 218 Fixed member 219 Groove 300 Symbol variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 Device case 303 Drive means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate part 305 Top plate part 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Retaining part 316 Handles 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcement frame 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step 413 Tapered part 414 Wheel 415 Flange 416 Hook 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge fitting 420a Fixing member 420b Times Moving member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle opening 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receiving tube 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Engagement Stop hole 443 Skylight section 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main board 500 Image display body 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Substrate 505 Transparent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Transparent cover 508 Receiving portion 509 Engagement portion 510 Sub board 512 Speaker 550 Seesaw accessories 551 Seesaw box 552 Seesaw portion 552a Movable piece 552b Movable piece 553 Shaft portion 554 Stepping motor 555 Door section 556 Claw section 557 Tip section 558 Seesaw success tube 559 Seesaw failure tube 560 Conveyor 561 Conveyor 600 Upper crosspiece 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a , 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Storage number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Downward right line 623b Upward right line 700 Connector 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Preventing piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hanging wall 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Knob piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM
1116 Input/output interface 1130 Input/output interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A lottery means for determining whether it is a hit or not;
A symbol variation means that selects one of the plurality of variation times and performs the symbol variation for the selected variation time;
A performance display means capable of displaying any one of the plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
The above performance includes
a confirmed performance that can appear only if the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit;
There is at least an expectation performance that makes people expect that the result of the lottery is a win, and that can appear even if the result of the lottery is a win or a loss,
A gaming machine that displays a decorative pattern indicating the result of the lottery, and a normal background that is displayed behind the decorative pattern and also displayed when the decorative pattern is determined in a losing variation, on the effect display means,
When the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, after a situation in which the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect changes to a situation in which the normal background is displayed. a first situation that makes it possible to execute the expected performance;
When the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, after a situation in which the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect changes to a situation in which the normal background is displayed. A second situation in which the expected performance is not executed at all is made possible to occur,
Even if the second situation occurs while the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, the selected variation time will not be shortened ,
When the symbol variation of the selected variation time is being performed, the second situation is enabled to occur after the first situation occurs;
Unlike the confirmed performance and the expected performance, it is possible to display a situational suggestion display indicating the current gaming state,
In the second situation, the situation suggestion display, which is not displayed when the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect, is displayed in a situation where the new expected effect is not executed at all. possible,
displaying the situation suggestion display after displaying the pattern combination of the decorative patterns indicating the result of the lottery in the second situation;
enabling a presentation mode of a game following the game in which the second situation has occurred to be a presentation mode different from a presentation mode of the game in which the second situation has occurred;
The second situation is designed to only occur in certain reach effects,
There is an operating means that can be operated by the player, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means, the normal background is not displayed on the effect display means due to the expected effect. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to display the situation suggestion display that is displayed in a situation where the expected performance is not displayed and the new expected performance is not executed at all.

Images